Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
Manual
(Issuance Notice 12/12/2016)
Preface
The National Institutes of Health (NIH) Design Requirements Manual (DRM) establishes policy, design requirements,
standards and technical criteria for use in planning, programming, and designing NIH owned, leased, operated,
and funded buildings and facilities. The DRM is the only detailed design requirements and guidance manual of
its kind. The information compiled within the 2016 DRM is the result of technical studies that have set numerous
national and international standards, lessons learned and ever-advancing architectural and engineering technologies
used in the design and construction of NIH facilities. The Division of Technical Resources (DTR) is responsible for
maintaining and updating the DRM.
In order to ensure the most current, relevant, and comprehensive manual, DTR continuously researches and tests
state-of-the-art and innovative technologies. DTR has gathered data from these studies as well as from numerous
years of specialized experience and an accumulation of lessons-learned. This has led to data-driven decision making
and best practices for the design and construction of NIHs facilities. The results of these studies are incorporated
into the 2016 DRM and new information will be added as it becomes available.
The 2016 DRM edition constitutes a major restructuring and reorganization of the 2008 edition, with the addition
of a vast amount of new and updated information for architects and engineers (A/E) and stakeholders to use in the
facility design process.
In order to provide guidance and standards which represent the best practices in facility design, DTR assembled over
200 professionals from industry, academia, and government including designers, architects, engineers, researchers,
veterinarians, maintenance staff, biosafety specialists, and others; all with expertise in a variety of disciplines and
unique insights into the complicated design, construction, and functional issues involved in building NIH facilities.
Numerous drafts of the DRM have been compiled during the revision process and over 3,000 comments evaluated.
Through this scrupulous process, the DTR has compiled cutting edge design guidance and standards which will help
support the NIH mission for years to come.
The NIH Design Requirements Manual aligns the NIH facilities program with the Office of Research Facilities
(ORF) mission of: Supporting NIH priorities by providing safe, secure, sound, healthy, and attractive facilities.
Additionally, this manual also aligns the ORF with a national imperative to be good stewards of Americas real
property assets. We extend our sincerest thanks to all of the dedicated individuals who helped to make the NIH
Design Requirements Manual a reality.
The effort to develop the NIH Design Requirements Kumars Haidari, P.E.
Manual (DRM) could not have been accomplished with- Michael Shaw
out the dedication, contribution, and assistance of rep- Neetha Varghese
resentatives from the NIH, other Federal Government Patrick Dulany
agencies, academia and the private sector. The groups Rajiv Chainani, P.E.
responsible for revising the DRM are defined below: Scott Taylor, P.E.
Steven Breslin, AIA, P.E.
The NIH DRM Executive Committee was tasked with Sy Sadighi, P.E.
making final decisions regarding overall content, arbi- Thomas Ligis
trating difficult decisions, and approving the final docu-
ment for publication. Technical Editors:
Sheri Bernstein
Subcommittees were composed of architects, engineers,
Kate McKay
facility managers, operations and maintenance staff,
scientists, and veterinarians; bringing the broadest per-
Graphic Designer:
spective to developing the DRM. The subcommittees
Robyn Bernstein
were responsible for reviewing the initial DRM drafts
and providing their well-rounded insights about best
Subcommittee Members:
design practices for their disciplines. The subcommit-
Alexander P. Clinton, AIA
tees were responsible for providing initial direction to
Babak (Bob) Farahpour, P.E.
the DRM revisions. Additionally, subcommittee mem-
Brandon Tolbert
bers reviewed all subsequent DRM drafts.
Christina Willis, AIA
Reviewers of the DRM were composed of architects, Daniel Watch, FAIA
engineers, facility managers, operations and mainte- Dave Carrol, P.E.
nance staff, scientists, and veterinarians. Reviewers David E. Kurten, Jr, P.E.
later received, fully compiled versions of the DRM David Sawyer
and provided valuable comments to further refine and David Tash, P.E.
improve the DRM contents. David Williams
Diego Osorio Sanchez
Doreen Bartlett
NIH DRM Executive Committee:
Dwayne Lasky
Farhad Memarzadeh, Ph.D., P.E.
Ed Baker
Deborah Wilson, Ph.D.
Eric D. Knoll, Ph.D.
Technical Advisors:
Esmail Torkashvan, P.E.
Alamelu Ramesh, P.E.
Frank Piatkowski, AIA
Scott Taylor, P.E.
Gabor Konkoly-Thege
Contributing Division of Technical Gary Zackowitz, R.A.
Resources Staff: Gerald G. Williams, P.E.
Abdul Bhuiyan Ph.D., P.E. Gerald Knight
Alamelu Ramesh, P.E. Gregar Odegaarden
Angela Watson Gregory R. Johnson, P.E.
Carlos R. Moreno H. Michael Smith, AIA
Cole Murphy, P.E. Ivan Locke, P.E.
Don Guan, Ph.D., P.E. Jack McDonald
Ibrahim Coulibaly, P.E. James OMalley, Ph.D.
John Egan, AIA Jamie Natour
John Pavlides, P.E. Jason Cohen, P.E.
Jonathan Maddox Jean (Fred) P. Khoshbin, R.A.
Kathy Manigo-Lewis Jeffrey R. Zynda
Table of Contents
Chapter 1: Administration Section 1.7 Value Engineering...................................46
Section 1.1 General Administration........................... 21 1.7.0 Introduction................................................. 47
1.1.0 Introduction.................................................22 1.7.1 Design Contract Value
Engineering Procedures......................................... 47
1.1.1 DRM General Information..........................22
1.7.2 Construction Contract VE Procedures.........48
1.1.2 Codes, Standards & Guiding Principles.......23
1.7.3 VE Regulations............................................48
Section 1.2 Referenced Codes,
1.7.4 VE in Research Facilities..............................48
Standards, and Organizations...................................26
1.2.0 Introduction................................................. 27 Section 1.8 Sustainable Design.................................. 49
1.15.4 Supplemental Technical Section 2.4 Animal Research Facility Design........... 139
Requirements for Animal Research Facilities........96
2.4.0 Introduction............................................... 140
1.15.5 Supplemental Technical
2.4.1 Design Requirements................................. 140
Requirements for High Containment Facilities.....97
2.4.2 Modular Design......................................... 140
1.15.6 Risk Assessment, Systems
2.4.3 Materials and Finishes............................... 141
Failure & Disaster Mitigation...............................99
2.4.4 ARF Security............................................. 142
1.15.7 Failure Corrections
and Root Cause Analysis.................................... 101 2.4.5 Design Considerations............................... 142
1.15.8 Specification of 2.4.6 Utility Systems........................................... 148
Contractor Qualifications................................... 101
Section 2.5 Biocontainment Facility Predesign........ 149 3.3.5 Additional Water Systems Requirements.....190
2.5.0 Introduction............................................... 150 3.3.6 Additional Gravity
2.5.1 The Master Plan........................................ 151 Sewer Requirements............................................190
Section 5.4 BSL-3 and ABSL-3 Biocontainment...... 282 6.1.20 Heating Systems.......................................306
5.4.0 Introduction............................................... 283 6.1.21 Cooling Systems.......................................307
5.4.1 Codes and Standards.................................. 283 6.1.22 Exhaust Air Systems................................307
5.4.2 Standards of Quality.................................. 283 6.1.23 Energy Conservation,
5.4.3 Prevention of Progressive Collapse............. 283 Efficiency, and Recovery..................................... 310
8.3.9 Hot Water Circulation 8.4.17 Grease Waste and Fats, Oil, and
and Temperature Maintenance........................... 548 Grease Control: Additional Requirements.......... 586
8.3.10 Hot Water System Temperature 8.4.18 Non-Emulsified Oil-Based Waste............. 588
Control and Over-Temperature Protection.......... 551 8.4.19 Condensate Drainage............................... 589
8.3.11 Additional Requirements 8.4.20 Storm, Clear Water Waste and
for Animal Research Facilities............................ 552 Specialty Systems: Additional Requirements....... 590
8.3.12 Corrosion Protection, 8.4.21 Sump, Sewage, and Lab Waste Pumps..... 594
Water Treatment, and Control of Scale............... 553
8.4.22 Quality Assurance,
8.3.13 Available Water Supply/ Startup, and Verification..................................... 595
Water Supply Analysis......................................... 554
Section 8.5 Natural Gas/Fuel Gas Systems.............. 597
8.3.14 Research Equipment Water...................... 555
8.3.15 Equipment and Material.......................... 555 8.5.0 Introduction............................................... 598
8.4.7 Sanitary, Lab, ARF, and Grease Waste 8.6.5 Vacuum Systems Serving
and Vent Systems: General Requirements........... 567 BSL-3 Laboratories.............................................608
8.4.8 Potential High Temperature Waste............ 569 8.6.6 Compressed Gases Serving BSL-3.............. 611
8.4.9 Gravity Drainage, Pumps 8.6.7 Veterinary Medical Gas Systems................ 612
and Ejectors, and Backflow of Waste.................. 570 8.6.8 Critical Compressed Air/
8.4.10 Indirect Waste, Direct Waste, Control Air Serving BSL-3.................................. 614
and Equipment Connections............................... 571 8.6.9 Waste and Vent Systems Serving BSL-3..... 614
8.4.11 Trap Seal Maintenance............................. 576 8.6.10 Liquid Nitrogen and Cryogenic
8.4.12 Deep Seal Traps........................................577 Fluids Serving BSL-3 Laboratories...................... 619
8.4.14 Animal Research Facility 8.6.12 Special Materials and Equipment............. 621
Waste: Additional Requirements......................... 578 8.6.13 BSL-3 Plumbing
8.4.15 pH Monitoring and Requirements for Special Applications................622
Neutralization: General Requirements................ 580 8.6.14 Containment Autoclave
8.4.16 Alternatives to Automatic Chamber Pressure Relief.....................................623
Central Building pH Treatment.......................... 585 8.6.15 Special Testing and
Inspection Requirements..................................... 624
Section 9.4 Life Safety Features............................... 641 10.4.2 Manhole and Handhole Installation........678
10.6.2 Uninterruptible Power Source.................. 691 Section 11.4 Site Utility........................................... 724
10.6.3 Transient Voltage Surge Suppression........ 692 11.4.0 Introduction.............................................725
10.6.4 Grounding................................................ 692 11.4.1 Duct Bank Construction..........................725
10.6.5 Lightning Protection................................ 694 11.4.2 Underground
Concrete Utility Structures.................................725
Section 10.7 Lighting............................................... 695
11.4.3 Outside Plant (OSP)
10.7.0 Introduction............................................. 696
Pull Boxes/Handholes.........................................726
10.7.1 Lighting Design Guidelines....................... 696
Section 11.5 AudioVisual Systems............................ 727
10.7.2 Interior Lighting....................................... 696
10.7.3 Exterior Lighting...................................... 698 11.5.0 Introduction.............................................728
Section 10.8 BSL-3 and ABSL-3 Biocontainment.... 707 11.6.0 Introduction............................................. 731
11.1.1 Telecommunications System Growth........ 714 Certificate of Radio Coverage Compliance......... 740
12.1.7 Flow Control/Balancing/Monitoring....... 767 Section 12.5 Veterinary Medical Gas Systems
12.1.8 Special Provisions for for Animal Research Facilities................................. 825
Microbial Control and Sanitization.................... 768 12.5.0 Introduction.............................................826
12.1.9 Quality Control 12.5.1 Systems Configuration Overview.............826
and Quality Assurance........................................771 12.5.2 General Design Requirements..................826
12.1.10 System Completion, 12.5.3 VMGS Equipment...................................830
Startup and Verification......................................772
12.5.4 Quality Assurance
Section 12.2 Animal Drinking Water Systems ........ 773 and Systems Verification..................................... 831
12.2.0 Introduction............................................ 774 12.5.5 VMGS System-Specific
12.2.1 General Requirements............................. 774 Additional Requirements.................................... 832
Section 12.4 Laboratory Vacuum Systems............... 817 A/E Submission Requirements Matrix................ 898
Contents:
1.1.0 Introduction
1.1.1.1 Organization
1.1.1.3 Amendments
1.1.1.4 Distribution
1.1.1.5 Application
The organization, maintenance, distribution, and appli- B. Compliance by Other Disciplines: Regardless of
cability of the NIH DRM is described in this section. where specified or how constructed or supplied, the
This Manual supersedes all previous editions of the requirements of each section of the DRM apply to
NIH Design Policy and Guidelines and editions of the all devices and equipment connected to building sys-
NIH DRM. tems. All devices and equipment shall be coordinated
between specifiers to ensure conformance with the
This Manual is effective December 12, 2016.
entire DRM, including specialty equipment and work
The DRM was developed and is maintained by of specialty vendors.
the Office of Research Facilities Development and
Compliance shall include all pertinent information on
Operations (ORFDO), henceforth called ORF, in part-
project drawings and specifications, and shall not ref-
nership with architects and engineers involved with the
erence the DRM for construction contractors to deter-
design of NIH facilities. ORFs Division of Technical
mine the work required.
Resources (DTR), Standards and Policy Branch (SPB)
facilitates this effort and can be contacted through the
Project Officer (PO) to clarify questions regarding the Rationale: It is often found that specialty
contents of the DRM. equipment is not properly coordinated between
disciplines or is not specified in a manner
compliant with all requirements of the DRM.
Examples include but are not limited to biological
safety cabinets (BSC), fume hoods, washers,
1.1.1 DRM General sterilizers, faucets, turrets, eyewashes,
Information aftercoolers, disposers, gas supply systems,
polishers, ventilated tables, or equipment
of specialty vendors. Additionally, specialty
1.1.1.1 Organization
equipment may impact infrastructure
A. Sections: The DRM consists of major subject cat- requirements and work of other disciplines.
egories broken into subsections detailing design require-
ments for NIH facilities.
B. Safety, Health, and Security: HHS buildings shall and the NIH DRM, the most stringent, technically
provide an environment that is safe and healthy for appropriate, and conservative criteria shall apply.
occupants. To the greatest extent possible HHS build- Where it is unclear which set of requirements is appli-
ings should provide occupants maximum protection cable, consult the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)
during emergencies or disasters. for direction. Where it is unclear which criteria are to
be applied, application for clarification may be made
C. Economy: HHS facilities shall be planned and deliv- through the PO.
ered based on life cycle-cost principles and sustained
mission integrity. HHS will accurately inventory and C. Lesser Requirement: In cases where the DRM specif-
describe all of its assets so full and appropriate utiliza- ically allows a practice lesser than that required under
tion of space can be promoted. Life cycle cost-benefit a national model code, an application for clarification
analysis shall be employed to explore alternatives for should be made to the PO and the DTR.
satisfying new requirements.
D. Conservation and Resources: Energy and water con- Rationale: In some cases, a provision that appears
servation shall be given prime consideration in the plan- less restrictive than a common practice may be
ning and delivery of HHS facilities. Products, materials, required for reasons specific to the application
and systems shall be selected with a view toward maxi- in a laboratory, biocontainment, or research
mizing the use of renewable resources. facility. These provisions may actually be a safer
or more reliable option for such applications or
E. Preservation of Historic and Cultural Resources: more suitable to the means for which such systems
Preservation shall be given full consideration in the are operated. In most cases, there will not be a
planning and the delivery of HHS-controlled real-prop- conflict between a code requirement and the
erty assets and federally assisted undertakings. DRM. If a particular question or concern exists,
F. Sustainable Design: The planning, acquiring, siting, an interpretation or guidance may be requested.
designing, building, operating, and maintaining of
HHS facilities shall take into consideration sustainable D. Zoning Laws: Due consideration shall be given to
design principles including integrated design, energy all state and local zoning laws as if the project were not
performance, water conservation, and indoor environ- being constructed or altered by a federal agency.
mental quality and materials.
E. Permits/Inspections: The U.S. Government and its
contractors shall not be liable for the cost of issuing
1.1.2.3 Compliance with Codes local building permits or performing inspections for
and Standards NIH construction.
A. A/E Compliance: Each NIH building shall be con- F. Geographic/Local Issues: The NIH main campus
structed or altered in compliance with the codes and and headquarters is located in Bethesda, Maryland.
standards referenced herein. The A/E shall comply with The NIH has six additional field stations: Poolesville,
the design and safety guidelines and references listed in Maryland; Baltimore, Maryland; Hamilton, Rocky
DRM Section 1.2 as well as other requirements received Mountain Laboratories (RML), Montana; Research
or directed from the PO or as specified by the program Triangle Park (RTP), North Carolina; Frederick,
requirements. The A/E shall utilize the latest editions Maryland; and New Iberia, Louisiana.
of referenced codes, standards, and design and safety
guidelines available at the time of the projects Notice to Geographic requirements, local government mandates,
Proceed. Where a code requirement materially changes and other unique geographic design criteria are not
after Notice to Proceed request interpretation from the specifically mentioned in the DRM because the design
PO if any changes are required. shall comply with state and local regulations in addi-
tion to DRM requirements. There may be specific issues
B. Conflict between Code and DRM: In cases of con- in remote regions that are in conflict with the policies
flict between the adopted or selected code or standard implemented by the NIH in Bethesda, Maryland. If this
1. County permitting
7. Historic core
The most current edition of each Code and Standard shall 16. Requirements of the Office of Laboratory
be applicable as referenced throughout this document. Animal Welfare (OLAW)
1.2.1 Required Codes 18. Guide for the Care and Use of Laboratory
Animals (ILAR)
and Standards
19. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
1. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
(CDC) & NIH Biosafety in Microbiological
2. International Building Code (IBC) and Biomedical Laboratories (BMBL)
8. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1: 25. Guide for the Care and Use of Agricultural
Fire Code, and its mandatory referenced codes Animals in Research and Teaching
and standards
26. Federal Management Regulation (FMR)
9. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code, and its manda-
27. ANSI Z358.1, Z9.5, Z9.11, Z9.14
tory referenced codes and standards
1. Air Movement and Control Association 23. Department of Health & Human Services
(AMCA) (HHS)
6. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 29. General Services Administration (GSA)
7. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) 30. International Code Council (ICC)
8. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and 31. The Institute of Electrical and Electronics
Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Engineers Inc. (IEEE)
10. American Society of Plumbing Engineers 33. International Association of Plumbing and
(ASPE) Mechanical Officials (IAPMO)
11. American Society of Sanitary Engineering 34. International Electrical Testing Association
(ASSE) (IETA)
12. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) 35. International Laboratory Accreditation
Cooperation (ILAC)
13. American Welding Society (AWS)
36. Institute for Laboratory Animal Research (ILAR)
14. American Water Works Association (AWWA)
37. International Organization for Standardization
15. Association for Assessment and Accreditation (ISO)
of Laboratory Animal Care (AALAC)
38. International Society of Pharmaceutical
16. Building Owners and Managers Association Engineering (ISPE)
(BOMA)
39. Lightning Protection Institute (LPI)
17. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention
(CDC) 40. Maryland Department of Environment (MDE)
18. Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association 41. National Environmental Balancing Bureau
(CBM) (NEBB)
19. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 42. National Electrical Manufacturers Association
(NEMA)
20. Construction Specifications Institute (CSI)
43. National Electrical Testing Association (NETA)
49. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) DFP Division of Facilities Planning, 301-496-5037
53. Post Tensioning Institute (PTI) DFOM Division of Facilities Operations and
Maintenance, 301-435-8000
54. Public Health Service (PHS)
DOHS Division of Occupational Health & Safety,
55. Scientific Apparatus Makers Association 301-496-2960
(SAMA)
DRS Division of Radiation Safety, 301-496-5774
56. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors
National Association (SMACNA) DFM Division of the Fire Marshall, 301-496-0487
58. Washington Suburban Sanitary Commission CIT Center for Information Technology, 301-496-4357
(WSSC)
OHPE Office of Hospital Physical Environment,
59. World Health Organization (WHO) 301-594-6472
Alterations: Improvements that consist of any better- Barrier Facility: Facilities that are designed and con-
ment or change to an existing property to allow its use structed to ensure isolation and prevent introduction
for a different purpose or function. See also the defini- of outside infectious agents in areas where animals of
tion of Improvements. a defined health status are housed and used. A barrier
is a systematic, comprehensive program for the preven-
Animal Research Facility (ARF): A facility with specifi- tion of pathogen contamination. The intent of a barrier
cally designed environments for the care and support of facility is to protect the animals not the lab workers.
animals used for research. The ARF typically includes Barriers in the context of animal facility design consist
procedure rooms, cage wash and sanitation facilities, of a combination of physical systems and performance
personnel support rooms and others directly related criteria that together minimize the transfer of etiologic
support functions. agents of animal or human disease from one side of the
barrier to the other.
Architectural/Engineering (A/E) Services (as defined
in 40 USC 1102 and the Federal acquisition regulation Base Year: The base year is the first year of the value
[FAR]): engineering study period. See Section 1.7, Value
Engineering.
1. Professional services of an architectural or
engineering nature as defined by state law that Basic Services: The services performed by an A/E during
are required to be performed or approved by a a project.
person licensed, registered, or certified to pro-
vide such services.
Basis of Design (BOD): The BOD serves to document work with indigenous and exotic agents with a potential
the parameters of the project, the design intent, and for respiratory transmission and which may cause seri-
decisions made during the design process. Like draw- ous and potentially lethal infection. At Biosafety Level
ings and specifications, the BOD is an important per- 3, more emphasis is placed on primary and secondary
manent record of the building design. The BOD includes containment to protect personnel in contagious areas,
narratives, which explain and document all important the community, and the environment from exposure to
requirements and decisions made during the design potentially infectious aerosols.
process, Statement of Work (SOW), project program,
code summary and analysis, room data sheets, equip- Certification: The systematic review of all safety fea-
ment schedule, and equipment cut sheets. Depending on tures and processes associated with the laboratory to
the scope of the project, other items may include cost validate that all facility controls and prudent practices
estimates, geotechnical and survey information, plan- are in place to minimize, to the greatest extent possible,
ning alternatives, questionnaires and surveys, studies, the risks associated with laboratory operations and the
benchmarking, sustainability goals and approach, and use of hazardous materials.
other information that will provide insight and back- Commissioning (Cx): The process of ensuring all build-
ground on the project and its development. ing systems are working before occupants move in. It
Beneficial Occupancy: Beneficial occupancy takes place involves making sure all systems are installed properly
on the date when part or all of the work involved in a and perform according to design, are cost-effective,
construction project is substantially complete and the meet the users needs, are adequately documented, and
Government takes possession of the designated space are well understood by the systems operators.
or spaces to use for the purpose intended. Beneficial Concepts: Drawings, sketches, and/or graphics showing
occupancy also initiates the warranty period and any alternatives used to define a projects scope during the
additional environmental mitigation identified in the programmatic phase of the project.
environmental documents. (The use of a project or por-
tion thereof for the purpose intended.) Constructed Asset: A constructed asset is received as
equipment, materials, services, and supplies and built
Biosafety Levels: Biosafety levels are defined in the Centers to its final, functioning form that is not available off
for Disease Control (CDC)/NIH publication, Biosafety the shelf but is built or constructed to unique specifica-
in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories. DRM tions. The acquisition cost of a constructed asset is the
requirements are for Biosafety Level 1, 2, and 3 labora- total of all costs (equipment, materials, services, sup-
tories. The biosafety levels consist of combinations of plies, freight, salaries, benefits, overhead, etc.) incurred
laboratory practices and techniques, safety equipment, in the process of designing and building the asset.
and laboratory facilities. Each combination is specifically
appropriate for operations performed for the documented Construction: The erection of a building, structure,
or suspected route of transmission of infectious agents. or facility that provides space not previously available,
including site preparation, landscaping, associated roads,
Biosafety Level 1: Practices, safety equipment, and facil- parking, environmental mitigation and utilities, and the
ity design and construction are appropriate for work installation of equipment. It includes freestanding struc-
with defined and characterized strains of viable micro- tures, additional wings or floors, enclosed courtyards or
organisms not known to cause disease in healthy adults. entryways, and any other means to provide usable space
Biosafety Level 2: Practices, safety equipment, and that did not previously exist (excluding temporary facili-
facility design and construction are appropriate for ties). Construction projects are capitalized in accordance
work with a broad spectrum of indigenous moderate with the accounting principles of the Federal Accounting
risk agents that are present in the community and asso- Standards Advisory Board (FASAB).
ciated with human disease of varying severity. Containment Laboratory: A laboratory employing
Biosafety Level 3: Practices, safety equipment, and engineering controls and administrative protocols for
facility design and construction are appropriate for managing infectious materials. The purpose of contain-
ment is to reduce or eliminate exposure to laboratory
workers, other persons, and the outside environment to Contracting Officer (CO): An individual who has
potentially hazardous agents. the authority to execute a contract on behalf of the
Government. This individual is the sole authorized
Construction Codes: Any set of standards set forth in agent in dealing with the contractor. The CO has
regulations, ordinances, or statutory requirements of authority to negotiate and execute contracts on behalf
a local, state, or Federal Government unit relating to of the Government and to make changes, amendments,
building construction and occupancy, adopted, admin- approve payments, terminate contracts, and close out
istered, and enforced for the protection of the health, contracts upon satisfactory completion.
safety, and welfare of the public and the environment.
Contracting Officers Technical Representative
Construction Documents Phase: The third phase of (COTR): The PO or other authorized representative
the architect-engineers basic services. In this phase the that is designated by the CO. (May also be referenced
architect-engineer prepares the working drawings and as NIH Technical Representative).
specifications and necessary bidding information for
approval by the Government. Contractor: The person, firm, or corporation with
whom the Government has executed a contract that is
Construction Management: A professional service responsible for performing the work.
that applies effective management techniques to the
planning, design, and construction of a project from Cost-Benefit/Cost-Effectiveness Analysis: A cost-bene-
inception to completion for the purpose of controlling fit/cost-effectiveness analysis is a mechanism to deter-
time, cost, and quality as defined by the Construction mine the best solution to satisfy facility requirements by
Management Association of America (CMAA). exploring and comparing the economics of alternatives
such as leasing, constructing a new facility, renovating
Construction Manager: A person, firm, or business an existing structure, or adding or altering a facility.
organization with the expertise and resources who has
the responsibilities for coordination and accomplish- Decommissioning: All work required resulting in a
ment of overall project planning, design, and construc- facility free of chemical, biological, radiological, or
tion under contract to the Government. other hazardous materials; and prepares the area for
reasonable, unrestricted demolition.
Contract (As defined by FAR): A mutually binding legal
relationship obligating the seller to furnish the supplies Decontamination (Decon): The removal of biological
or services (including construction) and the buyer to agents or hazardous materials to render an area, device,
pay for them. It includes all types of commitments that item, or material safe (i.e., safe in the context of being
obligate the Government to an expenditure of appro- reasonably free from a risk of disease transmission and
priated funds and that are in writing, except as other- bodily harm due to toxic chemicals, materials, and
wise authorized (by the FAR). In addition to bilateral radioisotope contamination). This includes the neutral-
instruments, contracts include, but are not limited to ization and cleaning out of acid and corrosive materials;
awards and notices of awards; job orders or task let- and the removal, destruction, or neutralization of toxic,
ters issued under basic ordering agreements; letter con- hazardous, or infectious substances.
tracts; orders, such as purchase orders, under which
the contract becomes effective by written acceptance or Defective Work: Work not in conformance with the
performance; and bilateral contract modifications. contract documents. Materials and equipment fur-
nished under the contract are not of specified quality
Contract Documents: Those documents that com- and new unless otherwise required or permitted by the
prise a contract, e.g., in a construction contract, the contract documents.
Government contractor agreement: Standard Form 252;
general provisions and clauses; special contract require- Deficiency (As defined by FAR): A material failure of a
ments; other provisions in the uniform contract format; proposal to meet a Government requirement or a com-
specifications, plans, and/or drawings; all addenda, bination of significant weaknesses in a proposal that
modifications, and changes thereto; together with any increases the risk of unsuccessful contract performance
other items stipulated as being specifically included. to an unacceptable level.
Deliverables: All of the drawings, specifications, models, generally suitable for other purposes. Special
etc., prepared in response to an awarded contract. For purpose equipment may be classified as either
most construction projects this includes but is not lim- fixed or moveable equipment.
ited to all of the record drawings, conformed specifica-
tions, operations and maintenance manuals delivered Expandability: Expandability is the ability to enlarge at
by the contractor prior to beneficial occupancy. minimal cost. Expandability refers to expanding within
set boundaries of a facility by demounting walls or by
Design-Bid-Build (As defined by FAR): The traditional expanding the building footprint.
delivery method where design and construction are
sequential and contracted for separately with two con- Facility: A building or group of buildings, a structure,
tracts and two contractors. utility system, the building(s) site, and/or associated
environs.
Design-Build (As defined by FAR): Combines design and
construction in a single contract with one contractor. Facilities Manager: The person in each NIH operating
division responsible for managing the facilities program.
Design Development Phase: The second phase of the
A/Es basic services. In this phase, the A/E continues Facility Project Budget: A summary of all estimated
development of drawings and other documents illus- and projected costs for a construction, improvement, or
trating the scale and relationship of project components repair project including costs associated with the proj-
for approval by the Government. ects planning, design, construction, facility activation,
and equipment resulting in a fully operational facility.
Durability: Durability is the ability to resist weathering,
chemical exposure, abrasion, impact, and other condi- Fast Track Construction: A scheduling process in which
tions of ordinary service for a cost-effective life span or design and construction activities overlap. Design
expected use, while undergoing ordinary maintenance documents and equipment and trade subcontracts are
such as washing and sanitizing with appropriate cleans- released incrementally or in phases.
ers. Life expectancy, expected use, and life cycle costs Feasibility Study: A detailed investigation and analysis
will vary depending on the type of facility, the geo- conducted to determine the financial, economic, techni-
graphic location, and whether the facility is owned or cal, environmental and other advisability of a proposed
leased in addition to other factors such as maintenance, project.
and materials and equipment quality.
Federal Acquisition Regulation (FAR): The basic policy
Equipment: Tangible property having a useful life of governing Federal agency acquisitions. The FAR con-
more than one year and is used in business operations. tains legal requirements, regulations, and policies that
See below for types. bear on contracting.
1. Fixed Equipment: Fixed, built-in, attached, and Final Inspection: Final review of the project by the
installed equipment normally included as part Government to verify satisfactory completion of all con-
of the construction contract and capitalized as tract elements, prior to issuance of the final payment.
facility cost.
Flexibility: Flexibility allows multiple choices or will
2. Moveable Equipment: Equipment that does not accommodate future program changes. Flexibility
require attachment to the building or utility ser- includes adaptability, versatility, interchangeability, and
vice, other than that provided by an electrical expandability.
plug or disconnect fittings.
Funds Invested (as Related to Value Engineering (VE)):
3. Special Purpose Equipment: Technical, medical, Estimates should include salaries and overhead expenses
or scientific equipment that is needed to oper- of VE, training costs for contracting for VE services, VE
ate a laboratory, a hospital, a clinic, a clinical proposal development and implementation costs, and
research patient care unit, an animal care facil- any other costs directly associated with the VE program.
ity, or is specific to a single purpose and not
General Contractor: The prime contractor who is property in accordance with the accounting principles
responsible for all of the work at the construction site of the FASAB.
defined within the contract, including that performed
by all subcontractors. Laboratory: A building, part of a building, or other
place equipped to conduct scientific experiments, tests,
General Provisions: The standard clauses that are used investigations and research. These facilities are used
by Government agencies in various types of contracts. directly in basic or applied research in the sciences
Most of these clauses are set forth in FAR 52, and guid- including medicine and engineering.
ance for their use is set forth in the Provision and Clause
Matrix in FAR Part 52.301. The term also includes Latent Defect (As defined by FAR): A defect that exists
clauses specified in FAR Supplement for agency wide at the time of acceptance but cannot be discovered by a
use. FAR 52.102-1 provides that general provisions will reasonable inspection.
be incorporated by reference to the regulations to the Lease: Specific rights to real property that have been
maximum practical extent rather than by placing the assigned to the Federal Government for a defined period
full text of clauses in the contract document. of time.
General Services Administration (GSA): Acting by or Life Cycle Cost (LCC): The sum of all costs over the
through the Administrator of General Services, or a useful life of a building, system, or product including
designated official to whom functions have been del- the costs of design, construction, acquisition, operation,
egated by the Administrator of General Services. maintenance, repairs, disposal, and salvage (resale)
Gross Area: The total square footage/square meters in value, if any, using present worth costs. In the case of
a building for all floors from the outside face of exterior leased buildings, the life cycle cost shall be calculated
walls, disregarding such architectural projections as cor- over the effective remaining term of the lease.
nices, buttresses, and roof overhangs. Gross area includes Liquidated Damages: Liquidated damages usually
all research and administrative space, retail space, and are specified as a fixed sum per calendar day that the
other areas such as mechanical rooms, vending machine contractor must pay to the government for failure to
space, and storage. Gross area also includes major ver- complete the work within the time specified in the con-
tical penetrations such as shafts, elevators, stairs, or tract. Liquidated damages must be set at a level consis-
atrium space. This figure is used in defining construction tent with a reasonable forecast of actual harm to the
costs for facilities. Government. Additional information can be found in
Historic Properties: Properties listed on the National FAR Subpart 11.5 and 19.705-7.
Register of Historic Places or determined by the Federal Maintenance: Work to keep a property, facility, and/or
Preservation Officer in consultation with the cognizant building system or component in a continuously usable
State Historic Preservation Officer (SHPO) or Tribal state or condition. Maintenance may include inspec-
Historic Preservation Officer (THPO) to be eligible for tion, cleaning, calibration and adjustment, lubrication
listing on the National Register of Historic Places based and replacement of constituent parts, materials and/or
on National Register criteria. sub-assemblies worn, broken, damaged or otherwise
Improvements (Renovations/Alterations): Any better- compromised. Maintenance includes routine recurring
ment or change to an existing property to allow its work, which is incidental to everyday operations, as
continued or more efficient use within its designated well as preventive work, which is programmed at sched-
purpose (renovation), or for use for a different pur- uled intervals, and predictive work, which is indicated
pose or function (alteration). Building improvements by analysis.
also include improvements to or upgrading of primary Minor Renovations: Renovations that are directly
mechanical, electrical, or other building systems, and related to the installation of special-purpose equipment,
site improvements not associated with construction as well as related design and inspection services. These
projects. Improvements typically increase the useful renovations may include extending utility services,
life of a facility and are capitalized against the existing providing suitable safety and environmental conditions
for proper operations, and making structural changes Offices: Space which is primarily used for commercial,
such as cutting walls and floors, and new partitions, professional, or administrative work.
provided such improvements are proximately incident
to the installation, operation, and use of special purpose Owned: The Government has fee simple interest in the
equipment and necessary to conduct the functions of the real property.
program(s). Minor renovation projects do not change Performance Specifications: A specification expressed
the value of the underlying asset or increase the useful in terms of an expected outcome or acceptable perfor-
life of the facility. mance standard.
Model Building Codes: Regional building codes adopted Pre-Project Planning: Process for developing sufficient
as law by local jurisdictions. strategic information through which the NIH can
Nationally Recognized Standard: Encompasses any address risk and determine required resources for suc-
standard or modification thereof that: cessful construction projects.
1. Has been adopted and promulgated by a Prescriptive Specification: The traditional method of
nationally recognized standards-producing specifying materials or techniques found in design bid-
organization under procedures whereby those build projects. The range of acceptable products, manu-
interested and affected by it have reached sub- facturers, and techniques, etc., is stipulated in detail to
stantial agreement on its adoption be followed by the builder.
Net Savings: The net savings is the time-adjusted sav- Project Officer (PO): The Government representative
ings less time-adjusted costs taken over the study period. legally designated by the CO as the authorized technical
representative for administering the A/E, construction,
and/or service contracts on behalf of the CO, exclusive Repair: The restoration of a failed or failing primary
of contractual matters. The PO is not authorized to issue building system or real property facility component to a
any instructions or directions that affect any increases condition that restores its effective use for its designated
or decreases in the scope of work or that would result in purpose. A repair does not increase the underlying value
the increase or decrease of the cost of the contract or a of an existing facility and is typically not capitalized.
change in performance period of the contract. An example of a primary building system would be
the structural foundation and frame, domestic waste
Public Area: Any area of a building, which is ordinarily system, or building HVAC; a real property component
open to members of the public, including lobbies, court- would be a piece of the primary building system such
yards, auditoriums, meeting rooms, and other areas not as a roofing system, central chiller/boiler, generator, or
assigned to a lessee or occupant. elevators. A failed or failing primary building system or
Public Body: Any State of the United States, the District real property component may be the result of action of
of Columbia, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, the the elements, fire, explosion, storm and/or other disas-
Virgin Islands, or any political subdivision, agency, or ters, and by use near to or beyond its expected useful
instrumentality of the foregoing. life or technical obsolescence.
Punch List: A list of unsatisfactory or incomplete work Schematic Phase: The first phase of the A/Es basic ser-
items that are identified by government representa- vices. In this phase, the A/E prepares schematics con-
tives during an inspection of the work after the con- sisting of drawings and other documents illustrating
tractor has notified the CO that work is substantially the scale and relationship of project components for
complete. The contractor must complete all punch list approval by the Government.
work items satisfactorily before the final acceptance of Scope of Work (Sometimes, referred to as Scope or
contract work. SOW): See Statement of Work.
Real Property: Any interest in land (together with the Specific Pathogen Free (SPF): SPF animals are animals
improvements, structures, and fixtures located thereon) that are free of defined germs and other infectious agents
under control of any Federal agency, except the public that may interfere with research. Areas (zones) where
domain, or lands reserved or dedicated for national SPF animals are housed require design or operational
forest or national park purposes. features that minimize potential for cross contamina-
Record Drawings: The drawings submitted by a con- tion and maintain the sanitary environment. The vet-
tractor or subcontractor at any tier to show the con- erinarians and the users of the facility will define the
struction of a particular structure or work as actually level of SPF.
completed under the contract. Specifications: A part of the contract documents. A writ-
Renovation: Improvements that consist of any better- ten document describing in detail the scope of work,
ments or changes to an existing property to allow its materials to be used, method of installation, quality
continued or more efficient use within its designated of workmanship for parcel of work to be placed under
purpose. See also the definition of Improvements. contract; usually utilized in conjunction with working
drawings in building construction. Specifications can be
Rentable Area: The square footage for which rent can described as proprietary, performance, prescriptive, or
be charged. Generally, it is the gross area of the full floor reference specifications. AIA Masterspec is the standard
less the area of all vertical penetrations (elevator shafts, basis for specifications.
stairwells, mechanical shafts, etc.). Rentable area can
be measured in many ways, but the most common mea- Stakeholders: Individuals and organizations that are
surement for office buildings is according to Building involved in or may be affected by the undertaking of a
Owners and Managers Association (BOMA) standards. project.
Risk Assessment: The exercise of identifying, evaluat- Standards: An approved model considered by an author-
ing (probability versus consequence) and mitigating any ity or by general consent as a basis of comparison.
potential hazard. Standards tell the user how a procedure is commonly
done and are usually regarded only as recommendations Value Engineering (VE): The formal technique by which
that do not have the force of law. Nationally recognized contractors may (1) voluntarily suggest methods for
standards are frequently collected as reference informa- performing more economically and share in any result-
tion when codes are being prepared. In many instances, ing savings, or (2) be required to establish a program
entire sections of the standards are adopted into the to identify and submit to the Government methods for
regulated codes and then become legally enforceable. performing more economically without reduction in
program requirements or quality. VE attempts to elimi-
Statement of Work (SOW): The narrative description of nate anything that increases acquisition, operation, or
a project including the physical size and characteristics, support costs, without impairing essential functions
functions, and special features. The SOW is a document or characteristics. VE involves an organized effort to
in the acquisition process that describes the work to be analyze alternative approaches for provision of systems,
performed or the services to be rendered, defines the equipment, facilities, services, and supplies for the pur-
respective responsibilities of the Government and the con- pose of achieving the essential functions at the lowest
tractor, and provides an objective measure so that both life cycle cost consistent with required performance,
the Government and the contractor will know when the reliability, quality, and safety.
work is complete and payment is justified. Common ele-
ments of the SOW are background, project objectives, Value Engineering Change Proposal (VECP): A pro-
detailed technical requirements, deliverables, reporting, posal developed by a construction contractor under
schedule, special considerations, and references. a VE clause in its construction contract that typically
involves sharing in any resulting savings. The proposal
Substantial Completion: The time when the contract normally involves changes in the drawings and specifi-
work is complete to the point that the Government may cations directed at reducing the construction costs or
take over the facility and receive beneficial occupancy life cycle costs without impairing the projects essential
for the purpose intended. functions or characteristics.
Termination: The unilateral cancellation of a contract Value Engineering Proposal (VEP): As used, a VEP in
by the Government for either: (a) convenience (in the connection with an A/E design contract, is a proposal
best interest of the Government) or (b) default (failure for change developed by the A/E design firm, employees
of a contractor to perform as required). of the Government, or a specialized VE consulting firm.
Turnkey: A variation of design-build project deliv- The proposal is similar to the VECP described above
ery in which one entity is responsible to the owner for and is generally performed on a partially completed
design, construction plus designated real estate services facility design. However, it is noted that there is no cost
that may include project financing and site selection/ sharing of projected savings during the design phase.
purchase. Versatility: Versatility is the ability to rearrange items
Usable Square Footage: The secured area (square foot- within a space. For example, use of modular compo-
age) occupied exclusively by the tenant within the ten- nents within a lab or animal facility allows for relatively
ants leased space. The usable area times the load factor easy change out due to a program change.
for common area results in rentable area on which rent
is charged. Usable area can be measured in many ways,
but the most common measurement for office buildings
is according to BOMA standards. It does not include
restrooms, elevator shafts, fire escapes, stairwells, elec-
trical and mechanical rooms, janitorial rooms, eleva-
tor lobbies, or public corridors (for example, a corridor
leading from the elevator lobby to the entrance of a ten-
ants office).
Contents:
1.4.0 Introduction
1.4.1.3 Leases
1.4.0 Introduction excludes all interstitial space and common areas such as
corridors, electrical rooms, elevator closets, housekeep-
This section outlines the means and methods to measure ing closets, local area network (LAN)/telephone clos-
and describe space within a building as dictated by the ets, lobbies, locker rooms, mechanical rooms, storage
NIH and HHS. rooms, switch rooms, toilet rooms, trash rooms, utility
closets, vestibules, electrical wire closets, as well as lab-
oratory break rooms, loading docks, lactation rooms,
and other shared building amenities.
1.4.1 Measurement Details
& Calculations
1.4.1.1 Metric Standards
1.4.3 Rentable Area
for New Construction Rentable area (RA) is calculated for a given IC by
adding the ICs NAA and a percentage of the common
All final drawings and specifications for new con-
areas based on the proportion of NAA the IC occupies
struction shall be expressed in metric or dual units
in the building. This definition is used in charging rent.
(metric and imperial), unless other requirements are
Rentable area is measured the same as net area. It is
specifically provided by the CO. The General Services
calculated as the NAA, plus:
Administration (GSA) Metric Design Guide, latest edi-
tion, and the Metric Guide for Federal Construction 1. The pro-rata share of common areas, such as
shall be used for guidance on how drawings, specifica- public corridors, atrium usable floors, rest-
tions, and other elements of metric implementation are rooms, break rooms, lobbies, LAN/telephone
to be addressed. rooms, housekeeping closets, mechanical/elec-
trical rooms, and loading docks
1.4.1.2 Renovations and Additions 2. The pro-rata share of the NIH shared common
All facility renovation and addition design projects shall spaces, which are excluded in the NAA
be based on the unit type (i.e., metric or imperial) for
3. The pro-rata share of the mechanical space on
which it was originally designed or constructed.
interstitial floors
Contents:
1.5.0 Introduction
5. All known variances shall be submitted before until written approval of the current submittal is received
the completion of the design development stage from reviewers included during the Permit Review Board
(35%) for a project. In some cases, the need for process.
a variance may be the result of work done after
the design development stage. Only in these
cases will late variances be considered. 1.5.3.2 Project Officer
The PO is the contact point for the Government, and as
the COTR, serves as the Governments authorized rep-
resentative with respect to communicating and distribut-
1.5.2 Design Submissions ing comments to the A/E. The PO conducts and chairs
design review meetings with NIH program and techni-
The NIH determines the number of design submittals cal staff to evaluate design review comments. The PO,
based on size and complexity of the project. The PO in consultation with the CO as well as appropriate ORF
holds and chairs design review meetings with technical technical staff, shall determine if the review comments
and program staffs at each specified design submittal are within the scope of the A/Es contract.
stage. The A/E and the PO shall certify that the project
is within the scope, schedule, and budget at each submit-
tal. If a submittal is found to be deficient and does not 1.5.3.3 NIH Technical Review Staff
meet contractual requirements, the Government must The NIH will utilize senior design experts who have pro-
reject the submittal. The A/E will revise and resubmit fessional and technical experience in preparing contract
the submittal at no additional cost to the Government documents to assist the PO in reviewing and evaluating
and with no schedule extension to the overall project. the A/Es work.
See Appendix E for A/E submittal requirements. No
construction may be started until the Government Reviewing Offices:
reviews the final design submission and determines it DTR Division of Technical Resources
satisfactory for purposes of beginning construction.
DFP Division of Facilities Planning
DEP Division of Environmental Protection
DFS Division of Facilities Stewardship
1.5.3 Roles and UEB Utilities Engineering Branch
Responsibilities DFOM Division of Facilities Operations and
Maintenance
1.5.3.1 Architectural/Engineering Services DOHS Division of Occupational Health &
The A/E shall submit completed progress designs to Safety
the government for review and comment in accordance DRS Division of Radiation Safety
with the contract requirements. As a minimum, the A/E
shall provide the following design submittals for proj- DFM Division of the Fire Marshall
ects exceeding $5 million: DPSM Division of Physical Security
Management
1. Schematic design
CIT Center for Information Technology
2. Design development OHPE Office of Hospital Physical
3. Construction documents Environment
CCOFM Clinical Center Office of Facility
For projects with a cost of less than $5 million, the PO Management
shall determine the number of milestone design submit-
tals and ensure that this is reflected in the design con-
tract. The A/E shall not proceed to the next design phase
Contents:
1.6.0 Introduction
Procedures 4. Sales tax, State tax, Tribal fees (or tax), bonds
A/E contracts must include FAR 52.236-22, Design and insurance
Within Funding Limitations and be consistent with the 5. Escalation cost per year
HHS approved Facility Project Approval Agreement
(FPAA). At a minimum, the A/E should submit a broad The final estimate shall include detailed costs for all
estimate (square meter cost) at the schematic level, a material, labor and equipment requirements. After
systems estimate at the design development level, and review and approval of the final cost, it will be consid-
detailed quantity takeoff estimate at the contract docu- ered the Government Estimate. The final estimate shall
ment level. not exceed the construction budget.
Contents:
1.7.0 Introduction
1.7.3 VE Regulations
8. Schedule Impact: The effect the VEP will have 1.7.3 VE Regulations
on design or construction schedules.
Below is a list of the primary federal regulations govern-
ing value engineering for HHS projects:
Contents:
1.8.0 Introduction
1.8.1 Principles
achieved by increasing the efficiency of fixtures C. Compliance: In addition, existing buildings shall be
and water-using systems reuse of water and the assessed for compliance with the Guiding Principles of
reduction of waste. Water quality is protected by the MOU to ensure that 15% or more of the HHS capi-
managing runoff and elimination of hazardous tal asset building inventory incorporates the sustainable
materials from water systems. practices in the Guiding Principles. The HHS capital
asset building threshold for incorporating sustainable
5. Enhance Indoor Environmental Quality: Indoor practices in existing buildings is 5,000 gross square feet
environmental quality directly impacts the or more, excluding housing.
health and comfort of occupants, including ven-
tilation and air quality, thermal comfort, mois- D. New Leases: All new lease actions 5,000 usable
ture control, lighting (including daylighting), square feet or more will incorporate the Guiding
views, contaminants, acoustics and aesthetics. Principles of the MOU to the maximum extent fea-
Environmental quality control begins with good sible. New lease actions under 5,000 useable square
practices during construction, and includes feet will consider the Guiding Principles as one crite-
material and finish selection, occupancy, and rion for lease evaluation. A build-to-suit lease will be a
operation. LEED certified building.
6. Reduce Environmental Impact of Materials: The E. Waivers: NIH cannot waive any requirements man-
environmental impact of materials is reduced by dated by Executive Order 13693.
specifying products which are non-toxic or non-
ozone depleting, with maximum recycled con- F. Grants: To the maximum extent feasible, sustain-
tent, renewable, and sustainable sources. During able design practices shall be considered in the design
construction, environmental impact is reduced requirements for facilities funded through extramural
by recycling to the greatest extent possible. construction grants.
documents, a commissioning plan, verification of the performance requirements. This is a requirement of the
installation and performance of systems to be commis- Guiding Principles. Executive Order 13693 extended
sioned, and a commissioning report. the 2% per year reduction through 2025 for a total of
36% by the end of FY 2025.
1.8.2.1.2 Optimize Energy Performance B. Water Meters: The installation of water meters is
A. Energy-Efficiency: Establish a whole building per- encouraged to allow for the management of water use
formance target that takes into account the intended during occupancy.
use, occupancy, operations, plug loads, other energy
C. Outdoor Water: Use water efficient landscape and
demands, and design to earn the ENERGY STAR tar-
irrigation strategies, including water reuse and recy-
gets for new construction and major renovation where
cling, to reduce outdoor potable water consumption by
applicable. For new construction, reduce the energy use
a minimum of 50% over that consumed by conventional
by 30% compared to the baseline building performance
means (plant species and plant densities). The installa-
rating per the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating
tion of separate water meters to segregate potable water
and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) and the
from landscaping for locations with significant outdoor
Illuminating Engineering Society of North America
water use is encouraged.
(IESNA) Standard 90.1, Energy Standard for Buildings
Except Low-Rise Residential. For major renovations, D. Storm Water Runoff: Employ design and construc-
reduce the energy use by 20% below prerenovations tion strategies that reduce storm water runoff and
2003 baseline. If available ENERGY STAR and FEMP- polluted site water runoff. Per EISA Section 438, to
designated energy-efficient products shall be used. the maximum extent feasible, maintain or restore the
predevelopment hydrology of the site with regard to
Per the Energy Independence and Security Act (EISA)
temperature, rate, volume, and duration of flow using
Section 523, meet at least 30% of the hot water demand
site planning, design, construction, and maintenance
through the installation of solar hot water heaters when
strategies.
life cycle cost-effective.
E. Process Water: Per the EPAct Section 109, when
B. Measurement and Verification: Per the Energy Policy
potable water is used to improve a buildings energy-
Act of 2005 (EPAct) Section 103, install building-level
efficiency, deploy life cycle cost-effective water conser-
utility meters in new major construction and renova-
vation measures. Once-through domestic water shall
tion projects to track and continuously optimize per-
not be used in lieu of process water.
formance. Per Energy Independence and Security Act
of 2007 (EISA) Section 434, include meters for steam, F. Water Efficient Products: Comply with the require-
electricity, chilled water, domestic water and natural ments of the DRM and use water-conserving products.
gas and steam, where appropriate. Choose irrigation contractors who are certified through
a WaterSense-labeled program.
Compare actual performance data from the first year of
operation with the energy design target. After one year
of occupancy, measure all new major installations using 1.8.2.1.4 Enhance Indoor Environmental Quality
the ENERGY STAR Portfolio Manager for building A. Ventilation and Thermal Comfort: Meet ASHRAE
and space types covered by ENERGY STAR. For other Standard 55, Thermal Environmental Conditions for
building and space types, use an equivalent benchmark- Human Occupancy, including continuous humidity
ing tool. control within established ranges per climate zone, and
ASHRAE Standard 62.1, Ventilation for Acceptable
1.8.2.1.3 Protect and Conserve Water Indoor Air Quality.
A. Indoor Water: Employ strategies that in aggre- B. Moisture Control: Establish and implement a mois-
gate use a minimum of 20% less potable water than ture control strategy for controlling moisture flows and
the indoor water use baseline calculated for the build- condensation to prevent building damage and mold
ing, after meeting the EPAct 1992, Uniform Plumbing contamination.
Codes, and the International Plumbing Codes fixture
C. Daylighting: Achieve a minimum daylight factor of B. Biobased Content: For USDA-designated products,
2% (excluding all direct sunlight penetration) in 75% use products meeting or exceeding USDAs biobased-
of all space occupied for critical visual tasks. Provide content recommendations. For other products, use bio-
automatic dimming controls or accessible manual light- based products made from rapidly renewable resources
ing controls, and appropriate glare control. and certified sustainable wood products. If these desig-
nated products meet performance requirements and are
D. Low-Emitting Materials: Specify materials and available at a reasonable cost, a preference for purchas-
products with low pollutant emissions, including adhe- ing them should be included in all solicitations relevant
sives, sealants, paints, carpet systems, and furnishings. to construction, operation, maintenance of, or use in
E. Protect Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) during the building.
Construction: Follow the recommended approach of the C. Environmentally Preferable Products: Use products,
latest edition of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning such as low-emitting materials or products containing
Contractors National Association Indoor Air Quality non-toxic metals that have a lesser or reduced effect
Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction. on human health and the environment when compared
After construction and prior to occupancy, conduct a with competing products or services that serve the same
minimum 72 hour flush-out with maximum outdoor air purpose.
consistent with achieving relative humidity no greater
than 60%. After occupancy, continue flush-out as nec- D. Construction Waste and Materials Management:
essary to minimize exposure to contaminants from new During a projects planning stage, identify local recy-
building materials. cling and salvage operations that could process site-
related construction and demolition materials. Include
in the design, the recycle or salvage of at least 50% of
1.8.2.1.5 Reduce Environmental Impact of Materials
the non-hazardous construction, demolition, and land-
A. Recycled Content: For U.S. Environmental Protection clearing materials, excluding soil, where markets or
Agency (EPA) designated products, use products meeting on-site recycling opportunities exist. Provide salvage,
or exceeding EPAs recycled content recommendations. reuse, and recycling services for waste generated from
For other products, use materials with recycled content major renovations, where markets or on-site recycling
such that the sum of postconsumer recycled content plus opportunities exist.
one-half of the preconsumer content constitutes at least
10% (based on cost) of the total value of the materials E. Ozone-Depleting Compounds: Eliminate the use
in the project. If EPA-designated products meet perfor- of ozone-depleting compounds during and after con-
mance requirements and are available at a reasonable struction where alternative environmentally preferable
cost, a preference for purchasing them should be included products are available, consistent with the Montreal
in all solicitations relevant to construction, operation, Protocol and Title VI of the Clean Air Act Amendments
maintenance of, or use in the building. of 1990 or equivalent overall air quality benefits that
take into account life cycle impacts.
Contents:
1.9.0 Introduction
1.9.0 Introduction The NIH cannot grant waivers or variances for ABA
compliance. All requests must be submitted to the
Federal facilities must comply with standards issued under U.S. Access Board and The Administrator of General
the Architectural Barriers Act Accessibility Standards Services. As per the ABA Standards Advisory F103
(ABAAS). These standards apply to facilities designed, Modifications and Waivers: The provisions for modi-
constructed, altered, or leased with Federal funds under fications and waivers differ from the requirement issued
the Architectural Barriers Act (ABA). The standards may under the Americans with Disabilities Act in that equiv-
be found online: https://www.access-board.gov/. alent facilitation does not apply. There is a formal pro-
The Access Board maintains guidelines under the ABA, cedure for Federal agencies to request a waiver or modi-
which serves as the basis for enforceable standards. It fication of applicable standards under the Architectural
should be noted that the ADA and ABA have separate Barriers Act.
standards. NIH facilities shall abide by the ABA stan- Please note the following critical requirements:
dards, which are enforceable by law. The ABA law was
passed in Congress in 1968: as amended 42 U.S.C. 1. Accessibility requirements shall be included
4151 et seq. as part of the code analysis on the drawing
submission(s).
Contents:
1.10.0 Introduction
F. CA and operators review and approval of startup A. Establishment of systems trending and monitoring
protocol by the contractors
G. Submittals of operations and maintenance (O&M) B. Spot check startups and balancing by the CA and
portions of the Facility Guide and a Temporary the operators
Conditioning Plan by the contractor for review by
A/E, CA, and operators C. Functional Operational Systems Test (FOST)
directed/conducted by the CA, in which most parties
H. Witnessing of close inspections by operators, CA, also participate to some degree. The CA and operators
and PO continue FOSTs, performing repetitive sampling.
I. Recording of all nameplate data by the contractor D. FOST documentation by the CA, recommendations
of acceptance as applicable, and update of FOST.
J. Training provided by the contractor
E. Development and performance of commissioned
K. Design intent and systems overview training by the systems training by the CA
A/E with assistance from the CA
F. Completion of record documentation and submittal
for approval by the contractor and A/E
1.10.2.8 Endurance Test Phase least into the opposite season from when it was initially
tested. The contractor performs warranty service and
During the endurance test phase, equipment is run con-
all manufacturer required maintenance, corrects defi-
tinuously, monitored, and trended. This phase is appli-
ciencies, and finalizes record documentation to reflect
cable to critical occupancies such as BSL-3, ARF, data-
actual conditions at the end of the warranty period. The
centers, and other areas as directed by the PO. The Cx
operators work with the CA and the A/E to fine tune
sequence shall include:
the facility to meet actual occupancy. The Cx sequence
A. CA ensures monitoring is in place and functional shall include:
throughout this period
A. Onset of warranty upon completion of the
B. Use of the space by occupants to confirm acceptance phase
functionality
B. Submittal of final Cx report by the CA and
C. Proper operation of the facility throughout this important lessons learned, changes made, etc.
period
C. Maintenance of a log of warranty calls that tracks
diagnosis and resolution by the contractor
1.10.2.9 Warranty Phase
D. Operator-initiated warranty calls, as necessary
The warranty phase includes the early occupancy of the
building through the end of the warranty period, and at E. Record documentation is updated as necessary
Contents:
3. Hazardous waste storage and handling C. Exclusions: Certain environmental issues have been
excluded from this section of the DRM and addressed
4. Radiation safety elsewhere. See Chapter 3, Civil Engineering and Site
5. Solid waste management and recycling Development and Chapter 8, Plumbing Design for
storm water management, sediment control, erosion
6. Waste water discharges control, wetlands, and use of fertilizers in landscaping.
Refer to Section 1.12, Integrated Pest Management for
Attention to environmental management issues and use of pesticides. It is the goal of NIH to fully comply
proper waste handling is a key element of the NIH over- with all Federal and state requirements in these areas.
all goals of ensuring the health and well-being of NIH
employees, visitors, and neighbors, and maintaining the D. Sediment and Erosion Control (SEC) Drawings:
NIH campus atmosphere. In this subsection, on-cam- Sediment and erosion control (SEC) drawings shall be
pus refers to the NIH Bethesda, Maryland facility; off- prepared for all projects that result in ground distur-
campus refers to all other NIH facilities. bance. See Chapter 3 for Sediment and Erosion Control.
6. Safe Drinking Water Act B. Air Quality: In general, most new construction will
result in the release (off-gasing) of odors that can affect
7. Toxic Substances Control Act
occupant comfort. If hazardous substances are avoided
8. Worker Safety Requirements in construction, these odors will generally be non-haz-
ardous; however, they can still have a detrimental effect
The National Environmental Policy Act (NEPA) applies on indoor air quality. Examples of non-hazardous sub-
to all projects regardless of size. This is a joint process stances that can affect indoor air quality include sys-
between the PO, Division of Environmental Protection tems furniture, carpets, and latex paints.
spills of hazardous waste resulting from mishandling included in the design of new construction for the solid
the waste materials. The A/E shall propose alternative waste management system to be efficient and convenient
means for spill containment within the storage room. to use. Ease and convenience are keys to implementa-
Options include a spill-containment curb around the tion of a successful solid waste management program.
room, secondary containment bins, shelving designed
to contain spills, or a combination thereof. Any curb D. Reusable Products: The utilization of reusable
used for containment spills shall be designed to allow products, reducing the overall solid waste stream is
convenient ingress/egress using a drum trolley. Each encouraged.
section of the storage area shall be designed to contain E. Recycling: Waste products that cannot be reused
a spill at a minimum equal to the volume of the largest shall be investigated for possible recycling. Only those
container. The configuration of the storage area shall products that cannot be reused or recycled shall enter
be designed to facilitate spill cleanup. Interior surfaces the waste stream for energy recovery or land fill.
of the storage area shall be cleanable, corrosion resis-
tant, and non-reactive. F. Waste Compaction: All facilities shall be designed
with modern and sanitary waste compaction equip-
G. Walls and Floor: A chemical-resistant coating shall ment. This equipment shall minimize spillage of wastes
be applied to the walls and floor in this area to facilitate and debris, and the attraction of pests.
the cleanup of spills. These areas shall be thoroughly
caulked and sealed to exclude pests and minimize pest G. Hazardous Waste Generation: Hazardous substance
harborage. storage capacity can assist in laboratory waste minimi-
zation. The A/E shall closely examine the anticipated
H. Safety Equipment: Safety equipment including emer- use of the laboratory to determine a reasonable volume
gency eyewash, emergency shower, and a telephone of hazardous substances stored in the laboratory to
shall be provided for each storage room and staging allow efficient laboratory operations. Excessive stor-
area. The telephone to contact emergency response per- age space in a laboratory can result in over-purchasing,
sonnel shall be located either in the room or within 10 hoarding of hazardous substances, and possible storage
m (33 ft.) of the room. beyond useful shelf life, resulting in excessive hazardous
waste generation.
1.11.3.1 General Waste Management
A. General: This section is applicable to the NIH 1.11.3.2 Recycling
Bethesda campus. Other NIH campuses and sites may A. Recycling Materials: The NIH campus has an active
vary with their waste protocols and their Authority solid waste recycling program. The program is adminis-
Having Jurisdictions (AHJ) requirements. In gen- tered by the DEP. This program establishes white office
eral, there are five types of waste to consider: medical paper, baled corrugated cartons, aluminum cans, and
pathological waste (MPW), chemical waste, multihaz- polypropylene as primary recycling materials. Mixed
ardous waste, radioactive waste, trash, and recycling. paper, wood pallets, scrap metal, polystyrene, food and
See the DEPs Waste Management Services website beverage containers, and yard waste are designated as
for additional waste requirements (http://orf.od.nih. secondary recyclable materials.
gov/EnvironmentalProtection/WasteDisposal/Pages/
default.aspx). B. Recycling Friendly: All new construction on the
NIH campus shall be designed to be recycling friendly.
B. Waste Minimization: All biomedical laboratories Collection containers placed at convenient locations
and ARFs at the NIH shall adhere to the Environmental throughout the building enable NIH employees to accu-
Protection Agencys (EPAs) solid waste management mulate recyclable materials. The selection of recyclables
hierarchy, encouraging reduction of waste at the source. to be collected; the type, size, and number of collection
This hierarchy emphasizes waste minimization as the containers; and the locations for the collection contain-
first step in sound solid waste management. ers shall be determined by the A/E on the basis of the
C. Ease and Convenience: The requirements for envi- planned use of the new facility. The A/E shall coordi-
ronmentally friendly solid waste management shall be nate this selection with the DEP.
C. Support Facilities: Support facilities for recycling WSSC system through a Discharge Authorization
shall be included in all new construction. These sup- Permit. Under the terms of this permit, the NIH must
port facilities include space in the loading dock area for sample its waste water four times every six months and
storing recyclable materials. Paper products, particu- submit an Industrial User Effluent Compliance Permit
larly white paper, must be kept clean and dry to main- report to WSSC twice per year. The waste water sam-
tain market value and be stored in a way so as not to pling is conducted at two locations where NIH sewers
attract pests or offer them harborage, requiring either a connect to the WSSC system.
room for storage or an enclosed container. Other recy-
clable materials also require sufficient container space. B. New Construction: For new biomedical laboratory
Multicompartment recycling roll-off containers are and ARF construction, the sanitary system shall be
commercially available and may be used for recyclable designed to allow for sampling at the discharge point
storage and transportation. The potential for attraction from the individual building.
of pests to these containers shall be considered when C. Sampling Point: The sampling point shall be designed
designing a placement site. The placement of these con- to allow for installation of a continuous pH monitor,
tainers shall not affect personnel using the loading dock. installation of a programmable sampler, and personnel
D. Aluminum Cans: A can-flattener shall be considered access for grab sampling. Cage washing facilities and
for any facility expected to generate sufficient alumi- laboratory facilities shall be provided with a continuous
num cans. The selection of the recycling support facili- pH monitor and recorder. The pH monitor shall provide
ties and equipment required for all new construction an alert to the building automation system.
shall be made by the A/E in coordination with DEP. D. Treatment: Because the NIH utilizes the WSSC
Potential options for the loading dock design have been system, it is normally not necessary to perform waste
developed by the ORF and can be used per program water treatment on campus. However, it may be nec-
requirements by the A/E. essary to provide neutralization and equalization of
E. Space Allocation: Recycling space should be provided waste water streams from some biomedical laboratory
on each floor or within each tenant space as well as at and ARFs to comply with discharge requirements and
the loading dock, and must be sized to contain at least to minimize the risk of damage to NIH campus piping
three days of recycled materials. Recycling containers infrastructure.
are to be located outside of the loading dock. E. Silver Recovery: Any facility designed with dark-
F. Sorting Space: At recycling and trash rooms, space rooms or photo-processing facilities shall have a pro-
must be allowed for sorting and recycling of paper, bot- cessing facility for recovering silver from the waste
tles and cans, metals, and other materials. water stream from the photo-processing rooms.
and radioactive waste, and for storage of specialized hazardous substances while discouraging the storage of
carts to transport the hazardous waste from the labo- excessive amounts of hazardous substances.
ratories. The hazardous waste storage section shall be
2,500 mm x 3,500 mm (8 ft. 2 in. x 11 ft. 6 in.) mini- K. Radioactive Storage Cabinets: The location of
mum. The radioactive waste storage section shall be radioactive storage cabinets shall be standardized in
750 mm x 1,500 mm (2 ft. 6 in. x 4 ft. 11 in.) minimum. the laboratories to assist emergency-response person-
nel and optimally located near the laboratory door
C. Storage Cabinets: A minimum of three, 2 m (6 ft. 7 for convenient access by the technician collecting the
in.) high storage cabinets shall be provided in each room hazardous waste. For laboratory modules with a ser-
to provide segregated storage of incompatible materi- vice corridor, the storage area shall be located near the
als. Open floor space in the storage room shall accom- service entrance rather than the hall entrance, avoid-
modate one, 1 m (3 ft. 3 in.) long waste cart and allow ing the transport of hazardous waste through the main
access to the storage cabinets and shelving. corridors of the laboratory building. There shall be no
flammable storage cabinets located under fume hoods.
All wet laboratories shall contain an approved venti- Acid storage cabinets shall be ventilated and are typi-
lated acid (corrosive) cabinet and an approved flamma- cally located beneath fume hoods. If no fume hood is
ble materials storage cabinet. The sizes of these cabinets present, exhaust ventilation must be provided to these
shall be based on the volume of corrosive and flamma- cabinets. Acid cabinets and flammable material storage
ble materials used in the laboratory. cabinets shall be located diametrically opposed from
D. Spill Containment: Waste materials are normally each other and towards the back of the laboratory away
transported using specialized carts that provide spill from the laboratory entrance.
containment. Spill containment shall be designed per
Section 1.11.3, Storage and Staging Areas. 1.11.3.5 Hazardous Waste Storage and
E. Floors and Walls: Floor and walls shall be designed Handling at Off-Campus Facilities
per Section 1.11.3, Storage and Staging Areas. Laboratory buildings located in Montgomery County,
Maryland, but not located on the NIH Bethesda campus
F. Ventilation System: A separate ventilation system
shall be designed per this section. Hazardous waste may
shall be installed for the storage room. Exhaust shall be
be stored in these rooms from sixty to ninety days.
directed away from the building and surrounding build-
ings air intake. This ventilation system shall be con- A. Location: The storage room shall be located near
nected to the buildings emergency power system. the loading dock for easy access to the trucks that will
be used to transport the waste to the NIH campus for
G. Lighting: Standard illumination levels apply to this
additional processing. Because this waste will be trans-
room. Lighting fixtures shall be lensed, sealed, and
ported over public roads, the room shall also be used to
gasketed.
prepare the hazardous waste for shipment. Processing
H. Safety Equipment: Safety equipment shall be conducted in this room includes bulking waste into
designed per Section 1.11.3, Storage and Staging Areas. larger containers, laboratory packing individual waste
containers, and labeling and manifesting the containers
I. Design Review and Approval: The Division of for shipment.
Radiation Safety (DRS), the Division of Environmental
Protection (DEP), the Division of Occupational Health Convenient access shall be provided from the storage
and Safety (DOHS), and the Division of the Fire room to the freight elevator without having to traverse
Marshal (DFM) shall review all designs for hazardous heavily used corridors. Because these laboratories are
waste storage rooms and shall provide the final approval typically leased space, it may be difficult to meet these
of the design. The PO shall coordinate this review and criteria. In this case, consideration shall be given to
approval. alternate uses of this leased space that will not generate
hazardous waste.
J. Laboratory Modules Waste Storage: All labora-
tory modules shall be designed for the safe storage of B. Layout and Size: The storage room shall be divided
into two sections. The first section shall be large enough
to provide for temporary storage of the hazardous waste hazardous waste generated by laboratory activities. The
as it is received from the laboratories and after it has volume of hazardous waste generated by a laboratory is
been packed for shipment. The second section shall be a function of the type of work being performed in the
used for bulking and packaging the waste. Space for laboratory. The A/E shall consider the function of the
preparing manifests and other documentation shall be laboratory to determine the space necessary for hazard-
provided, either in the storage area or in an additional ous waste storage. At a minimum, a 750 mm x 750 mm
space outside the room. Space for storing specialized (2 ft. 6 in. x 2 ft. 6 in.) area shall be required.
carts used to transport the hazardous waste from labo-
ratories shall also be provided. The A/E must also recognize that some types of haz-
ardous waste may be incompatible and shall design the
C. Spill Containment: Spill containment shall be hazardous waste storage area to accommodate multiple
designed per Section 1.11.3, Storage and Staging Areas. containers. The A/E shall investigate the possibility of
stacked containers that will provide sufficient storage
D. Floors and Walls: Floor and walls shall be designed space while minimizing the footprint in the laboratory.
per Section 1.11.3, Storage and Staging Areas. Each storage container shall be designed to provide sec-
E. Ventilation System: The ventilation system shall ondary containment of hazardous wastes. This storage
be designed per Section 1.11.3.4,Hazardous Waste area shall have a minimum of two physically separated
Storage and Handling at On-Campus Buildings with sections to allow segregation of incompatible mate-
the following additional requirements: rials. Some laboratories may require three segments
depending on the types of hazardous waste that will be
1. The ventilation system shall be spark proof. generated. Storage areas shall be designed per Section
1.11.3.4,Hazardous Waste Storage and Handling at
2. The ventilation system shall be designed to allow On-Campus Facilities.
easy access for routine or emergency mainte-
nance from outside the containment area. L. Lab Module Storage Location: The location of the
hazardous waste storage area in laboratories shall be
3. The ventilation system shall be connected to the standardized to assist emergency response personnel
emergency power system, if available. and shall be designed per Section 1.11.3.4, Hazardous
F. Safety Equipment: Safety equipment shall be Waste Storage and Handling at On-Campus Facilities.
designed per Section 1.11.3, Storage and Staging Areas. M. Select Agent Waste: Laboratory waste storage con-
G. Fume Hood: A walk-in fume hood shall be provided taining select agents must meet the requirements of the
in the bulking and packaging area, where exposure to Federal Select Agent Program for secure storage. Select
harmful fumes is possible. agent waste must remain secured until sterilization has
been confirmed.
H. Explosion-Proof Design: An explosion panel
designed to dissipate the impact of an explosion shall be
provided in the storage room.
spill containment, and meet the requirements of the water quality, see Chapter 3, Civil Engineering and Site
American Petroleum Institute and the NFPA. The tanks Development and Chapter 8, Plumbing Design.
shall also be consistent with the NIH Spill Prevention,
Control, and Countermeasures Plan.
B. Review of records and documents regarding the use controlled by DRS policies approved by the Radiation
of radioactive materials in the facility and potential for Safety Officer or the NIH Radiation Safety Committee.
long-lived radionuclide contamination Non-licensed sources include X-ray machines, high-
voltage medical accelerators, electron microscopes, and
C. Review of records regarding responses to hazardous radioactive materials from sources other than reactor
substances spill incidents or other emergencies byproducts or particle accelerators. In addition to the
D. Visual inspection of the building and site protection of occupationally exposed workers, the DRS
must ensure that the general public, surrounding envi-
E. Sampling and analysis of subject materials rons, and maintenance staff are also provided with an
adequate and similar degree of protection.
The end result of the condition assessment shall
be a decommissioning plan for the facility, which C. Background: The DRS provides guidance and tech-
shall include all recommended procedures for nical information concerning the use of radioactive
decontamination. materials as well as policies and procedures for radiation
producing machines and areas. Radiation safety con-
trol, containment, and shielding design and laboratory
1.11.5.2 Recycling Demolition Debris practices minimize the potential for radiation exposure
Prior to mobilization on the site, the demolition con- to workers and radiation release to the environment.
tractor shall be required to submit a waste disposal and
recycling plan for the demolition activity to the DEP. D. Specific Areas of Concern: The following are key
This plan shall identify each type of waste material gen- radiation safety issues of particular concern:
erated by the demolition. The wastes shall be classified 1. Laboratories using radionuclides
as hazardous waste, general waste, or recyclable waste.
The alternatives for disposing or recycling of each type 2. Radioactive airborne and liquid effluent
of waste material shall be discussed in the plan, with the sampling
objective of recycling the maximum amount of demoli-
tion materials. For any material not recycled, the con- 3. Devices used in medical research, such as X-ray
tractor shall be required to document in the plan, to the machines, accelerators, and irradiators
satisfaction of the DEP, why recycling is not feasible. 4. Non-ionizing radiation (under DOHS purview)
B. Materials: Adjustable height bi-level metal shelv- carts and equipment for the transfer of radioactive waste
ing with lipped edges and corrosion resistant coating currently in use can be obtained from the DRS. The stag-
for spill containment to provide segregated storage of ing area shall be sized to provide for temporary storage
wastes of various compatibility classes shall be provided. of the radioactive waste and the specialized carts used
to transport the radioactive waste from the laboratories.
C. Layout and Size: A 100 mm (4 in.) high contain- The staging area shall be designed to contain any spills
ment floor berm shall be provided at the entrance to the of radioactive waste that may occur during handling
room for specified containment and be sloped to allow of the waste materials. This can be accomplished using
carts and dollies to easily pass. Two alternates are also specialized carts; however, the A/E may propose alter-
acceptable: nate means for spill containment. Special consideration
1. Room flooring designed 100 mm (4 in.) lower shall be given to this area in the fire protection design
than corridor flooring with smooth transition per NRC RIS 2008-12, specifying the fire protection
ramp leading into room and suppression systems to minimize the likelihood and
extent of fire.
2. Room flooring designed to gradually slope away
from the entrance to provide the same contain-
ment capacity 1.11.6.3 Radioactive Waste Storage and
Handling at Off-Campus Facilities
No floor drains shall be located in this room. Flooring
Specific issues directly related to radioactive waste
shall be of impervious material, highly resistant to
are discussed in this section. Laboratory facilities not
organic solvents, non-slip, and with no cracks, joints, or
located on the NIH campus shall be designed with a
drains. Floor and wall junctures shall be coved and of
room for use in processing and staging hazardous
the same material as the floor.
and radioactive waste. Mixed waste shall be treated
D. Electrical Specifications: One duplex electrical outlet as radioactive waste in this room. The waste shall be
on each wall of the room shall be provided. Lighting transported to the NIH campus for additional process-
fixtures shall be lensed, sealed, and gasketed. ing and shipping to the long term radioactive waste stor-
age facility. Because the waste is transported over public
E. Medical Waste Cold Box: Medical waste cold boxes roads, this room shall be used to prepare the radioactive
used to store medical pathologic waste (MPW) shall waste for shipment. Processing conducted in this room
be used to store animal carcasses, tissues, and bedding shall include bulking of waste into large containers,
contaminated with radioactive materials. The medical laboratory packing of individual waste containers, and
waste cold box storage room shall be located inside and labeling and manifesting the containers for shipment. A
directly adjacent to the loading dock. Contact the DEP bulking hood to perform these activities shall be pro-
for medical waste cold box specifications. vided. A service elevator on the premises shall be avail-
able to transport the radioactive waste to the appropri-
F. Coolers and Walk-ins: Coolers and/or walk-in freez-
ate marshalling area in the building. If a service elevator
ers shall be located in each building with laborato-
is not available, the use of a passenger elevator may be
ries conducting biomedical research with radioactive
appropriate; however, dedicated times shall be required
materials.
to transport the radioactive waste.
materials. Spill containment in the bulking and pack- C. Location: A standard location of the radioactive
aging area may be accomplished with a curb around waste storage in laboratories shall be established to
the area, secondary containment bins, or a combination assist emergency response personnel. For laboratory
thereof. These areas shall be thoroughly caulked and modules with a service corridor, this storage shall be
sealed to minimize pest harborage and exclude pests. located near the service entrance rather than the hall
It is important to note that prior to contracting for entrance, eliminating the need for moving radioactive
leased space that will require remodeling, renovation, waste through the main corridors of the laboratory
or other extensive architectural or engineering work, building. The configuration of the radioactive waste
DRS shall be informed and provide the necessary tech- storage area in the laboratory shall be designed to facili-
nical assistance. tate radioactive material spill cleanup and decontamina-
tion. Interior surfaces of the storage area shall be read-
ily cleanable for ease in decontamination. Corridors
1.11.6.4 Radioactive Waste Storage and and public space shall not be designated and used for
Handling in Laboratory Modules storage, and equipment such as refrigerators and freez-
A. General: All laboratory modules shall be designed ers shall not be designated to store this material in these
for the safe storage of radioactive waste. The volume of areas. The A/E shall include the following in the design:
radioactive waste generated by a laboratory is a func-
1. Physical security measures and systems to
tion of the type of work being performed. The A/E
protect against unauthorized access in all
shall consider the function of the laboratory to deter-
laboratories. For specific security requirements
mine the space necessary for radioactive waste storage,
contact PO to coordinate with the DPSM; see
recognize that some types of radioactive waste require
Section 1.13.
segregation from other types, and design the radio-
active waste-storage area to accommodate multiple 2. Security for all radioactive materials in
containers. All laboratories shall be designed to fit the laboratories when unattended
appropriate low-level radioactive waste (LLRW) stor-
age receptacles and/or containers. Contact the DRS for 3. Space for shielding waste containers
specifications on these containers. Five LLRW streams
4. Appropriately sized laboratory and marshalling
have been identified from the NIH Waste Disposal
areas for reduction of storage and/or waste
Calendar, current edition:
accumulation
1. Liquids aqueous waste and/or solvents/other
5. Appropriate spill containment for all storage
hazardous chemical constituents (mixed waste)
areas
2. Dry or solid waste (dry active waste) dispos-
6. Potential shielding requirements between
able lab ware and/or sharps (can also be catego-
adjoining or adjacent laboratory bench areas
rized as MPW)
for high-energy beta-emitter radionuclides
3. Liquid scintillation vials and/or bulk liquid
7. Compensation for the additional weight
scintillation media
required for lead shielding in the design of
4. Animal carcasses and/or tissues countertops and hoods if the laboratory is used
for high-energy gamma-emitter radionuclides
5. Animal bedding and/or solid excreta
8. Secure equipment alcoves for storage of
B. Containers: The size of the space dedicated to each radioactive materials
of the containers shall be based on the volume of radio-
active materials generated and/or research activities 9. Security provisions in construction
performed in the laboratory. Standard-sized contain- specifications (e.g., locks as part of the
ers are available from the radioactive waste contractor. integrated system to secure this equipment)
Container placement locations shall be considered in when storing radioactive materials in
the design for ease of access and pick-up. refrigerators and/or freezers
10. Secure room for irradiator equipment, designed 3. Where iodination is performed in specific
in collaboration with DRS laboratories, those hoods shall be equipped
with charcoal filtration and may additionally be
D. Beta Barriers: Beta barriers for shielding energetic equipped with HEPA filtration.
beta emitters (P-32), often transparent plastic sheets,
0.951.27 cm (3/81/2 in.) thick, shall be provided to 4. Airborne radioactive effluent monitoring
protect personnel in adjacent and close work areas. systems shall be designed in accordance with
ANSI Standard N13.1, Guide to Sampling
E. Ventilation Systems: Ventilation systems used for Airborne Radioactive Materials in Nuclear
controlling airborne radioactive discharges require the Facilities (1969), specifically Appendix A,
following: Guides for Sampling from Ducts and Stacks.
1. Laboratory exhausts shall be manifolded into 5. A single-nozzle sample probe shall be designed
the regular building exhaust inside the air stream for sampling gas and
2. Hoods for bulking radioactive materials shall vapors, as specified in ANSI Standard N13.1.
have sampling capability G. In-Laboratory Standards: Laboratory design con-
3. Mechanical room space shall be designed to siderations shall include state-of-the-art design consid-
provide for future additional filtration capability erations, as specified by ANSI, and other acceptable
industry standards, such as the following:
If the facility requires additional hoods, specifically for
the use of iodination techniques, then the exhaust from 1. National Council on Radiation Protection
these installations shall be equipped with charcoal fil- and Measurements (NCRP), Report No. 127,
tration and may additionally be equipped with HEPA Operational Radiation Safety Program.
filtration. A distinct installation shall be considered 2. Hanson and Blatz, Radiation Hygiene
separate from the main exhaust system. Handbook.
F. Radioactive Airborne and Liquid Effluent H. Walls and Floors: Epoxy coatings, laminates, floor
Discharges: DRS prohibits discharge of radioactive coverings, and protective coatings shall be utilized for
material into laboratory sinks. Provision shall be made ease of decontamination and to provide a protective
in the design for installation of appropriate sampling coating that can be readily removed without extensive
probes for sampling capability to assess airborne and damage to the existing facility and surfaces.
liquid effluent discharge streams, including main
exhaust systems, sufficient to demonstrate compliance I. Sinks: Sinks shall be either plastic composite or
with the requirements of 10 CFR 20.1302. Liquid efflu- coated with epoxy or the equivalent to ease decontami-
ent monitoring can be accomplished by batch, compos- nation of surfaces. Stainless steel is also an option for
ite, or continuous sampling prior to discharge into the sinks. Soapstone shall not be used.
sanitary sewer system. Design and construction con-
siderations for airborne radioactive effluent monitoring J. Air Filtration: Air filtration systems (activated char-
shall include the following: coal/HEPA filtration) shall be installed and tested in
accordance with ANSI/American Society of Mechanical
1. All systems for use with radioactive materials Engineers Standard N510-2007, Testing of Nuclear Air
shall have the capacity to sample the airborne Cleaning Systems. The activated charcoal and HEPA
effluent being discharged, primarily gases and filters shall be tested with current state-of-the-art meth-
vapors. ods and techniques for filter efficiency and compliance
with technical specifications at the factory and after
2. Sufficient capacity shall be provided for sam- installation at NIH facilities.
pling the combined discharge, specifically gases
and vapors, at a common point located inside K. Fume Hoods: Chemical fume hoods for radio-
the mechanical room downstream of the filters nuclide use shall be designed in accordance with all
and upstream of exhaust fans.
requirements and associated references in Chapter 6, new equipment, changes in shielding, changes in the
Mechanical Design. output of the radiation, or changes in usage of the unit.
With respect to the use of radiation-producing equip-
A typical chemical fume hood designed for hazardous ment and/or machines, the following design guidance
materials is acceptable as a radioisotope fume hood. shall be used:
The hood design shall include smooth, non-porous
surfaces for ease of decontamination. The fume hood 1. National Council on Radiation Protection
shall be constructed of materials that will not gener- and Measurements (NCRP) Report No. 102,
ate mixed waste if the surfaces and the construction Medical X-Ray, Electron Beam and Gamma-
materials interact with the radioactive materials. Refer Ray Protection for Energies up to 50 MeV
to Chapter 6. (Equipment Design, Performance and Use,
1989)
L. Vacuum Systems: Vacuum systems shall be protected
from contamination and exhausted to the exterior of 2. NCRP Report No. 151, Structural Shielding
the facility. Refer to Chapter 12. Design and Evaluation for Megavoltage X- and
Gamma-Ray Radiotherapy Facilities, 2005
M. Irradiators Utilized in Medical Research: The DRS
shall be contacted when designing/installing an irra- 3. NCRP Report No. 147, Structural Shielding
diator. Irradiators are designed to contain significant Design for Medical X-Ray Imaging, November
amounts of radioactive material and therefore are 19, 2004
designed with engineering controls, as well as adequate
shielding to perform the necessary functions utilized in The documents referenced above shall be used by DRS to:
medical research. The following facility design parame- 1. Implement an as low as reasonably achievable
ters shall be evaluated and satisfied for the construction (ALARA) program to minimize radiation expo-
to adequately house this equipment: sure to occupationally exposed individuals and
1. Adequate structural integrity of floor loads the general public
given the amount of shielding and associated 2. Provide the appropriate design criteria as they
weight of this equipment relate to radiation-producing equipment and/or
2. Adequate available means for moving this machines
equipment to its location (e.g., loads on eleva- 3. Provide structural shielding requirements for
tors and pathways) any new installations or installations undergo-
3. Feasibility and preference to locate equipment ing renovations or changes
on the lower floors of a facility (e.g., ground The factors, workload, use, and occupancy as defined
floor, basement, or subbasement) due to shield- in the appropriate NCRP handbooks, shall be utilized
ing requirements to calculate and design the necessary shielding require-
4. Physical security measures for the room and/ ments. The annual dose-equivalent limit for design
or facility housing the irradiator. No penetra- purposes shall be 10-mRem public exposure and 500-
tions greater than .06 m 2 (96 in 2) into irradiator mRem occupational exposure.
rooms without DRS approval. O. MRI: With respect to the use of MRI devices, the
5. Electrical support to provide power to all following regulations and design considerations apply
required security systems including access (questions and further information should be directed
control. to DOHS):
N. Radiation-Producing Equipment and/or Machines: 1. U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA)
The DRS shall be notified when there is any change regulation 21 CFR 892.1000, Magnetic
in the setup of radiation-producing equipment or Resonance Imaging
machines. This includes purchase and installation of
2. Security requirements for housing and enclos- 5. Warning placards, signs, and postings, which
ing the equipment may also include barriers
3. Warning placards, signs, and postings, which 6. Appropriate personal protective equipment
may also include barriers warnings prior to entering and/or working with
the equipment to mitigate and prevent eye and
4. Warning requirements for cardiac pacemak- skin exposure
ers as well as other prosthetic devices and/or
equipment 7. Shunt trip interlock with laser equipment or
doors may be required if door is inadvertently
5. Shielding requirements to minimize radiation opened while equipment is being operated
exposure to electric and magnetic fields
A Class III laser system is a medium-pulse system
6. Posting concerning electrical hazards requiring control measures to prevent viewing of the
P. Lasers: With respect to the use of lasers, specifically direct beam. Design and control measures emphasize
high-power lasers, the following regulations and design preventing direct access to the primary or reflected
considerations apply (questions and further information beam. Safety eyewear is necessary and required with
should be directed to DOHS): this class of laser. High-power lasers (e.g., CO2 lasers)
are classified as Class IV lasers in 21 CFR 1040. These
1. FDA regulation 21 CFR 1040, Performance lasers produce radiation so powerful as to cause injury
Standards for Light-Emitting Products with a direct or reflected exposure, even when the beam
is scattered or diffused by a rough surface or smoke
2. ANSI Standard for the Safe Use of Lasers, screens. Class IV radiation lasers emit more than 0.5 W
ANSI Standard 2136.1, 1986 continuous output. Laser facilities shall be designed to
3. Conference of Radiation Control Program minimize the use of reflective/refractive surfaces to pro-
Directors (latest edition) vide additional protection to occupational personnel.
Contents:
1.12.0 Introduction
C. Record-Keeping: Data monitoring of pest num- accumulate and pests can harbor. General components
bers and observations on housekeeping and structural of facility design and construction that impact an effec-
deficiencies tive pest prevention program are:
D. Pest Control without Pesticides: Pest exclusion, trap- A. Overall facility design and construction, includ-
ping, screening, and caulking used as effective, long ing the materials and construction detailing and the
term methods of pest prevention and applied with a equipment and construction processes used to build the
high degree of safety and effectiveness facility. Facility components and layout shall minimize
points of pest ingress and harborage and optimize acces-
E. Pest Control with Pesticides: Pesticide application sibility for cleaning, sanitation, and pest inspection.
using the safest, most effective methods, and only where
needed B. Housekeeping as it relates to design and sanitation,
throughout the surrounding building area and inside
F. Program Evaluation: Data/observations monitoring the facility.
periodically summarized and reviewed to evaluate pro-
gram effectiveness C. Pest management service implemented during
construction.
G. Safety: Significant reduction of the use of pesticides
through IPM and emphasis on the use of more perma- D. Facility durability and sustainability over the life
nent non-pesticidal control practices, minimizing the cycle of a facility, changes in the envelope, interior
potential of exposure to pesticides by the research envi- layout and equipment, and animal facility use and pro-
ronment and NIH staff grams have a direct influence on pest activity in and
around a facility.
H. Quality Assurance: Technical oversight providing an
objective, ongoing evaluation of program activities and Specific areas of importance are:
effectiveness
1. Staff support areas, including break rooms,
I. DOHS CHB Involvement: CHB management of IPM locker rooms, and administrative and
programs in biomedical laboratories and ARFs, with conference space
involvement during the planning, design, and construc-
tion phases of new construction and alteration projects. 2. Shipping or receiving areas (including loading
The PO and design team shall involve the CHB early dock and storage facilities)
during the planning and design process for any project 3. Personnel entry points
to obtain input on proposed designs from the pest-man-
agement perspective. 4. Areas with solid waste management or
recycling activities
Contents:
1.13.0 Introduction
1.13.2 Applicability
1.13.3 References
1.13.4 Procedures
C. The security requirements outlined in this DRM to actions being taken that impact existing phys-
are not applicable to General Services Administration ical security.
(GSA) leased facilities. The Federal Protective Service
(FPS) oversees GSA lease facilities and is responsible for 2. DPSM will identify physical security require-
providing risk assessments and physical security require- ments for each project during the Pre-Project
ments for such facilities. Upon request, the DPSM may Planning Phase which will be further developed
provide consultative support to the NIH customer on as the design matures.
FPS physical security requirements and when NIH is B. Planning Phase:
renovating space under COTR authority in a GSA lease.
1. The consideration of security components and
incorporation of required elements early in the
planning and design process is more economi-
cal than the incorporation of security elements
1.13.3 References late in design or during construction. Due to the
New and emerging threats within the United States unique security requirements of each project,
necessitate periodic updates to federal security require- the A/E shall contact the NIH DPSM through
ments. Therefore, physical security requirements and the PO in the early planning stages to ensure
guidelines unique to the mission of the NIH include, compliance.
but are not limited to:
2. The planning phase may include the develop-
1. DHS Interagency Security Committee (ISC) ment of a POR, FPAA, bridging or other docu-
Standards: The Risk Management Process for ments based on the type of procurement action
Federal Facilities anticipated.
2. NIST Federal Information Processing Standards When applicable, DPSM will endorse the FPAA,
(FIPS) POR or other planning documents to validate
the physical security requirements that are
3. NIH MasterSPEC included in the project.
4. NIH Policy Manual Chapter 1381 Physical 3. Planning documents must be approved by cus-
Security Project Requirements for NIH Owned tomers/stakeholders prior to the start of the
and Leased Facilities design phase.
5. DPSM Policies and Design Requirements (PDR) C. Design Phase
Necessary sections and or appendices of the DPSM 1. DPSM will adhere to the ORF Permit Review
PDR will be provided to the project when appropriate Process in coordinating project physical security
through coordination with DPSM. requirements with the design teams.
in accordance with the ORF Permit Review 4. The A/E and/or contractor shall verify that the
Process to ensure the project security require- project security systems, features, hardware,
ments are incorporated into the design. etc. are installed, tested and commissioned in
accordance with the final, approved design and
4. For designs/projects that impact existing or any approved change orders as applicable.
include new security systems or features, final
design submissions must be approved by DPSM
prior to being released for bid. If a design is
amended during the advertisement/award period
impacting the physical security requirements, 1.13.5 Additional
DPSM must review the scope of the amendment
to ensure it remains in compliance with federal
Requirements
security requirements. A. Equipment: All security systems, including hardware
and software, should be purchased at the latest possible
5. For lease replacement through the General time to maximize the length of warranties and to avoid
Services Administration (GSA), Institutes and equipment becoming obsolete prior to installation.
Centers may request DPSM to serve as a secu-
rity consultant. In such cases, DPSM will offer B. Contractor Tools and Instruments: The contrac-
recommendations and coordinate activities with tor must submit a request to the PO to use Explosive
the Federal Protective Service as necessary. Powder Actuated Tools (EPAT) to perform work under
the contract. The PO shall provide a signed copy of the
6. When security systems or equipment are to be approved permit to the Contractor/authorized/desig-
added, modified either temporarily or perma- nated Project Manager (PM) responsible for the proj-
nently, or integrated with existing systems by a ect and tools. When requested by NIH Security, the
project, the A/E shall coordinate with DPSM to contractor shall provide a register of the individuals
ensure project security systems or hardware are with access to the EPATs, the secure storage locations
compatible with existing NIH security systems, if kept on the NIH premises, and operator training
infrastructure, and processes. certifications.
D. Construction/Renovation/Project Completion C. Project Notifications: Contractors must notify the
Phases: DPSM initially through the PO for all security related
information.
1. Change Orders: The ORF PO will notify DPSM
of change orders affecting the physical security D. Photographing and Video Recording: When photo-
features or requirements. DPSM shall review graphic or video recording documentation is necessary
each physical security change and provide for the project, contact the PO and DPSM for necessary
comments within the schedule established for approvals prior to taking photos or recording video.
Government reviews.
Contents:
1.14.0 Introduction
1.14.3 Occupancy
of compliance with the DRM in preparation of the con- all work required by the contract that the CO deter-
tract documents or the contractor from responsibility of mines meets contract requirements or that portion of
compliance with the contract documents. the work the CO determines can be accepted separately.
Acceptance by the CO shall be final and conclusive
C. Inspection and Testing: All work shall be con- except for latent defects, fraud, gross mistakes amount-
ducted under the general direction of the CO and is ing to fraud, or the Governments rights under any war-
subject to Government inspection of and testing at all ranty or guarantee.
places and at all reasonable times before acceptance to
ensure strict compliance with the terms of the contract. H. Basic Warranties: It is in the best interest of the
Government inspections and tests are for the sole ben- Government to have the entire construction project
efit of the Government and do not relieve the contractor warranted. OPDIV COs shall insert in full text, FAR
of responsibility for providing adequate quality-control clause 52.246-21, Warranty of Construction, into con-
measures, nor relieve the contractor of responsibility struction contracts as well as design-build contracts.
for damage to or loss of the material before acceptance, This clause provides for the following: The contractor,
constitute or imply acceptance, or affect the continuing whether a construction contractor or a design-build
rights of the Government after acceptance of the com- contractor, essentially warrants that work performed
pleted work under the contract. under its contract conforms to the contract require-
ments and is free of any defect in equipment, material,
D. Inspections: The presence or absence of a Government or design furnished, or workmanship performed by
inspector does not relieve the contractor from any con- the contractor or any subcontractor or supplier at any
tract requirement, nor is the inspector authorized to tier. The standard warranty period extends usually for
change any term or condition of the contract without one year from the date of final acceptance of the work.
the COs written authorization. Contractors shall provide warranties in a separate
E. Inspection Reports: Inspection reports regardless of binder with points-of-contact names, addresses, and all
the pass or fail status, shall be copied to the PO and CO. applicable phone and fax numbers.
the Government, and all warranties are to be enforced contractor, an equitable adjustment should be made in
for the benefit of the Government. the contract price, the time of completion, or both, and
the contract should be modified in writing accordingly.
The management of the warranty process should be
passed to the maintenance staff operating the facility. E. Occupancy Agreements: The CO shall prepare an
This group of individuals identifies the actual problem appropriate letter to the contractor setting forth the
through troubleshooting processes and determines if it extent of the occupancy and its effective date and time.
is in fact a warranty issue. Then appropriate action and Lists of deficiencies and omissions in the occupied area
follow-up can occur as well as a documented history. should be included. In addition, when partial occupancy
This staff also works with the CO to resolve any items in is required, an agreement with the contractor must be
dispute and provide any necessary technical information executed that delineates facility service responsibilities
to the CO for enforcement of the warranty requirement. (maintenance, utilities, security, etc.).
Contents:
1.15.0 Introduction
1.15.3.1 Penetrations
including as required to protect from condensation mitigate potential disruptions and impact to research.
(where applicable). The use of box-out arrangements for Backfeeds are not permitted in hazardous services or
drains and troughs is not recommended and may only where the arrangement could induce any safety hazard.
be acceptable for non-containment, non-critical areas,
where keyed into the slab and water-safed beyond all E. Excavation: Prior to any excavation, underground
seams, and designed to maintain integrity permanently. services shall be reliably located and marked above
Use of corrosion resistant safing membranes (whether ground and approval obtained for the date of excava-
liquid or sheet type) is required for floor penetrations tion activities by the PO. Where local utility marking
through potentially wet areas and whenever above sen- services are not available on Federal Property, an inde-
sitive spaces (including mechanical rooms, aquatics pendent marking contractor should be provided. An
spaces, food service, and above ground ARF areas). appropriate risk mitigation plan shall be made where
work is near any hazardous piping or services to any
clinical facility, research laboratory building or animal
research facility (ARF), so as to minimize damage and
ensure safety. The A/E shall specify for the contractor
1.15.2 Preservation of Service to include development of an action plan to facilitate
immediate restoration of service in the event of any
A. Renovation Projects: In renovation projects, when-
breach, prior to undertaking any excavation activities.
ever connections are made into existing systems to
Such action plan shall include, but not be limited to
serve new equipment, additions, or renovated areas, the
availability of personnel, materials, and backfeed provi-
A/E shall ensure that the existing system will not be
sions, as well as in-place contact procedures with facil-
adversely affected, contaminated, disrupted, or in any
ity and emergency response personnel in the event of an
case fall below the standards of code or DRM require-
accident or unplanned line damage.
ments as a result of the new work.
F. Systems Integrity Control Plan: The A/E shall con-
B. Tapping of Services: The A/E shall specify that tap-
firm with the PO to ensure compliance with any Systems
pings shall be made only by qualified personnel follow-
Integrity Control Plans, Approval to Tap Plans, Utility
ing appropriate procedures so as to protect the facility
Moratoriums, etc. No modifications may be made to
and maintain safety, including any necessary purging of
high purity water, animal drinking water, medical
lines and verification and reverification of safe condi-
gas, biowaste, high containment vacuum, hazardous
tions immediately before work is conducted.
exhaust, pharmaceutical systems or other systems that
C. Capacity Assessment and Effect on Existing may be sensitive to contamination or potentially haz-
Services: Effect on the capacity of existing services ardous without written approval from the PO to pro-
shall be evaluated prior to extensions of services and ceed. Approved work shall be conducted to maintain
as required for accurate calculation. This may require system cleanliness and integrity.
the A/E to study existing infrastructure and systems
capacity far beyond the actual planned point of con-
nection to ensure adequacy, including but not limited
to investigation of record drawings and surveys, and/
or monitoring. Provision of meters and data logging at 1.15.3 Technical
appropriate strategic locations and monitored over suf- Requirements of Systems
ficient duration with a subsequent evaluation of data/
loading assessment shall be considered along with other
Planning
appropriate engineering assessment, especially where A. Coordination and Space Planning: Systems shall be
all spaces may not be accessible or documents may not properly coordinated with other disciplines and struc-
be available or reliably current. ture early in predesign and throughout the design pro-
cess to ensure required utilities arrangements are main-
D. Backfeed Plans: Backfeeds of appropriate fluid qual- tained and provided with organized and appropriate
ity shall be provided where necessary to maintain ser- service access.
vices. Tap plans shall be appropriately coordinated to
F. Grounding: All conductive piping systems shall be I. Utility Sizing: If a major utility service is required
properly bonded to an appropriate grounding electrode for a project but is not present, the utility sizing/capac-
system. ity shall be approved by ORF. In many cases this may
require upsizing of services beyond those required for
G. Electrical Coordination: The A/E shall appropri- an individual project.
ately differentiate between redundant (or standby)
equipment demands and loads produced from normal J. Underground Utilities: Provision of a geotechnical
operation when coordinating with electrical disciplines. report by a design professional is required for all new
Equipment capability to accommodate the 20% overage and major projects where underground utilities will be
allowance shall be considered as part of routine normal buried, including within the building. The report shall
loads. Where equipment must operate in simultaneous address specific requirements for utilities, including but
operation (e.g., normally at reduced loads and in some not limited to soil corrosivity issues and protection of
cases under full load) ensure electrical has been appro- piping from corrosion-induced failure, groundwater,
priately coordinated and systems commissioned for bedding and compaction requirements, and any addi-
such conditions. tional requirements unique to the project site to ensure
equipment through use of corrosion-resistant bases. redundant to minimize potential for plausible
Cleanability shall be maintained for all sanitary and single point failure.
sensitive spaces.
3. N + 1 arrangements shall, unless otherwise
N. Critical Equipment Coordination: Systems whose directed, be online and operational (such as
failure could result in significant loss of research, safety, automatic alternating/lead-lag), reduced load
or facility damage shall be coordinated with all other operation, or otherwise configured to ensure
disciplines as necessary to address plausible single point equal wear time, reliability, and availability of
failure. A risk assessment may be required. the redundant source.
O. Fail-Safe Condition: Upon unplanned loss of energy, 4. Equipment which may operate in an automatic,
systems and their associated control devices shall fail but not PLC controlled mode may be utilized in
only to a normally safe condition, defined as a condition lieu of redundant PLCs, where such use is deter-
which prevents injury to persons or animals, damage mined suitable, compliant with the intent to pre-
to the facility, equipment, or infrastructure; and which clude disruptions, and would not otherwise pose
minimizes any potential disruption to research. excessive risks. Arrangements may include con-
stant pressure bypass control arrangements (e.g.,
P. Automatic Restart: Upon a power failure and sub- arrangements that automatically revert upon PLC
sequent restoration of power, all devices required for failure to sequence with automatic control valves
proper system operation shall automatically restart such as pressure regulators as opposed to elec-
without requiring manual intervention, unless such tronic controls). Where such arrangements are
automatic restoration would pose a safety hazard. made, failure of PLC conditions shall still provide
Q. Manual Actuation: Where the failure of an auto- alert notification.
mated valve could result in loss of a critical service, such 5. The A/E shall carefully consider the design
valves shall include a manual means for actuation. capacity split and equipment quantities pro-
R. Equipment Redundancy: Primary system equipment vided with regard to maintaining proper system
and devices requiring frequent maintenance or perform- operation in an energy and cost-efficient manner
ing major control functions shall be provided with not (e.g., providing three equipment items at 50%
less than N + 1 redundancy (in parallel), appropriately load may be preferable to two at 100%, or alter-
sized and selected for efficient operation and durability. native capacity splits), especially if peak demand
Unless otherwise noted, the N + 1 arrangement shall is low during much of the operating time; as well
include both the equipment item, as well as the control as the appropriate use of variable speed drives.
system (programmable logic controller [PLC]) so as to Appropriate devices may be staged to ensure
avoid common, plausible failures and to minimize risks. efficient operation while maintaining appropri-
ate capacity for essential building function.
1. Any equipment item whose failure or routine
maintenance would result in substantial loss of 6. The A/E shall assess the need for redundancy by
building operations or could impact research reviewing if potential and plausible failure of the
or scientific equipment shall be provided with equipment or appurtenance could result in either
required redundancy. All such systems and their substantial loss of the utility service to an entire
respective monitoring devices shall be arranged building or multiple buildings, disrupt provision
with standby power supply. (Refer to Chapter 10, of any function that serves life support (human
Electrical Design). Where transfer time from loss or animal), or potentially impact an entire pro-
of normal power to standby power cannot be tol- gram, building area (such as multiple floors) or
erated, consideration should be provided for the disrupt research operations.
use of Uninterruptible Power Source (UPS). 7. The A/E shall coordinate the alarm and critical
2. Controls and equipment arrangements for requirements of each discipline and ensure that
primary infrastructure components shall be alarm functions and critical system functions
are not subject to plausible single point failure
associated with work of other supporting build- or unacceptable heat gain that may plausibly cause
ing systems (e.g., requirements for redundancy damage, disrupt system operation, or compromise fluid
of equipment shall not be vulnerable to a single quality. Temperature protection based solely on insula-
controller failure, alarm panels shall not be vul- tion and heat tracing is unacceptable.
nerable to failure associated with a single fuse
or circuit; systems shall not fail due to a series
control arrangement, etc.). 1.15.3.1 Penetrations
A. Sealed Penetrations: Floor and wall penetrations
8. N+1 redundancy is not required for dedicated shall be minimized and all penetrations shall be appro-
office or other non-critical spaces as approved priately sealed to prevent leakage and maintain the fire
by ORF; however such systems shall still be rating of the structure for the life of the facility.
arranged to minimize likely failures or extended
disruption. Refer to individual sections for B. Compatible Sealants: Where sealants are used, they
redundancy requirements for non-critical areas. shall be verified compatible with the penetrating com-
ponent. See Appendix L, Sealant Table.
G. Large Animal Spaces: Large animal spaces (larger C. Access Control: High containment access control
than NHP) may be subject to additional project-spe- shall use fail-secure methodology. This allows for a fire
cific requirements. The A/E shall consult the program alarm to not automatically override the facility perim-
requirements and with the ORF as required to deter- eter security locking system. For specific physical secu-
mine individual requirements. rity requirements contact PO to coordinate with DPSM;
see Section 1.13.
L. Exposed Piping: Exposed piping shall be chemically DRS, NIH, ORF and others. Guidance for properly
compatible, non-porous, smooth, with sanitary sur- conducting a risk assessment is available from standards
faces, and shall utilize sanitary type piping clamps and organizations including International Organization for
supports. Hangers/clamps and all associated attach- Standardization (ISO), and the AS/NZS 4360 Australia/
ments shall be corrosion resistant (typically stainless New Zealand Standard for Risk Management.
steel with plastic grommets), free of sharps, and where
applied in ABSL-3 areas exposed piping shall be in con- Disaster planning is of the utmost importance in
formance with ASME BPE-2002 and properly sealed research facilities as the unplanned loss of critical infra-
with an approved sealant. structure and consequences of system failures can lead
to the potential loss of research, extensive disruption,
M. Service Access Panels: Access panels and openings and risks to safety. The A/E should work with research
through containment barrier walls or ceilings shall be personnel to determine what courses of action should
avoided. The use of full stainless steel access cabinets be taken if failure of one or more systems should occur,
with closed backs and sides, gaskets, and stainless steel and to evaluate potential risks and their preventative
pipe inlets weld sealed to the box can be utilized to pro- and mitigating actions. Items to consider, though not
vide a sealed, recessed box arrangement. Access doors all inclusive are: how to handle supply deliveries during
are not acceptable in ABSL-3 areas or insectaries. severe weather or natural disasters (fuel gas, caging
supplies, animal drinking water, maintaining safe ARF
environmental control, etc.); how to appropriately size
reserves for delayed deliveries; how to setup monitoring
and alarm systems to notify personnel; how to establish
1.15.6 Risk Assessment, appropriate redundancy; how to access, maintain, and
Systems Failure & Disaster repair downed equipment in a safe, secure manner with
minimal disturbance to research.
Mitigation
At the pre-project planning stage an A/E should inves- A. System Design Considerations: Systems shall be
tigate all facets of the research and how it dictates the designed and materials selected to minimize poten-
program, equipment, and necessary infrastructure. tial for loss of service; to avoid or minimize impact on
In order to fully evaluate the project requirements, research and facility operations in the event of disaster or
risk assessments should be conducted by the appro- malfunction; and to avoid design errors that may cause
priate party(s) (as applicable to each issue) to identify or significantly extend damage or failure. Throughout
and address hazards and their mitigating actions, and the planning and design stages, the A/E shall evaluate
to ensure sufficient consideration of elements as may each system design to assess potential steps that should
affect achieving an optimal design. A properly con- be taken to alleviate future damage, service disruptions,
ducted risk assessment should measure the criticality and promote rapid restoration of temporary and normal
of each architectural and engineering system and asso- services in the event of a failure.
ciated components, its potential for failure, and the B. Site and Project-Specific Risks: The A/E shall
consequences involved during a failure scenario. Once consider the site and project-specific risks associated
the risk assessment has been conducted, appropriate with each system. Appropriate steps shall be taken in
corrective action plans should be provided to mitigate design to ensure maintenance of critical services and
hazards. The degree of formality of risk assessments control of risks.
and their subsequent corrective action plans may vary
by application, however the provision of formal risk C. Qualified Personnel: A comprehensive risk assess-
assessment and corrective action plans is required for ment by qualified, personnel is required for any toxic or
hazardous systems and high containment applications. hazardous service, as well as for any system or process
Each risk assessment should be performed by a team of whose failure could result in a significant loss of research.
individuals, inclusive of responsible parties and subject
matter specialist. Risk assessments must be reviewed D. Disaster Response Plan Coordination: Provisions to
and approved by the NIH, and may additionally include address disaster response in regard to engineering systems
Principal Investigator(s), representatives of DOHS, shall be coordinated with facility disaster response plans.
E. Requirements: Examples of requirements that shall 9. Avoid locating critical controls or sensitive ele-
be considered by the A/E during project design and ments in proximity to other items or equipment
include but are not limited to the following: that may impart damage or safety hazards.
1. Segregate major/critical redundant infrastruc- 10. Locate all emergency devices, maintenance
ture systems such that a catastrophic failure, fire, devices, and critical components to be readily
utility disruption etc. does not negate planned accessible (including under emergency condi-
redundancy. tions); verify proper operation and commis-
sioning; and ensure appropriate O&M data has
2. Carefully evaluate arrangements and locations been provided.
of components for continuity, service quality,
and safety, including their failure sequences and 11. Locate equipment and appurtenances in uncon-
potential for cascading failure. cealed or readily accessible locations as appro-
priate for the device and to facilitate routine
3. Coordinate the planning of support and moni- inspection.
toring infrastructure to preclude single point
and control cascading failures. 12. Locate major infrastructure equipment where
not susceptible to flooding, freezing, or other
4. Conduct an appropriate assessment of the risk hazards and where damage, rupture, or leakage
and consequences of plausible single point fail- of piping or equipment would not cause addi-
ures, including potential for simultaneous or tional negative consequences.
cascading failures and address required engi-
neering provisions commensurate with the risk. 13. Review installation of thermal and vibration
accommodation provisions, anchorage and brac-
5. Follow good engineering practice in the design ing, restraints, flexible connectors, and similar
and analysis of all systems as well as review of devices designed to accommodate movement;
installations to ensure safe and proper opera- ensure such devices are provided at all required
tion; minimize risk of failures; ensure where fail- locations.
ures occur they are controlled in a safe manner
and damage and disruption are minimized to 14. Ensure adequate drainage for utility tunnels to
the extent possible. accommodate normal operations, as well as con-
sideration of impacts from a pipe break or external
6. Conduct a site-specific risk assessment appropri- water ingress (such as from high groundwater).
ate to the application and hazard, including but
not limited to natural hazards; meet with the 15. Ensure adequate separation between sensitive
program administrators to discuss, plan, and electrical infrastructure and potential sources
integrate design and response plans. of steam and water exposure especially as may
occur under plausible failure conditions.
7. Properly seal each penetration regardless of size,
provision of adequate drainage, and installation 16. Ensure adequate quality control for materials,
of raised sleeves to preclude water migration construction, qualified installers, and test and
from floor to floor in the event of leakage. validation processes.
8. Locate utilities and source equipment in safe 17. Provide sufficient utility isolation and provi-
areas where failure risks and consequences can sions to permit back-feeding/backfeed-insertion
be minimized. Avoid piping above critical and points to serve critical application and ARF in
sensitive areas (such as electrical rooms, data the event of service loss.
rooms, data and records storage, imaging equip-
ment, clean rooms, etc.). 18. Ensure critical equipment is appropriately moni-
tored and alarmed.
22. Provide hardwire interlocks for critical safety 1.15.7 Failure Corrections
components, redundancy where appropriate,
and proper fail-safe status for all controls.
and Root Cause Analysis
A. Analysis/Action: For any case where a failure or
23. Consider the potential for and consequences of repetitive failures has occurred, the need for root cause
mechanical damage, water damage, chemical analysis and mitigating action shall be considered and
exposure, electrical failures, and environmental the recurrence of repetitive failures shall be reported to
consequences for all installations. ORF. The A/E shall notify the PO if it is believed such
action is necessary but out of scope.
24. Consider the most plausible failure conditions,
appropriate response to address failures, and B. Failure Causes: The A/E shall be careful to not just
risks of operating errors and safely design sys- address the immediate repair of failures, but also to con-
tems and communicate hazards to contain risks. sider potential underlying causes and any safety impact.
Contents
2.1.0 Introduction 2.1.3 Laboratory Planning
2.1.3.6 Flexibility
The purpose of the predesign phase is to identify and 2. Division of Facilities Planning (DFP)
document factors that will impact the project to ensure
that the design will yield an efficient workplace that is 3. Division of Environmental Protection (DEP)
responsive to scientific objectives, and be ergonomic, 4. Division of Occupational Health and Safety
safe, and well suited for investigative staff. The intent (DOHS)
of this phase is to gather information and to identify
issues to delineate a wide range of parameters including 5. Division of Radiation Safety (DRS)
type(s) of research, project objectives, projected staff-
ing, space requirements, existing conditions, design cri- 6. Division of the Fire Marshall (DFM)
teria, site planning issues, schedule, budget, energy and 7. Division of Facilities Stewardship (DFS)
life cycle costs, and considerations for future growth.
Development of a comprehensive project program docu- 8. Utilities Engineering Branch (UEB)
ment in the early stages of a project facilitates the design
process by providing a reference against which subse- 9. Division of Facilities Operations and
quent decisions and development can be tested. Maintenance (DFOM)
The NIH requires an integrated planning and design 10. Division of Physical Security Management
process that seeks the active and continuing participa- (DPSM)
tion of all stakeholders who are affected by the proj- 11. Center for Information Technology (CIT)
ect from planning through activation and operation.
Stakeholders must be familiar with the requirements of 12. Architectural Design Review Board (ADRB)
the particular project, as well as the goals of NIH. At a
minimum, the stakeholders who must actively partici- 13. Office of Hospital Physical Environment
pate in the projects plan and program phase include: (OHPE)
A. Executive Oversight: Scientific director and/or exec- 14. Clinical Center Office of Facility Management
utive officer, program facility manager, project officer (CCOFM)
(PO), including representatives of the Institute or Center 15. Transportation Management Branch (TMB)
(IC) that will occupy the project
16. Additional NIH and municipal and jurisdic-
B. Users: Principal investigators (PIs) and their del- tional entities as determined by the PO
egates, technical staff, administrative staff, etc. who are
involved in the use and operation of the laboratory
renovations; they provide a framework for development areas that may be impacted by the project. Available
that achieves growth objectives while protecting and as-built information including drawings, specifications,
enhancing the environmental qualities of NIH sites and and testing reports shall be collected and field verified
surrounding communities. In NIH master plans, key to establish an accurate project baseline. Inaccessible
planning elements, major relationships and patterns, areas that require inspection shall be identified for fur-
and standards are defined, including the issues of build- ther investigation during early design phases. Structural
ing size and mass, site characteristics, open space defini- capacities and clearances shall be verified as they may
tion, and site access and circulation. limit program opportunities and flexibility. For proj-
ects on new sites, geotechnical, property surveys, topo-
graphical information, utility, forestation, wetland, and
Rationale: Adherence to master plans ensures all other pertinent information shall be obtained.
that planning strategies are recognized and
followed. B. Utilities: The size, location, and condition of exist-
ing utilities serving the project site shall be verified. The
adequacy of capacities relative to project requirements
must be determined during programming to establish
required upgrades and availablility for future growth.
2.1.2 Project Program Factors to facilitate decisions on these issues shall be
The project program includes a definition of the pro- clearly outlined during this phase.
gram, including organizational and design concepts,
C. Current Program: If the program under develop-
facts, goals, and space needs. Organizational and design
ment is intended to serve an existing user group, valu-
concepts include functional relationships, adjacency
able information can be obtained by touring the groups
requirements and other form-giving parameters. Facts
existing laboratories to observe their processes and sup-
include site constraints, regulatory and code require-
port activities, equipment to be relocated, facility defi-
ments. Goals include customer and user expectations.
ciencies to be rectified, and the general cultural dynam-
Needs include physical requirements, utility distribu-
ics and relationships among user groups.
tion, and other similar project requirements.
D. Safety: The safety of building occupants shall be a
A laboratory project program requires an understand-
primary factor in decision making. Safety shall be con-
ing of the general processes and specialized functions to
sidered in all of its aspects, including biological and
be conducted within a research lab. Laboratory plan-
hazardous materials safety, physical safety and security,
ners must determine the specialized needs of the spe-
and occupational safety.
cific discipline. Different fields of research have varying
demands for bench configuration, containment devices, E. Hazardous Materials: Program requirements for use
lab utilities, support space, equipment density, safety, and storage of hazardous materials, including chemi-
and other criteria. cals, radiologic materials, and biologic agents, may be
determined by code and regulatory requirements. The
project team shall identify the authority having juris-
2.1.2.1 Project Parameters
diction for establishing allowable quantities of hazard-
Program development parameters that frame the project ous materials, and shall document requirements for
scope shall be identified so that they will inform deci- the project based on proposed project location, areas
sions made throughout the design phase. Initial proj- within the project, and applicable codes.
ect parameters are generally defined in the Statement
of Work (SOW) and Program of Requirements (POR). F. Building Integrity Guidelines: Several NIH campus
Program development is the process of expanding this buildings in Bethesda, Maryland, have integrity guide-
information to a greater level of detail. lines that provide criteria and design restrictions for
future alterations. All renovations within buildings
A. Boundaries: The project boundaries shall be with Integrity Guidelines shall adhere to the require-
defined, including site constraints, service utility areas, ments set forth in the guidelines. Confirm applicability
dedicated corridors and adjacent occupied out-of-scope of Guidelines with the PO.
G. Sustainability: Identify project sustainability goals C. User Interviews: Interviews to ensure complete data
and appropriate level of third-party certification. At a gathering, and when needed, assist users in completing
minimum, adhere to the HHS Sustainable Buildings questionnaires and schedules
Plan with the intent to be sustainably responsible over
the life of the project. D. Site Survey: Tours of existing laboratories, where
possible, to observe existing conditions, workflow,
H. Budget: Programming-phase information such as equipment and to verify as-built documentation
square footage, infrastructure suitability, and labora-
tory type have inherent cost implications that shall be E. Technical Interviews: Interviews conducted as needed
considered and reconciled with the project budget prior with technical personnel including building maintenance
to commencing with the design phase. Budgets should and operations, safety, security, information technology,
include appropriate contingencies relevant to project and waste management, as well as the building manager,
phase and complexity. the fire marshal, and others as needed.
I. Schedule and Phasing: A project schedule shall be F. Hazardous Materials Inventory: An inventory of
developed that includes programming, design, con- chemicals, and radiological and biological materials
struction, commissioning, and occupancy milestones. used and/or stored must be provided by the stakehold-
The schedule shall include adequate time for NIH and ers and reviewed by Division of Occupational Health
other regulatory reviews and approvals. The schedule and Safety (DOHS) personnel. Data must be checked
may include phasing requirements if required to limit against applicable codes to verify that the proposed
occupant disruption or meet budget parameters. hazardous material use is compliant with allowable
limits for the proposed site.
Rationale: Project parameters form a basis upon G. Room Data Sheets: Room Data Sheets shall be devel-
which decisions can be made throughout the oped for common room types. Due to the specific nature
design process. of research spaces, the information on these data sheets
should be carefully reviewed with room users and doc-
umented accordingly. Room data sheets shall include
2.1.2.2 Data Collection a section for the stakeholders approval (signature).
Data collection is an assessment of project needs of the Typical Room Data sheets are included in Appendix F.
component user groups, including primary scientific H. Equipment Data: Equipment data shall be col-
disciplines, relationship among user groups, biosafety lected and documented. Generic data may be used for
level(s), existing and projected staffing types and quan- common items such as refrigerators and freezers when
tities, space types and quantities, support spaces and these items are not yet procured. Specific detailed
core facilities used, types and quantities of scientific equipment data and technical parameters (cut-sheets)
equipment and associated requirements, operating should be obtained from users whenever possible.
procedures, and inventory of hazardous materials used Manufacturer data sheets shall be obtained for special-
or stored on-site. Data may be collected in the follow- ized scientific equipment to ensure that variability in
ing ways: dimensions, service clearances, utility demands, heat
A. Executive Meeting: A meeting with executive level output, weight, and environmental requirements are
staff to identify stakeholders and to establish lines available for the design phase. Environmental sensitiv-
of communication, project protocols, information ity, shielding requirements, magnetic field and radiation
sources. Other items to identify include project objec- emissions and all other pertinent information shall be
tives, budget, schedule, and constraints. documented. An Equipment Schedule Template is pro-
vided in Appendix G.
B. Program Questionnaire: Questionnaires issued
to each component user group including templates I. Code and Regulatory Requirements: Provide a
for equipment schedules and chemical inventory. See complete listing of applicable code and regulatory
Exhibit 2.1, Research Facilities Program Questionnaire. requirements.
J. Sustainability/Life Cycle Requirements: Provide a In later design phases, additional supporting informa-
specific list of Sustainability goals and objectives, tai- tion shall be added to document decisions made and
lored to the size and scope of the project, and meeting information obtained. Data shall be updated at each
NIH, HHS and other Federal regulations and require- design phase as part of the Basis of Design (BOD), and
ments. Provide a method of monitoring the progress shall be included in the documentation submitted for
toward these goals, and confirming achievement upon NIH reviews and approvals, and shall be used to evalu-
completion. ate the success of the project in meeting programming
objectives.
K. Operating Procedures: An understanding of the
laboratorys standard operating procedures (SOPs) and
daily flow of activities facilitates the successful design of
an efficient, ergonomic laboratory.
been developed. The data assumes equal allocations of 2.1.3.3 Functional Relationships
laboratory and laboratory support space. These rules
The organization of a laboratory facility will be deter-
of thumb apply to general biology laboratories, and do
mined by the structure and operation of the program
not take into account special function labs or animal
as well as practical, safety, and ergonomic factors. It is
facilities. Areas for these specialized functions must be
also important to explore new ideas that may not nec-
included in the overall program formulation.
essarily replicate the existing organizational structure,
including alternative organizational paradigms that
Figure 2.1.3.2 Gross and net area calculations may be cross disciplinary or focus oriented to enhance
Typical proportion of laboratory functions collaboration and resource sharing.
zone via a controlled access point. The laboratory zone All labs contain potential hazards and require access
includes primary and support laboratories, and may control. Laboratories with especially hazardous materi-
include write-up areas. In some cases, investigator als, equipment or procedures (e.g., laser labs, radioiso-
offices may adjoin laboratory space; however, without tope labs, containment labs, and other labs identified
a physical barrier between the two, limitations will be by users or DOHS) shall be physically separated from
imposed on visitor access, consumption of food and other labs and provided with control devices to limit
drink, and types of acceptable finishes. A logistics zone access to authorized personnel. Warning signs indicat-
that includes shared support such as loading docks, ing the hazard may be required.
storage, gas cylinder manifold areas, utility closets,
etc., will also connect via a controlled access point to
the laboratory zone. Physical separation of laboratory 2.1.3.5 Workplace Enhancement
and office areas also creates opportunities for a more The laboratory environment supports personnel who
energy-efficient, zoned heating, ventilation, and air con- spend large portions of their time within a highly tech-
ditioning (HVAC) design. nical workplace. Laboratories design shall promote
physical and psychological well being and shall achieve
Figure 2.1.3.3 identifies adjacencies and relationships high aesthetic, ergonomic and safety standards. The
among primary program components. following guidelines represent typical elements found
The organizational structure of component lab groups in laboratories. During the predesign phase the plan-
and other program elements shall be identified and ner or design team will determine the project-specific
recorded in a matrix that illustrates proximity prefer- space needs.
ences among each program element. Relationships that A. Functional Zoning: Laboratories must be separated
should be defined include: from administrative and personnel support areas and
1. Organizational structure and working relation- secured to prevent access by unauthorized personnel.
ships of component occupant groups Within the laboratory, areas of higher hazard should be
isolated and secured and located in a manner that maxi-
2. Relationships among component divisional mizes safe egress from the laboratory. Laboratory equip-
groups ment and procedures that create excessive noise, heat,
vibration, or require special environmental conditions
3. Relationship of investigator offices to labs should also be separated from regularly occupied areas.
4. Relationship of primary labs to support labs B. Personnel Support: Personnel support areas required
5. Relationship of labs to core and special for the safe conduct of laboratory work shall be pro-
support labs vided at appropriate locations. These typically include
break areas where lab personnel can eat, drink, and
6. Unique program elements requiring special interact outside of the laboratory environment, lockers
consideration or utility services and cabinets for storing coats and personal items, and
areas for donning personal protective equipment (PPE)
prior to entering labs. Consideration should be given
2.1.3.4 Circulation to the placement of lab personnel workstations outside
The patterns of circulation for staff, visitors, materi- of the lab bench area. Workstations can be visually
als, research animals and waste shall consider security, connected but physically separated from the lab for
separation of visitors and staff, isolation of circulation increased safety.
related to research animal facilities, material handling
and distribution, and safety and biohazards. Waste C. Natural Lighting: Natural lighting should be pro-
removal shall include consideration for general waste, vided to the greatest extent possible, in all areas nor-
recycling, and hazardous material marshaling. Another mally occupied, especially areas where researchers spend
aspect of circulation design is the opportunity to enliven the majority of their time including primary laboratory
a facility and provide opportunities for staff meeting areas, write-up workstations, administrative offices, and
and interaction. break areas. Internal windows and interior glazed walls
are encouraged to provide borrowed light and exterior B. Modular Design: A laboratory planning module
views, and to enhance visibility of laboratory personnel shall be employed in the organization of a laboratory
for safety and security. Natural lighting should not be to maximize efficiency of space use, economize con-
provided in support labs and other areas with low occu- struction cost, and standardize location of partitions,
pancy, or where scientific considerations require dark furnishings, and utilities. See Section 2.2.2, Modular
or controlled-light conditions. The extent of exterior Design.
windows in laboratory areas must be moderated to the
extent necessary for thermal stability and light control, C. Open Laboratory Design: Open laboratories are
including glare on BSC sashes and other equipment. large labs in which many modules are contiguous and
open to each other. Open laboratories are an efficient
D. Staff Interaction: Planning concepts shall provide use of lab space, provide opportunities for collabora-
opportunities for communication and informal interac- tion and are more easily reassigned without changes to
tion among building occupants. Common-use interac- the space and utilities. Open bay laboratories shall be
tion spaces including lockers, vending areas, copy areas, used to the greatest extent possible in areas where com-
break areas, lobbies, conference rooms, etc., shall be partmentalization is not required for programmatic or
strategically located to enhance contact and collabora- scientific reasons such as security, containment of occu-
tion among staff. Underutilized and unassigned space pational hazards, regulatory restrictions, environmen-
such as corridor alcoves, open stairwells, and elevator tal separation, etc. See Section 2.2.3, Laboratory Areas.
lobbies can also provide opportunities for interaction,
and may be enhanced with informal seating, com- D. Laboratory Furnishings: Where practical, labora-
munication boards, or natural lighting. Other poten- tory furnishings shall be flexible and/or movable, to
tial interactive spaces include exhibit areas and public allow for reconfiguration without major renovation.
spaces. Careful consideration of the informal interac- Modular systems shall be utilized that permit inter-
tion dynamics shall be discussed and documented as changeability of components or substitution of equip-
part of the predesign phase. ment for bench elements. Benches shall have the capa-
bility to be raised or lowered (i.e., high bench, low
bench) to meet changing needs and provide accessibil-
Rationale: Workplace enhancements are necessary ity. Movable bench tops shall be locked in place for sta-
building elements that promote efficiency, bility. Above the bench, a modular, adjustable system
collaboration, comfort and convenience of of shelving or enclosed cabinets shall be used, provid-
laboratory staff. ing interchangeability of storage elements. Utility ser-
vices shall be delivered to benches via overhead service
carriers, service connections, or umbilicals that allow
2.1.3.6 Flexibility for accessibility for change.
A designed-in degree of flexibility and adaptability
will allow a laboratory to meet evolving research needs E. Utility Systems: Laboratory areas shall be reconfigu-
and functional changes over the life of the facility with rable without major alterations to the utility systems.
minimal disruption to ongoing programs as well as to Modular distribution modes shall be provided that
accommodate changing technologies in scientific pro- allow individual areas to be shut down for alteration or
cedures. The following planning concepts can provide repair without disruption to adjacent areas. Utilities in
flexibility in the new facility. a biosafety level 3 (BSL-3) lab, ARF, and other sensitive
areas shall allow for complete access to all components
A. Generic Design: A generic design shall be used to the requiring service and maintenance without entering
greatest extent possible in primary laboratory areas that these areas.
do not require customization. The goal is to maximize
interchangeability of uses and minimize the need for F. Expansion: Building systems must be readily
renovations when changes in function occur. A generic expandable, consistent with the master plan. The degree
approach should also be applied to typical support labs, of expandability shall be determined early in the design
administrative areas, and other repetitive elements of process. Provisions shall be made for future utility
the design. service expansion, both vertically and horizontally, to
accommodate increased demands. Reserve capacity
shall be designed into the building utility systems biosafety approach and have an impact on the design.
such as vertical shafts to accommodate future growth All laboratories designed for the NIH shall be designed
and change. Spare capacity shall be designed into the to BSL-2 as a minimum standard in accordance with
building systems to allow researchers flexibility to add the latest edition of the Biosafety in Microbiological
equipment and instrumentation as required. and Biomedical Laboratories (BMBL).
Rationale: Flexibility and adaptability ensures Rationale: Risk assessments are crucial for
that a laboratory can meet evolving research identifying the risks that are inherent with
needs and functional changes, and accommodate working with biological material and developing
changing technologies in scientific procedures. the appropriate safeguards.
B. Directional Airflow: Directional airflow is required B. Vibration: Excessive vibration caused by mechani-
to ensure that air moves into the laboratory from adja- cal equipment or inadequate structural stiffness and
cent non-lab areas and towards more contaminated stability can adversely affect a buildings capacity to
areas within the lab. Directional airflow is also used to house advanced research equipment and procedures.
protect research from potential cross-contamination. Structural and mechanical dampening is required to
Airflow diagram illustrating directional airflow at each minimize impact on sensitive scientific instrumenta-
doorway is required to communicate intent among tion and animal health. In new buildings, consideration
architects, engineers and users. should be given to the selection of an optimal building
structural system that provides the required vibration
C. Emergency Shower and Cabinet: Laboratories where performance in large areas of the building, providing
fume hoods are located or corrosives are handled shall equipment placement flexibility. In existing and reno-
be equipped with a emergency shower and corrosive vated buildings, highly sensitive equipment may need to
storage cabinet. All labs, regardless of use, shall be be located on ground-floor slabs or on specially designed
within code-required distance of a emergency shower. isolated slabs. Design analysis and/or on-site testing may
D. Safety: Location of sharps containers and other be reqired to ensure that the building meets performance
disposal containers must be convenient to the work to requirements. Vibration dampening tables or locations
within more vibration-stable parts of the building may
be considered in renovations and other cases where B. Dry Laboratories: Dry laboratories typically house
existing conditions require vibration mitigation. computers, electronics, and instrumentation that do not
require wet services or the use of chemical or biologi-
C. Odor: Design considerations should be given to iso- cal agents. They may be used for computer simulation,
lating functions which produce odors. Directional air- mathematical analysis, and other research that can
flow, exhaust hoods and other means shall be utilized often be housed in office-like space with enhanced elec-
to mitigate and contain unpleasant and irritating odors. trical and IT support. Types of dry laboratories found
D. Signage, Wayfinding, and Graphics: Directional at the NIH include but are not limited to:
graphics and wayfinding signage shall be provided 1. Robotics
to enable navigation within and around the building.
Signage shall identify hazards, building features, and 2. Optics
components. Interior signage shall be designed in accor-
dance with Appendix M, Interior Signage Manual. 3. Imaging
Contents:
2.2.4.1 Offices
2.2.4.2 Lobbies
D. Redundancy/Emergency Utilities: Redundancy and has established 3.4 m (11 ft.) as a standard module
emergency capacities should allow for continued opera- offering versatility, efficiency, and flexibility in most
tions during emergency and failure scenarios upon fail- biomedical laboratory settings. Optimum module
ure of any critical component. width is dictated by an aisle of 1.5 m (5 ft.), plus 762
914 mm (2 ft. 6 in.3 ft.) of bench or equipment on
E. Future Load Capacity: Additional capacity should each side of the aisle. Aisle widths exceeding 1.8 m (6
be provided to allow additional equipment, changing ft.) are discouraged because they tend to accumulate
use and expansion of programs. Additional capacity stored equipment, materials, carts, and impromptu
shall be agreed with the PO during the POR stage of work counters that inhibit safe working clearances
the project. and egress pathways. Because module dimensions
F. Security: Infrastructure should be designed to be are measured from center lines, the thickness of
tamper resistant and secure in accordance with DPSM demising partitions and columns must also be taken
requirements. into consideration. Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)
clearance requirements at doorways, aisles and other
G. IT and Communications: Telephone data and net- elements shall be met. Module considerations should
work rooms shall be adequately sized, centrally located, also include height (floor to floor) to allow for utility
stacked, and in sufficient number so that recommended flexibility.
distances are not exceeded. A minimum of one room
per floor shall be provided. Rooms shall be dedicated, For new laboratory construction projects, a 3.4 m (11
and not shared with other building services. Refer to ft.) laboratory module shall be used. More discretion is
Chapter 11, Telecommunication Systems Design. acceptable for renovation projects where existing struc-
ture, utility shafts, and immovable walls must be taken
H. Leak and Flood Prevention: Floors of mechanical into consideration.
rooms and interstitial levels shall be designed to pre-
vent leaks. Corrugated metal decks and other assem- Spatial versatility and flexibility is further enhanced
blies that cannot be waterproofed are not acceptable. by applying the modular concept to a two-dimensional
Penetrations through the floor shall be protected by grid dimension (width and depth), thereby allowing lab-
raised curbs or sleeves or otherwise configured to con- oratories to be configured transversely across multiple
tain water and prevent leaks. modules without loss of efficiency or aisle clearances.
The typical NIH module should be configured in 3.4 m
x 3.4 m (11 ft. x 11 ft.) increments, with a depth of 10.1
m (33 ft.) providing optimal layout flexibility. Figure
2.2.2.1 illustrates this concept.
2.2.2 Modular Design
The laboratory module is the fundamental organi- Figure 2.2.2.1 Laboratory module configuration
zational basis of a laboratory building. It is a generic
building block used to configure many types and sizes
of labs, establish circulation and bench arrangements
within labs, assign space, ensure efficient space use,
maintain flexibility, guide utility distribution, and
maintain overall design integrity. All lab areas shall be
organized on a modular basis free of stairwells, chases,
shafts, shear walls, elevators, and other obstructions to
the greatest extent possible.
The basic module can be applied to most functional 2.2.3 Laboratory Areas
areas within the laboratory zone. Laboratory sup-
port, research offices, circulation, and building support
spaces should all be organized to work with the module 2.2.3.1 Primary Laboratories
to the greatest extent possible. Primary laboratories provide dedicated space for
investigator benches and equipment. A minimum of
Some laboratory types may require special consider- 1.8 m2.1 m (67 ft.) of high bench is required per
ation due to exceptionally large equipment, such as investigator. Space is also required for shared equip-
low-temperature freezers and optical tables, or wide- ment in close proximity to the bench space, such as
equipment working clearances such as BSCs. Similarly, small bench-mounted apparatus, lab sinks, fume hoods,
custom bench arrangements for electronics labs and refrigerators, freezers, etc. Primary laboratories may
other special-use research spaces may not conform also include desk space for the investigator.
to the standard module. These areas may need to be
configured off-module on a case-by-case basis. The access path to primary laboratories must include
Nevertheless, with the exception of purpose-built facili- dedicated space for the storage of personal belongings,
ties, every effort should be made to retain the basic and space for the storage and donning of PPE such as
modular structure that suits most of the programmed lab coats, eye protection, gloves, and other items that
laboratory types. may be required, as well as a hand wash sink for investi-
gators to use upon leaving the lab. In large labs the hand
wash sink is in addition to the laboratory sink(s).
2.2.2.2 Modular Utility Distribution
Laboratory services shall also be distributed on a modu- A. Open Laboratories: Open configurations with few
lar basis with connection points provided to each indi- partitions between researchers should be considered
vidual laboratory module. The connection point of each for most primary laboratories. Open laboratories pro-
service shall be located in a uniform position relative vide an environment that is conducive to communica-
to the module and detailed to allow for extension into tion and encourages interaction among researchers.
the laboratory without disruption of adjacent modules. Investigators are assigned benches rather than rooms,
Modular utility connection points shall be located in improving flexibility for space assignment and program
corridors or utility areas to the greatest extent possible changes. Primary labs are the principal workplace for
so that maintenance and modifications may be per- many investigators, and should be provided with nat-
formed without entry into occupied labs. Utility distri- ural lighting and views. Depending on the buildings
bution systems shall be configured to allow individual design, open laboratories can also help distribute natu-
modules and labs to be serviced or disconnected with- ral lighting and views to most or all of the laboratory
out affecting the capacity or location of central infra- staff by placing primary research spaces along the exte-
structure systems. rior of the building.
The use of an interstitial level for utility distribution has B. Closed Laboratories: The potential disadvantages
many advantages, including increased flexibility and of open laboratories are acoustics and reduced privacy
adaptability. Interstitial distribution minimizes the dis- and security. If these are primary requirements, closed
ruption of ongoing research by maintenance, renovation laboratories should be considered. Closed laboratories
and other utility activities, and can provide space for consist of a small number of lab modules (usually one to
LAN/Telecommunications rooms and other functions. three) separated by walls from other laboratories.
rack. At least one sink within each primary lab With the exception of core laboratories serving a wide
must be large (762 mm wide x 406 mm deep [30 array of lab groups, support labs should be located
in. wide x 16 in. deep]) and equipped with an as closely as possible to the groups that use them.
overhead shelf, power supply, and a pure water Investigators should be able to access most support labs
connection for water polishing equipment. without leaving the laboratory zone. The ability to pass
directly from the primary lab to a support lab can be
2. A location near the entry for lab coats and other essential for safety, security, or process workflow rea-
PPE as designated by program requirements. If sons. The following support lab functions and equip-
powered air-purifying respirators (PAPRs) are ment are typical for NIH laboratory projects:
used provide provisions for charging, storage
and decontamination. Laboratories must have a 1. Autoclave for decontamination of infectious
sink for handwashing located near the labora- waste (minimum one per floor), with canopy
tory exit door for use prior to exiting. hood and floor drain
Space must be included for records/files, copiers, and Seating areas should also be considered adjoining eleva-
mail areas. Office and file rooms should be lockable. tor lobbies, laboratory branch offices, and other loca-
Space for paper recycling containers and/or shredders tions for visitor waiting and informal staff interaction.
should be provided.
Administrative non-lab offices benefit from separation 2.2.4.3 Locker and Shower Areas
from the lab environment for the following reasons: Lockers of adequate size and number should be pro-
vided for personal item storage outside of the labora-
1. Occupational safety, by virtue of separation tory. Lockers may be located in corridors, break rooms,
from the more hazardous lab zone arranged or dedicated locker areas.
from least restrictive to most restrictive
Showers with changing areas should be provided for
2. Energy-efficiency, as one-pass air is not larger building projects and when required by the build-
required in office areas ing program or sustainable design goals. Shower and
3. Consumption of food and drink is prohibited changing areas are typically adjacent to or co-located
within the lab zone with restrooms. Include lockers and changing benches,
clothes hooks, shelves, mirrors, and electrical outlets
4. Unescorted visitors may not be allowed within adjacent to the mirrors. Shower and changing areas
laboratories shall be accessible to individuals with disabilities. Refer
to the local plumbing code to determine the number of
Laboratory chiefs, section chiefs, principal investiga- fixtures required.
tors, and senior scientists should be provided with dedi-
cated offices wherever possible. Primary office space for
some or all of these staff should be placed such that 2.2.4.4 Conference Rooms
visitors do not have to enter the lab zone to gain access. The total number and size of conference rooms is pro-
gram driven. Small conference rooms for 810 people
Postdoctoral fellows and technicians may be assigned
shall be provided for section-level staff meetings. Larger
semiprivate offices or cubicle workstations. Write-up
conference rooms for up to twenty-five people shall be
desk areas typically are located within the primary
provided for laboratory branch meetings. All conference
labs to facilitate work, and are often located adjacent
facilities shall be shared. Each space should be equipped
to dedicated high bench space. A minimum of 1.2
with white-board, floor and ceiling outlets to accommo-
m (4 ft.) of desk space is required per investigator
date audiovisual and projection equipment (laptop and
for write-up. Organizational models that provide
overhead projectors) or large display, light dimming and
separation of write-up desks from lab benches include
blackout control, as well as telecommunications/local
ghost corridors or partitions of glass or other materials.
area network (LAN) capabilities. Conference rooms
At a minimum, splash guards are required between
should be equipped to accommodate flexible seating
desk and bench surfaces.
arrangements, secure storage closets or cabinets, space
for waste and recycling containers, and accessibility to
2.2.4.2 Lobbies permit ease of cleaning and access. The need and size
of conference rooms for over forty-nine people shall
An entrance lobby shall be provided at the main entrance be designed according to NIH Events Management
to the building and shall have a seating area, bulletin requirements.
boards, and a telephone to contact building occupants.
Signage and a building directory shall be provided to
facilitate wayfinding. A vestibule shall be provided at 2.2.4.5 Storage Areas
the lobby entrance to enhance energy conservation and Dedicated storage rooms should be provided for stor-
to minimize dirt and moisture from being tracked into age of supplies outside of laboratories so that material
the facility. A reception/security workstation shall be does not accumulate in corridors and overfill laboratory
provided if included as a program requirement. Provide aisles and shelving. See Section 1.11, Environmental
close access to public restrooms from the lobby. Management and Radiation Safety for hazardous mate-
rial storage requirements.
provide secondary emergency exit for laboratories; how- 2.2.6.3 Shipping and Receiving Areas
ever, they are not the primary fire or emergency exits.
The loading dock shall have adequate space for proper
Ghost corridors can also provide a degree of internal
marshaling, inspection, and cleaning of materials
separation between different lab functions such as high
received and shipped from the building. When pro-
bench investigator areas and adjacent write-up desks.
grammed, a small office shall be provided for personnel
The clear width of ghost corridors shall be a minimum
responsible for tracking the distribution of material. In
of 1.1 m (3 ft. 8 in.).
larger facilities consideration should be given to provid-
ing a toilet to delivery people and staff. In multistory
facilities, consideration should be given to locating
material handling zones at each floor. Separate and ded-
2.2.6 Building icated space shall be provided for animal receiving and
carcass disposal if the building has animal facilities.
Operation Areas Refer to Section 4.8, Loading Docks, and Section 4.7,
Building operation areas consist of space that is not Vertical Transportation, for additional information.
necessarily associated with the scientific activities of
the laboratory but required for a functional and well
2.2.6.4 Hazardous Material
designed laboratory. Building operation areas include
Waste Rooms
circulation, toilets, shipping and receiving areas,
mechanical and electrical rooms, telecommunications, Chemical waste rooms, biologic waste rooms and radio-
hazardous waste holding room, and utility distribu- logic waste rooms shall be provided with card access-
tion areas. control only. Sizes for these areas shall be based on cal-
culated throughput, but no less than the minimum sizes
established by the NIH. See Section 1.11, Environmental
2.2.6.1 Housekeeping Closets Management and Radiation Safety. The PO shall check
All buildings must be equipped with appropriately sized with the Division of Environmental Protection (DEP)
housekeeping closets located throughout the facility. for Certificates of Compliance.
A housekeeping closet must be negatively pressurized
A. Recycling Room: Provide a recycling room, prefer-
to reduce humidity and control odors. Closets should
ably outside the loading dock.
be fitted with shelving, mop and broom hangers, a
floor sink, ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacle B. Recycling Container and Compactor: Provide card-
and adequate lighting. Closets should be sized to hold board recycling containers bolted to the loading dock
cleaning supplies and equipment only. Space within and a cardboard compactor.
housekeeping closets for storage of unrelated items
is not allowed. The interior of the closet must be C. Tank Farms: If required tank farms (areas housing
finished with materials and surfaces that are cleanable, gas and other types of tanks) shall be provided with
moisture resistant, and durable. Backflow prevention is restraint brackets at each loading dock with appropriate
mandatory on hose bibs. setbacks from the building.
Dedicated areas for staging and disposal of labora- E. Safety Shower and Eyewash Station: Provide a safety
tory materials and hazardous waste shall be pro- shower and eyewash station with no floor drain.
vided adjacent to service elevators when required by
the Occupational Safety and Health Administration F. Electrical Outlets: Provide one duplex electrical
(OSHA) standards or other applicable regulations. outlet on each wall of the room. All electrical appurte-
When required, these areas shall be located within each nances in the room shall comply with local requirements.
building zone with separate areas for chemical and haz-
ardous waste storage.
Contents:
2.3.2.7 Flexibility
health status, biosafety level(s), existing and projected 3. Cage handling and sanitation procedures
staffing, procedure space requirements, cage-change and frequency
regimen, equipment requirements, standard operating
procedures, storage needs, and use/storage of hazardous 4. Decontamination procedures (waste, space,
chemicals, medical and pathological waste, biologics, caging, animal carcasses, and material)
and radiologicals. Specific data to be collected is identi- 5. Security protocols
fied in Section 2.1.2.2, Data Collection (as applicable),
supplemented as follows: 6. Feed, bedding, and animal drinking water use,
storage, and disposal
A. User Questionnaire: An ARF-specific questionnaire
shall be completed by users (Exhibit 2.2). 7. Animal intake and quarantine procedures
B. Animal Census: Quantity and species of resident 8. Emergency management procedures and
animal colonies and their caging requirements are hazard mitigation
primary factors affecting facility design. Caging may be
fixed or mobile, static or ventilated. Cage size and type 9. Maintenance and repair procedures
are governed by The Guide as well as specific research 10. Emergency preparedness procedures
protocols. Laminar flow containment equipment may
be required for change-out and animal transfer.
2.3.1.3 Documentation
C. Animal Health Status: Research animals are often
purpose-bred and certified to be free of specific patho- Comply with Section 2.1.2.3, Documentation.
gens that can be transmitted to other animals or affect Additionally, record SOPs in either narrative or flow
research outcomes. Specific-pathogen free (SPF) animals chart format.
require special handling procedures to ensure that their
health status is not compromised. SPF animals may also
need to be housed in barrier facilities separated from
conventional, non-SPF animals.
2.3.2 Animal Research
D. Equipment: Animal facilities equipment typically Facility Planning
includes caging, cage sanitation and decontamination
equipment, procedure room equipment including BSCs,
cage change stations, treatment tables and lights, sur-
2.3.2.1 Location Considerations
gical equipment, etc. An equipment schedule shall be Several factors should be considered in locating the
used to collect the data, supplemented with manufac- ARF within a research building.
turer data sheets that identify variability in size, service
1. A direct, dedicated path to loading docks is
clearances, utility demands, heat output, etc.
required.
E. Standard Operating Procedures (SOPs): Facility
2. Windows shall not to be used in most holding
design and operating procedures are interdependent,
and procedure rooms. Windows may be
and incomplete understanding of SOPs often results
appropriate for NHPs and some other large
in functional design deficiencies. Every effort shall be
animals, and may be appropriate in procedure
made during the programming phase to document
rooms and other support rooms based on the
SOPs that have a direct effect on design. At a minimum,
program and in consultation with the program
these include:
personnel.
1. Use of PPE
3. Holding rooms should be isolated from noise
2. Entry and exiting procedures for different and vibration sources.
zones within the facility
4. Cage wash equipment produces noise, vibration,
and humidity, and requires pits and drains.
5. Environmental stability including flooding and This rule of thumb does not take into account special
other risks should be reviewed and addressed functions that may be incorporated such as advanced
appropriately. animal imaging, research specific procedure rooms, iso-
lation suites for barrier colonies, biocontainment suites,
6. Separation of HVAC systems. Pressurization etc. Factors that affect animal holding and procedure
and airflow must be independent of, and not space requirements are listed in Section 2.4.5, Design
impacted by, other building systems. Considerations.
Other factors that may affect facility location include:
also protected by barrier-type enclosures and subject to circulation and egress paths. In some cases, it may be
additional SOPs and directional airflow. appropriate to locate a staff write-up area and break
facility within the barrier for caretaker convenience
but this requires special SOPs and must be approved
2.3.2.4 Functional Relationships by the veterinarian and facility manager.
ARF facilities should be organized by zones of compat-
ible functions to enhance contamination control and B. Vivarium Zone: The vivarium zone includes areas
facilitates workflow. Circulation pathways between for housing, caring for and manipulating animals, and
zones should be designed to facilitate directional move- for cage wash and other functions involving contact
ment of clean and dirty materials, animals, caging, with animals. The vivarium zone is entirely within the
waste, and personnel. The HVAC design must also be barrier.
coordinated with the zoned planning approach to facili- 1. Animal Holding and Procedure: Animal hold-
tate directional airflow from cleaner to dirtier areas. ing and procedure are clean functions located
Figure 2.3.2.4 illustrates the relationship among typical within the barrier except for the quarantine
animal facility zones. area. Refer to Section 2.3.4.4. Personnel
The PO and the programmer shall work with the facil- entering this area must be gowned using PPE
ity representatives to prepare functional and adjacen- established by the SOP. Material entering
cies flow charts that will facilitate the design process. this area must be decontaminated per SOPs.
Adjacencies shall be planned to facilitate operational During predesign, the means and methods of
procedures, enhance contamination control, and main- material decontamination shall be determined
tain zonal relationships. Proper arrangement of critical with the stakeholders. Clean caging enters
adjacencies enhances the process of animal-based sci- this area after sanitation in the cage wash
ence, improves the quality of life of the animals, and area through a clean pathway. Ideally, soiled
facilitates animal-caretaking SOPs. Appropriate adja- caging is returned to the cage wash area via a
cency planning also helps isolate noise and vibrations, separate soiled pathway. Alternately, if the size
economize circulation routes, and simplify facility or configuration of the facility will not allow
operations. separate clean and soiled pathways, caging may
be moved along a single path utilizing a move-
A. Personnel Zone: The personnel zone includes an ment/timing pattern that minimizes cross-con-
administrative office area serving the facility manager, tamination between clean and soiled items. In
administrative staff, and technician cubicles where large animal facilities, caging is often cleaned
staff can wear street clothes. It may also include a vet- in place, however clean-to-soiled circulation
erinarian office and conference/training room. This patterns for transport of materials and waste
area should be located to serve as a gateway into must be established. Animal holding and proce-
the ARF, so that incoming staff, visitors, and inves- dure spaces are often in close proximity so that
tigators can be received or observed prior to entering animals do not require excessive transport.
secure areas of the facility. A break room is required
for facility staff to use for consumption of food out- Procedure space may be general, shared rooms
side the barrier. The personnel zone is categorized designed for generic procedures or highly
as dirty because there is limited control of poten- specialized space customized for specific uses.
tial contaminants in this area. Toilet/locker/gowning In some cases, the program may require dedi-
areas serve as a transition into the barrier, and should cated procedure rooms interconnected with the
be located between the administrative area and the holding rooms they serve. Specialty procedure
facility barrier. Separate toilet/shower/locker facilities functions may include surgical rooms or suites,
are required for men and women, except in very small behavioral suites, animal imaging rooms, irra-
facilities. Gowning vestibules for donning PPE may be diation rooms, necropsy/perfusion, and other
separate from the toilet/locker/shower room, and must purpose-built areas. The number of required
be provided with sufficient floor area for PPE storage procedure rooms varies in accordance with
racks and disposal bins so as not to obstruct required species, equipment needs, and animal transport
restrictions; however, sufficient procedure and caging to the greatest extent possible. If
space should be provided to ensure flexibility separate clean and dirty circulation cannot be
for both current and future research initia- fully achieved due to space or other limitations,
tives. Additional flexibility can be provided by a single corridor may be utilized with one-way
designing procedure rooms that can function as circulation or time-separated clean and dirty
holding rooms as needed. use. Cage processing SOPs, including processing
procedures and frequency, must be confirmed by
2. Cage Wash: The primary activity within the veterinary and caretaker staff.
Cage wash is cage processing, including clean-
ing and decontamination of caging and caging 3. Other Functions: Other vivarium zone func-
accessories, soiled bedding removal, and prepar- tions may include quarantine, rederivation,
ing caging for return to animal holding rooms. necropsy/perfusion, pathology, carcass storage,
Many of these activities occur in the cage wash and other functions related to bringing ani-
area, which shall be divided with a dirty side mals from unknown sources into the barrier
for incoming soiled caging and a clean side or reintroducing animals after they have been
for caging that has passed through sanitation removed from the barrier. The location of quar-
equipment. Facilities housing SPF animals may antine functions outside of but immediately
also require a sterile caging area adjacent to adjacent to the barrier should be considered.
clean cage wash for caging setups that have been Methodology for admittance from quarantine
autoclaved. Other areas include feed and bed- into the barrier shall be established during the
ding storage, clean cage storage, and diet kitchen predesign phase. Cage decontamination and
for large animal facilities that prepare fresh transport from quarantine areas should be
feed. Soiled caging and waste shall be routed managed to maintain contamination control.
along separate pathways from clean material
C. Logistics Zone: The logistics zone includes the load- Movement of sterilized materials into barrier suites
ing dock, receiving area and vertical transport from the must also be considered. Natural light without direct
loading dock to the animal facility, medical pathologi- views into the facility and clear directional signage can
cal waste (MPW) storage freezers or cold room, and enhance circulation function.
storage space for cage wash detergents, disinfectants,
and other material. In larger facilities, automated bed- A. Corridor Width: Corridor width shall be dependent
ding dispensing and waste-soiled-bedding removal on the flow of traffic and cage-staging requirements
equipment may also require space allocation. ARF within the animal facility. The Guide recommends a
areas associated with the loading dock are considered corridor width of 1.82.4 m (68 ft.). Two animal cage
to be an extension of the ARF and shall be separated racks or pieces of the largest mobile equipment must be
from general building logistical areas to the greatest able to pass each other without restriction in the cor-
extent possible. Ideally, loading docks should provide ridor. Minimum clear corridor width of 2.1 m (7 ft.)
covered, sheltered receiving areas and they should con- is recommended for NIH facilities provided that this
nect directly to the ARF. When direct connection is not allows for two-way cage passage clear of wall protec-
possible, a dedicated pathway for transport of animals, tion rails (typically protruding 76 mm [3 in.] from each
materials, and waste shall be defined. The pathway wall). Sufficient storage shall be provided within the
shall include dedicated elevators with controlled access facility so that caging and equipment does not have to
if there is a vertical component. They shall be designed be stored in the corridors. Marshaling alcoves for racks
to promote proper sanitation and resist pest infesta- and carts shall be provided in congested areas so that
tion. The loading dock area accessing the dumpster and corridors are not obstructed by equipment. Typically,
waste disposal operations should be separated from the 10% of the caging census shall be able to be accommo-
animal and material receiving area. Large animal facil- dated in marshaling areas.
ity truck bays should be configured to allow vehicles B. Corridor Height: Minimum corridor height shall
to enter a sight-protected, sheltered off-loading area, be determined by the height of the largest equipment
or otherwise dock to the receiving area. The pathway moved through the corridor, including cage racks.
between receiving area and the barrier shall include a Height determination shall include items protruding
vestibule or anteroom for decontamination of incoming from the ceiling, and ventilation and other equipment
materials. Finishes and detailing shall facilitate sanita- on the racks. Height shall factor in all above ceiling
tion and pest management practices. installation requirements, including service and access.
A. Functional Zoning: Personnel office areas must be C. Furnishing Systems: Benches and caseworks shall
separated from animal holding, procedure and support be flexible, and where practical, movable to allow for
areas. Individual offices may be adjacent to holding or reconfiguration without major renovation. Modular
procedure rooms if required by program personnel. systems shall be utilized that permit interchangeability
ARF equipment that creates excessive noise, heat, or of components. Consideration of mobile and/or wall-
vibration should also be buffered from normally occu- mounted casework and furnishing systems shall be
pied areas. taken into account during the predesign phase.
B. Personnel Support: A break room equipped with a D. Utility Flexibility: Components of the utility service
kitchenette and tables shall be provided where staff can and distribution systems that require routine mainte-
eat, drink, and interact outside of the barrier. Break nance should be accessible without requiring entry into
rooms often double as conference/training rooms. the barrier. Modular distribution modes shall allow
Lockers shall be provided for ARF staff to store street individual areas to be shut down without major disrup-
clothing and personal items. Cubicle lockers may also be tion to adjacent areas.
considered for investigators using the facility. Showers
are also required in any facility that includes cage wash- E. Expansion: Planning analysis shall include consid-
ing, and as stipulated by the SOPs. eration for future expansion of the animal facility to
minimize disruption of the facility.
C. Natural Lighting: Natural lighting and exterior
views should be provided in office areas, break rooms,
and other areas normally occupied outside of the barrier 2.3.2.8 Utility Systems
to the greatest extent possible. Natural lighting shall not Utilities and services serving animal research facilities
be provided within holding and procedure areas unless shall be designed to (a) maintain stable environments, (b)
specifically approved by the facility manager, veterinar- be flexible to accommodate changing demands, (c) have
ian, and DPSM. Corridors and ARF support functions redundancy to ensure dependability, and (d) be acces-
within the barrier may benefit from natural light in situ- sible for maintenance without disrupting operations.
ations approved by program personnel.
A. Maintenance Accessibility: Utility mains and com-
ponents requiring service should be located in areas
2.3.2.7 Flexibility that allow for access without entry into the barrier to
Animal research facilities require flexibility to meet the maximum extent practicable. Branch services shall
evolving research needs. Flexibility is also needed to be extended to individual spaces on a modular basis so
incorporate changing technologies and scientific proce- that individual rooms can be isolated with minimal dis-
dures. The following planning concepts can maximize ruption to adjacent spaces.
flexibility: There are numerous design strategies that facilitate
A. Generic Design: The animal facility shall be flexible maintenance accessibility including provision of an
and adaptable to accommodate changes without having interstitial floor above the animal facility, utility corri-
to make major changes to the facility. Holding rooms dors, adjacent, ancillary mechanical rooms, etc. Some
should be designed to hold multiple species over time. allow for near complete access to utility system compo-
Individually planned or customized spaces are to be nents without entry into the barrier. Others may limit
avoided. Animal holding and procedure rooms shall be maintenance access to less sensitive areas of the animal
designed to allow for interchangeability. facility such as corridors. The selected approach shall
consider tolerance of the specific program to mainte-
B. Modularity: Significant portions of animal facilities nance activities and life cycle costs. See Figure 2.3.2.8
comprising holding and procedure areas can be orga- for utility distribution strategies.
nized in a modular pattern that supports a variety of
caging types and layouts. Modularity shall extend to B. Redundancy: All critical utilities and services serving
services and utilities. animal facilities shall be designed with redundant capa-
bility to ensure continuous operation during equipment
failure, power outages, and maintenance outages. The 2.3.3 Biological Risk
degree to which the facility must remain operational
shall be established by the planning team during the Assessment and Biosafety
programming phase. Level Criteria
At a minimum, all areas of the facility that house and Refer to Section 2.1.3.7, Occupational Health and Safety
support animals shall be capable of ongoing operation. and Section 1.15.6, Risk Assessment, Systems Failure &
Disaster Mitigation. All animal facilities designed for
C. Spare Capacity: Reserve capacity shall be designed the NIH shall be designed to ABSL-2 standards as a
into building utility systems including vertical shafts to minimum in accordance with the latest edition of the
accommodate future growth. BMBL.
D. Segregated Systems: Systems serving the ARF shall
be appropriately isolated from non-ARF building
systems.
E. Directional Airflow: The HVAC system shall pro- 2.3.4 Design Considerations
vide directional airflow within the facility as required
for pressurization and containment. 2.3.4.1 Animal Holding Rooms
F. Fire Notification: Provide fire notification system in There are several factors affecting animal holding room
accordance with Section 9.3.1.2, Notification Signals. design:
G. Leak and Flood Prevention: Floors of mechanical A. Holding Room Population: The size of a holding
rooms and interstitial levels shall be designed to prevent room is determined by the species, number of cages
leaks. Penetrations through the floor shall be protected or cage racks, and accessory equipment in that room.
by raised curbs or sleeves or otherwise configured to Larger rooms may be more efficient in terms of SF/cage;
contain water and prevent leaks. however, they increase the risk of infection of larger
numbers of animals in the event of infection outbreak
and may also require multiple studies to be conducted
within one space. There are ergonomic considerations
as well, including the number of cages that can be
reasonably managed by a single caretaker who may Vibration studies shall be performed to determine how
need to regown when entering each holding room, and best to achieve required vibration performance.
space clearances required to safely perform caretaking
activities and allow for future flexibility. G. Floor Drains: Small animal holding rooms typi-
cally do not require in-place cage cleaning and should
B. Caging Types: The Guide provides species specific not have drains and sloped floors which can be opera-
data on minimum floor area and volumetric require- tional and maintenance nuisances. Holding rooms
ments for caging. Caging may be fixed for larger species, which require in-place cleaning may require hose sta-
or freestanding racks housing multiple cages. Sufficient tions, trench drains, and sloped floors. Capped floor
clearance must be provided to care for and observe the drains may be considered for flexible and multi-species
animals, move carts and equipment around the room, holding rooms. Requirements shall be confirmed with
and egress from the room. Lighting shall account for program personnel.
rack type and spacing and shall provide appropriate
lighting levels. Space is required for feed storage bins,
waste container, cage change equipment, and hand 2.3.4.2 Cage Wash Areas
wash sinks. If wall protection rails are provided they Cage wash areas shall be adequately isolated from
must be accounted for in space calculations. Utility sys- animal holding and administrative support areas to
tems must be designed for the caging system used to mitigate the high levels of heat, humidity, noise, and
provide the required power and exhaust connections. vibration produced by cage wash equipment. Design of
cage wash area HVAC systems must consider the heat
C. Species Separation: Different species often cannot be and humidity generated by cage wash equipment so that
housed within the same holding room due to environ- an acceptable working environment is achieved for cage
mental requirements or other incompatibilities. Separate wash technicians. Clean and dirty sides of the cage wash
holding rooms and separation of holding rooms may be area, which are two of the cleanest and dirtiest areas of
required. the ARF, are separated by a contamination control bar-
D. Barrier Suites: SPF animal holding rooms should rier. Cage wash equipment that may include rack wash-
be located within suites that are isolated from con- ers, tunnel washer, soiled bedding disposal unit, steril-
ventional animal populations. When required by the izers, etc., should be configured for dirty-to-clean pass
SOP, these suites should be separated by anterooms. through operation (see Figure 2.3.4.2). When caging
Dedicated autoclaves and other support equipment may and materials are autoclaved for use in SPF areas, a
be required for SPF suites. second pass through sterilizer may be required between
the clean cage wash and sterile cage storage areas. The
E. Noise: Many animal species are very sensitive to clean cage wash area equipment may include a bedding
noise. Background noise shall be minimized and sudden dispenser and bottle filler.
variable noise producing elements, such as fire alarms,
must be mitigated through the use of strobes or voice A. Cage Wash Sizing: Factors that must be typically
systems. Species that generate noise should be seg- considered for sizing the cage wash areas are as follows:
regated from noise sensitive animal populations. It is
important to consider electronic devices and equipment Dirty Cage Wash
such as occupancy sensors that generate sound at fre-
1. Equipment space including service and working
quencies undetectable to humans.
clearances
F. Vibration: Holding and test rooms for species sensi-
2. Marshaling space for racks and cages to be
tive to vibration shall be located away from cage wash,
washed
mechanical rooms, elevator shafts, and other vibration
sources. Vibration requirements vary by species and size 3. Prewash/soaking area for hosing or spray down
of animal. Maximum tolerances shall be established of racks and caging prior to cleaning
with the veterinarian during the predesign phase for
each area in the ARF. Vibration is also a concern for 4. Area for flushing animal drinking water mani-
imaging equipment and other sensitive instrumentation. folds when required
6. Area for loading carriages and component 6. Space for clean cage marshaling or storage
racks used in washers and autoclaves
7. Hose station
7. Hand wash area and commercial pot sink
8. Compressed air system for clearing animal
8. Hose Station drinking water lines, when required
11. Emergency shower and eyewash B. Cage Wash Equipment: Throughput calculations
shall be provided based on user-provided data and
SOPs on the animal species, census, caging types,
Clean Cage Wash
cage change frequency, animal drinking water modes,
1. Area for wet caging to drip-dry, typically in operational schedule, staffing, redundancy require-
front of rack washers ments, etc., to determine the type, size, and quantity
of equipment required for cage sanitation and decon-
2. Working space for preparing cages
tamination. Calculations shall be included with plan-
3. Area for unloading carriages and component ning deliverables. Equipment analysis for larger facili-
racks used in washers and autoclaves ties shall include evaluation of the cost-effectiveness of
automated systems for waste removal, cage handling,
4. Queuing area for stacking clean caging and and bedding dispensing.
caging components
surgical suites consist of one or more surgery rooms, a in the Arthropod Containment Guidelines, Version
surgeon scrub area, animal prep room, surgical supply 3.1 published by the American Committee of Medical
and work room, and recovery area. Depending on Entomology and the American Society of Tropical
SOPs, recovery may occur within holding rooms or may Medicine. A risk assessment shall be conducted to deter-
require dedicated space. Small animal surgery may be mine the feasibility of co-locating an insectary with a
performed within a typical procedure room or desig- mammalian holding facility. Functional components of
nated rooms equipped with exhausted surgical stations insectaries typically include environmental chambers
designed to contain biologic contaminants and scav- (walk-in or cabinet type) for insect holding and breed-
enge anesthetic gases. Directional airflow is particularly ing, procedure room and anteroom to facilitate contain-
critical in surgical suites to maintain aseptic conditions ment. Insectary suites shall be separated from other ARF
within the operating room. Figure 2.3.4.6 illustrates a areas by a vestibule with interlocking self-closing doors.
typical large animal surgery suite. Consideration should be given to vestibules at a low tem-
perature to render insects inactive. Sufficient space shall
be provided for procedures involving live insects to be
2.3.4.7 Insectaries performed within the suite, thereby minimizing the need
Insectaries are containment suites designed to house for transport of live insects. See Section 2.4.5.11.
insects. Guidelines for insectary design are provided
F. Pathways: Pathway for delivery, installation and 2.3.5 Plan and Program
replacement of large, heavy equipment components
Deliverables
G. Maintenance Access: Equipment components that
Refer to Section 2.1.4 for predesign deliverable require-
are not required to be within the same room as the
ments. Additions to this list are as follows:
animal should be located outside of the barrier to the
greatest extent possible to facilitate maintenance access A. Flow Diagram: Flow diagrams indicating proposed
and control noise and heat. circulation of animals, staff, caging sanitation, waste,
and materials based on SOPs listed in Section 2.3.1.2,
H. Animal Transport: Transport of animals to and from
Data Collection.
the facility. If the facility serves as a core that images
animals from outside sources, transport and handling B. Throughput Calculations: Projects including sani-
of potentially dirty animals must also be considered. tation or decontamination equipment shall include
throughput calculations validating that the equipment
is properly sized.
2.3.4.10 Behavioral Suites
Behavioral suites utilize specialized testing equipment C. Questionnaire: Completed ARF Questionnaire
that typically requires smaller isolated rooms that are (Exhibit 2.2).
buffered from their surroundings and free of unwanted
stimuli. Behavioral suites shall be located remotely from
sources of noise and vibration such as cage wash areas
and large animal holding rooms. Criteria to limit noise
transmission and acoustic noise within the behavioral
spaces shall be established during predesign.
Contents:
Design of an animal research facility (ARF) must Conceptual design alternatives must address the pro-
address organizational, operational, security, and infra- posed approach to each of these issues to confirm valid-
structure issues. Organizational issues that affect the ity and allow for comparative analysis.
design include:
7. Occupational safety
2.4.3 Materials and Finishes sagging and deflection due to room pressure gradi-
ents. Access panels, if required, shall be fully gasketed
The guidelines provided in this section apply to all areas around the entire perimeter, and constructed of stain-
of the animal facility except administrative offices. less steel. If access requirements warrant the use of a
A. General Detailing: Surfaces, joints, casework, equip- panelized system, a fully gasketed FRP suspended panel
ment, exposed mechanical and electrical devices, and system may be used. The system shall be designed with
other elements within animal facilities shall be con- hold-down clips that compress the gasket around the
structed of smooth, impervious, easily sanitized mate- entire perimeter and allow for panel removal and rein-
rials and configured without recessed areas and voids stallation without damaging components.
that are difficult to access for cleaning and pest control. F. Floors: Floors shall be monolithic with integral coved
B. Penetrations and Sealants: All penetrations into and base (152 mm [6 in.] minimum height), chemical resis-
through partitions, floors, and ceilings shall be sealed to tant, impervious to water, and capable of withstanding
enhance sanitation. Piping, ductwork, electrical boxes, impacts and heavy wheeled traffic. Flooring finishes shall
conduits, and other penetrating items shall be firmly be extended wall-to-wall under equipment and casework
anchored to resist movement that could damage seals. systems. Floors in all areas equipped with hose sta-
Seams between walls, floors, and ceilings, and between tions shall be sloped to drains at 1% slope minimum.
all dissimilar materials shall be fully sealed. The tops of Floor slopes shall be coordinated with door sills to pre-
hollow partitions shall be sealed to exclude pest infesta- vent uneven threshold conditions. Slopes greater than
tion. Sealant at movement joints shall be applied after 1% should be considered in large animal holding areas
installation of high-performance finishes to resist crack- to facilitate cleaning and prevent ponding. Floor slopes
ing. Sealants shall comply with the Appendix L, Sealant must not create unsafe conditions. Floor slopes shall
Table. be reviewed by DOHS and program personnel. Floors
shall be skid resistant without excessive abrasiveness that
C. Partitions: Partitions shall provide suitable substrates damages mops and resists sanitation.
for application of high-performance finishes, typically
epoxy paint or fiberglass-reinforced polymer (FRP). G. Finishes: All finishes shall be seamless, impervious,
Large animal holding facilities shall be constructed of smooth, easily sanitized, and resistant to degradation
masonry, seamless FRP panels, or other impact-, hose- from water, chemicals, disinfectants, and decontami-
spray-, and chemical-resistant systems. Special consid- nants used within the animal facility.
eration for reinforcing wall finishes is required in rooms H. Doors: Doors that serve areas of cage and rack trans-
where walls form a portion of the animal pens. Small port shall be a minimum of 1.1 m x 2.3 m (3ft. 6 in. x
animal holding facilities may be constructed of abuse- 7 ft. 6 in.). In large animal facilities, minimum door size
and water-resistant gypsum wallboard provided that shall be 1.2 m x 2.3 m (4 ft. x 7 ft. 6 in.). Door sizes shall
wall protection rails or fiberglass-reinforced coatings be reviewed with to ensure coordination with proposed
are used for protection, and rooms are not subject to caging systems. Doors shall be solid or solidly foam filled
hose-spray wash down. without voids and constructed of fully sealed FRP with
D. Wall Protection: Corridors, cage wash areas, and stainless steel frames. Jamb guards shall be provided in
other spaces that are subject to contact with mobile doors that serve areas of cage transport. Doors serving
caging, racks, and equipment shall be protected by alu- high-use caging transport areas such as cage wash, cage
minum or stainless steel wall protection rails and corner storage, and selected corridors should be equipped with
guards. Appropriate wall protection type and location automatic openers to facilitate operations and reduce
shall be agreed with the project stakeholders. impact damage. Paddle- or proximity-type switches are
often more practical than sensors as they limit inciden-
E. Ceilings: Ceilings shall be constructed of water- tal operation in busy areas. Animal holding room doors
resistant and seamless material such as water-resis- shall have tight-fitting sweeps to inhibit pests and con-
tant gypsum wallboard, seamless FRP panels, cement tain escaped animals. Animal holding room doors shall
plaster, or other durable, monolithic, water-resistant be equipped with view windows to allow for observa-
systems. Ceiling structures must be designed to resist tion without entry, and securable shutters or translucent
limited spectrum red film to obscure the view window F. Additional Requirements: Additional consideration
and maintain diurnal lighting conditions. should be provided for the security of controlled sub-
stances in appropriately locked cabinets and/or secured
I. Casework: Wall-mounted cantilevered counter tops rooms (i.e., pharmacy).
or movable tables and mobile base cabinets shall be pro-
vided to enhance flexibility, sanitation, and pest con-
trol. Countertops and shelving shall be constructed of
materials that are smooth, impervious to water, and
resistant to degradation from harsh chemicals used for 2.4.5 Design Considerations
sanitation and decontamination such as epoxy, stainless
steel, or phenolic-impregnated panels.
2.4.5.1 Animal Holding Rooms
A. Caging and Equipment Coordination: A minimum
914 mm (3 ft.) wide aisle shall be provided between racks
or cages from the rear of the room for emergency egress;
2.4.4 ARF Security however, wider aisles may be necessary for cage change
The security strategy shall safeguard research ani- equipment, or to provide proper safety clearances when
mals, staff, equipment, and data. A layered approach is housing more dangerous species such as non-human
required with increasingly restrictive levels. Coordinate primates. In large animal holding rooms, gated aisles
security requirements with DPSM. can be used to create socialization and exercise areas.
When double sided cage racks are used, sufficient space
A. First Level of Security: At NIH owned or leased must be provided in secondary aisles between racks to
facilities, the first level of security may be the campus or ensure adequate lighting for caretakers to observe each
site, which may be open to the public or have controlled cage; a 762 mm (2 ft. 6 in.) minimum is recommended.
access depending on the location.
High-density caging systems are available that elimi-
B. Second Level of Security: The second level of secu- nate aisle space between racks by utilizing carousel-
rity is the building perimeter. Access to the building or library-style caretaker access. Caging systems must
must be controlled, including air intakes, utilities and be evaluated by the planning team on a case-by-case
other potential access points. basis to ensure that the overall room ergonomics, envi-
ronmental parameters, and species-specific habits are
C. Third Level of Security: The third level of security acceptable.
is the animal research facility perimeter. Access to the
administrative area is typically required for facility Freestanding cage racks are often mobile ventilated
staff, maintenance personnel, vendors and visitors. The units with either self-contained blowers or manifolds
administrative area should function as a gatekeeper to designed for connection to the building HVAC system.
other areas of the animal research facility. Deliveries The layout and requirements of ventilated racks must
may also go directly to the loading dock, which requires be coordinated with electrical and HVAC services.
secure access. Ceiling-mounted exhaust drops shall be stainless steel.
Electrical outlets provided for rack blowers shall be
D. Fourth Level of Security: The fourth level of secu- mounted above 2 m (6 ft. 8 in.), or in the ceiling. Both
rity is into the animal facility barrier from the personnel ventilated cage racks and static cage racks using micro-
support/administrative zone or the loading dock/logis- isolator caging typically require the use of laminar
tics zone. flow change stations to keep animals clean during cage
E. Final Level of Security: Finally, individual spaces change-out. Room layout must account for this equip-
within the barrier often require secure access. These ment, which may be either fixed or mobile depending on
typically consist of animal holding rooms, special use the system employed.
suites, hazardous areas (irradiator rooms, biocontain- B. Lighting: The lighting layout shall provide an appro-
ment zones, pharmacies, etc.) and areas housing spe- priate level of illumination for animal observation and
cialized equipment. care, as determined by the veterinary staff. Lighting
fixtures shall be sealed to prevent vermin access. If sur- consideration should be given to possible future instal-
face-mounted lighting fixtures are used, they shall be lation. Consideration should also be given to the qual-
sufficiently high to clear caging, including top-mounted ity of water required. Refer to Section 12.2, Animal
rack motors. Fixtures in rooms equipped with hose Drinking Water Systems.
stations shall be suitable for wet locations and direct
hose spray. Finishes shall be compatible with sanita-
tion and decontamination methods designated by the 2.4.5.2 Procedure Rooms
SOP. Discussions shall be held with the veterinarian General-use procedure rooms should be designed using
and researchers regarding the required light spectrum. the same modular size, finishes, and general layout as
Specialty red lighting invisible to rodents may also be animal holding rooms to allow for flexible conversion to
required to allow investigators to work during simu- animal holding. Consideration should be given to utiliz-
lated night-time conditions. ing movable tables in lieu of fixed casework for proce-
dure rooms to enhance flexibility.
Controllable diurnal lighting cycles are required in all
animal holding rooms to simulate natural photoperi- The ratio of procedure rooms to small animal holding
ods. Intensity levels vary by species, but low ambient rooms is generally 1:2 or 1:3, but may be higher or lower
levels with timed overrides for a higher level during depending on the program, the size of the holding rooms,
periods of caretaker and investigator activity are typi- and other factors. The ratio of procedure rooms for large
cal. Whenever possible, lighting shall be centrally con- animals is determined by the program and the facility.
trolled with the capability for individual programming
for each room. If use of high-density caging is proposed, Procedure rooms should be distributed so that at least one
lighting design shall provide even light distribution to is within or adjacent to each holding area (such as a cluster
all cages. Some high-density caging are equipped with of cubicles or a suite), for convenience and to minimize
integral lighting systems. movement of animals. Consideration should be given to
specialty small animal surgery rooms (with downdraft
C. Environmental Monitoring and Control: Animal table, gases, anesthesia capture and other dedicated sur-
rooms shall be equipped with individual temperature gery equipment) in addition to procedure rooms.
control. Depending on research requirements, indi-
vidual or zoned humidity control may also be required.
Centrally controlled systems are preferred. Monitoring 2.4.5.3 Receiving/Quarantine Rooms
at each room is required for temperature, humidity, Receiving and quarantine rooms process and house ani-
lighting, and airflow. mals into the barrier or reintroduce animals after they
have been removed from the barrier. The location of
D. Plumbing: All small animal holding rooms shall
quarantine functions outside of but immediately adja-
be equipped with hand wash sinks. Hands-free opera-
cent to the barrier should be considered. Methodology
tion should be considered. Large animal rooms are
for admittance from quarantine into the barrier shall
not required to have a sink; however, a sink must be
be established during the predesign phase. Cage decon-
located nearby and wherever SOPs require gloves to be
tamination and transport from quarantine areas should
changed or removed. Large animal holding and water
be managed to maintain contamination control.
tank aquatic holding rooms shall be provided with
drains. Drains in small animal holding rooms should be
avoided; however, users should be consulted to verify if 2.4.5.4 Storage
drains are desired for future flexibility. When drains are
Storage is required for hazardous materials (including
provided, consideration should be given to appropriate
chemicals, radiologic materials, and biologic material),
size of drain lines, and maintenance of traps, strainers,
cages, feed and bedding, equipment and miscellaneous
drain caps, flush systems, and floor slopes.
supplies and materials. Dedicated storage rooms should
E. Animal Drinking Water: The type of animal drink- be provided at strategic locations to ensure an efficient
ing water system shall be determined during the proj- and adequate flow of materials in and out, without
ect program phase (automatic, bottled, or pouched). unnecessary accumulation or cross-contamination.
If automated watering is not desired at the onset,
recessed or protected to avoid impact damage. Where A. Elevator Operation and Controls: Special control
this is not possible, projected wall rails shall be pro- and emergency service shall be provided in areas serv-
vided to protect protruding items. ing animal surgery, animal care, and dietary usage.
Each elevator bank serving these areas shall be pro-
vided with key operated emergency switches for pri-
2.4.5.8 Vertical Transportation ority service. These switches shall be provided at each
In multi story facilities dedicated elevators shall be pro- landing. This switch will cause the closest available car
vided for ARF use, with separate elevators dedicated to bypass other calls in response to an emergency call.
for clean and dirty functions. Traffic patterns shall be An on demand microprocessor system shall be provided
established to separate the various traffic types in an for all elevator controls. Controls shall operate properly
efficient, logical, safe, and secure manner, while main- with a 500 KHZ to 1,300 MHZ radio frequency signal,
taining levels of aseptic control consistent with the transmitted at a power level of not less than 100 watts
requirements of the facility. Additional elevators may effective radiated power (ERP) at a distance of 1 m (3
be required for freight/service, materials and personnel. ft. 3 in.). The equipment shall be provided with elec-
tromagnetic interference (EMI) shielding within FCC
Elevator(s) for transporting clean material shall be guidelines. Noise level rating of the elevator equipment
located near the clean side of the cage wash area, and its operation shall not exceed 80 dBa in the EMRs,
while the elevator(s) used for dirty material shall be measured 1 m (3 ft. 3 in.) above the finished floor and 1
in close proximity to the dirty side of the cage wash m (3 ft. 3 in.) from the equipment.
area. The elevator sizes and locations must accommo-
date the volume and nature of materials to be handled. B. Elevator Capacity & Platform Design: The maxi-
Elevators that shall be used for transport of animals and mum size of vehicles or other loads and the maximum
animal facility equipment must be constructed of highly weight of portable laboratory, biomedical, or X-ray
durable and sanitizable materials. The elevator cab wall equipment shall be determined before setting the ele-
shall be stainless steel. The cab floor material must be of vator size and capacities. The maximum area allowed
similar material as the floor in the animal facility. The by the ASME/ANSI A17.1 Standard shall be used to
elevator car interior shall have wall protection at appro- develop the inside dimensions of car enclosures.
priate heights and depth for the typical racks and carts
that shall be used in the facility. Elevator doors must C. Other Conveying Systems: Wherever possible, other
be of sufficient height to accommodate the tallest racks vertical and horizontal system runs, such as pneumatic
that shall be used in the facility. Consideration shall be tubes, conveyors, and monorails, shall not be located
given to an elevator cab width that can accommodate at adjacent to, over, or under any acoustically sensitive
least two racks side by side. Adequately sized vestibules space. They shall be isolated from the building struc-
shall be required outside of elevator openings to main- ture by resilient hangers, isolated support traps, resil-
tain pressure differentials and contain errant odor. ient pads, or trapeze hangers and shall have no direct
physical connection with the finished ceiling system
Unless other alternatives are available, at least one ele- of the space below. If the horizontal runs are routed
vator shall have the capacity to handle extremely heavy over acoustically sensitive spaces such as private offices
loads (e.g., irradiators, MRI). There shall be adequate or examination and treatment rooms, the pneumatic
redundancy in the number of elevators to handle freight, tubes shall be coated with viscoelastic damping com-
staff, and animals in the case of an equipment break- pound or other damping material, such as a 25 mm (1
down or regular service. This can be accomplished by in.) thick glass fiber blanket, with an impervious outer
providing for flow patterns between clean and dirty covering such as metal foil. Other pipe sleeving mate-
elevators or other alternatives so that they can serve rial is available. These materials can be shop applied for
as backups to each other. Guillotine type (vertical bi- the majority of the system run, with field application
parting) hoist way doors shall not be used. Penetrations required only at the joints. If horizontal tube runs are
through the shaft shall be sealed in accordance with routed over acoustically critical spaces, such as animal
ARF sealing criteria. breeding or NMR imaging, a suspended ceiling system
providing a sound isolation rating in the range of NIC
40 shall be required in addition to the resilient isolation Small animal surgeries may be performed within proce-
of the service runs. Alternatively, these system runs can dure rooms; however, dedicated small animal surgical
be boxed, encased, or wrapped with an impervious bar- rooms are preferred with downdraft tables to contain
rier material such as dense plaster, gypsum board, or a aerosols and anesthetic gas. Most surgical procedures
51 mm (2 in.) thick glass fiber material with a 96 kg/m3 require a clean environment. An entry anteroom
(6 lb/ft3) density or covered with an impervious outer should be considered to allow for positive pressuriza-
wrapping such as reinforced leaded vinyl or sheet lead. tion of the surgical area without expelling suite air into
the corridor.
In addition to resiliently isolating the service from the
building structure, the drive units, transfer or diverter A lockable drug cabinet shall be provided where narcot-
units, and exhauster associated with each type of system ics and other controlled drugs are stored.
runs, motors, pumps, compressors, and gear and drive
assemblies shall also be isolated.
2.4.5.11 Insectaries
Insects are typically housed in environmental chambers
2.4.5.9 Loading Docks that regulate temperature, humidity, and lighting. The
Loading dock areas shall be designed in accordance lighting control sequence often requires simulated dawn
with Section 2.4.3, Materials and Finishes. A dedicated and dusk fade periods to enhance breeding. Chambers
route of transport should be identified from the load- vary in size from freestanding units to custom-built
ing dock to the animal facility. Additional information walk-in rooms. Special design features are required to
is listed in Section 4.8, Loading Docks. Loading docks facilitate detection and containment of escaped insects.
must be designed to not negatively impact airflows, or These features vary depending on species housed, but
temperature and humidity within the ARF. often include:
away from doors separating aquatic areas from other systems, sized to provide a minimum of 15% of the
areas of the facility. Drains serving aquaria water sys- total aquatic system volume makeup per twenty-four
tems shall be located adjacent to tank systems to pre- hours (or larger if required by facility specific criteria)
vent aquatic drain piping from causing trip hazards.
For larger facilities, equipment rooms housing water D. Finishes: Water and corrosion-resistant finish sys-
purification, filtration, and pumping systems should be tems for partitions, floors, and ceilings
separated from aquatic holding rooms. Ceiling heights E. Casework, Equipment and Furnishing: Water-
must account for overhead water distribution piping. and corrosion-resistant casework, equipment, and
Aquatic holding rooms shall meet design criteria previ- furnishings
ously listed for animal holding rooms in terms of caging
layout and clearances, lighting controls, environmental F. Drainage: Floors sloped to drains to prevent flood-
monitoring, etc. Special features may include: ing of aquatics rooms and surrounding areas. For larger
facilities, trench drains may also be used to capture
A. Aquatic Tanks: Commercially available or custom- water from multiple aquaria racks.
fabricated aquatic tanks or aquaria systems, often rack
mounted. Space and clearance requirements around G. Lighting: Specialized lighting design to provide diur-
aquatic tanks and aquaria racks shall meet criteria pre- nal, uniform illumination at tiered aquaria and pre-
viously listed for animal holding rooms. vent hot spots that can cause excessive algae growth.
Timer-controlled supplemental lighting is also needed
B. Aquatic Water Systems: Commercially available for procedures and caretaking activities requiring
or custom-engineered recirculating or flow-through higher lighting levels.
aquatic water systems with dedicated pumping and
filtration capability as well as redundancy to mitigate
critical system failures. Aquatic water systems shall be 2.4.5.13 Animal Imaging
designed to provide the following (each component with Imaging facilities dedicated for animal use shall comply
N + 1 redundancy): with requirements listed in Section 2.4.3, Materials and
1. Mechanical filtration that removes 100% of par- Finishes. Special requirements for vibration limit as well
ticulates 40 microns or larger, or with greater as radiological, electromagnetic, and radiofrequency
efficacy if required by facility-specific criteria shielding shall meet equipment manufacturer recom-
mendations. Similarly, layout of imaging and support
2. Biological filtration that removes ammonia and equipment shall comply with manufacturers site plan-
other biological contaminants as required by ning guides. Special considerations include:
facility-specific criteria
A. Structural Reinforcement: Structural reinforcement
3. Chemical filtration that maintains aquatic to accommodate equipment weight
water within chemical-contaminant levels
defined by facility-specific criteria B. Vibration Isolation: Vibration isolation as required
to meet equipment operating criteria and ensure person-
4. Polishing filtration just prior to ultraviolet nel safety
(UV) filtration system if required to maintain
water clarity necessary for efficacious UV C. Shielding: Shielding (radiological, radiofrequency,
filtration electromagnetic) as required to meet equipment operat-
ing criteria
5. UV filtration with 100% efficacy for living
microbes D. Utility Space: Supplemental utility support to
accommodate chillers and other equipment that gen-
6. Temperature control erate extensive heat output and power consumption.
Separate spaces may also be required to house com-
C. Dedicated Aquatic Pure-water System: Dedicated pressors and tanks of compressed and cryogenic gases.
aquatic pure-water system (with N + 1 redundancy), These spaces should be accessible from outside the
isolated from building laboratory and potable water animal facility if possible.
E. Pathways: Path of travel for equipment delivery and Non-human primate testing rooms may require group
replacement shall be considered and incorporated into housing, and areas for swinging, climbing, socializing
the design and other activities.
Contents:
the planning process include those previously listed in ingress and egress SOPs, and support decontamination
Sections 2.1, Research Laboratory Predesign and 2.3, procedures. The core biocontainment zone may be sup-
Animal Research Facility Predesign. Early and active ported by transitional areas, decontamination facilities,
participation of the entire group during the planning and an array of support facilities that often eclipses the
and programming phase is essential to identify potential size of the actual biocontainment area.
design impacts of factors related to occupational health,
safety, and security and the inherent risks involved in Determining the types, sizes, and relationships among
the study of infectious and sometimes lethal agents. these areas requires a full understanding of physi-
cal requirements, engineering controls, and the SOPs
C. Risk Assessment: The design of BSL-3 and ABSL-3 required to operate, access, and maintain the facility.
facilities can vary widely depending on agents to be
used, types of research and procedures, quantities of
agents, animal species caging types, and other risk fac- 2.5.2.1 Project Parameters
tors. Their predesign must therefore be guided by a risk Special considerations for biocontainment facilities
assessment that identifies the degree to which risk fac- include:
tors may be mitigated by building design and engineer-
ing controls, SOPs, or both. Minimum requirements A. Risk Assessments: Biological risk assessment and
identified herein are for NIH biocontainment facilities. physical threat/risk assessment must be provided to the
Additional measures may be required if prescribed by the project team to help guide development of SOPs and the
risk assessment. For additional information about risk design of the facility.
assessments, refer to Section 1.15.6, Risk Assessment, B. Special Studies: It must be determined early in the
Systems Failure & Disaster Mitigation. project planning phase which types of special studies
and consultants will be required to establish the crite-
ria related to safety and security of the facility. Typical
studies or assessments may include risk assessments,
2.5.1 The Master Plan building information modeling, computational fluid-
dynamics simulations for laboratory ventilation, chemi-
Master plan issues that may be impacted by construc- cal use analysis, and environmental assessment. The
tion of a biocontainment facility include minimum set- project team must establish and document the limita-
backs and security requirements that may be required for tions and requirements that each of these criteria will
blast protection, intrusion protection, and protection of impose on the design.
exterior elements critical to the operation of the biocon-
tainment facility (e.g., emergency generators, supply air C. Community Relations: Health and safety concerns
intake, loading docks, etc.). The dispersion of exhaust of neighboring entities outside of the immediate stake-
air shall be considered relative to surrounding facilities holder group may need to be solicited and addressed to
and supply air intakes. Planning of these features shall ensure that all perspectives are considered, information is
be guided by threat risk and biological risk assessments. accurately disseminated, and two-way communication is
Coordinate security requirements with DPSM. established to facilitate community and regulatory accep-
tance of the project. A community relations plan includ-
ing a timeline for communication with elected officials,
community leaders, citizen groups, and institutional
leadership should be included in the overall schedule.
2.5.2 Project Program
D. Infrastructure: Extensive space may be required to
The core of the typical biocontainment facility pro-
house separate, dedicated, or segregated infrastructure
gram consists of infectious disease laboratories and/or
for HVAC systems and other utilities serving biocon-
animal holding and procedure rooms located within a
tainment facilities.
secure biocontainment zone that is environmentally iso-
lated from other areas using anterooms and engineering E. Standard Operating Procedures: SOPs have an inter-
controls to ensure inward directional airflow, facilitate dependent relationship with facility design and must be
outlined early in the planning process. Detailed SOPs 3. PPE requirements; locations for storing, don-
for operation and maintenance of the facility may not ning, and doffing PPE; PPE decontamination
be fully developed during early project phases, or may methodology; location for powered air purifying
be modified as the project progresses. Ongoing docu- respirators (PAPR) and recharging (if required)
mentation of SOPs that affect design must be included
in the project narrative and reconfirmed by the project 4. Use and location of hand wash sinks
team in later phases. 5. Current or future SOPs for showering if required
F. Regulatory Requirements: Local jurisdictional 6. Separation of mens and womens gowning/
authorities and utility companies must be consulted to shower facilities, if required
determine if special constraints or requirements will
affect the location or design of the biocontainment facil- 7. Communication requirements during the enter-
ity. Additional regulations may also affect the design of ing/exiting process
the facility if select agents and/or agricultural agents are
to be used. 8. Transfer of large equipment in and out of
containment
G. Budget: The cost of a high containment facility design,
construction, and operation is significantly higher than 9. Use and location of toilets (in or out of contain-
conventional BSL-2 laboratories and animal facilities. ment zone)
Construction estimates developed during the program- B. Security and Biosecurity Requirements: Define
ming phase must identify costs associated with low net- security requirements including threat protection,
to-gross ratios, infrastructure improvements, enhanced access control, CCTV monitoring, and other security
security requirements, special containment and decon- features for each zone within the biocontainment facil-
tamination equipment, high-performance finishes, and ity. Identify where infectious agents will be stored, and
regional availability of skilled contractors capable of what security provisions are required for storage areas
installing high technology systems. Project budgets and freezers. Identify requirements for secure commu-
must account for lengthy schedules including regula- nication system or data network. Biosecurity control
tory approval processes, special studies, and extended must be approved by the DOHS BioRisk Program.
commissioning and certification phases. The cost of Coordinate security requirements with DPSM.
ownership must also consider operational and mainte- C. Waste Management: Define methods for decontami-
nance costs, specialized staff recruitment and training nation, transport and disposal of liquid and solid waste.
requirements, and ongoing obligations for regulatory Establish likely waste volume and minimum sizes for
compliance and recertification. Benchmarking the cost autoclaves and other decontamination equipment.
and experience of similar recently constructed facilities
is strongly encouraged. D. In Situ Decontamination: Identify the method(s) for
space and equipment decontamination. Identify how and
where large equipment will be decontaminated. Identify
2.5.2.2 Data Collection typical periods and anticipated frequency required for
A supplementary user questionnaire shall be completed decontamination. Define elements of the HVAC and
for biocontainment projects focusing on SOPs that other utility systems that may require decontamination.
impact facility design (Exhibit 2.3, Biocontainment Verify corrosive properties and material incompat-
Facilities Program Questionnaire). Specific information ibilities of decontaminants to be used. If gas or vapor
required to design the facility will include: decontamination is required, verify types of equipment
and/or systems to be used in this process and HVAC
A. Containment Zone Entry and Exit Procedures: features required to seal areas to be decontaminated.
1. Procedures for entering and exiting containment E. Facility Shutdown Requirements: Identify SOPs for
2. Anticipated number of staff working within the facility shutdown and maintenance of the facility during
containment zone shutdown. Determine if spacial and HVAC zoning is
required to enable partial shutdowns.
5. Proximity to mechanical areas, utility shafts, agents and infected materials between the lab and hold-
and/or interstitial floors available for placement ing areas. This is particularly important with highly
and routing of dedicated utility services pathogenic agents that may present additional risk or
operational complexity to package and transport out of
the biocontainment barrier.
2.5.3.2 Space Requirements
Biocontainment facilities typically utilize space less effi-
ciently than their BSL-2 and ABSL-2 facilities because 2.5.3.4 The Containment Zone
of the space required to house and access redundant, The containment zone may include BSL-3 facilities,
dedicated utility systems. ABSL-3 facilities, or both. The containment zone
shall be enclosed by a clearly defined physical barrier
The amount of space within the containment zone used including partitions, floor, and ceiling that separate
for working directly with active biological agents is it from non-containment areas of the facility. Work
often less than 45% of the overall net program area, with infectious agents within the containment zone is
and as little as 20% of the total gross area of the facility. generally performed in BSCs that provide the primary
Organizational structure may vary depending on the containment for pathogens; however, the physical
biocontainment program. Additional factors that barrier provides secondary containment and must be
should be considered include ABSL-2 and ABSL-3 constructed to achieve inward directional airflow.
relationship, because proximity between ABSL-3 areas Construction of the barrier and all partitions, floors,
and the conventional animal research facility greatly and ceilings within the barrier require special detailing
facilitates shared use of cage processing and other and finishes that enhance sanitation, withstand chemical
ARF support facilities. decontamination, and resist uncontrolled air migration.
Figure 2.5.3.3(A) Typical relationships between cage processing functions and ABSL-3 zone
Anteroom
Anteroom
Figure 2.5.3.3(B) Example of relationships between primary building zones, including containment zones
B. PPE: Requirements for PPE including disposable as F. Security: Biometric access control may be required
well as laundered materials, PAPR recharging stations, for entry into the containment area based on program
lockers, waste bins, etc. or threat risk assessment. Coordinate security require-
ments with DPSM.
C. Showers: Risk assessment may require the use of
pass through showers in the exiting sequence. When not Examples of two containment-area-anteroom alterna-
required, consideration should be given to the addition tives are illustrated in Figure 2.5.3.5. Because anteroom
of showers for future flexibility. designs are closely related to SOPs, programs must
develop optimal arrangements based on their specific
D. Decontamination: Anterooms may house autoclaves needs.
and fumigation chambers used to decontaminate mate-
rials and equipment removed from the containment
zone. If this is the case, space required to house and ser- 2.5.3.6 Flexibility
vice equipment and store load carts must also be consid- The type of construction and intensity of infrastruc-
ered. Hand wash sinks may also be required, depending ture required in biocontainment facilities is inherently
on SOPs for glove removal. inflexible from the standpoint of partition changes and
repurposing. However, there are still opportunities to autoclave and/or fumigation chambers. When this is the
plan for flexibility. case, SOPs for moving contaminated or partially decon-
taminated materials must be fully understood to ensure
A. Compartmentalized Design: The hazardous that the physical layout supports the proposed SOPs.
nature of work performed in containment labs is
not usually suited to large, open-bay configurations.
Compartmentalization into multiple self-contained 2.5.3.7 Biocontainment Utility Systems
one- or two-module suites that minimize the possibility A. Dedicated Systems: HVAC, plumbing, and other
of cross-contamination has several advantages: utility systems serving containment zones shall be seg-
1. Work with different infectious agents may be regated from systems serving other areas of the building
incompatible due to the need for different SOPs to minimize the risk of cross-contamination.
for use, storage, personal protection, decon- B. Maintenance Access: Utility system components that
tamination, vaccines, and training. If a single require maintenance access, adjustment, or calibration
suite is used, the most restrictive SOPs may shall be located outside of the containment zone. Where
apply regardless of the agent in use. possible, an interstitial mezzanine should be considered.
2. Partial shutdown of a single compartmental- Adequate clearance and working space, including ceil-
ized suite for repairs or decontamination does ing height, must be provided for the performance of all
not necessarily require shutdown of the entire maintenance activities.
containment zone, provided that utility systems C. Compartmentalization: If partial shutdown of the
are similarly compartmentalized to allow for containment zone is a design criterion, utility systems
isolation of each suite. must be configured to align with the space compart-
3. Security protocols may differ among agents, mentalization strategy. This is particularly important
requiring selective use of staff, forced entry for high-efficiency particulate air (HEPA) filtration
protection, and enhanced surveillance or bios- zones and exhaust ductwork that must be configured
ecurity measures. This is more easily addressed to allow individual suites to be decontaminated with-
in compartmentalized suites. out total facility shutdown. Consideration should also
be given to the use of redundant or dual HEPA-filter
4. Use of multiple suites with dedicated hold- caissons to facilitate filter testing and replacement with-
ing and procedure rooms within the ABSL-3 out suspension of containment-zone operations in areas
containment zone can enhance flexibility by that must remain operational during partial suite shut-
minimizing the need for transporting infectious downs, such as shared corridors.
animals and materials.
D. Decontamination: Methodologies for decontaminat-
B. Flexible Casework Systems: Mobile casework sys- ing utility system components exposed to the contain-
tems are particularly useful in containment applica- ment environment must be determined, and appropriate
tions because they are generally more easily decontami- elements provided.
nated and can be rearranged without utilizing outside
contractors. This is applicable to other fixed elements E. Directional Airflow: The BMBL requires direc-
that can be plugged in versus hard wired, including tional airflow into the containment zone through two
equipment, task lighting, etc. self-closing doors. Within the containment zone, there
are further requirements for directional airflow among
C. Decontamination: Use of large, centralized decon- rooms and suites to ensure that air moves towards the
tamination equipment versus smaller equipment local- most contaminated areas, and to protect research from
ized within each suite should be evaluated. The abil- potential cross-contamination. Early interaction among
ity to decontaminate material before it leaves the suite the architect, engineers, DOHS and commissioning
may simplify SOPs and enhance safety. This is typically agent is essential to ensure that engineering systems and
impractical in ABSL-3 facilities where large volumes controls can deliver the directional airflow required to
of contaminated caging and cage racks require bulk support the proposed spatial arrangement and SOPs.
An airflow diagram illustrating directional airflow at Additionally, all select agent laboratories designs shall
each doorway is required to communicate intent among include:
architects, engineers, and users during design.
1. Compliance with the BMBL Any recommen-
F. Leak and Flood Prevention: Floors of mechanical dation for facility design made in the CDC/
rooms and interstitial levels shall be designed to prevent NIH BMBL is a regulation for each select agent
leaks. Concrete floors shall have a waterproof finish or laboratory (42 CFR 73).
sealer, and penetrations through the floor shall be pro-
tected by raised curbs or sleeves or otherwise config- 2. Compliance with the DHHS/SAP 12-point plan
ured to contain water and prevent leaks. 3. Specification requirements for documentation
(mechanical and plumbing reports) needed to
register a laboratory with the CDC
4. Controlled access
2.5.4 Additional
5. Use of tamper-resistant high-security cylinders
Considerations for keyed doors on the facility master lock only
2.5.4.1 Select Agent Laboratories Any value engineering discussions, design modifications,
renovations, or questionable items shall be reviewed by
The A/E shall contact the Select Agent Program (SAP)
both the DOHS and the PI prior to final approval.
Responsible Official (RO), as identified by DOHS, if a
select agent is to be used in the laboratory. The A/E shall
also contact the DPSM if the biosafety level is greater 2.5.4.2 Decontamination
that BSL-2 or ABSL-2. General principles of the SAP lab-
Planning must identify proposed methodologies for
oratory design in the planning stage shall include:
decontamination for waste, material, carcasses, equip-
1. Input of the user and NIH SAP, responsible ment, and room surfaces.
official/alternate responsible official in tandem
Decontamination of waste and materials exiting the
2. Determination of the select agent needs for the containment zone is best accomplished at the contain-
principal investigator (PI), i.e., long term stor- ment barrier to minimize risk associated with trans-
age, growing of materials, animal usage, etc. porting potentially contaminated materials out of the
containment zone; however, materials that are bagged
3. Review by DOHS and surface decontaminated may be fully sterilized out-
side of containment if allowed by the risk assessment.
General principles of SAP laboratory design in the
design stage shall include: Autoclaves are most commonly used for decontaminat-
ing waste and material. Tissue digesters may be used
1. The ability to physically segregate personnel and
for decontamination and disposal of animal carcasses
equipment into separate workstations dependent
if allowed by the local sewer authority. The location
upon the different organisms to be handled by
of both autoclaves and tissue digesters must be coor-
the principal investigators (PIs)
dinated with SOPs for waste decontamination and dis-
2. Participation of the Security and Emergency posal. A pass through autoclave from containment to
Response (SER), the DPSM, and ORS in the an anteroom outside of the containment barrier elimi-
discussions as early in the design process as nates the need for transport of contaminated material
possible with full knowledge of the intent to use outside of containment; however, it may require the
select agents. use of multiple units for compartmentalized suites. If
shared equipment is used, a location within the security
a. Category A agents require cameras for long perimeter must be provided and procedures for surface
term storage and a dual method of security decontamination and transport of contaminated mate-
access control. rial to the autoclave or digester must be identified.
Surface decontamination with chemical disinfectants or documents to enter the public realm when nec-
fumigation with gas or vapor is most commonly used essary for permitting community relations and
for decontaminating large equipment and room sur- other purposes.
faces. Each decontamination methodology has design
implications and limitations regarding the chemical
resistance of finishes, the location of decontamination 2.5.4.4 Specialty Areas
equipment, the distribution of the disinfecting agent, A. Aerobiology: ABSL-3 facilities may require a spe-
cycle time, and efficacy that must be considered so that cially equipped procedure room used for infecting ani-
physical features and finishes can be designed to sup- mals via inhalation of aerosolized agents. This equip-
port the proposed procedures. ment is typically housed in a dedicated room and shared
by all suites within the containment zone. Depending
Special detailing is required to seal penetrations on the animal species and type of inhalation (nose only,
through walls, floors, and ceilings to resist uncontrolled whole body, etc.) equipment required to support this
air migration and facilitate the use of gas and vapor procedure may range from a class II BSC to an exhaust-
decontamination. ing class III BSC. Procedure rooms housing this high-
risk operation should not be provided with floor drains,
2.5.4.3 Security and may require anterooms with pass through show-
ers. Planning considerations must account for the space
Security features shall be planned to respond to the required for specialized equipment, decontamination
threat risk assessment as determined by DPSM or the procedures and personnel involved in the procedure, as
AHJ in locations outside of the NIH campus. Security well as the methodology of transporting infected ani-
considerations for the containment zone and the build- mals to and from the aerobiology suite.
ing housing the biocontainment facility shall include:
B. Imaging: Imaging equipment used in biocontain-
1. Vehicular and/or personnel exclusion zones for ment facilities is typically housed in a dedicated suite
the building site with an anteroom, and shared by all suites within the
2. Blast protection containment zone. Imaging suites may require unique
design solutions to accommodate the program require-
3. Access control, security guard station, forced ments and the movement of animals. Imaging equip-
entry protection, and CCTV surveillance for ment located within containment must be certified to be
the building capable of withstanding decontamination without void-
ing manufacturer warranties or isolated from exposure
4. Forced entry protection and CCTV surveillance to the contaminated side of the biocontainment barrier.
for the containment zone
C. Large Animal Facilities: Large animal research may
5. Special requirements for select agent storage utilize caging that must be cleaned in place or fumigated
6. Security for communications and data asso- prior to transport to cage wash areas. If open caging is
ciated with the biocontainment facility and used, the holding room will become the primary con-
research tainment barrier and additional enhancements may be
required. The holding rooms may also require clean-
7. Utility rooms and interstitial areas serving con- ing with hoses between studies, after decontamination.
tainment areas shall be provided with access Planning must include methodology for capturing and
control. decontaminating effluent generated by this process, as
well as SOPs for transport of both infected and unin-
8. Limited distribution of plan and design docu- fected large animals. Transportation may include track
mentation associated with the facility should be lifts and hoists. If an infected animal is transported to
considered. Details regarding security features, the laboratory provisions for wash down of the vehicle
storage of biological agents, and other sensitive cargo area and wheels must be provided.
data shall be annotated in a manner that allows
D. Insectaries: Insects are a common vector for trans- 2.5.5 Planning and
port of infectious diseases. ABSL-3 insectaries require
special design considerations compliant with the Programming Deliverables
most recent version of the Arthropod Containment Refer to Section 2.1.4, Predesign Deliverables, Section
Guidelines published by the American Society of 2.4.4, ARF Security, and Appendix E, A/E Submission
Tropical Medicine and Hygiene to ensure that infected Requirements for Predesign Deliverable Requirements.
insects are contained within the suite. Risks associ- Additional requirements are as follows:
ated with conducting research involving insects within
a containment facility housing potential host animals 1. Biocontainment Facilities Program
must be addressed by the risk assessment. Questionnaire (Exhibit 2.3)
E. Other Requirements: Equipment control rooms and 2. SOP descriptions for items listed in Section
serviceable components should be located outside of 2.5.2.2, Data Collection
containment to the greatest extent possible.
3. Airflow diagram for the containment zone
Contents:
2.6.2 Facility Design in the containment wall. The biological seal shall be a
structurally stable, mechanically fastened gasketed seal
Requirements capable of containing decontaminating gas and allow-
ing for differential movement and remaining intact for
2.6.2.1 Exterior Envelope gaseous decontamination protocols.
Containment areas located along the exterior wall shall
comply with requirements identified by the threat risk 2.6.2.6 Doors, Frames, and Hardware
assessment for visual privacy, blast protection, and
Doors shall be seamless with no top or bottom recesses.
forced entry protection. Use of a buffer corridor or sec-
Cutouts in doors and frames shall be sealed to enhance
ondary partition should be considered to prevent ther-
sanitation and resist air infiltration. Doors and door
mal movement and infiltration of outside air and vapor
hardware shall be free of sharp edges. Door hardware
due to a strongly negative pressure differential within
shall be easily operated with PPE.
the containment suite.
2.6.2.7 Windows
2.6.2.2 Partitions
Window frames shall be fully welded and sealed.
Partitions within the containment barrier shall be
Frames shall be foam filled or otherwise sealed to pre-
designed to resist damage from lateral deflection caused
vent infiltration. When windows are located in the bar-
by differential air pressure surges that may occur during
rier wall, removable glazing stops shall be located on
HVAC fan failure testing. Partition construction shall
the non-containment side of the barrier. Glazing shall
be appropriately moisture and impact resistant, and
be tempered safety or laminated glass.
be designed for equipment, shelving and other lateral
loading.
2.6.2.8 Access Panels
2.6.2.3 Floors Access panels within biocontainment laboratories shall
be minimized. Access panels in ceilings and walls shall
Floors shall have a seamless, slip-resistant finish with
be gasketed and secured by latches that ensure a gas-
integral coved base. Flooring shall be non-absorbent,
tight seal.
smooth, pinhole free, easily sanitized, and resistant
to degradation from chemicals, disinfectants, and
decontaminants. 2.6.2.9 Casework
Provide wall-mounted or frame-mounted countertops or
2.6.2.4 Ceilings movable tables and mobile or suspended base cabinets
to enhance flexibility, sanitation, and decontamination.
Ceilings shall be monolithic, seamless construction.
Ceilings systems shall be designed to resist damage from
deflection (uplift and downward pressures) caused by 2.6.2.10 Equipment
differential air-pressure surges that may occur during
Equipment dimensions and weight shall be coordinated
HVAC fan-failure testing. Ceiling material and sup-
to ensure that large items can be transported through
port systems shall be designed to be moisture and sag
the path of travel into the containment zone including
resistant.
entry anterooms. Recessed wall-mounted equipment
shall be specified with fully sealed cabinets or back
2.6.2.5 Penetrations and Sealants boxes to facilitate sanitation and decontamination, and
eliminate unforeseen pathways for air infiltration.
All penetrations into and through partitions, floors, and
ceilings shall be sealed to enhance sanitation, facilitate Required equipment may include autoclaves, biological
gas and vapor decontamination, and resist air infiltra- safety cabinets, tissue digesters, pass through cabinets,
tion. All equipment integral to the containment bar- dunk tanks, and equipment for decontamination.
rier requires a manufacturer supplied biological seal
1.2 Provide a general description of the research/ 2.2 Identify functions that can share space and func-
work/studies to be performed in the facility. tions that require separation.
1.3 Identify project stakeholders and responsibilities. 2.3 Identify opportunities for sharing equipment and
core functions.
1.3.1 Identify the contacts and their roles.
2.4 Identify preferred location of offices and write-
1.4 Identify all staff and occupants anticipated to be up areas relative to labs.
located within this space.
1.12 List attributes and deficiencies of your current 3.7 Describe decontamination procedures and steril-
laboratory workspace. ization requirements.
1.16 Equipment Schedule 4.2 Identify existing conditions that may limit the
use of the facility or negatively affect the project.
1.17 Room Data Sheets
4.3 List sustainability objectives and features desired
for this project.
4.4 List hazardous materials (chemical and radio- 5.4 Identify any special lighting controls
logical) to be used and stored within the project requirements.
area (use Chemical Inventory template for col-
lecting this information). 5.5 Identify any higher densities of standard 120V
receptacles required other than normally
4.5 Will any spaces require special clear-height con- provided.
siderations for equipment or apparatus?
5.6 Other than standard 120V receptacles, what
4.6 Will any spaces include equipment or other items other specialty electrical wiring devices or other
that may require special structural consider- utilization voltages are required?
ations due to weight?
5.7 Identify any laboratory equipment requiring
4.7 Will any spaces require special vibration-isola- emergency power (if available) (noting that emer-
tion requirements or contain vibration-sensitive gency power will be affected by more outages
research/equipment? due to routine emergency distribution system
testing).
4.8 Will any spaces require special acoustical
considerations? 5.8 Identify any special grounding requirements.
4.9 Will any spaces require special conveying 5.9 Identify any conditioned power requirements.
requirements (i.e., pneumatic tube distribution
or other)? 5.10 Identify any special magnetic area concerns.
4.10 Will any spaces require special hoisting require- 5.11 Identify any special RF/EMI shielding
ments (i.e., crane, monorail, or other)? requirements.
4.11 Will any spaces require special finishes for high 5.12 Identify any scientific equipment monitoring
moisture or corrosion resistance? requirements.
1.4 Provide all staffing and occupancy requirements 4.2 List types of caging to be used for each group
and anticipated roles within this space. (existing and new), and whether power or venti-
lation is required.
2.3 Identify office, administrative, conference/train- 4.5 Identify sanitation procedure and schedule for
ing, and personnel functions to be provided. each animal group.
2.4 Are lockers, showers, toilet facilities required? 4.6 Define animal intake and quarantine holding
Separate mens and womens facilities? Pass requirements.
through design? 4.7 Identify noise, vibration or other special require-
2.5 List attributes and deficiencies of your current ment for each animal group.
facility.
6.9 Describe decontamination procedures and 9.2 List required services (i.e., CO2 , O2 , vacuum,
sterilization requirements (waste, space, caging, compressed air, anesthesia gas, etc.) and location
animal carcasses, and material). required (use Room Data Sheets).
11.0 Proposed Project Site 12.8 Identify any special grounding requirements.
11.1 Specify the proposed project location.
12.9 Identify any conditioned power requirements.
11.2 For renovations, identify physical condition and
12.10 Identify any special magnetic area concerns.
known spatial and infrastructure deficiencies.
12.11 Identify any special RF/EMI shielding
11.3 Identify and/or provide any available documen-
requirements.
tation for current and proposed space.
12.12 Identify any scientific equipment monitoring
requirements.
1.2 Define requirements for compartmentalization 3.7 Use and location of toilets (in or out of contain-
of different areas within the containment zone. ment zone).
1.3 Define requirements for proximity to ABSL-3 3.8 Requirements for unisex versus dedicated
research animal holding and procedure rooms. facilities.
2.1 Specify if any select or agricultural agents are to 3.11 Emergency egress and first-response procedures.
be used.
3.2 Provide applicable SOPs. 4.5 Define elements of the HVAC and other utility
systems that may require decontamination and
3.3 Identify maximum number of staff working
preferred method of decontamination.
within containment at any given time.
4.6 If gas or vapor decontamination is required,
verify types of equipment and/or systems to be
used in this process.
5.1 Identify methodology for servicing scientific equip- 7.5 Define agent storage security requirements.
ment and utility system components that must be
placed or used within the containment zone. 7.6 Define data and communications security
requirements.
5.2 Identify standard operating procedures for
facility shutdown and maintenance of the facil- 7.7 Identify facility hardening and critical utility
ity during shutdown. Determine if zoning is requirements.
required to enable partial shutdowns.
6.1 Identify how data and communications will be 9.4 Identify any special lighting controls requirements.
transmitted (fax, Wi-Fi, etc.). List laboratory ser-
vices (i.e., gas, vacuum, air) required at the bench. 9.5 Identify any higher densities of standard 120V
receptacles requirements other than normally
6.2 Identify requirements for hands-free communi- provided.
cation and audio issues related to PAPR use.
9.6 Other than standard 120V receptacles, identify
6.3 Identify preference for hands-free sink operation. other specialty electrical wiring devices or other
utilization voltages requirements.
1.0 Program Requirements 3.4 Identify use and location of hand wash sinks.
1.1 Identify requirements and methodology for 3.5 Define current or future requirements for show-
aerobiology. ering out of containment.
1.2 Identify requirements for compartmentalization 3.6 Identify use and location of toilets (in or out of
of different areas within the ABSL-3 biocontain- containment zone).
ment zone.
3.7 Identify requirements for unisex versus dedi-
1.3 Identify requirements for proximity between cated facilities.
ABSL-3 research animal holding and procedure
3.8 Identify communication requirements during the
rooms.
entering/exiting process.
1.4 Identify each population of animals to be housed
3.9 Define methods of transfer of large equipment in
(species, number, health status) and potential
and out of containment.
for additional or different animal models in the
future. 3.10 Identify emergency egress and first-response
procedures.
4.3 Identify the method(s) for space 6.3 Identify physical barriers to using track lifts/
decontamination, including typical time periods hoist
required for space decontamination.
4.6 If gas or vapor decontamination is required, 7.1 Define forced entry protection requirements.
verify types of equipment and/or systems to be
7.2 Define closed-circuit television monitoring
used in this process.
requirements.
4.7 Identify requirements and methodology for
7.3 Define biometric security requirements.
carcass decontamination, storage and disposal.
7.4 Define agent storage security requirements.
5.2 Identify requirements for in-place and/or central- 8.0 Proposed Project Site
ized decontamination of caging. 8.1 Verify that the proposed site can meet limita-
tions that may be imposed by threat/risk criteria.
5.3 Identify throughput requirements for caging
decontamination as well as minimum chamber
sizes if caging is autoclaved.
6.1 Identify how animals will be transferred into 9.4 Identify any higher densities of standard 120V
the facility, and how infected animals will be receptacles required other than normally
transported within the containment area. provided.
6.2 For larger animals, assess requirements for using 9.5 Other than standard 120V receptacles, identify
track lifts/hoists for lifting and positioning ani- any other specialty electrical wiring devices or
mals for removal/radiography, etc. other utilization voltages.
Contents:
3.1.0 Introduction
NIH Master Utility File, shall be used for reference and E. Site Utility Plans: Plans, profiles, details, schedules,
general information only. The A/E or construction con- etc. based on existing topography reference to project
tractor shall field verify all items within the limits of benchmarks and utility surveys showing but not neces-
a project. Verification shall include utility surveys, test sarily limited to: location of all utilities above and below
pits, topographical surveys and other investigations as ground, manholes with invert elevations, building(s),
required to accurately determine depths, sizes, material roads, service areas, major site features, easements and
and other pertinent information for all utilities. In addi- other legal constraints, setbacks, etc.
tion, comply with the following requirements:
F. Storm Water Plans: Plans shall include profiles, pipe
A. Propose Site Plan: The site plan shall indicate clearly crossing clearances, storm and inlet computations,
the limits of disturbance (LOD); project or site utiliza- structure schedules and all other pertinent informa-
tion area must be indicated with in LOD. The LOD will tion, based on existing topography reference to project
be used as limits during construction, including but not benchmarks showing, but not limited to storm water
limited to trailers, equipment, vehicle and pedestrian improvements such as swales, ditches, culverts, storm
traffic control, parking, material storage, and tree pro- drains, storm water inlets, etc.
tections. Proposed site plan must also indicate existing
G. Site Improvement Plans: Plans and details showing
and proposed topography (tie ins), bench mark with its
but not necessarily limited to, location of building(s),
elevation, propose features, relationship to roads/side-
roads, and service areas.
walks, trees, underground utilities, propose or existing
building footprints (labeled), coordinates. H. Landscape Plans: Plans, schedules, and details
showing, but not necessarily limited to, location of
B. Existing Condition Site Plan: Plan shall indicate all
building(s), roads, service areas, walks, plazas, etc.
existing structures, underground utilities, grade eleva-
tions, bench marks, coordinates, building footprints, I. Outline Specifications: Outline specifications shall
streets and other items, labeled accordingly. The A/E be developed at the design development stage.
shall indicate locations and project area clearly.
J. Detail Performance Specifications: Detail perfor-
C. Site Development Plan: The Site Development Plan mance specifications shall be developed at the contract
shall indicate existing topography, benchmark, major document stage.
site features, relationship to roads/walks, trees, and the
proposed building footprint. K. Systems Cost Estimates: Systems cost estimates shall
be developed at the design development stage.
D. Sediment Control Plan: Plans and details showing
erosion control measurements shall be development L. Quantity Takeoff Estimates: Quantity takeoff esti-
according to the Maryland Standards and Specifications mates shall be developed at the contract document stage.
for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control.
Contents:
3.2.0 Introduction
Contents:
3.3.0 Introduction
any research or clinical facility, as well as any activity K. Required Corrosion Resistant Analysis, Design, and
that is near any hazardous or critical piping or near to Construction: Pipelines shall be designed for corrosion
any critical utility shall occur only upon approval of the resistance in conformance with recommendations of the
risk and damage mitigation plan and approved sched- National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE).
ule by the PO. The A/E shall specify for the contractor Designs shall include requirements for testing of soil for
to include development of an action plan to facilitate stray currents as well as corrosive soils and cathodic
immediate restoration of service in the event of any protection of underground metallic piping. A soil cor-
breach, prior to undertaking any excavation activi- rosivity evaluation shall be made to ensure compatibil-
ties and to outline and incorporate any other required ity with system materials and shall consider resistivity,
mitigation of risks. Such action plan shall include, but pH, oxidation-reduction potential, presence of sulfides,
not be limited to availability of personnel, materials, moisture content, presence and potential for stray cur-
and backfeed provisions, mitigation of potential safety rent, known corrosivity, groundwater elevations, sus-
issues, as well as in-place contact procedures and avail- pected corrosivity/chemicals/hydrocarbons, and experi-
ability with facility and emergency response personnel ence with existing installations in the project area. For
in the event of an accident or unplanned damage. pipelines greater than or equal to 152 mm (6 in.) diam-
eter, the initial corrosion evaluation shall be made by
F. Utility Disruption and Restoration: Utilities services a competent corrosion protection professional. Where
shall not be disrupted to NIH facilities without written cathodic protection systems are required, a predesign
approval of the PO, which shall include the time of the meeting with NIH is required. Cathodic Protection
disruption, the duration, and the time of restoration. systems shall be designed by a corrosion engineer with
The A/E shall specify that the contractor shall ensure NACE certification, or a NACE certified Corrosion
the quality of utilities (e.g., free of contamination) prior Specialist. All cathodic protection system installations
to connection to existing buildings. shall be inspected and tested by a competent corro-
G. Field Confirmation: All branch utility connection sion engineer or NACE certified Senior Corrosion
points shall be field verified and validated during the Technologist, or NACE certified Corrosion Specialist.
project design phase by the A/E of Record. The corrosion professional shall provide a report of
recommendations to the design team, which shall be
H. Inspection and Testing: All utilities and related included in the project BOD.
aspects of construction shall be thoroughly inspected
by a competent professional as approved by the NIH L. Geotechnical Investigation: Proper analysis of soils
and tested to the same extent as required for local major for each underground installation is required, includ-
municipality utilities, and as additionally required by ing an adequate number of soil borings and analysis
the NIH. Testing and inspection reports shall be sub- by a competent geotechnical engineer or as otherwise
mitted to the NIH. The A/E shall provide competent required to ensure proper design and installation.
field personnel to oversee test and inspection activities M. Excavation: Excavation, backfill, support, dewater-
unless otherwise directed by the PO. ing, corrosion protection, and compaction requirements
I. Profiles: Underground utilities design shall include shall be specified in conformance with on-site geotech-
profiles for all main lines and major laterals. Electrical nical reports and recommendations of the geotechnical,
duct bank profiles shall slope away from buildings to civil, and corrosion engineer. The A/E shall carefully
the first manhole. Cover shall be a minimum of 762 mm review geotechnical reports and specify materials and
(2 ft. 6 in.) and sufficient to keep the utility line below procedures to prevent loss of piping slope or alignment.
the local frost line. Trenches shall not be subject to loading or water infil-
tration except as approved by the geotechnical engineer
J. Manholes: Manholes shall be provided at all changes and shall not result in piping displacement. Excavation
in direction on utility lines 203 mm (8 in.) and larger for shall not be within a 45 angle of repose of the bottom
storm and sanitary sewers, and at all points of connec- of footings or foundations serving buildings, supports,
tion. NIH numbers shall be brazed on manhole covers. or retaining walls. The A/E shall consider the required
width of trenches when arranging piping networks and
in some cases may need to coordinate with the struc- N. Shoring Systems for Site Utilities: Because vibration
tural engineer to lower the bottom of certain footings transmission adversely affects research, impact driven
to comply with this requirement. shoring systems may not be used, unless the contract
specifically states this system may be used. Refer to
1. Provision of a geotechnical report by a compe- Section 6.5, Noise and Vibration.
tent design professional is required for all new
and major projects where underground utilities O. Utility Connections: All planned connections to the
will be buried, including within the building. central utility systems and revisions to the NIH piping
The report shall address specific requirements or electrical distribution networks shall be reviewed and
for utilities, including but not limited to soil approved by the NIH Utility Distribution Branch (UDB)
corrosivity issues and protection of piping from for compliance to NIH requirements. The applicable
corrosion-induced failure, groundwater, bed- systems include all utility distribution systems, return
ding and compaction requirements, and any systems for steam/condensate, electrical, information
additional requirements unique to the project technology/local area network (IT/LAN), chilled
site to ensure safe, stable, and durable system water supply/return, compressed air, potable water,
installations. The report shall also address natural gas, and storm and sanitary sewer. This also
need for underslab dewatering (subsoil) and encompasses campus utility distribution lines (not
foundation drainage, and any additional design building service connections) that traverse basements,
recommendations that should be considered crawl spaces, mechanical or electric rooms, under
related to underground utilities. foundations, over structures, and interstitial space.
2. Excavation, backfill, and compaction (whether P. Benchmark: Indicate the benchmark from which
inside or outside the structure) shall be per- all elevations will be measured. Identify United States
formed in accordance with requirements- Geological Survey (USGS) Datum being observed.
specific on-site geotechnical conditions at the
project so as to maintain proper support and Q. Sizing: Utilities shall be sized to allow for the pro-
grade for piping installations, and protect jected loads of master plans, any additional require-
piping from superimposed loads (including ments of other engineering sections of the DRM; and
construction traffic) groundwater, and cor- in no case less than 20% overage for mains and build-
rosive conditions. Strict control of excavation, ing services. In addition, design to comply with any
backfill, and compaction procedures shall be velocity requirements of this section and additional
specified based on on-site conditions, loadings, requirements stated in related engineering sections of
and system materials. the DRM.
3. The A/E shall specify compliance with on-site R. Quality Control and Assurance: Ensure proper
geotechnical requirements to address proper grade, bedding, compaction, and backfill of lines in
bedding and compaction for all underground accordance with requirements of the DRM, and on-site
plumbing and utilities in detail, and shall not geotechnical conditions and compliance with required
leave determinations up to the contractor. A procedures to protect and maintain piping grade and
competent design professional shall direct spec- preclude displacement or stresses of underground lines.
ifications for such activities as well as required An appropriate quality-control plan is mandatory,
quality control. including coordination with the geotechnical, civil, and
corrosion engineer or other individuals providing such
4. Specific attention to corrosion control, dewater- construction oversight.
ing, DRM piping slopes, and required bedding,
backfill lifts, and compaction density, and pro- S. Pipeline Stress/Flexibility Analysis: Calculations
tection from construction loads is mandatory shall be provided and design approach justified demon-
and shall be addressed by the A/E and verified strating appropriate design for pipeline thermal condi-
in construction. tions for HVAC systems (e.g., steam, high temperature
water).
T. Direct Buried Insulated Systems: Direct buried All non-electrically conductive buried piping systems
insulated piping systems are not normally permitted, outside of buildings shall be provided with polyeth-
and their use requires justification and pre-approval, ylene insulated copper tracer wire suitable for burial,
including materials analysis and a rigorous construc- minimum #12 AWG. All hazardous piping, flammable
tion quality assurance plan. Insulated piping should be piping, and piping carrying oxidizers shall be fitted with
installed in tunnels or as otherwise approved by NIH. tracing wire where buried, whether or not fitted in con-
tainment. The tracer wire shall be laid above the piping
U. Materials: Refer to Exhibit 6.3 within Chapter 6, for centerline within 152 mm (6 in.) of the piping top, shall
detailed criteria for materials, applications, and joints, have no joints, and shall not be wrapped around the
which are to be utilized for site utility services. piping except at the accessible riser. Tracer wire shall
V. Required Computer Modeling: The NIH has devel- terminate at ground rods, and be joined to other sys-
oped extensive computer modeling for existing utilities. tems with manufactured direct-bury sealed splice kits
Expansion of these utilities requires the use of the pro- designed for the application. In addition, metal warning
grams listed in Table 3.3.2 for analysis. detection tape shall be installed 305 mm (1 ft.) above
the piping during backfill.
Table 3.3.2 Required Computer Modeling A. Uniform Color Code: The American Public Works
Programs Association encourages public agencies, utilities, con-
tractors, other associations, manufacturers and all
Storm Drain EDS Storm Drain
others involved in excavation to adopt the APWA
Sanitary sewer EDS Sewer Uniform Color Code, using ANSI standard Z535.1
Domestic water KY Pipe Safety Colors for temporary marking and facility
Chilled water KY Pipe identification.
For all new, repaired, or altered underground utilities ORANGE Communication, Alarm or Signal Lines,
greater than 3 m (10 ft.) in length, the Contractor shall Cables or Conduit
install detectable marking tape 203 mm (8 in.) below
grade unless otherwise directed by the Engineer or BLUE Potable Water
Project Officer.
GREEN Sewers and Drain Lines
Detectable marking tape shall be permanent, appro-
PURPLE Reclaimed Water, Irrigation and Slurry
priately colored, continuous-printed magnetic tape
Lines
intended for direct-burial service not less than 152
mm (6 in.) wide by 4 mils thick. The tape shall read B. Submittals: Contractor shall submit product data
CAUTION: BURIED INSTALLATION BELOW. for approval prior to start of any excavation activities.
Tape color shall conform to the APWA Uniform Color Contractor shall submit samples of each section of tape
Code. proposed on the project. Sample shall be a minimum
length required to verify correct warning language,
width, thickness, and material.
3.3.4 Local Requirements poured against undisturbed soil and inspected prior to
backfill.
A. Local Municipality: The DRM does not address all
requirements mandatory for design and installation of D. All water systems shall be properly tested, flushed,
on-site utilities. The A/E shall comply with best prac- and disinfected in accordance with AWWA guidelines.
tices and requirements of the nearest local major munic-
ipality and utility authorities in addition to any require- E. Individual water services shall be provided for each
ments which may be more restrictive in the DRM. building. Comply with water service requirements in
Section 8.3.
1. Water and Sewer: For projects at the NIH
Bethesda Campus (including Poolesville) the F. Corrosion protection shall be in accordance with
design and installation of domestic water WSSC Pipeline Design Manual, Part 3 Common Design
supply and sanitary sewer shall comply with Guidelines or in conformance with approved recom-
all the WSSC requirements, general conditions mendations of a competent corrosion engineer, except
and standard specifications (except as other- that requirements for coating and cathodic corrosion
wise noted in the DRM), and shall be identified protection (as determined by corrosion potential analy-
clearly in applicable design drawings and speci- sis) shall apply to all pipe sizes, including piping 406
fications. Inspections shall be carried out by the mm (1 ft. 4 in.) and smaller.
responsible design A/E and their consultants
(as well as any additional inspections by NIH)
unless otherwise approved by NIH. Plans are
submitted to NIH for review and approval.
3.3.6 Additional Gravity
B. Natural Gas: Utility piping systems located on the Sewer Requirements
NIH campus for natural gas service shall comply with
A. Combined sewers are not permitted.
all requirements of the Washington Gas Company and
the Code of Federal Regulations. B. The minimum size sewer lateral for any property
shall be 152 mm (6 in.). Individual sewer laterals are
C. Stormwater: Storm water design practices shall
required for each building. Coordinate sewer elevations
comply with requirements of the Maryland Department
with the A/E and design in as much as possible to pre-
of Environment (MDE), NIH Master Plan for
vent backwater flooding within any building, including
Stormwater Management, and the Code of Federal
under any condition of full sewer flow.
regulations. Technical details not covered in the above
shall follow best practices of the local major municipali- C. Gravity sewers shall be designed to carry the calcu-
ties and requirements as issued by NIH. lated peak design flow at a minimum velocity of 0.76
m/s (2.5 fps) (based upon flow of not to exceed 1/4 full)
and a maximum velocity not to exceed 3.04 m/s (10 fps)
(at the peak design flow). Systems shall be designed to
not surcharge manholes. Where there is inadequate flow
3.3.5 Additional Water to achieve this (such as at some terminal buildings) pro-
Systems Requirements vide a minimum slope of at least 1%. Storm sewers shall
A. Comply with requirements of the most current be designed for 0.91 to 3.04 m/s (3 to 10 fps) velocity.
WSSC Pipeline Design Manual. D. Materials shall be corrosion resistant and designed
B. Water systems shall be arranged on a grid basis, with to minimize potential for stoppages. Systems shall
valving to permit bidirectional flow and to maximize be water and gas-tight, and tight against tree-root
service continuity to each facility. infiltration.
C. Thrust-blocking is required, along with joint E. Maximum long term deflection in gravity sewer
restraints, and shall be arranged for effective use under lines shall be not exceed requirements allowable by
conditions of bidirectional flow. Thrust blocks shall be WSSC, but in no case to exceed 4%. Initial deflection
Contents:
3.4.0 Introduction
3.4.0 Introduction B. Parking and Paving: The size and types of park-
ing spaces should be in conformance with local zoning
Site improvements, including roads and parking lots, regulations. Handicapped spaces should be adjacent to
sidewalks and other constructed site elements, are buildings whenever possible and located in an acces-
important to the smooth flow of people and vehicles on sible route. Paving composition shall be as noted in
NIH campuses. Table 3.4.1. All pavement design shall be subject to
Geotechnical Engineering pavement design analysis to
verify pavement depths. Parking lots should slope 1%
minimum and 5% maximum.
3.4.1 Site Improvement 1. Traffic Line Striping for Roads and Parking
Lots: Paint shall be approved lead free, vola-
Requirements tile organic compound compliant, fast drying,
A. General Requirements: Borings and geotechnical and 100% acrylic waterborne traffic paint. A
reports should be obtained from a qualified geotechni- manufacturers safety data sheet (MSDS) shall
cal consultant licensed to practice in the state where the be submitted for each product. White traffic
work is to be implemented and the report should include paint shall be a premium grade with 78% total
a preliminary recommendation for sheeting and shoring. solids by weight and containing additional resin
All existing underground steam and condensate piping and titanium dioxide. Painting shall only be
to be disturbed should be tested for asbestos-containing allowed when pavement surfaces are dry and
insulation. Existing natural features such as trees, slopes, clean. Pavement surface temperatures shall be
and drainage characteristics should be preserved when- at or above 5 C (41 F) and rising. A wet film
ever possible. The construction of large and significant thickness of 0.300.38 mm (1215 mils) shall
projects that impact day-to-day NIH activities should be be required. New striping shall match existing
phased to minimize disruption to the campus. line widths with no line being less than 102 mm
(4 in.) width.
Contractor staging areas should be identified as early in
the project as possible and reasonable space provided. 2. Strong yellow-green crosswalk tape shall be ther-
The staging areas should be surrounded with a tempo- moplastic marking tape. Where required, this heat
rary 1.8 m (6 ft.) chain link fence with brown plastic applied product shall be installed strictly follow-
screening material. All temporary fencing shall with- ing manufacturers recommendations. Tape shall
stand a wind load of 3.0 kgf/m 2 (20 psf), with a 1.5 be alternating 203 mm (8 in.) minimum lengths
overturning factor of safety. of 203 mm (8 in.) wide strong yellow-green and
305 mm (1 ft.) wide white. There shall be a 152
Table 3.4.1 Pavement Composition mm (6 in.) gap between tape strips. Other cross-
walks shall be painted white.
Area Item Paving Section
Parking C. Sidewalks, Curbs, and Gutters: Optimum sidewalk
Subbase Compacted soil width is 1.8 m (6 ft.), with 1.5 m (5 ft.) as the minimum.
Lot
The sidewalk concrete design mix shall be a minimum
One lift of 102 mm
Base of 102 mm (4 in.), 31 MPa (4,500 psi), 6% to 8% air
(4 in.) compacted base
entrainment. Mix iron oxide color pigment per manu-
Bituminous 51 mm (2 in.)
facturers direction for quantities to be incorporated and
concrete compacted topping
seal with a clear curing compound. Color additive shall
be similar to Silversmoke by Artevia. Contact DFS for
Roadways Subbase Compacted soil color approval. Medium texture broom finish, perpen-
Two lifts of 102 mm dicular to path of travel for maximum slip resistance.
Base Detectable warning surfaces shall be cast-in-place,
(4 in.) compacted base
replaceable, tactile pavers approved by the ADRB.
Bituminous 51 mm (2 in.)
concrete compacted topping
1. Material Exclusions for Curbs and Curb of sufficient size and configuration to accom-
Gutters: Granite curbs are not permitted on modate various sized vehicles up to and includ-
any NIH projects. ing tractor trailer class.
2. Material Exclusions for Common Pedestrian 2. Drainage and Grading: Adequate drainage
Sidewalk Areas Subject to Use by Snow Removal should be provided by use of trench drains or
Equipment: The following materials are not per- positive drainage away from the dock, with a
mitted on any NIH projects because of mainte- minimum gradient of 1%.
nance requirements or safety concerns:
E. Parking and Wheel Chocks: Tarmacs on-grade must
a. Cobblestones have wheel chocks available that meet Occupational
Safety and Health Administration requirements.
b. Asphalt hex pavers on asphalt base Adequate short-term parking should be available for
c. Exposed aggregate concrete courier service vehicles.
d. Any type of paver material on gravel/sand F. Snow Removal Areas: Areas for piling snow from
base course snow removal operations are desirable and should not
block the dumpster or the loading dock. Heated pave-
e. Pavers on pedestal systems ment is not permitted for snow removal due to mainte-
nance and energy concerns.
f. Granite, brick, or slate on concrete base
G. Screening: Visual screening of all loading areas is
g. Stamped concrete desirable to minimize audible and visual disruption
D. Loading Docks, and Delivery and Service Areas: All to the NIH campuses and surrounding communities.
new campus buildings and buildings subject to major Evergreen plant material in the area of loading docks
retrofitting require the installation of loading docks. should visually screen, while also meeting pest control
Loading docks are a functional extension of the facility, IPM requirements in Section 1.12. Screening should be
and should be designed and managed to facilitate proper carefully coordinated with DPSM and closed-circuit
and efficient movement of materials into and out of the television requirements.
facility along with a dockyard that is easily cleaned and H. Fences: Staging areas shall be surrounded by a
maintained. Loading docks should be located in areas temporary 2.4 m (8 ft.) chain-link fence with brown
of the building that are separated from normal daily plastic screening material. See Section 3.4.1, General
pedestrian and vehicular traffic, and should be sized for Requirements for wind loading and overturning require-
safe maneuvering as well as for loading and unloading ments. Where possible pedestrian hazard occurs solid
equipment such as pallet trucks. wood fencing shall be provided. Permanent decorative
Loading docks should be sited to prevent the entry of fencing shall be located and designed in accordance with
pests and designed to create an effective barrier between the NIH Campus Master Plans, and under the review
the outside of the facility and the interior. Current and and approval of the NIH Architectural Design Review
future facility needs should be taken into consideration Board (ADRB). All critical exterior utility equipment,
when planning and designing allocated space for load- including but not limited to generators, transformers, air
ing docks. Facilities expand, needs change, and docks handling units, etc., require permanent security fencing.
should be conceived with long term viability in mind. Security fencing shall meet the requirements set forth by
the Division of Physical Security Management (DPSM).
For additional loading dock requirements, refer to
Section 4.8. I. Site Furnishing: Shall be used for a variety of pur-
poses. Benches should be located periodically along long
1. Access and Truck Size: Access to loading docks pedestrian circulation corridors to create rest points.
will be directly from NIH campus roads. No They can also be integrated into the design of plazas and
access through parking lots will be permitted. garden spaces. Tables and chairs should be specified in
Roadways leading to loading docks should be areas where eating and/or outdoor work environments
Contents:
3.5.0 Introduction
3.5.2 Trees
All planting beds shall begin outside the gravel strip. 3. Juniperus virginiana (Eastern Redcedar)
Mulches shall be double-shredded hardwood, cypress
mulch, or pine bark fines. Mulch shall be applied to 4. Leucothoe fontanesiana (Drooping Leucothoe)
a compacted depth of 76 mm (3 in.). Mulches should 5. Hydrangea quercifolia (Oakleaf Hydrangea)
not be mounded in planting areas and should not touch
shrub or tree trunks. 6. Callicarpa americana (American Beautyberry)
Landscape planting impacts the number and types of NIH campuses located in North Carolina are in Zone 7.
pests found around the exterior of the building, as well The following are representative plants in Zone 7:
as within the building envelope. The following shall not
be used in NIH projects: Zone 7: -17.8 to -12.3C (0 to 10F)
1. Ornamental plants notorious for insect infes- 1. Quercus palustris (Pin Oak)
tation such as: Ash, Mulberry, Boxelder, and 2. Magnolia virginiana (Sweetbay Magnolia)
Spirea attracting pests that can become indoor
problems 3. Taxodium distichum (Bald Cypress)
2. Dense foundation plantings, reducing air circu- 4. Fothergilla gardenia (Dwarf Fothergilla)
lation around buildings, harboring pests such
as wasps, and obstructing pest management 5. Viburnum dentatum (Arrowwood Viburnum)
survey and control activities 6. Pachysandra procumbens (Alleghany Spurge)
3. Deer attracting plant material NIH campuses located in Montana are in Zone 5. The
D. USDA Plant Hardiness Zones: The NIH has sev- following are representative plants in Zone 5:
eral campuses throughout the United States and it is Zone 5: -28.9 to -23.3C (-20 to -10F)
recommended that NIH facilities program use the U.S.
Department of Agricultures (USDAs) Plant Hardiness 1. Abies concolor (White Fir)
Maps to determine which plants are suitable for
their campuses. See Exhibit 3.1, U.S. Department of 2. Pinus ponderosa (Ponderosa Pine)
Agriculture Plant Hardiness Maps. 3. Betula fontinalis (Rocky Mountain Birch)
NIH campuses located in Maryland are in Zones 6 4. Alnus tenuifolia (Alder)
(Frederick) and 7 (Bethesda, Poolesville, and Baltimore).
The following are representative plants in Zones 6 and 7: 5. Cornus sericea (Red-osier Dogwood)
specified to be nursery grown and delivered in contain- 1. Project name and PO identification
ers or balled and burlaped.
2. Name of Maryland qualified professional
Any project involving exterior work shall identify and who prepared the plan and shall certify upon
make note of any trees within the LOD and replace completion of the project that the plan has been
regardless or reason for tree elimination, including completed in accordance with the plan
removal to accommodate the project or tree sickness.
This policy applies specifically to the NIH Bethesda and 3. Area of permanent additional soil disturbance
Poolesville campuses. 4. Number of trees to be removed
Currently, the NIH Urban Forest Conservation Plan 5. Number of trees to be relocated
(NIH UFCO, FCP#C06-04) does not reside in an
electronic linkable format. The NIH UFCP incor- 6. Number of trees to be planted
porates the required elements of the Maryland Forest
Conservation Act (MFCA); it includes the 1:1 tree 7. A copy of one of the following project plans:
replacement policy and standard tree protection mea- a. Sediment and Erosion Control plan
sures, and has been prepared to comply with the MFCA
in support of the NIH Master Plan. b. Landscape plan
Any project that requires an SEC permit from MDE c. Simplified FCP application
shall submit a project-specific FCP to maintain the NIH
UFCP. Subsequent construction projects are updates to The A/E shall consult with ORFs landscape architect(s)
the NIH UFCP, but do not need to go through extensive and DEP for additional guidance/updates and for final
Maryland Department of Natural Resources (DNR) review and regulatory follow-up. The NIH landscape
review. A project-specific FCP shall be prepared by a architect handles the technical review related to planting
Maryland-licensed forester, licensed landscape archi- plans, tree relocation, and selection of species, etc.; the
tect, or other qualified professional. Any work per- environmental compliance staff handles the technical
formed on trees, including limb and root pruning or regulatory review. Both units work together and main-
cutting, shall be performed by a Maryland-licensed tain and update the NIH UFCP. Additional guidance
tree expert. Upon completion of the project, the plans can be obtained through the Maryland Department of
shall be properly certified by a qualified professional. Natural Resources (DNR).
All documentation for a project-specific FCP shall be
submitted to the Division of Environmental Protection
(DEP) and contain the following:
2a -50 to -45F -42.8 to -45.5C Prudhoe Bay, Alaska; Flin Flon, Manitoba (Canada)
3a -40 to -35F -37.3 to -39.9C International Falls, Minnesota; St. Michael, Alaska
Montana
Maryland
North Carolina
Contents:
4.1.2.3 Masonry
fire stopping penetrations per UL requirements. For E. Dewpoint Analysis: Dewpoint analysis shall be
joint sealant requirements in containment areas, see performed to ensure that condensation will not occur
Appendix L, Sealant Table. within the envelope assembly and/or inside the building
under any environmental condition.
C. Pest Management: The A/E shall specify sealants as
required for pest management. See Appendix L, Sealant F. Water/Moisture Direction: Air spaces, drainage
Table, for sealant requirements. planes, weep holes, flashing, and other devices shall
be provided and properly detailed to direct water and
When the application of sealants is indicated for any moisture to the outside of the wall system.
of the above reasons, the most stringent requirements
shall apply. G. Air Barriers and Vapor Drive: Calculate the vapor
drive expected in the exterior wall assembly to deter-
mine the conditions and determine if an air barrier is
required to block the migration of vapor.
C. Control: Exterior walls shall be designed to control Rationale: All exterior elements shall reinforce
airflow, temperature conduction, and moisture migra- and be part of a uniform, cohesive building
tion into and out of the building. The R- and U-values design.
of wall components and assemblies shall be assessed,
calculated, and modeled to ensure that building codes,
sustainability goals, and energy performance require-
4.1.2.3 Masonry
ments are met. Air barriers shall be provided to control A. Standards: Design and construction of masonry sys-
air infiltration. tems shall be based on standards, specifications, and
publications for the products selected, including those
D. Vapor Retarder: A vapor retarder must be included by the American Society for Testing and Material
in the assembly, and must be provided commensurate (ASTM), American Concrete Institute (ACI), Building
with current ASHRAE and industry recommendations. Stone Institute, Structural Clay Products Institute,
Indiana Limestone Institute, Marble Institute design process to develop the optimum wall type and
of America, National Building Granite Quarries thickness that satisfies the above elements in the most
Association, National Concrete Masonry Association, effective manner.
Indiana Limestone Institute, Brick Industry Association
including their Technical Notes, and the Portland
Cement Association.
Design and construction of unitized or stick system cur- D. Wind Resistance: The roofing system shall be
tain walls shall be based on standards, specifications, and designed for resistance to wind-generated uplift
publications for the products selected, including those forces as modeled and designed in accordance with
by the ASTM, American National Standards Institute recent available wind data for the respective area
(ANSI), Aluminum Association (AA), Architectural (available from the National Oceanic and Atmospheric
Aluminum Manufacturing Association (AAMA), Administration (NOAA).
ACI, Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association, National
Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers, E. Roof Penetrations: The roof penetrations should be
National Concrete Masonry Association, National minimized to the greatest extent possible. Penetrations
Precast Concrete Association, Portland Cement shall not be installed in valleys or near drains or
Association, Precast Concrete Institute, Structural Clay scuppers.
Products Institute and Brick Industry Association.
F. Roof-Mounted Equipment: When roof-mounted
equipment is used, the equipment should provide the
4.1.2.5 Wall Thickness lowest profiles for the application used. The supports
shall be designed for the equipment size and weight,
Placement of the wall in relation to the perimeter
with sufficient clearance to allow for roof repair or
structure affects the construction cost, in as much as
replacement without disturbing the equipment, and
it affects the fenestration type, the shading effect or
for construction in a manner so as not to violate the
potential and the method of assembly and/or installa-
integrity of the waterproofing system.
tion. Careful consideration shall be given during the
4.1.4 Windows
4.1.4.1 Glazing
A. Operable Windows: Operable windows are not per-
mitted in NIH research laboratories and ARFs. The use A. Double Glaze: All glazing, including exterior doors,
of operable windows may be considered in new admin- glazed panels, and skylights, shall be double glazed
istrative office buildings not containing research labs. with a continuous thermal break.
C. Type/Amount: The amount and type of glazing shall glass exterior pane shall be provided. If laminated glass
be carefully studied in relation to the specific energy is required for double-glazed windows, it shall be pro-
conservation goals and requirements of the project, vided for interior panes only.
building function, and building/facade orientation.
D. Condensation: Condensation should not be apparent 4.1.4.3 Provisions for Window Cleaning
on glass when at the buildings design temperature and The need for window cleaning, facade access, and main-
humidity range. tenance from both the interior and the exterior includ-
E. Glazing Units: All glazed openings in a building ing replacement of glazing shall be considered during
envelope shall have energy-efficient low-emissive design. Provisions for window cleaning and facade
(Low-e) coated insulated glazing units (IGUs). access equipment must be included in the design for all
facilities. For surfaces three stories and less above acces-
Glazing units shall feature high visible light transmis- sible location(s), the provision of built-in access is not
sion while providing a low solar heat gain coefficient required unless constraints make placement of ladders
(SHGC). SHGC shall not exceed 0.27 on east, south, and lifts impractical.
or west facing facades, and 0.6 on north-facing facades.
F. Glazing Mullions: Glazing mullions shall be fully Rationale: Window washing and facade
thermally broken aluminum frames with fully inte- inspection and access is an important part of
grated, omnidirectional internal guttering. building maintenance and must be safe and
accessible.
G. Curtain Wall Systems: Curtain wall systems shall be
either four-sided structural silicone glazed or mechani-
cally secured with pressure bar systems, or a combina-
Figure 4.1.6 Sunshading at Building Entrance
tion thereof.
Contents:
4.2.2.4 Physical and Electronic Security 4.2.4 Specialty Doors, Frames, and Hardware
4.2.1.4 Exterior Doors and Frames D. Interior Aluminum Storefront Doors and Frames:
A. Entry Doors: Building entry doors shall comply 1. Finish: Anodized finish for all aluminum
with DPSM requirements and approved by DPSM. components
Blast hardened doors may be required for blast resis-
tant facilities. 2. Construction: Non-thermally broken frame
construction, closed door tops, seamless
B. Visibility: Locate exterior doors for maximum construction
visibility.
A. Administrative Office Doors within Laboratory 2. Tamper Resistance: Hinges, hinge pins, and
Suites: May be considered non-laboratory door and frame. hasps shall be secured against unauthorized
removal by spot welds or use of peened mount-
B. Undercut: Interior doors shall be undercut a mini- ing bolts.
mum 13 mm (1/2 in.) and maximum 19 mm (3/4 in.).
3. Astragal: Provide astragal or lock guard to equipment shall have doors of adequate size to move
prevent jimmying of the latch. such equipment.
G. Egress Only Doors: Doors used exclusively for emer- Exceptions: 914 mm (3 ft.) Doors: A laboratory with
gency egress shall not have operable hardware on the multiple entries, including at least one 1.1 m (3 ft. 6
exterior of the door for security purposes. in.) or 1.2 m (4 ft.) wide entry, may have 914 mm (3
ft.) wide secondary doors provided those doors are
not situated in a logical path for delivery of laboratory
4.2.1.7 Glazing supplies.
A. Exterior Door Glazing: Insulated tempered glass,
clear, low emissivity coating, unless building standard B. Administrative Offices: Doors serving administra-
requires specific tint or coating tive offices within laboratory suites may be 914 mm (3
ft.) wide.
B. Interior Door Non-rated Glazing: Clear tempered
functions like confocal microscopy, laser rooms, animal B. Bumper Rails: Install bumper rails and door handle
behavioral labs, magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), protectors on doors in high-use traffic areas.
nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR), X-ray, and other
radioisotope imaging and procedures. C. Sill and Jamb Seals: Provide sill and jamb seals where
required by program.
4.2.2.4 Physical and Electronic Security D. Coordination: Coordinate location of door seals with
pressurization, containment and other requirements.
A. Function: Provide classroom function locks on all
laboratory suite entrance doors, except where labo- E. Sill Berm and Seal: Provide slight berm and tightly
ratory function requires alternative lock function as fitting door sill sweep at aquatic rooms, chemical stor-
directed by the PO. age rooms, and at any other rooms where there is the
potential for flooding or where containment of spilled
B. Electronic Locks and Card Readers: Provide elec- chemicals is required.
tronic locks and card readers where directed by the PO
and the DPSM. Confirm fail-safe and fail-secure func- F. Flush Bolts: Provide constant latching flush bolts on
tions based on security and programmatic requirements. inactive leaf of 1.2 m (4 ft.) active/passive laboratory
doors.
4.2.2.5 Laboratory Exterior Doors G. Manual Door Release: Provide manual door release
on the inside of all controlled environmental rooms.
Exterior doors entering directly into a laboratory are
prohibited unless required for egress. If required for H. Select Agent Laboratory Door Hardware: Provide
egress, the door shall be alarmed. Coordinate with door hardware consistent with Select Agent Standards
DPSM for security requirements. including requirement for fifteen minute forced-entry
resistance. Provide tamper-resistant high-security cyl-
inders on the facility master lock for all doors serving
4.2.2.6 Laboratory Interior Doors
laboratories containing select agents. Coordinate with
Laboratory doors and frames are subject to impact, DPSM for security requirements.
wear, and heavy use. Doors shall be heavy duty, ANSI
A250.8 Level 2 (18 gauge), physical performance level
A, model 2, seamless. 4.2.2.8 Laboratory Door Glazing
A. Vision Panels: Provide vision panels for all labora-
A. Frames: Fully welded, 16 gauge
tory doors except those serving laboratory functions
requiring light control.
B. Hollow Core: Interior laboratory doors may be
hollow construction, except doors serving ARFs must
be solid core without voids. Rationale: Vision panels allow visual observation
of the lab from the corridor and provide an
element of safety and security.
4.2.2.7 Laboratory Door Hardware
A. Closers: Provide closers on all laboratory doors. B. Active/Inactive Doors: Locate vision panel on active
Closer shall permit doors to open ninety degrees mini- door leaf.
mum. Hold open devices shall not be installed on labo-
ratory doors. C. Environmental Room Doors: Provide vision panels
on all environmental room doors.
Exceptions: A door serving an administrative office
within a laboratory suite is not required to have a closer D. Select Agent Laboratory Doors: Vision panes shall
if not required by code. be sealed and rated for fifteen minute forced-entry
break resistance.
4.2.3.2 Size of ARF Doors B. Type: If space permits, use sliding type automatic
rather than swing-type automatic doors (if sliding door
Size of ARF Doors: ARF doors shall be of sufficient is used, specify cleanable track with no voids that can
width and height enable the frequent movement of large harbor pests).
items, including caging racks. Minimum Size: 1.1 m wide
x 2.3 m high (3 ft. 6 in. wide x 7 ft. 6 in. high). C. Operator: Operate doors with either paddle-type
activator, or proximity or motion detection activa-
Exceptions: Coordinate with program personnel where tion as appropriate. (Note some motion detectors emit
large animal caging requirements or other conditions sound that affects animals. Confirm specification with
dictate larger door sizes. program personnel).
F. Screen Doors: Interior screen doors within laborato- 2. Duty: Industrial heavy duty grade
ries are acceptable if required by the program, typically
for insectaries. 3. Material: Galvanized steel, shop primed, field
painted. Consider use of aluminum door where
G. Lead-Lined Shielded Doors: Rooms containing duty grade is equivalent to eliminate require-
radiation-emitting equipment may require radiation- ment for painting.
shielding doors. Design and location of radiation-
shielding doors must be approved by the NIH Division 4. Exterior Doors: Insulated, with weather strip-
of Radiation Safety (DRS). Illuminated warning signage ping rubber gasket at sill and nylon bristle
is usually associated with these doors and should be sweeps at the head and jambs to completely
coordinated with the PO. cover exterior gaps.
H. Electromagnetically Shielded Doors: Rooms con- 5. Air Curtains: Include air curtains or other
taining magnetic resonance equipment (MRI, NMR) devices to limit air and pest infiltration through
may require electromagnetically shielded doors. Doors overhead door. Air curtains shall be surface
serving these rooms shall swing out of the room to mounted directly above the interior face of the
ensure operability in the case of room overpressure door head, and extend a minimum of 25 mm (1
from a ruptured liquid nitrogen or helium coolant line. in.) beyond each jamb.
Illuminated warning signage is usually associated with 6. Other Devices: Plastic strip doors or electric
these doors and should be coordinated with the PO. insect light traps should be also be considered.
Radiofrequency/electromagnetic interference shielded
doors that utilize an inflatable seal mechanism shall 7. Pedestrian Swing Door: Provide a pedestrian
have a backup compressed air supply. door at all overhead door locations.
Contents:
4.3.1.2 Life Safety Requirements 4.3.3.3 ARF Concrete Masonry Unit Partitions
Provide structural certification and support and anchor- Install the top edge of these metal strips at the follow-
age details for partitions with aggregate partition load- ing heights: 152 mm, 305 mm, 762 mm, 914 mm, 1,676
ing exceeding 45 kg (100 lb.) per linear foot and indi- mm, 2,286 mm (6 in., 12 in., 30 in., 36 in., 66 in., 90
cate location of such items on floor plans. in.). The heights of the two uppermost strapping tiers
shall be coordinated with anchorage requirements of
Rationale: Shelving and other wall-mounted items the specified casework and shelving system(s). To ensure
may be added to walls during the life of the flexibility for future use strapping should be installed at
facility so all walls must be constructed with a any partition where casework may be hung. Additional
minimum load capacity. strapping shall be installed for wall-mounted equipment
as necessary. See Figure 4.3.2.1.
height of wall protection rails shall be coordinated with B. Sanitary Construction: Detail partition corners,
program personnel to determine the most beneficial joints and penetrations so that they are fully and dura-
elevation for impact protection. Dual (high-low) rails bly sealed. Anchor penetrating items to resist excessive
should be considered in cage wash areas, corridors, and movement that could compromise the seal.
other areas subject to high volume of cage transport.
See Figure 4.3.3.5. Extend wall protection rails to pro- C. Pest Mitigation: Cap and seal tops of partitions that
tect door frames where possible. Configure wall protec- are not extended to the underside of the structure or ceil-
tion rails to protect wall-mounted items. ing to resist pest harborage and dust infiltration. Details
of partition construction, penetrations and other details
shall be reviewed by Integrated Pest Management (IPM)
4.3.3.6 Corner Guards branch for conformance with construction standards
Provide corner guards constructed of stainless steel and best practices.
or other material offering equivalent performance
acceptable to program personnel at all partition edges 4.3.3.8 Sealants
exposed to impact from carts, cages, or material trans-
port. Extend corner guards from top of floor base to Fill all joints, seams, and junctions between parti-
1.8 m (6 ft.) above finish floor except where coordina- tions and abutting items with sealant complying with
tion with animal caging requires a higher termination Appendix L, Sealant Table after application of finish
height. Provide rounded profiles conforming to bullnose systems.
corners where such corner profiles are used at CMU
partitions. 4.3.3.9 Acoustics
A. Partitions: Partitions separating cage wash areas,
4.3.3.7 Sanitary and Pest Mitigation large animal areas, and other functions that generate
Features undesirable noise from small animal rooms and nor-
A. General: Design animal facility to protect resident mally occupied spaces shall be designed to achieve a
animal population from exposure to insects and rodents; minimum sound transmission class (STC) of 60 per
protect against infiltration of pests into the animal facility, ASTM E90.
and prevent rodent and other small animal populations B. Requirements: Provide additional acoustic separation
from escaping their holding rooms. Provide special care as required between animal populations and noise
in the design of the partitions forming the ARF boundary sources as stipulated in the latest edition of theGuide
and for demising partitions between animal holding and for the Care and Use of Laboratory Animals for each
procedure rooms. species. (Institute for Laboratory Animal Research
(ILAR)/National Academy of Sciences [NAS])
Contents:
4.4.2.1 Floor and Base Finishes 4.4.4.2 ARF Floor and Base Finishes
4.4.3 Laboratory Finishes 4.4.5 Wall and Ceiling Finishes for Aseptic
Facilities, BSL-3, ABSL-3, and Similar
4.4.3.1 General Requirements Facilities
F. Resilient Flooring: Utilize resilient flooring in break coats unless specified otherwise. The final coat shall
areas, pantries, and other locations subject to spills or provide a semigloss or eggshell finish, except where
staining. Where appropriate, use sustainable products more durable finishes are required for functional rea-
such as linoleum or rubber. Minimum thickness shall sons. Epoxy paint and other specialized coatings are
be 3 mm (1/8 in.). required in areas subject to high humidity, frequent
decontamination, impact and wear, and other condi-
G. Sheet Flooring: Sheet flooring seams shall be heat tions specified by program requirements.
welded. Chemical welding is not permitted. Provide
integral coved base in areas where seamless sheet floor- 1. Doors shall be brushed, not rolled.
ing is used. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) labels on
fire-rated doors and frames, door hinges, and
H. Carpeting: Provide carpeting as the primary floor hardware shall not be painted.
surfacing in office and office-support areas.
2. New metal surfaces shall be conditioned with
1. Utilize commercial grade, glued-down synthetic metal preparations, and then primed. Primed
(nylon or equal) carpet tiles or broadloom surfaces are to be sanded prior to finish
carpeting, minimum face weight of 40 oz painting.
classified for medium to heavy traffic areas.
B. Other Materials: Wood panels, stone, ceramic, and
2. Provide die-cut carpet tiles in areas where other decorative wall material may be appropriate in
access flooring, cellular flooring, or ducted lobbies and other high visibility areas. Unfinished con-
floor systems underlie carpeted surfaces. crete or unit masonry may be appropriate in tunnels,
3. Carpets and adhesive shall have low volatile mechanical rooms, and other utility spaces.
organic compound content that meets require-
ments of the Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) 4.4.2.3 Ceiling Finishes
Green Label Plus program.
A. Acoustic Tile: Typical ceilings shall be constructed of
Carpet shall not be used in entryways, primary corri- suspended acoustic tile 610 x 610 mm (2 x 2 ft.) in a stan-
dors, food service areas, and other locations where floor dard 24 mm (15/16 in.) grid. Tile in non-lab areas shall
surfaces are exposed to high traffic or abuse. be 19 mm (3/4 in.) thick, tegular-edge panels, minimum
of 25% to 75% recycled material content, minimum
I. Base: Provide minimum 102 mm (4 in.) continuous noise reduction coefficient 0.60, minimum light reflec-
base to protect wall finishes. tance 0.83, 14 mm (9/16 in.) tee suspension system.
1. Resilient flooring shall utilize 3 mm (1/8 in.) B. Maintain Symmetry: Ceilings shall be laid out sym-
thick vinyl or rubber cove base adhered with metrically so that grid members, lighting, and other
liquid-applied adhesive. Self-stick sectional exposed elements maintain modular dimensions.
units are not permitted.
C. Height: Preferred ceiling height is 2.7 m (9 ft.) for
2. Carpeted floors shall utilize 3 mm (1/8 in.) open office areas, and 2.4 m (8 ft.) for enclosed offices
thick straight rubber or a hemmed carpet base. and office support spaces. The minimum ceiling height
Self-stick sectional units are not permitted. shall be 2.4 m (8 ft.).
3. Seal exposed concrete floors. D. Spline Ceiling Systems: Concealed spline ceiling
systems requiring special tools for tile removal are not
4.4.2.2 Wall Finishes acceptable.
A. Paint: Low-luster acrylic enamel paint shall be used E. Corridors and Other Areas: Ceilings installed in
as the primary interior partition finish. Paint for general corridors and other areas requiring extensive above-
interior applications shall be solvent free, water-based, ceiling utility access shall be constructed of suspended
latex paint, and primer. Application shall be a three- acoustical tile ceilings to the greatest extent possible.
coat system including one primer coat and two finish Equipment, equipment supports, and other heavy items
shall be supported by independent assemblies attached clear of intruding hardware and door. Panels shall be
directly to the building structure. appropriately sized to allow for comfortable access and
working clearances for maintenance staff.
F. Suspended Gypsum Board Ceilings: Suspended
gypsum board ceilings may be used in lobbies and other E. Panel covers shall be labeled to identify the type of
high visibility areas, for bulkheads, accent areas, or spe- utility they access.
cial use areas requiring fire rating, security protection,
or other special consideration. Gypsum ceilings may
also be required in ARFs, clean rooms, containment Rationale: Access panels are necessary for
labs and other areas requiring a sealed, monolithic ceil- maintenance of equipment above hard ceilings
ing surface. Where suspended gypsum ceilings are used, and in walls. Access panels must be of sufficient
provide appropriately located access panels. size to allow maintenance activities.
B. Finish: Floor finishes shall be non-absorbent, allow- 3. Ductwork, conduit and other ceiling-mounted
ing for decontamination with liquid disinfectants and mechanical and electrical items can be mini-
spill containment. Vinyl composition tile is the most mized, and configured in a way that is neat and
common flooring used in BSL-2 laboratories. A seam- visually organized.
less floor with integral coved base (welded sheet vinyl or
epoxy resin) is typically required in specialty or contain- 4. Acoustics are not a factor or are affectively
ment labs and labs requiring aseptic conditions. Other addressed.
floor options may be required by the specific needs of 5. The use and function of the laboratory is con-
the program, including raised access, static dissipative, sistent with an open ceiling.
and rubber flooring. Sustainability is another criteria
for floor selection, but one which should not compro- D. Moisture Resistance: Ceiling systems in glassware
mise durability or function. rooms, autoclave rooms, and other damp and high-
humidity locations shall be moisture resistant.
C. Carpeting: Carpeting is not permitted in any area of
the laboratory, including office areas that can only be E. Suspended Gypsum Board: Suspended gypsum
accessed by passing through a laboratory. board ceilings may be required in clean rooms, con-
tainment labs, and other areas requiring a monolithic
ceiling.
4.4.3.3 Laboratory Wall Finishes
A. Paint: Low-luster acrylic or latex enamel paint shall F. Paint: Paint may be acrylic enamel or epoxy, depend-
be used as the primary interior partition finish. Epoxy ing on the requirements of the program.
paint and other specialized coatings are required in
areas subject to high humidity, frequent decontamina- 4.4.3.5 Access Panels
tion, high impact and wear, and other conditions speci-
fied by program requirements. Locate access panels to lab utilities in corridors and
other non-laboratory areas to the greatest extent
B. Fabric Finishes: Wall coverings and fabric finishes possible.
on systems furniture, tackboards and other items are
not permitted because they may delaminate and will not
withstand laboratory conditions. 4.4.3.6 Chairs
Chairs and other laboratory furnishings shall be cov-
ered with a non-porous material that is easily cleaned
4.4.3.4 Laboratory Ceiling Finishes and decontaminated with appropriate disinfectant.
A. Height: Minimum ceiling height shall be 2.7 m (9
ft.). Optimal ceiling height is 2.9 m (9 ft. 6 in.). Confirm
unusual ceiling height requirements with program.
B. Acoustical Tile: Acoustical tile ceilings shall be non- 4.4.4 ARF Finishes
absorptive, smooth surfaced, scrubbable units. Tegular
The following requirements for ARF partitions are in
edges are not permitted.
addition to the minimum requirements indicated in
C. Open Ceilings (no finished ceiling; exposed struc- Sections 4.4.2 and 4.4.3.
ture): Open ceilings may be acceptable in laboratories
under the following conditions:
4.4.4.1 General Requirements
1. The ceiling structure is concrete or another A. Abuse Resistant: Finishes used throughout the oper-
material that is smooth and uniform and can be ational portion of the ARF shall be abuse resistant,
painted. impervious to moisture, and resistant to degradation
from chemical disinfectants and decontaminants used
2. The height of the ceiling structure will result
within the ARFs environment.
in an acoustical tile ceiling that is unaccept-
ably low.
ARF wall and ceiling finishes, unless factory finished, a non-gypsum-based, cementitious board complying
shall have be high performance reinforced multi-coat with ASTM C1288 or coated glass mat water-resistant
resinous paint finish (reinforced epoxy paint or equiva- gypsum backing panel as defined in ASTM C1178 to
lent). Paint applicators shall be Society for Protective provide durability and water resistance.
Coatings (SSPC) Coating Application Specialist (CAS
Level II) Certified, and must be trained and approved
4.4.4.2.1 High-Performance
by the paint manufacturer. All high performance resin- Resinous Flooring System
ous paint applications must be inspected by an indepen-
dent third party Coating Inspector Program (CIP) level High-performance resinous flooring systems are required
3 certified inspector. in all ARF areas subject to high traffic, wheeled caging
and frequent wash down, including main corridors,
All products shall have a documented five year his- cage wash and holding rooms. Composition, thickness,
tory of successful use in ARFs and similar demanding top coat, texture and skid resistance are dictated by the
environments. functional requirements of the space they serve. The fol-
lowing minimum requirements apply in addition to the
B. Mock-Ups: Mock-ups shall be provided for all ARF manufacturers installation requirements:
projects. Mock-ups shall include sections of all finish
materials and systems (paint, flooring, base, sealants, A. Surface Preparation: Existing substrates shall
door frames, access panels, cover plates, wall protection, be inspected and all delaminated or degraded areas
etc.), in all typical conditions (inside and outside corners, removed and repaired prior to finish application. Floor
base/wall junction, wall/ceiling junction, etc.). Mock-ups substrate shall be scarified to achieve conditions speci-
shall be approved by the PO, program personnel and fied by the manufacturer. A representative of the floor-
other stakeholders, and shall be maintained as a refer- ing manufacturer shall provide detailed requirements
ence for minimum level of quality and workmanship. for the substrate (including but not limited to chemical
composition, moisture content, surface preparation and
Rationale: Mock-ups provide a baseline level of texture) and shall inspect the site prior to installation
quality and performance and an opportunity and certify that all required conditions and require-
to test and approve details, aesthetics, ments have been met.
compatability, and other aspects of the systems B. New slabs on grade: New slabs on-grade scheduled
prior to actual installation. to receive high-performance floor finishes shall be pro-
tected by continuous, overlapping, taped under-slab
C. Installers: Installers shall be certified and trained by vapor barriers.
the manufacturers, and shall demonstrate experience
and mastery of the application process. C. Substrates: New and existing substrates shall be
tested for moisture content utilizing ASTM F-1869 (cal-
cium chloride test) and ASTM-D-4263 (plastic sheet
4.4.4.2 ARF Floor and Base Finishes test) to ensure compliance with manufacturers limi-
A. Finish: Floor finishes shall be monolithic and non- tations immediately prior to finish application. Where
porous with integral coved base and capable of support- limitations are exceeded, a waterproof membrane or
ing regular wheeled loads of 272 kg (600 lb) from the other remediation acceptable to the manufacturer shall
movement and placement of heavy cages, equipment, be specified.
and carts without damage and degregation. D. System Thickness: Minimum system thickness shall
B. Seamless Finish: Seamless resilient floor finishes may be 3 mm (1/8 in.), except in large animal rooms, cage
only be used if they are warranted to resist degradation wash areas, and other areas subject to high abuse or
from 272 kg (600 lb) wheeled carts and caging. thermal movement. Minimum thickness in these areas
shall be 56 mm (3/161/4 in.).
C. All floors shall incorporate an integral coved base
152 mm (6 in.) minimum height. For walls constructed E. Samples and Mock-ups: Floor texture and skid
of gypsum wall board, the base shall be backed with resistance shall be established by the design team, and
confirmed through approval of samples and on-site use in ARFs and other demanding environments shall
mock-up. Provide mock-ups for each finish system and be used.
typical detail to establish a minimum level or quality
and workmanship.
4.4.4.3.1 Coating Systems
F. Certifications: Mechanics installing the flooring Composition and thickness of coating systems are
shall be certified to have a minimum of five years expe- dictated by the functional requirements of the space
rience installing similar systems. they serve. The following minimum requirements
apply in addition to the manufacturers installation
4.4.4.2.2 Floor Base requirements:
Minimum base height shall be 152 mm (6 in.). A solid, A. Masonry and concrete surfaces: Masonry and con-
monolithic base or curb shall be provided to support crete surfaces shall be prepared to obtain a smooth
fixed, floor-mounted casework and lockers so that the substrate for high-performance finishes. Uneven areas
floor base can be extended around them. Base height in and voids shall be filled, rough areas smoothed, and a
these areas may be reduced to 102 mm (4 in.). minimum of two coats of block filler applied to pro-
vide a non-porous substrate free of pinholes in outer
coatings.
Figure 4.4.4.2.2 Integral Cove Base Detail
B. Dry-film Thickness: Minimum dry-film thickness
after substrate preparation shall be 0.25 mm (10 mils),
but not less than manufacturers recommendations.
4. Panel Systems shall be Class A Fire Rated 5. All high performance resinous paint applica-
both as a composite assembly and for the sur- tions must be inspected by an independent third
face alone. party Coating Inspector Program (CIP) level 3
certified inspector. This inspector shall record
B. High Performance Reinforced Multi-coat Resinous environmental conditions, testing locations,
Paint Finish: High performance reinforced multi-coat and wet film thickness, as the work progresses.
resinous paint finish on impact, water and mold-resis-
tant substrate may be considered if there are functional 6. Finish shall be Class A Fire Rated.
advantages over panelized systems and if approved by
ORF and the program. 7. All coating components shall be by the same
manufacturer, to the extent practicable.
1. Paint applicators shall be Society for Protective
Coatings (SSPC) Coating Application Specialist 8. Masonry and concrete walls may be treated
(CAS Level II) Certified, and must be trained with block fillers, surfacers, and other system
and approved by the paint system manufacturer components to achieve an acceptable level of
for the application of the specific products and substrate for non-aseptic production facility
techniques required for the application of prod- wall. These substrates will not be deemed as
ucts per the manufacturers recommendations acceptable substrates for aseptic production
and requirements. facilities.
2. Paint manufacturers must inspect and certify C. Surface Test Chemical List: Surfaces shall be tested
acceptable site conditions, including environ- to the following chemicals in addition to all chemicals
mental conditions and the condition of the identified by the program who will use the facility:
substrate prior to application. 1. Chlorine dioxide
3. Daily logs of the application must be main- 2. 70% Isopropyl Alcohol
tained, including mixture and cure rates.
3. Vaporized Hydrogen Peroxide
4. Cure times, temperature and humidity, con-
sistency of application, protection and other 4. Process LpH
manufacturer requirements shall be strictly
maintained. 5. Vesphene IIse
6. Peridox RTU
7. Sporklenz
Contents:
Figure 4.5.3.1 Typical Lab & Casework E. Countertop Material: Countertops shall be
constructed of smooth, impervious, easily sanitized
materials resistant to heat and cleaning and laboratory
chemicals. Countertop materials may vary depending
on type of research and laboratory use.
2. Provide a 25 mm (1 in.) minimum overhang 7. Stainless steel shall be used in areas requiring
with drip groove beneath the front edge. aseptic conditions.
3. Provide grommets as required at low (762 mm 8. Other countertop materials may be considered if
[2 ft. 6 in.]) bench. Provide grommet covers. justification of durability and cost-effectiveness
Grommets are not allowed in high (914 mm [3 is submitted and approved.
ft.]) bench.
F. Kneeholes: Kneeholes and open areas under high
4. Provide splash guards, minimum 305 mm (1 ft.) bench countertops shall be designed with removable
in height to protect low-bench users from spills back panels.
and spray at transitions between high- and low
bench sections and to isolate sink areas from 1. Minimum kneehole opening clearance shall be
adjacent work areas. 635 mm wide x 876 mm high (2 ft. 1 in. wide
x 2 ft. 10-1/2 in. high) to receive undercounter
equipment. 762 mm (2 ft. 6 in.) width is recom-
mended at user lab stools.
2. Back panels shall be sufficiently recessed for place- crevices where bacteria can grow or pests can harbor.
ment of under counter refrigerators and freezers. Refer to Section 8.2, Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment
for additional requirements.
3. Kneeholes shall provide adequate clearance for
researcher-specified equipment. B. Cupsinks: Cup sinks shall not be installed in lab
benches unless specifically required by the research
G. Electrical Receptacles: Undercounter electrical program. The use of cupsinks is allowed in chemical
receptacles shall be configured to allow for removal of fume hoods when required by the research program and
the back panel without electrical alterations. approved by DOHS. When used in fume hoods, cup-
H. Panels: Panels shall not be used to seal voids in BSL-3 sinks shall be provided with a 5 mm (1/5 in.) raised rim
or greater laboratory environments. to prevent chemicals from reaching the waste stream in
the event of a spill.
I. Shelving: Shelving shall be adjustable in height; how-
ever, adjustment tolerances shall not exceed maximum Rationale: Cup sinks require maintenance if not
height limits listed in Section 4.5.1.2. used on a regular basis.
1. Provide horizontal end and back shelf guards,
102 mm (4 in.) minimum height where shelves C. Marine Edge: Consider detailing a marine edge on
do not abut walls or other shelves. See Figure the sink countertop surface to encourage the flow of
4.5.3. water into the sink.
2. Front retention bar or lip is not required unless D. Splash Guard: Acrylic splash guards shall be located
mandated by code for seismic protection. adjacent to sink areas to prevent the propagation of
water onto adjacent lab benches.
4.5.3.2 Flammable Storage Cabinets E. Sink Design: Sink design shall accommodate the
and Waste Containers requirements of the specific research. Provide hands-
free operation via foot pedals or automatic sensors. See
Flammable chemical storage cabinets shall be placed
Chapter 8, Plumbing Design for additional information
in each primary laboratory exceeding two modules,
and requirements.
all laboratories with fume hoods, and any other labo-
ratories that require storage of flammable materials. F. Shelf: Provide a shelf mounted above the sink with
Space shall be allocated and identified in all laborato- a building pure water supply connection and dedicated
ries for medical pathological waste (MPW) placement. power outlet to accommodate the point of use purifica-
Flammable storage cabinets shall not be located under tion system. Coordinate this requirement with research
fume hoods or in a location potentially hazardous to needs. Even if not required, consider providing this
occupants (e.g., near door, near desk area, in high- accommodation at a number of sinks for future use and
traffic aisle). Refer to Section 9.1.6, Flammable Liquid flexibility.
Storage Cabinets for additional requirements.
Figure 4.5.3 Typical Lab Shelf & Flanges
4.5.3.3 Task Lighting
Task lighting at the lab bench shall be incorporated into
the overall laboratory lighting strategy. Refer to Chapter
10, Electrical Design, for additional requirements.
4.5.3.4 Sinks
A. Construction: Laboratory sinks shall be epoxy or
stainless steel to facilitate the decontamination of sur-
faces. Sinks shall be detailed in a manner to eliminate
Contents:
4.6.1.3 Structural Requirements 4.6.1.13 Ice Machines & Dry Ice Bins
4.6.1.8 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets 4.6.2.2 ARF Movable Equipment and Furnishings
A. Design Phase:
4.6.1 General Requirements 1. Catalog cut sheets shall be provided for all
All furnishing and equipment related requirements equipment.
within the project scope shall be coordinated regardless
of the government funding source. 2. An equipment schedule shall be provided for
every project.
Specified furnishings and equipment shall be ergonomic
to prevent personnel fatigue and workplace injuries. 3. Party responsible for the furnishing and instal-
lation shall be provided.
by building HVAC, plumbing and electrical boxes shall be installed at a ratio of one per every fifty
systems. building occupants. Mail cluster boxes shall be central-
ized in the building lobby, but may be decentralized to
10. Researcher shall provide the A/E an initial list a single location on each building floor when approved
of equipment to facilitate planning and design, by the DMMS.
in addition to any site planning guides for large
equipment. Cluster boxes shall be wall-mounted, front-loading
units with rear covers. Wall-mounted cluster boxes shall
B. Construction Phase: Submittals for fixed equip- be thoroughly secured to the building structure. Each
ment including product cut sheets and installation unit shall be not less than 305 mm wide 305 mm high
shop drawings, shall be reviewed for compliance with 406 mm deep (12 in. x 12 in. x 16 in.). Each cluster
contract documents. The equipment user shall review box shall be marked with self-adhesive numbers inside
specialty fixed equipment submittals to ensure options and outside individual mailboxes to identify the recipi-
and accessories are appropriate for the project appli- ents mail stop code (MSC), as directed by the DMMS.
cation. In addition, the designer, equipment user, and The construction of the cluster boxes shall meet or
PO shall review all movable equipment to ensure that exceed the U.S. Postal Service (USPS) specifications.
models that have changed during the design process can Each cluster box door shall be secured with a cylinder
be accommodated at time of delivery. cam lock, keyed individually, and master-keyed (three
keys required) for DMMS use.
4.6.1.5 Transportation Route B. Mail Drop Boxes: Two secured mail drop boxes
Delivery pathway through the building, both horizontal are required at each mail cluster box bank to support
and vertical, must be verified during the design phase to outgoing mail services. The first one shall be used for
ensure adequate route is available for equipment compo- outgoing interoffice mail, and the second for outgoing
nents or pallets. Doors, elevators, corridors, areaways, USPS official domestic and foreign mail.
parking areas, loading docks, entrances, and all other
components of the route shall be of adequate size and Drop boxes shall be wall-mounted, front-loading units
load-bearing capacity to accommodate the installation and have a rear cover. The interior of these mail drop
or replacement of large equipment. Assessment shall boxes shall be sized not less than 457 mm wide x 762
include turning radii, clearance for rigging, and nota- mm high 457 mm deep (18 in. x 30 in. x 18 in.). Each
tion of any actions that will be required (i.e., removing drop box shall have a mail slot protected with gravity
doors from frames, removing light fixtures). or spring loaded flap size not less than 381 mm wide x
102 mm high (15 in. x 4 in.). These drop boxes shall be
secured with cylinder cam locks and be master-keyed
Rationale: Costly, disruptive modifications to (two keys required). Drop-box construction shall meet
the building should not be necessary to deliver or or exceed USPS specifications. At each location, one
remove large equipment in or out of the building. box shall be marked Interoffice Mail and the other
marked Official Mail.
applied to prefabricated panel furniture systems when 3. Fume hoods may not be located adjacent to or
such panels are ceiling high or extend sufficiently close across from desk/computer workstations.
to the ceiling so that the large space divided by the
panels is considered to be multiple rooms. 4. Fume hoods may not block the path of egress,
or be placed where it may create a safety
The flame spread requirements of the NFPA Life Safety hazard to the lab occupant.
Code should not be applied to prefabricated panel fur-
niture systems when such panels do not sufficiently 5. Cup sinks should be located in the rear of the
extend close to the ceiling so that the large space divided fume hood, if needed. Fume hood piping and
by the panels is considered to be a single room. backflow protection arrangements shall con-
form to requirements Section 8.2, Plumbing
The application of flame spread requirements to prefab- Fixtures and Equipment.
ricated furniture panels does not override any require-
ments concerning the combustibility of the panels as 6. Fume hoods for radionuclide use shall be
may be governed by other standards. designed in accordance with the following
industry criteria and technical specifications:
B. Responsibility: Final decisions regarding the inter-
pretation and application of the NFPA Life Safety Code a. Landis and GYR Powers, Inc., Solutions
with regard to all aspects of systems furniture shall be Application Guide, 1993.
made by the AHJ. b. Industrial Ventilation: A Manual for
C. Wiring: The wiring systems and requirements of sys- Recommended Practice for Design
tems furniture shall be determined and coordinated as (current edition; American Conference
early as possible in the design process. of Governmental Industrial Hygienists,
Cincinnati, OH).
4.6.1.10 Chemical Fume Hoods c. Hoods shall have a minimum face velocity
of .5 m/s (100 ft./min).
In the early stages of lab planning, the A/E must have
a thorough discussion with scientists regarding the pur- d. A typical fume hood designed for hazard-
pose and use of each chemical fume hood. ous materials is acceptable as a radioiso-
tope fume hood.
A. Specifications: All fume hoods shall comply with
NIH Guide Specifications. e. Fume hood design shall include
smooth, non-porous surfaces for ease of
B. Placement: Fume hood placement in laboratories decontamination.
shall comply with that outlined in Methodology for
Optimization of Laboratory Hood Containment, f. The fume hood shall be constructed of
Volumes I & II, November 1996, Office of the materials that will not generate mixed
Director, ORF Publication (http://orf.od.nih.gov/ waste if the surfaces and the construction
PoliciesAndGuidelines/Bioenvironmental/Pages/lab- materials interact with the radioactive
hoodcontainm.aspx) and be approved by the Division materials.
of Occupational Health and Safety (DOHS).
7. Fume hoods shall comply with requirements
1. DOHS must be consulted prior to removal of a listed in Section 4.5.3.2, Flammable Storage
fume hood. Cabinets and Waste Containers.
2. Fume hoods shall be located as far away from 8. Fume hoods shall comply with modified
the egress door and laboratory traffic pat- ASHRAE 110 testing requirements.
terns as possible. Fume hoods shall be located
away from the exhaust and supply diffusers
and any other items that could be a source of
turbulence.
A. Selection and Placement: The A/E and user shall A. Location: Sufficient space and lighting shall be pro-
consult with the DOHS during planning for assis- vided in the autoclave room to ensure easy access to the
tance regarding selection and placement of BSCs. The serviceable areas of the autoclave. The A/E shall review
DOHS must approve the placement and selection of user requirements when designing and specifying an
all BSCs. In addition, the DOHS must certify all BSCs autoclave room.
prior to use.
B. Finish and Lighting: Autoclave rooms shall have
1. See Appendix A for detailed requirements. moisture-resistant finishes and adequate lighting for
maintenance activities.
2. BSCs shall be placed out of the direct traffic
pattern of the laboratory. C. Exhaust: The room shall have adequate exhaust
capacity to remove heat, steam, and odors generated by
3. Air supply diffusers or exhaust vents shall not the use of the autoclave(s). Steam capture shall be pro-
be placed directly over or in front of BSCs. vided over each autoclave door where steam is used or
4. 152 mm (6 in.) clearance is required between sterilized material is removed.
the rear of the BSC and the adjacent partition D. Pressure: The autoclave space shall operate at nega-
(or another cabinet). tive pressure to the surrounding areas. See Chapter 6,
5. Accommodate filter testing, maintenance, and Mechanical Design.
access. Provide 356457 mm (1 ft. 2 in.1 ft. 6 E. Seal: Containment facilities may require a pass
in.) clearance on top of a BSC. Confirm opera- through autoclave with a bioseal to isolate the loading
tional and maintenance requirements with BSC from the unloading end of the sterilizer. A risk assess-
manufacturer. ment should be done with DOHS to evaluate the appro-
6. Pressurized gases, including natural gas, shall priate choice.
not be piped into BSCs. The use of compressed F. BSL-3: Refer to Sections 2.5, 2.6 and 4.9 for BSL-3
gases (such as lab air) has been shown to facility requirements.
disturb intended airflow patterns within BSCs.
Fuel gas has also proven hazardous and there-
fore should not be piped into BSCs. 4.6.1.13 Ice Machines & Dry Ice Bins
7. Ceiling light locations shall be coordinated An ice machine shall be provided on each floor of a lab
with BSC location to avoid light placement building. The requirements of the floor occupants must
directly over BSCs that result in shadows. be assessed to determine required ice production per
day, as well as the size of the storage bin. The water
8. Ceiling height to be coordinated with cabinet connection should be filtered and the drain should be
requirements to ensure proper airflow and con- accessible for maintenance. Ice machines should not
tainment within the cabinet. be located along primary circulation aisles where wet
floors from spilled ice could create a slip hazard.
9. Ducted BSCs shall be coordinated with the
mechanical design to ensure appropriate air is Consideration should be given to the quantity and
provided. In addition, they must have a damper placement of dry ice bins. The programmatic needs of
to allow the exhaust duct to be completely shut the research will determine the quantity and size of dry
down for gaseous decontamination. ice bins needed. Bins should be located close to both
vertical circulation as well as primary circulation cor- B. Storage: Flammable materials may only be stored in
ridors in the facility. approved UL labeled devices.
4.6.1.15.1 Flammable Storage Refrigerators/ The facility, including utilities and services, must be
Freezers designed to accommodate the manufacturers equip-
Flammable storage cabinets and refrigerators/freezers ment requirements, including floor depressions, drains,
shall be UL rated flammable storage and are required if clearances, and maintenance access, lighting, power,
flammable materials will be stored. and exhaust.
A. Labeling: Flammable storage refrigerators/freezers The clean and dirty sides of the animal cage wash facil-
shall be clearly labeled. A label stating Flammable ity shall be separated by a full-height barrier wall to
Materials Refrigerator: Keep Fire Away should be in maintain pressure and cleanliness. During the construc-
place to identify such refrigerators. tion phase, the designer and facility manager should
review the shop drawings and product options again
to ensure design intent is maintained if alternate manu- 4.6.2.2 ARF Movable Equipment
facturer is procured. See Sections 2.3 and 2.4 for addi- and Furnishings
tional information on ARF Design.
ARF equipment and furnishings shall have surfaces that
B. Fume Hoods and or Biological Safety Cabinets: are easy to clean and decontaminate. Cloth or porous
The determination to include a fume hood and/or BSC surfaces are not permitted. Furnishings shall be speci-
within the boundary of the ARF shall be made with fied to prevent the harboring of pests.
the representative user of the facility and in consultation
A. Lockers: All lockers shall have sloped tops and solid-
with the DOHS personnel.
filled bases, unless they are recessed. At least one locker
BSCs may be used in some animal holding rooms in lieu in each section shall meet all the reach requirements of
of a laminar flow changing station and procedure/treat- the Architectural Barriers Act (ABA).
ment rooms. A risk assessment must be done with the
B. Benches: Benches shall be provided in all animal
DOHS, facility managers, and users to determine the
facility locker rooms. Benches can be fixed, folding or
appropriate location and piece of equipment.
movable. depending on the condition of the space.
C. Downdraft Tables: Downdraft tables may be
C. Gowning Supply Storage: Shelving shall be provided
required in labs that conduct animal procedures to
to accommodate gowning supplies in personnel entry
draw fumes or particulate away from the table surface
areas. Supply shelving and disposal bins should not
and user. Coordination is required with ventilation
prevent the clear path of travel to and from the ARF.
and plumbing requirements. Downdraft table options
Determination of the quantity and type of storage shall
should be reviewed with the user during design to
be established during the concept design phase and shall
ensure the table accommodates the procedures planned.
be updated at each project phase.
Downdraft tables shall have a dedicated airflow control
device separate from the room general exhaust air valve
so each can be properly adjusted independently. For
additional information, see Appendix B, Downdraft
Table Particle Capture Efficiency Calculation.
Contents
4. Main line disconnect switches must be installed visitor traffic, building management and grouping of
within 457 mm (1 ft. 6 in.) of the strike jamb of elevators. Other special conditions include restrictions
control room door. and limitations, such as patients only or no animals.
Special functions which may require dedicated elevators
5. The car position, movement, and direction or special demands on usage and function include ARF
must be able to be determined from the control (including transportation of animals to and from load-
room. ing docks), central sterile, surgery, warehousing and
6. Provide HVAC in the control room so that pharmacy.
the temperature does not go below prescribed C. Average Interval: Average interval is defined as the
limits, as set by applicable codes and the calculated time between departures of elevators from
requirements of the equipment manufacturer. the main lobby during the morning up-peak period.
7. Access to the governor must be provided from Calculated intervals during the up-peak period should
outside the hoistway. not exceed thirty seconds for a typical elevator bank.
8. The suspension means must be manufactured D. Handling Capacity: Handling capacity is defined as
for elevator use only and be constructed from the number of persons the elevator system must move
steel only. in any given five minute period of up-peak traffic used
to measure average interval. Buildings must be designed
for a 12% handling capacity.
4.7.1.2 Finishes
E. Elevator Car Size: Elevator car sizes must be in accor-
A. Floor: High quality resilient flooring or low-pile, dance with the standards established by the National
high-density carpeting may be used on floors. Grouted Elevator Industries, Inc. Elevator cars must be designed
materials should not be used unless the car subfloor is to reflect the architectural character of the building
reinforced, as they are susceptible to degradation due to design.
instability.
F. Ceiling Height: A minimum ceiling height of 2.7 m
B. Walls: Wall materials shall be durable to resist abuse (9 ft.) is required in service elevator cars. Freight eleva-
from impact damage and vandalism. Wall panels shall tors must have a ceiling height of not less than 3.7 m
be removable for repair or replacement. Wall protection (12 ft.). Large equipment needed for the building and
rails should be considered. construction materials for future renovations must be
C. Ceilings: Ceilings shall be removable with recessed considered when sizing the elevator.
down lighting or indirect fixtures. G. Service: Elevators shall be located so that they shall
D. All finishes in elevators intended for animal use shall serve all floors that require service. This includes the
be appropriate for ARF facilities. basement, subbasement, and mechanical floors as well as
all of the occupied floors of the facility. In facilities that
utilize interstitial floors and mechanical penthouses, at
4.7.1.3 Vertical Transportation/Elevator least one elevator shall stop on these floors to facilitate
Traffic Analysis equipment maintenance and removal. Elevators shall
not be placed over occupied spaces as this shall require
A. Criteria: The elevator traffic analysis must be per-
counterweight safeties and reinforced pits.
formed by an independent consultant to determine the
type, quantity, capacity, and speed requirements of H. Response Time: Elevators shall be selected and
elevators. Separate calculations must be performed for located to permit transportation of 10% of the antici-
each elevator classification. The criteria by which the pated visitor and staff load within a five minute, two-
traffic analysis calculations should be judged are aver- way peak period. The number of elevators required
age interval and handling capacity. shall be selected based on a thirty-five second response-
waiting-time interval between elevators.
B. Special Conditions: Special conditions that must
receive consideration in estimating elevator usage include
I. Required Elevators: If one elevator would normally a prime consideration for building security. Coordinate
meet the requirements in the facility where elevator ser- security requirements with DPSM.
vice is essential (such as facilities over two stories high),
two elevators shall be installed to ensure continuity of B. Equipment/Furniture Transport: If unusually large
service. If financial limitations restrict the inclusion of a pieces of equipment or furniture such as mechanical
second elevator, as a minimum, a hoistway for a future equipment or conference tables must be transported to
elevator shall be provided. a specific floor via an elevator, verify that the item can
be moved into and through the lobby space.
J. Codes: The A/E shall utilize the latest editions of
reference design and safety guidelines available at the C. Elevator Banks: Elevators shall be grouped in banks
time of the design contract award. ASME/ANSI A17 of adjacent cars or banks of cars facing each other.
shall take precedence over all other codes. This includes Where four or more cars are required within a group,
designing to the appropriate rating/load classification cars shall be placed in opposite banks, opening to a
for the intended application. common lobby. See Figure 4.7.1.5. For service and com-
bined use cars, two across are preferred, and not more
than three in a row shall be used. For passenger cars, a
4.7.1.4 Elevator Speed and Type maximum of three across are preferred.
The parameters for the selection of elevator speed and
type are provided in Table 4.7.1.4. Electric traction ele-
Figure 4.7.1.5 Elevator Lobby
vators are preferred for passenger and service applica-
tions. Hydraulic-powered elevators may be considered
for use where vertical travel is less than 14 m (46 ft.) or
where overhead clearance is limited.
*Consider separate high-rise and low-rise groups of passenger cars. N/A = not applicable.
D. Corridor Access: Elevator ingress/egress shall be from 4.7.1.7 Maximum Traffic Peak
a distinct elevator lobby and not directly from a corri-
A. Maximum Demand: The A/E shall design to the
dor. Refer to Table 4.7.1.5 for lobby width requirements.
maximum percentage of the total population on the
Elevator lobbies generate noise and shall be acoustically
floors served by the elevators that must be handled
isolated from areas sensitive to noise and vibration.
during any five minute period. This maximum traf-
Egress stairs shall be located adjacent to elevator lobbies
fic peak will vary with the type of functional areas
when possible.
and special conditions applicable to the facility. The
E. Walking Distance: Consideration shall be given to computations for vertical transportation equipment
the maximum walking distance from the vertical trans- shall be based on transporting 12% of those persons
portation service to the most distant function. This who move between floors during periods of maximum
factor shall be weighed along with the advantages of demand in five minutes. The peak values, together
locating elevators near the center of the building and with the population density factor, shall provide a
elevator clustering. reserve capacity adequate to maintain satisfactory ser-
vice during periods when one elevator is shut down for
Refer to Table 4.7.1.5 for walking distances. Any decen- repairs.
tralized banks and/or clustering of elevators shall be
planned to include at least two cars to maintain an B. Two or More Locations: Where groups of elevators
acceptable dispatch interval between cars and to ensure serving identical floors are required to be furnished
continuity of service. in two or more locations for the purpose of providing
convenience of use, a minimum carrying capacity of
not less than 120% of the maximum traffic peak shall
4.7.1.6 Elevator Functional Separation be used.
Traffic patterns shall be established to separate the vari-
C. Capacity and Speed: Passenger and service eleva-
ous traffic types in an efficient, logical, safe, and secure
tors shall have the capability to handle their maximum
manner, while maintaining levels of aseptic control con-
peak loads while providing a satisfactory interval.
sistent with the requirements of the facility. A positive
Capacity and speed shall be selected that shall require
separation of passenger and service elevators shall be
the fewest elevators to handle the peak loads with an
provided. Separate clean and dirty material eleva-
acceptable interval. Refer to Table 4.7.1.5 for maxi-
tor facilities shall be provided where required.
mum peak intervals.
4.7.1.8 Limited-Rise Elevators per Table 4.7.1.5. Tamper proof screws shall be used for
all car and corridor fixture plates. Thresholds outside of
A. Equipment: Oil hydraulic and direct plunger elevator
elevators shall be durable and non-slip.
equipment shall be considered for limited rise (approxi-
mately 14 m [46 ft.] rise) and low-speed elevators. The
elevator machine room (EMR) and pump unit shall be 4.7.1.12 Signals
located adjacent to the hoistway at the lowest landing.
Hall pushbutton stations shall be provided with call-
All hydraulic elevators shall have an NIH compatible
register LED lights and shall be compatible with existing
starter for the pump motor. All hydraulic elevators
systems and components. Hall lanterns with an audible
shall be equipped with a scavenger pump to retrieve the
signal shall be installed on all elevators. Hall-position
waste oil.
indicators shall be designed to be visible from each side.
B. Drive Controls: The use of generator field or silicone Hall-position indicators shall be compatible with exist-
controlled rectifier (SCR) drive controls is appropriate ing systems and components designed on the control
for unlimited applications. board for compatibility with the existing controllers.
Car-position indicators shall be installed in each car
C. Traction Configuration: A single-wrap, geared-trac- with floor designations, a floor-directory signal, and
tion configuration shall be used for up to 1.8 m/s (6 direction arrows. Car-operating panels shall use car
ft./s). A double-wrap or single-wrap, gearless-traction register floor buttons engraved with building and eleva-
configuration shall be used with speeds of 2.0 m/s tor number. Car-operating panels shall compatible with
(6.5 ft./s) and greater. Roping shall be 1:1. Secondary existing systems and components series. A lobby control
sheaves shall be used with a secondary sheave area. All panel shall be provided on elevator banks with two or
hydraulic elevators shall be equipped with emergency more cars. Signal fixtures and gongs shall conform to
power outage car return controls. the requirements of ASME/ANSI A17.1 and ABA.
4.7.1.16 Elevator Car Lighting and Exhaust engineer shall define criteria for these spaces and design
accordingly. Often these rooms require air conditioning
Car lighting shall be either indirect or of the luminous
when building systems are off, thereby justifying the use
ceiling type. Mechanical exhaust shall be provided.
of packaged spot coolers or fan coil units.
care areas, occupied rooms and animal holding rooms 4.7.1.26 Emergency Operation
or where sensitive equipment is used.
Phase I emergency recall operation and phase II emer-
B. Isolating Devices: Geared and gearless machines gency in-car operation key switches (which come with
and motor generator sets shall be mounted on vibra- the installation of the elevators) for use during construc-
tion-isolating and sound-isolating devices. These isolat- tion shall be provided. After complete installation and
ing devices, when required, shall conform with seismic before final acceptance by the NIH, the contractor shall
design requirements. replace the aforementioned switches by installing NIH-
furnished phase I emergency recall operation and phase
C. Trapdoors and Hoisting Beams: Trapdoors and II emergency in-car operation key switches. These NIH-
hoisting beams shall be installed in all EMRs to facili- furnished switches shall be tested by the NIH during the
tate maintenance and removal of equipment for repairs. final inspection and acceptance testing of the elevators.
4.7.1.25 Elevator Fire Protection A. Off Position: Automatically causes the elevator to
return to the designated level for use by later arriving
All elevator fire protection systems shall be installed in firefighters
accordance with applicable NFPA codes and standards
and ANSI A17.1. B. On Position: Permits the firefighter to take control of
the elevator, overriding automatic operations
Contents:
4.8.0 Introduction
D. Compactors: All new buildings shall be provided C. Bird Exclusion: Overhangs and associated spaces
with a minimum of two 23 m3 (30 yd3) self-enclosed shall be designed such that nesting areas are not cre-
compactors or equivalent equipment for collection of ated for birds. If ledges are unavoidable, netting should
cardboard to be recycled and general trash. Additional be considered.
area may be required for storage trailers.
D. Exposed Edges: Protective steel guards shall be pro-
E. Concrete Apron and Access: A 9.1 m (30 ft.) deep, vided to protect exposed edges.
203 mm (8 in.) thick reinforced concrete apron shall be
provided to accommodate waste dumpsters. Access for E. Bumpers: Commercial-grade shock-absorbing dock
disposal of trash to the dumpster shall be directly from bumpers shall be mounted under load levelers. Barriers
the loading dock. that prevent a truck from damaging the load leveler
when backing to the leveler shall also be provided.
F. Electrical Power: Electrical power shall be pro-
vided to compactors and dumpsters per manufacturer F. Intercom or House Phone: An intercom or house
recommendations. phone shall be provided to communicate with the dock
manager or building occupants. Coordinate security
G. Drainage: An apron area shall be properly sloped to requirements with DPSM.
prevent storm water ponding, and designed to contain
spills of hazardous substances and minimize the con- G. Hose bibs: Hose bibs shall be provided for wash
tamination of storm water runoff. Grate drains within down and sanitation.
vehicle loading areas shall be equipped with a normally H. Lighting: Each berth shall be equipped with ade-
closed valve. Uncontaminated storm water runoff shall quate lighting to illuminate the dock and service vehicle
be diverted to alternate grate drains or other outlets. interiors.
areas to protect the building environment when the separation of incoming materials from outgoing waste.
overhead doors are open. An intercom or telephone shall be provided for commu-
nication between delivery and ARF personnel. The load-
ing dock berth and receiving area should be designed to
4.8.1.4 Materials and Finishes visually screen deliveries. A partially or fully enclosed
Materials, finishes, fixtures, and construction detail- berth for loading and unloading vehicles should be con-
ing throughout the loading dock area shall be impact sidered for programs utilizing large animals and species
resistant, durable, and easily cleanable. CMU partition that are intolerant of temperature fluctuation.
construction is preferred in all areas used for material
transport or storage. Gypsum wallboard, if used, shall be B. Material Transport: A designated route of transpor-
high-abuse type with a glass-fiber reinforced finish. Wall tation between the ARF and designated loading dock
protection rails and corner guards shall be provided for shall be defined. Depending on SOPs and facility size,
all partitions subject to impact, including exterior walls this may be programmed as a fully segregated route. A
at open berth areas. High-performance coating system dedicated vestibule or area shall be provided for surface
finishes capable of frequent sanitation and hose-down decontamination of incoming materials prior to entry
shall be used in receiving and waste-holding areas. into the ARF. The decontamination area shall be appro-
priately constructed with durable finishes resistant to
decontaminating chemicals used. It may also require a
drain and hand wash sink depending on SOPs. When
programmed, decontamination SOPs may also require
4.8.2 Waste-Handling Areas placement of an autoclave and/or misting tunnel adja-
cent to the ARF receiving area for decontamination of
Separate areas shall be provided within the dock area
incoming materials.
as determined by waste handling SOPs for holding and
disposal of MPW, chemical waste, multihazardous C. Storage Area: Storage areas shall be provided for
waste, radioactive waste, trash, and recycling waste. material dedicated to the ARF that may include gas cyl-
Requirements for these areas are provided in Section inders, bulk decontaminants and cage wash detergents,
1.11, Environmental Management & Radiation Safety. packaging material, etc. See Sections 2.3 and 2.4 for
ARF design requirements.
A. Dock Berth and Receiving Areas: A dedicated dock G. Loading Dock: The ARF loading dock may include
berth and receiving area shall be provided meeting all automated systems for bulk feed and/or bedding stor-
requirements listed above. Separate clean and soiled age, as well as dedicated equipment to support auto-
areas should be provided to facilitate SOPs requiring mated transport of this material to the ARF.
Contents:
the passage of large equipment, and shall have stainless board is not acceptable. Light-gauge steel studs used
steel protection plates. Knock-down frames are not per- for partition framing shall be 18 gauge minimum thick-
mitted. Vision panels shall be in all doors unless prohib- ness. Screw spacing in gypsum wallboard assemblies
ited for programmatic reasons. Consideration should be shall not exceed 152 mm (6 in.). Structural adequacy
given to power-activated doors where hands-free opera- shall be verified, and additional lateral reinforcement
tion is needed or high-traffic is anticipated. provided if required. All partitions that do not extend to
the underside of the structure shall be capped.
Doors serving vestibules, barrier partitions, and other
locations that require directional airflow shall be con- Concrete masonry units (CMU) walls shall include
figured to allow for sufficient air movement at the under- masonry units utilizing fine sand aggregate or ground
cut to achieve proper operation without excessive pull face to provide an appropriate substrate for block filler
or closure pressure. Door sweeps shall be adjustable to and epoxy paint. Voids in CMU partitions shall be
facilitate air movement. Automatic door closures and sealed above the ceiling.
access control security plates must not produce exces-
sive noise or pinch point for fingers.
Frame partition assemblies shall include gypsum board 4.9.5.1 Floor Finishes
that is selected and detailed to be appropriately impact Interior finishes shall comply with Section 4.4, Interior
and moisture or water resistant. Standard gypsum Finishes in addition to the following. Floors shall be
the hinge or latch when in the latched position. Access phenolic resin, or other corrosion- resistant materials
door assemblies shall be stainless steel or another non- shall be used in damp or corrosive environments.
coated, corrosion-resistant material.
G. Sinks: All laboratories require a hands-free or auto-
mated hand washing sink located near the exit door.
4.9.8 Casework
Casework shall comply with Section 4.5 in addition 4.9.9 Decontamination
to the following. Movable tables, mobile base units
and cantilevered bench tops shall be used whenever Surface wipe down with disinfectants is required in all
possible. Where fixed casework components must be BSL-3 and ABSL-3 settings. Other whole room or equip-
used, they shall be set on monolithic bases to facilitate ment decontamination methods may also be employed
installation of integral cove flooring base. Void areas including vaporized hydrogen peroxide (VHP), chlo-
behind fixed casework shall be sealed to walls. All rine dioxide gas, or other mode may be employed.
items shall have smooth corners and edges and be free Each methodology has specific requirements for room
of open joints and voids. All fixed items shall be sealed and HVAC-system preparation, location of equipment,
to the floor, wall and adjacent items. Welded stainless cycle time, supplemental ventilation, and other factors.
steel is standard in ABSL-3 facilities, and BSL-3 labs The effectiveness of the system is impacted by room size
where moisture or frequent cleaning or disinfections and shape, casework type, location of decontamination
is required. ports, etc. Close coordination with specific equipment
manufacturers is required to ensure that the design
supports the desired decontamination methodology.
Rationale: Movable tables, mobile base units and Consideration for material incompatibilities and limita-
cantilevered bench tops are easier to disinfect than tions must be taken into account during the design phase.
standard fixed casework. Efficacy must be confirmed through testing during the
commissioning and certification phase. Provisions shall
A. Shelving: Shelving standards shall be open fronted be provided for decontaminating of equipment and all
or otherwise detailed to allow for full sanitation. other items that cannot be autoclaved.
Slotted standards with inaccessible concealed areas are
not allowed.
materials. Autoclaves shall incorporate effluent decon- Fixed equipment that penetrates the secondary barrier
tamination design for all cycles to preclude release of shall be configured so that serviceable components can
chamber fluids (whether liquids or chamber air) prior be accessed from the non-containment side. Equipment
to validated decontamination. See Section 8.6.14 for shall be installed with required dedicated floor space for
additional information. Redundancy is an important access, service and maintenance activities.
consideration. A sink shall be located in the clean side
of autoclaves for disposal of sterilized liquid waste. A. Equipment Service: SOPs shall be identified for
Clean side autoclave doors shall not open directly onto decontaminating and servicing equipment. Equipment
a public corridor, but shall open into a vestibule with shall be reviewed for compatibility with decontaminants.
doors separating it from the corridor. B. Bioseals: Equipment that penetrate the secondary
A canopy exhaust hood shall be provided above the barrier shall be provided with a manufacturer-supplied
autoclave door to capture steam and odors. In two-door bioseal. Bioseals shall form a continuous, airtight seal
pass through configurations, a canopy hood is required bridging a flange welded to the full circumference of
above the non-containment side door. A second exhaust the equipment and the barrier partition. Penetrations
hood may be required over the containment side door through the flange for electrical and piping components
if the program calls for autoclaving materials into the shall be constructed with gastight fittings. The bioseal
containment barrier. Canopy hoods on the contain- shall be structurally stable and capable of containing
ment side shall be connected to the HEPA-filtered con- decontaminating gas. Bioseals for autoclaves, tissue
tainment zone exhaust system. Canopy hoods on the digesters, and other equipment that generate vibra-
non-containment side shall be connected to the non- tion or thermal expansion shall include a mechanically
containment exhaust system. Refer to Section 6.6 and clamped, heat resistant elastomeric gasket to isolate
Appendix D for canopy exhaust hood requirements. movement and heat. Sufficient space shall be provided
around the bioseal for visual inspection, integrity test-
Autoclaves shall be designed to prevent escape of cham- ing, and replacement.
ber contents prior to sterilization. Pressure relief lines
shall be discharged to a safe area in accordance with C. Biological Safety Cabinets: Recognized standards for
the risk assessment. Autoclaves for high containment Biological Safety Cabinets (BSCs) include the American
applications should be specified with door gaskets that National Standard for Laboratory Ventilation ANSI/
use steam during operation and compressed air when AIHA Z9.5, and the NSF International Standard/
not in operation; or alternatively, crushed-seal gaskets American National Standard for Class II (laminar
should be used. flow) BSCNSF/ANSI 49. The standards include basic
requirements for the design, construction, and perfor-
The floor sink for receiving the sterilized chamber con- mance of BSCs that are intended to provide personnel,
densate shall be located on the clean side of the bioseal, product, and environmental protection; reliable opera-
typically in the utility service access space. Refer to tion, durability, and structural stability; ease of clean-
Chapter 8, Plumbing Design. ing; and limitations on noise level, illumination, vibra-
tion, and motor/blower performance.
Mock-up of a typical room or section of room that dem- D. Equipment: Each item of fixed equipment shall be
onstrates each of these conditions as fully installed is inspected and tested in situ to verify conformance with
required. specified performance requirements.
Mock-ups shall be inspected and tested to ensure con- E. Mechanical, Electrical, Plumbing and Other Building
formance with all applicable specifications and criteria. Systems: Refer to Section 1.10, Commissioning, and
Accepted mock-ups shall be used as the basis for evalu- Chapters 6 through 12 for additional commissioning
ating the quality of installed work and shall be main- requirements.
tained on-site until project completion.
4.9.15 Certification
4.9.14 Commissioning Certification is the systematic review of all safety fea-
Commissioning shall be provided for all projects that tures and processes associated with the laboratory to
include high containment space in accordance with validate that all facility controls and prudent practices
Section 1.10, Commissioning. are in place to minimize to the greatest extent possible
the risks associated with laboratory operations and the
Design documents shall be reviewed at each submittal use of biohazardous material. Certification is required
stage by the commissioning agent, and comments issued prior to initiating use of BSL-3 agents. Annual recer-
to NIH along with subsequent submittal packages. tification is also required. To ensure compliance cer-
A. Barrier Integrity: Commissioning shall include tification, the evaluation process must be ongoing
inspection, pressure leakage testing, and smoke test- throughout the project and the A/E shall coordinate
ing of the integrity of the containment barrier including any requirements necessary at the design stage in col-
bioseals, device boxes, construction joints, each pene- laboration with the project officer (PO) and DOHS to
tration, material transitions, and other seams and seals. achieve certification.
B. Finishes: Finishes shall be inspected to ensure con- DOHS certification requirements for containment (BSL-
formance with approved mock-ups. Painted surfaces 3) laboratories are listed in the National Institutes
shall be latex glove tested to ensure that they are free of of Health Biosafety Level 3 Laboratory Certification
sharps that may tear PPE. Pull tests shall also be admin- Requirements.
istered to ensure that finishes can resist removal of tape.
Contents
fails to maintain the installed status, more anchors shall drainage requirements, preliminary recommendations
be tested to the satisfaction of project engineer to prove for sheeting and shoring, and alerts for special foun-
that the anchor selected and the installations are safe. dation problems. Include the geotechnical report in the
construction documents.
Contents
5.2.0 Introduction
5.2.1 Loads
5.2.2 Vibration
C. Dead Loads: The building shall be designed to sup- F. Wind Loads: The building shall be designed to
port the actual weights of all materials. These include comply with the IBC for the geographic basic wind and
structural materials, finishes, ceilings, partitions, exposure category.
shielding, piping, and ductwork. Assumed weights shall
be indicated on the design documents. G. Seismic Loads: Due to the continued reassessment of
seismic design requirements and the specialized nature
D. Superimposed Dead Loads: The design of the struc- of NIH facilities, parameters more conservatives than
ture shall specifically account for vertical loads imposed those in the International Building Code (IBC) may be
on the building by systems or elements that do not act as required for select and critical facilities. NIH-specific
part of the primary structural system, typical loads not seismic design parameters may be required for the fol-
expected to move or change during the life of the struc- lowing cases:
ture are mechanical systems, ceiling systems, and the New buildings
exterior facade. Include anticipated superimposed dead
loads in any seismic load calculation. The loads given in Existing buildings being proposed for
Table 5.2.1(B) shall be used as a minimum in the design renovation
of the facilities. Entire building being proposed for
renovation
Rationale: This data provides NIH minimum Wings, or section of buildings to be reno-
load assumptions for projects. vated between expansion joints.
All building or section of building classified as
risk category IV by IBC.
E. Hanging Loads:
The designer shall contact the Division of Technical
1. Piping and similar shall be suspended directly Resources at the initial stage of the design process to
from the structural steel framing or supplemen- determine whether NIH-specific seismic design param-
tary steel members. Loads suspended from steel eters are applicable to the project, and the details of
joists shall be suspended from the top chords those parameters.
unless structural analysis allows otherwise.
For all other cases seismic loads shall be determined
2. For new concrete construction, cast-in inserts using the provisions of the IBC for the seismic area in
shall be considered for hanging items in which the project is located.
mechanical rooms, attaching overhead lights
equipment in operating rooms, or hanging any
Table 5.2.1(B) Minimum Superimposed
heavy loads. Dead Loads for Building Systems
3. Loads exceeding 2 kPa (20 lb/sf) shall be Min Dead Min Dead
suspended independently of suspended celling Building System Load (kPa) Load (lb/sf)
construction. Ceilings 0.25 5
Cement plaster ceiling 2.50 50
4. For existing construction, neither expansion
anchors nor powder actuated fasteners shall be Suspended MEP systems 0.75 15
used to carry significant load in tension, unless Partitions (excluding
1.00 20
with written approval of a registered profes- CMU & concrete)
sional engineer for the specific application. The Roofing 1.00 20
A/E shall specify that the installation of anchors Brick facade with backup 3.00 60
shall be done with drill bits and equipment rec- Curtain wall 1.00 20
ommended by the manufacturer of the anchors.
CMU partition walls 2.50 50
Provide evidence that contractor personnel were
instructed in the correct installation procedures MEP = Mechanical/electrical/plumbing;
of that manufacturers anchors. CMU = concrete masonry units.
H. Snow Loads: The building shall be designed for the 5.2.2 Vibration
geographic ground snow load for the area indicated by
the IBC. The effects of sliding and drifting snow shall As building materials improve and require less mass
be incorporated in the design. and depth to achieve necessary strength results, vibra-
tion transmission concerns increase and occupants and
research are affected. Consequently, these concerns
Table 5.2.2 Recommended Floor Vibration must be thoroughly vetted at the earliest project plan-
Velocity Limits for Various Space Usages ning and design stage, and should include all design dis-
ciplines and building users.
Vibration Structural
Velocity Criterion
The structural system shall be stiff to the extent that
Space or Limits kfm
Equipment Type (m/s) (kips/in-s) any transmitted vibration occurs at high frequencies, as
high frequencies can be dampened with instrumenta-
Animal research facility 100 3,200 tion vibration dampening systems and isolation tables
Bench microscopes > 400 rather than vibrations occurring at lower frequencies.
mag & optical equipment 25 12,800 To control vibration transmitted into laboratories and
on isolation tables animal research facility spaces, the A/E shall:
Bench scopes 100 mag 50 6,400 1. Design a structural system with reduced
column spacing
Bench scopes up to
25 12,800
400 mag 2. Isolate laboratory spaces from sources of vibration
Electron microscope
3. Locate vibration-sensitive equipment on-grade-
> 30,000 mag, mass 6 51,200
supported slabs
spectrometers, cell implant
4. Locate vibration-sensitive equipment near
Electron microscope
12 25,600 columns on framed floors
30,000 mag
Eye surgery, neurosurgery 25 25,600 5. Avoid combining corridors and laboratory
spans in the same structural bay on framed
General laboratory 50 6,400 floors
Laser-based optical
12 25,600 Table 5.2.2 provides the recommended floor vibration
systems
velocity limits for various space usages and shall be met
Microscope core using the following criteria:
25 12,500
(EM laser)
1. Walking pace for a closed corridor (a corridor
MRI and NMR SOG SOG with walls on both sides and doors on either or
General surgery 25 12,500 both walls) at 90 steps/minute
Contents
5.3.0 Introduction
5.3.2 Location
5.3.3 Vibration
5.3.6 Security
5.3.3 Vibration B. Floor Areas Subject to Salt Water: Floor areas where
Animals are sensitive to vibration transmission. Consult salt water is in frequent use require the floor system
with the researchers regarding vibration acceptable to to be protected long term from intrusion of this water
animals. Vibration transmission control is critical for attacking/deteriorating reinforcing bars in the concrete.
a successful outcome in the selection of structural Reinforcing bars shall be epoxy coated.
systems.
The A/E shall contract with an independent consultant Rationale: Animal research facilities have unique
specializing in vibration analysis and control and accept- requirements; consequently, it is critical the
able to the NIH for all animal research facility con- structural engineer closely coordinate with the
struction to perform an analysis of vibration responses other design disciplines.
5.3.5 Prevention of
Progressive Collapse
Conform to requirements of Section 5.1.3.
5.3.6 Security
Security level of design for all biomedical laborato-
ries and ARFs shall result from project-specific risk
assessment. The A/E shall use the existing baseline
threat assessment, provided by the Division of Physical
Security Management (DPSM) for the preparation of an
updated Threat Assessment.
Contents:
5.4.0 Introduction
5.4.4 Serviceability
5.4.5 Loads
5.4.6 Deflections
5.4.7 Drift
5.4.9 Shielding
3. Providing pinhole-free surfaces C. Wind Loads: Wind loads shall be determined using
the provisions of the design standard as referenced by
4. Providing adequate shielding for specific the IBC. The basic wind speed value shall be determined
instrumentation and imaging equipment to be from the contour maps. This value shall be modified
utilized in the facilities by various factors stipulated by the design standard to
5. Providing a structural framing system familiar yield the design loads for the facilities.
to local qualified contractors to ensure quality D. Seismic Loads: Seismic loads shall be determined
results using the provisions of the IBC. Seismic acceleration
values may be developed using the contour maps in the
IBC, or by developing a site-specific seismic acceleration
study. The site-specific seismic acceleration study shall
5.4.2 Standards of Quality be performed by a qualified geotechnical engineer. The
geotechnical engineer shall classify the site in accor-
The standards for quality for BSL-3 and ABSL-3 dance with the IBC based upon shear wave velocity
facilities shall be current and the most rigorous industry using boring logs and other appropriate investigation
standards applicable to laboratory construction. techniques.
Contents:
criteria for cooling, maintenance and capability herein, the applicable ASHRAE standards, and
to withstand a fault or failure. shall comply with the latest international and
local mechanical codes.
6. Pharmacy Compounding Facility: The com-
pounding of sterile, non sterile, hazardous and
non-hazardous drug products to NIH Clinical
Center patients shall be performed in clean
rooms and in accordance with the latest and 6.1.2 General Planning
applicable <USP 795>, <USP 797> and <USP
800> regulations. These facilities will receive
Requirements
full commissioning and certification, includ- A. Systems Design: The arrangement of HVAC systems
ing at a minimum development of the User shall ensure maximum reliability, operational flexibility,
Requirement Specifications (URS) and Basis of adaptability, and capacity for renovation; allow service
Design (BOD), flow diagrams (material, people, to occur outside critical containment spaces and clean
waste, pressurization, ISO classification, etc.) spaces; consider service access restrictions and security
in addition to detailed construction documents. requirements; and minimize potential for disruption
These projects require engaging experienced due to single point failures and routine maintenance.
A/Es with extensive knowledge of the regula- Designs shall accommodate future program renova-
tory requirements relating to facility and the tions, expansions, serviceability, and changes of equip-
process. A/E shall coordinate requirements ment by considering future capacity allowances includ-
with users, NIH ORSC (Office of Research, ing sizing and arrangement of utility services, main and
Support and Compliance) and DTR. branch duct systems, equipment room space planning
and interdisciplinary coordination. The design intent
7. Human Cellular and Gene Therapy Processing shall be sufficiently documented, including explanation
Facility: The manufacturing of Human Cells, of provisions to facilitate projected future requirements.
Tissues and Cellular Therapy and Tissue Based
Products (HCTPs) for approved clinical trials
shall be performed in clean rooms and in accor- Rationale: The arrangement of HVAC systems
dance with current good manufacturing prac- shall be coordinated with the arrangement of
tices (cGMP),21 CFR 211, 21 CFR 1271 and the laboratory planning modules to promote
other applicable Code of Federal Regulations operational flexibility. Such planning should
(CFR) and Federal Drug Administration (FDA) be documented so that the intended provisions
guidance. These facilities will receive full com- may be understood and maintained. Thoughtful
missioning and qualification (C&Q), includ- consideration of access restrictions and security
ing at a minimum development of the User issues helps to minimize their impact on facility
Requirement Specifications (URS), Basis of operations.
Design (BOD), flow diagrams (material, people,
waste, pressurization, ISO classification, etc.)
and Facility Risk Assessment (FRA) in addition
to detailed construction documents. These proj-
ects require engaging experienced A/Es with 6.1.3 Heating and Cooling
extensive knowledge of the regulatory require-
ments relating to facility and the manufactur- Load Calculations
ing process. A/E shall coordinate requirements The purpose of determining the actual equipment load
with users, NIH ORSC (Office of Research, data is to right-size the HVAC equipment which lowers
Support and Compliance) and DTR. initial construction costs as well as life cycle energy
costs.
8. Administrative Buildings/Spaces Requirements:
The design of administrative buildings and A. Heating and Cooling Load Calculations: Complete
spaces shall be based on requirements described heating and cooling load calculations and a vapor drive
study (where applicable) shall be prepared for each space equipment, the convective portion of the equipment can
within a design program and presented in a format be discounted from the space cooling load. Heat from
similar to that outlined in the ASHRAE Handbook of equipment that is directly vented or heat from water-
Fundamentals. Heating and cooling load calculations cooled equipment should not be considered part of the
are required for all projects to establish capacity for heat release into the room. A/E shall include diversity
equipment and provide a reference for system modifica- and usage factors for each space in the calculations.
tions. Calculations shall include, but are not limited to
indoor and outdoor design parameters, heat gains and
heat losses, supply and exhaust requirements for central Rationale: To avoid grossly overestimating
systems, and for each area of the facility, humidification actual equipment loads, heating and cooling load
and dehumidification requirements, and heat recovery. calculations should not be based on a worst-
case scenario assumed as a result of incomplete
B. Individual Room Calculations: Individual room data provided on nameplates, heat release data,
calculations shall be generated and summarized on a or usage factors. Instantaneous peak loads
system basis and presented with a block load to define should not be used as the basis for calculating heat
the peak system load. release. The average peak load is more important
because generally, space temperatures are not
C. Load Summary Sheets: Load summary sheets shall sensitive to instantaneous peaks of a few seconds;
indicate area of individual rooms, supply air quantity, therefore, it is unnecessary to size HVAC systems
L/s (cfm), air changes per hour (ACH), and correspond- based on peak instantaneous power. It is rare for
ing exhaust air quantity. all equipment to operate simultaneously, and most
equipment operates with duty cycles below
6.1.3.1 Laboratory Equipment nameplate ratings.
Cooling Loads
C. Rooms with Higher Cooling Loads: The following
A. Cooling Load: The HVAC system shall provide, as
rooms used for laboratory support, often having higher
a minimum, cooling for 86 Watts (W) per m 2 (8 W per
than normal cooling loads. The A/E shall evaluate the
ft. 2) of heat release from equipment or cooling from
use of supplemental cooling units to offset excessive
actual calculated load, whichever is greater. The A/E
sensible loads affecting these areas while maintaining
shall use equipment data for calculating actual loads.
minimum ventilation requirements. If potential decon-
tamination of the spaces are required, supplemental
Rationale: The minimum 86 W/m2 (8 W/ft. 2) for units shall not be used.
equipment load may be used for generic research Common equipment rooms (freezer rooms,
labs and as a planning tool where majority of the shared equipment rooms, etc.)
equipment has not yet been specified. Labs are
Autoclave rooms
equipment intensive and prone to equipment
creep as scientists add more equipment over Clean and dirty cage wash rooms
time. Glassware washing rooms
Special function rooms
B. Equipment Cooling Load: Detailed and complete
Electron microscope rooms
inventory of all laboratory equipment planned for instal-
lation shall be obtained and used to calculate the cool- Bioinformatics/robotics labs
ing load from equipment. Appropriate usage and diver- Labs with physics-based equipment, e.g., lasers,
sity factors shall be used. Cooling load from equipment optics, or nuclear material
is not the same as nameplate ratings and if nameplate
Tissue Culture Rooms (containing Biological
ratings are used they should be de-rated accordingly.
Safety Cabinets [BSCs] and incubators)
If snorkel exhaust or localized exhaust is used near
6.1.8 HVAC System Design tend to have better condensation control and less
Requirements potential for harboring bacteria.
Exception: Recirculation of laboratory air within the C. PCR Rooms: Polymerase Chain Reaction (PCR)
same space from devices such as fan coil units, induc- laboratories are typically set up as Pre- and Post-PCR
tion units, or chilled beams is acceptable. in separate rooms. HVAC systems for Pre- and Post-
PCR shall not permit recirculation due to risk of cross
contamination. Pre-PCR rooms shall be kept at slightly
Rationale: Laboratories and ARFs at the NIH
positive pressure to adjacent and the Post-PCR be kept
use and generate hazardous materials, which
at slightly negative pressure to adjacent to prevent
could present significant risks to the occupants.
escape of amplicons from the completed PCR samples.
Laboratory and animal facility air shall not
be recirculated to another space or facility to D. TEM and SEM Microscope Rooms: Transmission
prevent migration of chemical fumes or airborne electron microscopes (TEM) and scanning electron
pathogens and prevent cross-contamination microscope (SEM) are high resolution instruments that
between spaces. are extremely sensitive to environmental instabilities
such as temperature, vibration, acoustic noise, pres-
Recirculated air potentially harbors bacteria that
sure and magnetic fields because of the long acquisition
could contaminate the cultures that are grown
time for the image or for the need for multiple images.
and used in tissue culture rooms. Chilled beams
Slight changes in any one of these parameters can cause
are however acceptable in these rooms as they
distortion in the microscopic image. It is important to
know the sensitivity of the instrument to be housed in 6.1.8.2 Design Requirements for Animal
the facility. HVAC requirements include: Research Facilities
1. N+1 redundancy on ALL major components to A. ARF HVAC Design Guidance: HVAC design
keep the environmental chamber at constant shall meet the requirements of the latest Institute of
temperature, pressure, and humidity. Laboratory Animal Research (ILAR) guidelines.
2. The Control system shall utilize a full pro- B. Independent HVAC: HVAC systems for ARFs shall
portional-integral derivative (PID) controller. be independent from other HVAC systems in the build-
PID controller must be tuned using numerical ing. These systems shall be capable of maintaining
method such as simplified first order plus dead environmental conditions in any of the holding rooms
time (FOPDT) process models. for any of the species anticipated to be housed in the
facility. Animal holding rooms housing rabbits/ferrets
3. Air handling shall be designed to prevent build- within a large rodent or primate facility shall be pro-
ing air from blowing directly on equipment. vided with supplemental cooling to meet the required
room temperature.
4. Air shall be typically filtered to reduce particle
concentrations. C. N + 1 Redundancy: Requirements for N + 1 redun-
dancy shall be same as required for research laboratory
5. Temperature changes required may be less than
facilities as specified in Section 6.1.8.1.
0.1 degree Celsius h-1.
D. Cage Wash Areas: HVAC for cage wash areas shall
6. Airflow across the column may be as low as
be provided with temperature, humidity and airflow
than 20 feet min-1 The airflow across the
control. Cage wash equipment itself shall be provided
column may vary depending on the type and
with appropriate exhaust requirements as per manu-
sensitivity of the equipment.
facturers recommendation. Temperature and humidity
7. Radiant cooling system is recommended and levels in cage wash areas depend on the work/rest ratio
could be an inexpensive retrofit used in con- and the level of activity defined by American Conference
junction with a forced air A/C system. The of Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH). The A/E shall refer
forced air would be used mainly to control to NIH Heat Stress Program guidance for individuals
humidity. Radiant cooling can control tem- working within such an environment.
perature to better than 0.1 degree Celsius and
E. Surgical Facilities: Design of ARF surgical facilities
provides exceptional temperature stability.
should include consideration for the species to be used,
8. To retrofit a forced air cooling system: the types of procedures to be performed, the desired
throughput or volume of procedures, and the number
a. Provide reheat coil with feedback from the of people who will work in the suite. Surgery areas pro-
thermo-coupler near the column to reduce vide support function for the ARF and can be utilized
fluctuations. for minor or major procedures with survival or non-
survival outcomes. Survival surgery must be performed
b. The inlets might be placed away from the
aseptically. Generation of aerosols during surgical pro-
column to avoid unacceptable currents.
cedures must be considered regardless of the potential
c. Diffuse the air flow by installing a ceiling biohazard associated with the animals. All ventilation
with hundreds of small holes across the air is 100% outside air.
ceiling (but with none directly above the
1. Operating/Surgical Rooms: The supply air to
column) similar to duct sock and arranged
operating rooms shall be provided with HEPA
to produce laminar flow.
filtered air at a minimum of 20 ACH of 100%
d. The cooling cycling must be minimized. outside air. Air shall be supplied in the ceiling
with a concentration of the laminar airflow
e. Temperature probes shall be of highest over the surgery tables. Low exhaust shall be
accuracy. provided in at least two locations per operating
room. Differential airflow shall be positive to all quench in the room due to a breach. The emer-
adjacent areas. gency exhaust grille shall be located away
from the entrance to the room. In addition, the
2. Sterile Supply Room: The room temperature designer shall provide a pressure relief/pressure
and humidity shall be consistent with animal equalizer to minimize risk of positive pressure
holding rooms. The room shall be provided entrapment. Both the active and passive exhaust
with a minimum of 10 ACH of 100% outside shall be exhausted outdoors.
air. Differential airflow shall be positive to all
adjacent areas. Where an autoclave is installed 2. The cryogen quench pipe must be designed
stainless steel canopy exhaust shall be provided. with appropriate materials and insulation and
be adequately sized to handle the cryogen. All
3. Animal Preparation Room: The room tem- joints and fittings shall be located so they can
perature and humidity shall be consistent with be inspected. The point of discharge shall be
animal holding rooms. Room shall be provided through a weather head fitting that will dis-
with a minimum of 10 ACH of 100% outside air. charge cryogen towards the roof. Pipes shall be
Differential airflow shall be negative to operating routed to minimize long runs and elbows and
room and positive to the animal facility. be fully coordinated with equipment vendor
4. Post Recovery Room and Surgery Scrub Room: to ensure complete venting of cryogenic gas to
The room temperature and humidity shall be atmosphere. Areas around the quench discharge
consistent with animal holding rooms. Room shall be off limits and signs shall be posted to
shall be provided with a minimum of 10 ACH alert personnel of quench discharge.
of 100% outside air. Differential airflow shall
be negative to operating rooms, but positive to Rationale: Imaging equipment requires stable
adjoining rooms for infection control. room temperature which is typically dictated by
F. Animal Procedure Rooms: The room temperature the equipment manufacturer. Quenching of the
and humidity shall be consistent with animal holding magnets can occur in rooms with MR imagers,
rooms. Room shall be provided with a minimum of 15 can deplete the room of oxygen and cause room
ACH of 100% outside air. Differential airflow shall pressures to rise suddenly even when magnets
be negative to adjoining spaces, except for procedure are provided with a dedicated quench pipe to the
rooms used for rodent survival surgery, where room dif- outdoors. Provisions must be made for having
ferential pressure is positive to adjacent spaces. direct exhaust to the outdoors. For example, each
liter of liquid cryogen expands to approximately
G. Animal Neurobehavioral Laboratory: The room 700 liters of cryogen gas when it boils. These
temperature and humidity shall be consistent with safety measures are recommendations taken
animal holding rooms. Room shall be provided with a from ACR (American College of Radiology) 2013
minimum of 15 ACH of 100% outside air. Differential Guidelines of MR Safe Practices.
airflow shall be negative to adjoining spaces.
H. Imaging Rooms: HVAC for X-ray room, magnetic I. Animal Isolation: Some rooms may be designated
resonance imaging (MRI), computed tomography (CT), as animal isolation rooms having a housing chamber
and positron emission tomography (PET) to support with sash fronts or hinged doors. Unidirectional flow or
animal surgery and non-surgical procedures requires laminar-flow type systems for any of these rooms may
minimum ventilation of 6 ACH of 100% outside air. also be required.
When imaging rooms are adjacent to surgery suites,
the imaging room shall be negative relative the surgery Rationale: Animal isolation rooms are used
suite. Room temperatures around the magnet shall for infection control and to prevent exposure
remain stable and controlled within 1C ( 2F). of personnel to biological agents, allergens,
1. All magnet rooms shall be provided with an and odors.
exhaust pathway should cryogen accidently
J. Feed Storage Rooms: Feed storage rooms shall be range of requirements for varied animal populations.
temperature and humidity controlled and indepen- Exposure to wide temperature and humidity fluctua-
dently monitored. They are typically maintained at tions are detrimental to animal well-being as well as
18C (65F) and at 50% RH; however, they may also be outcomes of research protocols. Unless noted otherwise,
refrigerated, similar to environmental rooms. The room the temperature and humidity levels for animal support
shall be pressurized positively to prevent contamination areas shall be as given in Table 6.1.9.1, Indoor Design
of the product. Conditions for Laboratories and ARF Support Areas.
C. ARF Humidity: The space humidity required for 6.1.11 Ventilation Rates
common research animals is listed in Table 6.1.9.2 and
controlled to 5% RH. These ranges can be narrowed
based on species. Some tropical species (such as certain 6.1.11.1 Ventilation Rates and Air Quality
non-human primates, reptiles, and amphibians) may in Research Laboratories
require conditions of high relative humidity. Ideally the A. Ventilation Rate: The outdoor air ventilation rate
room humidity shall be selected and maintained near for laboratory space shall be no less than 6 ACH,
the middle of the ranges as listed in Table 6.1.9.2. It regardless of space cooling load. This minimum ven-
is desirable that most or all of the humidification be tilation rate shall be maintained at all times. The
produced centrally at or near the AHU and local trim ventilation rate for research laboratories is typically
humidifiers should be avoided because they require con- driven by multiple factors: fume hood demand, cool-
siderable initial cost and maintenance. ing loads, space pressurization and removal of fumes
and odors from the laboratory work area. Some labo-
ratories and support areas may require significantly
higher ventilation rates to support fume hood demand
or to cool dissipated heat from laboratory instruments
6.1.10 Indoor Design Condi- and equipment. (Refer to Experimental Study of
tions for Administrative Areas Ventilation Performance in Laboratories with Chemical
Spills by Jin et al. Available at: http://orf.od.nih.gov/
A. Temperature: Administrative areas such as general
PoliciesAndGuidelines/Bioenvironmental/Documents/
offices, lobbies, corridors, conference rooms, auditori-
ExperimentalStudyofVentilationPerformanceinlaborat.
ums, toilets areas, dining, kitchen and cafeteria areas
pdf)
shall be designed for 24C (75F) in summer and 21C
(70F) in winter. Temperature shall be maintained with
1C (2F) of set point. Rationale: Minimum ventilation rates provide
protection to occupants from chemical vapors
B. Humidity: Relative humidity in administrative areas
associated with accidental chemical spills and
shall be designed between 30% and 60% RH and main-
splashes. The ventilation rate does not include
tained within 5% of set point.
the dilution airflow required to deal with spills
in a primary containment device (such as a fume
6.1.10.1 Ventilation Systems and Air hood). Some rooms with high hazard levels of
Quality in Administrative Areas materials may require higher than 6 ACH; the A/E
should consult with the DOHS.
A. Administrative Areas: Ventilation rates for admin-
istrative areas such as offices, conference rooms, etc.,
shall be calculated based on outdoor air requirements B. Air Filtration: Refer to Section 6.2.5 for filtration
in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 62 and specific requirements for laboratories.
requirements based on the manufacturers recommen-
C. Chemical/Hazardous Sensors: Chemical and haz-
dation. Ventilation rates for conference rooms shall be
ardous sensors for reduction of the minimum ACH
based on peak occupancy.
shall not be used.
B. High Occupancy Areas: High occupancy areas such
as large conference rooms, lecture rooms, and auditori-
Rationale: Current chemical sensor technology
ums shall incorporate CO2-based demand-control ven-
does not adequately detect all toxic/hazardous
tilation system to minimize energy consumption.
materials in the air. There are also additional
costs associated with frequent recalibration and
replacement of these sensors.
Table 6.1.11.3 Ventilation Rates in Animal demand, heating demand, and design for whichever cri-
Research Facilitiesa teria results in the highest airflow demand.
Minimum B. System Connections: System connections to micro-
Facilities Air Changes
per Hourb environments shall be designed to maintain the manu-
facturers specified criteria.
Small animal, static cage/rack 15
Small animal, ventilated cage/rack 10 C. Fan/Filter Blowers: Ventilated cage racks may be
equipped with self-contained fan/HEPA filter blowers
Large animal 15
on supply and exhaust. There are multiple configura-
Aquatics (zebrafish) 10
tions for coupling the racks to the building HVAC
Office/administration supportc 6 system. The preferred configuration for coupling IVC
Laboratories 6 with the building HVAC system is via the room air
Imaging/MRI, CT, PET 6 source and direct exhaust connection to allow removal
of odor. All direct connections from building exhaust to
Surgery ORs 20
rack-mounted exhaust blowers must be through a thim-
Equipment and supply room 6 ble connection and reinforced to prevent ceiling stress
Post operative recovery room 10 cracking and/or damage at the connection penetration.
Animal prep room 10
D. Noise: Multiple blowers in the room increase noise
Surgery scrub 10 which may negatively impact animals. The A/E must
Necropsy 15 consult with the user where multiple blowers are in the
Animal procedure room 15 same room. Doubling the quantity of blowers adds up
to 3 decibels of noise.
a
Ventilation rates refer to 100% outside air.
b
Higher ACH may be required to support fume hood and Rationale: Ventilation provides adequate supply
biological safety cabinet demands and high heat loads of oxygen, removes thermal loads from animals,
c
Only if they are an integral part of the animal research lights and equipment, dilutes gaseous and
facility and the areas are served by 100% outside air particulate contaminants, adjusts the moisture
units content of room air and where appropriate
provide pressure differential between adjoining
spaces.
corridors, and non-laboratory spaces. In these facilities, (i.e., radioisotope labs should be maintained at negative
the use of the once-through airflow principle is based on: 12Pa [0.05 in. w.g.] pressure relative to corridor). Some
special laboratories may require positive air pressure in
1. Use of 100% outdoor air to provide all the relation to adjacent spaces. In these cases, the use of a
room air to be exhausted through laboratory personnel entry or anteroom shall be used. These spe-
spaces and laboratory containment equipment cial applications need to be reviewed by the DTR and
2. The capacity of the exhaust air system to the DOHS.
handle the simultaneous operation of all labo-
ratory spaces and all laboratory containment 6.1.13.2 Relative Room Pressurization
equipment
within Animal Research Facilities
3. Direct airflow from low-hazard areas to high- A. Adaptation/Protection: Relative pressurization
hazard areas at all times. Air supplied to the within ARFs is a series of complex relationships
corridor and adjacent clean spaces shall be that may change as research and animal populations
exhausted through the laboratory to achieve change. The HVAC system shall be capable of main-
effective negative pressurization. taining these relative pressure relationships and of
adapting as facility utilization changes. In a single-
corridor conventional facility or surgical rooms where
Rationale: The control of airflow direction
there is potential for surgery involving biohazardous
within research laboratory spaces helps reduce the
exposure, the ability to automatically reverse room-air
spread of odors, toxic chemicals, and airborne
pressurization relative to the corridor is highly desir-
contaminants, as well as protecting personnel and
able. If reverse room-air pressurization is incorporated
research from toxic and hazardous substances.
into the design it should be restricted to action by facil-
ity or maintenance personnel who will subsequently
B. Negative vs. Positive Air Pressure: Laboratory verify pressure differential of rooms adjoining the cor-
spaces shall remain at a negative air pressure in rela- ridor. In addition, animal spaces shall be protected
tion to corridors and other non-laboratory spaces. against contamination from outside sources, includ-
Typically, these systems are designed to maintain 47 ing particulates brought in by the HVAC airflow. The
L/s (100 cfm) airflow from the corridor into each lab pressure relationships for animal care areas including
module. Administration areas in laboratory buildings procedure rooms, imaging rooms and surgical areas
shall always be positive with respect to corridors and are described in Section 6.1.8.2. Relative pressuriza-
laboratories. Supply air distribution for corridors shall tion of the ARF is also dependent on whether the facil-
be sized to offset transfer air to laboratories while main- ity is managed as a conventional or a barrier facility.
taining an overall positive building pressure.
B. Infectious Populations: Potentially infectious popu-
C. Amount of Supply Airflow: Amount of supply air- lations shall be maintained at a negative pressure to
flow to laboratory spaces shall meet the cooling loads prevent contamination of other animal populations.
as well as exhaust air requirements. Typically exhaust Depending on the nature of the infectious agents
airflow requirements would exceed the cooling loads involved in the research, these areas may be required
requirements. In this situation, the supply airflow would to meet the design criteria for biohazard containment
need to be increased to make up the difference between facilities as outlined in the BMBL. The use of ante-
the cooling airflow and the required exhaust airflow. rooms or microisolator housing units may be required
In cases where the cooling load airflow requirements to maintain these special conditions.
exceed the required exhaust air rate requirements, sup-
plemental cooling units may be provided. C. Conventional Facilities: In a conventional facility
housing dirty animals, rooms shall remain at a nega-
D. Special Laboratories: Special laboratories such as tive air pressure relative to corridor and other non-ani-
genome DNA processing rooms, PCR rooms, warm mal spaces. Routes of transportation for dirty animals
rooms, clean laboratories, sterile facilities, etc., may or equipment such as service corridors, cage and rack
require a different type of relative room pressurization washing, and decontamination and wasteholding areas
shall be maintained at a negative pressure to the corridor. C. Entrance Areas: Entrance vestibules, atriums, and
Clean areas of the facility including the clean side of cage lobby areas in buildings shall be adequately heated and
and rack washing, clean corridors, bedding dispensing, cooled and be positively pressurized relative to the out-
and feed preparation areas shall be positive to animal doors and be negatively pressurized relative to adjacent
holding spaces and soiled areas. indoor spaces.
G. Special Pressurization Requirements: Some areas C. Plenums/Air Shafts: Plenums and air shafts for
other than the ones described above may have special distribution of supply or exhaust air are prohibited
pressurization requirements and shall be addressed in NIH laboratories and ARFs. Common outdoor air
individually by the DTR and DOHS. ductwork may be permitted for outdoor air intakes to
multiple AHUs due to space constraints and building
configuration.
6.1.13.3 Relative Room Pressurization
within Administrative Areas
A. Service Rooms: Toilets, janitors closets, showers, Rationale: This is to limit the potential for cross-
locker rooms, housekeeping closets, mail-sorting rooms contamination of airstreams.
shall be kept at negative pressure to surrounding areas.
D. Corridors: Corridors shall be provided with condi-
B. Kitchen Areas: Kitchen areas shall be negative pres-
tioned air. The quantity of conditioned air to the cor-
sure to the adjacent dining areas, serving areas, and cor-
ridors and lobby area shall be sufficient to maintain an
ridor. Dishwashing areas shall be kept negative to the
overall positive building pressure.
kitchen areas.
2. Space temperature and humidity shall be uni- 4. Individual room temperature and humidity sen-
form throughout the space. Space temperature sors for animal holding rooms shall be located
shall be monitored in each individual room. within the room unless justified to be placed in
the general exhaust ductwork.
3. Each individual lab space shall be provided
with dedicated temperature controls. This shall 5. Space temperature and humidity shall be con-
include the dedicated air-terminal units for the sistent throughout the room. Temperature and
supply and exhaust air. humidity shall be controlled, monitored, alarm-
able, and recorded (trended) in each individual
animal holding room.
B. Standards: Program equipment shall comply fume hood behind the baffle. Where fume hoods are not
with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), present, the corrosive storage cabinet shall be exhausted
Occupational Safety and Health Administration separately and connected to laboratory exhaust.
(OSHA), American National Standards Institute
(ANSI), National Sanitation Foundation (NSF), and
NIH fume hoods specifications requirements and other 6.1.16.3 Biological Safety Cabinets
applicable standards, including those listed in Section A. Class II, Type A cabinets: At the NIH, the BSCs are
1.2. Equipment selected shall not contain asbestos, typically Class II, Type A1, or Type A2 (recirculated),
lead, or mercury. which shall not be hard ducted to the building exhaust
air system, nor shall thimble connections be used.
C. Equipment Requirements: The A/E shall obtain
equipment requirements so that heat rejection, electri- B. Class II, Type B cabinets: BSC, Class II-B1 (par-
cal usage, operation usage, and other utility consump- tially exhausted), and Class II-B2 (fully exhausted) may
tion data are included in the design of the HVAC sys- also be used in NIH facilities. The use of these cabi-
tems. Equipment space requirements shall be closely nets are typically determined by the user and approved
reviewed; layouts shall allow for access to all piping, by the DOHS. These particular types of BSCs shall
wiring, and ductwork connections for easy cleaning, be hard ducted to a dedicated building exhaust air
maintenance, and repairs. system. In addition, BSC Class II-B1 and Class II-B2
shall be factory provided with means of shutting down
D. Mechanical Systems: Mechanical systems shall be the BSCs internal fan whenever the static pressure in
designed and detailed so that they do not induce harm the building exhaust air system connected to the BSC
to or impede the operating efficiency of program equip- drops below the required set point. Building exhaust-
ment. Pressure regulators, safety relief valves, gravity air systems serving these BSCs shall include provisions
drainage facilities, temperature controls, and backflow for increasing the systems static pressure to compen-
protection devices shall be provided for safe operation. sate for loading of the exhaust HEPA filters within the
E. Operation/Maintenance Strategy: The building tem- BSC, i.e., variable frequency drives (VFDs). Exhaust
perature control systems/building automation systems HEPAs in BSCs require the exhaust system to main-
(BAS) should not be used to operate/control program tain up to 625 Pa (2.5 in. w.g.) static pressure at the
equipment. The complete control and operation/main- inlet of the ducted BSCs.
tenance strategy for program equipment shall be closely
reviewed against program requirements and with pro- Rationale: This is required to prevent the internal
gram users. BSC fan from creating a positive pressure within
the BSC and associated exhaust duct. A dedicated
6.1.16.1 Flammable Storage Cabinets exhaust system allows the system to operate at
higher inlet pressures at the BSC exhaust and
Flammable storage cabinets shall not be vented and reduces nuisance alarms.
shall not be located underneath fume hoods.
1. NIH Specification Section 15991 On-Site 10. Static pressure loss: Not more than 124 Pa (0.5
Testing Constant Volume Fume Hoods in. w.g.) at 0.51 m/s (100 fpm) face velocity.
1. Fume hoods shall meet current NIH fume hood fume hoods shall comply with the testing requirements
specifications. of the listed NIH on-site testing specification sections
15991, 15992, and Subpart C, Fume Hood Testing
2. Fume hoods in non-containment-type labo- and Alarm System in Appendix D, HVAC. The face
ratories shall have no air-cleaning (HEPA or velocity of low flow hoods should never be below 0.41
charcoal), except for radiologic hoods. m/s (80 fpm).
3. The laboratory shall remain under negative B. Auxiliary Air-Type Fume Hoods: Auxiliary air-type
pressure with respect to the corridor or adjoin- fume hoods shall not be used in any NIH facilities. In
ing rooms even when the fume hood operates the event of a retrofit application, the A/E shall inves-
at the minimum exhaust air rate. When the tigate the capacities of the existing system exclusive of
exhaust air quantity is reduced, supply air the auxiliary air, and laboratory supply and exhaust
quantity shall be reduced by the same volume. system characteristics. Once it has been established
4. Laboratory minimum ventilation shall be pro- that the system can support the addition or replacement
vided even when the fume hood(s) operate in of an existing fume hood, the PO shall be notified for
the minimum exhaust air-rate position. approval before the design is allowed to proceed.
5. Airflow monitoring/alarm devices shall be Rationale: Auxiliary air systems use more energy
installed at each fume hood to provide the user than they are intended to save. They also impact
with operating information. These devices shall the laboratory HVAC systems ability to maintain
monitor the following: (1) face velocity at the stable temperature and humidity set points.
sash opening, (2) sash position, and (3) pressure
differential between hood and room.
C. Radioisotope Hoods: Radioisotope fume hoods
6. The VAV hood sash shall not be operated auto- are designed with internal surfaces impermeable to
matically based on the proximity sensors. radioactive materials designed to support lead shield-
ing. Ductwork connected to radioisotope hoods shall
B. Resources: Refer to the ORF Bioenvironmental Studies facilitate decontamination. HEPA and/or charcoal fil-
website: http://orf.od.nih.gov/PoliciesAndGuidelines/ ters may be needed in exhaust ducts, consult with the
Bioenvironmental/ for additional information and to Division of Radiation Safety (DRS). A completely sealed
the following articles: glove box may be used instead of a radioisotope fume
1. Methodology for Optimization of Laboratory hood where the amount of radioactive materials may
Hood Containment Volumes I and II exceed the inhalation exposure limit. Glove boxes shall
be provided with ducted supply and exhaust, with the
2. NIH Section 15991 On-site Testing for box itself kept at negative static pressure of 60 Pa (0.25
Constant Volume Fume Hoods in. w.g.). The lab containing glove boxes shall be main-
tained at 12 Pa (0.05 in. w.g.) negative pressure. Consult
3. NIH Section 15992 On-site Testing for with DRS.
Variable Volume Fume Hoods
D. Perchloric Acid Hoods: Perchloric acid hoods use
highly oxidizing agents that form vapors that could
6.1.16.6 Low-Flow, Auxiliary Air, cause potential explosion hazard. The exhaust system
Radioisotope, Glove Boxes and shall be equipped with a water wash down and drain-
Perchloric Acid Fume Hoods age system and in conformance with DRM plumbing
A. Testing Requirements: Low-flow fume hoods may requirements. Ductwork shall be welded of 316 L stain-
be used at the NIH as long as they meet all the require- less steel. DOHS should be consulted for new installa-
ments as outlined in the NIH/ASHRAE 110 Modified tions of perchloric acid hoods.
Fume Hood Testing Protocol. In addition, low flow
and rooms with combustion equipment shall be provided B. Specific Building Zones: HVAC systems shall be
with a ventilation system that combines ventilation and designed such that there are specific building zones for
combustion air requirements. smoke and fire control, piping, ductwork, conduits,
cable trays, and lighting. This is to include defined
F. Elevator Machine/Fire Alarm Rooms: Elevator access and service areas/zones to all equipment. These
machine rooms, fire alarm rooms, and other similar areas/zones need to be particularly defined in mechani-
spaces with electronic equipment shall be designed to cal rooms and interstitial spaces and additionally need
be maintained between 18C (65F) and 24C (78F). to be identified in the construction documents.
These spaces will be provided with air condition-
ing served from an emergency power source. Cooling C. Service and Maintenance: Systems shall be selected
equipment and piping shall not be located above eleva- to minimize the number of mechanical components
tor machine equipment. requiring service and maintenance.
B. Electric Resistance Heating: The use of electric resis- through the variance process and reviewed by the DTR
tance heating is prohibited. This includes built-in, small during the early design phase of the project.
electric heaters.
8. Firestopping is required at penetrations, into the C. Fume Hood Exhaust Ductwork/Fans: Fume hood
shaft. Refer to Section 9.4, Life Safety Features. exhaust ductwork and exhaust fans shall be con-
structed of corrosion-resistant material, such as 316 L
9. Horizontal exhaust ducts passing through a fire welded stainless steel, or be coated with a protective
barrier having a fire resistance rating of 2 hours corrosion-resistant product such as epoxy phenolic or
or greater shall meet either of the following vinyl selected to resist the anticipated corrosive fumes.
specifications:
D. Exhaust Air Discharge/Stack: Exhaust air discharge
a. Wrapped or encased with resistance rating and stack shall be as per Section 6.2.3, Outdoor Air
equal to the fire barrier for 3 m (10 ft.) of Intakes and Exhaust Air Discharge.
duct on each side of the fire barrier includ-
ing duct supports. E. Dampers: Smoke dampers and/or fire dampers shall
not be installed in laboratory exhaust ducts serving fume
b. Constructed of materials having minimum hoods, BSCs, or other containment-type equipment.
fire-resistance rating equal to the fire barrier.
Refer to NFPA 91, Standard for Exhaust
Systems for Air Conveying of Vapors, Gases Rationale: Normal or accidental closing of fire
and Mist and Non- Combustible Particulate damper may cause explosion or impede removal
Solids, Section 4.1.12. of toxic, flammable, or combustible gases in case
of a fire.
10. Fume hood exhaust shall not be combined with
general exhaust.
F. Controls: Where applicable, variable and CV exhaust
Exceptions: Where the exhaust streams are com- air fans serving multiple spaces shall be equipped with
patible and the DOHS has confirmed air stream VFDs for control of airflow and duct static pressure.
compatibility. Under such conditions there are Exhaust air from each laboratory and animal holding/
two options per NFPA 45 and NFPA 91: support area shall be controlled by a dedicated pres-
sure-independent air terminal air unit.
a. Fume hood exhaust and general exhaust
may be combined only after penetrating G. Snorkel Exhaust Systems: Snorkel exhaust systems
the last fire partition on the floor or in the used for local exhaust vents (LEV) or for heat extrac-
mechanical room or outdoors. tion from equipment may be tied to the general labora-
tory exhaust system.
b. Fume hood exhaust and general exhaust
may be combined if the devices are served H. Multiple VAV Fume Hoods: Where multiple VAV
from the same laboratory unit. fume hoods are manifolded to a single system, the A/E
may reduce the equipment capacities of the exhaust
11. Positive pressurized exhaust air ductwork system. This diversity factor is based on the usage of
should be avoided. Positive pressurized duct- the VAV hoods and should be evaluated on a case-by-
work of laboratory exhaust air is prohibited case basis in conjunction with the user and DOHS. The
in all occupied zones, including mechanical diversity factor shall not be less than 70%. Each hood
rooms. in the manifold will be provided with individual air ter-
minal unit for proper control and space tracking ability.
Rationale: Any duct leakage of pressurized
exhaust ductwork poses a contamination hazard. Rationale: Not all exhaust devices are used
simultaneously at full capacity. There is potential
B. Flex Connections: All flex connections at the inlet to to save capital and energy cost by reducing the
the fan shall be fire-rated neoprene-coated glass fiber. size of the exhaust system.
and referenced standards. Approaches must be cost- E. Chilled Beams: It is encouraged to use room-cool-
effective, durable, holistically considered, and present a ing hydronic HVAC systems such as chilled beams that
reasonable payback. Payback period of less than 1015 decouple the room cooling function from the ventila-
years is typically considered reasonable. A life cycle cost tion function and minimize reheat. Four-pipe (with
analysis shall be provided. both reheat water valve and chilled water valve) active
chilled beams terminal units may be evaluated for labo-
ratory facilities as an alternative to conventional VAV-
Rationale: Energy and water conservation reheat systems. A life cycle cost analysis shall be pro-
are federal mandates, and required of responsible vided. Primary airflow is introduced to the chilled beam
design to maintain the safe and reliable operations via a pressure-independent air terminal, which has the
of the facility. Approaches must be cost-effective ability to track airflow offsets with the exhaust terminal
over the life cycle of the facility and present a in the space. Chilled beams provide sensible cooling to
reasonable payback. Thoughtful consideration is the space while latent load is handled by the primary air
required in reviewing sustainability approaches handler. The chilled beam water temperature must be
to ensure the solution is ultimately beneficial, actively maintained above room air dewpoint to prevent
energy-efficient, cost-effective, and does not condensation. Appropriate dewpoint sensing and con-
compromise operations. The goal is to utilize densation monitoring methods shall be provided where
justified practices that provide holistic benefits chilled beams or other non-condensing hydronic cool-
rather than achieving points in a scoring system. ing methods are used. An adequate number of chilled
beams should be installed in the space for proper air
B. Codes/Standards: The A/E shall utilize the latest distribution. Chilled beams are not suitable in spaces
edition of the following energy codes and standards to with high cooling loads or in high density fume hood
design the exterior envelope for selecting HVAC and labs, in spaces with high latent loads, in high contain-
mechanical systems. ment areas or in animal rooms.
ASHRAE Standard 90.1
ASHRAE 189.1 Rationale: A HVAC design using chilled beams
International Energy Conservation Code typically requires a smaller primary air handlers
and distribution system as compared to the VAV
All applicable federal mandates, executive reheat system. Hydronic room-cooling methods
orders, codes, and standards for energy-effi- using chilled beams save considerable energy by
ciency and sustainable design reducing ventilation air, overall HVAC capacity,
C. Safety Requirements: Efforts to reduce energy must and reheat energy. Animal rooms have high
not compromise any safety requirements. These systems density of particulate (hair, allergens, etc.)
must maintain the required environmental conditions at and chilled beam recirculating process may be
all times. compromised and require continuous cleaning.
D. Reduce Exhaust Airflow: It is encouraged to use F. Energy Recovery Systems: Due to once through
variable volume control of exhaust air through fume supply air systems employed in laboratories and ARFs,
hoods by reducing exhaust airflow when the fume hood significant energy is lost as exhaust. The A/E shall uti-
sash is not open. lize energy recovery systems for energy conservation,
but these should be balanced against risk of cross-con-
Rationale: Airflow control for VAV hoods must tamination from exhaust to supply stream. The risk for
be integrated with the laboratory control system potential cross-contamination of chemical and biologi-
and its setting and operation must not jeopardize cal materials from exhaust air to intake air and poten-
the safety and function of the laboratory. tial for corrosion and fouling of devices located in the
exhaust airstream should be evaluated.
etc.) on both sides of the equation should be evaluated. 6.1.24 Systems Failure
It is recommended that some level of degradation due to
fouling be included in the calculation. and Disaster Mitigation
Systems shall be designed and materials selected to min-
H. Run-Around Coils: Run-around coils are used to
imize potential for loss of service and to limit impact
recover sensible heat from exhaust air steam to the out-
on laboratory research and ARF operations in the event
side airstream via coils and glycol piping and pumps.
of disaster or malfunction. Throughout the planning
There is no risk of cross-contamination between
and design stages, the A/E shall evaluate each system
exhaust and intake air. Combination heat recovery-
to assess potential steps that may be taken to alleviate
preheat coils should be avoided due to complications in
future damages, service disruptions, and promote rapid
controlling and the possibility of overheating intake air
restoration of temporary and normal services. Refer to
in the summer. Roughing filters shall be used upstream
Section 1.15 for additional information.
of exhaust coil serving ARFs and corrosion protection
should be applied in exhaust coils serving laboratories.
Run-around coils are applied where supply and exhaust Rationale: Failures in HVAC systems can cause
air handlers are separated by suitable distance. substantial impact to facility operations and
loss of research. Although many catastrophic
I. Energy-Recovery Wheels: Energy-recovery enthalpy
utility failures can be prevented or controlled by
wheels recover total energy (sensible and latent) and
providing redundant equipment and appropriate
are more efficient than sensible heat-recovery systems.
standby power supplies, freeze protection
They require supply and exhaust ductwork configured
measures, commissioning activities and BAS
to be adjacent at the heat-recovery device. There is how-
monitoring, these specific additional precautions
ever potential for cross-contamination from exhaust to
should be addressed in the design of HVAC systems
supply. Exhaust from fume hoods and chemical stor-
for research laboratories and ARFs along with an
age rooms shall not be permitted to pass through an
evaluation of additional risks in conjunction with
enthalpy-wheel system. Energy-recovery wheels for
the program. The rapid restoration of services
NIH facilities shall be evaluated based on program-
and minimization of damage is critical in any
matic use of the building, the analysis of the hazardous
emergency and is best accommodated through
materials and chemicals planned to be used in the build-
careful planning and installation of quality
ing, robustness of the wheel and the wheel assembly, the
controls. Additional provisions may be found in
bearings and seal, cross-contamination limits, factory
the requirements for each system.
and field performance testing to verify allowable cross-
contamination limits. All requests for energy recovery
wheels must be submitted to the DTR for review early
in the design.
Contents
B. Laboratory/ARF additional requirements: Rationale: Duct lining is not permitted due to the
possibility of releasing insulation fibers into the
1. Supply and exhaust systems shall use dedicated,
airstream. Also, there is risk of mold and bacteria
pressure-independent air-terminal devices.
if the lining should become wet.
2. Hot water reheat coils are required for the
supply air terminals. Use of steam reheat coils D. Flexible Ductwork: Flexible ductwork may be used
is not allowed in animal rooms because of risk for branch duct connections in low-pressure supply- and
of overheating and wide fluctuations in room air-transfer duct systems. Flexible-duct runs shall be
temperature. limited to 1.8 m (6 ft). Flexible ducts shall have a UL
rated velocity of at least 20.3 m/s (4,000 fpm) and a UL
3. At a minimum, makeup air and exhaust air
rated positive pressure of 2.5 kPa (10 in. w.g.). Flexible
system capacity for laboratories shall allow
ducts shall be factory insulated and comply with the
adequate airflow for at least one 1.2 m (4 ft.)
latest NFPA Standards 90A and 90B. Flexible duct con-
wide vertical sash fume hood in every other
nections shall be made using stainless steel draw bands.
laboratory module or as determined by user
Flexible ducts shall be installed to prevent restriction
programming, whichever is greater.
of air and with no more than 5% of compression, since
4. Central systems may be supplemented by fan flexible duct pressure drops increase substantially when
coil units (FCUs), chilled beams, radiant panels, compressed. Flexible duct shall not be used in exhaust,
etc. FCUs are not allowed in tissue culture return, or other negative pressure duct systems due to
risk of collapse or excess restriction of airflow.
1. Duct Velocities: Refer to Table 6.2.2 (A), Table 6.2.2 (A) Acceptable Maximum Air Velocities
Acceptable Air Velocities in the Design and in the Design and Sizing of HVAC Components
Sizing of HVAC Components for a list of
Maximum Face
acceptable air velocities to be used in the design Element/System
Velocity m/s (fpm)
and sizing of different HVAC components.
Ductwork
2. Minimum Duct Construction Standards:
Up to 500 Pa (2 in. w.g.) pres-
Refer to Table 6.2.2 (B), Minimum Duct 7.6 (1,500)
sure class in mechanical shafts
Construction Standards for a list of the mini-
mum ductwork construction requirements. Ductwork above occupied
6.1 (1,200)
areas
3. Duct Leakage Testing: Construction docu-
ments shall require the sheet metal contrac- Air outlet devices 3.8 (750)
tor to conduct pressure tests of the installed
ductwork to quantify the leakage rate of the 750 Pa (3 in. w.g.) to 1,000 Pa
installed systems. (4 in. w.g.) pressure class in 12.7 (2,500)
mechanical shafts
a. All medium pressure and high pressure duct-
work shall be tested at rated pressure class. Ductwork above occupied
10.2 (2,000)
areas
b. Medium and high pressure galvanized
Outdoor/relief air 7.6 (1,500)
ductwork shall meet the SMACNA leakage
class 4 for rectangular duct and class 3 for Animal research facility
7.6 (1,500)
round duct. exhaust ductwork
Abbreviations: VAV = variable air volume; CV = con- decontamination. All hazard ducts shall be constructed
stant air volume; SS = stainless steel of 316L SS (18 minimum).
a
This is the minimum SMACNA pressure classification All longitudinal seams on hazardous exhaust ductwork
f
B. Outdoor Air Intakes Location: The bottom of all Rationale: The geometric method is inadequate
outdoor air intakes shall be located as high as practical, for exhaust streams containing toxic or odorous
but not less than 3.6 m (12 ft.) above ground level and materials because it does not factor in the wind
any adjacent building or site element within a horizon- direction, wind speed, and the concentration of air
tal distance of 4 m (13 ft.) from the air intake. Security at air intakes.
requirements for location of air intakes shall be coordi-
nated with DPSM (Security Management) through the
PO. See Section 1.13 of the DRM.
Large conference rooms or assembly areas with inter- 16. Units shall have offset coil pipe headers to
mittent use should not be connected to units that supply allow individual coils to slide out of unit
routine office space. Air handling systems found in casings
these buildings may have the following features:
17. Units with capacity greater than 20,000 CFM
1. Single supply and return fans without redun- shall be fully tested at the factory before ship-
dant components ping. Testing shall verify capacity and leakage
rate. Unit casings shall be pressure rated for the
2. Night setback and morning warm-up control total system design operating pressure plus 25%.
modes
3. Mixing plenums with minimum and maximum 6.2.4.2 Air Handling Systems for
outdoor air dampers to accommodate mini-
Laboratory and Animal Research
mum ventilation and economizer operations
Facilities
4. Minimum Efficiency Reporting Value (MERV) A. Requirements: Refer to Section 6.1, Heating,
8 efficient prefilters and MERV 13 efficient Ventilation, and Air Conditioning Design and this sec-
after-filters tion. The following requirements apply to all AHUs to
be used in NIH laboratories and ARFs:
5. Preheat coils required to support morning
warm-up functions 1. Indoor-unit casings shall be double-wall con-
struction for all sections of the entire AHU.
6. Draw-through chilled water coils
Wall construction shall provide a minimum of
7. Central Air Handling Unit (AHU) humidifiers 75 mm (3 in.) thick and have a minimum R-17
only value. The exterior and interior wall panel shall
be solid G90 galvanized steel or aluminum.
8. 7501,000 Pa (34 in. w.g.) pressure duct dis- All exterior and interior wall panels shall be
tribution to terminal control devices 1.316 mm (18 G) solid G90 galvanized steel
minimum, or 0.127 mm (0.05 in.) thick alu-
9. Fully ducted return-air system with building
minum minimum. Cooling coil and humidifier
pressure-controlled relief devices
sections shall be constructed of stainless steel
10. Units shall be factory packaged and commer- interior panels for galvanized units. The unit
cial grade roof and floor gauge (or thickness) shall be one
gauge (or thickness) higher than wall to handle
11. Casing shall be double-wall construction for all weight of personnel. The unit floor shall be a
sections of the entire unit with a minimum of minimum of 4.7 mm (3/16 in.) aluminum plate
50 mm (2 in.) thick insulated panel for indoor with diamond tread, all welded construction.
units Panel construction shall allow the replacement
of individual panel sections without disturbing
12. Outdoor units shall be a minimum of 80 mm (3
adjacent panels.
in.) thick insulated panels. Outdoor units shall
have the exterior panels painted to pass a 1,000 2. Outdoor units shall be of double-wall
hour salt spray per ASTM B-117 construction with a minimum of R-19
insulation. Outdoor units shall have the
13. Stainless steel drain pans shall be provided
exterior panels painted with a minimum of a
under the cooling coil
3-step paint process to pass a 1,000 hour salt
14. Design cooling coil velocity shall not exceed spray per ASTM B-117.
2.5 m/s (500 fpm)
3. Units shall be custom factory fabricated and
15. All unit sections shall have access doors to custom field erected. Units shall be preas-
permit inspection and service of all components sembled and fully tested at the factory before
shipping. Units should be shipped as one piece
a number of small sections to accommodate 22. Direct drive small-plug fans (commonly called
space restraints are not allowed. a fan wall) arranged in an array may be used
to replace a traditional single large fan where
16. Steam coils shall be either steam distributing, space is limited. Each fan shall be provided
non-freeze type with inner and outer tubes or with an isolation damper so air does not short
integral face and bypass damper type. circuit the non-working fan. Direct fan motors
17. Return header for multiple-stacked coils shall be operating with VFDs shall not operate at higher
piped in a reverse-return configuration to assist than 90 Hz frequency and motor size shall be
with the balancing of the water flow. Strainers based on the operating frequency. Units operat-
shall be provided on the feed line for each coil ing with direct-drive fans should be carefully
bank. Control and balancing valves shall be selected so the operating speed during VFD
installed on the return line. Each coil shall be bypass mode does not exceed the maximum
provided with a balancing valve with integral allowed fan rpm of the selected fan.
memory stop. Combination balancing, shut-off, 23. Fans shall be vibration-isolated from the
and flow-meter devices are not acceptable. remaining parts of the unit and the connecting
18. Each AHU section shall be provided with ductwork system.
drains that permit the internal wash down of 24. Fan shafts shall be solid and precision ground
the unit in the event of a coil failure. and polished.
19. Drain pans shall be provided for each cool- 25. Fan bearings shall be selected based on a mini-
ing coil. Intermediate stainless steel drain mum life of L10 200,000 hours.
pans shall be provided for each coil bank that
is more than one coil high. Drain pans shall 26. When space limitations dictate that fans be
extend a minimum of 300 mm (12 in.) down- placed in close proximity of heating or cooling
stream of the cooling coils. The drain pan coils, the distance between the fan inlet and the
shall be stainless steel with a positive slope to coil shall be a minimum of a wheel diameter
a bottom drain connection. Pan drains shall for single-width fans and 1.5 wheel diameter
be properly trapped. Static pressure conditions for double-width fans.
accounting for dirty filter(s) at fully loaded
(100%) condition shall be used to calculate the 27. Sound attenuators may be necessary to meet
trap height. the room sound criteria for the room served by
the AHU. When feasible, they shall be inte-
20. Moisture eliminators may be considered where grated as a part of the AHU. Sound attenuators
carryover presents a problem. However, elimi- shall be packless type. The silencer rating shall
nators shall not impede service access for clean- be certified in accordance with ASTM E-477.
ing of the coil-face surface.
28. Control dampers shall be low-leakage opposed
21. Fans may be vane-axial, airfoil centrifugal blade for modulation control and parallel
(single or double width), or plenum as justified blade for open-closed operation or for mixing.
by life cycle cost analysis. All fans shall be of a Ultralow leakage, industrial-quality isolation
minimum construction Class II as per the Air dampers shall be installed at the discharge of
Movement and Control Association (AMCA). manifolded systems. Sufficient space should be
Fans shall be totally isolated from the unit by provided to remove and install actuators with-
the use of inertia bases and spring isolation. out the need for removal of dampers or other
Fan-volume control shall be achieved by using equipment.
variable frequency drives (VFDs) on centrifugal
and plenum fans. Fans shall be arranged in the 29. Fan airflow measurement in or near the fan
draw-through position. Blow-through configu- inlet should not impede airflow.
rations are not allowed.
30. Unit louvers are typically used for outdoor-air 6.2.5 Air Filtration Systems
intakes. Louvers shall be AMCA rated and
selected for low-pressure drop with less than A. Required Filters: Air filtration shall be provided to
0.003 kg/m 2 (0.001 lb./ft2) penetration at 3.8 all supply air used to provide heating and air condition-
m/s (750 fpm) free-area velocity. Louvers shall ing for laboratories and ARFs. Air filters shall be fully
be drainable and be constructed of anodized accessible to allow testing while system is fully opera-
aluminum or stainless steel with 304 stainless tional at design load. As a minimum, supply air shall
steel hardware and bird screen. pass through a pre-filter and final filter on the upstream
side of heating and cooling coils. Filter average efficien-
31. Heat recovery may be considered as demon- cies shall be MERV 8 (30%) for a pre-filter and MERV
strated by the life cycle analysis. The heating 14 (95%) for a final filter, based on ASHRAE Standard
and cooling coils shall be designed and sized to 52.2. HVAC air systems shall automatically adjust fan
function at full load without the energy-recov- speed to compensate for the additional system static
ery system. Units with heat-recovery systems pressure produced by filter loading.
shall be designed such that devices could be
out of commission without any interruption to B. Final Filtration: Final filtration shall be provided
AHU system operation. downstream of supply air fans serving ARFs to pro-
tect against particulate and other containments possi-
32. Contract documents shall fully detail the size, bly generated by the air handling equipment or from
dimensions, and specific component configura- external sources. Average efficiency of the final filters
tion of each factory-fabricated AHU, including shall be from MERV 14 to 17 (95% to 99.99%), based
all components, capacity of all components, all on ASHRAE Standard 52.2. Where final filters are
controls components, all sequences of opera- used downstream of supply fans, the efficiency of the
tion, access areas, access doors, casing open- upstream filters may be reduced to MERV 13 instead of
ings, service clearances, and overall dimen- 14. Operating rooms for animal surgery shall be HEPA
sions. Layouts shall include sections to define filtered. The A/E shall review the projects program
the overall height and vertical location of duct requirements to establish specific filtration criteria and
connections, dampers, and louvers. confirm with the DTR and DOHS.
33. The PO shall determine if a NIH representative C. Clinical Facilities: Supply air for clinical facilities
will witness the factory-testing of AHUs. shall pass through prefilters and final filters at the AHU.
Filter average efficiencies shall be MERV 8 (30%) for
prefilters and MERV 1415 (95%) for final filters based
Rationale: AHU requirements are predicated on ASHRAE Standard 52.2. HEPA filtration (MERV
upon AHUs having a service life much longer than 17 and above) is required for operating rooms or patient
traditional commercial units. protective environment (PE) rooms. The A/E shall con-
sult with the DOHS and DTR prior to the design of
HEPA filters in the system.
6.2.4.3 Air Handling Systems
D. Fan-Filter Units: Fan-filter units (FFU) are self-con-
for Clinical Facilities
tained filter assembly units with fan, prefilters, shallow
AHUs designed for clinical facilities shall be similar HEPA filter, and speed controls. FFUs are not recom-
to air handlers used in NIH laboratories and ARFs, mended unless the duct system is incapable of providing
except these units are typically provided with return the additional pressure drop required to overcome filter
fans with an economizer system. The air handlers are pressure drop of a HEPA filter. FFUs have a higher first
provided with a second filter bank downstream of the cost, require additional service and maintenance and
fan. Consideration should be given to ensure the final generate higher room noise, especially when multiple
filter is not too close to the fan resulting in uneven air units are installed in the same room.
distribution across the filter and potential wetting of the
filter from upstream cooling or a humidifier. E. HEPA Filters: Where HEPA filters are used, they
should be designed for a maximum of 1.52 m/s (300
fpm) in ducts or air handlers. Ceiling mounted termi- Humidifier controls shall include an automatic isolation
nal units shall be a maximum of 0.46 m/s (90 fpm), valve to remain closed during cooling mode. Humidifier
although higher velocities may be allowed depending on controls shall also include a high limit humidistat
the application. All HEPA filtered systems shall incorpo- located downstream of the humidifier manifold.
rate periodic in situ testing of filters, gaskets and hous-
ing to assure there are no leaks in the HEPA filtration E. Panel Distribution Humidifier: Panel distribution
system. Ceiling-mounted HEPA filters shall be replaced type humidifier may be installed in AHUs or ducts
from room side to minimize contamination. where absorption distance is very small, 500 mm (30
in.) or less. Panel type shall be multi-tube, stainless
steel construction, for use with pressurized steam, and
installed with sufficient trap height to drain the conden-
sate to the building return. Jacketed steam humidifiers
6.2.6 Humidification Systems are preferred over steam dispersion type due to lower
A. Humidification: Humidification shall be provided first cost and increased reliability.
where required to maintain space relative humidity
F. Adiabatic Humidifiers: Adiabatic humidifiers shall
requirements. In the Bethesda campus, steam from the
not be used for humidification in laboratories, ARFs, or
central plant shall be utilized for this purpose. In other
administrative facilities. Adiabatic humidifiers are not
NIH locations, the A/E shall verify suitability of using
allowed in clinical facilities per ASHRAE 170. Steam
plant steam with the PO during the design stage. At
is sterile and therefore eliminates risk of introducing
the NIH Bethesda campus clean steam for humidifica-
viable microorganisms in the airstream. Ultrasonic
tion is not required for most laboratory and animal
humidifiers shall not be used because of the risk of aero-
research facilities as the chemical additives (amines)
solized fine particles depositing in the lungs.
introduced in plant steam (for corrosion protection)
remain below the air exposure threshold limit level per G. Clean Steam Humidification: Clean steam for
OSHA, American Conference of Industrial Hygienists humidification shall be provided for special areas such
(ACGIH), and FDA guidelines. as transgenic animal housing and barrier (specific-
pathogen free) housing. Transgenic animals are typi-
B. Steam Injection Humidifier: Humidifiers shall be
cally housed separately from the rest of the population
the steam-separator type with jacketed steam injection
in a higher degree sterile environment and may be sus-
which does not require a drain from the steam mani-
ceptible to the chemical additives in plant steam. Clean
fold. They may be located within AHUs or installed in
steam for humidification may also be provided for clean
the supply air ductwork. When located in the AHU, the
room facilities and other areas required by the program.
humidifier section shall be located upstream of the cool-
The A/E shall consult with the user, the DOHS, and the
ing coil section (humidifier should be off in summer) to
DTR to confirm the use of clean steam.
ensure the efficient distribution and absorption of vapor
into the airstream. Connections should be piped to the
exterior of the unit casing.
for inspection, service, and routine maintenance. Fan type and shall be constructed of endless reinforced
bearings, where possible, shall be serviceable from out- cords of long staple cotton, nylon, rayon, or other suit-
side hazardous or contaminated exhaust airstreams. able textile fibers embedded in rubber.
In-line fans or plenum type fans with motors or drives
exposed to exhaust airstreams serving laboratories and J. Variable-Pitch Sheaves: Variable-pitch sheaves shall
ARFs are not permitted. be used to accommodate initial balancing and shall be
replaced with fixed pitch when balancing is complete.
Sheaves shall be constructed of cast iron or steel, bored
Rationale: The purpose of requiring motors to fit properly on the shafts, and secured with keyways of
out of the airstream is to minimize exposure proper size (no set screws) except that for sheaves having
of maintenance staff to allergens, toxins, or 13 mm (1/2 in.) or smaller bore set screws may be used.
contaminants that may be present in the exhaust
air stream. K. Furnished Complete: Fans shall be furnished com-
plete as a package with electric motors, motor drives,
fan bases, and inlet and outlet ductwork connections.
D. Certified Sound and Air Rating: Fans shall have a
certified sound and air rating based on tests performed
in accordance with AMCA Bulletins 210, 211A, and
300. See AMCA Standard 99, Standard Handbook, for
definitions of fan terminology. The arrangement, size, 6.2.8 Motor and Variable
class, and capacity of all fans shall be scheduled on the
contract drawings.
Frequency Drives
E. AMCA Standards: Certified fan curves including 6.2.8.1 Motors
power curves as well as acoustical data shall be submit-
A. Optimal Efficiency: Motors utilized on NIH proj-
ted for each fan. All data shall be from factory test(s)
ects shall be premium high efficiency and selected to
performed in accordance with applicable AMCA stan-
optimize the efficiency of mechanical and building sys-
dards. Data shall include published sound power levels
tems. Motors shall always be of adequate size to drive
based on actual factory tests on the fan sizes being
the equipment without exceeding the nameplate rating
furnished and shall define sound power levels (PWL)
at the specified speed or at the load that may be deliv-
(10-12 W for each of the eight frequency bands).
ered by the drive.
F. Fan Curves: Fan curves shall show volumetric flow
B. Specifications: Motors shall be rated for continuous
rate of the fan as a function of total pressure, brake
duty at 115% of rated capacity and base temperature
horsepower, and fan efficiency. System curves shall
rise on an ambient temperature of 40C (105F). Motors
include estimated losses for field installation conditions,
560 W (3/4 hp) and larger shall be three-phase, Class
system effect, and actual installed drive components.
B, general-purpose, squirrel cage, open-type, premium-
All losses shall be defined on the fan curves. Data may
efficiency induction motors in accordance with National
also be submitted in tabular form but tables are not a
Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) Design B
substitute for actual performance curves.
standards, wound for voltage specific to the project, 60
G. Dynamic Balancing: All fans shall be statically and Hz AC, unless otherwise required by the design. Motors
dynamically balanced by the manufacturer and shall be 373 W (1/2 hp) shall be either single or three-phase.
provided with vibration isolation. All fans 18.6 kW (25 Motors smaller than 373 W (1/2 hp) shall be single-
hp) and larger shall also be dynamically balanced in the phase, open-capacitor type in accordance with NEMA
field by the manufacturer upon installation completion. standards for 115 V, 60 Hz, AC. Motors 124 W (1/6 hp)
and smaller may be the split-phase type.
H. Corrosion: All fan parts shall be protected against
corrosion prior to operation. C. Power Factor: All motors 0.75 kW (1 hp) and larger
shall have a composite power factor rating of 90% to
I. Belt-Driven Fans: Belt-driven fans shall be provided 100% when the driven equipment is operating at the
with drives with multiple V-belts. Belts shall be cogged design duty. Devices such as capacitors, or equipment
such as solid-state power factor controllers, shall be of bearing currents and protect bearings from prema-
provided as part of the motor or motor-driven equip- ture failure.
ment when required for power factor correction.
D. Variable Speed Drives: Motors specified to be con- 6.2.8.2 Variable Frequency Drives
trolled by variable speed drives shall be rated for such VFDs to be used in NIH facilities shall be designed to
use. Per Central Elevator Electronics (CEE) Premium include the following:
Efficiency Criteria, minimum efficiencies for totally
enclosed, fan-cooled (TEFC) motors shall be equal or 1. Harmonic distortion on both the supply and
greater than those shown in the minimum efficiency motor side of the VFD
table included in Table 6.2.8.1, Minimum Full-Load
Nominal Efficiency of Electric Motors. Motors used on 2. Equipment de-rating due to harmonic distor-
VFDs shall be provided with Class F insulation and will tion produced by VFDs
be rated for inverter duty. Motors used on VFDs shall 3. Audible noise caused by high-frequency (several
be provided with a shaft ground ring to mitigate effects kHz) components in the current and voltage
a
As per efficiency values in the NEMA MG 1-2014 for NEMA premium efficiency electric motors.
6.2.8.2.1 Variable Frequency Drive System Design That is the VFD shall be able to maintain the operation
A. Independent Dedicated VFD: An independent and of the motor during short interruptions of the building
dedicated VFD shall be provided for each prime motor electrical power system without the need to shut down
and each standby motor in equipment requiring the use the equipment and without damaging the motor.
of VFDs. F. Filters: VFDs shall be provided with integral passive
B. Drive Match: Equipment motors shall be matched to or active harmonic filters, phase multiplication devices,
the drive so that low speeds can be achieved. and any other components required to mitigate volt-
age total harmonic distortion (THD). The prescriptive
C. Bypass: VFDs shall have a manual bypass inde- harmonic allowances for VFD applications will be per
pendent of the drive. For motors 22.4 kW (30 hp) and Table 6.2.8.2.1, Harmonic Allowances.
larger, a reduced voltage starter shall be provided in the
bypass circuit. See Section 10.2.3. Motors shall operate G. Documentation: Compliance measurement shall be
at full speed while in the bypass position whenever the based on actual THD measurement at the VFD cir-
speed drive is de-energized and/or open for service. cuit-breaker terminals. Compliance shall be shown for
motors loaded between 50%100% operation. Designs
D. Location: The required location for VFDs shall be that employ shunt-tuned filters shall be designed to pre-
indoors. When VFD outdoor locations are allowed vent the importation of outside harmonics, which could
through an approved variance, the VFDs shall be pro- cause system resonance or filter failure. Calculations
vided in NEMA 4 enclosures, with strip heaters to miti- supporting the design, including a system harmonic
gate condensation. VFD locations shall be as close as flow analysis, shall be provided as part of the submittal
practical to the motor to minimize motor circuit-con- process for shunt-tuned filters. Any filter designs, which
ductor length issues. cause voltage rise at the VFD terminals, shall include
documentation in compliance with the total system
E. Power Fluctuations: VFDs that serve fans shall be able
voltage variation of plus or minus 10%. Documentation
to maintain operation during short power fluctuations.
of power quality compliance shall be part of the com-
missioning required by the VFD supplier.
Table 6.2.8.2.1 Harmonic Allowances
Maximum
Allowable Individual
iTHD at Allowable Allowable
Allowable THD Drive Input vTHD at Distortion at
at Drive Input Terminalse Drive Input Any Individual Allowable Pulse
Motor hp Terminalsa,e (%) (%) Terminalse (%) Harmonice (%) Drivesb,f (%)
< 10 hp 10 10 5 5 6 pulse or higher
10 hp to < 25 hp 8 8 5 4 6 pulse or higher
25 hp to < 75 hp 5 5 5 3 6 pulse or higher
75 hp 5 5 5 3 18 pulse or higherd
H. Testing: Actual job site measurement testing shall be 3. Exhaust pipes shall use a vibration-proof flex-
conducted at full-load condition and a copy of the report ible connector.
shall be included in the operation and maintenance
(O&M) manuals. Harmonic measuring equipment uti- 4. Exhaust pipes and mufflers shall be guarded
lized for certification shall carry a current calibration to prevent contact with personnel and avoid
certificate. The final test report shall be reviewed for personnel injuries and burns.
compliance by a manufacturers certified representative 5. Exhaust pipes shall be routed to avoid fire-
and submitted to the PO. Text and graphical data shall detection devices and automatic sprinklers.
be supplied showing voltage and current waveforms,
THD, and individual harmonic spectrum analysis in 6. When diesel generators are to be located out-
compliance with the above standards. doors, a computational fluid dynamics assess-
ment (wind/exhaust dispersion analysis) of the
I. Wiring: VFD incoming power wiring, wiring from exhaust stream shall be performed to ensure
VFD to motor, and motor control wiring shall be generator exhaust is not re-entrained to any
installed in separate, dedicated conduits. building. Exhaust pipes shall be vented to the
atmosphere away from building doors, win-
6.2.8.2.2 Additional Variable Frequency Drive dows, and ventilation intake vents. It is recom-
Information mended that the exhaust system be carried up
as high as practical to maximize dispersal.
Refer to Appendix D for additional information regard-
ing VFD and harmonic distortion. 7. Insulated thimble pipe fittings shall be used at
the point where the exhaust pipe penetrates
Refer to Chapter 10, Electrical Design for additional
the exterior wall or roof. A hinged rain cap or
requirements.
fabricated rain shield shall be provided on the
vertical discharge.
6.2.9 Emergency Electrical downward and away from the generator set.
At the end of the horizontal run, a conden-
Power Generators sate drain trap with hose connection shall be
Engine exhaust system shall not create excessive back provided. A drain valve shall be provided at the
pressure on the engine and shall not be connected to any bottom of each vertical section of the exhaust
other exhaust system serving other equipment. Engine piping.
exhaust back pressure should be calculated before the
9. Locate a muffler close to the engine to reduce
exhaust system layout is finalized.
corrosion due to condensation.
maximum room temperature shall be determined on generator(s) at full load for a minimum of 24
the operating limits of other equipment in the room as hours without refueling. Tank-sizing calcula-
well as fire-detection specifications. tions shall be based on the full-load hourly fuel
consumption (diesel generator sets consume
1. Remote Radiator: Generators with remote approximately 0.07 gallons/hour per rated
radiators should be avoided. If remote radiators KW of fuel at full load). Other considerations
have to be used, the design team shall consult for tank sizing shall include the duration of
with the DTR and PO for approval. expected power outages versus the availability
2. Air Intake Louvers: Air intake louvers to venti- of fuel deliveries and the shelf life of the fuel
late the generator room shall be sized to accom- oil. The shelf life of #2 fuel oil is 1.52 years.
modate the amount of combustion air needed The fuel tanks must be adequately vented to
by the engine, the amount of cooling air that prevent pressurization. Generator fuel con-
flows to the radiator, and any other amount of sumption is required to be indicated in metric/
air needed to ventilate the room. Control air dual units. Consider if a fuel polishing system
dampers on the air intake louver shall be fast will be required for fuel stabilization for large
acting to meet code requirements. The intake generator fuel storage tanks. The design of the
damper shall be in a fail-safe position. fuel oil system shall specify all tank specialties
such as fuel-level alarms, duplex pumps, filling
B. Inlet and Outlet: Inlet and outlet should not be accessories, control devices, and all monitoring
located on the same wall and airflow shall allow to flow and testing devices.
across the entire generator set from alternator end to
radiator end. 2. Underground fuel oil supply tanks shall be
double-wall fiberglass and shall be provided
C. Radiator Discharge Ducts: Radiator discharge ducts with a leak-detection and monitoring system.
shall be self-supporting.
3. Day tanks shall be as close as practical to the
generators engine and shall be at an elevation
6.2.9.2 Engines Fuel Oil System where the highest fuel level in the day tank is
A. Requirements: An emergency generator shall be pro- lower than the diesel fuel injectors. Day tanks
vided with a safe and uninterrupted source of #2 fuel shall be vented to the outside when installed
oil. The fuel oil system shall be engineered and installed indoors. Day tanks are typically sized for 4
to industry standards. The advantage of sub-base tank hours of operation for the generator set at
fuel tanks is that the fuel system can be factory designed full load.
and assembled; however, fuel capacity requirements and 4. Underground fuel oil piping shall be double
inability to refill and access the tank may make them wall fiberglass and shall be provided with a
impractical. leak detection and monitoring system. Above
B. Fuel Supply/Storage System: The design of the fuel ground fuel oil lines shall be black steel.
supply and storage system shall comply with the follow- Compatible metal fuel oil pipes and fittings
ing requirements when using a remote fuel oil tank: shall be used to avoid electrolysis.
1. The fuel oil supply tank shall be located as 5. A flexible section of code-approved tubing shall
close as possible to the emergency generators. be used between the engine and the fuel supply
Emergency generator(s) fuel oil shall not be line to isolate vibration from the generators
used for any other purpose and shall not be engine.
shared with any other equipment. Secondary 6. Fuel oil supply pipes and pumps shall be sized
containment with leak detection and alarm is to handle a fuel oil flow rate three times greater
required to prevent leaking fuel from entering than the full-load fuel oil consumption rate
the soil or the sewer system. The fuel oil supply specified by the generator manufacturer. In
tank shall hold enough fuel oil to run the
multiple-day tank applications, the main fuel 6.2.9.5 Generator Fire Protection
oil pump system shall be sized for three times Requirements
the total fuel oil flow with all generators at
The fire protection system must comply with the
full load simultaneously. Fuel oil return pipes
authority having jurisdiction (AHJ) the Fire Marshal
may be sized for twice the total fuel oil flow.
on NIHs Bethesda campus. Some of the requirements
Engine return-fuel oil shall be piped to the fuel
include:
oil supply tank. The fuel return line shall not
include a shut-off device. 1. Provide adequate ventilation in the room to
prevent buildup of exhaust gases
7. The fuel oil supply line to each generator shall
be provided with an electric solenoid shut-off 2. Provide adequate fire-resistant construction for
valve. The solenoid valve shall be connected to room
the engine starter circuit to open the valve prior
to energizing the generator. 3. Provide appropriate fire-detection devices
8. Provisions shall be provided for manually filling 4. Provide appropriate number of fire extinguish-
the tanks should it be necessary. ers in the room
Refer to Section 10.3.2, Emergency Power Generation 6. Follow AHJs requirement on the amount of
for emergency generator noise levels and type and grade liquid fuel stored inside the building. Typical
of silencers to be used. maximum allowed by code is 2,500 L (660 gal).
Contents
B. Piping Greater than 100 mm: Piping larger than 100 L. Balancing Valve: Provide a balancing valve with
mm (4 in.) shall be sized for a maximum velocity of 3.0 memory stop on discharge.
m/s (10 fps) and a maximum pressure drop of 0.4 kPa/m
(4 ft./100 ft.) of piping. M. Gauge: Provide a single-pressure gauge with isola-
tion valve to serve both suction and discharge lines.
J. Flexible Connections: Provide flexible connections D. Control Valve: All terminal coils and equipment on
on suction and discharge. In-line pumps shall not be VFD operated systems shall be provided with a two-
provided with flexible connectors. way modulating control valve. Where a three-way valve
is required, the flow rate through the valve shall match
as close as possible to the minimum water flow of the
Rationale: In-line pumps rely on direct variable speed pump. Control valves shall be equal per-
connection to the piping for stability. centage type. Control valve shall be sized based on the
required flow coefficient C V for the required pressure
K. Check Valve: Provide a check valve on discharge. drop and flow.
E. Return-Water Side: Two-way control valves shall be pumps. On large systems, three sets of heat exchangers
installed on the return-water side of the coil. and pumps are preferred two to carry the load and
one as standby.
F. Isolation Valve: Provide isolation valves in the supply
and return water piping. C. Heat exchanger: Steam to water heat exchangers for
hot water heating shall be shell and tube type with a
G. Strainer: Provide a fine mesh strainer in the supply multi-pass design and counterflow operation for maxi-
water piping. mum performance. The unit shall be ASME stamped as
H. Air Vent: Provide air vents with shut-off valves in the a pressure vessel. The entire heating water system may
supply and return piping if not already provided with be provided as a manufactured assembled package. The
the coil. manufactured package shall provide sufficient room
to service all components and facilitate replacement of
I. Drain Valve: Provide a drain valve in the supply and major components, while keeping the remaining system
return water piping. The drain valve shall include 19 fully operational.
mm (3/4 in.) hose bib with cap.
D. Future Capacity: The heat exchanger capacity shall
J. Piping: Provide a minimum of 19 mm (0.75 in.) be increased by 20% to allow for future expansion.
piping to all coils regardless of the flow rate.
E. Separation: Heating water systems shall be segre-
K. Balancing Valve: Provide a balancing valve in the gated by water temperature, the application, and load
return pipe on a two-way valve control arrangement. served. Systems may be combined where temperature
Where a three-way control valve is provided, a balanc- and profiles are similar. Further separation to subsys-
ing valve shall also be provided in the bypass leg of the tems shall be considered only if proven cost-effective by
three-way control valve. the life cycle cost analysis.
B. Unitary Direct Expansion Equipment: Direct 2. The bridge return control valve shall be
Expansion (DX) HVAC systems are prohibited except designed to control the temperature and limit
where chilled water is not available in close proximity the flow of water from the building tertiary
or where process requirement dictates the use of DX piping to the secondary chilled water system.
cooling for precision temperature control. The A/E shall Control valves shall be of high quality and
provide a detailed justification for using DX equipment industrial grade. Control actuators shall be
with the variance request to the DTR for review early sized to close against anticipated system pres-
during the design process, see Section 1.5 for variance sure so valve seats are not forced open. Control
request procedures. valve actuators shall be slow closing to mitigate
pressure transients and water hammer. The
C. Chilled Water Temperature: Chilled water coils shall control valve shall be visible from the mechani-
be selected for an entering water temperature (EWT) of cal room floor under all circumstances.
7.2C (45F) and leaving water temperature (LWT) of
15.6C (60F) at peak demand.
Rationale: High quality valves provide more
Rationale: The coil EWT is based on the precise control, longer service life and minimum
secondary chilled water supply temperature maintenance.
leaving the plant during peak season and factors
the temperature loss in the secondary and tertiary 3. The common pipe in the decoupler loops shall
distribution piping system. A 8.3C (15F) chilled be a minimum of 10 pipe diameters in length
water delta T at the coil ensures reduced flow rates, to reduce the likelihood of unwanted mixing
pipe size, pumping energy, lower first cost, and a resulting from velocity, energy, or turbulence.
more efficient central plant. An isolation valve or check valve is not recom-
mended in the common pipe since it increases
D. Types of Piping Distribution Systems: The terms pri- the pressure drop in the common pipe and does
mary, secondary, and tertiary piping distribution sys- not make it a true decoupled system.
tems refer to the following: 4. Isolation valves shall be of high-performance
1. Primary: Piping distribution at the central type butterfly valve with bidirectional shut-off
chiller plant to 1,966 kPa (285 psi).
2. Secondary: Site (campus) piping distribution 5. No mechanical joint piping is allowed in the
secondary/tertiary loop piping near the service
3. Tertiary: Piping distribution within an individ- entrance or in the mechanical room.
ual building connected to the site loop
piping distribution system to achieve energy-efficien- equipment, mass spectrometers, etc., shall be provided
cies and reduce potential for condensation from colder by a dedicated chiller or decoupled chilled water loop
pipes. These systems shall be provided with water-to- using a water-to-water heat exchanger.
water heat exchangers and dedicated pumping stations
for thermal transfer. N+1 redundancy and 20% future
capacity shall be provided for heat exchangers and cir- Rationale: Plant chilled water is not used because
culating pumps. it is typically too cold, does not have adequate
pressure differential, or the desired water quality
C. Year Round Cooling: Spaces that require chilled required for the equipment.
water for cooling year round such as an interior labo-
ratory space, equipment rooms, or conference rooms 1. Plant chilled water shall be used to cool heat
may be provided with a separate pump, unless the rejection from water-cooled chillers, unless con-
main tertiary pump can handle the minimum flow rate denser water from a cooling tower is available.
required to operate the VFD.
2. Air-cooled chillers should be avoided if located
D. Precision Temperature Control: Special areas such indoors because they introduce undesired heat
as an electron microscope room requiring precision into the space and can be noisy.
temperature control may be provided with a dedicated
chiller or a decoupled chilled water loop using a water- 3. The A/E shall coordinate with the manufac-
to-water heat exchanger. Proportional Integrated and turer and their requirements for the chiller or
Derivative (PID) controllers shall be used in conjunc- fluid-to-fluid heat exchanger.
tion with Class A, Resistance Temperature Detectors
(RTDs) or Thermistors to control room temperature. 4. Chiller or fluid-to-fluid heat exchanger, supply-
The A/E shall review the projects program require- ing process equipment shall be industrial grade,
ments and submit the proposed design to the NIH for rugged, and with durable components.
review early in the design process. B. Water-Cooled DX Units: Plant-chilled water shall be
E. Critical Areas: Special areas of a critical nature and used to cool heat rejection from water-cooled DX units
which must remain in operation continuously shall be serving environmental rooms such as walk-in refrigera-
provided with a supplemental chiller to backup the tors and freezers unless condenser water from a cooling
central system. A supplemental chiller may be in direct tower is available.
contact with the building tertiary loop or connected C. Once-Through Potable Water: Once-through pota-
through a heat exchanger as the specific application ble water for cooling process equipment or environmen-
dictates. Systems serving areas of a critical nature shall tal rooms is prohibited except where used for emergency
offer 100% redundancy for all vital components and backup.
shall be powered from an emergency power source. A
chilled water thermal storage tank may also meet the D. Critical Process Equipment: Process equipment of
backup cooling requirement if considered more feasible a critical nature, which must remain in operation con-
and economical. The A/E shall review the projects pro- tinuously, shall be provided with a redundant chiller or
gram requirements and provide a risk assessment to a chiller with a backup decoupled chilled water-loop
support the need for a supplemental chiller backup and heat exchanger. Systems serving process equipment of
submit the proposed design to the NIH for review early a critical nature shall be powered from an emergency
in the design process. power source. The A/E shall review the projects pro-
gram requirements and submit the proposed design to
NIH for review early in the design process.
6.3.6.2 Chilled Water for Equipment
A. Process Laboratory Equipment: Chilled water for
process laboratory equipment such as lasers, elec-
tron microscopes, MRI equipment, CT scanners, PET
A. Bethesda Campus: At the NIH Bethesda campus 8. Radiator: 97 kPa (15 psi) maximum
steam is generated at the central steam plant in Building
11 and distributed at a pressure of 1,138 kPa (165 psi). 9. Unit heater: 97 kPa (15 psi) maximum
Steam condensate is collected and returned to Building 10. Sterilizer and cage washer: As specified by the
11 through a series of low-pressure pumped return equipment manufacturer
mains and high-pressure drip condensate piping.
E. Return Distribution System: The steam supply and
B. Usage: Steam systems are extensive and serve a steam condensate return distribution system shall be
variety of equipment and systems such as sterilizers, sized conservatively with minimal line pressure loss at
autoclaves, cage washing equipment, HVAC systems, maximum design load plus allowances for warm-up and
domestic hot water, etc. The need for clean or pure future growth. All valves, traps, equipment, and spe-
steam shall be reviewed with the program user group cialties shall be selected and sized for their intended use
for unique applications such as autoclaves serving bar- and shown in the construction documents. Sizing con-
rier facilities (e.g., SPF, transgenic), where autoclaves sideration shall include warm-up factors and estimated
may be used for sterilizing animal drinking water, inlet and outlet pressures. Steam condensate shall be
for pharmaceutical (e.g., WFI and other pure steam collected and returned to the central steam plant.
requirements), and for other applications as justified
by a unique programatic need. F. Connection to the Site Distribution Piping System:
Connection to the site distribution piping system shall
C. Classifications: NIH steam systems and distribution be achieved by extending the existing utility tunnel to
piping are classified as follows: the building or by installing steam and condensate pipes
1. Low-pressure steam: 138 kPa (20 psi) and below in an accessible pipe trench between the utility tunnel
and the building wall.
2. Medium-pressure steam: 145552 kPa
(2180 psi)
6.3.7.1 Steam Pressure-Reducing
3. High-pressure steam: 558 kPa (81 psi) and above Valve Station
D. Steam Pressure: Steam to the equipment listed below A. Stations: Steam pressure-reducing valve (PRV) sta-
shall be supplied at the indicated steam pressure; how- tions shall be provided near the steam service entrance
ever, radiators, convectors, air-heating coils, and unit into the building. PRV stages shall be as follows:
heaters may be supplied with heating water in lieu of
1. Medium to low: 55297 kPa (8015 psi)
steam:
2. Medium to medium: 552276 kPa (8040 psi)
1. Air-heating coil: 97 kPa (15 psi) maximum
(higher pressures may be used if justified by 3. High to medium: 1,138552 kPa (16580 psi)
engineering or economic considerations)
B. PRVs: Secondary and/or remote PRVs, within the
2. Central humidifier within AHU: 97 kPa (15 building, should be avoided. Second-stage PRVs may
psi) maximum be installed in mechanical penthouses/rooms or other
easily accessible mechanical spaces. Small PRVs that
3. Convector: 97 kPa (15 psi) maximum
serve isolated equipment such as a glass washer with
4. Dietetic equipment: As specified by the equip- different pressure requirements may be installed close
ment manufacturer to the equipment being served, provided that it is
located in a service corridor or other accessible and
5. Domestic hot water heater: 552 kPa (80 psi) suitable space.
maximum
C. Steam Consumption: PRV stations shall be sized for
6. Heating water heat exchanger: 97 kPa (15 psi) the calculated peak demand. For process equipment
maximum load, the PRV shall be sized, as a minimum, for 100%
steam consumption of the largest single user plus 25% within isolation shut-off valves. Pilot lines shall be at
steam consumption of all other users. least 7 mm (0.25 in.) in diameter to prevent clogging.
6.3.7.3 Steam Trap B. Trap Bypass Valve: Trap bypass valves shall not
be installed; if redundancy or additional capacity is
A. Specification: Steam trap shall be sized for
required, dual traps shall be installed.
the particular application. Refer to Table 6.3.7.3,
Recommendations for Steam Trap Applications for a C. Location: All traps, except those on radiation heat-
list of the specific steam traps to be used for the differ- ing equipment, shall be located a minimum 150 mm (6
ent steam applications as well as the associated safety in.) below the equipment they service.
factors to be used in the selection of steam trap.
Thermostatic
Thermostatic
Balanced
Steam
Pressure
Dynamic
Thermo-
Inverted
Bucket
Trap Sizing
Float/
Disk
Safety
Applicationa Factor
Kitchen Warming Equipmentb 2 X
Laboratory Equipment c
2 X
Autoclaves and sterilizers, medium pressure 2 X
Heating Equipment
Shell and tube heat exchangers 2 X
Steam coils d
4 X
Cabinet and unit heatersf 3 X
Radiant panels and strips 2 X
Radiators and convection cabinet heaters 2 X
Humidifiers 2 X
Water heaters 2 X
Water heaters medium pressure 2 X
Steam Piping
Horizontal runs and low point drains 2 X
Horizontal runs and low point drains medium
2 X
pressure and high pressure
Flash tanks 2 X
Flash tanks, medium pressure and high pressure 2 X
a
Unless noted otherwise, all equipment in this table is d
Top of traps serving steam coils shall be installed a
served with low-pressure steam. minimum of 300 mm (12 in.) below the bottom of
b
Steam traps associated with kitchen-warming equip- the coil.
ment shall be as per this table unless noted otherwise e
Trap bypass valves shall not be installed; if redun-
by the kitchen equipment manufacturer. dancy is required or capacity dictates, dual traps shall
c
Steam traps associated with laboratory equipment be installed.
shall be as per this table unless noted otherwise by the f
Equipment with a modulating control valve.
laboratory equipment manufacturer.
6.3.7.4 Steam and Condensate D. Condensate Piping: Condensate piping shall be grav-
Piping Systems ity drained from the trap to the condensate receiver for
all low pressure-steam applications. Traps on steam
A. General: Piping shall be designed and installed to
coils shall be at least 350 mm (14 in.) below the coils
allow for expansion and contraction without creat-
discharge. Where the hydraulic head is not achievable,
ing excessive stresses and strain in the piping system.
a condensate pump shall be utilized. Under no circum-
Expansion loops, offsets, pipe guides, and anchors shall
stances shall condensate be lifted after a steam-modu-
be shown on the contract documents. Expansion joints
lating device.
shall be provided as a last resort. Expansion joints shall
not be installed above ceiling within a critical space. Pipe E. Drip Leg: Drip legs shall be provided in all steam
anchors shall be designed for each location and sized mains to accommodate condensate drainage at all
to handle all forces with conservative safety factor. All locations. Drip connections shall be provided at the
anchors, guide loops, and joints shall be readily acces- base of each low point in mains and just before all
sible for maintenance and inspection. equipment connections. Drip legs shall be provided in
steam piping prior to connecting to laboratory process
B. Sizing: Steam and steam condensate piping shall be
equipment to prevent the buildup of steam condensate.
sized in accordance with the parameters in Table 6.3.7.4,
Steam condensate shall drain away from laboratory
Steam and Steam Condensate Piping Design Criteria.
process equipment. Steam instrumentation sensors
C. Classification: Regardless of steam- and conden- require a 6 m (2 ft.) long sensing line from header to
sate-pressure classification, all pipe and fittings shall sensor to protect it from extensive heat.
be rated for minimum pressure of 2,067 kPa (300 psi).
F. Steam Distribution Mains: High-pressure drip lines
Steam piping shall be a minimum schedule 40 and con-
on steam distribution mains shall be routed to a flash
densate piping, a minimum schedule 80. Steam connec-
tank and not connected to pumped condensate return
tions to equipment 80 mm (2.5 in.) and larger shall be
lines.
flanged and shall be threaded for sizes 50 mm (2 in.)
and smaller. Flange gasket and bolt shall be suitable G. Flash Tanks: Flash tanks shall be provided for high-
for operating pressure and temperature of the system. pressure and medium-pressure condensate and before
Hardware shall be selected so that temperature and connection to the condensate receiver. The flash tank
pressure fluctuations in the system and expansion/con- shall be factory fabricated and ASME stamped and
traction do not affect performance over time. approved. A contractor shop-fabricated tank is not
acceptable. Flash tanks shall be vented directly to the M. Warm-Up Valve: A warmup valve shall be provided
outside with a relief valve of the proper size. Flash steam to bypass shut-off valves on each building main shut-off
is waste energy and can be recovered either by installing valve larger than 75 mm (3 in.).
a heat exchanger (vent condenser) to provide preheat for
domestic hot water application, or by connecting the N. Steam Strainer: A steam strainer shall be positioned
steam vent to an active low pressure steam mainthrough horizontally (flat) to prevent condensate from collecting
an appropriate pressure regulating valve. In this case a in the bottom of the strainer and reducing its life.
check valve must be installed to prevent backflow if the O. Steam Vacuum Breaker: Steam vacuum breakers,
flash tank pressure should drop. A back pressure valve not check valves, shall be used on coil and heat exchang-
shall also be installed to control the maximum pressure ers to eliminate any vacuum. Vacuum breakers shall be
in the tank and relief valve to protect the system. located external to AHU casing.
H. Steam Control Valve: A steam control valve shall be P. Steam Pressure Gauge: Steam pressure gauges shall
fully proportional with a modulating equal-percentage be liquid filled with a range consistent with operating
plug. pressure. Stainless steel ball valves shall be used for
Exception: Steam control valve serving integrated face gauge cock.
and bypass damper steam coil shall be non-modulating.
4. Ensure proper selection of preheat control 5. Provide a redundant steam trap on the preheat
valve. coil to ensure condensate is removed when a
trap fails or is plugged.
Rationale: Proper selection of the control valve 6. Provide proper venting on the condensate system
is critical for controllability of any coil. The goal so coils are not subject to back pressure.
is to provide a control valve with proper control
authority to ensure that a change in the control 7. The bottom of the steam coil should be ade-
valve position will have a commensurate change quately elevated to allow for the critical head
in the coil output. If valves are oversized, there is on the condensate to ensure it drains effectively.
minimal effect on the coil until it is nearly closed.
8. A vertical integral face and bypass dampers
(IFB) steam coil is preferred over a non-freeze
B. Even Airflow Profile: Maintain even airflow pro- steam distribution coil. Sufficient space how-
file across the coil to provide proper coil performance. ever shall be provided downstream of the IFB
Provide proper inlet conditions to maintain even coil air coil to allow airflow to mix properly and equal-
velocity. ize before it hits the cooling coil.
C. Glycol Preheat Coil: Provide a redundant circulating
pump on glycol preheat coil. Rationale: A steam IFB coil provides increased
reliability and controllability over non-freeze steam
Rationale: Circulating pumps ensure that distribution coils. IFB coils allow full steam pressure
turbulent flow is maintained in the coil at reduced to be put on the coil when temperature drops below
load. Coil circulating pumps allow recirculation 4C (40F) after which the face and bypass damper
if the preheat supply system fails, delaying the coil modulate to control capacity. This helps both
from freezing. steam distribution and condensate drainage.
D. Steam Coil Considerations: Where steam coils are E. Cooling Coil Circulation Pump: Provide a cooling
used, they must be applied carefully. Design consider- coil circulation pump. The pump should be installed
ations with steam coils include the following: in the bypass position. The pump should run below
a certain cooling coil position and when entering air
1. Condensate must be effectively drained from temperature falls below a certain value. This lowers the
the coils so that it does not freeze or cause cold probability of coil freezing.
airflows that freeze downstream coils.
F. Access/Power: Coil circulation pumps shall be either
2. Coils must be properly vented. Modulated steam in-line or base mounted and located for easy service.
will typically be at subatmospheric pressure and Coil circulating pumps shall be powered from an emer-
will tend to hold condensate. Venting will relieve gency power source.
pressure and not allow cold spots on the coil.
G. Isolation Valve: Automated isolation valves may be
3. A single modulating steam-control valve shall required on chilled water supply pipes to the air hander
be avoided because they will typically create coil in order to prevent chilled water from flooding the
subatmospheric pressure in the coil and tend mechanical room if a chilled water coil breaks. The
to hold condensate in the coil. A one-third/ isolation valve will close on water detection to prevent
two-third valve arrangement helps in the flooding. This requirement is applicable on large air
controllability. handlers typically located above an occupied space. The
A/E shall review this requirement with NIH early in the
4. Steam must be effectively distributed through design process.
all the circuits in the coil, particularly at low
loads. Uneven distributed steam is particularly
a problem in full face coils that are thin.
C. Tubing: Type L (hard-drawn) wall-thickness tubing E. Installation: The different service pipes, valves, and
may be used in lieu of type K (hard-drawn) for copper fittings shall be installed so that after the insulation/
piping for above-ground water piping installations serv- jacketing is applied, there shall not be less than 25 mm
ing extramural projects located outside of the metro- (1 in.) clear space between the finished jacketing and
politan Washington, D.C. area if prevailing practice other work, as well as between the finished jacketing
and water supply conditions are compatible with type L and parallel adjacent pipes.
(hard-drawn) copper tubing. Water piping installation
F. Ferrous Piping: Ferrous piping material shall only
at the NIH Bethesda Campus and Poolesville facilities
be connected to dissimilar piping materials through an
shall utilize type K (hard-drawn) tubing as indicated in
electrical waterway such as a dielectric fitting, union,
Exhibit 6.3.
joint, or coupling that is in compliance with applicable
D. Drain Trap Material: Drain trap material selection codes and compatible with pipe materials on both sides
shall be done in consideration of the different products as well as the liquid being conveyed through the pipe.
to be disposed into the sewage system. Disposal of chlo-
ride-containing products into the sewage system has
been identified as one of the causes for pitting problems 6.3.9.3 Hanger and Support
in sewage systems made of 316 stainless steel. Refer A. Applicable Codes and Standards: Material and
to ORF Bioenvironmental Studies found at: http://orf. application of pipe hanger and support shall conform
od.nih.gov/PoliciesAndGuidelines/Bioenvironmental/. to the latest requirement of ANSI/ASME B31.1 or
ANSI/ASME B31.9 and Manufactures Standardization
Society (MSS) Standard Practice SP-58, SP-69, and
6.3.9.2 Piping Installation SP-89, and appropriate Master Specifications and fed-
A. Minimum Pipe Size: The minimum pipe size shall eral specifications where applicable. All materials and
be 19 mm (0.75 in.) for HVAC systems. Size reductions anchorage methods for installations in Seismic Zones
may occur only immediately adjacent to equipment con- 3 and 4 shall comply with local building code require-
nections and at tee pipe fittings. ments, and shall utilize materials and methods approved
by the local agency having jurisdiction. Hangers in close
B. Valve: Control valves and specialties serving equip- proximity, on different service lines, running parallel
ment shall be a full pipe size, not the reduced equipment with each other, shall be in line with each other and
connection size, unless engineering calculations specify parallel to the building structure. Hangers shall be:
differently.
1. Spaced to prevent sagging and permit proper
C. Accessibility: No piping shall penetrate ductwork. pipe drainage
Unions or flanges on each side of all pieces of equip-
ment, and other similar items, shall be designed in such 2. Spaced not more than 2.4 m (8 ft.) apart, unless
a manner that they can be readily disconnected. Unions a greater spacing is specifically designed
and flanges shall be placed in a location that shall be
3. Placed within 300 mm (1 ft.) of each horizontal F. Fireproofing: Fireproofing shall not be damaged by
elbow the installation of any hanger or attachment. Where
existing fireproofing is disturbed, it shall be restored
B. Vertical Pipe Support : Vertical runs of pipe and con- to the satisfaction of the Division of the Fire Marshall
duit less than 4.6 m (15 ft.) long shall be supported by (DFM).
hangers placed 300 mm (1 ft.) or less from the elbows
on the connecting horizontal runs. Vertical runs of pipe
and conduit over 4.6 m (15 ft.) long, but under 18.3 m 6.3.9.4 Thermal Expansion
(60 ft.) long, and not over 150 mm (6 in.) in size, shall Steam, condensate, and other hot-service piping shall
be supported by heavy steel clamps. be designed with loops, bends, expansion bellows,
1. Clamp shall be bolted tightly around the pipes anchors, pipe guides and offsets to allow for thermal
and conduits and shall rest securely on the expansion and keep pipe stresses within the allowable
building structure without blocking. limits of the piping material.
2. Clamp may be welded to the pipes and placed A. Loops: Loops or bends may be hard pipe or flexible
below coupling. depending on availability of space. Flexible metal hose
is suitable for copper tubing and at branch connection
C. Trapeze Hanger: In lieu of individual hangers, mul- risers.
tiple trapeze hangers for accessible piping shall be con-
sidered for both water pipes and electrical conduit which B. Expansion Bellows: Expansion bellows or joints may
have the same elevation and slope. Each multiple hanger be provided where movements are too large to accom-
shall be designed to support a load equal to the sum of the modate pipe bends or loops, such as piping in tunnels.
weight of the pipes, conduit, wire, water, and the weight Expansion joints or bellows shall be installed, anchored
of the hanger itself plus 90 kg (200 lb). The structural and guided in accordance to manufacturers recommen-
engineer shall approve the structural loads caused by dations. Thrust restraints shall be specified to prevent
the installation of large-diameter piping 200 mm (8 in.) pipe blow-out or joint separation.
and larger. The safety factor shall be in accordance with C. Slip and Ball Joints: Slip and ball joints shall be
ANSI/ASME B31.1. Loading on anchor shall not exceed avoided because of high maintenance due to frequently
25% of the proof-load test. The size of the hanger rod replacing packing.
shall be such that the stress at the root of the thread shall
not be over 68,950 kPa (10,000 psi) at the design load. D. Pipe Riser Expansion: For vertical pipes subject to
No rod shall be smaller than 9 mm (3/8 in.). The size of expansion and contraction, spring coils or expansion
the horizontal members shall be such that the maximum joints shall be used in conjunction with anchors and pipe
stress shall not be over 103,425 kPa (15,000 psi) design guides to support and isolate the pipe from the structure.
load. Where vertical piping is specified to extend through
sleeves, the riser clamp or pipe support shall transverse
the sleeve directly to the structure. Trapeze hangers sup- 6.3.9.5 Welding
porting large-diameter piping, 200 mm (8 in.) and larger, Welding shall conform to current standards and rec-
shall be placed to load joists at top panel points only. ommendations of the National Certified Pipe Welding
Bureau and all OSHA, state protection, and NFPA
D. Pipe Movement: Roller-type pipe support shall be
standard 241 requirements.
specified where significant horizontal pipe movement will
occur as a result of thermal expansion, and spring-type A. Welding of Hydronic Piping: Welded valves used in
support shall be specified where significant vertical move- the main campus distribution systems and all pipe con-
ment will occur and where vibration isolation is critical. nections (both butt-weld and socket-weld types) shall
conform to ASME B31.9. Butt-welded fitting shall con-
E. Plastic Piping: Plastic piping shall be supported to
form to ASME B16.9. Socket-welded fitting shall con-
permit proper movement and prevent stresses from
form to ASME B16.11. Welded fitting shall be identified
expansion and contraction, as well as to protect piping
with the appropriate grade and marking symbol.
from damage due to abrasion.
B. Welding of Steam and Steam Condensate Piping: Not Drink. Similar signage shall be provided for use at
Preparation, cleaning, and welding of joint piping, butt ice machines in laboratories and water faucets on non-
welds, fillet welds, bends, loops, and offsets shall be in potable water systems.
accordance with ASME B31.1. Welds shall be visually
examined and meet acceptance standards indicated in D. Routine Service Items: Where items requiring routine
Chapter VI of ASME B31.1. Quality of weld, correc- service are concealed above ceilings or behind access
tion of defects, stress relieving, and preheating shall be doors, a suitable and visible label shall be attached to
in accordance with ASME B31.1. Steam piping systems the surface to identify the location of such items.
with operating pressure 138 kPa (20 psi) or less and E. Equipment Markers: Equipment markers shall be
associated condensate piping may be welded in con- provided for all equipment such as pumps, fans, VAV
formance to ANSI B31.9. Arc welding and gas welding boxes, fan coil units, heaters, AHUs, boilers, chillers,
shall be in accordance with ASME BPVC SEC IX. etc. Equipment markers shall clearly identify the equip-
C. Brazing and Soldering: Brazing and soldering pro- ment and space or function they serve. Equipment
cedure qualification shall conform to ASME B31.1. markers shall consist of engraved, laminated, and
The brazing procedure for joints shall be as outlined black-and-white phenolic legend plates. White letters
in Copper Development Association (CDA) A4015. shall be at least 19 mm (0.75 in.) high on a surround-
Soldering, soldering preparation, and procedures for ing black plate.
joints shall be in accordance with ASME B31.1 and as F. Piping Label: Piping labels shall consist of colored,
outlined in the CDA A4015. prerolled, semirigid plastic label with black letters set
around pipe with a field-installed, high-strength cement
6.3.9.6 Piping and Equipment Identification compound applied along the longitudinal edge. Piping
labels shall have 13 mm (0.5 in.) high black letters for
A. Identification System: All mechanical and electrical
pipes smaller than 25 mm (1 in.) and, at least, 19 mm
equipment and systems shall be provided with a com-
(0.75 in.) high letters for pipes 25 mm (1 in.) and larger.
plete identification system that conforms to the require-
Piping labels shall include flow arrows.
ments published in ANSI/ASME standard A13.1 and
NFPA 99. All control devices, i.e., panels, switches, G. Piping Label Placement: Piping labels shall be placed
starters, pushbutton stations, relays, temperature con- around each pipe, with or without insulation, every 9 m
trols, etc., shall be clearly identified as to their func- (30 ft.). Additional piping labels shall be placed within
tion and the equipment controlled. Equipment/valve a room smaller than 4.5 m (15 ft.), and on each side of a
identification and numbering shall be coordinated with wall or floor penetration. Additional pipe labels shall be
the NIH maintenance staff. Any building system car- placed within 2 m (6 ft.) of every major pipe valve, every
rying potential biohazard contaminated air, water etc. connected piece of equipment, and at the point where
(exhaust air, waste, vent, etc.) needs to be identified the piping enters every floor.
with the International Biohazard Symbol signage.
H. Valve Tags: Valve tags shall be provided for all
B. Color Coding: In existing buildings, identifica- valves. Valve tags shall consist of colored plastic, brass,
tion systems need to match any existing identification or aluminum valve tags with stamped-in numbers. Tags
system. The A/E shall verify the actual color configu- shall be secured to the valve with a metal chain. Valve
ration used in the existing building during the design tags are not required on shut-off valves for individual
phase of the project. fixtures or equipment where their function is obvious,
or where the fixture or equipment is immediately adja-
C. System Specific Identification: Identification shall be
cent. Valve tags shall be round, of at least 38 mm (1.5
system specific, i.e., Potable or Domestic Cold Water,
in.) in diameter with white text indicating the associ-
Industrial or Laboratory Cold Water, Plant Air,
ated system and the valve number. Provide labels and
etc. In no case shall piping be identified with generic
identification at ceiling when valves are in concealed
terms, i.e., cold water, hot water, etc. Each labo-
spaces above.
ratory water outlet shall be provided with a laminated
identification sign that reads Laboratory Water Do A valve chart shall be provided at the end of each project.
DDD - -
44. Exterior Sanitary Sewer n/a
EEE22 - -
III 22, 17 - -
a. Size 300 mm (12 in.) and larger
C19, 22 - b, jj
LLL 22
- p
EEE 17, 22
- -
JJJ 17, 22
- -
b. Size 250 mm (10 in.) and smaller
C 17, 19, 22
III 19
b, jj
LLL 22 -
p
Sewer Jacking Piping (Trenchless installation,
c. EEE22
where permitted)
C19 III19 b, jj
d. San/Storm Sewer Force Main
LLL -
p
Underground Water Mains/
45. W, F n/a X15 XXI15 t15
Fire Water Mains
Compressed Air Utility Mains (General CA-(x)
46.
Compressed Air); 1,034 kPa (150 psi) and less (Pressure)
GG/HH XXVII bb
White S XXXVI bb
a. Aboveground
on Blue RR XV r, y, z
KKK 27, 49
- -
General Notes and Referenced Requirements: to listed working pressures where temperatures are out-
A. Multiple materials or joint methods may be accept- side the range the component is marked.
able as indicated in these tables, in which case the A/E F. The terms Above-ground and Below-Ground as
shall select the best option or allow each as appropriate used in these tables refer to the application as a buried
based on competitive bidding. verses a non-buried piping component.
B. Pipe fitting or joint systems that require use of a pro- G. Threading and other joint methods which reduce
prietary, single manufacturers piping are not acceptable. the pipe wall thickness are not permitted for any
All fittings and joint methods used must be compatible piping material thinner than Schedule 40 wall thick-
with industry standard piping material of the respective ness. Unless specifically indicated as an approved joint
type, as produced by multiple manufacturers. method for the application in these tables, any method
C. Where a unique project site condition would make which reduces the wall thickness or otherwise reduces
the indicated materials inappropriate, (e.g., local soils system working pressure values shall be justified and
condition or other project-specific technical constraint require pre-approval.
that would uniquely preclude effective service life) the H. Regardless of DRM allowed piping materials, no
A/E shall alert the PO and obtain direction from DTR. piping material (especially plastic) may be subjected to
The A/E shall verify soils compatibility per appropriate loading or deflection greater than as approved by the
standards through consultation with the project geo- piping and joint manufacturer. System capability to
technical engineer and as otherwise determined neces- handle loads, deflection and other stresses shall be fully
sary. This requirement is especially critical (but not lim- independent of the system pressurized or non-pressur-
ited) to brownfield sites and sites potentially impacted ized status.
by contamination or corrosive conditions. Soils testing
is mandatory at brownfield and suspected contaminated I. Piping, fittings, and components shall be certified
or corrosive sites, and must at minimum include soils to required standards by a nationally recognized test
redox, pH, resistivity, chloride, organics, and stray cur- laboratory or lab accredited by a signatory to the ILAC
rents at intervals as determined sufficient, to determine Mutual Recognition Agreement. Self-certification and
compatibility with piping materials prior to specifying certification only of post-manufactured products is not
materials. acceptable unless allowed by the required standard or
code, or reasonable diligence has occurred by the speci-
D. Piping, fittings, and joints shall be subject to compli- fier to ascertain accuracy of compliance claims of the
ance with materials and wall thickness limitations as actual manufactured and as-delivered product. Mill
required due to surge pressures, cyclic stress loadings, certification to the requirements of the governing stan-
thermal and mechanical stress limitations and other dard should be provided for piping/fittings, and elas-
restrictions (e.g., environmental and external factors) tomer certification for the completed, as-supplied elas-
and corrosion allowances as relevant to the applica- tomeric component (not just the compound); including
tion. Selections shall be made to provide a service life of when these components are parts of vendor-assembled
not less than 50 years. Where a conflict exists between equipment packages. The A/E should specify reputable
the application technical requirements (e.g., fluid or manufacturers of pipe and fittings with an appropriate
soils chemistry or working conditions) and the directed
quality management system, such as ISO 9000 series
materials and joints as indicated in these tables, obtain
standards or equivalent.
clarification through the PO. The A/E shall confirm
internal and external exposure compatibility for each J. There can be significant differences in service longev-
material application. ity of piping products from various manufacturers and
varying product lines. The A/E should be sure piping and
E. Pipe fittings, flanges, piping, and components work- fittings are specified and supplied from reliable manu-
ing pressure selections shall be applied in consideration facturers, in full conformance with manufacturing stan-
of the actual maximum working pressures and the peak dards (not just required alloy), and special attention to
temperatures of the system. Derating is often required weld processes during manufacturing, inspection, and
surface finish and coatings (interior and exterior).
K. The A/E shall require contractors to follow neces- O. A sufficient allowance shall be included in the applica-
sary precautions during materials handling, installation, tion of piping, fittings, joints and components to address
testing, and start-up to maintain system cleanliness and plausible surge pressure without resultant joint failure.
protect piping systems from contamination up to final Reliance shall not be solely on presence of mechanical
turn-over and acceptance. This includes but is not lim- devices to control surge pressures. Compliance with
ited to keeping systems sealed, precluding stagnation, ANSI/ASME B31.9 (or B31.1 or B31.3 where appli-
use of only clean and compatible tools, clean storage of cable) is mandatory for all piping systems. Regardless
materials, and protecting piping interiors from contam- of piping system pressure ratings, appropriate provi-
ination during fabrication. Work shall be performed sions to control hydraulic shock (e.g., water hammer),
by personnel qualified in required system construction, thermal movement, external loads, and other stressors
joint quality, materials, and cleanliness procedures as based upon engineered analysis is required. Selection of
required to maintain system fluid quality requirements components and joints shall include any required reduc-
and prevent premature corrosion or system failure. The tion in pressure rating as associated with the joint type
use of cleaning solutions and purging processes post or weakening as a result of the joint process (e.g., as due
installation may be acceptable for some applications, to threading, grooving, application of heat, annealing,
but is not a substitute for diligent handling and instal- flanging etc.).
lation. Cleaning solutions (where permitted) must be
properly flushed from systems immediately and prior to P. Piping hangers and attachments shall be compatible
inducing corrosion. with piping system manufacturer requirements, and the
application. Painted or coated hangers and attachments
L. Risks of premature piping failure due to corro- are not acceptable in lieu of compatible materials or
sion under insulation (CUI) shall be considered and durable and effective isolation.
addressed by the A/E as appropriate to all metallic
piping systems, with particular attention applied to Q. Piping shall be avoided above food preparation
exterior pipe protective coatings, insulation/insulation areas, food storage rooms, aquatics, switchgear, data
jacket selection, installation, and sealing for cold sys- storage, and surgical areas. Where otherwise unavoid-
tems subject to condensation. able and piping carries liquids, gravity drainage piping
and fittings shall be double-contained by polypropylene
M. Transitions between dissimilar materials shall be double containment of minimum SDR-33 thickness,
made in such manner as to protect systems from cor- and sealed capable of 35 kPa (5 psi). Storm and cold
rosion. Comply with recommendations of the National condensate carrier lines shall be insulated. Pressure sys-
Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE) and the tems require pressure-rated double containment over
additional recommendations of each respective piping insulation with leak detection.
materials industry association (e.g., CDA, DIPRA,
Nickel Institute etc.). Where dielectric protection is R. Methods and materials for wet taps, where permitted
required, the dielectric fitting shall be installed directly by the NIH, shall be submitted for approval by the A/E.
connected to the anodic material without any interven- Submittals shall include documentation on the products
ing brass fittings or other materials between the anodic to be used with complete instructions and procedures
material and the dielectric isolator. to ensure successful wet taps. Methods and materials
shall maintain required system cleanliness and shall not
N. Elastomers indicated are general requirements. reduce working pressure ratings or service life.
Specific grades of elastomers or variations in curing
process may affect elastomer compatibility and purity.
Additional Requirements, Plastic Systems:
The A/E shall review specify appropriate grades of elas-
tomers and review submittals for compatibility with A. ASTM D2837 and manufacturer recommendations
system application and plausible chemical, pressure, shall be used for pressure rating of thermoplastic sys-
temperature, cleanliness/purity and mechanical con- tems. Plastic piping hydrostatic design basis, hydrostatic
ditions through reliable data sources (e.g., elastomer design stress, strength design basis, pressure design
manufacturer). basis, minimum required strength, and minimum
required strength ratings shall be in conformance with Additional Requirements, Welded Systems and
the recommendations of the Plastic Pipe Institute. Stainless Steel Piping Systems:
A. A weld inspection/quality assurance program suf-
B. Special attention to risks of internal and external
ficient to ensure proper fabrication and as otherwise
permeation, cracking (including environmental stress
required by ANSI B31.9, ANSI B31.1, ANSI B31.3 and
cracking resistance), effects of UV and materials oxida-
Section IX BPVC (as applicable) shall be provided for
tion, mechanical strength, thermal flexibility, and gen-
all welded pressure and hazardous fluid systems and for
eral age and strength degradation shall be applied in
all welded stainless steel piping systems Additionally,
selecting and approving plastic pipe and fitting products.
certification of proper passivation in conformance with
C. Plastic piping is not approved for applications with ASTM A380 and ASTM A967 is required for all welded
less than 305 mm (12 in.) of properly constructed back- stainless steel systems or where passivation is other-
fill, or at depths greater than 6 meters (20 ft.), manu- wise required. Weld inspectors and passivators shall be
facturers requirements, or 5% calculated deflection independent of the installing contractor. Subject to any
(whichever is less). special project requirements or restrictions of code or
standards, non-destructive testing shall be performed
D. A weld inspection and quality assurance program by ASNT TC-1A Level 2 or greater for the technique
sufficient to ensure joint quality is required for thermo- employed; Certified Weld Inspectors (AWS CWI/SCWI
plastic pipe welding (including socket, butt, stick, and are also acceptable subject to competence for the NDT
electrofusion) for any of the following: (a) Pressurized technique; all of which shall have at least 5-years pro-
fuel gas piping; (b) Pressurized or gravity piping systems fessional experience.
carrying corrosive or hazardous fluids; (c) Pressurized
piping over 100 mm (4 in.) diameter; (d) New facil- B. Stainless steel systems shall be installed in strict con-
ity and major installations of ultra-high purity fluid formance with manufacturer requirements and the rec-
piping (including purified water systems; (e) Any other ommendations of Nickel Institute to preserve the integ-
applications as directed by the ORF or as determined rity, cleanliness, and corrosion resistance of the system.
appropriate by the A/E to help assure proper construc- Use of only dedicated stainless steel-compatible tools
tion. Where possible, welding inspectors should be PWI used only for work with stainless steel piping, Examples
(Plastic Weld Inspector) or SPWI (Senior) level, in accor- that must be addressed include, but are not limited to
dance with AWS G1.6 Specification for Qualification protection from ferrous materials and any contact with
of Plastics Welding Inspectors, and independent of the graphite (including avoiding carbon steel tools, cutters,
installing contractor or as otherwise approved by NIH and brushes; use of only stainless steel wire brushes,
DTR. Independent weld inspection may be waived protection from grinding debris from other construc-
for fully automatic IR type butt fusion joints in puri- tion activities; avoiding other graphite or carbon steel
fied water piping systems 100 mm (4 in.) and smaller contact) avoidance of stagnant water conditions; proper
performed by qualified installers; as well as for acces- storage off ground and with non-absorbent protec-
sible sanitary or conventional lab waste piping; pro- tion; avoidance of chloride contamination, use of only
vided an otherwise satisfactory quality assurance plan equivalent weld alloys; minimization of field welding;
is provided. use of only qualified welders/fabricators; permitting
only full-penetration, crevice-free and piping interior-
E. The use of plastic piping with press joints, push- smooth welds; comprehensive post weld examination;
joints, bite-rings, crimp rings, or similar joints is not qualified passivation procedures and post-passivation
acceptable for any pressurized piping system applica- protection. Proper protection to maintain the integrity
tion. In general, plastic piping is only acceptable with of the stainless steel system shall be rigorously enforced.
fusion type joints provide a molten weld between piping Failure to conform to these requirements will typically
and fitting. result in need to isolate, pickle, and re-passivate (and
certify the effective passivation) of the piping system in
F. Co-extruded and other non-solid wall plastic mate-
conformance with ASTM A967 and ASTM A380; and
rials are not acceptable.
may result in rejection of the entire piping system instal-
lation. A rigorous QA/QC plan should be developed.
6
Fusion-welded anodeless risers required.
12
Refer to Chapter 8, Plumbing Design, Section 8.6.
Biowaste systems and associated effluent treatment are
7
Where caulked joints are utilized, the interior of piping generally not used for BSL-3 laboratories. All biowaste
mains shall be inspected by video camera and dem- piping outside containment to include a heat-weldable/
onstrate that joints have been properly made without fusible double containment and automatic low point leak
resultant joint packing material extending into piping detection. Biowaste systems typically require approved
interior prior to concealment or backfill. welded primary carrier materials (for example schedule
double wall corrugated HDPE that have a smooth (non- adhesives shall be confirmed in writing with the manu-
corrugated) interior bore, elastomeric or fusion joints, facturer. No shielding is required for rooms lit only by
and approved perforation pattern/size may be used for LED lighting. Shielding is required for all above ground
administrative facilities (non-clinical/non-ARF) and piping carrying compressed gas, regardless of carbon
for other applications subject to approval and depth black.
restrictions.
28.
Piping of hazardous fluids, including but not limited
25
These abbreviations and labels are to be used for to toxic, explosive, and any ANSI B31.3 Category M
pipe labeling nomenclature on-campus, unless directed fluid is not permitted without project and application
otherwise in individual sections of the DRM or code. specific variance, review and approval. Where such sys-
Service nomenclature may be spelled out rather than tems are permitted, welded metal (of approved special
abbreviated. Alternative nomenclature for off-campus alloy) by qualified welders is typically required and final
projects consistent with facility standards may be used, connections that must be serviceable shall be VCR metal
where providing sufficient concise service identification. face seal type. Double containment may be required for
Some service applications require additional nomencla- some fluids. Special technical, safety, and fire protection
tures (e.g., pressure zone, service pressure, and/or area review including risk analysis and construction approv-
served). Colors refer to the color of the text (first) on the als are required.
color of the background (second).
29
With the exception of fuel gas, UHP gasses, toxic/haz-
26
Filtered nitrogen or argon purge is required during ardous fluids, and small molecule gasses (e.g., helium);
welding. Post system welding passivation is not required double ferrule compression joints (e.g., Swagelok and
for properly constructed systems however post-weld equivalent) may be used for final exposed compressed
heat tint shall not exceed color 3 on AWS D18.1/AWS gas and standard vacuum connections with stainless
D18.2 scale. Systems shall be kept free of moisture or steel tubing for all sizes; provided the minimum tubing
contaminants. wall thickness is 0.134 in. for 1.5 in. OD tube; 0.109
in. wall for 1.25 in. OD tube; 0.83 in. wall for tubing
27
Polypropylene and polyethylene polyolefin thermo- OD smaller than 1.25 in. but larger than 0.75 in. OD;
plastic piping that does not contain at least 2% carbon 0.065 in. wall for tubing OD 0.75 in. to 0.5 in. OD; and
black; as well as other non-UV resistant piping materi- not less than 0.035 in. wall thickness for tubing sizes
als are only approved for use indoors and away from smaller than 0.5 in. OD. The use of axial swaged tubing
direct sunlight and other sources of UV light. Where connections with (only) stainless steel and a tubing wall
such piping is installed with routine UV light exposure thickness at least 7% of the OD, or the use of VCR type
(including in rooms lit by fluorescent lightbulbs), shield- stainless steel metal gasket face seal joints with equiva-
ing with an approved material (e.g., foil jacket or UV lent thickness stainless steel tubing is also acceptable
stabilized PVC or PE that is at least 20 mils thick) is subject to conformance with manufacturer application
required. The use of a UV-inhibiting, high-pigment con- requirements. Double ferrule compression joints may be
tent exterior grade latex paint may also be used subject used with copper tubing for inert low pressure (276
to manufacturer approval. Jacketing is not required for kPa [40 psi]) compressed gas and standard vacuum final
pigmented or natural PVDF piping systems, however connections only for tubing sizes 0.75 in. and smaller;
light traps are required for all plastic materials between and only with Type K wall thickness. Copper tubing
the piping and any connected UV generating equipment. with ferrule joints is not acceptable for any fuel gas,
The use of PVDF or alternative metal material (e.g., hazardous fluid, UHP, small molecule gas; or for any
stainless steel) is required where constant direct ambi- application above 276 kPa.
ent UV exposure cannot be avoided or reliably shielded.
Polyolefin thermoplastic piping that is installed within 30
Double ferrule compression joints are acceptable for
24 in. of the face of fluorescent lights shall be provided low pressure applications, below 3.4 kPa (14 in. w.g.);
with protective jacketing (not paint). Only very light with 316L stainless steel tubing or A539 steel tubing
sanding is permitted prior to paint application; chemi- only; exposed or readily accessible; and provided tubing
cal prep agents shall not be used. The compatibility of size is 0.5 in. OD and smaller. Wall thickness shall be
any jacket containing plasticizers, integral primer, or not less than 0.065 in. for 0.5 in. tube; and not less than
0.035 in. for tubing OD sizes <0.5 in. The use of axial 36
See General Notes, Additional Requirements for
swaged elastic strain preload tubing connections with Stainless Steel Piping Systems.
(only) stainless steel and a tubing wall thickness at least
7% of the OD, or the use of VCR type stainless steel
37
Any of the piping, fitting, and corresponding joint
metal gasket face seal joints with equivalent thickness methods as approved for lab waste of similar location
stainless steel tubing is also acceptable subject to con- and temperature potential may be utilized subject to
formance with manufacturer application requirements. fire/building code compliance. CPVC is not permitted.
A removable joint (e.g., union, VCR, or replaceable Polypropylene is not acceptable for potentially high
double ferrule compression) shall be provided for fixed temperature waste (e.g., waste from dishwashers, kettle
lab equipment such as fumehoods. Flex connectors shall drains, or steamers) regardless of presence of aftercool-
not be used for fixed lab equipment (except where nec- ers. PVDF may be used only for such applications with
essary for seismic applications). adequate flexibility analysis and compensation. High
density polyethylene meeting PE-100RC may be used
31
May be used for pipe sizes up to 50 mm (2 in.) where with fusion joints provided the wall thickness is not less
working pressure ratings are at least 2,068 kPa (300 PN10 (SDR 11). Exposed piping in food service areas to
psi) and manufacturer written data permits surge pres- be copper or stainless only.
sure (or working pressure) ratings of at least 2,758 kPa
(400 psi) inclusive of elastomers with operating temper-
38
Electrofusion joining is not permitted for high tem-
ature up to 66C (150F) . perature waste applications (above 60C [140F]) or for
hazardous systems or high pressure. Only socket type
32
Thermal movement accommodation shall be provided heat fusion or butt fusion may be used for high tempera-
for long pipe runs as required to prevent stress to press ture waste with approved materials.
joints. Adequate support required, joints shall not carry
system loads or be subject to torsion.
39
Not approved for applications in plenums or where
ASTM E84 fire/smoke spread compliance is required
33
All systems relying upon elastomeric sealing, including (regardless of presence of an insulation blanket).
but not limited to press joints, grooved joints, and com-
pression gasketed joints shall be cleaned of upstream
40
Special provisions may be required to address ther-
cutting oils, fluxes, or other foreign contaminants that mal flexibility to prevent damage from potentially high
may not be compatible with the elastomer or otherwise temperature waste. This typically includes underground
damage the system or shorten useful life. piping snaking in trenches or anchor points and for
above ground sufficient offsets as determined from flex-
34
Approved for use with water or glycol-water applica- ibility analysis.
tions only and provided branch tube is at least (2) Pipe
sizes smaller than main tube, maximum system fluid
41
Permitted only with piping that has a maximum
temperature is 66C (150F), both branch and main Rockwell B scale hardness of 90, or as otherwise
tubes are minimum Type L wall thickness, and main required by fitting manufacturer.
tube is size 65 mm (2.5 in.) diameter or smaller, except 42
The use of plastic piping in lieu of stainless steel
that 75 to 100 mm (3 to 4 in.) may be used where tubes requires technical justification and approval by NIH
are Type K wall thickness. Branch tube size shall not DTR and concurrence of the program management;
exceed 50 mm (2 in.) for any application. Thermal (flex- and is generally not desirable in ARF. Plastic piping/
ibility) and other mechanical stresses shall be relieved. tubing is not acceptable exposed within reach of NHPs
35
The use of piping and fittings cleaned for oxygen ser- or large animals, or accessible to rabbits or other ani-
vice and purge gas during brazing or use of stainless mals that may chew or otherwise damage the mate-
material is required where vacuum systems will have rial unless the material is adequately protected (e.g.,
in-line filtration. 0.2 micron filters can become prema- by metal) or reliably out of reach and protected from
turely loaded from large particles, especially as preva- contact with the animals. Plastic piping/tubing is not
lent from unshielded brazing. acceptable where the material may be subject to impact
from cages, racks, or other mechanical damage. Where
plastics are required, the use of stress crack resistant
Material-Type
Designation Pipe Material Specifications
Ductile iron pipe, ASTM A746, with AWWA/ANSI C104 cement mortar interior lining with
sealcoat. Not less than 0.25 in. piping wall thickness, except not less than Special Thickness
O
Class 53 for applications where grooved joints are approved. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or
equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Porous concrete pipe, ASTM C654, AASHTO M-176, standard or extra-strength as required.
P
ASTM C150 Type II or Type V cement as determined compatible with soil based on testing.
Seamless copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L Hard drawn; except where copper is allowed the fol-
lowing additional requirements apply: Type K wall thickness is required for pipe size 100 mm (4
in.) and larger for compressed gas systems. Type K wall thickness is required for 150 mm (6 in.)
and larger for pressurized liquid systems; Type K wall thickness is required for 100 mm (4 in.)
Q
and larger water piping operating at temperatures above 66C (150F); Type K wall thickness is
required for hot and cold water piping sizes 150 mm and larger; and Type K wall thickness is rec-
ommended (but not required) for 100 mm (4 in.) hot water piping operating at temperatures below
66C (150F). Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Seamless copper tube, ASTM B88, Type L Soft. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and
R
ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Seamless copper tube, ASTM B280 type ACR; not less than Type K Hard drawn for all high
pressure side refrigerant applications; and listed for a working pressure of at least 4200 kPa
(610 psi) at 65C (140F) based on the annealed condition; except that Type L wall thickness
may be used for sizes 1.375 in. and smaller provided it meets this minimum working pressure
requirement. The use of copper tubing is subject to use of fittings with compatible working
S
pressure rating. Pressure ratings for all components, including hard drawn shall be based on the
annealed condition only (as would be experienced from brazing). Low pressure side refrigerant
applications and non-refrigerant applications may utilize Type L wall thickness; except that
Type K wall thickness is required for size (4.125 in. and larger) compressed gas applications.
Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Seamless copper tube, ASTM B88, Type K Hard. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent)
T
and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Seamless copper tube, ASTM B88, Type K Soft. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and
U
ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Ductile iron pipe, Type 2 or Type 5 NSF-61 cement lined and with NSF-61 sealcoat, ANSI/
AWWA C150, C151, AWWA C104, ANSI A21.4, minimum pressure class 350 required except
that not less than Special Thickness Class 54 is required for applications where grooved joints are
V approved or where threads will be cut. Flanged applications shall additionally be AWWA C115,
ductile iron flanges only, no cast iron or plain end flanges. Use Type 5 cement for applications
with elevated sulfates. Sealcoat may be waived for locations where not required for chemical com-
patibility. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Material-Type
Designation Pipe Material Specifications
ASME BPE compliant; ASTM A269; Type 316L stainless steel, seamless or weld-bead cold-
worked to finish condition, ASME BPE SF-4 15 to 20 Ra (or better) interior finish and
electropolished, Wall thickness not less than 1.65 mm (0.065 in.) for sizes up to 65 mm (2.5 in.),
not less than 2.1 mm (0.083 in.) for 75100 mm (34 in.) and not less than 0.277 mm (0.109 in.)
for 150 mm (6 in.) and not less than 0.304 mm (0.120 in.) for 200 mm (8 in.) diameter. Chemical
composition per Table I of ASTM A269 or ASME BPE. Sulfur range of 316L tube to be 0.005
W to 0.012% for seamless and 0.005 to 0.017% for ERW. Post cleaning rinse water shall be 18
M, 0.1 m filters with maximum TOC=25 ppb and maximum <6 CFU/100 mL. Purge gas for
fabrication and drying shall be 0.005 micron or better filtered cryogenic argon or nitrogen, with
less than 1 ppm moisture, oxygen, or hydrocarbons. Factory cleaned, sealed, and double bagged
for UHP service. Tubing to be factory etched and include alloy and heat number or heat reference
code, manufacturer, and shall be traceable back to original mill test report. Manufacturer to be
ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Ductile iron pipe, Type 2 or Type 5 double thickness NSF-61 cement lined and with NSF-61
sealcoat, ANSI/AWWA C150, C151, AWWA C104, ANSI A21.4, Special Thickness Class 53
X or greater, asphalt or fusion bonded epoxy exterior coating. AWWA C105 8-mil polyethylene
encasement. Use Type 5 cement for applications with elevated sulfates. Manufacturer to be ISO
9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Stainless steel pipe, Type 316L, Schedule 5S or Schedule 10S except that Schedule 10S is required
for sizes 75 mm (3 in.) and 100 mm (4 in.), ASTM A312. ASME B36.19. AWWA C220 pipe that
is ASTM A312 may be used. Piping interior surface finish shall in no case be less than ASTM
A480 grade 2B smooth and reflective. Systems requiring single-manufacturer or proprietary
Y
piping/proprietary tubing are NOT permitted. Piping insulation shall be specified as chloride-free.
Gaskets/elastomers shall be polymeric type, chloride and graphite-free (typically EPDM or pero-
fluoroelastomer). Use synthetic elastomeric gaskets where possible. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001
(or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Brass pipe and nipples ASTM B43, ANSI B687 seamless regular or extra-strong, domestic, ASTM
Z B456 chrome plating for finished locations. Application in water systems to be NSF-61 lead-free.
Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent).
Galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A53 or ASTM A106, Grade B, Type S seamless or Type E high
frequency ERW electric resistance welded (HFW) and full-body normalized after upset; full body
post weld ultrasonic or radiography inspection (during manufacturer); ASTM A123/ASTM A153;
Schedule 40, produced by an ISO 9001 or API Q1 certified manufacturing plant. Low frequency
AA
type ERW, spiral weld, continuous weld, and laser weld material is not acceptable. Mechanical
hot stretch reduced or hot reduced piping (after full-body normalizing) is preferred. Piping shall be
provided with a materials test report and be mill-traceable, ERW pipe shall be fully traceable to
heat number and lot number. Manufacturer to be ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
High density polyethylene of stress crack resistant grade and suitable for chemical waste and
corrosive lab waste systems; meeting PE100RC with Cell Class PE445584C (or better), wall
BB thickness corresponding to PN10 (SDR11) or greater, with 2% carbon black UV inhibitor; meet
or exceed ASTM F1412; and in conformance with CSA B181.3. 100% virgin material with no
rework. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Material-Type
Designation Pipe Material Specifications
Stainless steel sanitary tube, Type 316L: ASTM A270, ASTM A450, ANSI B36.19M, 120150
grit sanitary and electropolished interior. ASTM A269 tubing may also be used subject to
equivalent interior finish. Tubing wall thickness shall be not less than 1.65 mm (0.065 in.) for sizes
1 in. and smaller, and not less than Schedule 10 (or Schedule 10 equivalent tubing wall thickness)
CC for sizes larger than 25 mm (1 in.) interior diameter. Wall Thickness Exception: Not less than
0.889 mm (0.035 in.) wall thickness will be permitted for exposed ADW systems that are 0.5 in.
diameter or less provided chlorine levels are 4 mg/L, chlorides are 200 mg/L, pH is 6.5, and
sulfate is 250 mg/L, with no other factors that would preclude use. Manufacturer to be ISO
9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Pigmented polypropylene pipe, ASTM D4101; 21 CFR 177.1520; ASTM D638; ASTM D2122;
100% virgin material with no rework; ISO 15494. Piping wall thickness not less than SDR
11 (PN10); working pressure rating not less than 1,034 kPa (150 psig) and subject to system
DD maximum pressure (including surge) requirements. Pressure rating shall be in conformance with
ASTM D2837 hydrostatic design basis (not less than 50 year) and DIN 8077. Pipe and fittings
shall match and be by same manufacturer. 100% virgin material with no rework. Manufacturer
to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Polyvinlydiene fluoride (PVDF), 21 CFR 177.1520 or 177.2510, 100% virgin material with no
rework. ASTM D3222, ASTM D638, ASTM D2122, and ISO 10931 compliant; piping wall
thickness not less than SDR 33 (PN10); working pressure rating not less than 1,034 kPa (150
psig) and subject to system maximum pressure (including surge) requirements; factory clean
and individually bagged and sealed for high purity service. SDR 21 (PN 16) 1,586 kPa (230 psi)
EE working pressure material may be required for high pressure systems. Pressure rating shall be in
conformance with ASTM D2837 hydrostatic design basis (not less than 50-year) and DIN 8077.
Extractables/static leach of assembled piping/joints shall be per SEMI standard F57- F40. PVDF
materials compliant with SEMI F57 standard is acceptable and PVDF listed to NSF-61 may
also be used subject to conformance with these requirements. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or
equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
PVC, polypropylene, cross-linked PEX, PVDF, high density polyethylene (PE100RC or PE4710);
FF or 316L, stainless steel tubing as required by application and compatible with required fire/smoke
criteria. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
ASTM B819 copper tube, cleaned and degreased for oxygen service by the piping manufacturer;
Type L hard, factory nitrogen charged and ends capped. Any piping contaminated or not under
GG nitrogen charge at time of installation not accepted. Type K wall thickness is required for pipe size
4 in. and larger in compressed gas systems. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO
14001 or equivalent certified.
ASTM B819 copper tube, cleaned and degreased for oxygen service by the piping manufacturer;
Type K hard, factory nitrogen charged and ends capped. Any piping contaminated or not under
HH nitrogen charge at time of installation not accepted. Provide continuous sleeve and encasement
for underground medical gas piping. Underground installation requires justification and variance
approval. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Material-Type
Designation Pipe Material Specifications
Carbon steel pipe, ASTM A53 or A106, Grade B, Type S seamless; or Type E high frequency
ERW electric resistance welded (HFW) and full-body normalized after upset; full body post weld
ultrasonic or radiography inspection (during manufacturer); Schedule 40, produced by an ISO
9001 or API Q1 certified manufacturing plant. Low frequency type ERW, spiral weld, continuous
II weld, and laser weld material is not acceptable. Mechanical hot stretch reduced or hot reduced
piping (after full-body normalizing) is preferred. Piping shall be provided with a materials test
report and be mill-traceable, ERW pipe shall be fully traceable to heat number and lot number.
Manufacturer to be ISO 14001 or equivalent certified. Schedule 80 may be used where justified by
application, but is not generally required.
Carbon steel pipe, ASTM A53 or A106; Grade B, Type S seamless Schedule 80, or Schedule 160,
produced by an ISO 9001 or API Q1 certified manufacturing plant. Piping shall be provided with
JJ
a materials test report and be fully traceable to heat number and lot number. Manufacturer to be
ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Carbon steel pipe, ASTM A106, ASME SA106, Grade B, Type S seamless, Schedule 40; produced
by an ISO 9001 or API Q1 certified manufacturing plant. Piping shall be provided with a mate-
KK
rials test report and be fully traceable to heat number and lot number. Manufacturer to be ISO
14001 or equivalent certified.
Carbon steel pipe, ASTM A106, ASME SA106, Grade B, Type S seamless, Schedule 80 or
Schedule 160, produced by an ISO 9001 or API Q1 certified manufacturing plant. Steel shall be
LL
mill-traceable. Piping shall be provided with a materials test report and shall be fully traceable to
heat number and lot number. Manufacturer to be ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Carbon steel pipe, API-5L Seamless or DSAW linear weld;, Grade B (or X grades); PSL-2;
not less than 12.7 mm (0.5 in.) wall thickness, produced by an ISO 9001 or API Q1 certified
manufacturing plant and fully traceable per API 5L SR15.1 and SR15.2. Low frequency welded,
MM spiral weld, continuous weld, and laser weld material is not acceptable. Provide post-weld stress
relief (e.g., post weld heat treatment at least the weld seam and heat affected zone; ideally full-
body normalized) product where welded (instead of seamless) pipe is used. Manufacturer to be
ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Material-Type
Designation Pipe Material Specifications
High density polyethylene fuel gas pipe and tubing, stress crack resistant PE4710-PE100; cell
classification of PE445574C or PE445576C (or better cell class), with bimodal resin. Thickness
corresponding to SDR-11 or thicker as required, ASTM F2897; ASTM D2513; ASTM D3350,
minimum hydrostatic design basis of 11,031 kPa (1,600 psi) at 22.8C (73F) and 6,894 kPa at
60C (1,000 psi at 140F) per ASTM D2837; 100% virgin material with no rework. Comply with
stress crack, slow crack growth, rapid crack propagation and test provisions of ISO 13477 (S4),
ISO 9080, and Part 192 of Title 49 CFR and meet PE-100RC. Piping to be black with multiple
yellow stripes provided with carbon black UV stabilization for unprotected open storage for at
least 10 years; and compatible for both natural gas and LPG (propane) application. Copper tube
size (CTS) is not acceptable. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or
NN equivalent certified. ASTM F2830 compliant with these requirements is acceptable. Compliance
with Pipeline and Hazardous Materials Safety Administration (PHMSA) requirements and
advisories (including but not limited to shelf life) is mandatory. Materials with gouges or scratches
deeper than 5% wall thickness or as otherwise prohibited shall not be used.
Medium density polyethylene (MDPE, PE2708) with a cell classification of PE234373E (or better
cell class); with a 8,618 kPa (1,250 psi) hydrostatic design basis at 22.8C (73F), and 6,894 kPa
at 60C (1,000 psi at 140F) per ASTM D2837; bimodal resin only and otherwise compliant with
the above, may be used for open-trench natural gas (not LPG) applications of sizes 75 mm (3 in.)
and smaller (only), provided the material serves only single buildings; and provided natural gas
maximum pressures do not exceed 413 kPa (60 psig). Piping shall be yellow in color and suitable
for unprotected storage for at least 4 years.
Steel fuel gas tubing, ASTM A539 electric resistance welded. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or
equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified. Tubing wall thickness shall be not less than
OO
0.65 in. for tubing sizes 0.75 in. to 0.5 in. outside diameter; and not less than 0.035 in. wall
thickness for tubing smaller than 0.5 in. OD.
Schedule 40 PVDF, ASTM F1673, ASTM D3222. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent)
PP
and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Perforated PVC ASTM D2665 or ASTM D1785 only. SDR 35 is not acceptable. Perforations shall
be per ASTM C700 or ASTM F-758 and AASHTO M252 unless otherwise required by geotech
QQ
or structural engineer. Piping manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or
equivalent certified.
Sizes 40 mm (1.5 in.) and smaller: Type 316L fully annealed stainless steel tubing: ASTM A213
or ASTM A269 with hardness not to exceed Rockwell HRb 80 or as otherwise required by
fitting manufacturer; or ASTM A312 Type 316L pipe of fitting manufacturer-approved hardness.
Exterior surface shall be smooth and of surface quality in conformance with fitting manufacturers
standard requirements. Interior surface finish, cleanliness and pipe wall selected for application;
25 in Ra average (32 in. Ra max.) or better for all clean, lab, and medical gasses (mil standard
RR Grade 2D or better for non-corrosive vacuum). Minimum cleanliness for pressurized systems is
ASTM G93 Level C. Tube/pipe wall thickness to outside diameter ratio shall in no case be less
than 0.07. Factory passivated. Packaging, joint precautions, cleaning, and purging as appropriate
to required service purity. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) certified.
Sizes 50 mm and larger: As above, but ASTM A312 pipe only, with a wall thickness of Schedule
40S; except that ASTM A269 tubing as above may be used for welded systems with wall thickness
ratio at least .07 of outside diameter within required system working pressure ratings.
Material-Type
Designation Pipe Material Specifications
Vitrified Clay Pipe, Perforated, ASTM C700, standard or extra-strength as required.
SS
Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Stainless steel pipe, Type 316L, ASTM A312, ASTM A240, ANSI/ASME B36.19. Schedule 10S
is acceptable for sizes up to 100 mm (4 in.) Schedule 40S is required for sizes 150 mm (6 in.) and
larger. AWWA C220 pipe that is ASTM A312 may be used. Piping interior surface finish shall
TT in no case be less than ASTM A480 grade 2B smooth and reflective. Piping insulation shall be
specified as chloride-free. Gaskets/elastomers shall be polymeric type, chloride and graphite-
free (typically EPDM or perofluoroelastomer). Use synthetic elastomeric gaskets where possible.
Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Pigmented polypropylene pipe, factory clean and oil-free for high purity service and individually
bagged and sealed; ASTM D4101; 21 CFR 177.1520; ASTM D638; ASTM D2122; 100% virgin
material with no rework; ISO 15494. Piping wall thickness not less than SDR 11 (PN10); working
pressure rating not less than 1,034 kPa (150 psig) and subject to system maximum pressure
(including surge) requirements, Pressure rating shall be in conformance with ASTM D2837
hydrostatic design basis (not less than 50 year) and DIN 8077. Only reputable manufacturers
UU of high purity piping system products shall be specified and selected piping product shall not
leach pigment or other contaminants into water system to such levels as to compromise required
water quality. Natural (unpigmented) material is not permitted unless fitted with an approved
jacket. Extractables/static leach values for TOC of assembled piping and joints shall not exceed
50,000 g/m 2 based on high temperature (85C) testing per SEMI standard F57-F40 (and should
typically be below 40,000 g/m 2). Pipe and fittings shall match and be by same manufacturer.
Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) tubing, ultrapure type factory clean and packaged; ASTM D3307; not less
than 0.062 in. wall thickness; ASTM D2837 and not less than 1,034 kPa (150 psig); virgin resin,
21 CFR 177.1550 or SEMI F57-0301. The use of PFA flare-thru hose design is also acceptable.
V-V Where suitable PFA tubing is not readily available and subject to avoidance of deadleg; the use
of PVDF tubing may be accepted. Tubing shall be smooth inner bore, non-corrugated. Tubing
length and connections quantity shall be absolutely minimized. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or
equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Carbon steel pipe, ASTM A53 or A106, Grade B, Type S seamless; or Type E high frequency
ERW electric resistance welded (HFW) and full-body normalized after upset; full body post weld
ultrasonic or radiography inspection (during manufacturer); Schedule 80, XS, or extra heavy wall;
produced by an ISO 9001 or API Q1 certified manufacturing plant. Low frequency type ERW,
WW spiral weld, continuous weld, and laser weld material is not acceptable. Mechanical hot stretch
reduced or hot reduced piping (after full-body normalizing) is preferred. Piping shall be provided
with a materials test report and be mill-traceable, ERW pipe shall be fully traceable to heat
number and lot number. Manufacturer to be ISO 14001 or equivalent certified. Schedule 80 may
be used where justified by application, but is not generally required.
Material-Type
Designation Pipe Material Specifications
Flanged ductile iron pipe with factory-applied, 40 mils coal-tar free abrasion-resistant ceramapure
epoxy interior lining; ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10, or C153, AWWA C210; AWWA C115; not
less than Special Thickness Class 53. Ductile iron flanges only (no cast iron flanges). If piping is
installed outdoors, the exterior of fittings shall be provided with factory primed finish and painted
XX white epoxy or polysiloxane or otherwise protected from substantial temperature variations
between piping interior and exterior. Standard asphaltic or FBE exterior coating for indoor
applications. Piping shall be manufacturer prepared prior to lining/coating in accordance with
lining manufacturer recommendations by certified applicators and holiday tested. Manufacturer
to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Hoses shall be ISO 10380 compliant corrugated stainless steel, annular closed pitch Type 316L
hose with 304, 316, or 321 braid, heavy wall carrier tubing; with single layer stainless steel braid.
Full penetration welds are required for the entire hose assembly, including at the hose to fitting
connection; (or) ISO 10380 compliant corrugated bronze, annular closed pitch, with single layer
bronze braid; (or) equivalent compatible hydrogenated nitrile (HNBR) or fluoropolymer hose
(smooth bore or corrugated) with stainless steel braid and full radial factory applied hydraulic
crimp hose to end fitting connection. In addition, all hoses shall be compatible with water, glycols,
standard corrosion inhibitors and oils, including but not limited to mineral oil, paraffinic oil,
general petroleum distillates, and trace ammonium and zinc chlorides; and resistant to UV and
age deterioration. Working pressure rating of the braided hose shall be at least 5,515 kPa (800
psi); burst pressure not less than 5515 kPa (3,200 psi) based on the completed hose assembly (after
YY any welding, brazing, or other processes during manufacture or installation that reduces pressure
rating. Hoses for hot water systems shall meet required pressure rating at not less than 82C
(180F). The use of non-braided hoses is unacceptable, however the hose shall be of sufficient
thickness to provide a manufacturer recommended working pressure rating unrestrained and
without braid of at least 552 kPa (80 psi). Hose shall be single layer metal braided, fully welded,
with no elastomeric seals. The use of double braiding or extra-heavy braiding gauge to achieve
required pressure rating (rather than increased carrier wall thickness with single standard braid) is
unacceptable.
End connections shall be permanent factory attached, SAE Flare type (e.g., JIC flare), flare-swivel,
or hex NPT connection; except that bronze/copper hoses may be solder end. Hose live length shall
not exceed 762 mm (30 in.). Hoses shall be installed with strict conformance with manufacturer
bend radii requirements. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) certified.
Carbon steel pipe, A106, Grade B, Type S seamless; or Type E high frequency ERW electric
resistance welded (HFW) and full-body normalized after upset; full body post weld ultrasonic
or radiography inspection (during manufacturer); Schedule 40, produced by an ISO 9001 or API
Q1 certified manufacturing plant. Low frequency type ERW, spiral weld, continuous weld, and
ZZ laser weld material is not acceptable. Mechanical hot stretch reduced or hot reduced piping (after
full-body normalizing) is preferred. Piping shall be provided with a materials test report and be
mill-traceable, ERW pipe shall be fully traceable to heat number and lot number. Manufacturer to
be ISO 14001 or equivalent certified. Schedule 80 may be used where justified by application, but
is not generally required.
Material-Type
Designation Pipe Material Specifications
Type 316L stainless steel, ASTM A269, ASTM A632 (for sizes over 15 mm (0.5 in.); seamless for
sizes 25 mm (1 in.) OD and less; annealed; SEMATECH 91060573B; SEMATECH 90120403B,
SEMATECH 90120401B; double melt VIM/VAR or AOD/VAR, 60 to 90 Rb, seamless or weld-
bead cold-worked to finish condition, 7 in. Ra average, 10 in. Ra max (or better) interior
finish; electropolished and passivated with orbital weld square ends, tube wall thickness to
outside diameter ratio shall in no case be less than 0.07. Sulfur range of 316L tube to be 0.005 to
0.012% for seamless and 0.005 to 0.017% for ERW. Post cleaning rinse water shall be 18 M,
0.1 m filters with maximum TOC=25 ppb and maximum <6 CFU/100 mL; moisture <0.5 ppm
AAA
Particles shall not exceed 10 particles > 0.01 m per cubic foot or any particles over 0.3 micron.
Purge gas for fabrication and drying shall be 0.005 micron or better filtered cryogenic argon or
nitrogen, with less than 1 ppm moisture, oxygen, or hydrocarbons. Factory cleaned, sealed, and
double bagged for UHP service in ISO Class 4 or better cleanroom. Tubing to be factory etched
and include alloy and heat number or heat reference code as well as manufacturer and shall
be traceable back to original mill test report. Include moisture, particulate and tube chemical
analysis and chromium ratios from XPS analysis. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent)
and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Vacuum jacketed, passive (static) type system by a reputable cryogenic vacuum jacketed piping
systems manufacturer, selected as specific to each fluid application; with an engineered chemical
gettering system (palladium oxide only) for the vacuum annulus including sufficient molecular
sieve and hydrogen converter to maintain uncontaminated vacuum. All systems shall be clean
for O2 service, except that carbon dioxide need only be clean for cryogenic service. Type 304L
stainless steel of at least Schedule 5 wall thickness with internal bellows shall be used for the inner
pipe, with Type 304 stainless for the vacuum jacket. ASME Section IX certified welders, post-weld
X-ray for at least 5% of factory welds and 100% of field welds, ASME B31.3 compliance required,
and vacuum jacket shall be designed in accordance with ASME BPVC Section VIII, interior
BBB
vacuum, exterior atmospheric at ambient temperature. 100% sensitive leak testing required for
piping and vacuum annulus (helium 1 x 10 -9 cc/s). Systems 50 mm (2 in.) and smaller shall utilize
field bayonet-type clamp-secured connections. Systems larger than 50 mm, or at pressure above
1,034 kPa (150 psi) shall utilize manufactured-approved ASME B31.3 butt weld with vacuum
sealed joints only, and post weld pneumatic (at least 758 kPa) and sensitive leak test (helium
1 x 10 -9 cc/s. External bellows or Invar 36 carrier tube construction required for applications
requiring >1,034 kPa (not typically required). Bayonets shall utilize dissimilar metal sealing with
an Invar 36 male bayonet. Nose-seal (PTFE tube) bayonets are unacceptable. No system may be
less than 1,034 kPa (150 psi) working pressure. Engineered flexibility analysis required.
Reinforced concrete pipe, ASTM C76, Class IV or Class V as required, AASHTO M170; ASTM
CCC C150 Type II or Type V cement as required; with lifting anchors (not holes), ASTM C443
neoprene or isoprene o-ring compression gaskets. ASTM C361 as required.
AWWA C900 PVC with polyethylene encased cement lined ductile iron fittings, restrained joints
DDD designed for use with C900 PVC as required. Ductile fittings used for sanitary sewer service shall
include ceramic epoxy lining.
Vitrified clay pipe (VCP) with gasketed joints, extra strength if greater than (12 ft.) deep. Where
EEE
trenchless piping installations are provided, utilize VCP jacking piping.
Material-Type
Designation Pipe Material Specifications
Ductile iron pipe with factory-applied, 40 mils coal-tar free abrasion-resistant ceramapure epoxy
interior lining; Ceramapure also applied to bells and pipe ends (including field cut); ANSI/AWWA
C150, C151, AWWA C210; asphalt or fusion bonded epoxy exterior coating. AWWA C105
FFF
8-mil polyethylene encasement. Piping shall be manufacturer prepared prior to lining/coating in
accordance with lining manufacturer recommendations by certified applicators and holiday tested.
Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
ANSI B31.1 compliant preinsulated piping system for high temperature fluids utilizing an approved
carrier pipe and fittings and a fully drainable, dryable, and air testable (to 35 kPa) jacket system
that does not require cathodic protection. The system shall be suitable for direct burial with high
groundwater applications, shall be installed in dry conditions, and shall consist of non-woven glass
fiber reinforced hydrophobic silica aerogel insulation of approved thickness with stainless steel band-
ing and centered with an annular support (spider) structure, an internal epoxy coated and holiday
tested continuous welded steel conduit over the carrier pipe insulation/support system; a bonded
and at least 90% closed cell foam, air-pocket free insulation, a polyethylene coated aluminum dif-
fusion barrier, and exterior high density polyethylene thermal fused jacket of not less than 6.4 mm
(0.25 in.) thick that is joined by electrofusion or butt fusion thermal welding with post-installation
air pressure-tested joints. The exterior jacket shall be of anti-oxidant encompassed environmental
stress crack resistant virgin HDPE, with an ASTM D3350 cell classification; and made from PE4710
(preferred) or other PE100 resin with carbon black, a hydrostatic design basis of 8620 kPa (1,250
psi) per ASTM D2837; and ASTM F1473 PENT test value of 500 hours. Soils compatibility and
water table testing is required along the piping route and backfill shall be in accordance with Plastic
Pipe Institute (PPI) and manufacturer guidelines. Fittings, directional changes, and branches shall
be equivalent to the rest of the preinsualted piping. All ends seals, gland seals, expansion loops,
and anchors shall be engineered and factory fabricated for full drainage and to prevent ingress of
moisture and systems shall terminate inside the building. Avoid expansion joints. Visual inspection
to confirm complete insulation coverage and void-free foam application prior to covering; or use
GGG infrared or radiography. Systems shall be produced by a reputable preinsulated piping system manu-
facturer, Special attention is required to end seal terminations at manholes, valve pits etc. Devices
prone to seal relaxation, disbondment, elastomer degradation or corrosion-induced component seal
failure should be avoided. Manufacturer ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 certified (or equivalent).
Systems for steam and steam condensate shall include a replaceable, dryable, and reusable
continuous leak detection system with pull ports and leak location capability. End joints shall be
fully sealed; connected manholes for steam traps shall include automatic monitored municipal
grade sump pumps and high water alarms to BAS to ensure maintenance of dry conditions. Fluid
(carrier) pipe materials shall be as follows:
Steam: Not less than Schedule 80 wall thickness seamless steel in full conformance with Pipe Type
LL; fitting type XXIX; and ANSI B31.1 butt fusion joint type r.
Steam Condensate: Not less than Schedule 160 wall thickness seamless steel in full conformance
with Pipe Type LL; fitting type XXIX; and ANSI B31.1 butt fusion joint type r. A separate,
dedicated conduit is required for steam piping. Shared/multi-pipe systems are not acceptable.
Installation of a spare/second, independent blanked-off steam condensate full size (for future pipe
failure mitigation) shall be considered and determined if required on a project specific basis.
Heating Water: Not less than Schedule 80 wall thickness seamless steel in full conformance with
Pipe Type JJ; fitting type XXIX; and ANSI B31.1 butt fusion joint type r.
Material-Type
Designation Pipe Material Specifications
ANSI B31.1 compliant preinsulated piping system for cold liquid fluids utilizing an approved
carrier pipe and fittings, a bonded and at least 90% closed cell foam insulation system
constructed to be air-pocket free, and an exterior high density polyethylene thermal fused jacket
of not less than 5 mm (0.2 in.) thick that is joined by electrofusion thermal welding with post-
installation air pressure-tested joints. The exterior jacket shall be of anti-oxidant encompassed
environmental stress crack resistant virgin HDPE with an ASTM D3350 cell classification, and
made from PE4710 (preferred) or other PE100 resin with carbon black, a hydrostatic design
basis of 8,620 kPa (1,250 psi) per ASTM D2837; and ASTM F1473 PENT test value of 500
hours. Soils compatibility and water table testing is required along the piping route and backfill
shall be in accordance with Plastic Pipe Institute (PPI) and manufacturer guidelines. Fittings,
HHH directional changes, and branches shall be equivalent to the rest of the preinsualted piping. All
ends seals, gland seals, and components shall be engineered and factory fabricated to prevent
ingress of moisture and systems shall terminate inside the building. Install in dry conditions.
Visual inspection to confirm complete insulation coverage and void-free foam application prior
to covering; or use infrared or radiography. Engineered flexibility analysis shall be submitted and
reviewed. Systems shall be produced by a reputable preinsulated piping system manufacturer,
Manufacturer ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 certified (or equivalent).
Chilled Water: Not less than Schedule 80 Wall thickness seamless steel in full conformance with
Pipe Type LL; fitting type XXIX; and ANSI B31.1 butt fusion joint type r; (or) Ductile Iron
in full conformance with Pipe Type X, Fitting Type XXI, Joint type t; (or) Ductile Iron
with Pipe Type FFF, Fitting Type XLVIII, and joint type t.
SDR 26 (PS 115) or AWWA C900 or AWWA C905, or PVC, virgin material; with gasket joints.
III SDR-35 is not acceptable. Plastic pipe is not acceptable for pipelines greater than 15 ft. deep, or
less than 4 ft. deep.
SDR 26 (PS 115) or AWWA C900 PVC; virgin material; with gasket joints. SDR 35 is not
acceptable. ASTM D1785 Schedule 40 solid wall PVC (no cellular core or coextruded material)
JJJ
with 2-part solvent weld joints may also be used. Plastic pipe is not acceptable for pipelines greater
than 15 ft. deep, or less than 4 ft. deep.
Material-Type
Designation Pipe Material Specifications
High density polyethylene piping specifically engineered and manufacturer approved for
compressed air applications at working pressures of at least 1,103 kPa (160 psi) for a usable
service life of not less than 50 years; compatible with standard compressed air system
hydrocarbons (including conventional lubricants as could be present from oil-sealed compressors
regardless if system is oil-free); rapid crack propagation and stress crack resistant; bimodal resin;
PE4710 material; cell classification PE445584C or PE 445576C; (except that carbon black may
be waived for underground installation where piping includes sufficient oxidation inhibitor and
sufficient pigment for a resin-manufacturer approved outdoor UV exposure of at least 2 years, and
also for above ground indoor installation with approved protective jacket, provided the product
is cell class code E); ISO 13479 PENT >10,000 hours. Rapid crack propagation tested and
determined compatible for compressed air application as per ISO 13477 S4; wall thickness for
pipe and fittings shall correspond to not thinner than DR 9; ASTM D3350 minimum hydrostatic
design basis of 11,031 kPa (1,600 psi) at 22.8C (73F) and 6,894 kPa at 60C (1,000 psi at
KKK
140F) per ASTM D2837; 100% virgin material with no rework. Listed per PPI TR-4 as a PE
100 with a MRS (Minimum Required Strength) of 1,000 kPpa (1450 psi) at 20C (68F). Comply
with stress crack, slow crack growth, rapid crack propagation and test provisions of ISO 13477,
ISO 9080, and Part 192 of Title 49 CFR and meet PE-100RC. Copper tube size material is not
acceptable. Fittings shall be ASTM D3261 or F2620 butt fusion type except ASTM D2683 socket
fusion may be used for 50 mm (2 in.) and smaller. Socket fusion is acceptable for size 100 mm
(4 in.) and smaller with DR 7 rated systems provided pipe sizes above 50 mm are inspected and
approved by a certified weld inspector per AWS G1.6. Comply with ASTM F2897 and F3124.
Pipe and fittings shall be compatible. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO
14001 or equivalent certified. Fusion shall be in conformance with PPI methods and manufacturer
recommendations and welders shall be qualified per AWS B2.4 Product which has been exposed
to UV (open packages or piping stored outdoors) or which has gouges or scratches deeper than 5%
wall thickness (or as otherwise prohibited) shall not be used.
High density polyethylene, PE4710 with a cell classification of PE445574C (or better); ASTM
F714, ASTM D3350; wall thickness corresponding to not thinner than DR 17 (except not thinner
than DR 11 for any force main application); 11,031 kPa (1,600 psi) at 22.8C (73F) and 6,894
kPa at 60C (1,000 psi at 140F) per ASTM D2837; 100% virgin material with no rework; ASTM
LLL D3261 fittings, black pipe with green stripe. Butt heat fusion joints joined per manufacturer
requirements and PPI recommended procedure. Smooth bore, solid wall. No piping with abrasion,
cuts, or gouges beyond 5% of depth may be installed. Mechanical transition joint with Type 316
stainless steel stiffener. Plastic pipe is not acceptable for pipelines greater than 15 ft. deep or less
than 4 ft. deep.
Fitting Type
Designation Pipe Fitting Specifications
Ductile iron, ANSI/AWWA C110, ASTM A746, with ANSI/AWW C104 cement mortar lining
XVI and sealcoat, fitting pattern consistent with drainage systems. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or
equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
XVII Porous concrete drainage fittings, ASTM C654, AASHTO M176.
Wrought copper solder cup type fittings, ANSI/ASME B16.22 or B16.18. Manufacturer to be ISO
XVIII
9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Ductile iron Type 2 or Type 5 NSF-61 cement lined and with NSF-61 sealcoat, ANSI/AWWA
C110/A21.10, or C153, AWWA C104/ANSI A21.4, Minimum Pressure Class 350. Flanged
applications shall additionally be AWWA C115 and with ductile iron flanges only (no cast iron
XIX
flanges). Sealcoat may be waived for locations where not required for chemical compatibility. Use
Type 5 cement for applications with elevated sulfates. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent)
and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Butt-weld Type 316L (or CF3M); ASTM A403 Class WP or AWWA C226 (that is also ASTM
A403), and ASTM A182 (for forged fittings), Schedule 10, except that Schedule 40 is required for
sizes 150 mm (6 in.) and larger. Fittings which have been welded (including during manufacture)
XX
shall be manufacturer descaled and passivated. Fitting interior surface finish shall in no case be less
than ASTM A480 grade 2B smooth and reflective. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent)
and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Ductile iron Type 2 or Type 5 double thickness NSF-61 cement lined and with NSF-61sealcoat
ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10,; AWWA C104/ANSI A21.4 Minimum Pressure Class 350, all
XXI materials NSF-61 compliant, AWWA C105 8-mil polyethylene encasement. Use Type 5 cement for
applications with elevated sulfates. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or
equivalent certified.
Stainless steel mechanical groove, Type 316L, Schedule 10 is minimum acceptable for sizes
up to 100 mm, Schedule 40 for sizes 150 mm (6 in.) and larger, ASTM A312, ASTM A403
WP or CR grade, or ASTM A774; or ASTM A778, ASTM A743, ASTM A744, subject to
NSF-61 conformance. Plain-end fittings are not acceptable. Fittings shall be selected for 2758
XXII
kPa (400 psig) or greater pressure rating. ASTM A774/ASTM A778 fittings which have been
welded (including during manufacture) shall be manufacturer descaled and passivated. Fitting
interior surface finish shall in no case be less than ASTM A480 grade 2B smooth and reflective.
Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Extra heavy domestic cast or forged, bronze; corrosion (including dezincification) resistant alloy;
threaded pressure fittings; ANSI B16.15; ASTM B584; ANSI B20.1; AWWA C800. Provide with
ASTM B456 chrome plating for finished locations. NSF-61 lead-free compliance required for water
systems. Manufacturer identification shall be permanently factory-marked on fittings. Lead-free
XXIII
plating (in lieu of lead-free construction) is unacceptable. Fittings additionally compatible with
ANSI B16.26 (flare type instead of NPT) may be used for accessible applications with Type K
copper tubing (only) where identified as a satisfactory joint type. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or
equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Fitting Type
Designation Pipe Fitting Specifications
Polyvinyldiene fluoride (PVDF) or pigmented stress crack resistant UV inhibited high density
polyethylene in compliance with PE-100RC (e.g., cell classification PE445584C) or better HDPE
with a PPI TN-44 chlorine rating of not less than CC3. 1034 kPa (150 psi) minimum working
pressure rating; NSF-61 or 21 CFR 177.1520 or 177.2510 certified, 21 CFR 178.3297 (for
XXIV
pigmented products unless NSF-61); designed for either IR fusion, butt fusion, socket fusion, or
sanitary style mechanical joint to match approved joint application as indicated. Pipe and fittings
shall be same manufacturer. 100% virgin material with no rework. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001
(or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Stainless steel sanitary fitting, Type 316L (or CF3M), not less than Schedule 5 equivalent wall
thickness, sanitary 120150 grit and electropolished interior finish, sanitary joint/clean joint
XXV design connections without pockets or crevices, ASTM A270, ASTM A450, ANSI B36.19M.
ASTM A269 may also be used with equivalent interior finish. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or
equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Pigmented polypropylene, infrared-butt fusion style, factory clean and oil-free for high purity
service and individually bagged and sealed. ASTM D4101; 21 CFR 177.1520; ASTM D638;
ASTM D2122; 100% virgin material with no rework; ISO 15494. Wall thickness not less than
SDR 11 (PN10); working pressure rating not less than 1,034 kPa (150 psig) and subject to system
maximum pressure (including surge) requirements. Pressure rating shall be in conformance with
ASTM D2837 hydrostatic design basis (not less than 50-year) and DIN 8077. Extractables/static
XXVI
leach values for TOC of assembled piping and joints shall not exceed 50,000 g/m 2 based on high
temperature (85C) testing per SEMI standard F57F40 (and should typically be below 40,000 g/
m 2). Only reputable manufacturers of high purity piping system products shall be specified and
selected materials shall not leach pigment or other contaminants into water system to such levels as
to compromise required water quality. Pipe and fittings shall match and be by same manufacturer.
Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Wrought copper solder cup type fittings, ANSI/ASME B16.22, factory cleaned and degreased for
oxygen service by the fitting manufacturer in accordance with ASTM G93 Level C or better, as
XXVII
well as CGA G4.1 and NFPA-99. Factory nitrogen charged and bagged maximum 20 fittings per
bag. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Malleable iron threaded fittings, ANSI B16.3. Fittings shall be 57 kg (125 lb minimum) for
pressures less than 517 kPa (75 psi) and 136 kg (300 lb) for over 517 kPa (75 psi). Steam
XXVIII
condensate shall be 136 kg (300 lb) for all pressures. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent)
and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Steel butt weld fittings, ANSI B16.9, ASTM A234, Grade WPB, long turn ells, ANSI B16.5 weld-
neck (preferred) or slip-on forged carbon steel ANSI B16.5 flanges, except slip-on not permitted for
steam applications above 103 kPa (15 psi), Weld-o-lets and thread-o-lets permitted only if branch
at least 2 pipe sizes smaller than main. Cast iron flanges are not acceptable. 136 kg (Class 300)
XXIX
flanges required for steam pressures above 100 kPa (15 psi), 68 kg (Class 150) below 100 kPa.
Fittings in accordance with system maximum working pressure ratings, ANSI B31.1 or B31.9 (as
applicable) and of wall thickness not less than system piping. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or
equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Fitting Type
Designation Pipe Fitting Specifications
Comply with requirement for pipe designation NN, (polyethylene fuel gas pipe and tubing) and to
match pipe. ASTM D3261 butt fusion type except ASTM D2683 socket fusion may be used for 50
XXX mm (2 in.) and smaller building service lines. ASTM D2513 and ASTM F2897. Pipe and fittings
shall be compatible. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent
certified.
Type 316L stainless steel socket weld fittings, ASTM A182, ANSI B16.11, wall thickness to match
pipe and required system pressure ratings, Class 3000 minimum. Type 304L may be used for
XXXI clean (not USP) steam unless otherwise required by application. Minimum cleanliness for high
cleanliness systems is ASTM G93 Level C. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO
14001 or equivalent certified.
Polyvinlydiene fluoride (PVDF), infrared butt-fusion style, 21 CFR 177.1520 or 177.2510, virgin
resin, ASTM D3222, ASTM D2837, ASTM D638, ASTM D2122, and ISO 10931 compliant,
fitting wall thickness shall be SDR 21 (PN 16) 1586 kPa (230 psi), except that SDR 33 (PN10)
working pressure rating not less than 1034 kPa (150 psig) may be used subject to system maxi-
mum pressure (including surge) requirements. Pressure rating shall be in conformance with ASTM
XXXII D2837 hydrostatic design basis (not less than 50 year) and DIN 8077. Fittings shall be factory
clean for high purity service and individually bagged and sealed. Extractables/static leach values of
assembled piping and joints shall be per SEMI standard F57- F40. PVDF materials compliant with
SEMI F57 standard are acceptable and PVDF listed to NSF-61 may also be used subject to con-
formance with these requirements. Fittings shall be compatible with and by same manufacturer as
piping. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
ASTM A536 ductile iron, cast-type grooved fitting. Alternatively, ASTM A47 malleable iron
cast-type grooved fittings may be used. Fitting wall thickness shall be not less than that of
system piping. Cast-iron flanges are not acceptable. The use of A53 or A106 fabricated fittings
XXXIII
is permitted by manufacturer only with seamless material, compliance with required pipe wall
thickness, and where cast ductile fittings are not readily available. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001
(or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Cast iron threaded fittings, ANSI B16.4. Fittings shall be 57 kg (125 lb. minimum) for less
than 517 kPa (75 psi) and 113 kg (250 lb minimum) for pressures above 517 kPa (75 psi).
XXXIV
Steam condensate shall be 113 kg (250 lb minimum) for all pressures. Cast iron flanges are not
acceptable. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Steel socket weld fittings, ASTM A105, ANSI B16.11, wall thickness to match pipe and required
XXXV system pressure ratings, Class 3000 minimum. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and
ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Wrought copper solder cup type fittings, ANSI/ASME B16.22 or wrought copper braze cup fittings
ANSI/ASME B16.50. Fittings shall be listed for a working pressure of at least 4,200 kPa (610 psi)
XXXVI
at 65C (140F) based on the annealed (post-braze) condition. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or
equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Schedule 40 drainage pattern PVDF, ASTM F1673, ASTM D3222, ASTM F1412. Manufacturer
XXXVII
to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Fitting Type
Designation Pipe Fitting Specifications
Double-ferrule type mechanical joint fitting as compatible and manufacturer approved for the
service application; Type 316L stainless steel or brass to match tubing system; manufactured from
barstock/forged material by a reputable manufacturer for this specialty joint type. Packaging, joint
precautions, cleaning, and purging as appropriate to required service purity; not less than factory
cleaned, degreased, and packaged. Sizes larger than 0.75 in. connected tubing outside diameter
XXXVIII and any fuel gas or non-inert fluid shall be stainless steel fittings only and used with stainless steel
tubing only. Manufactured components using this tubing connection (e.g., pneumatic components)
shall be with stainless steel (not copper) tubing only, and with required minimum tubing wall
thickness. Stainless steel fittings shall be heat code traceable. Single-ferrule configurations and
other standard ferrule compression type joints are unacceptable. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or
equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
ASTM C425 vitrified clay, drainage pattern fittings. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent)
XXXIX
and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Manufactured press-joint fitting of single press or double press joint design for use with a
manufacturer-approved electromechanical pressing tool and exterior fitting circumferential jaw
assembly to create a mechanical interlock between pipe and fitting with an elastomeric seal.
NSF-61 compliant Type 316L (or CF3M) ASTM A312/ASTM A403 stainless steel. Systems for
stainless steel shall either utilize standard ASTM A312 Schedule 10S stainless piping or shall
be suitable for both standard ASTM A312 Schedule 5S and Schedule 10S piping (regardless of
schedule used with initial installation). Schedule 10 minimum fitting wall thickness is required for
XL size 75100 mm (34 in.) Fitting interior surface finish shall in no case be less than ASTM A480
grade 2B smooth and reflective. Elastomer for lab/potable water systems shall be EPDM. Systems
requiring single-manufacturer/proprietary piping or tubing are NOT permitted. The joint system
shall meet performance requirements of IAPMO PS117, ICC ES-LC-1002, or FM approval guide
1920 and NSF-61. Assembled systems/joints shall be manufacturer-rated for a working pressure
of at least 2,068 kPa (300 psig) at a temperature to include the maximum working temperature;
and shall not fail at pressures below 112 Bar (1,625 psig). Systems requiring proprietary piping are
unacceptable. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Manufactured press-joint fitting of single press or double press joint design for use with a manu-
facturer-approved electromechanical pressing tool and exterior fitting circumferential jaw assembly
to create a mechanical interlock between pipe and fitting with an elastomeric seal. ANSI B16.51
wrought copper or lead-free copper alloy for copper systems. Fittings for copper systems 40
mm (1.5 in.) and smaller shall be rated for working pressure of at least 1380 kPa (200 psig) at a
XLI temperature to include the system maximum working temperature; and shall not fail at pressures
below 112 Bar (1,625 psig). Elastomer for lab/potable water systems shall be EPDM. Elastomer
for hydronic HVAC applications shall be FKM or EPDM. Systems requiring single-manufacturer/
proprietary piping are NOT permitted. The joint system shall meet performance requirements of
IAPMO PS117, ICC ES-LC-1002, or FM approval guide 1920 and NSF-61. Manufacturer to be
ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Pigmented polypropylene, infrared-butt fusion style, butt fusion, or socket fusion, ASTM D4101;
21 CFR 177.1520; ASTM D638; ASTM D2122; 100% virgin material with no rework; ISO
15494. Wall thickness not less than SDR 11 (PN10); working pressure rating not less than 1,034
XLII kPa (150 psig) and subject to system maximum pressure (including surge) requirements. Pressure
rating shall be in conformance with ASTM D2837 hydrostatic design basis (not less than 50-year)
and DIN 8077. Pipe and fittings shall match and be by same manufacturer. Manufacturer to be
ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Fitting Type
Designation Pipe Fitting Specifications
Schedule 80 PVC, ASTM D1784 Class 12454B, ASTM D2467 socket type solvent cement fitting.
XLIII
Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
ASME BPE compliant; ASTM A269; Type 316L stainless steel, ASTM A479 for bar stock;
seamless or weld-bead cold-worked to finish condition, ASME SF4 15 to 20 Ra (or better)
interior finish and electropolished, Minimum wall thickness shall not be less than connected
piping/tubing. Fabrication of subcomponents for tees shall be by pulling, drilling, or notching
the joining surfaces and pulsed TIG welding or GTAW orbital welding per ASME Section IX,
heat tint-free. Chemical composition per Table I of ASTM A269 or ASME BPE. Sulfur range of
316L tube to be 0.005 to 0.012% for seamless and 0.005 to 0.017% for ERW. Fittings factory
XLIV
faced and squared for automatic orbital welding. Factory cleaned, passivated, sealed, and double
bagged for UHP service. Post cleaning rinse water shall be 18 M, 0.1 m filters with maximum
TOC=25 ppb and maximum <6 CFU/100 mL. Purge gas for fabrication and drying shall be 0.005
micron or better filtered cryogenic argon or nitrogen, with less than 1 ppm moisture, oxygen, or
hydrocarbons. Fittings to be factory etched to include alloy and heat number or heat reference
code, manufacturer, and shall be traceable back to original mill test report. Manufacturer to be
ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) fitting, ultra-pure type factory clean and packaged; sanitary heat flare with
PFA or PVDF nut; or sanitary flare-thru fluoropolymer hose design; or sanitary tri-clamp style;
or sanitary fusion style fitting design; ASTM D3307; ASTM D2837 and not less than 1034 kPa
XLV
(150 psig); virgin resin, 21 CFR 177.1550 or SEMI F57-0301. Where suitable PFA fittings are not
readily available and subject to avoidance of deadleg; the use of an equivalent PVDF fitting may be
accepted. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Low alloy/micro-alloyed carbon steel, LMS 92-10 or LMS 97-20, axially swage elastic strain pre-
XLVI load type fitting, metal to metal seals, permanent non-separable type joint only. ANSI B31.1 pressure
and fatigue design compliant. Repair couplings or other fittings without stops are unacceptable.
Flanged ductile iron with 40 mils. Factory-applied, coal-tar free abrasion-resistant ceramapure epoxy
interior lining; ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10, or C153, AWWA C210; AWWA C115. Ductile iron
flanges only (no cast iron flanges). If piping is installed outdoors, exterior of fittings shall be provided
with factory primed finish and painted white epoxy or polysiloxane or otherwise protected from
XLVII
substantial temperature variations between piping interior and exterior. Standard asphaltic exterior
coating for indoor applications. Fittings shall be manufacturer prepared prior to lining/coating in
accordance with lining manufacturer recommendations by certified applicators and holiday tested.
Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Ductile iron ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10; Minimum Pressure Class 350; with factory-applied, 40
mils coal-tar free abrasion-resistant ceramapure epoxy interior lining; ANSI/AWWA C150, C151,
AWWA C210; asphalt or fusion bonded epoxy exterior coating. AWWA C105 8-mil polyethylene
XLVIII
encasement. Piping shall be manufacturer prepared prior to lining/coating in accordance with
lining manufacturer recommendations by certified applicators and holiday tested. Manufacturer to
be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or equivalent certified.
Type 316L stainless steel, axially swage elastic strain pre-load type fitting, ASTM A276 or ASTM
A479; metal to metal seals, permanent non-separable type joint only. ANSI B31.1 pressure and
fatigue design compliant. Repair couplings or other fittings without stops are unacceptable.
XLIX
Copper systems are not acceptable. Fitting shall be factory cleaned and packaged for oxygen
service to ASTM G93 Level C or better when used for any clean gas system application (including
lab gasses), however ASTM G93 Level D is acceptable for Lab compressed air.
Fitting Type
Designation Pipe Fitting Specifications
Type 316L double melt, VIM/VAR or AOD/VAR, ASTM A276, ASTM A479 and match the
referenced tubing requirements. Minimum wall thickness shall not be less than connected piping/
L tubing. Fabrication of subcomponents for tees shall be by pulling, drilling, or notching the joining
surfaces and pulsed TIG welding or GTAW orbital welding per ASME Section IX, heat tint-free.
All fitting welds shall be inboard helium leak tested to <1 x 10 -9 atm cc/sec.
High density polyethylene, ASTM D3311 drainage pattern; meet or exceed ASTM F1412; of stress
crack resistant grade and suitable for chemical waste and corrosive lab waste systems; meeting
PE100RC with Cell Class PE445584C (or better), wall thickness corresponding to PN10 (SDR11)
LI
or greater, with 2% carbon black UV inhibitor and in conformance with CSA B181.3. 100%
virgin material with no rework. Manufacturer to be ISO 9001 (or equivalent) and ISO 14001 or
equivalent certified.
Joint Type
Pipe Joint Specifications
Designation
BCuP 3, 4, or 5 brazed joints per Section IX ASME BPVC or ANSI/AWS B2.2. High silver soft
soldering (alloys that melt below 449C (840F) in lieu of brazing is not acceptable. No flux
permitted for copper to copper joints. AWS A5.8 Bag-5 may also be used for copper to brass or
L
bronze. Flux for copper to brass or bronze should be AWS A5.31 Class FB3-A or FB3-C. Lead free
copper alloy fittings and valves (including cast) that contain a component that melts below 327C
(620F), bismuth, or over 15% zinc shall not be brazed.
ASTM D2657 socket fusion to practice method 1 using compatible pipe and fittings. Welders
and method shall be qualified, and procedure in conformance with AWS B2.4 Specification for
Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification for Thermoplastics. Mechanical joints are
m
not permitted in waste or vent systems except for exposed or readily accessible traps and tailpiece
connections to plumbing fixtures. Intermixing of different plastics, including different resins of the
same broad plastic is not permitted.
Mechanical joint type with Teflon seal, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel shield over bead-to-bead
n
or bead-to-plain end where required.
ASTM F1290 electrofusion with stainless steel coil and compatible pipe and fittings. Welders
and method shall be qualified, and procedure in conformance with AWS B2.4 Specification for
Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification for Thermoplastics. Mechanical joints are
o
not permitted in waste or vent systems except for exposed or readily accessible traps and tailpiece
connections to plumbing fixtures. Intermixing of different plastics, including different resins of the
same broad plastic is not permitted.
ASTM D2657 butt fusion method using compatible pipe and fittings. Internal bead to be removed for
drainage applications. Welders and method shall be qualified, and procedure in conformance with
AWS B2.4 Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification for Thermoplastics.
p Mechanical joints are not permitted in waste or vent systems except for exposed or readily acces-
sible traps and tailpiece connections to plumbing fixtures. Intermixing of different plastics, including
different resins of the same broad plastic is not permitted. Comply with ASTM F3124 and general
procedure recommendations of the Plastic Pipe Institute as appropriate to the material.
To match pipe material. Joint shall maintain pressure rating at least equivalent to that of piping mate-
rial, shall be in conformance with piping system manufacturer recommendations, and subject to DTR
q
approval. Slip joints, temporary joints, and joints that are unsuitable for non-accessible application are
not typically acceptable, except for unconcealed non-pressurized non-hazardous applications.
Butt weld to ANSI B31.1 including requirements for welding procedure specifications and
r qualifications records in accordance with ASME Section IX and weld inspection in conformance
with ANSI B31.1.
s Tongue and groove, mortar sealed. Mortar type as required per site soils compatibility.
Joint Type
Pipe Joint Specifications
Designation
AWWA/ANSI C111/A21.11 compression gasketed joints or AWWA/ANSI C110/A21.10 Type MJ
mechanical joint. Where restraint is required, provide corrosion resistant epoxy coated ductile
iron wedge-action gland restraint except that restraining gasket may be used in place of wedge
action gland restraint where each piping joint is fully extended to engage the thrust restraint, and
following manufacturer/DIPRA, and AWWA C600 requirements. Restraint gaskets shall not be
used in lieu of wedge-restraints for lines subject to bi-directional flow (e.g., dual fed lines) unless
t thrust has otherwise been accommodated (e.g., arrangement of thrust blocks). Thrust blocks are
required for lines serving fire protection unless waived. All bolts, nuts, and accessories AWWA
C111/ANSI A21.1 compliant grade and type, Cor-Blue fluorocarbon coated low alloy high strength
steel bolts/nuts mildly cathodic to the pipe are required for underground applications. Restraint
shall be listed for piping working pressure (not calculated restraint force) of at least 3,102 kPa
(450 psig), comply with UL standard 194, ductile iron construction and shall not be flow-direction
dependent. NFPA-24 conformance additionally required for lines serving fire protection.
AWWA C-606 shoulder joint or AWWA C-606 cut groove method, each with NSF-61 listed gasket
u (typically halogenated butyl) comply with AWWA C600. Grooved couplings are not approved for
changing pipe sizes, use reducer fitting.
AWWA C110 or C115 flanged with AWWA C111 full face flange-tyte special gasket type EPDM,
for water systems, with not less than ASTM A307 grade B low carbon bolts, hardened washers, and
heavy nuts. Only ductile iron flanges (not cast iron) permitted. Manufacturer flanged or machine
threaded and machine tightened threaded or weld flange only. Plain-end pipe style flanges approved
v
only for final connections shall include any required lateral restraint. Comply with AWWA
C600. FKM may additionally be used but must be NSF-61 grade where used for potable water
applications. Strict compliance with tightening sequence and flange joint assembly instructions of
manufacturer is mandatory.
Sanitary mechanical joint (clean joint) such as sanitary ferrule or sanitary flare joints of crevice-free
design including manufactured proprietary sanitary/clean joint style connections, utilizing material
w
to match piping. Sanitary TC (tri-clamp) style joints are acceptable. Only approved elastomers that
are compatible with system disinfectants are permitted, refer to corresponding DRM chapter.
Mechanical groove joint, roll-groove method only (cut groove not permitted); with ductile iron,
galvanized ductile iron, or stainless steel coupling with coupling manufacturers approved bolts/nuts,
except Type 316 stainless steel couplings are required for high humidity areas including mechanical
rooms and any exterior piping. Stainless steel bolt and Type 651 Silicon Bronze heavy hex nuts are
x required for stainless couplings (to prevent galling). NSF-61 (cold and commercial hot) listed EPDM
gasket. Couplings shall be standard/heavy-duty (not light or quick-assembly) type, rigid style (not
flexible) and rated for working pressures of 2,758 kPa (400 psig) or greater with the applied pipe
wall thickness. Comply with AWWA C600. Grooved couplings are not approved for changing pipe
sizes, use reducer fitting.
Autogenous orbital weld in conformance with ASME BPE standard; welders qualified per ASME
Section IX. Provide post weld system passivation per ASTM A380 and ASTM A967, inclusive of
passivation test method suitable for potable/pharmaceutical water systems (e.g., test methods B, C,
or F as defined in ASTM A967 or water wetting and drying method per ASTM A380) performed
y
by a biopharmaceutical or semiconductor grade passivator and certification of process and results
compliance. Weld purge gas filtered and from a cryogenic source, .003 micron filtered argon if joining
a UHP system. Heat tint free. Joint precautions and quality assurance records as appropriate to system
purity. Post installation passivation not required for heat-tint free welds serving inert UHP gas.
Joint Type
Pipe Joint Specifications
Designation
Sanitary and crevice free orbital weld in conformance with ASME BPE standard; complete joint
penetration. Provide poste weld system passivation per ASTM A380 and ASTM A967, inclusive of
passivation test method suitable for potable water systems (e.g., test methods B, C, or F as defined
in ASTM A967 or water wetting and drying method per ASTM A380) and certification. Provide
z
post weld heat treatment where necessary to maintain corrosion resistance as appropriate to alloy
selection and method (e.g., where autogenous method with duplex alloy is used). Weld purge gas
filtered and from cryogenic source. Post-weld heat tint shall not exceed color 3 on AWS D18.1/AWS
D18.2 scale.
Infrared (IR) non-contact fusion (DVS 2207-6) using piping and fitting manufacture-approved
automatic fusion machine and compatible pipe and fittings. Welders and method shall be qualified
and procedure in conformance with AWS B2.4 Specification for Welding Procedure and
aa Performance Qualification for Thermoplastics and shall be performed only by persons competent
in high purity systems installation and following proper procedures to maintain system cleanliness.
Intermixing of different plastics, including different resins of the same broad plastic is not
permitted. Comply with ASTM F3124.
BCuP 3, 4, or 5 brazed joints without flux following not less than NFPA 99 Level 1 system standards
and ASSE series 6000 installation procedure, including clean, dry filtered nitrogen (or argon) purge,
oxygen analyzer, purge gas flow meter, and compliance with. Section IX ASME BPVC or ANSI/AWS
bb B2.2 (as modified per NFPA-99). A high quality particle filter shall be provided for purge gas. The
use of a cryogenic source of purge gas is recommended, but in no case may purge gas be less than NF
grade. Lead free copper alloy fittings and valves (including cast) that contain a component that melts
below 327C (620F), bismuth, or over 15% zinc shall not be brazed.
VCR metal gasket face-seal joint of stainless steel 316L VAR single melt (acceptable for inert
gas only) AOD/VAR or VIM/VAR and electropolished is otherwise required. VCO joints are
not acceptable. SEMI F20-0305; with stainless steel sealing gasket and gland; maximum 10 in.
cc Ra; clean and packaged to specified tubing/fitting standards and as appropriate to application.
Gaskets shall not be re-used. Side-load type retained gaskets for UHP applications. Entire assembly
(gland, body, nuts and seal) by a single manufacturer. Approved joint for final connections to
appurtenances and equipment only.
Double ferrule type high pressure engineered compression fitting; permitted only for use
with tubing sizes 40 mm (1.5 in.) and smaller. This connection type is permitted only at final
connections to equipment and accessible appurtenances. Sizes larger than 25 mm (1 in.) shall be
pre-swaged using manufacturer approved tools. Installers shall receive manufacturer authorized
dd
training for proper joint assembly. Sizes larger than 1 in. are not acceptable for clean fluid
systems due to required use of lubricants during assembly. Refer to footnotes and manufacturer
guidelines for additional tubing wall thickness restrictions. Fitting material and ferrule hardness as
appropriate for system tubing.
Grooved joint, ASTM A536 ductile iron coupling, ASTM A183, ASTM B633, and ASTM A183
bolts and nuts with minimum tensile strength of 110,000 psi, ASTM D2000 rubber gaskets selected
for service application. Roll groove method only, except that cut groove type shall be utilized for
applications where piping has interior lining or interior coating (including galvanized systems);
ee
and providing pipe wall thickness has been increased to not less than Schedule 80. Couplings shall
be standard/heavy-duty (not light or quick-assembly) type, rigid style (not flexible) and rated for
working pressures of 2,758 kPa (400 psig) or greater with the applied pipe wall thickness. Grooved
couplings are not approved for changing pipe sizes, use reducer fitting.
Joint Type
Pipe Joint Specifications
Designation
AWS A5.8 BAg-5 with AWS Class FB3-A or FB3-C flux, except Type BCuP 3, BCuP 4, or BCuP 5
5 may be used for copper to copper joints but with no flux Comply with Section IX ASME BPVC or
ANSI/AWS B2.2. High silver soft soldering (alloys that melt below 449C [840F] in lieu of brazing
ff is not acceptable. Flux for copper to brass or bronze should be AWS A5.31 Class FB3-A or FB3C.
Clean, dry (purity grade 4) filtered nitrogen (or argon) purge required for refrigeration applications.
Lead free copper alloy fittings and valves (including cast) that contain a component that melts below
327C (620F), bismuth, or over 15% zinc shall not be brazed.
gg Reserved/Not used
ASTM F2620 butt fusion only, except ASTM F2620 socket heat fusion may be used for building
service lines 50 mm (2 in.) and smaller provided the joint method is piping and fitting manufacturer
approved and qualified to 49 CFR Part 192.283. Mechanical joints not permitted Joints shall be
hh made in full compliance with 49 CFR Part 192. Static electricity shall be discharged. Fusion tools
shall be as approved by manufacturer. Fusion joints shall not be made to any piping that has been
liquid-hydrocarbon permeated. Electrofusion joints are not acceptable. Comply with ASTM F3124.
Welders additionally qualified per AWS B2.4
SAE 45-degree or AWWA C800 flare; joint made only with a tool providing automatic release to
prevent over-swaging. Application for liquid systems in sizes larger than 15 mm (0.5 in.) copper
ii tube size shall be AWWA C800. Single ferrule style standard compression joints are not acceptable,
except that a single readily accessible joint of single ferrule style may be used as part of or down-
stream of the at-fixture stop valve for tubing sizes 15 mm (0.5 in.) OD and smaller.
AWWA C111 Mechanical Joint for underground use. May also be used for final connections
to valves/equipment if provided with manufactured AWWA restraint. Additional glands or
jj
manufactured restraint and lateral restraint is required where used above ground. EPDM or
neoprene gaskets required for sanitary wastewater application. Comply with AWWA C-600.
Pressure-tight pipe clamp with integral stainless steel grip restraint for metallic piping, 304 or
kk 316 stainless steel band and trim, manufacturer approved for specific piping outside diameter and
application, Viton/FPM/FKM gasket. ASTM F1476, AWWA C227
Elastomeric compression gasketed joints are acceptable for exterior foundation and interior subsoil
LL (underslab) groundwater drainage piping only. ASTM C425, ASTM C412 for clay, ASTM D3139
for PVC.
Mechanically extruded branch outlet in copper tube, per ASTM F2014 and ANSI/ASME B31.9,
mm using manufacture approved tool and BCuP 3, BCuP 4 or BCuP 5 brazing alloy, for copper to
copper tubing only.
Joint Type
Pipe Joint Specifications
Designation
AWWA C220 complete joint penetration (CJP) full penetration circumferential butt welded
stainless steel with GTAW or TIG method; and filtered inert gas purge from a cryogenic source
during welding. Welds shall be free of heat tint, crevices, cracks, overlaps, or cold laps; absolute
minimization of field welding required. Welds shall have a smooth interior contour and root bead
crown (weld convexity) shall not exceed 1.58 mm (0.0625 in.), Undercut shall not exceed 0.0313 in.
or 10% wall thickness (whichever is less). Each welder to demonstrate proper welds, heat-tint free
and free of crevices. Matching (316L) filler metal alloy. Post weld descaling and passivation required
nn
per ASTM A380 and ASTM A967, inclusive of passivation test method suitable for potable water
systems (e.g., test methods B, C, or F as defined in ASTM A967 or water wetting and drying
method per ASTM A380) and certification. Comply with ASME Section IX and AWS B2.1, welds
performed only by experienced stainless steel piping welders. 100% weld inspection by a qualified
weld inspector required for field welds (radiographic or borescopic to ASTM A1015) and random
inspection for other welds. Orbital welding may also be used in conformance with ASME BPE
standards. Post-weld heat tint shall not exceed color 3 on AWS D18.1/AWS D18.2 scale.
Sanitary heat-flare joint made with fitting manufacturer approved heat based flare tool designed
for use with sanitary heat-flare joints. Alternatively tri-clamp style joints, mini-sanitary tri-clamp
joints, sanitary flare-thru hose, or sanitary heat fusion joints made by a qualified thermoplastics
oo welder using weld machines as approved by the fitting manufacturer for the piping and fitting
materials and not less than 1,034 kPa (150 psig) working pressure rating. Connection/joint quan-
tity shall be absolutely minimized. Compression style joints, push-connect joints (with or without
retaining bite -ring), and other non-sanitary joints or joints subject to blowout are unacceptable.
Butt weld to ANSI B31.1 or ANSI B31.9 as required by application; including requirements for
pp welding procedure specifications and qualifications records and weld inspection in conformance
with ANSI B31.9 or B31.1. ANSI B31.1 is required for all medium and high pressure steam.
Axial swage elastic strain preload type permanent non-separable joint of carbon steel or stainless
steel to match piping material and made by personnel certified in proper joint assembly. Copper/
brass fittings are not acceptable. Use on annealed tubing is not permitted. Joint shall not be placed
within 254 mm (10 in.) of a braze or weld or on any portion of annealed tubing except provide
qq greater distance as required by manufacturer. Joints and prefabricated materials shall be protected
from torsion. Tube wall thickness to outside diameter ratio shall in no case be less than 0.07. The
use of sealant in preparing joint ends is unacceptable. Design and installation (including but not
limited to support and thermal flexibility) to comply additionally with manufacturers ANSI/ASME
B31 design guide as applicable.
Socket weld to ANSI B31.9 or ANSI B31.1 as required by application: including requirements for
welding procedure specifications and qualifications records and weld inspection in conformance
with ANSI B31.9 or B31.1. ANSI B31.1 is required for all medium and high pressure steam.
rr
Maintain 1.6 mm (0.0625 in.) clearance between pipe end and socket shoulder. Socket welding is
not acceptable for corrosive fluids, or applications susceptible to stress crack induced corrosion or
excessive fatigue at joint sockets, or for any piping larger than 50 mm (2 in.).
Contents
6.4.0 Introduction
B. Fire Hazard Rating: Insulation materials approved J. Weather Exposure: Insulation exposed to weather
for use in NIH buildings shall have a fire hazard rating shall be covered with a metal jacket made from 0.1 mm
not to exceed 25 for flame spread and 50 for smoke devel- (0.016 in.) aluminum roll or sheet or 0.25 mm (0.01 in.)
oped. All materials shall be factory tested as an assembly. Type 304 stainless steel rolls or sheets.
Fire ratings shall be determined by the standard method
K. Continuous Insulation Parameters: Insulation shall
of testing for surface-burning characteristics of building
be continuous at all hangers, hanger rods, supports,
materials, ASTM E84, or NFPA Standard 255.
sleeves, and openings. Vapor seal shall be provided for
C. Material Certification: Insulation approved for use all cold surfaces and shall be continuous. Where sup-
shall have a UL label or a certified test report from an port occurs below the insulation surface, the thickness
approved testing laboratory. shall be maintained over the support and extend suf-
ficiently beyond the support to prevent condensation.
D. Insulation Installation: Insulation installation Insulation shall be sealed at all termination points.
shall be in accordance with the National Commercial
& Industrial Insulation Standards published by L. Expansion/Contraction: All insulation shall be
the Midwest Insulation Contractors Association. arranged to permit expansion and contraction of sys-
Installation of all insulation systems shall be installed tems without causing damage to the insulation or
by skilled mechanics with certification of successful surface.
apprenticeship program or another craft training pro-
M. Pipe Saddles/Welded Standoff: High-density pipe
gram certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
saddle or welded pipe standoff shall be provided at all
Apprenticeship and Training.
points of pipe support.
E. Timing of Insulation: The A/E shall include in the
N. Valves: Valves shall be insulated up to and includ-
design documents instructions to the contractor not to
ing bonnet, except for cold water valves, which shall be
insulate the specified systems until all necessary tests
insulated over packing nut so as to permit removal for
have been successfully conducted for each component
adjustment and repacking.
and insulated surfaces have been thoroughly cleaned
and are in a dry state.
R. Custom-Made Jacket: Valves and specialties that are 10. Vibration-isolating connection
75 mm (3 in.) and larger shall be insulated with custom- 11. Sensor and miscellaneous devices such as duct-
made durable jacket with straps and buckles to allow mounted smoke detectors
frequent removal and reinstallation without damaging
the jacket.
Minimum
Material Jacket Vapor Barrier
Service (1, 6, 7, 8) Specification Type Class (2, 3) Required (10)
Sanitary and Clear Water Mineral Fiber
Waste Lines and Drain (Fiberglass and ASTM C547 I 1 ASJ Yes
Receptors Receiving Mineral Wool)
Cold Condensate, Ice
Machine, and Similar
Wastes from Drain
Inlet Source to Vertical Flex Elastomeric
ASTM C 534 I None No
Waste Stack or Point of Cellr
Adequate Temperature
Dilution
Mineral Fiber
Above-ground (Fiberglass and ASTM C547 I 1 ASJ Yes
Horizontal and Vertical Mineral Wool)
Storm Drain Piping and
Drain Receptor. Flex Elastomeric
ASTM C 534 I None No
Cellr
Above-ground Mineral Fiber
Horizontal Overflow (Fiberglass and ASTM C547 I 1 ASJ Yes
Storm Drainage Mineral Wool)
(Overflow Roof Drain)
Piping and Drain Flex Elastomeric
Receptor. Vertical Piping ASTM C 534 I None No
Cellr
Need Not be Insulated.
Mineral Fiber
Factory Applied
A/C and Cold (Fiberglass and ASTM C547 I 1 Yes
ASJ
Condensate Drain Mineral Wool)
Located Inside Bldg. Flex Elastomeric
ASTM C 534 I None No
Cellr
Medium Temperature
Hot Water, Low Pressure Mineral Fiber
Steam and Condensate (Fiberglass and ASTM C 547 I 1 ASJ No
Steam Relief Vents 94C Mineral Wool)
(201F) to 176C (349F)
Mineral Fiber Metal or ASJ
ASTM C 547
(Mineral Wool II 1 dependent on No
high temp
High Temperature Hot Only) temperature
Water and Medium and Fabric rein-
Calcium Silicate
High Pressure Steam ASTM C 533 I, II forced, 8 oz. No
(4)
and Condensate 177C min. over ASJ
(350F) and Higher Fabric rein-
Perlite ASTM C 610 I forced, 8 oz. No
min. over ASJ
Fabric rein-
Calcium Silicate ASTM C 533 I, II forced, 8 oz. No
min. over ASJ
Diesel Engine Exhaust
Mineral Fiber Metal or ASJ
ASTM C 547
(Mineral Wool II 1 dependent on No
high temp
Only) temperature
Heating Hot Water Calcium Silicate 75 (3) 75 (3) 100 (4) 100 (4) N/A
Cellular Glass 75 (3) 75 (3) 100 (4) 100 (4) N/A
Outdoor
Polyisocyanurate 25 (1) 50 (2) 50 (2) 62 (2.5) 62 (2.5)
Supply & Return
Faced Phenolic
Max 121C (250F) 25 (1) 38 (1.5) 38 (1.5) 50 (2) 50 (2)
Foam
Cold Domestic, Non-
Mineral Fiber
Potable, and Laboratory 25 (1) 25 (1) 25 (1) 25 (1) 25 (1)
Note 3
Water Piping Indoor
Indoor Cold Waste/ Mineral Fiber
13 (0.5) 25 (1) 25 (1) 25 (1) 25 (1)
Storm/Clear Water Note 3
Waste/Overflow/Cold
Condensate Lines and Flex Elas Cellr 19 (0.75) 19 (0.75) 19 (0.75) 19 (0.75) N/A
Drain Receptor.
Hot Domestic, Non-
Potable, Tempered, and
Mineral Fiber
Hot Water Circulation 25 (1) 25 (1) 25 (1) 38 (1.5) 38 (1.5)
Note 3
Piping Max 60C
(140F)
Notes:
1. Insulation thicknesses are minimum 2. 13 mm (0.5 in.) thick insulation acceptable for
requirements. Comply with current energy domestic/lab plumbing water drops within interior
conservation and code requirements, and as partitions where necessary to maintain partition
necessary to protect from unacceptable heat wall thickness.
transfer, condensation, freezing, etc.
3. Mineral Fiber represents Fiberglass and Mineral
Wool. Steam vent piping below 2 m (6.56 ft.) shall
be insulated for burn protection with 50 mm (2 in.)
mineral fiber insulation.
a
Other insulation materials may be acceptable. The A/E shall submit a variance request for approval.
Other insulation materials may be acceptable. The A/E shall submit a variance request for approval.
a
a
Other insulation materials may be acceptable. The A/E shall submit a variance request for approval.
Contents
6.5.0 Introduction
Considerations
A. Cooperation between Disciplines: Proper acoustical 6.5.2.1 Noise and Vibration
design requires broad engineering cooperation in the In/Near Small Animal Rooms
areas of architecture, structural engineering, mechani- A. Animal Distress: Excessive noise is recognized as a
cal engineering, electrical engineering, and acoustics. source of distress in animals. Excessive or sudden high-
frequency noise (ratio between background and peak
B. Mechanical System/Equipment: The design team
levels is above 30 dB) due to construction or repair activ-
shall work together to determine the mechanical system-
ity near small animal rooms should be avoided. Vibration
type and preliminary mechanical equipment selection
from construction equipment such as the operation of a
to allow for preliminary noise and vibration analysis.
jackhammer should also be avoided. Utilities and certain
Mechanical room sizing is critical to ensure equipment
scientific equipment generate noise outside of the human
is not squeezed into restricted space. Restricted space
hearing and may also impact research.
may also force a mechanical engineer into selecting
small and inefficient equipment. Similar problems occur
at duct shafts where small duct shafts result in under- Rationale: Excessive noise interferes with and
sized ducts having excessive duct velocities. affects the auditory system, maternal and fetal
health, and sleep levels and patterns of small
C. Space Planning: Space planning is also critical to
animals, causing subclinical pathology that
ensure noisy equipment is located as far as possible
can change the outcome of research studies.
from critical noise and vibration sensitive areas and
Deleterious subclinical effects of noise on lab
proper wall, slab construction, and insulation measures
animals include stress response and immune
are provided.
system anomalies. Excessive vibration levels
D. Noise and Vibration Control Design: Noise and may cause more adverse effects in small animals
vibration control design shall begin early during the because resonance frequencies of small animals
design process and be integrated into the overall build- may match closely those of certain types of
ing design. equipment such as jackhammers. Rodents are
nocturnal and thus sleep during the day when
construction noise will affect them most.
Rationale: Often HVAC acoustical design features
such as duct silencers and vibration isolators are
added late in the construction document phase
after the mechanical engineer has completed the
HVAC design and long after the architect has sited
the equipment and the structural engineer has
6.5.3 Outdoor Noise Control
completed the structural system. This results in A. Compliance: Outdoor and environmental noise shall
poor integrated design and problematic acoustics comply with federal and county regulations, ordinances,
and vibrations. municipal codes, and mandates on community noise.
B. Outdoor Equipment: Noise from cooling towers, Table 6.5.2 Required Maximum Noise Levels
exhaust fans, air-cooled chillers, water-cooled chillers,
Maximum
roof-top HVAC equipment, and similar equipment shall
Area Noise Level NC
be evaluated to meet property boundary noise restric-
tions and determine if acoustical treatment is required. Auditoriums 2025
Conference rooms, lecture rooms 2535
Executive offices 3035
Classrooms 3035
6.5.4 Ductwork and Fan
Open-plan officesc 3545
Sound Control
Dining rooms and lobbies 40
A. HVAC Design: The HVAC design shall include all
systems necessary to control noise transmitted through Central sterile food service/
45
the ductwork system. Proper equipment and device serving
selection, lower duct velocities, in-duct attenuation, Kitchen, lockers, warehouse, and
breakout attenuation, and self-noise generated from 50
shops
devices should be considered when selecting, sizing, and
Corridors and support areas 45
routing of ductwork systems.
Operating roomsc 4045
Rationale: Most HVAC noise complaints are Research laboratories c
4045
associated with selecting and integrating fans
Research animal housing
properly with the air-distribution system. 45
areasa,b,c,d
Silencer pressure drop shall not exceed 87 Pa (0.35 in. I. Airflow Obstructions: Avoid placing duct fittings
w.g.). Where required provide stainless steel silencers on or other airflow obstructions close to the fan inlet or
ARFs, fume hoods, ducted BSCs, and biocontainment discharge.
exhausts.
J. Terminal Unit Sound Attenuation: Silencers used
in terminal unit application shall be based on the esti-
Rationale: Silencer use adds to the capital cost of mated procedure in accordance with the ASHRAE
projects and increases energy consumption from Standard 885 (Procedure for Estimating Occupied
the added pressure drop through the silencer. Space Sound Levels in the Application of Air Terminals
Placement of silencers in the proximity of the fans and Air Outlets).
and duct fittings or excessive duct velocities may
cause excessive self-noise and high-pressure drop.
2. Piping Connected to Vibration-Isolated loaded to not more than 345 Pa (50 psi). Separate isola-
Machinery: For a distance of 15 m (50 ft.) or tion pads with 6 mm (0.25 in.) steel plate.
50 pipe diameters, whichever is greater
E. No Rigid Connections: There shall be no rigid con-
3. Steam Pressure-Reducing Valves: For connected nections between the building and the vibration isola-
piping with a distance of 15 m (50 ft.) or 50 tion system and its components.
pipe diameters, whichever is greater
F. Misalignments Between Pipes: Using vibration isola-
4. Condenser Water: For the full length of the tion to correct misalignments between pipes is not allowed.
piping. Implementation of this requirement is
optional for condenser water for cold rooms, G. Thermal/Mechanical Movement: Provide eye-bolts
small computer room units, and small process or swivel joints for pipe hangers to permit pipe thermal
chillers when motors are smaller than 7.5 kW or mechanical movement without angular misalignment
(10 hp) of a hanger vibration isolator.
5. Chilled and Hot Water Piping: For risers H. Pressure Fluctuation: Provide isolating hangers and
from pumps and for the first 6 m (20 ft.) of supports at modulating, pressure-reducing, or control
the branch connection of the main supply and valves that induce pressure fluctuation.
return piping at each floor. Implementation of I. Spring Thrust Restraint: Provide spring thrust
this requirement is optional on systems coming restraint on all duct flexible connectors where they may
from floor-mounted pumps on vibration isola- be subject to greater than 500 Pa (2 in.) static pressure.
tors with flex connectors.
J. Vibration-Isolation Criteria: All piping and duct-
B. Water and Steam Distribution Piping: Resiliently sup- work should be vibration isolated including flexible con-
port piping with combination spring and neoprene isola- nections where rigid elements cross from non-sensitive
tion hangers. Provide spring elements with 16 mm (0.625 to vibration-sensitive spaces. Vibration-sensitive areas
in.) static deflection; install the hanger with spacing so include electron microscope rooms, microsurgery, and
that the first harmonic natural frequency is not less than certain imaging rooms.
360 Hz. Provide double-deflection neoprene elements.
Ensure a deflection equal to the equipment-isolation
static deflection for the first two isolation hangers, from
any rotating equipment, and for piping systems smaller
than 100 mm (4 in.). For the first four piping isolation 6.5.7 Machinery Vibration
hanger supports, from rotating equipment, for piping sys-
tems 100 mm (4 in.) and larger use resilient hanger-rod
Criteria
isolators at a fixed elevation regardless of load changes. A. Selection Criteria: Selection of proper vibration iso-
Incorporate an adjustable preloading device to transfer lation for machinery is critical for controlling structure-
the load to the spring element within the hanger mount- borne sound transmission. The design of proper vibration
ing after the piping system has been filled with water. isolation types for each piece of equipment depends on
the equipment type, nature of vibration, type of drive,
C. Pipe Risers: Provide pipe-riser supports with bearing rpm, horsepower, mass, location of equipment relative to
plates and two layers of 6 mm (0.25 in.) thick ribbed or vibration-sensitive areas, and mass of the building struc-
waffled neoprene pads which shall not be loaded more ture supporting the isolated equipment, etc.
than 345 Pa (50 psi). Separate isolation pads with 6 mm
(0.25 in.)steel plates. Weld pipe riser clamps at anchor B. Vibration isolator types and minimum static deflec-
points to anchor mountings, which shall be rigidly fas- tion shall follow the requirements listed in Table 6.5.7,
tened to the steel framing. Vibration Isolator Types and Minimum Static Deflection
for Machinery. The A/E shall edit these requirements to
D. Duct Risers: Provide duct-riser supports within accommodate specific projects. Isolator deflections shall
shafts with suitable bearings plates and two layers of be equal to or greater than the static deflection of the
6 mm (0.25 in.) thick ribbed or waffled neoprene pads vibration isolators provided for connected machinery.
Table 6.5.7 Vibration Isolator Types and Minimum Static Deflection for Machinery
Column Spacinga
Slab on-grade and 9.112 meters 12.115 meters
09 meters (030 ft.) (3140 ft.) (4150 ft.)
Isolator MSDb Isolator MSDb Isolator MSDb
Equipment Typec mm (in.) Typec mm (in.) Typec mm (in.)
Absorption refrigeration machines S-R 25 (1) S-R 45 (1.75) S-R 45 (1.75)
Centrifugal chillers or heat pumps
Hermetic type S-R 45 (1.75) S-R 45 (1.75) S-R 69 (2.75)
Open type S -I 45 (1.75) S-I 45 (1.75) S-I 69 (2.75)
Reciprocating air/refrig compressors
500 750 rpm S-R 45 (1.75) S-R 69 (2.75) S-R 94 (3.75)
751 rpm and up S-R 45 (1.75) S-R 69 (2.75) S-R 94 (3.75)
Reciprocating chillers or heat pumps
500750 rpm S-R 45 (1.75) S-R 62 (2.5) S-R 88 (3.5)
751 rpm and up S-R 38 (1.5) S-R 62 (2.5) S-R 88 (3.5)
Packaged boilers S 25 (1) S 45 (1.75) S-R 69 (2.75)
Closed coupled pumps
Up to 3.7 kW (5 hp) S-I 25 (1) S-I 45 (1.75) S-I 45 (1.75)
5.6 kW (7.5 hp) and larger S-I 45 (1.75) S-I 45 (1.75) S-I 69 (2.75)
Base mounted pumps
Up to 44.7 kW (60 hp) S-I 45 (1.75) S-I 45 (1.75) S-I 69 (2.75)
5.9 kW (75 hp) and larger S-I 69 (2.75) S-I 69 (2.75) S-I 94 (3.75)
S with deflections specified for centrifugal blowers when springs are
Cooling towers and evaporative supported on beams. Use deflection listed for column supported floors
condensers with up to 9 m (30 ft.) column spacing when springs are located on
columns or bearing walls.
Factory-assembled air handling
equipment AH, AC, and HV unitsd
Suspended unitsd
Up to 3.7 kW (5 hp) H 25 (1) H 25 (1) H 25 (1)
5.6 kW (7.5 hp) and up to 29.8 kW
H 45 (1.75) H 45 (1.75) H 45 (1.75)
(40 hp) Up to 400 rpm
5.6 kW (7.5 hp) and up to 29.8 kW
H 25 (1) H 45 (1.75) H 69 (2.75)
(40 hp) Over 400 rpm
37.3 kW (50 hp) and larger H 45 (1.75) H 69 (2.75) H 88 (3.5)
Floor-mounted units d
Column Spacinga
Slab on-grade and 9.112 meters 12.115 meters
09 meters (030 ft.) (3140 ft.) (4150 ft.)
Isolator MSDb Isolator MSDb Isolator MSDb
Equipment Typec mm (in.) Typec mm (in.) Typec mm (in.)
Centrifugal blowersd
175224 rpm S-R 119 (4.7) S-R 119 (4.7) S-R 119 (4.7)
225299 rpm S-R 94 (3.75) S-R 94 (3.75) S-R 94 (3.75)
300374 rpm S-R 69 (2.75) S-R 94 (3.75) S-R 94 (3.75)
75499 rpm S-R 69 (2.75) S-R 88 (3.5) S-R 94 (3.75)
500 rpm and higher S-R 45 (1.75) S-R 69 (2.75) S-R 94 (3.75)
Utility fansd
H with deflections specified for centrifugal blowers, but not to exceed 69
Suspended
mm (2.75 in.)
S-R with deflections specified for centrifugal blowers, but not to exceed
Floor-mounted
69 mm (2.75 in.)
Internal combustion engines and engine
S 38 (1.5) S 62 (2.5) S 88 (3.5)
driven equipment 750 rpm and over
Electrical transformers
Suspended units H 25 (1) H 25 (1) H 25 (1)
Floor-mounted units NP 10 (0.35) NP 10 (0.35) NP 10 (0.35)
Abbreviations: MSD = Minimum Static Deflection; cushioned horizontal stops. Protected spring isola-
AH = Air Handling; AC = Air Conditioning; tors SX may be substituted wherever S is specified
HV = Heating and Ventilating and meets all requirements.
Table applies to 100200 mm (48 in.) thick slab
a d
Fans:
on-grade or column supported. This table applies to 1. When fan motors are 44.7 kW (60 hp) or larger,
non-seismic zones. use the deflection requirements for the next
These are certifiable minimum static deflections, not
b
wider column spacing. Except for equipment
manufacturers nominal deflections. slab on-grade, a minimum of 62 mm (2.5 in.)
c
Equipment vibration isolation schedule designations. deflection shall be used unless larger deflections
Hyphenated designations are combinations of the are specified in the centrifugal blower table.
following: 2. Provide sway brace isolators for tubular cen-
H = Spring isolator hangers for suspended equipment trifugal and axial fans when the fan pressure
and piping. Where required, provide with adjustable exceeds 1 kPa (4 in. w.g.).
preloading devices. 3. Provide concrete inertia bases I in lieu of
I = Concrete inertia bases with steel forms welded structural steel rails R, when the fan
pressure exceeds 1 kPa (4 in. w.g.).
NP = Neoprene pads
4. Provide thrust restraints to eliminate the need
R = Welded structural steel rail for equipment mounts for or reduce the magnitude of inertia mass
S = Freestanding spring isolators (floor-mounted when the mass is only used to reduce the dis-
equipment) placement effects of the thrust. Provide thrust
SX = Protected/housed freestanding spring isola- restraints for high-static pressure fans, over
tors with adjustable cushioned vertical stops and 1.5 kPa (6 in. w.g.) static pressure, and other
thrust-producing machinery.
Contents
6.6.10 Autoclaves
permanent sealant. Spray foam is not acceptable. Refer 6.6.3 Ventilation Rates in
to Appendix L, Sealant Table.
BSL-3 Laboratories
J. Insulation: Insulation shall terminate at the back
BSL-3 laboratories shall be provided with a minimum
face of the penetrated material prior to the containment
of 6 air changes per hour (ACH). This minimum air
barrier, unless rigid, easily cleanable, non-porous, and
flow shall be maintained at all times, including unoccu-
chemically compatible preapproved insulation systems
pied periods. Air ventilation system shall be designed to
are utilized.
remove all heat dissipated by all equipment within the
lab space and all exhaust air requirements from fume
Rationale: Conventional piping system insulation hoods, BSCs, sterilizers, etc.
does not meet stringent DRM requirements.
Continuous insulation through barrier
penetrations requires use of rigid insulation
systems (such as pre-insulated piping systems
utilizing solid plastic or metal encasement) to
6.6.4 Ventilation Rates in
achieve a satisfactory durable seal. ABSL-3 Laboratories
Ventilation rates in animal facilities are typically 10
K. Ductwork Leak Testing: Ductwork on the exhaust to 15 outdoor ACH. Refer to Section 6.1, Heating,
side between containment zone/HEPA filter and the Ventilation, and Air Conditioning Design for additional
supply side between isolation damper and the room requirements. Ventilation rates shall be reviewed and
outlet shall be tested in accordance with ASME N510, approved by the DTR and DOHS.
Testing of Nuclear Air Treatment Acceptance crite-
ria leakage rate of not greater than 0.1% of volume at
1,000 Pa (4 in. w.g.). Rationale: BSL-3 and ABSL-3 ventilation rates
have been established to provide for the safe
and effective removal of potential airborne
contaminants from the laboratory air space,
and for odor control and removal of
6.6.2 Supply Air Systems animal dander.
A. Dedicated Supply Air Systems: BSL-3 laboratory and
ABSL-3 spaces shall be provided with dedicated supply
air systems, which do not serve any other laboratory
spaces outside the containment laboratory. Refer to
Chapter 7, Building Automation Systems for detailed 6.6.5 Relative Room
control requirements and pressure control requirements.
Pressurization
B. Supply Ductwork materials: All supply ductwork Airflow in BSL-3 and ABSL-3 biocontainment facilities
downstream of the isolation damper shall be con- shall be designed based on a risk assessment to move
structed of welded stainless steel to provide the duct from areas designated as less biohazardous to areas with
leak tightness. Minimum gauge of stainless steel duct a greater biohazard risk. The system shall be designed
shall be 18G. to maintain a negative pressure differential of 12.5 Pa
(0.05 in. w.g.) between each pressure zone. Where mul-
C. Independent Supply Air Terminal: To the extent
tiple containment zones exist within the suite, sequen-
possible, each room shall be served by an independent
tially more negative pressure must be established so
supply air terminal to maintain pressure differential
that more contaminated rooms are placed at negative
within each room. Supply terminals shall be lab
pressure to less contaminated rooms. Monitoring and
quality industrial grade. Terminals can be pressure-
control devices shall be provided to ensure that the pres-
independent venturi type or ultra low leakage damper
sure differential is maintained. Visual readout devices,
style shut-off boxes.
such as magnehelic gauges or digital display monitors,
and alarm devices shall be provided at the entry to the B. Exhaust Ductwork Materials: All exhaust ductwork
containment space, in anterooms, and at entry to the shall be welded stainless steel and gastight to allow for
individual rooms within the containment suite. decontamination. Stainless steel shall be of a minimum
18 gauge.
Rationale: An area that is less biohazardous is not C. Independent Exhaust Air Terminal: To the extent
necessarily clean. Materials being manipulated may possible, each room shall be served by its independent
be classified differentially but be just as hazardous. exhaust air terminal. Exhaust terminals shall be lab
Minimum differential pressure creates an inward quality industrial grade. They can be pressure-indepen-
flow of air from outside of containment to inside dent venturi type or ultra low leakage damper style shut-
of containment. Visual and alarm devices are off boxes. All internal exposed areas of the exhaust ter-
designed to notify users of any loss in pressure minals shall be stainless steel or epoxy coated to handle
and/or loss of containment. the vaporized decontaminated gases.
6.6.6 Anterooms
Anterooms shall be located between the BSL-3/ABSL-3
and the clean corridor outside the biocontainment space.
These anterooms are typically negative to the clean cor- 6.6.8 Air Filtration
ridor and positive to the BSL-3/ABSL-3 spaces keeping
airborne contaminants in the biocontainment room. A. Supply Air: Supply air serving BSL-3 laboratories
and ABSL-3 animal facilities is not required to be HEPA
filtered, unless specifically required per the program. If
Rationale: Anterooms provide a buffer between HEPA filtration is requested on supply air, it shall be
the clean corridor and the biocontainment room. reviewed by the DTR and the DOHS.
procedures. HEPA filters shall be zoned so that shut B. Isolation Damper Locations: Bubble-tight isolation
downs can be coordinated. Provide redundant filter dampers shall be provided between the room supply air
banks to allow replacement of filters during operation. terminal, the room supply air diffuser, and between the
room exhaust grille and room exhaust air terminal.
Fixed equipment shall be properly anchored to struc- 2. Construction documents for BSL-3 and
ture. Such analysis and accommodation shall be per- ABSL-3 facilities shall include all require-
formed by qualified structural and mechanical engi- ments to comply with and to obtain the BSL-3
neers in coordination with the NIH and the DOHS. laboratory certification NIH Biosafety Level
3 Laboratory Certification Requirements
(http://orf.od.nih.gov/PoliciesAndGuidelines/
Bioenvironmental/Documents/
BSL3CertificationGuidelinesFINAL_508.pdf).
6.6.17 HVAC Plans
3. The testing of ventilation system and controls
All design phases of the construction documents shall
shall follow the American National Standard
be reviewed and approved by the DTR and the DOHS.
Institute (ANSI) Standard Z9.14 Testing and
Documents shall include room pressurization diagrams,
Performance Verification Methodologies for
leakage/pressure calculations, and location of exhaust
Ventilation Systems for Biosafety Level 3
equipment, air balance drawings, control drawings,
(BSL-3) and Animal Biosafety Level 3 (ABSL-
sequences of operation including failure sequences, and
3) Facilities. These include supply and exhaust
commissioning and testing documentation.
air systems, directional air flow, biological
safety cabinet, air filtration, exhaust stacks, fan
failure scenarios, canopy hoods and specific
ABSL-3 requirements.
6.6.18 Inspection, Testing, 4. Refer to DRM Chapter 7, Building Automation
Validation, and Certification Systems for information on BAS, controls, and
Conformance with the requirements of this chapter failure testing scenarios for HVAC systems
shall be confirmed in the installation of HVAC systems serving BSL-3 and ABSL-3 facilities.
serving BSL-3 and ABSL-3 containment. Systems shall 5. NIH requires a thirty day endurance period
be inspected throughout installation to ensure confor- after beneficial occupancy for BSL-3 and
mance with the requirements of the DRM. In addi- ABSL-3 facilities.
tion, the following specific issues shall be addressed,
inspected and reviewed as part of quality control, test-
ing, and commissioning plans. The following items Rationale: Once beneficial occupancy is received,
shall be reviewed and inspected within the HVAC disci- laboratory moveable equipment (freezers,
pline. The list is not intended to identify commissioning refrigerators, incubators, large centrifuges etc.) are
requirements or to be all inclusive. moved into the facility. Laboratory drills, SOPs
training, etc. is developed. During this period
1. Ensure all required standby power has been the mechanical and electrical systems should run
provided and proper response to integrated without interruption.
systems testing.
Contents:
7.1.0 Introduction 7.1.11 Shop Drawings and Record
Document Submittals
7.1.1 General Requirements
7.1.11.1 Control System Architecture
7.1.2 BAS Overview
7.1.11.2 Control Schematics
7.1.3 BAS Growth
7.1.11.3 Control Sequence of Operations
7.1.4 Renovation and Rehabilitation
7.1.11.4 Product Data
7.1.5 Codes, Standards and References
7.1.11.5 Detailed Wiring Diagrams
7.1.6 Standardization
7.1.11.6 Valve Schedules
7.1.7 Access Requirements
7.1.11.7 Points List
7.1.8 Point-Naming Conventions
7.1.11.8 Zone Airflow Control Schedules
7.1.9 Design Planning and Coordination
7.1.11.9 Floor Plans
7.1.10 Design Document Submittal
7.1.11.10 Sample Graphics
7.1.10.1 Control System Design
7.1.11.11 Response-Time Requirements
7.1.10.2 Design Specifications and Drawings
7.1.11.12 Operation and Maintenance Manuals
7.1.10.3 Design Control Schematics
7.1.11.13 Damper Schedule
6. Required user accounts and levels of access 6. Valve schedules (provided by the controls
contractor)
7. Routing of alarms and notifications
7. Indicate control elements on the applicable disci-
8. Compatibility issues between new and existing pline design floor plans (this refers to panel loca-
systems, and level of integration between exist- tions, operator interface locations, thermostats,
ing and new systems temperature and humidity sensors whether in
the room or in the return/exhaust duct, room
differential-pressure monitors, duct static-pres-
sure sensors, motor-operated dampers, auto-
mated valves, etc.).
7.1.10 Design Document
Submittal 7.1.10.2 Design Specifications and
Because of the unique nature of BAS construction, the Drawings
A/E should work closely with controls contractors and
A. Inclusions: Specifications and drawings shall:
vendors to produce the design document at the design
phase. Contractors shall produce site- and system-spe- 1. Detail the minimum quality of all hardware
cific shop drawings and record documents during the commensurate with the DRM.
construction phase. This section details the require-
ments at the design submittal phase. The requirements 2. Define the control system documentation
for the shop drawings and record documents submit- required commensurate with the DRM.
tal are addressed in Section 7.1.11, Shop Drawings and
3. Define the level of controller allowed for each
Record Document Submittals. Some of the require-
specific control application on the project along
ments overlap with each other.
with the stand-alone functionality required.
2. Schematic drawings indicating the systems/ 2. Responsibility for mounting of terminal control-
zones and all control system input and output lers shall be indicated.
(I/O) and an indication on these points if they
are digital or analog data points
5. Coordinate the limits of work and for con- N. System Interfaces: Detail and coordinate interfaces
nection of the BAS to the existing supervisory to other systems such as lighting-control systems,
network. energy systems, and power-monitoring systems.
requirements to maintain full-control functions in the 6. Bill of materials listing all devices (provided by
event of a main power outage. the controls contractor)
V. Control Panels: Where the operation of two or more 7. Device symbols definitions
pieces of equipment must be coordinated, e.g., supply
and exhaust fans in a BSL-3 lab, they should be con- 8. Basic motor starter and interface wiring
trolled from the same panel. If this is not possible, hard- schematics
wired interlocks may be necessary. Communication C. Control Parameters: The locations of flow meters
between panels across the network is not always fast shall be shown on the piping or duct drawings. Remote
enough to provide adequate results. static-pressure sensors for capacity control of air and
W. Standalone Controllers: Clearly outline the require- water systems shall also be shown on the design draw-
ments for the stand-alone capability for controllers as ings. The A/E shall coordinate with the PO to estab-
well as the method for coordinating several stand-alone lish the appropriate level of control parameters for each
controllers controlling a common function across con- project during the early stages of the project.
trollers. For instance, the method for controlling the
static airflow/static pressure of separate air handlers on 7.1.10.3.1 Design Points List
a common header system shall be specifically detailed.
The A/E shall provide a listing of all physical I/O with
X. Concurrent Access Client Software Licensing relation to the system and controller listed. At a mini-
Requirements: The A/E shall consider the construc- mum, the points list shall include:
tion and commissioning requirements that may require
1. Point type (analog input [AI], binary input [BI],
a higher quantity of concurrent sessions to the client/
digital input [DI], analog output [AO], binary
server software. Show on the drawings limits of stand-
output [BO], digital output [DO], etc.)
alone control requirements of containment and high
containment suites as defined below. 2. Point quantity with summaries by point type,
summed by controller and system
Y. Commissioning: Provide commissioning require-
ments, including all associated activities and 3. Listing for each point and associated alarms.
responsibilities. The alarm parameters shall be the state the
point is in to cause a particular alarm including
whether the source system is also enabled.
7.1.10.3 Design Control Schematics
A. Control Schematic: Control schematics shall be used
to graphically indicate the systems, show the schematic 7.1.10.3.2 Detailed Written Sequence
of Operations
configuration of the systems and location of control
devices, define the point names and addresses, and The A/E shall provide a detailed written sequence of
define the set points for control elements. operation. This sequence shall provide at a minimum:
B. Design Requirements: At a minimum, the control A. Sequences in all modes of operation: These shall
schematics at the design stage shall include the following: include on, off, occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool
down, summer, winter, economizer, emergency loss of
1. Point names (provided by the controls contractor) power shutdown and startup, etc. Detailed steps during
mode switches shall be provided.
2. Point type
B. Details of operation during and after a power outage:
3. Normal position of output devices
Prioritized restart sequences shall be specified by the
4. Device ranges A/E. Loss of status associated with power outages shall
not be indicated as failures with a subsequent alarm.
5. Initial design intent set points (to be modified as
refined during construction for record submittals) C. Failure Scenarios: Provide specific direction on fail-
ure scenarios for loss of proof and all safety device trips.
D. Set points, trip points, and ranges: Initially, these 10. Manufacturer (basis of design [BOD])
shall be the A/Es intent. Ultimately, these shall be the
11. Model number (BOD)
actual setting at time of record submittal.
12. Valve turndown
E. Response and Tolerance: Detail the requirements for
loop response and tolerances for control.
8. Normal positions
6. Initial design intent set points modified C. Wiring Status: Clearly differentiate between por-
as refined during construction for record tions of wiring that are existing or new, and factory or
submittals field installed.
5. Manufacturer
7.1.11.4 Product Data 6. Model/product number
A. Manufacturers Technical Product Data: Submit
7. Close off rating
manufacturers technical product data for each control
device, panel, controller, and accessory furnished, indi- 8. Normal positions
cating dimensions, capacities, performance and electri-
9. Valve characteristics
cal characteristics, and material finishes.
10. Design controlled circuit-pressure-differential
B. Installation/Startup Instructions: All product and
range (coordinated with the submittals)
device installation and startup instructions shall be
provided.
7.1.11.7 Points List In no case shall delay times between an event, request,
or command initiation and its completion be greater
A. Tabular Point List: A detailed point list shall be pro-
than the following:
vided in tabular form. Indicate all physical and virtual
points and organize by system/subsystem. 1. 5 seconds between a high-priority (critical)
alarm occurrence and alert at the operator
B. Additional Data: At a minimum, include names,
workstation
descriptors, addresses (when known), and point types
with applicable range. These shall be provided electron- 2. 10 seconds between a low-priority alarm occur-
ically in either a database format or in a spreadsheet rence and alert at the operator workstation
format.
3. 10 seconds between an operator command via
the operator interface to change a set point and
7.1.11.8 Zone Airflow Control Schedules the subsequent change in the controller
A. Airflow Schedules: Details of all control settings
4. 5 seconds between an operator command via
shall be provided in a schedule including minimum and
the operator interface to start/stop a device and
maximum airflow, supply air-temperature ranges, actu-
the subsequent command to be received at the
ator types, ranges and fail positions, and terminal sizes
controller.
and capacities.
5. 10 seconds between a change of value or state
B. Pressure-Controlled Zone: Where terminals are
of an input and it being updated on the opera-
associated to form a pressure-controlled zone, zone-
tor interface
level minimum and maximum airflow shall also be indi-
cated as well as the pairings of the boxes. 6. 10 seconds between an operator selection of a
graphic and it completely painting the screen
and updating at least 20 points.
7.1.11.9 Floor Plans
A set of floor plans shall be provided locating and iden-
tifying all controllers, sensors, operator workstations, 7.1.11.12 Operation and
interface devices, etc. Maintenance Manuals
A. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Operation
and maintenance (O&M) manuals shall be provided
7.1.11.10 Sample Graphics
in concert with training. Provide O&M Manuals in
The BAS vendor shall submit sample graphics for hard copy and text searchable (using standard Acrobat
approval. The A/E and PO, after consultation with search feature) PDF electronic format.
operating organization shall approve or disapprove the
graphics. B. Inclusions: O&M manuals shall include the
following:
Contents:
Figure 7.2.1.2 The NIH Bethesda Campus Building Automation System Network Layout
multiple application-specific controllers (ASCs), which FLN = field level network; SC = supervisory control;
are peripheral devices containing program and points VAV = variable air volume; WWW = worldwide web.
used to control room temperature, pressurization, fan
coil units, etc. Devices are daisy-chained along and only
transmit data when polled and ASCs cannot initiate a
communication. An ASC is self-contained and oper-
ates independently of the SC panel or the server, so it 7.2.2 Integration with
can operate on the network or as a stand-alone device. Existing Systems
Programming and the set parameters are stored in non-
Any new BAS system shall fully integrate with exist-
volatile memory and will not be lost when power is lost
ing BAS installations. The PO shall facilitate a meeting
and normal operation can resume as soon as power is
between the A/E and maintenance staff early in the proj-
restored.
ect to coordinate the new work with the existing digital
C. Redundancy: Redundancy is provided by having all controls. Fully integrate shall mean the following:
data stored locally at the SC panel as well as on the
A. All physical and virtual input/output (I/O) shall be
database servers. All data are synchronized between the
capable of being displayed on and modifiable (spawning
remote panels and the servers so if one device suffers a
a point-specific configuration menu from the graphic
power loss or other failure the data is stored elsewhere
is acceptable) from a standard graphic on one of those
on the network.
systems.
D. Protocols: At the management level, the Ethernet is
B. Indicated points shall have capability to be overrid-
the communication protocol. At the building level, pro-
den and/or put in test mode from the existing super-
prietary communication protocols (e.g., P2 for Siemens
visory system. Digital controls manufacturers that do
and N2 for Johnson Controls) are used after the switch
not have this capability can work around it by making
or the media converter. The management-level super-
the control point a virtual point referencing the physi-
visory LAN/WAN shall be provided by the applicable
cal point.
institute to the point dictated in the contract docu-
ments. Building field-level controlling LANs shall be C. Security restrictions set on the existing system shall
provided by the contractor. duly restrict access throughout the new system.
E. Servers: Servers act as domain controllers admin- D. All alarm-routing functionality required herein shall
istering all of the communication traffic over the net- be provided on the existing system when alarms occur
work. When the user commands a point from the on the new system.
Graphic Unit Interface of a front-end workstation, the
workstation contacts the server, then the server hands E. Schedules on the new system shall be readable and
the data down to the appropriate SC panel, which then modifiable from one of the existing GUIs.
commands the point. Once the point has changed state,
F. Point-configuration databases shall be stored on one
the SC panel relays that information back to the server.
of the existing servers.
Then, the server informs the workstation to change the
state of the point on the graphical display. G. Site-specific controller programming shall be stored
(backup) on one of the existing systems servers and the
F. Client Workstations: Operators can access the BAS
controller programming shall be modifiable from the
from thick or thin client workstations. A thick
existing system and the programming stored on the
client workstation has full access to the server and the
server shall be uploadable/downloadable between the
control functions, whereas a thin client workstation
new field controllers and the existing servers.
accesses the server through an Internet browser with
limited functions. H. Trends of points on the new system shall be able to
be configured to accumulate in the buffer of the field
Proprietary communication protocols are P2 for Fujitsu
controller and periodically uploaded to one of the exist-
Siemens and N2 for Johnson Controls. AHU = air
ing servers for storage/archiving.
handling unit; ASC = application-specific controller;
I. All points and tuning parameters on the new system controller LANs in that a primary control network
shall be assessable and modifiable from any one of the shall connect primary controllers and operator inter-
existing workstations. faces. Secondary networks shall connect secondary or
terminal controllers. The secondary control networks
J. All alarms shall be displayed on all existing communicate with the primary control network by a
workstations. gateway that is either stand-alone or is packaged in a
K. All point databases shall be set-up to meet the exist- primary controller. The primary networks are defined
ing point-naming conventions. as high-speed networks that incorporate peer-to-peer
protocols. Secondary networks are slower networks
that may depend on a single master device to control the
communication on that network; thus, the communica-
tions are less reliable and only applicable to less-critical
7.2.3 Integration with Newly applications.
Installed Systems
Multiple manufacturers may be integrated into one 7.2.4.2 Primary Controller LAN
system; however, to keep the system simple and the A. Definition: A primary controller LAN is defined as
parts interchangeable, the A/E is encouraged to use high-speed peer-peer LAN used to connect primary
as few manufacturers as practical and preferably one controllers which then control larger and more criti-
manufacturer. When multiple control products are cal equipment and may form gateways to other LANs.
installed at NIH on a given project, they shall seam- These may either incorporate deterministic protocols
lessly integrate such that all information from the sub- such as ARCNET (Institute of Electrical and Electronics
ordinate system shall be accessible and modifiable from Engineers [IEEE] 802.4), proprietary Token Ring deriv-
the supervisory system. One supervisory system shall atives, or CSMA/CD protocols such as Ethernet (IEEE
be provided for the entire system with full functional- 802.3) or LonTalk. In any case, the failure of any one
ity. Using two independent systems to meet the require- device shall not stop communication on that LAN.
ments of the DRM is unacceptable. Examples of where
these requirements apply and where the systems shall be B. New Facilities: Each new facility shall include a pri-
integrated include: mary controller LAN provided by either the control
vendor or by the institutes data provider. The A/E shall
1. The direct digital control (DDC) manufacturer establish limits of responsibility in the design as indi-
uses another manufacturers laboratory track- cated above.
ing control system.
2. The DDC manufacturer uses another manufac- 7.2.4.3 Secondary Controller LAN
turers variable-speed drive chip.
The Secondary Controller LAN may use polling and/or
3. The DDC system manufacturer uses a project- master-slave scenario because it is not intended to sup-
specific local control system, such as with a port critical information transport.
self-contained computer room unit, a remote
terminal unit (RTU), and process chillers.
7.2.4.4 Gateways, Switches, and Routers
The control vendor shall define all necessary gateways,
switches, and routers to efficiently segment/architect the
LAN. Where controlling LANs are provided by the BAS
7.2.4 Controller Networks contractor, the BAS contractor shall provide all devices.
Where the controlling LANs are installed by the insti-
7.2.4.1 General Controller Network tutes data provider, the BAS contractor shall specifi-
cally define all requirements for segmenting, routing,
Controller networks are LANs that connect vari- reliability, etc. Gateways and routers shall be powered
ous grades of controllers. The BAS consists of tiered by uninterruptible power sources (UPS) and emergency
power to ensure seamless and continuous communica- with reliability, fault tolerance, and processor speed
tion across the LAN. necessary to support the expected number of clients
and controllers on the system. The server shall have the
disk storage capability to store all the graphics, data-
7.2.4.5 Configuration of Control LANs base, third-party applications, system activity logging
A. LAN Location: Building architecture and its utility and trend archiving required for the application for
functions shall be adapted to the needs of the BAS. The the entire enterprise. The server will be responsible for
network components shall be centrally located on each meeting the response-time requirements for user access
floor and co-located with LAN closets (where applica- to graphics. The server shall be powered by an unin-
ble) to share vertical and horizontal wire ways. terruptible source with the capability to maintain the
server through power transitions.
B. Control Panel Location: Control panels shall be
located proximate to the equipment they serve to mini-
mize the cost of I/O wiring and piping and make the
system less vulnerable. Control panels shall be mounted
in protected environments such that they are not subject 7.2.6 Operator Workstations
to physical damage, vibration, or excessive temperature.
A. Description: Operator workstations are primarily
The equipment rooms, where practical, shall have ambi-
passive; they are only used to facilitate human inter-
ent conditions between 16C (60F) and 52C (125F)
action with the control system and do not execute any
and 1085% relative humidity. Control panels located
automatic control. In some cases, the same computer
in areas exceeding these ranges shall have enclosures
used for the operator workstation may also be used as
with heating or cooling devices to provide the proper
the gateway or router between the supervisory network
environmental conditions.
and the primary controller LAN. Hardware require-
C. Panel Access: The facility engineer must have quick ments of the operator workstations are indicated in
direct access to all control panels to maintain build- Section 7.6, Installation.
ing integrity similar to that provided for fire emergen-
B. Placement/Connections: The following shall be pro-
cies without going through tenant spaces. Field panels
vided with regard to placement of or connections for
shall be located out of tenant areas where practical. If
operator workstations:
field panels are located in tenant areas, they shall be in
common areas with easy access. Protection and separa- 1. At least one graphic operators workstation in
tion for tenant activities shall be provided. the engineers office of each facility
D. Client Software: The architecture of the BAS is to 1. Real-time GUI to floor plans with all rel-
be set up as a client/server. Operator workstations shall evant environmental parameters displayed or
either run client software or terminal sessions on the accessible
server. The client software may run as either a thick
or thin client. A thick client shall be a software 2. Real-time (maximum 20 minute lag) alarm-
package that is stand-alone, but connects to the server ing of conditions of the relevant environmental
backend databases to serve system information. A thin parameters
client is one that shall run through a browser such as 3. Samples and records of the following param-
Microsofts Internet Explorer. A terminal session is one eters for each ARF room:
in which the client directly accesses the server and runs
an instance of the graphic interface software on the a. Temperature (15 minute intervals)
server from a remote computer. Any modifications done
to the system via the thin client provided as an opera- i. Animal holding rooms
tor workstation shall modify the primary server infor- ii. Cage wash
mation presuming the user has entered the appropriate
password level. If for instance, separate graphics must iii. Food prep
be produced to support the browser-based interface,
the browser-based software does not qualify as either a iv. Necropsy and support areas
portable or stationary operator workstation. v. Procedure rooms
E. TAB Contractor: For all projects that incorporate a vi. Supply Storage, Clean Cage/Storage,
balancing contractor, the control vendor shall provide Feed
the TAB contractor with a controls interface hardware
and/or software (laptops or personal computers must vii. Surgery, Post-op, Support
be provided by the TAB) that facilitates balancing/
calibrating flow-controlled systems like VAV terminals. b. Humidity (15 minute intervals)
Connections shall be provided from within the zone the i. Animal holding rooms
terminal is controlling.
c. Air change rate (ACR); (15 minute intervals)
F. Licensed GUI Software: For all projects, the control
vendor shall provide a client version of the GUI soft- i. Animal holding rooms
ware, licensed for the entity that is performing the com-
missioning activity for the duration of the construction ii. Cage wash
and warranty period. This shall be a license that is then iii. Food prep
transferred back to the applicable institute. The func-
tional requirement here is to provide full functionality iv. Necropsy and support areas
of the GUI software to the commissioning effort. If this
can be done via a browser or a terminal session, these v. Procedure rooms
are also acceptable. vi. Supply storage, Clean Cage/Storage,
G. Portable Operator Workstations: The requirements Feed
shall be coordinated with maintenance staff on a proj- vii. Surgery, Post-op, Support
ect-by-project basis. A portable operator workstation
refers to a laptop computer or a tablet that can fully d. Lighting level (change of value)
run the client software, browser, or terminal session as
applicable. 4. Alarm information:
H. Animal Research Facility (ARF) Monitoring a. Maintain an alarm log of all parameters
Workstations: The following shall be made available to currently in alarm and when they went into
the veterinarian staff: alarm.
c. Daily room summary providing average, 1. User uses a browser-based thin client to
high, and low values for temperature, access servers visible directly on the intranet.
humidity, and ACR Credentials are entered by the user who is then
granted access to the appropriate information.
d. Lighting report giving on/off value trend
2. User uses a thick client application from a client
i. Animal holding rooms
station on the intranet. The client application
e. Current poll data report for temperature, connects to the BAS server.
humidity, supply airflow, exhaust airflow,
3. User uses a terminal session client to connect to
and ACR
the server and run an instance of the interface
f. Room graphs illustrating a 24 hour graph of software on the server.
a rooms temperature, humidity, and ACR
Contents:
4. Transfer switch
7.3.2 Zone-Level unit element and the chilled water system. Controllers
serving terminal devices that serve these spaces shall be
Requirements application-specific secondary (terminal) controllers fed
from normal power.
7.3.2.1 General Occupied Zones
F. Electronic vs. Pneumatic Controls: New non-critical
A. Space-Temperature Sensor: With few exceptions, zone-level controls, including sensors, controllers, and
all zones of control shall require a space-temperature actuators shall be electronic. Pneumatic controls shall
sensor. Zoning shall be dictated by the system design. not be used except for critical applications that require
Most zones shall simply have a space-temperature fast response.
sensor mounted in a representative location in the
zone. Rooms with different thermodynamic charac-
teristics, temperature, humidity, pressure, airflow, and 7.3.2.2 Tri-State Actuators
HVAC scheduling requirements shall not be grouped A. Tri-State Actuators Requiring Periodic
into one zone. Recalibration: Tri-state actuators that require peri-
odic recalibration of the motor timing by stroking the
B. Space-Temperature Adjustment: In areas that the
actuator shall be used on valves and dampers control-
HVAC systems are scheduled for an occupied/unoc-
ling spaces that do not have tight temperature, humid-
cupied cycle, at least one sensor per system shall be
ity, and pressure requirements. These may be used in
provided with an override button. Private offices may
offices, corridors that are not an essential component
include space-temperature adjustment with the thermo-
of a critical laboratory pressure gradient, conference
stat at the direction of the project officer (PO). Anywhere
rooms, break rooms, and analogous types of rooms.
that space-temperature adjustment is provided, the BAS
They shall not be used on any other type of room with-
shall allow setting the limits of the occupants range of
out the approval of the PO. They shall specifically not
allowable adjustment.
be used in animal-care spaces or in support systems for
C. Heating/Cooling: In all cases, the heating and animal-care areas unless it can be shown that recali-
cooling within a zone shall be coordinated to avoid bration will not result in temperature swings. Tri-state
simultaneous heating and cooling. Exceptions include actuators may be used in the following applications:
perimeter heat required to provide thermal comfort to
1. Laboratory and animal holding room air
occupants sitting near a window wall while the internal
dampers provided that stroking the damper is
load in the space may still require heating or cooling,
not necessary to recalibrate the actuator on a
and dehumidification. If wall-mounted sensors are not
scheduled basis.
practical and duct-mounted sensors are required, install
off-the-shelve test ports. 2. Animal holding room reheat valves where cali-
bration will not cause excursion beyond accept-
D. Fail Positions: Fail positions on the systems that serve
able ranges.
these standard environments shall fail to either last con-
dition/position or heating where there is a perimeter
wall or some need for heating. Where there is not a need
for heating, such as in an internal zone, systems shall
fail to either last position/condition or to cooling. Fail 7.3.3 Laboratories
positions for animal rooms shall be coordinated with
the veterinarian.
7.3.3.1 Common Laboratory Requirements
E. Zone Controls: Controls for a typical zone shall be A. Temperature Control/Pressure-Independent-Volume
indicated with the system that serves that zone. For Control: Laboratory zones shall have temperature con-
instance, if a zone is served by a 100% outdoor-air VAV trol and pressure-independent-volume control. Pressure-
system, the temperature control for that zone shall be independent-volume control shall mean that a set point
covered by the air handler and the VAV box. A zone volumetric flow rate of supply and exhaust into and
served by a fan coil unit shall be covered by the fan coil out of the laboratory shall be automatically maintained
regardless of fluctuations in static pressure, i.e., flow rates G. Negative/Positive Zones: On new VAV systems,
shall be determined based on sensor readings and the laboratory zones shall be actively controlled by main-
positions of dampers in the supply and exhaust airstream taining an offset between the total supply and exhaust
adjusted automatically to maintain a set-point flow rate. flow to the room. On zones that are required to be nega-
tive, the supply flow shall track the exhaust flow. On
B. Zone-Level Humidity Control: Zone-level humid- zones required to be positive, the exhaust shall track
ity control is optional and shall only be provided where the supply. Where feedback of the supply and exhaust
required by the program occupying the space. flow is provided by a correlation to the damper posi-
C. Zone-Monitored Points: The monitored points asso- tion as in a venturi valve, an input to the system shall
ciated with the zone, except for zone-related equipment indicate when the duct static pressure is insufficient to
requirements (see the applicable equipment specifica- validate this correlation. Refer to Section 7.3.5, General
tion) shall be as follows: Pressure-Controlled Rooms.
1. Space temperature H. Less than 100% Redundancy: When less than 100%
redundancy is provided in either a failure mode or an
2. Common alarms on hoods and/or biological emergency power mode and the pressure is controlled at
safety cabinets (BSCs) the zone level, prioritized reset of the terminal flow set
points is required to maintain the required room pres-
3. Humidity surization. When this is the case, the A/E shall dictate
4. Supply/exhaust velocity (total/static differential) the priorities. Controls for laboratories, including con-
pressure trol panels and modules, valves, and dampers, shall be
fed from emergency power.
D. Separate Alarms for Fume Hoods/BSCs: Note that
institutes are required to have alarms on fume hoods I. Local Space Pressure: Monitoring of space pressure
and BSCs that are separate from the BAS. with local indication is only required when the poten-
tial threat to occupant well-being or the research pro-
E. Exception: Laboratories shall have pressure or direc- gram from airborne contamination is significant and is
tional airflow controlled zones. On existing constant required by the Centers for Disease Controls Biosafety
volume systems where installation of pressure-indepen- in Microbiological and Biomedical Laboratories
dent terminals is not practical, and only with permis- (BMBL) for BSL-3 and ABSL-3 facilities. This shall be
sion of the PO and DOHS, laboratory pressurization discussed with the PO, the DOHS, and the researcher
may be accomplished by balancing. to establish this need.
steel construction with ultra low leakage casing and 7.3.4 Animal Holding Rooms
dampers. Venturi valves shall be constructed of 16 G
aluminum with two baked on coats of corrosion resis- A. Animal Care Priority: Animal care requirements
tant coating. Blade-type terminals require minimum of shall always take precedence over system-component
three (3) duct diameter upstream of the sensor. Venturi protection. Animal holding rooms shall be controlled
valves require a minimum of 15 mm (0.6 in.) inlet pres- to temperature, pressure or directional airflow, and
sure for the valves to operate properly. humidity on a room-by-room basis as determined by
the program.
B. Terminal Box: Each VAV fume hood laboratory
shall have a pressure-independent terminal box on the B. Monitored Points: The monitored points associated
fume hood exhaust as well as on the supply air duct. with the room (for zone-related equipment require-
If a general exhaust box is required, it shall also be a ments, see the applicable equipment) shall be as follows:
pressure-independent terminal box. 1. Space temperature
1. Room temperature shall be maintained by 2. Space pressure with local indication (where
increasing the total zone exhaust airflow set space pressure is controlled)
point on a rise in temperature and by decreas-
ing its set point on a fall in temperature (the 3. Space humidity
minimum zone flow set point shall be limited to
that required for air exchange). 4. Supply air humidity for high limit (if not done
with a local limit) only when trim humidifiers
2. Room temperature shall be maintained by are installed
modulating the reheat coil to maintain the heat-
ing set point. 5. Air change calculation either via terminal flow
sensors or flow measuring stations
3. Room pressurization shall be maintained by
varying the supply airflow set point to track the 6. Light-level monitoring, unless not required in
total zone exhaust air being measured (hood this system by PO and program and is moni-
flow plus general exhaust as applicable). tored in a separate system, shall be considered,
but may be part of a separate system as long as
4. Exhaust air through the fume hood shall the required AAALAC data is stored.
be modulated to maintain an airflow that is
required to maintain a face velocity set point. 7. Supply/exhaust (total/static differential)
Airflow set point shall be determined by sash pressure
position. 8. Supply and exhaust airflow
5. The general exhaust airflow set point shall C. Individual Room Humidity: Humidity control must
vary to maintain the total zone exhaust flow be stable. The control system shall maintain humidity
set point when the hood flow is less than that within 5% of set point when the humidifier is being
required for the cooling loop. controlled within its limits.
6. All box dampers shall modulate to maintain D. Individual Room-Air Changes: On new systems,
the established flow set point. pressure-independent constant volume boxes shall be
7. The use of proximity sensors shall not be used used to control supply and exhaust flow rates. The
on VAV fume hoods. All VAV fume hoods shall direct digital controller (DDC) system controls modu-
be fitted with sash position indicators. lating dampers in the supply and exhaust to maintain
flow rates. The BAS shall monitor both supply and
exhaust flows.
individual rooms shall be maintained by manual adjust- (where pressure control seeks to keep the space nega-
ments to balancing dampers. The BAS shall still moni- tive), or the exhaust shall track the supply (where pres-
tor both supply and exhaust flows. An individual flow sure control seeks to keep the space positive). This sce-
probe is required for each individual flow. If there is not nario inherently adjusts to potential failures in, or lack
sufficient room in the ductwork to measure room flow of capacity of the main systems. If the leading system
directly, install multiple sensors and determine flow begins struggling for any reason, the following system
indirectly by subtracting the resultant multiple flows. terminal box shall modulate to maintain the offset.
If the ductwork is not sufficiently accessible or the flow
range is too low for accurate measurement, indirectly B. Airflow Metering: If airflow is not being sensed
determine flow by accurately measuring a suite of rooms directly, as in the application of a metering venturi valve,
and prorating the total suite flow by the known air bal- where the flow is being inferred from valve position, a
ance which shall be periodically verified. pressure sensor shall be provided on both supply and
exhaust systems that alarms when air pressure across
F. Individual Room Pressurization: Individual room the valve is not great enough to maintain the valve in an
pressure shall be controlled by adjusting flow rate at appropriate range.
pressure-independent terminal boxes. Supply airflow is
modulated to either maintain a flow differential between C. Distress Mode: For non-containment systems, if the
supply and exhaust or to maintain a constant pressure lead system is in alarm for 2 minutes (enough time for
at a room differential pressure sensor. See Section 7.3.5, an initial attempt at resetting set points) the system shall
General Pressure-Controlled Rooms for more details. be put into a distress mode such that all pressure zone
control set points are reduced to redistribute the lack of
G. Individual Room-Space Temperature: Temperature capacity in a prioritized fashion. Distress mode shall be
shall be monitored by the DDC system. The location alarmed and manually reset.
and protection of the sensor shall be coordinated with
the animal program. The sensor shall be located in D. Lack of Pressure Alarm: For BSL-3 systems, the lack
the exhaust duct unless the location is not representa- of pressure shall be alarmed immediately and the dis-
tive of the macroenvironment. Provide a high-accuracy tress modes shall be initiated by the pressure sensors
sensor. If the sensors must be in the room, the sensors provided across the containment barrier.
shall be waterproof or in a waterproof enclosure and be
protected from physical damage from racks. If in the
exhaust duct, they shall be located away from direct
cage exhaust so that the sensor is representative of the
macroenvironment and not affected by the ventilated
7.3.6 Principal Investigator
rack exhaust blowers. (PI) Offices
Principal investigator (PI) offices shall be controlled to
temperature and pressure only when integral to the lab-
oratory pressure control. PI offices shall include a space
temperature sensor with local set point override, which
7.3.5 General Pressure- shall allow limits applied to the degree of adjustment.
Controlled Rooms These rooms may have a scheduled unoccupied period
A. Pressure-Controlled Zones: Many types of occupan- with local override capability.
cies shall require pressure control. Rooms ancillary to
other rooms required to be pressure controlled shall
need to be pressure controlled themselves to maintain
the primary zone. Pressure controlled zones shall sense
supply and exhaust airflow. Passive control (supply and
7.3.7 Microscope Suites
exhausts are controlled to a flow set point, with one A. Application: The following does not apply to all
of the flows slaved to follow the other with an offset) microscope suites. It may apply to electron, confocal, or
shall be used. Either the supply shall track the exhaust, other types of highly sensitive microscopes. Check with
the users before designing.
B. Sensitive Microscope Suites: Sensitive microscope 3. Gas detection coordinated with the NMR/MRI
suites require very tight temperature and humidity con- manufacturer
trol. The design of the controls shall be very closely
coordinated with the mechanical system design and 4. An oxygen sensor to initiate a room exhaust if
the space layout to minimize environmental condition the magnet quenches
fluctuation across the scope. Either laminar systems
or curtains shall be used for this. The typical special
microscope room shall require the following monitor-
ing points:
7.3.9 Computer Rooms
1. Space temperature Temperature and humidity shall be controlled in com-
puter rooms. When the primary control is provided
2. Humidity
by the BAS, the requirements are listed with the appli-
3. Air change calculation either via terminal flow cable systems and components. Whether completely
sensors or flow measuring stations controlled by the BAS or whether a combination of
packaged controls (as would be provided on a com-
C. Humidity Requirements: Humidity requirements puter room unit) and BAS, the ventilation system shall
shall be coordinated with the microscope manufac- be coordinated with the computer-room conditioning
turer. If the microscope uses a gas that could potentially system, and the various computer-room conditioning
spill and displace oxygen or otherwise create a hazard, units shall be coordinated to not cause simultaneous
a sensor detecting either oxygen or the gas being used heating and cooling (unless required for dehumidi-
will be required to initiate a room-exhaust sequence. fication). For instance, the discharge condition of a
supplemental outdoor-air system for ventilation shall
D. Electron Microscopy: Controls serving the electron
not impose unnecessary humidity (causing cooling and
microscopy suite shall fail to last position or cooling.
reheating for dehumidification of the computer room
Proportional Integrated and Derivative (PID) controllers
units). Humidification control systems shall be coordi-
shall be used in conjunction with Class A, Resistance
nated to avoid some systems humidifying while others
Temperature Detectors (RTDs) or Thermistors to con-
are dehumidifying. The following at a minimum shall
trol room temperature.
be monitored by the BAS:
2. Space temperature
7.3.8 Nuclear Magnetic
3. Space humidity
Resonance and Magnetic
4. Under floor water if not included in the
Resonance Imaging Suites common alarm
Nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR) and magnetic
resonance imaging (MRI) suites require stable tempera-
ture control in the vicinity of the magnets. The design
of the controls shall be very closely coordinated with
the mechanical system design and the space layout to 7.3.10 Environmental Rooms
minimize environmental condition fluctuation across Environmental rooms shall be provided with packaged
the magnets. The typical NMR room shall require the controls. These rooms shall be monitored by the labora-
following monitoring points: tory equipment monitoring system.
1. Space temperature
2. Humidity
Contents:
7.4.6 Clean Steam (Steam Source Boiler and 7.4.14 Desiccant Dehumidification Systems
Steam-to-Steam Generator) Systems
7.4.15 Electrical Systems
7.4.7 Hydronic Systems
7.4.15.1 Emergency Power Systems
7.4.7.1 Steam-to-Water Hydronic Systems
7.4.15.2 Central Uninterruptible
7.4.7.2 Chilled Water Hydronic Systems Power Supply Systems
7.4.8 Plumbing and Specialty Gas Systems 7.4.15.3 Lighting Control Systems
7.4.0 Introduction remain in effect. The pressure safety shall also remain
in effect unless it is unlikely that the extreme pressure
This section describes the control loops that form the could render the unit inoperable.
system and how the separate loops work to form the
overall system. Systems are composed of components. C. Smoke Control Sequences: Where an engineered
Many of the requirements of the systems are specified smoke control sequence is applicable, BAS may be used
as a part of the component specification. This section to execute the sequences only if it maintains a UL 864
provides the requirements of the composite system. The certification. Otherwise, the fire alarm system shall
controller for system-level requirements shall be pow- locally override all devices via addressable modules.
ered by the highest level of the power available to any
of the components or devices it serves. Specific require- D. Controller: Individual air handling units (AHUs)
ments of the controllers are listed with the system. shall be controlled by one single controller with stand-
alone capability. All programming controlling the com-
ponents on the air handler shall be contained in a single
controller and be provided via one programming lan-
guage. Only outside air conditions, emergency power
7.4.1 General Requirements indications, and as permitted by the PO, terminal-based
reset parameters may be required across the network.
The A/E shall coordinate the reliability requirements
For certified smoke control systems, smoke modes and
(with regard to stand-alone capability, single sources of
zone alarms may be allowed over the network. Units
failures, and controller level) with the PO and clearly
serving research laboratory areas, ARFs, BSL-3 areas,
state the requirements in the documents.
aquatic laboratories, NMR suites, electron microscope
suites, clean rooms, manufacturing/process facilities,
and other areas of commensurate criticality shall be
controlled by a primary controller. The A/E shall coor-
7.4.2 Air Handling Systems dinate the reliability requirements with the PO and
clearly state the requirements in the documents.
Section 7.4.2 refers to air systems that have airflows in
excess of 1180 L/s (2500 cfm) or as directed by the proj- E. Humidity Control: Air systems that include humidity
ect officer (PO). The requirements for terminal units control shall include a humidity control sensor and high
such as fan coil units are indicated in Section 7.5.16. limit humidity sensor in the supply air duct separated by
an adequate distance from the humidifier. If jackets are
A. Discharge Air Temperature: All systems require
used on the dispersion tubes of the humidifier, provide
discharge air-temperature sensors. Supply air systems
an automatic means of isolating the humidifier jacket
serving multiple terminal units, particularly those that
when the dewpoint of the outside air is below the appli-
serve terminals that involve reheating shall include a
cable set point.
supply air reset algorithm. Reset may be based on either
outside air temperature or feedback from the terminals. F. Interlock with Exhaust: Supply air systems that work
Where control is based on feedback from the terminals, in concert with exhaust systems shall be interlocked
logic shall prevent a single box from controlling the with that system. Exhaust system status is required
entire system unless it is critical. The reset logic shall be before the supply air system starts for 100% supply
designed to allow dehumidification demand to override and exhaust systems serving areas that are required
heating and cooling demand and vice versa depending to be maintained negative to public spaces. Where the
on which is greater. response must be quick, such as the shutdown of the
supply fan for a BSL-3 lab when the exhaust system
B. Interface to Fire Alarm System: Systems shall be
shuts down, the equipment should be controlled from
interfaced with the fire alarm system where required by
the same BAS cabinet, or hard-wired interlocks may be
code. When a firemans override is required, the freeze
necessary because communication across the network is
safety shall be bypassed (although the basic sequence
not always fast enough to be effective.
shall ensure that all coils have full flow in the event of
a potential freeze condition). The smoke safety shall
G. Startup and Staging: The BAS shall provide for K. Scheduling: When feasible in areas that are not
smooth and orderly startup and staging (where appli- occupied at all times and where code permits, the con-
cable) of the AHUs. The starting of the fan and the trol sequence shall incorporate scheduling and setback
opening of associated dampers shall be carefully coor- to minimize energy use.
dinated. For variable air volume (VAV) air handlers,
the fans shall start at minimum capacity and ramp up L. Supply Air Pressure Control: A sensor that is at
to capacity at a controlled rate. When applicable, end about two-thirds the length of the supply main or a
switches on the dampers shall prove damper status location that is representative of the system pressure
before allowing the fan capacity to exceed an unsafe shall monitor supply air pressure. Supply pressure shall
condition and/or exceed a pressure safety setting. Main be controlled to maintain a set point that allows opti-
air to normally open control valves shall not be dropped mal control with minimum energy consumption.
when the fan is off. M. Headered Systems: Headered systems are those that
H. Isolation and Security: Air handlers with outside have multiple air handlers or fans feeding a common
air capability shall have outside air dampers that shall supply distribution system. Critical systems described
close when the system is off. Supply isolation and smoke below refer to systems serving fume hoods, BSCs,
dampers shall be provided as required by National Fire ARFs, and containment and high containment systems:
Protection Agencys code standard 90 (NFPA 90). For 1. The BAS and/or a local controller shall be capa-
specific security requirements, coordinate with DPSM. ble of selecting any of the headered fans as the
See Section 1.13. lead fan and shall select one of the headered fans
I. Freeze Protection: All air handling units (AHUs) as the lead fan.
shall have a two-pole freeze stat with automatic reset. 2. When starting a fan controlled by a variable
One is required for every 3.7 m 2 (40 ft. 2) of coil surface. frequency drive (VFD), the fan shall be started
The freeze stat shall trip when any area of the preheat into a closed damper to equalize the pressure
coil discharge drops below 6C (42.8F). One pole shall up- and downstream of the damper and prohibit
be hard wired to the motor starter or drive and the other backspin of the fan. When the speed of the fan
shall be wired to the direct digital control (DDC) panel. crosses a threshold speed (indicating fan run-
When the freeze stat trips, the supply fan shall stop and ning) and static pressure proves fan operation,
dampers shall close (unless in firemans override), and isolation dampers shall be opened. End switches
then preheat, chilled water, and reheat valves (for coils on isolation dampers shall limit the speed of the
within the unit) shall open fully. The freeze stat shall fan to a safe preset condition, but near the typi-
have a time-delay relay in the circuit to delay the trip for cal header operating pressure. When the damper
an adjustable time up to 5 minutes and a manual reset, end switches indicate an open damper, the VFD
which is required to restart the fan and return the freeze shall allow acceleration of the fan beyond the
stat point to the normal status. Where required, BAS preset condition. The VFD shall command open
shall include provision of leak detector around AHU to and close of the motorized isolation damper.
alert maintenance of a potential leak.
3. The control system shall control all operating
J. Cabinet and Component Pressure Safety: When the fans (of equal capacity) on a header to a common
dead head of the fan is capable of damaging the wall, speed. The network can be used to coordinate
component, or duct associated with the system, upon the speed of the fans, however, the controller
closure of any isolation or fire damper, the air handler shall revert to a local control loop in the event
shall be protected with applicable high and/or low dif- of loss of network communication. Upon loss
ferential pressure safety switches with manual reset. of communication, an operating fan shall
Note that given free wheel of the fans, the static pres- continue to operate and revert to its local loop or
sure safeties cannot absolutely guarantee damaging maintain the last known command. If the fan is
conditions. Therefore, the A/E shall provide for protec- not operating at the point when communication
tion of system components in the event abnormal condi- is lost, it shall remain off until communication is
tions develop (e.g., relief panels). restored and it is commanded to run.
4. The lead shall be rotated automatically. N. Airflow Monitoring: Supply airflow shall be moni-
tored by the BAS with an airflow monitoring station
5. The lead rotates automatically upon failure of on all systems above 2360 L/s (5,000 cfm) or critical
the fan. On scheduled rotation, the lag shall environment required by the program.
start and prove status before the stopping fan
is stopped. O. Supply Air System to BSL-3 Labs: Refer to Section
7.7.5, BSL-3 Laboratories: Supply Systems.
6. Anytime a fan fails or a startup sequence fails,
the BAS shall generate an alarm and the alarm
status shall continue until manually reset even if
subsequent attempts at startup succeed. When
the fan fails or the start sequence fails, isolation 7.4.3 Stairwell
dampers shall be commanded closed, and the
BAS shall initiate one retry to start the fan. If
Pressurization Systems
the fan again fails to start, the BAS shall initiate When required by code or a performance-based fire
a start sequence on a backup fan. If backup fails protection design, building systems shall include a stair-
to start after two start tries, the BAS shall repeat well pressurization system. This shall be initiated by the
attempting to start one fan and then the other fire alarm system whenever an alarm condition occurs.
until one starts or the fan sequence is manually The BAS shall monitor the command and status of the
overridden. fan and enunciate an alarm when status does not match
command.
7. For critical systems, extra fans on a manifold/
header shall be run continuously at a lower
speed and when one fan fails, it shall be isolated,
the BAS shall generate an alarm, and the other
fans shall speed up to meet the system set-point 7.4.4 Exhaust Air Systems
pressure. The following is required for exhaust air systems that
8. VFDs shall be controlled directly by the BAS have airflows in excess of 1180 L/s (2500 cfm) or as
controller via hard-wired interface, not across directed by PO.
the control LAN through manufacturer-pro- A. Interface to Fire Alarm System: Systems shall be
vided controllers that are integral to the VFD. interfaced with the fire alarm system as required by
9. Status shall be proved by current switches. NFPA and the authority having jurisdiction (AHJ). As
Switches sensing proof on critical systems shall required, the operation of the fans and dampers shall
be capable of sensing a loss of status due to a belt be controllable by the fire alarm command center. If the
break, as well as any other loss of status in 10 building is not equipped with a fire command center,
seconds. The application shall be analyzed by the the manual controls for the fans and dampers shall be
A/E to assess if the minimum operating current located per direction of the fire protection AHJ. Where
to exceed a no-load-motor amp draw at 60 Hz the Division of the Fire Marshall (DFM) has jurisdic-
(broken belt scenario). If a reliable current switch tion, fume hood exhaust systems remain in operation
amp setting cannot be determined based on the during fire scenarios.
application, proof logic shall be supplemented B. Smoke-Control Sequences: Where an engineered
with either pressure switches or drive logic. smoke-control sequence is applicable (typically these
10. On headered systems that may result in higher systems are not used in laboratories; however the DFM
than design airflows during a condition like fail- shall dictate their necessity), the BAS may be used to exe-
ure of another fan on the header, the BAS shall cute the sequences only if it maintains an Underwriters
limit the operating fan speed to a safe volume Laboratories UL 864 certification. Otherwise, the
that shall not result in excessive filter forces or fire alarm system shall locally override all devices via
water carryover from a condensing cooling coil. addressable modules.
C. Controller: Exhaust systems shall be controlled by I. Headered Systems: Headered systems include mul-
one single controller with stand-alone capability and tiple air handlers or fans that feed a common supply dis-
all programming shall be provided via one program- tribution system. Refer to Section 7.4.2, Air Handling
ming language. Units serving research laboratory areas, Systems. The same applies to the exhaust system.
ARFs, BSL-3 areas, aquatic laboratories, NMR suites,
electron microscope suites, clean rooms, manufactur- J. Airflow Monitoring: Exhaust airflow shall be moni-
ing/process facilities, and other areas of commensurate tored by the BAS on all systems above 2360 L/s (5000
criticality shall be controlled by a primary controller cfm) or critical equipment required by program.
preferably the same as controls the supply (this shall be K. Security: A/E shall include design provisions to meet
limited by size). IT security requirements. Refer to Chapter 11.
D. Interlock with Supply: Exhaust air systems that work L. Fume Hood and BSC Exhaust Air Systems: Systems
in concert with supply systems shall be interlocked with that exhaust fumes from laboratory fume hoods shall
that system. Exhaust system status shall be required be designed and controlled to maintain transport veloc-
before the supply air system starts for 100% supply ity in the ductwork. This shall be coordinated with
and exhaust systems serving areas that are required to the system design. See also Section 7.5.11, Exhaust Air
be maintained negative to public spaces. Exhaust sys- Stacks (Contaminated Systems). Sensors for fume hood
tems shall be required to have their output limited until systems shall be selected for corrosion resistance and for
supply system status is indicated so as not to create an the appropriate hazard in the duct. Control sequences
excessive negative pressure. This shall be done where shall start these systems first when restarting after fail-
possible at the terminal level. ures and power transfers. Dampers in these systems
E. Startup and Staging: The BAS shall provide for shall fail open.
smooth and orderly startup and staging (where appli- M. Exhaust Systems Serving BSL-3 Laboratories: Refer
cable) of the exhaust fans. The starting of the fan and to Section 7.7.6, BSL-3 Laboratories: Exhaust Systems.
the opening of associated dampers shall be carefully
coordinated. For VAV exhaust systems, the fans shall N. Laboratory Exhaust System: The velocity of the
start at minimum capacity and ramp up to capacity at exhaust air in the exhaust stacks shall be controlled to
a controlled rate. maintain adequate dispersion to prevent re-entrainment
in air intakes. When systems are constant volume, no
F. Isolation: Exhaust systems shall be provided with monitoring is necessary. When systems are VAV, and
automatic dampers to close and isolate the system when bypass air is used to maintain the stacks at constant
the system is off. volume, no monitoring is necessary. If the minimum
G. Component Pressure Safety: When the dead head of velocity is maintained by staging fans systems or by
the fan is capable of damaging one of the components, a combination of bypass and staging of fans, airflow
or duct associated with the system, upon closure of any velocity and flow shall be required. Sensors for labora-
isolation or fire damper, the system shall be protected tory exhaust system shall be corrosion resistant for the
with applicable high and/or low differential pressure appropriate hazard level in the duct.
safety switches hard wired to the starter circuit. Note
that given free wheel of the fans, the static pressure
safeties cannot absolutely guarantee damaging condi-
tions. Therefore, the A/E shall provide for protection
of system components in the event abnormal conditions
7.4.5 Building Steam
develop (e.g., relief panels). Connections to Campus
H. Scheduling: When feasible in areas that are not System
occupied at all times and where the code permits, the This section refers to extensions of the plant steam
control sequence shall incorporate scheduling and set- into various facilities. See Section 7.3.1, Building-
back to minimize energy use. Level Requirements for the steam service metering and
main condensate system requirements. The BAS shall
monitor each pressure stage at the header and have C. Makeup Water: Makeup water shall be preheated
alarms set for them. for these systems to improve level control. When this is
the case and the preheaters are controlled by the BAS,
the status of flow to the system shall be monitored by
7.4.5.1 Modulating Steam Valves the BAS to enable/disable feed-water control based on
A. Modulating Control Valves: Modulating control water flow. Modulating makeup controls shall provide
valves selected for steam heating shall be sized for a more stable system and are recommended.
proper control. They shall have an equal percentage or
linear characteristic and be sized for a pressure drop of D. Clean Steam Systems: Clean steam systems shall
approximately 75% of the supply steam pressure. control an automatic surface blow down to purge the
system of solids. Control may either be timed or be
B. Steam Modulation: If steam modulation is used as continuous and controlled by a conductivity control-
the only means of capacity control, two valves shall ler. Controls shall be provided to cool down the water
be provided in a 1/3 to 2/3 arrangement to improve below 60C (140F) before drainage.
controllability. One BAS output may be used for both
valves provided ranges on valves are carefully coordi-
nated. Control loops shall be tuned at light load and
checked under heavy load.
7.4.7 Hydronic Systems
A. Static Pressure: At least one key point of static pres-
Rationale: Both equal percentage or linear
sure shall be monitored and a low alarm shall be set at
inherent characteristic valves may work for this
the point when any valve will be struggling to maintain
application. The A/E shall evaluate the system and
its required flow.
select the right control valve to achieve overall
linear install system characteristics. Equal B. Supply/Return Temperatures: The supply and return
percentage valves are typically used for control temperatures shall be monitored on all systems.
applications where wide-load variations can
occur. Linear valves are typically used for a linear C. Flow Monitoring: Flow shall be monitored on most
application, such as the relatively small systems systems; however, exceptions may be granted by the PO
without large load variation. in conjunction with the DTR where there is no value to
diagnostic monitoring or measurement and verification.
G. Primary Controller: Systems that require control by temperatures. Regardless of the connection configura-
a primary controller shall be designated. Typical sys- tion, the building chilled water control valve shall be
tems that shall require primary controllers will be sys- selected for high turn-down ratios and proper control
tems that serve critical spaces or many spaces such that across significant plant-pressure differentials. The A/E
the expense is justified. shall specifically present an analysis predicting the valve
flow versus percent stroke on the specified valve at vari-
H. Water Detection Monitoring: Water detection of ous plant differentials. The building valve shall be nor-
drip pans under hydronic piping over electrical switch- mally open. Multiple staged valves may also be used to
gear and electrical rooms shall be monitored. improve control.
6. Control-valve position
Rationale: Isolation flow from the converters that
are not used can reduce the control loop gain and On the load side (building side of bridge), the following
make the system easier to tune. shall be monitored and where appropriate, controlled:
1. Supply temperature
B. Reset Strategies: Reset strategies for heating systems
shall be as follows: 2. Return temperature
alarm and automatically shift the systems to the alter- an offset of slightly below the preheat air temperature
nate cooling source (i.e., domestic water or dedicated set point such that one valve shall be fully open and its
cooling tower). The backup cooling source shall also be loop shall be lacking before heat is added to the loop.
controlled to maintain process cooling supply tempera- Refer to Section 6.1.23, as combination preheat and
ture. For precision temperature controls requirements heat recovery should be avoided.
refer to Section 6.3. To revert back to plant chilled
water requires manual acknowledgment.
Rationale: Combined run-around heat recovery
F. Isolation Valves: The A/E shall carefully select the and preheat coil generally have a higher failure
domestic water and chilled water isolation valves to rate because of the system complexity. Run-
ensure adequate close-off pressures. around heat recovery should be separated from
the preheat coil. Careful coordination is required
G. Run-Around Heat Recovery Systems: Run-around for the existing combination heat recovery and
heat recovery systems shall be designed and controlled preheat system.
to maximize the energy-efficiency of the system. Heat-
recovery-system controls shall be powered from the
same source as the systems that contain them. Run- I. Preheating Set Point: When preheating load falls
around heat recovery should be separated from the pre- and recovered heat is sufficient, the preheating set point
heat coil. Four modes of operation shall be used: shall be lowered to avoid unnecessarily adding heat into
the loop.
1. Winter Mode: Winter mode shall be used when
the outside-air temperature is below the supply
air set point minus 3C (37.4oF). Pump shall
run and flow shall be modulated to maintain
the supply air temperature leaving the heat 7.4.8 Plumbing and
recovery coil at a set point coordinated with the Specialty Gas Systems
other loops in the supply system.
A. Local Alarms/Packaged Alarms to BAS: Except
2. Intermediate Mode: Intermediate Mode is used where individual, specificly identified alarm signals are
when the outside-air temperature is above the sent to BAS, alarms from local monitoring panels or
supply air set point and below the return/exhaust other sources shall alert to the BAS in a manner that
air temperature plus an offset to adjust for the provides indication of the fault crticality, (e.g., General
cost of running the pump versus the recovered Fault, Critical/Plant Emergency, etc.). All annunciations
heat. In this mode, the pumps shall be off. to BAS shall be configured to provide alert even under
failure conditions (such as loss of power.
3. Summer Mode: When the outside air tempera-
ture (or enthalpy) is above that indicated for the
high side of the intermediate range, the pumps 7.4.8.1 Domestic/Laboratory
shall run at maximum capacity and the flow Water Systems
shall be maximum. Refer to Chapter 8, Plumbing Design and Chapter 12,
Special Process Piping Systems for additional require-
4. Exhaust Freeze Protection: BAS shall modulate
ments. When systems include booster pumps and pack-
the bypass valve to maintain the return tem-
ages, the BAS shall monitor the supply pressure and
perature (glycol entering the exhaust coil) above
temperature as well as a common alarm on the booster
0C (32F).
pump package (the assumption being that the booster
H. Steam to Hot Water Converter: If a steam-to-hot system includes packaged control). The requirements
water converter is used to inject heat into a heat-recov- stated in this section identify general requirements.
ery loop to form a combination heat recovery and pre- Additional items and monitoring shall be provided in
heat system, the converter leaving temperature shall be conformance with the requirements of individual sys-
controlled to maintain the preheat air temperature at tems as identified in other chapters of the DRM.
Contents:
7.5.3 Variable Frequency Drives 7.5.13.1 Serving Zones with VAV Fume Hoods
2. In the Off position, the fan shall stop and damage, the fan shall be allowed to acceler-
dampers shut. ate to required speed. If at any time during
fan operation the damper open status indi-
B. BAS Fan Control: In the auto position, the BAS shall cation is lost, the fan shall decelerate to the
control the fan as indicated below. preset speed under the control of the drive.
1. The drive may have a drive bypass. The bypass C. Fan Status: Fan status shall be monitored via the
position shall be monitored and enunciated appropriate type of current switch (either provided
as an alarm on the BAS. When the drive is separately or within the drive) and the BAS shall prove
in bypass position, the isolation damper end operation. The BAS shall enunciate a fan failure
switches shall be in the safety circuit. That con- alarm whenever the fan is commanded to run and on
tact shall be shunted when the drive is in the status is not proved within an adjustable debounce time.
drive position. The application in bypass must BAS shall enunciate a hand operation alarm when the
include appropriate consideration of the opera- fan is commanded off and status is indicated. In the fail-
tion in bypass mode such as operating point, ure mode, the Run command shall remain except on
ductwork pressurization, and noise. When headered systems for which the Run command shall
bypass mode is applied on direct drive fans, be removed requiring manual acknowledgment before
fans shall not be allowed to operate above its restart.
rated class RPM. Consideration shall be given
for adding a backup VFD to operate the direct D. Drives Configuration: Drives configuration shall
drive motors in bypass mode. It is required for include the following:
the backup VFD to meet the harmonic require-
ments of the primary VFD. 1. Automatic restart on power interruption
2. The BAS shall control starting and stopping of 2. Acceleration and deceleration rates appropriate
the fans. Fans shall start at minimum speed and to the application
ramp up under a controlled rate to the required 3. On critical applications, the drive shall start
capacity. When fans stop, they shall ramp down into a freewheeling fan and accelerate or decel-
from control speed to minimum at a controlled erate to the required control frequency without
rate prior to stopping. stopping or going to a minimum speed first.
3. The starting and ramp up shall be coordinated E. Drive Modulation: The BAS shall modulate the drive
with the opening of any isolation dampers in response to the system static pressure.
when there is a potential for damage or a pres-
sure safety trip. This coordination shall be one F. Speed Feedback: When the speed feedback does not
of the following: match the command with an adjustable tolerance for
more than an adjustable time delay, the BAS shall alarm
a. Stand Alone: Only energize the fan when a drive override alarm.
the damper end switch indicates that the
damper is open far enough to not cause G. Minimum Required Points: Points required for fans
physical damage or trip a pressure safety. and dampers are:
If at any time during the operation of the
fan the damper open indication is lost, the 1. System start/stop (BO)
fan shall stop immediately (not under the 2. Fan status (BI)
controlled rate).
3. Pressure sensor (AI)
b. Headered: Energize the fan to a preset min-
imum speed that will not do any damage 4. Common drive alarm
to the system and equalize the pressure in
the common duct. Upon indication that 5. Drive in bypass (BI)
the damper is open far enough not to do 6. HOA position (BIs)
7. Damper end switch (BI) when required to avoid 2. Interface shall not be done through digital com-
system damage. munications except as provided supplementary
to the hard-wired interface.
8. Speed control (AO)
7.5.4 Pumps
A. HOA Switch: A HOA switch shall be provided on
7.5.3 Variable Frequency either the starter or the VFD. The HOA shall control
Drives the pump as follows:
A. Seamless Integration: The BAS shall provide for 1. In the hand position, the pump shall start and
seamless integration with the control of variable fre- run continuously.
quency drives (VFDs) and associated systems. The
2. In the off position, the pump shall stop.
interface may be either hardwired (point by point
wiring to an applicable terminations on the drives inter- 3. In the auto position, the BAS shall control the
face board), or through digital communications via a pump as indicated below.
controller network (i.e., a Siemens P1 chip included
with the drive or a Modbus interface to the drive), or a B. BAS Control: The BAS shall control starting and
combination of both. stopping of the pump. The pump shall start at mini-
mum speed and ramp up under a controlled rate to the
B. Communication Failures: When the communi- required capacity where variable flow is used. When the
cations option is provided, appropriate protections pump stops, it shall ramp down from control speed to
shall be programmed for communication failures. For minimum at a controlled rate prior to stopping.
instance, if communication is lost from the drive con-
troller, the BAS shall assume the unit has failed and C. Pump Status: Status shall be monitored via the appro-
respond accordingly. In such a case, the damper end priate type of current switch (either provided separately
switches and safeties shall be wired to the drive for safe or within an associated drive) and the BAS shall prove
local operation. If the drive controller loses communica- operation. Status must be valid whether the drive is
tion with the unit controller, the drive shall shutdown normal or in bypass. The BAS shall enunciate a pump
the fan. failure alarm whenever the pump is commanded to run
and status is not proved within an adjustable debounce
C. Air System Applications: For air system applica- time. The BAS shall enunciate a hand operation
tions, all safety indications shall be appropriately wired alarm when the pump is commanded off and on status
to facilitate seamless operation. The control system is indicated. In no case shall a loss of status coincident
shall in all cases recognize when the drive is operating, with a loss in power be alarmed as a failure. Drives shall
even if the drive is in hand operation via the drive panel have an automatic restart programmed.
and execute the programmed sequence of temperature
control.
Rationale: A clear alarm message is required to
provide accurate information for operation and
7.5.3.1 VFDs in Critical Applications trouble-shooting.
A. Critical Areas: Room pressure critical areas include
BSL-3 and any others identified as critical during the D. Pump-Capacity Modulation: Where pump capacity
planning. The following applies to these areas: is modulated by a speed drive, the BAS shall modulate
the drive in response to the system static pressure sensed
1. Interface between the BAS controller and VFD
at a location(s) remote from the pump. The set point
shall be hard wired directly, point by point
shall be reset based on terminal requirements when
from the BAS to the VFD interface board.
practical. Programming shall be in place to avoid one
E. Minimum Required Points: Points required for D. Air Handler Sensors: Refer to Section 7.6,
pumps are: Installation for valves and sensor requirements. Sensors
within an air handler shall be averaging unless they are
1. Pump start/stop (BO)
after a well-mixed condition like downstream of a fan.
2. Pump status (BI)
For pumps with VFDs, the additional required points Rationale: Air may not be well mixed in a large
are: AHU due to temperature stratification or local
airflow distribution, so averaging temperature
1. Speed control (AO) from multiple points is required. Coordinate
with the AHU manufacturer and select the right
2. Speed feedback (AI)
temperature sensor.
3. Common drive alarm
2. Leaving air temperature (AI) C. Dampers: Where face and bypass dampers are used,
provide at least one valve sized for modulating service
3. Entering air temperatures (AI) above 5C (41F). The sequence shall include opening
C. Heating and Cooling Coils: When heating and cool- the face damper to full face and modulating the ref-
ing coils are included in one supply system, program- erenced valve above 5C (41F) to minimize wipe-off
ming shall prohibit simultaneous heating and cooling overheating. Below 5C (41F), the steam valves shall
operation (unless required for dehumidification) and be full open and the face and bypass dampers shall be
smoothly sequence as loading changes. modulated for control. Ensure sensors and freeze stats
are adequately downstream of the face and bypass
dampers to get a good mixed condition.
D. Glycol Preheat Coils: Valves shall be sized for good 7.5.5.3 Reheat Coils
control across the range. Glycol supply temperature
A. Reheat Coil Valves: Reheat coil valves shall be sized
to the coil shall be reset with outside air such that the
for smooth and stable control. Reheat valves on reheat
required flow shall stay in the turbulent region on the
coils provided with the supply air handler shall close
coil. Alternatively, a coil recirculating pump may be pro-
when the system is off. Actuators on the reheat shall fail
vided that shall maintain flow in the turbulent region at
in a position as is applicable for the space it serves. For
low loads and based on outside air to ensure freeze pro-
specialty rooms, consult with the researcher as to the
tection. Coordinate with the AHU manufacturer and
potential for harm in either case. Examples are:
select the right temperature sensor.
1. General space reheat valves shall fail in the last
position or open.
7.5.5.2 Chilled Water Coils
A. Coil Selection: Chilled water coil selection shall be 2. Animal holding room reheat valves shall fail in
coordinated with the control design to ensure smooth the last position or closed (and room shall have
operation and stable control at low load, particularly high temperature alarm).
with 100% outdoor air units. If feasible, reset the
3. Computer room reheat valves shall fail closed.
chilled water temperature to keep the flow in the turbu-
lent region. As this may not be feasible if some units are B. Floating-Type Electric Actuator: For most terminal
dedicated to internal zones, provide an alternate means applications, a floating-type electric actuator will be
of ensuring adequate flow at low load. Chilled water acceptable such that timed recalibrations are required.
valves shall fail in a position based on the application: These shall not be permitted in critical applications
unless it can be demonstrated that the recalibration will
1. Chilled water valves serving 100% outdoor air
not result in temperature swings beyond the space-tem-
units shall fail open.
perature tolerance. The following occupancies shall not
2. Chilled water valves serving computer rooms or include floating reheats without approval of the PO and
other spaces that primarily need cooling shall the DTR:
fail open.
1. Animal holding rooms
3. Chilled water valves serving recirculating
2. Containment and high containment
systems, which in turn serve standard occupied
laboratories
zones shall be normally closed.
3. NMR suites
4. An automated isolation valve may be required
on chilled water supply pipe to coils serv- 4. EM suites
ing 100% OA units. This prevents flooding
the mechanical rooms and the causing major 5. Procedure rooms
damage to occupied floors below. A/E shall
6. Isolation rooms
review this requirement with NIH early in the
design process. 7. Any other application requiring tight
temperature tolerances
provide automatic ability to isolate the redundant con- modulating). All humidifiers shall be provided with
verter. Control shall be based on leaving heating water high limits sensors and cutout.
temperature, reset when feasible with systems served as
indicated for hydronic systems. B. Jacketed Humidifiers: For jacketed humidifiers that
keep the dispersion tubes heated, the BAS shall include
B. Required Points: Control points required for a typi- a two-position isolation valve on the humidifier steam
cal converter are (note that return temperatures are that is opened below an applicable outside air dewpoint
required at the system level): temperature and closed above it with an acceptable
dead band.
1. Enable (BO) when multiple converters are
provided C. Placing Sensors: Exercise care in placing sensors and
other components downstream of humidifiers to make
2. Capacity control (AO) to staged valves sure they are well past the absorption distance.
3. Discharge temperature (AI) D. Packaged System: When the humidifier is a pack-
C. Converter: Steam valves for the converter shall fail aged system such as a reboiler, the BAS shall monitor
closed. In some cases, the converter may be part of sci- a common alarm. Care shall be taken in applying local
entific equipment and any connection to the BAS shall packaged reboilers with regards to the continuity of
be at the request of the institute. steam pressure during fill cycles.
7.5.10 Filter Racks (Including B. Monitoring, Maintenance, and Mixing: The BAS
shall also monitor the rotation sensor and alarm when
Pre-, Final, and HEPA) rotation is expected and not proven. The heat-recovery
A. Differential Pressure Status: The BAS shall moni- sequence shall be coordinated with all other thermal
tor the differential pressure status of the filter bank. A and humidity loops in the air systems. Mechanical
differential pressure switch shall provide an indication design and the controls shall be provided to enable the
when the differential pressure across each bank of filters wheel to be isolated from any air stream for mainte-
exceeds the loaded condition associated with the rated nance. Averaging temperature sensors shall be used
flow on the unit. A differential pressure gauge shall also downstream of the wheel where space is not provided to
be mounted in parallel with each switch. allow adequate mixing as is typical on the supply side.
Adequate mixing distance shall be provided before a
B. Pressure Sensor: A pressure sensor (AI) shall be used single point sensor to ensure thorough mixing.
in lieu of a pressure switch on all HEPA filter banks.
Care shall be taken to filter the contaminants in the C. Sequence Modes: Heat wheel sequence shall include
dirty sensing line to keep the sensor clean. Provisions the following modes:
shall also be made to decontaminate and remove the
1. Winter Mode: Winter mode shall be specified
sensing-line HEPA filter.
when the outside-air temperature is below the
supply air set point minus 3C (37.4F). The
speed of the drive shall be modulated to main-
tain the supply temperature leaving the heat-
7.5.11 Exhaust Air Stacks recovery coil at a set point coordinated with the
other loops in the supply system.
(Contaminated Systems)
The velocity of the exhaust air in exhaust stacks shall 2. Intermediate Mode: Intermediate Mode mode is
be controlled to maintain adequate dispersion and to used when the outside-air temperature is above
prevent entrainment in outside-air systems. When sys- the supply air set point and below the return/
tems are constant volume, no monitoring is necessary. exhaust air temperature (or enthalpy when des-
When systems are VAV, bypass air is used to maintain iccant technology and a total energy sequence is
the stacks at constant volume, no monitoring is neces- employed). In this mode, the wheel shall rotate
sary. However, if the minimum velocity is maintained at a minimum speed.
by staging systems or any means where the velocity in 3. Summer Mode: When the outside air tempera-
the stack varies, airflow velocity sensor shall be pro- ture (or enthalpy) is above that indicated for the
vided if the velocity cannot be calculated from mea- high side of the intermediate range, the wheel
sured airflow. Single point sensors positioned and cali- shall rotate at maximum speed.
brated shall be adequate for this.
4. Antifrost: When the air temperature leaving the
exhaust coil falls below 0C (32F), the speed
of the wheel shall be reduced to maintain that
temperature at 0C.
7.5.12 Heat-Recovery Wheels
A. BAS Control: The BAS shall fully control heat-
Rationale: Careful control strategies are required
recovery wheels including sensing the temperature of all
to operate a heat-recovery wheel and ensure
four air streams around the wheel, and the speed of the
maximum recovery effectiveness of the entire
wheel via the speed drive furnished with the wheel.
ventilation system.
7.5.13 Variable Air Volume/ grade as long as they are fitted with fast-acting actua-
tors and the control contractor accepts responsibility
Constant Volume Terminals for overall zone performance in writing. Dampers on
A. Components: The VAV control shall be pressure-inde- fume hoods shall fail open.
pendent and shall be fully DDC on secondary controllers.
C. Monitor/Alarm: Where airflow is not measured and
Exception: critical applications shall be controlled by it is inferred from a valve position as in a venturi valve
primary controllers as indicated below). application, the BAS shall monitor and alarm the con-
dition where the pressure in the duct is inadequate to
The damper fail position shall apply to the space/com- maintain the correlation.
ponent it is serving. Where there are no specific require-
ments for the fail position, it may be a cost-effective
floating (tri-state) actuator that fails in the last posi- Rationale: Coordinate VAV and fume hood
tion. Commercial electronic actuators shall be provided control dampers (air valves) to ensure accurate
unless indicated otherwise. Specialty applications are airflow control.
listed below.
2. In constant volume (CV) systems, the airflow 2. Fly rooms shall fail closed.
set point shall be dictated by the schedule.
3. Valves serving computer rooms shall fail in the
Occupied and unoccupied set points shall be as
last position or closed.
dictated in the design.
4. Valves serving standard occupied zones that
have exterior walls shall fail in the last position
7.5.13.1 Serving Zones
or fail open. Those serving interior spaces shall
with VAV Fume Hoods
fail in last position or closed.
A. Integral with Zone Level: The control of the ter-
minals shall be integral with the overall zone-track-
ing logic as indicated under the zone level. Actuators 7.5.13.3 Floating Control Damper
shall be fast acting (full stroke < 2 second) electronic and Valve Actuators
actuators. The fume hood controls shall be required to A. Non-critical Applications: Floating control appli-
meet the aggressive control requirements mandated by cations shall only be used in non-critical applications.
the NIH/ASHRAE 110 Modified Fume Hood Testing Examples of where floating actuators may be used
Protocol as described in Section 6.1.16.4. Therefore, include:
consider having the control manufacturer provide the
fume hood exhaust terminal. 1. Animal facility reheat valves where it can be
shown that they never present a temperature
B. Fast-Acting Actuators: Supply- and general-exhaust variation that is outside acceptable ranges
terminals associated with that zone may be commercial
2. Corridors that are not part of adjacent labora- C. Independent Hood Monitoring and Alarming: Any
tory space-pressure control independent hood monitoring and alarming device pro-
vided by the institute shall not be tied into the BAS.
4. Actuators on supply and exhaust air terminal C. Humidity/Condensation: A relative humidity sensor
units shall modulate between scheduled maxi- shall be provided, and the BAS shall calculate space dew-
mum and minimum supply and exhaust air vol- point temperature based on measure space temperature
umes to each pressure control zone, thus main- and relative humidity. The chilled beam supply water
taining tracking differential and directional temperature must be actively maintained to at least 3C
airflow control. (37.4F) or 4C (39.2F) above the room air dewpoint.
Each temperature control zone shall be provided with
5. During the emergency or distress mode opera- a condensation sensor. Upon sensing condensation, the
tion, the chilled beam air supply duct branch- BAS shall close the chilled water control valve to chilled
isolation damper shall be closed automatically, beams in the room and generate a critical alarm.
and the reheat coil control valve and the chilled
water coil control valve serving the chilled D. Chilled Beam Insulation/Installation: Chilled beam
beam unit modulate to respond to the tempera- insulation and installation details, specification, and
ture change in the space. Actuators on supply sequence of operation are required for review.
and exhaust air terminal units shall modulate
to maintain emergency mode (distress mode)
supply and exhaust air volumes to each pressure
control zone, thus maintaining tracking differ-
ential and directional airflow control. The A/E 7.5.18 Glycol Run Around
shall coordinate with the end user to determine Heat Recovery Coils
the emergency-mode airflow (e.g., half of the
E. BAS shall fully control the glycol heat recovery coil
normal operating airflow).
system. BAS shall control start/stop of the circulating
6. Because a chilled-beam cannot remove latent pump and monitor status of the pump and alarm upon
load, the A/E shall provide an instrumentation failure. In addition, the BAS shall monitor temperature
and control strategy to avoid condensation in the air stream on the exhaust coils.
two stages:
Contents:
7.6.13 Commissioning
insulated conductors twisted and shielded together to More precise instrumentation may be necessary for spe-
minimize interference by unwanted signals. cific applications where higher temperature or humidity
tolerances and resolutions are required.
B. Twisted Shielded Pairs: Select twisted shielded
pairs to carry information with highest speed possible B. Matched Sensor Pairs: Matched sensor pairs are
depending on the in-place characteristics of the existing tested by the manufacturer and certified to indicate
field panel or field equipment communications. Select within 0.5C (1F). The following applications shall
twisted shield pairs to obtain the highest field equip- require matched sensor pairs:
ment communications.
1. Building Loop Connections: Provide matched
C. Control Wiring: Control wiring shall be run to avoid loop and building-supply sensors where con-
electromagnetic interference from other equipment. trol sequence requires controlling to a tem-
Control wiring shall be run in its own raceway. Control perature rise.
wiring shall not be run through a variable frequency
drive (VFD) cabinet. 2. Hydronic Temperature-Difference Calculations:
Provide matched-supply and return-tempera-
ture sensors where the pair is used for calcu-
7.6.1.4 Power to Controllers lating temperature difference for use in load
A. Reliable Power Source: At a minimum, power to calculations or sequencing.
controllers shall be the most reliable source that powers C. Room-Temperature Sensors: A room-temperature
equipment controlled by that controller. For instance, if sensor shall be an element contained within a ventilated
the controller serves a fan that is on emergency power, cover, suitable for wall mounting. Provide an insulated
the controller shall at least be fed from an emergency base. The following sensing elements are acceptable:
circuit. On critical applications, controllers shall be
powered from the UPS to maintain continuous opera- 1. The sensing element shall be a platinum resis-
tion throughout power outages and transfers. Where the tant temperature device (RTD), thermistor, or
controller power is a different source than that which integrated circuit, 0.5C ( 1F) accuracy at
feeds the equipment, then some form of monitoring the calibration point.
shall be provided to inform the controller of the state of
the power to the served equipment. For instance, three- 2. Provide set-point adjustment where approved
phase monitors may be used as inputs to the controller. by the PO. The set-point adjustment shall be a
Positions of transfer switches may also be monitored. warmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable
via the direct digital control (DDC) system.
B. Critical Applications: In critical applications, where
power transfers from emergency power back to normal 3. Provide an occupancy override button on the
power shall result in open transitions that may cause room-sensor enclosure where occupied/unoc-
controls or equipment to stop or fail, consider requir- cupied sequences are used. This shall be a
ing the BAS to monitor the point that indicates that a momentary contact closure.
transfer is imminent so that the controller can execute a D. Multiple Thermal Zones: When one temperature
controlled stop and restart. sensor is used to control multiple thermal zones intended
for occupancy by different people in the various zones,
sensors shall not have space-temperature adjustment.
1. The sensing element shall be a platinum RTD, 1. The sensing element shall be a platinum RTD,
thermistor, or integrated circuit, 0.12C thermistor, or integrated circuit, 0.23C
( 0.22F) accuracy at the calibration point. ( 0.41F) accuracy at calibration point.
F. Low-Limit Duct Temperature Sensors (Freeze Stats): J. Outside-Air-Temperature Sensors: These shall con-
Low-limit preheat temperature sensor consist of low- sist of a sensor, sun shield, utility box, and a water-tight
limit element, junction box for wiring connections, gasket to prevent water seepage. The temperature range
and a gasket to prevent leakage or vibration noise. The shall be as required for resolution as indicated above.
sensing element shall be one linear meter for each one
square meter of coil face area. The sensor shall read the 1. The sensing element shall be a platinum RTD,
lowest temperature on any 0.3 m (1 ft.) section of sens- thermistor, or integrated circuit, 0.23C
ing element. The sensing element shall be evenly placed ( 0.41F) accuracy at the calibration point.
in serpentine configuration on the downstream side of
the preheat coil between coil and next heat transfer 7.6.2.1 Temperature Transmitters
component.
Where required by the controller, the sensors as speci-
G. Averaging Duct Temperature Sensors: These shall fied above may be matched with transmitters output-
consist of an averaging element, a junction box for ting 420 mA linearly across the specified temperature
wiring connections, and a gasket to prevent air leak- range. Transmitters shall have zero and span adjust-
age. Provide sensor lengths and quantities to result in ments, an accuracy of 0.06C (0.11F) when applied to
one linear meter (3.28 linear ft.) of sensing element for the sensor range.
each 3 square meters (32 ft.2) of coil/duct face area. The
temperature range as required for resolution is as indi-
cated above.
7.6.4.1 Air Static and Velocity Transmitters be linearized in the transmitter or by the BAS. Accuracy
in a properly located meter shall be better than 5%.
A. Applications: Transmitters include static pressure
or differential static pressure and velocity pressure. B. Water and Steam Greater than 2:1 Turndown:
Provide the smallest range feasible for the application. Provide either a turbine flow meter, vortex shedding
Auto-zero modules shall be used on air-flow transmit- meter, magnetic meter or, when measuring water, an
ters to periodically re-zero the transmitter. Zero and ultrasonic flow meter.
span adjustments accuracy shall be 1% of full scale
for static and 0.25% for air velocity. 1. Turbine Flow Meter: Turbine flow meters may
be used for measuring flow of chilled water and
steam with a high turn down ratio unless pro-
7.6.4.2 Liquid Differential Pressure hibited by pipe size. The turbine flow meters
Transmitters shall be installed so that they may be immersed
Pressure transmitters shall gauge pressure in the form and removed for maintenance and calibration
of a linear 420 mA signal. All components shall be without disrupting flow. Hot tap methods
hermetically sealed in a type 316 stainless steel case. shall be used to install turbine flow meters in
Provide a wall-mounted 5 valve cabinet for mounting existing line under pressure. Accuracy in a prop-
the transmitter. Pressure transmitters shall meet the fol- erly located meter shall be better than 5%.
lowing performance criteria:
2. Ultrasonic Flow Meter: Ultrasonic flow meters
1. 0.5% accuracy over the entire span may be used for measuring flow of water sys-
tems with a high turn down ratio. Accuracy in a
2. Repeatability: 0.1% at maximum span properly located meter shall be better than 5%.
3. Stability: 0.25% of upper range for a period 3. Vortex Shedding Flow Meter: Vortex shedding
of 6 months flow meters may be used for measuring flow
of steam systems with a high turn down ratio.
Accuracy in a properly located meter shall be
better than 5%.
7.6.5.1 Current Switches E. Steam Control Valves: Steam control valves shall be
cage-guided globe or plug valves with a linear or equal
A. For Constant Speed Motors: Current switches shall
percentage characteristic. Modulating valves shall be
be provided for status indication of constant speed
sized for in excess of 75% of the rated steam supply
motors. Switch shall indicate loss of status when current
temperature. Fail positions shall be as follows:
falls below an adjustable trip point. Current switches
shall include light-emitting diode (LED) indication of 1. Primary Heating: As dictated for occupancy or
status. application but normally open as a default
B. Variable Speed Motors: Current switches shall be 2. Clean Steam: Normally closed
provided for status indication of variable speed motors.
In applications where minimum operating amp draw is 3. Humidifiers: Normally closed
less than no load motor amp draw at 60 Hz, switch
F. Water Valves: Modulating water valves may be
shall be self-calibrating based on VA memory associated
globe, ball, or butterfly valves with an equal percent-
with frequency. This shall form a curve to determine the
age or linear characteristic (building chilled water valve
trip point based on speed such that it shall detect a belt
controlling flow from the loop which shall be linear). A
break with subsequent increase of control output to 60
modulating water valve shall be sized for greater than
Hz. Current switches shall include LED indication of
50% of the controlled circuit pressure drop. Refer to
status. In a critical application, proof or loss of proof
Chapter 6 for high-performance type control valves for
shall consistently indicate within 10 seconds of event.
chilled water and electron microscope applications. Fail
positions shall be as follows:
7.6.5.2 Control Valves
1. Primary Heating: As dictated for occupancy or
A. General: Valves shall be applicable for the rated application but normally open as a default
pressure and temperature service. Close-off pressures,
determined in concert with the actuators and valves 2. Primary Cooling: Normally open serving a
shall be specified to close off against extreme antici- 100% outdoor air units and or cooling only
pated conditions. Valves shall be selected such that they applications. Otherwise, they shall be normally
are not oversized. closed.
B. Modulating Valves: Modulating valves shall be care- 3. Building Chilled Water Valve: Normally open
fully selected to control in a smooth and stable fash-
4. Terminal Reheat: Last position or as dictated
ion across the range of anticipated conditions. General
by the zone served
requirements are indicated below.
G. Water Pressure-Independent: Modulating water
C. Flow Characteristic Analyses: Flow characteristic
valves may be pressure-independent such that they
analyses shall be submitted when the selection criteria
maintain a given flow at a given stroke within required
indicated below does not match with the correlation
pressure range. The valves shall require no maintenance
between stroke and flow.
and shall not include replaceable cartridges. Flow accu-
D. Valves: All valves over 25 mm (1 in.) shall have a racy shall be +/- 5% due to system pressure fluctuations.
position indicator. The BAS output to modulating valves Pressure-independent valves are not preferred.
shall be analog with the following exceptions:
with a mixed-air sections, used for promoting mixing, and operating range. Additionally, provide positive
and where sizes dictate single blade. Dampers shall be positioners on all modulating pneumatic valves larger
opposed blade. than 50 mm (2 in.) and as shown on drawings.
G. Control Air under High Pressure: Control air shall 7.6.8 Control Wiring
be pressurized to a high pressure for supply and stor-
age. This pressure shall be adequate to meet the require- A. Electrical Metal Tubing: All control wiring in
ments of the system. Pressure-reducing stations shall mechanical equipment rooms or other spaces in which it
then be provided to reduce and trim the pressure to is readily accessible shall be installed in electrical metal
a consistent pressure. Pressure-reducing valve (PRV) tubing (EMT) with compression fittings.
stations shall include redundant PRVs and a manual B. Interstitial Spaces: All control wiring run in intersti-
bypass. Each compressed air supply shall include a filter tial spaces shall either be run in EMT with compression
dryer, which again shall be redundant to allow uninter- fittings or a cable tray or raceway.
rupted operation.
C. Rigid Conduit: All control wiring installed outdoors
or any area subject to moisture shall be installed in rigid
conduit.
7.6.7 Control Tubing D. Vertical Chases: All control wiring installed in verti-
cal chases shall be installed in EMT with compression
A. Type L Copper Tubing: All copper tubing in
fittings.
mechanical equipment rooms shall be hard-drawn Type
L copper. E. Non-Accessible Ceilings: All control wiring above
non-accessible ceilings shall be installed in EMT with
B. Non-Plenum Return Ceilings: All tubing installed
compression fittings.
above non-plenum return lift-out ceilings shall be Type
FR self-extinguishing polyethylene. F. Non-Lab/ARF Accessible Ceiling Spaces: All control
wiring installed above accessible ceiling spaces that are
C. Plenum Return Ceilings: All tubing installed in
not located above laboratories or animal holding areas
plenum return ceilings shall be soft copper Type L.
shall be plenum type, not installed in conduit, but neatly
D. Vertical Chases: All control tubing installed in verti- run with generous use of rings or ties.
cal chases shall be hard copper. Drip legs on vertical
G. Control Functions/Wire Color: Similar control
risers and shut-off valves shall be located in an acces-
functions shall have a similar wire color.
sible location where the main leaves the riser.
H. Controller to the Sensor: Wire shall not be spliced
E. Non-Accessible Walls or Ceilings: All control tubing
from the controller to the sensor.
installed in non-accessible walls or ceilings shall be soft
copper. I. Terminal Strips: All terminations shall be on termi-
nal strips.
F. Outdoor/Indoor Tubing: All control tubing installed
outside shall be jacketed hard copper for single lines and J. Raceways/Junction Boxes Color Code: Color code
sheathed polyethylene for multiple lines. All lines out- all raceways and junction boxes with color directed by
doors shall be heat traced. the design engineering group.
G. Control Panels: All tubing in control panels shall be K. Separate Control from Power Wiring: Control
Type FR polyethylene. wiring shall not be routed in the same raceway as power
wiring.
H. Air Hangers: All control air hangers shall be clamp
type and shall not be attached to other trades.
be in accordance with NFPA and NIH regulations. have this capability. If they do not request this in
All fire-rated features of the contract design must be writing, they shall reprogram or reconfigure the
approved by the Division of the Fire Marshal (DFM). systems as required during testing.
7.6.11 Software and Software 1. Password protection shall be granular with the
capability to provide rights by group of point, by
Set-Up Requirements type of task, by level of security, etc.
A. Controllers: Controllers shall be provided with
C. Access Restrictions: On containment applications,
a real-time operating system resident in read-only
access restriction capability shall include the ability
memory (ROM). This software shall execute indepen-
to require supervisory confirmation of additions and
dently from any other devices in the system. It shall sup-
changes to the BAS and have all steps tracked in an
port all specified functions. It shall provide a command
auditing log.
prioritization scheme to allow functional override of
control functions. At a minimum, the following shall D. Containment Validations: In containment applica-
be provided: tions, the BAS software shall conform to Title 21 CFR
11, Electronic Signatures, to provide a secure audit trail
1. Real-time operating system software
of performance and system additions and changes.
2. Real-time clock/calendar and network time
E. Alarming and Message Routing: BAS shall provide for
synchronization (except terminal controllers)
alarming, alarm management, and alarm routing. Each
3. CPU diagnostic software controller shall perform distributed, independent alarm
analysis, and filtering to minimize operator interruptions
4. LAN communication software due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic,
and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall a
5. DDC software
controllers ability to report alarms be affected by opera-
6. Alarm processing and buffering software tor activity at an operator workstation or local handheld
device, or by communications with other panels on the
7. Energy-management software network. BAS shall provide for a prioritization scheme
that allows associated routing and alarm management.
8. Data trending, reporting, and buffering
Upon receipt of an alarm at a graphic workstation, the
software
alarm condition shall be enunciated regardless of any
9. I/O (physical and virtual) database. Inputs and other part of the graphic software being open. Alarm
outputs shall have the capability to be overrid- management features shall include:
den for emergency modes and testing. If the
1. The ability to acknowledge and silence an alarm
design documentation does not specifically indi-
based on appropriate user-password level
cate the required I/O points, the control vendor
shall request in writing which I/O points shall 2. Automatic notification on return to normal
3. Storing the alarms in a database that shall allow temperature-sensor symbol. Indicate room num-
various queries by system, point, etc., and by bers as provided by the NIH. Provide a graphic
status and priority level link from each zone and/or equipment symbol
shown on the graphic floor plan screens to each
4. BAS shall have the capability to e-mail or send corresponding equipment-schematic graphic
phone alarms to a central call-in desk or to des- screen.
ignated people
a. Provide graphic floor plan screens for each
5. Each new system or extension of the BAS shall mechanical equipment room and a plan
include the configuration of alarm routing as screen of the roof. Indicate the location of
required by maintenance staff. each item of mechanical equipment. Provide
F. Trending: To support commissioning and building a drawing link from each equipment symbol
data mining, the BAS shall be capable of trending and shown on the graphic plan view screen to
archiving all points on primary and universal program- each corresponding mechanical system sche-
mable controllers at a minimum of 15 minute intervals. matic-graphic screen.
The BAS shall also have the capability of trending at b. If multiple floor plans are necessary to show
least 3 points on each terminal controller at an inter- all areas, provide a graphic building key
val of 30 minutes. Controller memory capability and plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views
control bandwidth shall be designed to account for this as necessary to graphically indicate the loca-
trending. Control trends shall be established by the con- tion of all of the larger scale floor plans.
trol vendor during startup and prior to functional per- Link the graphic building key plan to larger-
formance testing of the systems. When the native trend scale partial floor plans. Provide links from
store is not in a commonly acceptable format, reports each larger-scale graphic floor-plan screen
shall be scheduled to output the data to a common to the building key plan and to each of the
format. Comma separated text, Microsoft formats such other graphic floor-plan screens.
as Excel and Access, and a portable database format are
considered common formats. c. Provide a graphic site plan with links to and
from each building graphic.
G. Trend Graphs: Software shall provide for display-
ing line graphs or graphic plots of the trended values. 2. System Schematic Screens: Provide a graphic
Software shall support multiple scales. The control system-schematic screen for each HVAC subsys-
vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner tem controlled with each I/O point in the project
for each system. appearing on at least one graphic screen. System
graphics shall include flow diagrams with status,
H. Dynamic Graphs: Software shall provide for real- set points, current analog I/O values, operator
time plotting/graphing of multiple values. The control commands, etc. The general layout of the system
vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner shall be schematically correct. I/O devices shall
for each system. be shown in their schematically correct loca-
I. Graphic Screens: tions. Include appropriate engineering units for
each displayed point value. English-language
1. Floor Plan Screens: Provide graphic floor plan descriptors shall be included for each point on
screens for each floor and or section of the build- all graphics; this may be accomplished by the
ing. Indicate the location of all equipment that use of a pop-up window accessed by selecting
is not located on the equipment-room screens. the displayed point with the mouse. Indicate all
Indicate the location of temperature sensors adjustable set points on the applicable system
associated with each temperature-controlled schematic graphic screen, or if space does not
zone (i.e., VAV terminals, fan coils, single-zone allow, on a supplemental linked set-point screen.
AHUs, etc.) on the floor-plan screens. Display All outputs shall be represented in terms of per-
the space temperature point adjacent to each cent open:
a. Provide graphic screens for each air handling 7.6.12 Operator Workstations
system. Indicate all control-point values
(see application requirements for required Hardware
points) and mode of operation as applicable A. General: This section covers the hardware require-
(i.e., occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool- ments of the operator workstation. Graphic-operator
down). Link screens for air handlers to the workstations shall be provided as indicated under
heating-system and cooling-system graph- Section 7.2, Infrastructure. The software requirements
ics. Link screens for supply and exhaust are covered above in Section 7.6.11, Software and
systems if they are not combined onto one Software Set-Up Requirements.
screen.
B. Inclusions: Below are general requirements for oper-
b. Provide a graphic screen for each hydronic ator workstation computers. The A/E shall refine these
system. requirements to keep current and be commensurate
with user need. All computers provided as stationary
c. Provide a graphic screen for each termi-
operator workstations shall include the following:
nal unit. In addition to points associated
with the unit, indicate mode of operation 1. Processor speed, disk-storage capacity, memory,
as applicable (i.e., normal occupied, unoc- color printer, and monitor shall be of at least
cupied, warm-up, maximum heating, and what is available at the time of installation at
maximum cooling). Provide links between midrange offerings from major computer retail-
the applicable floor plan screen and this ers. The A/E shall develop full specifications
screen. Also, provide links to the graphics from the DRM requirements.
representing the parent systems.
2. The operating system shall be Microsoft
d. Link screens for heating and cooling system Windows.
graphics to utility history reports show-
ing current and monthly electric usage, 3. 1024 768 resolution (at the minimum) 432
demands, peak values, etc. mm (17 in.) (at the minimum) monitor
Contents:
able to stop an air system serving a containment E. Controllers: All controllers in a BSL-3 lab area shall
barrier or enclosure. provide stand-alone capability at the suite level. The
A/E shall clearly indicate both tracking relationships
See Chapter 6, Mechanical Design for VFD requirements. between airflow terminals and clearly indicate the bio-
containment boundaries of a collection of rooms (suite)
that shall be controlled by the same controller.
area concerning starting, power outage, rotation, and shall be standard. If the BSC is ducted, it may at times
proof logic and hardware. The monitoring requirements be isolated for decontamination. Controls must main-
of a BSL-3 space include: tain suite pressurization while the BSC is being decon-
taminated. Either provision for an alternate path for the
1. Space temperature airflow shall be made, or adjustments to adjacent offsets
2. Space differential pressure with local indication shall be made when the BSC isolation damper is sensed
as closed.
3. Alarm conditions and strobe in associated
rooms, outside of all entry doors C. Cage and Rack Wash Suites: These areas shall be
temperature and pressure controlled. The pressuriza-
4. Humidity (where zone-level humidity is tion shall be controlled passively to maintain contami-
required only) nant flow from clean to dirty areas. Only the space tem-
perature must be monitored.
5. Supply/exhaust velocity (total/static differential)
pressure.
B. UPS and Emergency Power: Central system control- 7.7.7 BSL-3 Laboratories:
lers shall also be on uninterruptable power supply (UPS)
and emergency power, and must detect power interrup- Drainage and Waste Systems
tions and take appropriate action locally. This in effect Refer to Section 8.4, Drainage Systems for general
means providing a three-phase monitor as an input to requirements.
the controller.
For containment and high containment applications,
C. Isolation Damper Closing Rates: Isolation damper the BAS shall monitor a common alarm from any efflu-
closing rates shall be tuned to isolate the lagging system ent decontamination system. The BAS shall monitor the
quicker than the leading systems to ensure airflow in the effluent temperature and alarm upon effluent tempera-
correct direction. tures above 60C (140F) when the effluent decontami-
nation is done with heat.
D. Pressure Cutout Switches: Pressure cutout switches
shall be tuned to trip the unit when extended beyond
normal pressure, but shall have adequate delay to avoid
nuisance trips due to short transient excursions. Trips
from excessive pressure shall be manually reset. 7.7.8 Exhaust Air Stacks
E. Controllers Restore Volatile Memory: Controllers (Contaminated Systems)
shall have the capability to automatically restore their The velocity of the exhaust air in exhaust stacks shall
volatile memory upon loss of current. be controlled to maintain adequate dispersion and to
F. Damper Actuators: Damper actuators shall be fast- prevent entrainment in outside-air systems. When sys-
acting able to stroke the dampers within 2 seconds. tems are constant volume, no monitoring is necessary.
Damper fail positions shall be selected to fail in the When systems are variable air volume (VAV), bypass
direction that would maintain pressurization. Fail in air is used to maintain the stacks at constant volume,
last-position actuators shall only be used with specific no monitoring is necessary. However, if the minimum
permission. velocity is maintained by staging systems or any means
where the velocity in the stack varies, an airflow veloc-
G. Firemens Override Controls: Where firemens over- ity sensor shall be provided if the velocity cannot be
ride controls are used, the A/E shall consult with the calculated from measured airflow. Single point sensors
DFM to determine the damper positions when the positioned and calibrated shall be adequate for this.
override mode is activated. They shall continue normal
operating positions, but this shall be evaluated on a
case-by-case basis. Firemens override shall not be able
to stop an air-system serving a containment barrier or
enclosure. The laboratory ventilation system must con- 7.7.9 Variable Frequency
tinue to provide directional airflow. Drives in Critical Applications
Room pressure critical areas include BSL-3/ABSL-3
and any others identified as critical during the planning
and as determined by a risk assessment. The following
7.7.6 BSL-3 Laboratories: applies to these areas:
7.7.10 Installation
Requirements
7.7.10.1 Wall Penetrations
Where controls penetrate biocontainment barriers,
penetration shall be in accordance with the BSL-3 and
ABSL-3 sealing requirements. See Appendix L, Sealant
Table.
Contents
Equipment Standard. Systems serving Animal or domestic water systems, the use of approved tita-
Research Facilities (ARFs) shall be in confor- nium nickel alloy cryogenic shape memory taps may
mance with NIH Public Health Service Policy on be provided.
Humane Care and Use of Laboratory Animals,
requirements of the Office of Laboratory Animal
Welfare (OLAW), and shall meet or exceed 8.1.3.2 Centralized Services
requirements of the American Veterinary Medical A. Centralized vs. Local Services and Equipment:
Association (AVMA) recommendations. Provision of centralized utility services and their appro-
priate distribution shall be utilized wherever possible.
Core services should be available at or near to all
research areas. Provision of multiple, local dedicated
services and localized equipment is not acceptable in
8.1.3 General Planning lieu of central services for routine, non-hazardous fluid
Requirements system applications. This provision should not preclude
local equipment which may be required to serve a spe-
Refer to Section 1.15.1, Common Engineering
cific and specialized program area that is not required
Requirements, and additionally comply with the
in other areas of the facility; or for other reasons as
following:
approved by DTR.
A. Basic Principles: The arrangement of plumbing sys-
B. Limited Utility Service Demand: Where a special-
tems shall be designed to promote reliability, operational
ized utility service demand is limited and would only
flexibility, service, and capacity for renovation without
be beneficial to serve the demands of a specific or very
affecting other areas or interfering with research.
limited program area, the use of localized services shall
B. Location: Equipment and piping for building ser- be evaluated and applied as appropriate.
vices (especially liquids) shall not be located in spaces
C. Utility Sizing: If a major utility service is required
subject to freezing or below 4.44C (40F), except as
for a project but is not present (e.g., water, compressed
specifically approved by the Office Research Facilities
gas etc.), the utility sizing/capacity shall be approved by
(ORF). Avoid locating equipment and piping near air
DTR. In many cases this may require upsizing of ser-
intake louvers or similar environmental control hazards.
vices beyond those required for an individual project.
C. Sizing for Equipment and Other High or Constant
Demand Loads: Demand loads of equipment and other
Rationale: Central services help to ensure
constant or high-flow demands shall be considered sep-
the intended reliability, maintenance, quality,
arately and independent of diversities applied to general
facility risk control and economy of each utility.
fixtures and outlets to ensure adequate capacity.
Distribution of mains (or available distribution
from risers) of common services ensure that
8.1.3.1 Preservation of Service laboratories may be flexible for a broad range of
and Operational Safety research.
B. Equipment Variability/Flexibility: Systems shall be application and shall be specified in accordance with
designed with appropriate consideration of variables Exhibit 6.3, Piping Designation, Material, Fittings,
between manufacturers and equipment options so as and Joints in Chapter 6, Mechanical Design and any
to maintain flexibility for changes during and after the additional requirements within individual sections.
design. Only new, unstressed and uncontaminated materials
may be utilized.
C. Cleanliness and Integrity: System design and mate-
rials shall not compromise the required purity levels B. Labeling and Identification on Contract Documents
or cleanliness of the systems and shall be sufficient to and Installed Piping Systems: All piping systems shall
maintain long-term integrity and safety. be identified using system-nomenclature-specific pipe
labels. Piping shall be identified in a clear and unam-
D. Systems Capacity: Operational throughput and biguous manner. Labeling of piping and systems shall
usage profiles (including potential of simultaneous use) follow NIH standards to provide consistent and uni-
shall be evaluated for all equipment and systems shall form identification. See Exhibit 6.3.
be sized to accommodate worst case operational condi-
tions. Use profiles of major equipment shall be coordi- C. Special Requirements: In laboratory, clinical, and
nated with other building loads to prevent over sizing. ARF projects, the selection of materials and installation
methods shall incorporate unique program require-
ments (e.g., magnetic fields, special material restric-
8.1.3.4 Energy-Efficiency and tions, shielding requirements, washability, moisture,
Water Conservation biosafety, chemical exposure etc.). Manufacturer equip-
A. Best Practices: Systems shall be designed and equip- ment site planning guides shall be reviewed for scien-
ment selected using best practices to achieve optimal tific equipment and coordinated with the most stringent
energy-efficiency and water conservation without com- requirements.
promising the research program, safety, or reliability.
D. Buried Piping Systems: All non-electrically conduc-
B. Life Cycle Cost Analysis: Approaches must be cost- tive buried piping systems outside of buildings shall be
effective, durable, holistically considered, and present a provided with proper identification. See Section 3.3,
reasonable payback based upon a properly performed, Site Utilities.
comprehensive life cycle analysis. A project with a pay-
back of 10 years or less is generally favorable.
basis. With prior approval of ORF, future capacity may the line mode may be used (e.g., lead equipment VFD)
be reduced to 10% for office and non-critical spaces. where such would not compromise proper operation or
safe system control. Separate electrical disconnects are
B. Existing Systems: Whenever connections are made required at control panels serving redundant equipment.
into existing systems serving new equipment, additions, Failure of programmable logic controller (PLC) condi-
or renovated areas, the A/E shall ensure the existing tions shall provide critical alert notification. Where an
system will not be adversely affected or fall below the item is critically dependent on services of another dis-
standards of codes or DRM requirements. The A/E may cipline, the A/E shall coordinate with that discipline to
be required to study existing infrastructure and systems minimize risks.
capacity well beyond the actual planned point of con-
nection to ensure adequacy. 1. Any equipment item whose failure or routine
maintenance would result in substantial loss
C. Monitoring and Alarms: At a minimum, primary of building operations, could impact research,
equipment supply systems and other items deemed criti- or scientific equipment shall be provided with
cal shall be monitored and alarm to local equipment DRM-required redundancy. All such systems
display panels and/or other NIH approved locations. and their respective monitoring devices shall be
Alarms shall indicate alarm cause with multiple levels provided with standby power. See Chapter 10,
of alarm response criticality (not less than a general Electrical Design.
fault and where applicable a critical and/or emergency
fault) to the building automation system (BAS). Alarms 2. N + 1 arrangements shall be online and opera-
monitoring program areas of one user group shall be tional (such as automatic alternating/lead-lag),
located such that an annunciation provides indication reduced load operation, or otherwise configured
immediately to the responsible and affected party and to ensure equal wear time, reliability, availabil-
personnel designated by NIH to receive and respond ity of the redundant source, as well as to pre-
to such alarm condition. Alarms shall be self-moni- clude stagnation or deterioration of fluid quality.
toring to ensure alert in the event of a power or other
alarm failure. Refer to Chapter 7, Building Automation 3. Equipment which may operate suitably in an
Systems for additional requirements. automatic (but not PLC controlled) mode may be
utilized, as to avoid disruptions. Arrangements
D. Fail-Safe Condition and Restoration of Service: may include constant pressure bypass control
Upon unplanned loss of energy, systems and their arrangements (e.g., arrangements that automati-
associated control devices shall fail only to a normally cally revert upon PLC failure to sequence with
safe condition that prevents injury to persons or ani- automatic control valves such as pressure regula-
mals and minimizes potential damage to the structure tors as opposed to electronic controls).
or loss of research. Upon power failure and subsequent
restoration of power, all devices required for proper 4. The design capacity split and equipment quan-
system operation shall automatically restart without tities shall be provided with regard to main-
requiring manual intervention unless it is otherwise taining proper system operation in an energy
unsafe to do so. and cost-efficient manner (e.g., providing three
equipment items at 50% load may be preferable
E. Equipment Redundancy: All primary system equip- to two at 100%, or alternative capacity splits).
ment, as well as devices requiring frequent maintenance This is particularly important if peak demand is
or performing major control functions (e.g., master low during much of the operating time. Devices
thermostatic control valves, primary filters and pri- such as major pressure control stations (PRVs)
mary regulators) shall be provided with not less than may be staged as appropriate to ensure efficient
N + 1 redundancy (in parallel), appropriately sized and operation while maintaining capacity for essen-
selected for efficient operation and durability. The N + tial building function.
1 arrangement shall include equipment and components
as to avoid common, plausible failures and to minimize 5. Where approved by ORF, N + 1 redundancy is
risks. Individual variable frequency drives (VFDs) shall not required for dedicated office or other non-
be provided except that failure to an automatic across critical spaces; such systems shall be arranged
to minimize likely failures or extended disrup- 2. A single riser (or single set of remotely distrib-
tion. Redundancy is required for equipment uted primary and redundant risers for criti-
providing water supply and hot water to central cal services) shall serve entire building wings.
commercial food service, regardless of facility Multiple individual risers for individual stacked
application. areas (with the exception of core toilet rooms) is
generally not acceptable.
individual floors or single risers serving floors individual labs and individual floors may be
will address all associated use points. Isolation shutdown without disrupting the service to the
of individual wings shall be possible at least entire floor, other floors, or building areas.
on an individual floor level; therefore, it is not
acceptable for adjacent wings or floors to be 4. Serpentine distribution of services from one
affected if an individual floor or group of floors floor to another, one building to another, one
within one wing, or any combination of indi- wing to another, or one ARF program area to
vidual floors within a wing must be taken out of another or in a different part of the building,
service to accomplish a shutdown, renovation, is unacceptable whether or not bypass arrange-
or repair. ments are provided.
8.1.5.2 Redundancy of Critical Service toilet rooms, program area, and other points as required
Risers and Mains such that service and modifications may be performed
without affecting other areas. Shut-off valves are
A. Critical Service Risers: Redundancy shall be pro-
required for each major corridor/main line and on all
vided for critical service risers for major facilities or
recirculation/return lines to correspond with each main
as required by ORF, or per the program requirements.
or branch line supply valve.
Critical services include: water (domestic and lab, hot
and cold), high-pressure compressed air, control air, B. Valving Independence: Where redundant equipment
and carbon dioxide. Additional services deemed criti- is provided, valving shall permit independent isola-
cal shall be determined on a project-specific basis in tion and replacement of components while systems are
consultation with the PO, ORF, and the program. maintained in operation.
New multistory facilities and other large facilities and
major renovations shall include redundancy of distribu- C. Individual Isolation: Each fixture and piece of equip-
tion system risers for critical services. Ring mains or ment shall be provided with an individual isolation valve
double-fed mains shall be utilized for major facilities or or fixture stop (with the exception of individual turrets,
as required by the ORF to maintain service continuity. gas or vacuum gas outlets that are not part of equipment).
In general, systems shall be arranged to maintain con-
D. Riser Drain Valves: Drains shall be provided at the
tinuous service to each floor and minimize potential for
base of all water risers and include National Pipe Thread
single point failures or loss of service.
(NPT) threads, valve, cap, backflow preventer (for
B. Hot Water Returns and High Purity Water: potable and lab water), and hose cap. Additionally, they
Redundancy is not required for hot water returns and shall be arranged to preclude unacceptable dead-legs.
high purity water.
E. Secure Locations: Valves shall be located in appro-
C. Utility Corridor Concept, Intertie of Risers: In the priately secure locations and/or monitored in consid-
case of distribution concepts utilizing common util- eration of the service application, tampering risk, and
ity corridors, intertie of risers at top and bottom to a result of accidental operation.
common main shall be provided unless more stringent
F. Identification: All valves, including safety valves, shall
requirements are mandated by the program. It is not
be clearly and properly identified (labeled/tagged) in a
required to intertie risers for such arrangements on each
clear and unambiguous manner, correspond to the facil-
floor.
ity valve numbering and identification system, and keyed
D. Redundant Risers: Redundant risers shall not be to submitted charts and electronic records. Valve iden-
located in the same shaft or immediate area. Similarly, tification should include the normal operating position.
ring mains shall be arranged as perimeter or at least
opposing corridor configurations and not placed imme-
diately adjacent to each other.
8.1.5.4 Noise, Vibration, Supports, and
Stress/Flexibility Accommodation
A. Noise and Vibration Transfer: Equipment and
Rationale: Basis for redundancy is to facilitate piping installations shall be designed to preclude noise
a safe shutdown without loss of research and and vibration transfer beyond acceptable limits, includ-
to minimize impacts from systems most likely ing but not limited to use of resilient supports, vibra-
subject to disruption or facility damage. tion-isolating equipment bases, flexible connectors or
Redundancy does not necessarily provide braided hoses.
continuation of work in times of failure.
B. Stress Analysis/Flexibility Analysis: Appropriate
stress analysis/flexibility analysis shall be conducted for
8.1.5.3 Valving all piping systems and properly accommodated in the
arrangement of piping, selection of supports, methods
A. Isolation Valves: Isolation valves shall be provided to
and application of attachment, guides, and anchorage.
facilitate independent service shutdown at each build-
Forces shall be properly controlled to preclude damage
ing, floor, wing, individual laboratory, suite, group of
or any risks to system integrity or safety. Submit cal- recommendations, utilizing approved materials, meth-
culations/analysis to ORF for review. The use of man- ods, and sufficient safety factors for all components
ufactured U-bend flex loops or flexible piping layouts and anchorage. Equipment and appurtenances shall be
is the preferred method of accommodating thermal independently supported so as not to impose stresses
movement. and to facilitate ready repair, disassembly, and replace-
ment without inducing any need to provide additional
C. Hazardous Fluids: The A/E shall avoid use of bel- support and to preclude displacement of the piping
lows-type expansion joints for any fluid deemed hazard- system or equipment. Alignment of equipment and
ous. The use of appropriate loops, guides, and anchor- appurtenances shall not be forced and misalignment
age should be provided for such systems. tolerances shall be in full conformance with require-
ments of referenced standards and manufacturer
Rationale: Bellows joints are subject to failure, requirements. Piping, fixtures, and appurtenances
especially if under torsional or lateral movement shall be mounted and secured only to building struc-
conditions. In all cases, appropriate guides must ture or suitable supports; anchorage to drywall is unac-
be provided and joints must be applied with good ceptable. The A/E shall specify provision of blocking,
engineering practice. including for any surface mount piping.
connection at the top and bottom of each riser where 1. Boundaries of barrier facility areas shall be
necessary or deemed beneficial for future expansion. designed according to program requirements
and shall be clearly designated on drawings.
C. Future Connections/Renovations: Runouts should
be sized the same size as the branch serving the floor. 2. Penetrations shall be rigid, gas- and water-tight,
Where future connections are made, a new valved and and visible for inspection and maintenance.
capped connection shall be maintained.
3. Utility services shall be provided in sufficient
D. Dead Ends: Dead ends shall not be made in potable quantity and locations to permit required pro-
water systems, high purity water systems, animal drink- gram functions to serve both barrier and non-
ing water systems, or any hazardous process system. barrier animal spaces with minimal risk of
Where valved and/or capped provisions are required cross-contamination.
in water systems, lengths shall be minimized (and typi-
cally should not exceed 6 pipe diameters in length), but 4. Equipment and service access shall be arranged
do not require zero-static valves. to occur from outside the space where possible
and shall be approved by the program use group.
E. Documentation: The intended use of capped/valved
connections shall be documented, at a minimum, in 5. Piping systems shall not circulate or serpentine
project Basis of Design (BOD) and valve charts and between barrier and non-barrier spaces.
drawings shall be marked to indicate intent (e.g., capped 6. Segregation arrangements shall be reviewed
for future, drain, etc.). with the program and approved by the NIH
with regard to potential cross-contamination
concerns and project-specific limitations.
E. Validation: Validation steps, where applicable, shall B. Valve Groupings: To the extent possible emergency
be fully incorporated, and where not applicable, at a shutdown valves shall be grouped/co-located.
minimum systems shall be subject to commissioning,
verification, and design review. Independent and com- C. Equipment Location: Equipment such as pumps,
prehensive quality assurance shall be provided for sys- water heaters, thermostatic control valves, backflow
tems with a significant potential safety concern or other preventers, compressors, trap primers, drains, standpipe
critical consequence. receptors, and indirect wastes shall not be located above
ceilings, inaccessibly concealed within walls or any oth-
F. Control: Strict control shall be maintained over all erwise concealed space. Additionally, equipment shall not
aspects of design and materials. This shall include ver- be located where subject to tampering or unauthorized
ification of materials provided to the project site and access. Local trap primers and local (point of use) ther-
proper installation, cleaning, and validation. mostatic valves may be located within casework where
required. Pressure regulators and routine shut-off valves
may be located above accessible ceilings as appropriate.
system quality and integrity throughout construction vendors to perform professional design tasks. With the
and prior to installation of equipment, instrumentation, exception of very small renovation projects, dedicated
and controls. plans for plumbing systems shall be provided (indepen-
dent from HVAC or other system plans).
H. System Construction, Cleaning, and Pre-use
Maintenance: Systems shall be appropriately cleaned B. Legend Sheet: A detailed legend sheet shall be pro-
and constructed for the required fluid quality. Corrosion- vided for all plumbing line types, abbreviations, sym-
resistant properties of all systems shall be maintained bols, and instrumentation utilized.
throughout construction.
C. Piping Documentation, Flow, and Nomenclature:
I. Pre-Turnover Verification: After systems are cleaned All pressurized piping systems shall be provided with
and prior to turnover, the A/E shall specify for verifica- flow arrows on drawings to indicate direction of pro-
tion that all required filters and appurtenances are in cess flow. Each piping system and component shall be
place, appropriately validated (as applicable), of proper provided with distinct and sufficient nomenclature on
type, and that all required controls and devices have each drawing to promote legibility and clarity. The
been properly adjusted. nomenclature should correspond with piping tagging
and identification text, and with system identifica-
J. Passivation: Where passivation derouging, and elec- tion nomenclature requirements. All gravity-drainage
tropolishing is required (whether on-site or as part of piping drawings shall be provided with indication of
component construction), such work shall be specified the required installed slope and sufficient notations of
to be provided by qualified firms specializing in biophar- piping invert elevation.
maceutical-type high purity passivation applications
who are ISO 9001 certified with full documentation of 1. Underground Plan: A separate plan shall be pro-
quality control procedures. Services shall be provided in vided to indicate buried plumbing systems. Piping
accordance with both ASTM A380 and ASTM A967, systems and components installed above the floor
along with certification of passivation, testing, and cer- shall not be shown on the underground plan. All
tification of complete and proper rinsing, drying, and underground plans shall show foundation foot-
protection from post-treatment contamination. ings, respective grade beams, the overlying floor
plan, partition layout, room names/type, and sig-
K. Double Containment and Annular Space Leak nificant equipment and furnishings to be installed
Detection: Where double containment piping is pro- on the floor located on-grade. Waste lines shall
vided, piping support, thermal flexibility, and transi- indicate slopes and invert elevations.
tions shall be detailed. The use of low point automatic
leak detection is typically preferred over cable-type leak 2. Typical Plumbing Floor Plans: Plans shall indi-
detection systems for drainage. Where cable-type sys- cate partitions, room names/type, room num-
tems are utilized, systems shall be designed to facilitate bers, and significant equipment/furnishings for
replacement of the cable and shall include pull ropes. the same floor on which the piping is located. All
Products shall be selected and designed to facilitate in- plans shall include structural column/grid lines.
place drying and reuse. Mechanical/electrical/plumbing (MEP) equip-
ment room plans shall clearly indicate service
access and traffic aisle space as well as locations
or outline of significant equipment for other dis-
ciplines (which can be shown as background). All
8.1.11 Requirements for piping, including sanitary and lab waste lines,
Plumbing Document shall be indicated on the plan of the floor for
which the piping is actually to be located. The use
Submissions of notes to designate that piping is installed below
A. Plan Information and Location: Sufficient detail the floor or on the floor above is not acceptable.
shall be provided in drawings and schedules to clearly Floor drains and buried structures for the lowest
indicate system requirements. In general, system detail- on-grade slab shall be shown and called out on the
ing shall not be so generic as to require contractor or underground plan; additionally, drain tops shall
be shown on the respective floor plan such that 7. Equipment Connections: Plumbing connections
the position of floor drains may be clearly spotted to laboratory, medical, food service, ARF, high
in relation to the plan/furnishing attributes. purity water, and other specialty equipment shall
be fully detailed on drawings. The A/E shall not
3. Schedules: At a minimum, schedules shall specif- rely on space and equipment consultant planners
ically identify equipment and fixture connection alone to ensure appropriate engineering systems
requirements, equipment/appurtenance design or proper system connections.
capacities and correct adjustment of significant
normal operating parameters, unless such infor- 8. Process Diagrams: Where specialty process
mation is clearly indicated elsewhere. systems are provided, the design shall include
Process Flow Diagrams (PFDs) and P&IDs for
4. Operating Criteria: The required pressure prior review by the NIH. Preliminary opera-
adjustments and flow rates for devices such tional and key control sequence descriptions
as balancing valves, flow controls, pressure- shall be provided along with appropriate PFD
reducing valves, booster pump controls, and diagrams as depending on system complexity
other items requiring field adjustments shall be and necessity to adequately convey key informa-
indicated on the drawings, or within drawing tion and salient features for design review and
schedules. Where complex operating criteria is construction. P&IDs shall include a full written
involved (such as in certain process systems), sequence identifying key operational, control,
such criteria may be contained in accompanying and safety elements along with instrumenta-
Process and Instrumentation Diagrams (P&IDs) tion detailed in accordance with International
and operation sequences as appropriate. Society of Automation (ISA) standards. In some
5. System Riser Diagrams: Riser diagrams shall cases it is understood final P&IDs may not be
be provided for all plumbing/piping systems for generated until after the contract is awarded. In
buildings over one story in height, for all facili- such cases, final P&IDs and sequence of opera-
ties operating at BSL-3 or above, for all process tions shall be submitted for review and approval
piping systems, and where otherwise required prior to procurement and consistent with PFD
to clearly communicate design intent and nec- concepts and sequences as approved by the NIH.
essary detail. Fixtures/equipment callouts shall Written sequences of operation are required for
be indicated on riser diagrams. Room numbers, all high purity fluid, hazardous fluid, and pro-
reference lines, or other means to permit rapid cess systems or plumbing systems with two or
interpretation of the riser to the corresponding more automated control devices.
plan area shall be provided. Riser diagrams may 9. Packaged Systems and Vendor Designs: The
be orthographic (elevation) or isometric; how- design documents shall thoroughly communi-
ever, particular attention is required to ensure cate system engineering requirements. In gen-
accuracy of the representation of fittings, appur- eral, the A/E shall not leave engineering activi-
tenances, sizes, and order of branches. ties up to the discretion of contractors and
6. Drawing Scale: Plumbing plans for above- vendors. This is not intended to preclude the
ground systems in lab, ARF, kitchen, and assembly of primary manufacturer-engineered
mechanical room spaces shall generally be and assembled equipment; however, the design
shown at a scale of not less than 1:50 (0.25 in. documents must be provided with sufficient
= 1 ft.) and underground systems at a scale not detail so that the NIH may confirm acceptabil-
less than 1:100 (0.125 in. = 1 ft.). Plans depict- ity of the proposed arrangement during design
ing process fluid systems (including medical document reviews. In certain cases the PO may
gases) shall be shown on separate plans from require additional submission of detailed draw-
the conventional plans such as water, waste, ings of vendor-arranged systems for concurrence
fuel gas and storm, except that shared plans are prior to procurement. The use of packaged sys-
acceptable with an appropriate scale of not less tems, packaged equipment, and system arrange-
than 1:50 ( in. = 1 ft.). ments that incorporate vendor design activities
may be subject to additional review by the NIH shall be licensed and experienced for the activ-
prior to approval. Regardless, the A/E shall indi- ity, and trained as a pipefitter.
cate requirements to comply with the DRM and
provide sufficient guidance to ensure successful 3. All welding and brazing shall be carried out by
submissions that avoid the delay of projects. qualified welders and brazers (respectively) in
accordance with ASME Code and American
10. Specifications: The A/E shall include in the proj- Welding Society (AWS) standards for the mate-
ect specifications that all systems shall be tested rial, method, personnel qualifications, and size
and inspected for conformance with the con- range utilized. Where medical/veterinary medi-
tract documents and the DRM. Specifications cal gas systems are utilized, pipefitters/plumbers
shall require that each plumbing installation with ASSE series 6010 medical gas installer cer-
be inspected, signed off, and thoroughly tested tification is additionally required.
prior to concealment. Plumbing work shall be
reviewed for proper slope, joints, layout, materi- 4. Weld inspection and other non-destructive testers
als, and installation. Testing shall be provided for as may be required shall be appropriately quali-
all systems and witnessed prior to backfill, con- fied. Non-destructive testers shall be in accor-
cealment in walls, and again at final completion. dance with ASME B31.3 or B31.9 as applicable,
All installations shall be tested and inspected by and shall be minimum Non-Destructive Testing
qualified inspectors to at least the same degree (NDT) Level 2 or NDT Level 3 personnel for
as would be required for an off campus installa- the test method per SNT-TC-1A of the American
tion. Final inspection tests shall confirm proper Society for Non-Destructive Testing or approved
installation and adjustment, code compliance, equivalent. 100% testing is required for hazard-
completeness, omission of cross-connections, ous fluid systems. The use of various NDT test
leakage, and protection and preservation of sys- methods (e.g., radiographic testing) shall be
tems until project turnover. pre-approved by the NIH in consideration of
potential impact to science. All instruments shall
include current, National Institute of Standards
and Technology (NIST) traceable calibration. All
laboratories utilized in testing/analysis shall be
8.1.12 Specification of accredited in accordance with ISO 17025.
1. All plumbing installations (water, drainage, and 6. All support contractors (system cleaners, test
gas) shall be provided by personnel with a cur- agencies, verifiers, cross-connection control
rent U.S. (state) or jurisdictional licensure, at device testers, etc.) shall be appropriately quali-
not less than journeyman level, with responsible fied, and shall be specified in accordance with
master plumber oversight. project requirements.
operation and leak integrity. Systems shall be fully com- 1. General Water Systems: General water systems
missioned, including performance of integrated systems shall be American Water Works Association
testing, comprehensive functional performance tests, (AWWA) C701 compliant. Meter size of 3 in. and
and complete commissioning of the source equipment larger shall be in-line electromagnetic type, capa-
and distribution to point of delivery. Systems deemed ble of recording flow rate as well as consumption.
hazardous, of critical purity or sterility, or necessary for Consider flow direction potential and totalization
life-support shall be properly verified and, where appli- requirements in meter system selection as may
cable validated. Refer to Section 1.10. be affected by dual feeds. In such cases, electro-
magnetic metering with meters selected for uni-
B. Systems operational training shall be provided. directional flow is suggested. Flow tubes shall be
C. Testing and system cleanings shall be conducted properly grounded in accordance with manufac-
under supervised conditions. Systems under test pres- turer directions. In-line ultrasonic units may be
sures, unsafe temperature, and systems filled with approved with sufficient independent documenta-
cleaning or sanitization chemicals shall not be left tion of accuracy and reliability. AWWA compli-
unsupervised. All appropriate safety precautions shall ant compound and turbine meters may also be
be maintained to protect facility and occupants. used where capable of accurately recording both
peak flow rate and consumption data, and com-
D. Test methods and equipment shall not induce con- patible with flow characteristics.
tamination, over-pressurization, or damage.
2. Cage Wash Equipment: Metering shall be pro-
E. Proper bleeding of air is required prior to hydrostatic vided for the makeup water supplies serving
testing. central cage wash areas, or an arrangement that
provides for recordation of demands from cen-
Rationale: Failure to bleed air prior to hydrostatic tral cage wash equipment provided.
testing can result in safety issues, excessive 3. Compressed Air: Metering shall be provided for
stresses, or failure to adequately test. compressed air from the central plant in accor-
dance with Section 12.3, Compressed Gas and
Cryogenic Systems.
Contents
8.2.0 Introduction Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) type 304. Not less than
AISI type 316 shall be used in the following areas: spaces
This section addresses requirements for plumbing fix- exposed to chemicals, frequent cleaning or washdown
tures, fittings, trim in all NIH facilities including items requirements, ARF wet areas, items cast in concrete or
that may be unique or specifically designed for use in a buried, items carrying fluids of high purity or carrying
laboratory, animal research facilities (ARF), and other water which has been chlorinated, any surfaces exposed
specialized program areas. to substantial or repeated contact with exterior envi-
The requirements of this section are applicable to all ronment, chemicals, or repeated surface staining mate-
plumbing fixtures and equipment, including those items rials, items connected to the lab waste system, and items
specified as part of laboratory, ARF, food service, or located in cage wash. The use of AISI 316, 316L and
other specialty equipment. 316Ti alloys shall each be selected as appropriate and
where the DRM indicates provision of type 316 alloy.
for Stainless Steel Products 4. Stainless steel shall be protected from construc-
A. Corrosion/Contamination: Stainless steel products tion chemicals and cleaners, muriatic acid, chlo-
shall be specified to be suitable for the process sani- rides, etc., and from contact with ferrous mate-
tary condition and to resist corrosion commensurate rial throughout the fabrication, handling, and
with the application. The following shall be addressed construction process or from other stagnant
where stainless steel is utilized: Weld quality, post-weld conditions, chloride exposure, or other condi-
passivation, sufficiently smooth surface profile, and tions that may induce corrosion. Fabricated
care during fabrication, construction and cleaning to components and any components that have been
prevent surface contamination especially from carbon welded in the field or by the contractor, which
steel, graphite, and chlorides. are in contact with a process fluid (including
water and waste) or where required shall be
B. Required Alloy: The appropriate alloy shall be passivated, rinsed, and dried by qualified pas-
selected for the process fluid, chemical exposure, sivators in accordance with ASTM A967 and
and internal and external environmental conditions. ASTM A380.
Typically, the minimum grade alloy shall be American
D. Chlorides: Where chlorides may be present in con- system arrangement, piping size, or slope are
centrations corrosive to 316 grades of stainless steel, likely to contribute to excessive blockages when
alternative materials or alloy grades shall be proposed used with lower flow fixtures. Other flush vol-
for NIH approval. umes shall be subject to justification of need.
2. Flush in-floor, Stall Type: In-floor urinals shall in.) in length or width, with an opposing dimension of
have a washout flush action with an integral rim not less than 305 mm (12 in.) in length or width. The
wash and a flush volume of 3.8 lpf (1.0 gpf). minimum vertical depth of any sink shall be at least
These urinals shall be flushed by an electronic 178 mm (7 in.) deep below the flood-level rim, except
timer-actuated flushometer, set for automatic as required for barrier-free compliance. The minimum
flushing on an approved regular interval. Stall vertical depth for lavatories and dedicated hand wash
urinals shall be utilized only with impervious sinks shall be at least 125 mm (5 in.) below the flood
waterproof floor construction (such as tile floors level rim.
on concrete) and with epoxy grout. The finished
urinal lip shall be flush to 3.2 mm (0.125 in.) E. Design Mounting Configuration and Sealing
below the floor with floor at the lip area sloped Requirement: Basins set in countertops/casework shall
or slightly dished toward urinal. The urinal be either integral with the casework top, undermount
drain shall incorporate a dome (beehive) type type, or self-rimming/drop-in type. Self-rimming/drop-
strainer, with a 50 mm (2 in.) diameter outlet in type is not acceptable for areas ABSL-2 and above
and 50 mm (2 in.) diameter p-trap of same mate- or for commercial food service preparation areas. Self-
rial as building drainage system. The outlet con- rimming/drop-in sinks and undermount lavatories
nection shall be threaded or caulked type. The shall be bedded in sealant before the fixture is set, and
A/E shall specify that slip-joint type connections caulked again with an appropriate chemical- and mil-
are not utilized. dew-resistant silicone.
Rationale: Laminar flow outlets provide for c. Where sensor faucets are utilized, they shall
reduced splashing, can improve water provide a run-time which is continuous
conservation, and are appropriate to conform to while hands are under the faucet, or provide
health care standards for similar clinical spaces. a cycle time of at least 15 seconds, but not
Minimum flow is indicated to provide for efficient greater than 60 seconds. A 1520 second run
usage for lab operations, hand washing, and to time shall be programmed for timed faucets
promote effective flushing. unless otherwise requested by the program.
Listed sensor faucet run-time requirements
C. Faucet Actuation Types, General Requirement: shall be applied to all applicable fixtures.
Faucets shall be actuated as appropriate for the appli- 2. General Lab Areas (Non-Critical Hand Wash):
cation and to prevent cross-contamination. Water flow
shall be discharged at appropriate temperature to a a. Wrist-blade actuation except that for cases
single (common) spout. Knob-type handles shall not be where single-handle controls are utilized, an
utilized. extended actuation lever (operable by wrist)
shall be provided.
Where only a single sink is provided in a room, faucet
actuation shall be program driven and include the most b. Foot pedal actuation may be utilized where
stringent infection control and use requirement for the requested or as appropriate. Off-the floor
room/function served. Where only a single sink is pro- type is preferred. On-floor mounted foot
vided to serve multiple purposes the use of wrist-blade pedals are not acceptable in ABSL-2 or
handles along with foot pedal or sensor operation to higher areas.
facilitate the hands-free activation may be utilized.
Where multiple sinks are located within the same space, c. Combined faucet arrangements providing
other fixtures may be permitted to meet lesser criteria a dual means of actuation (including foot
(not less than that approved for general areas of that pedal/wrist blade, sensor/foot pedal, and
type), provided such configuration is deemed accept- sensor/wrist-blade type dual actuation con-
able by the Division of Occupational Health and Safety trol) may also be used. In the case of sensor
(DOHS). units, the sensor shall be arranged to pre-
clude unintentional activation.
The following describes faucet actuation types as
required for specific space types. The term critical as d. Hands-free operation (or dual control) is
used herein refers to spaces of elevated infection control preferred, but not required for ABSL-2
or cross-contamination concern: spaces.
3. Procedure, Necropsy, Tissue Culture, and means are hands-free (i.e., foot pedal/sensor)
Similar Critical Applications: configuration.
a. Hands-free faucets shall be utilized (typi- c. Sensor faucet with sensor type temperature
cally foot pedal type). control may be used provided the faucet
meets all other requirements of this section.
b. Electronic sensor-type, hard-wired fau- Where a constant, user controlled flow is
cets are an acceptable means of actuation, required, utilize pedal valves.
but shall only be used in hand washing
applications. d. Where pedal valves are utilized, the mount-
ing configuration shall be appropriate to the
c. For applications where only a single sink cleanliness and infection-control require-
is provided in the room, combined faucet ments of the space.
arrangements that provide a dual means of
actuation (as indicated above) may be used
with DOHS approval. Rationale: Wrist-blade controls are susceptible to
cross-contamination. Wrist-blade overrides are
not acceptable for areas where hands-free only
Rationale: In some facilities (especially existing), operation is mandated by DOHS or otherwise
provision of multiple hand wash sinks may not necessary to ensure adequate cross-infection
be feasible. In such cases the most stringent control (such as BSL-3 and surgical areas). Knob,
actuation requirements commensurate with the X-handles, etc. are undesirable due to requirements
cross infection control requirements for the space to grasp handles after cleaning hands.
must be accommodated (which may be hands-
free). As temperature control is necessary for
other sink functions, dual means of actuation D. Spout Type, Height, and Vacuum Breaker: Faucets
control may be required. in laboratory and ARF areas shall be provided with
gooseneck or high-rise-type spouts with an integral
atmospheric vacuum breaker. Hand wash sinks shall be
4. Surgical Prep/Scrub Spaces: provided with gooseneck or high-rise spouts and shall
a. Hands-free faucets shall be utilized, knee include an integral atmospheric vacuum breaker wher-
panel actuated air-valves (preferred) or elec- ever such fixtures are located in labs, animal holding
tronic sensor faucets hard wired, and fitted rooms, or where otherwise subject to plausible use that
with either rose spray or non-aerating lami- may induce backflow. The spout outlet shall in all cases
nar flow outlets of at least 9.5 lpm (2.5 gpm). be at least 130 mm (5 in.) above the fixture flood rim.
Vacuum breakers are required to protect the integrity
b. Wall mount (off the floor) foot pedal valves of the serving water supply, which even in the case of
may also be utilized as requested by the pro- isolated lab water systems must be protected.
gram users.
5. Other Critical Hand Wash Applications: Rationale: Gooseneck/high-rise spouts provide for
a substantial air gap to clear tall items, maximize
a. Hands-free faucets (electronic sensor or usability of the sink, and to minimize potential
slow-closing foot pedal) actuation may be contact or submergence with the faucet outlet
utilized. The use of wrist-blade handles, with in-sink vessels. Vacuum breakers are required
including extended elbow wrist blades are to protect the integrity of the serving water supply
not acceptable where hands-free control is from backflow through presence of point of use
mandated. high hazard level backflow protection.
b. Faucets with manual overrides are not
acceptable. Faucets with dual means of E. Faucet Spout Configuration and Reach: The A/E
actuation may be utilized provided all shall coordinate faucet and sink selections to ensure
that appropriately sized spouts are provided for each in.) from the sensor(s), is compatible with room
sink. Faucet spout reach shall be appropriate to sink size lighting, includes a suitable and clear visual and
and function. The spout shall be swing or rigid type as intuitive display of temperature condition and
suited to the application. Spouts shall extend into the sensor operation, and is controlled by a thermo-
basin past the back wall of the sink to provide a clear- static mixing valve. The set tempered position
ance of at least 125 mm (5 in.) from the sink back wall shall be of a secure (pass code) or mechanical
to the center of the flow stream, but shall not extend fixed position lockable type to prevent inadver-
more than approximately 1/2 to 2/3 of the width (front tent or unauthorized adjustment.
to back) of the sink basin, and shall maintain at least
150 mm (6 in.) from the front edge of the basin to the H. Electronic Sensor Faucets: Where electronic sensor
flow stream. Spouts for general labs shall be convert- faucets are utilized, they shall be hard wired and on
ible between rigid and swing spout configuration and standby power, except as noted in this section. The A/E
installed per the requirements of the program. Spouts shall specify all sensor faucets to be adjusted for proper
on small sinks (such as small hand wash fixtures and operation to avoid false activation, and ensure cycle
lavatories) should typically be fixed (rigid) type. times are in conformance with requirements of this sec-
tion. Sensor faucets with manual controls allowing the
F. Serrated Tips: The A/E shall coordinate with the user to manually touch the temperature adjustment con-
program to determine which faucets shall be fitted with trol (whether or not a temperature adjustment is antici-
serrated tips. Hand wash faucets shall not utilize ser- pated) shall not be considered as hands-free.
rated tips but shall instead be fitted with laminar flow
outlets. I. Ceramic Valving: Where two-handle manually acti-
vated faucets are utilized, ceramic-type faucet valving
with brass or stainless steel internal components shall
Rationale: Serrated tips are not required at all be provided.
faucets and are not suitable for faucets that are
used for hand washing due to excessive splashing.
Rationale: Ceramic valve faucets ensure
consistent positive shut-off and are less prone to
G. Temperature Control: Water supply to sensor-acti- eventual leakage and maintenance issues.
vated faucets shall be tempered at the point of use,
with a thermostatic valve provided at the fixture-supply
connection, and individual to the fixture being served. J. Restroom Lavatory Faucets: Electronic hands-free
Circulation of tempered water remote from the use point faucets with high-arc, medium-arc, or gooseneck spouts
is unacceptable. The set point of faucets for hand wash (provided bottom of outlet is at least 100 mm (4 in.)
purposes providing single temperature water shall be above sink flood rim, and hard wired power shall be
40C (104F), except where otherwise approved. Refer provided for lavatories in restrooms serving public and
to Section 8.3, Water Systems for additional criteria. In staff areas. Automatic faucets serving restroom lavatories
lieu of provision of tempered water at the use point, pro- shall be rated for a water flow rate of 3.85.7 lpm (1.0
vision of hands-free temperature control is acceptable 1.5 gpm), and the cycle time shall maintain water conser-
by one of the following methods: vation at not more than 1 liter (0.25 gallons) per cycle or
to run only while hands are continuously present under
1. Use of dual (hot/cold) foot pedal valves inte- the spout, but not greater than 60 seconds. Faucets shall
grated with the sensor faucet (or) have a time-out feature to preclude continuous running
in the event of a blocked sensor. In applications where
2. Provision of an approved hands-free-type elec- manual-faucet operation is accepted on a case-by-case
tronic sensing mixer arrangement (such as an basis (non-sanitary, non-food service areas, and not for
infrared sensor); provided the sensor automati- toilet rooms serving food service areas), wrist-blade actu-
cally defaults to a safe tempered position after ation is required with a flow rate of 1.9 lpm (0.5 gpm).
each use, has been properly calibrated to activate
only upon proximity detection placed directly in K. Food Service Hand Wash: Electronic hands-free
front, and not to exceed a distance of 150 mm (6 faucets with high-arc or gooseneck spouts (outlet at
least 125 mm [5 in.] above sink flood rim) and hard B. Pipe Connections: Piping connections into and out
wired shall be provided for dedicated hand wash sinks of foot pedal valves shall be flared, threaded, soldered,
and lavatories in restrooms serving food service areas. or double ferrule (Swagelok) type. Compression joints
Faucets for hand washing in food services shall provide shall not be utilized as tubing connections into and out
a flow rate of at least 5.7 lpm (1.5 gpm), shall be set of foot pedal valves.
to provide a delivery temperature of 40C (104F) and
shall run for at least 15 seconds (not more than 60 sec-
onds) per cycle unless knee-valve/foot pedal actuation Rationale: Connections must be resistant to
is provided or determined unacceptable by the health/ abuse and vibration typical of foot pedals without
food safety official. Knee valve and foot pedal hand leakage or ongoing maintenance issues.
wash sinks may be utilized in lieu of sensor faucets in
food prep areas where fitted with a thermostatic mixing C. Penetrations in Casework: Penetrations through
valve to deliver single temperature water in accordance casework shall be factory cut and finished, or otherwise
with requirements of this section unless precluded by arranged to ensure smooth, sealable surfaces, free of
barrier free requirements. sharp edges.
include an ASSE 1014 backflow preventer or vacuum B. Required Emergency Fixture Locations: Emergency
breaker mounted to the wall. shower and/or emergency eyewash fixtures shall be pro-
vided in cage wash areas nearest to the location where
chemicals are handled and dispensed, medical/patho-
Rationale: Slide bars and attachments may be logical waste areas, effluent/pH treatment rooms, and
utilized as grab bars or otherwise subject to abuse. shall be available to serve laboratories where chemical
These provisions ensure sufficient durability. or biological materials are handled, hazardous mate-
rial and chemical storage areas, at each animal holding
G. Shower Wall and Base Materials: Shower walls and room and mechanical space where a hazard may be rea-
bases shall be constructed of durable, impervious materi- sonably anticipated, and at other areas where hazardous
als. Unless constructed of multipart epoxy over masonry chemicals biological hazards, or airborne particle risks
construction, the use of ANSI A137.1 impervious class may be present. Emergency fixtures for spaces operat-
porcelain tile floors with epoxy or sanded, mildew resis- ing at BSL-3 and above shall be in accordance with that
tant grout is recommended, and floor finish shall have section of the DRM.
a wet coefficient of friction greater than 0.75. Stainless
steel and epoxy-coated cement non-slip bases may also be C. Quantity in Labs: The A/E shall, in consultation
used. Unless epoxy coating systems are used, walls shall with the program staff, consider the need to provide an
be provided with an ANSI A118.10 sheet applied, non- eyewash fixture at each lab sink or multiple lab sinks
woven, plastic fabric reinforced polyethylene or liquid or locations versus placement at only a main sink in
applied membrane system just below the finish surface. each lab as deemed appropriate for the application and
potential risk.
Rationale: Impervious grade heavy duty tile is used D. Activation Flow Alarm: In spaces where a signifi-
for durability and epoxy grout is preferred due to cant hazard exists and it is likely a user may be present
imperviousness, mold, and chemical resistance. without supervision, a flow alarm shall be provided to
indicate emergency shower operation. The alarm shall
provide local audible alert and remote alert. Locations
where this may be necessary shall be determined through
discussions with the NIH users and DOHS, and should
generally include areas such as chemical storage and pH
8.2.10 Emergency Showers treatment system rooms.
and Eyewash E. Electrical Hazards: Emergency fixtures shall be
A. Water Supply: For requirements regarding the located so as to be clear of electrical hazards, including
arrangement of water supply systems serving emergency spray patterns while in operation.
fixtures see Section 8.3.
The following additional requirements, specific iii. In-Wall, Recessed Pull-Down Panel-
to individual eyewash type shall be met: Type Units:
Unit location and configuration shall The catch-pan shall be piped to spill
be coordinated with sink-basin size indirectly to an automatic electric
and faucet handle position to ensure trap primed floor drain, and is there-
proper operation and that streams fore not located within the lab. The
are contained within the sink basin. configuration of the piping and outlet
Offset-type units or single head-dual connection for the pan shall be such
stream units may be required to clear as to minimize exposed piping.
faucet wrist blades and accessories a. Drench-Hose Type
and ensure capture of flow streams.
i. Drench-hose-type units, if provided,
Unit shall turn on and shut off by must meet all additional requirements
single action pull-down/rise-up of this subsection.
motion of the fixture, with the water
flow to start on descent and stop on
ascent at no more than a 30 degree Rationale: Drench hose units can offer flexibility
angle from the horizontal (full open) including the capability to spray water on body
position. areas where an emergency shower may not be
present. However, a number of plumbing code
Rationale: These units are preferable for in-lab issues, ANSI standard issues, usability and fixture
use as they ensure that water flow during routine position issues restrict their cost-effective
testing and operation may be contained within installation in full compliance with all legal
the sink basin and not spray or excessively drip requirements. Significant on-going maintenance
onto casework. This type unit is cost-effective, is necessary to maintain and replace required
minimizes maintenance, does not impede on deck point of use backflow preventers on a routine
space, and avoids backflow preventer issues. basis that are otherwise not required with other
fixture selections.
iii. Emergency fixtures shall not be planned the actuating valve, including for
as a means for routine or intermittent use with high hazard back siphon-
hose-supplied water. Such fixtures shall age applications, is located on the
be for emergency usage only. inlet side of the fixture hose, and is
further certified to be spill-resistant
The unit shall incorporate appropri- (not require placement over a sink or
ate backflow prevention at the point of drain), and is accessible for service/
use, be fully compliant with code and replacement.
the listing requirements of the back-
flow prevention device for the pressure
condition, valve position, and hazard Rationale: Drench hose fixtures can be subject
potential served. Compliance with one to backflow cross-connections and submergence
of the following is required: of the spray head. The backflow preventer
approaches provided with many drench hose
The unit shall be a paddle-type actu- units do not meet the requirements of plumbing
ated unit, which includes an ASSE codes or the listing requirements of the backflow
1001 atmospheric vacuum breaker prevention devices (including allowable pressure
mounted with the critical level at condition) and are typically left to local
least 150 mm (6 in.) above the deck authorities to identify the compliance issues and
(or on the wall) and on the discharge associated risks.
side of the actuator, but on the inlet
side of the hose. This is the preferred b. Alternative Eyewash/Facewash Types:
approach where drench hoses are used
due to minimal maintenance, (or) i. Fixed basin units that are hard plumbed
The unit shall incorporate a spill- with electric trap seal primers, freeze-
resistant pressure vacuum breaker proof units, and other ANSI Z358.1 and
(ASSE 1056) as part of the individual plumbing code compliant fixtures may
fixture or individual fixture installa- be utilized outside lab areas subject to
tion, upstream or downstream of the NIH approval. Where approved, stain-
actuating valve, which must be acces- less steel fixed-basin type units may be
sibly located and installed per the used in labs or to serve lab areas, pro-
device listing, (or) vided they include an electric trap seal
primer (e.g., no sink near to where the
The unit includes an ASSE 1011, fixture would be required and the basin
ASSE 1012, ASSE 1019, ASSE 1035, is securely attached to the structure).
ASSE 1052, or CSA B64.3 backflow
preventer that is located on the dis-
charge side of the actuating valve, but
at the inlet side of the fixture hose,
and is positioned such that any spill- 8.2.11 Janitor Sinks/Mop
age will go into the sink or other area
where damage will not occur should
Sinks/Janitor Closets
routine spillage occur, and is acces- A. Mop/Service Sinks: Janitor mop sinks shall be con-
sible for service/replacement, (or) structed of enameled cast iron, terrazzo, or stainless
steel and shall be fitted with drains and traps of at least
The unit includes an ASSE or FCCHR
75 mm (3 in.) diameter. The faucet shall be provided
listed backflow preventer, installed in
with a vacuum breaker. Sinks rims not over 300 mm
accordance with its listing, which has
(12 in.) high are preferred where mop buckets will be
been certified by the manufacturer to
emptied.
be suitable for continuous-pressure
application on the upstream side of
D. Floor Drains: Floor drains are not required in janitor Rationale: Water dispensers assist with
mop sink closets and should only be used if justified. sustainability targets by reducing waste associated
with plastic bottles. The use of taste/odor
filtration imposes a maintenance burden which
Rationale: The drain penetration to mop sinks can potentially result in compromised water
through the floor is completely concealed once quality. Individual users may more appropriately
the fixture is set, and often is not well sealed. Water supply and maintain their own bottles with
damage and disruption to program areas below integral filters.
may occur due to routine wetting of floors that
occurs at these locations.
units shall meet ASSE 1019 or ASSE 1011. The use 8.2.15 Dishwashers
of externally applied hose bibb vacuum breakers that
upon removal would leave hose threads, or from which A. Community Kitchen/Semi-public and Break Room
removal would damage the device (e.g., lock screw type) Type: Dishwashers for limited or small-group use which
is unacceptable. Only integral-type devices (whereas are not intended as part of central food service or for a
removal would render the device inoperable or preclude commercially defined food service establishment shall
hose attachment) may be used. be NSF/ANSI 3 approved or specially designed for
such use without chemical sanitant. They shall have a
sanitizing final rinse at a temperature of at least 74C
(165F). NSF/ANSI 184 dishwashers may be utilized
for non-public applications where the use of the sani-
8.2.14 Waste Disposers tize cycle may be ensured, provided such dishwashers
are not serving the public or highly susceptible popula-
A. Construction: Waste disposers shall utilize stain-
tions. In no case shall dishwashers be selected which
less steel grind chambers (except that cast iron or cast
cannot maintain a wash temperature of 60C (140F)
aluminum commercial grade grind chambers may be
and a sanitizing rinse cycle of at least 66C (150F).
used in non-lab areas); shall be continuous feed type
NSF-184 dishwashers are not acceptable for highly sus-
with appropriate-size chamber, rotor, and motor for
ceptible populations as defined in the FDA Food Code,
the application; have a cast (not forged) nickel-chrome
e.g., daycare, elderly, and immuno-compromised appli-
sizing ring; be jam-resistant design with stainless steel
cations. Semi-commercial/employee break-room type
or ductile iron rotor; and have a reversing motor of at
dishwashers are available from some manufacturers for
least horsepower (HP).
light commercial, office, and communal kitchen appli-
B. Grade Units: Where used with conventional sinks cations, including models with conventional, residen-
(90100 mm [3.54 in.] outlet hole) for light-duty tial-style wash racks. An above-counter air gap fitting
applications (such as break rooms), the use of light shall be provided on dishwasher drains unless served by
duty commercial HP models meeting these require- an unconcealed floor sink.
ments, or to 1 HP premium residential-grade units
B. Commercial-Type: Commercial dishwashers shall
of stainless steel construction with automatic reversing
be listed to NSF/ANSI 3 and shall be hot water sani-
design may be utilized. Residential-grade disposers are
tizing type. Refer to Section 8.4, Drainage Systems for
not acceptable for lab areas.
requirements related to drain tempering and drainage
C. Restricted Use: The use of disposers in any lab area configuration. The use of commercial dishwashers is
shall be subject to review and approval of the the Office mandatory for all applications as required in the FDA
of Research Facilities (ORF) and DOHS. Such disposers Food Code.
may be permitted for specialized program needs such
C. Sanitization: The use of hot water sanitization from
as aquatics or animal food prep areas and shall not be
local booster heaters is generally preferred over chemi-
used for disposal of infectious waste. The use of dispos-
cal sanitization, and shall be used for all applications
ers in commercial food service shall conform to require-
where feasible and for all new construction projects.
ments in Section 8.4, Drainage Systems. Disposers shall
Chemical wash equipment shall not be located in areas
not be installed in the wash compartment of 3-compart-
where chemicals may be accessible to public.
ment sinks; an additional compartment, additional sink
or waste cone is required.
Rationale: Residential dishwashers which
D. Staff Break Rooms: A disposer shall be provided
meet ANSI 184 depend upon application,
where a refrigerator, microwave, or similar equipment
proper use, and uninterrupted operation of the
are located unless otherwise directed.
sanitization cycle for effective dish sanitization.
For commercial dishwashers (including rack
and undercounter type), the use of hot water is
preferred to avoid on-going chemical monitoring
1. High Purity Water Break Tank Configuration: B. Break Tank Arrangements: See Section 8.2.18,
Break tank arrangements are normally manu- Labware Washers and Autoclaves for requirements.
ally filled for each batch and routinely cleaned
or replaced. If automated, the arrangement must C. Point of Connection Filter: Specification to include
include suitable overflow protection. the manufacturers recommended in-line gas filter
should be provided at the point of connection.
2. High Purity Water Direct Connection: Where
the break tank or integral air gap option is not
available, a BFP and arrangement to minimize
dead-leg is required. Refer to Section 12.1, High
Purity Water Systems. 8.2.20 Fume Hoods and
B. Warewasher Waste: The drain of undercounter-type
Biological Safety Cabinets
labware wash units shall be routed to the inlet tailpiece of A. Fume Hood Vacuum Breakers: Fume hoods with
an adjacent lab sink P-trap. Where an adjacent lab sink is water connections shall include an ASSE 1001 atmo-
not provided a stainless steel in-wall drainage outlet box spheric vacuum breaker mounted high, exposed on the
with a 50 mm (2 in.) outlet to receive the labware washer exterior of the hood. This shall be coordinated with
waste and an automatic electric trap seal device shall spill the hood manufacturer. Faucets with internal back-
with a visible air gap through the waste-outlet box. The flow preventers or internal hood vacuum breakers are
height of the box shall be coordinated with manufacturer unacceptable.
requirements and located in the open room where the
B. Internal Equipment Piping Materials: Piping materi-
equipment is located (not concealed within casework).
als used within the lab equipment shall be suitable for
C. Drainage Configuration: Equipment outside of lab- the grade of service. Threaded iron is required for fuel
oratories may spill to floor sinks or funnel-type floor gas. Copper or stainless steel is required for other ser-
drains connected to the lab waste system, except that vices, which shall be brazed, welded, or double-ferrule-
autoclaves may connect to the sanitary system in some type (e.g., Swagelock) connections only. Soldered joints
conditions. Refer to Section 8.4, Drainage Systems. The and mechanically pressed joint connections may be
drain hose from the warewasher shall loop and be fas- used for water. Compression joints are not acceptable
tened high to the undersurface of the bench top, unless for any service.
not required (such as for gravity-discharge units spilling
C. BSCs Utility Restrictions: Generally, only lab
to a floor sink).
vacuum is permitted to be piped to biological safety
D. Water Hammer Arrestor(s): Properly sized water cabinets (BSCs). CO2 is acceptable for limited applica-
hammer arrestor(s) shall be provided and appropriately tions subject to DOHS approval.
located on the supply to the unit upstream of the quick-
D. Utility Turrets: Comply with requirements for Lab
closing valves, but after any backflow preventers.
Gas Turrets.
E. Autoclaves/Sterilizers: Additional requirements spe-
cific to autoclaves/sterilizers are addressed in Chapter
4, Architectural Design; Section 8.3, Water Systems;
Section 8.4, Drainage Systems; and Section 8.6, BSL-3
and ABSL-3 Biocontainment. 8.2.21 Lab Gas Turrets
A. Turret Identification: Turret types shall be clearly
indexed for the service.
substantial, cleanable, corrosion and moisture resistant H. Turret Use Restriction: Turrets with serrated tips
material, and with smooth, rounded edges properly shall not be used for connection of laboratory equip-
sealed to construction. ment, dispense of veterinary medical gas, or for any
permanent connection. Turrets, regardless of connec-
C. Natural Gas/Fuel Gas Turrets: Turrets for natural tion type shall not be used to dispense oxygen, surgical
gas shall be listed to appropriate standards for the appli- vacuum, or anesthetic scavenging vacuum.
cation and for the type of fuel gas.
I. Final Connections to Piping Systems: Final connec-
D. Vacuum Service Turrets: Turrets shall be -turn ball tions to turrets shall be made with a threaded, brazed,
type, designed for vacuum service, except where the use or double-ferrule-type connection applied in accor-
of needle style valves are requested by the program. dance with the approved connection type for the type
Turrets shall be of suitable type for the system vacuum of utility. Compressions joints are not acceptable.
level and designed to seal tight with the level of system
vacuum (typically in the range of 610 to 700 Torr [24 to
27.5 in. Hg {gauge}] pressure).
5. Provision of piped drainage versus carboy will be 2. The indirect waste connection shall be 20 to 25
determined on a per-project basis in accordance mm (0.75 to 1 in.) diameter 304 or 316 stain-
with risk assessment and consultation with the less steel tube with an NPT-threaded connection
DOHS. Disposer use is not typically permit- projecting from the top of the box to receive the
ted. Waste and tissue shall be properly handled indirect waste line from the fixture or equip-
and disposed in accordance with the NIH and ment served. The box shall be fabricated with
BMBL requirements. In some cases, the use of a an integral stainless steel tube that enters from
3-way valve arrangement may be required. the top of the box and is centered over the drain
opening, with a termination approximately 50
mm (2 in.) above the top of the waste opening to
maintain a visible air gap. The drain tube shall
be of rigid construction and guided, anchored,
8.2.23 Hose Stations or sealed integral with the box so as not to be
A. Application: Hose stations for ARFs shall be of a displaced.
suitable industrial grade and shall be securely anchored
to structure. 3. The box shall include a means for rigid anchor-
age to structure that does not penetrate visible
B. Type: The use of exposed-type units (not in cabi- exposed surfaces and shall be sealed at the pen-
net-recessed type) shall be provided for ABSL areas. etration behind the flange.
The valve body shall stand off from the wall with an
appropriate bracket and piping mounted with appropri- 4. Trap Primer: Where serving undercounter lab-
ate sanitary stand-off pipe straps with all penetrations ware washers or other fixtures that may not see
properly sealed. Mounting must be sufficient so that routine use, the waste outlet box or tailpiece of
hose may be hung without impeding drainage of floor the standpipe from the box (on the inlet of the
water. trap seal) shall be fitted to receive a trap primer
line and provided with an automatic electric
trap seal primer.
Rationale: Recessed units do not allow for
effective sealing and can allow for moisture and 5. Water Supply Connections: Where appropriate,
pest/vermin. Provision of tightly sealed boxes with water supply connections may be integrated
rigid sealed penetrations is not cost-effective. with the box and shall include appropriate iso-
lation valves and connector lines, which may
B. Materials: Traps, drains, and tail pieces for general G. Transformer Quantity: Where electronic sensor fau-
domestic sinks and lavatories connected to the sanitary cets or sensor flushometers are utilized, a single trans-
drain system shall be 17 gauge cast brass. Sink strain- former shall not serve more than one room. Independent
ers and drains for domestic fixtures connected to the transformers are required for fixtures located outside of
sanitary system shall be stainless steel or chrome-plated restrooms.
cast brass. Drains and traps for systems connected to
lab waste shall be corrosion resistant type and in accor-
dance with requirements of this section. Bottle traps are Rationale: Transformers serving multiple rooms
not acceptable. P-trap configurations are required. can result in excessive disruption and loss of
fixture use in the event of malfunction. The use of
common transformers serving a single public toilet
3. Toilet rooms with two or more flushometer (e.g., drains from potable, purified, animal drinking
operated fixtures or water closets water, ARF, and sterile or sanitary equipment). Grate
types shall be appropriate to the area where the drain/
4. Shower or tub room including just outside of receptor is located. Appropriate part-grate designs shall
showers be provided to receive indirect waste, however, part-
5. Service corridors subject to washdown, wet grate arrangements shall not be used in service aisles or
materials, or heavy traffic from exterior, such where such may pose a trip or fall hazard.
as loading dock areas and major ARF corridors
6. Non-human primate (NHP) and large animal Rationale: Drains must not allow ponding of
areas water or fouling spaces. Drain outlet sizes are
to ensure capability for handling solids and
7. Cage wash areas sediment while maintaining adequate flow rates
to minimize risk of flooding, and to facilitate
B. Placement: Avoid locating floor drains in areas of ready use of common maintenance equipment for
wheeled traffic, travel paths of forklifts or heavy equip- effectively clearing drain branches and mains.
ment, or other areas which may damage the drain.
Drain installation shall not upset proper load-bearing
of floor mounted equipment, impose a tripping condi- E. Drain Connections: Connections to the drainage
tion, or upset materials handling loads. system shall be by means of hubless, caulked, flanged,
threaded, or fused connections only. The use of com-
C. Sediment Buckets and Grate Load Rating: Non- pression gasket/quick-set joint drain outlets is unaccept-
flushing-type floor drains shall include self-draining able. Drains subject to potential high temperature waste
sediment buckets wherever drains may be subject to shall have connection types as specified in Section 8.4,
introduction of excessive solids or debris. Floor drain Drainage Systems.
grates and drain tops shall be sized and traffic rated
for the application, with grates that are fixed or set so
as not to displace or deform with anticipated traffic, Rationale: Significant leakage issues in various
including consideration of heavy rolling equipment and types of compression gasket joint drains and also
tripping hazard. In applications where sediment bucket in waste lines receiving high temperature waste
placement is critical, the use of drain designs that pre- can occur over extended periods.
clude grate replacement without sediment buckets prop-
erly installed should be considered. F. Mounting Height: Floor sinks and floor drains
shall not protrude above the finished floor or be placed
D. Drain Specification, Mounting, and Size: The entire at any high spot. The drain top/grate shall be flush
drain shall be corrosion resistant, smooth, and installed with the surrounding finished floor or not more than
to be contiguous with the floor to prevent tripping. 3 mm (0.125 in.) below, with the finished floor in the
Drain bodies shall be self-draining and appropriately adjacent area sloped or dished toward the drain wher-
rounded and free of sharp corners and fouling spaces. ever possible.
Floor drains shall have minimum 75 mm (3 in.) diam-
eter outlets, except that drains in cage wash areas, load- G. Slope of Floor Coordination with Floor Drains:
ing docks, kitchens, and any exterior drain shall have Floor slope shall be determined by the A/E. Where floor
not less than 100 mm (4 in.) outlets. Drain sizes, sumps, drains are added to existing non-sloped floors in wet
sediment buckets or domes strainers, and tops shall be areas, slope should be provided at least to a 450600
of sufficient size and configuration to receive the peak mm (1824 in.) surrounding area unless otherwise
discharge load without overflow or splashing. The use determined inappropriate or unnecessary by NIH.
of large body floor sinks, large sump floor drains, and
similar arrangements shall be provided where receiving H. Water Containment/Diking/Berms/Trench Drains:
piped wastes. Top grates and sediment buckets shall be The A/E shall identify and provide water containment
removable for cleaning. Elevations of influent lines shall as required (i.e., storage tanks and other stored water
be coordinated to maintain an air gap where required sources) that may overwhelm drains and cause damage
in the event of failure. Where water containment is and origin of the liquid waste. Pit depths deeper than
required within a space and diking is not possible, the 300 mm (12 in.) shall require justification and approval.
use of suitable trench drains at the appropriate perim- The floor drain within the pit shall be adequately sized
eter location may be provided for applications where to limit water buildup within the pit and consequent
water is sufficiently clean to not impose sanitation/pest drain surges. Pits should be limited to the minimum size
control issues. required and in no case should a single drain within
a pit serve more than approximately 1419 m 2 (150
200 ft2) of floor area. The entire pit, trough, or trench
8.2.26.1 Floor Drain and Floor Sink (including undersides) shall be fully finished, with no
Materials of Construction seams or concealed fouling spaces, and shall be one-
A. Corrosion Resistance: All floor drains, floor sinks, piece/welded and smooth. The use of gaskets or caulk-
and trench drains connected to lab waste system or ing is unacceptable.
in cage wash, ARF areas, kitchens, and other areas
where sanitation or corrosion resistance is required
Rationale: Drainage pits are sometimes desired
shall be constructed of at least 14 G Type 316 stainless
to receive some surge flow or to provide broad
steel. Where substantial use of chlorides is anticipated,
drainage area for items such as wet cage racks.
the use of high-alloy stainless materials and stainless
The limitation on depth is due to cleanability,
alternatives shall be evaluated and provided with suf-
drain maintenance, and avoiding excessive surge
ficiently durable corrosion-resistant traffic-bearing
loads on drainage systems.
grates. Within cage wash areas, subject to suitable
load-bearing, the use of fiberglass grates for trench
drains may be accepted. C. Anchorage Provisions, Leak Protection, and
Required Installation Coordination: Floor drains, floor
sinks, trough, and trench drains shall include integral
Rationale: Type 316 stainless steel, if provided anchor flanges, which shall be cast into the concrete
with appropriate surface finish provides effective pour. In any case where the A/E permits a drain opening
general corrosion resistance to routine cleaning or trench opening to be boxed out (rather than poured
chemicals and disinfectants. Reinforced fiberglass simultaneously), such conditions shall be appropriately
grates can provide light weight, durable and broad doweled to the existing concrete and approved by the
corrosion resistance (including chlorides) and A/E to address integrity issues, leakage, and loads.
traffic load capability.
floor) type 316 or better shall be provided wherever and caulked joints configurations typically perform
stainless steel is utilized. better than conventional hubless and molded-rubber
joints and should be used for applications serving cage
G. Safing Membrane/Waterproofing: Floor drains, washers, sterilizers, and similar applications. Special
floor sinks, trough, and trench drains and penetrations high temperature mechanical couplings with FPM/
through wet areas above grade shall be protected with FKM gaskets may also be used. Refer to Section 8.4,
a locally applied water safing membrane and clamping Drainage Systems.
collar, except where floors are protected with a complete
safing membrane or alternate approved waterproofing
system. Drains with weep holes shall receive water from 8.2.26.2 Floor Drains in Laboratories:
the safing membrane. Such drains being installed in exist- Additional Requirements
ing construction shall be adequately detailed to ensure an
A. Restricted Lab Locations: Floor drains shall not be
installation that will maintain the required load rating
located inside laboratories; however, this does not pre-
and remain water-tight without leakage eventually per-
clude use of indirect waste receptors such as corrosion-
meating around the drain body, sawcut area, or area of
resistant funnel drains and floor sinks at utility areas
hole coring. Safing membranes are also required for the
required for discharge from equipment or where oth-
entire floor where potential wet areas are located above
erwise approved by the DOHS. Floor sinks and floor
ARF or other sensitive space. For existing construction,
drains shall not protrude above the finished floor.
the use of round body drains with multiple hole cored
sizes (i.e., a large hole part way through the slab with the
drain body flange supported on part of the remaining the Rationale: Provision of floor drains in
reinforced concrete) or similar arrangement along with laboratories may result in inappropriate disposal
embedment in polymer-reinforced cement and water of materials and chemicals or biologicals that
safing, or other approved method detailed by the A/E must be otherwise handled by a spill-response
is required. Liquid membranes shall be provided with protocol. There is also the potential for sewer gas
proper mesh reinforcement. infiltration through dry trap seals.
Rationale: Sewer gas (and in particular ammonia available with solid tops. The sealing of a flushing
odors) within ARF areas can be concentrated drain would create a closed connection condition
and in some cases may be disruptive to research between the water and plumbing system, which
and animals. would be in violation of plumbing code.
C. Drain Type, Grate Design/Strainer Elements: The G. Drain Bodies: Drain bodies shall be readily clean-
grate design and strainer elements shall provide ade- able, free of concealed fouling spaces, sharp corners,
quate protection from entrance of large objects without flat stagnant areas, and of sanitary design and construc-
requiring excessive maintenance to clean drain bodies tion. In general, the use of funnel shape and round sump
or cause frequent blockages. Grates shall have sufficient drains is preferred.
size openings to prevent blockage for the application,
non-tilt, and removable for maintenance.
Rationale: Drains must minimize the opportunity
D. Non-jetted Floor Drains: Non-jetted floor drains for insect infestation, maintain sanitation, and
shall have a minimum 200 mm (8 in.) diameter top and facilitate ready cleaning and maintenance.
a minimum 100 mm (4 in.) diameter outlet. In some
applications, larger outlets are required as addressed H. Drains Receiving Solids: Where solids may enter
herein and in Section 8.4, Drainage Systems. drains (such as at prewash areas), drains shall incorpo-
rate a jetted trap similar to floor drains for large animal
Rationale: Adequately sized drains discharge spaces, with a manual flushometer or manually activated
waste water from flushing and washing activities water valve (located in non-concealed area with vacuum
(including those that may have a high solids breaker) located in the proximity of the prewash or des-
content) and permit ready cleaning and insertion caling area, but should not interfere with the placement
of drain cleaning tools. of carts and racks. Jetted drains are not required where
solids will be minimal; however, where large amounts
of solids are present, the use of a sediment bucket or
E. Load Rating and Anchorage: Drain grates serving strainer grate is not a substitute for jetted traps.
floor drains/flushing drains in an ARF shall not displace
under routine pedestrian or cage rack traffic, and shall
be adequate for anticipated traffic loading. Tops/grates Rationale: Areas where cages/racks may be washed
of drains and cleanouts shall be of sufficient traffic of solid matter may require jetted operation to
rating and arrangement to preclude dishing, displace- flush drains adequately and minimize stoppages.
ment, or breakage. Sediment buckets should not be relied upon to
retain solids where excessive solids are expected.
F. Sealable/Cleanable/Gas-Tight: With the exception The use of sediment buckets or screen plates are
of jetted/flushing type drains, floor drain tops shall ideal where certain wastes must be excluded (such
be sealable, smooth, and readily cleanable. Covers for as enrichment toys).
drains that are normally sealed shall be of the fastened,
gas-tight, gasketed type, and shall maintain sanitation
and cleanability. I. Corrosion Resistant Material: Floor drains, troughs,
and grates shall be selected to be resistant to corrosion
from chemical cleaners and disinfectants utilized in the
Rationale: The capability to seal drains gas-tight facility and to concentrated waste products (such as
in a readily cleanable manner is desirable where urine from animal holding rooms). Type 316L stainless
drains may not be used for extended periods so is the baseline material for drain bodies in many animal
as to minimize potential harborage of insects and holding rooms, and acid resistant enameled cast iron
prevent sewer gas leakage. Large animal jetted may be utilized for large animal areas where compatible
drains and in-floor water closets do not typically with cleaning chemicals and care is exercised to protect
require sealing capability and are not routinely the enameling.
J. Necropsy and High Sanitation Requirement Spaces: provided where required by the program; however,
Floor drains (where provided) in necropsy, similar the arrangement shall facilitate a gas-tight seal and
spaces, or other spaces requiring frequent cleaning shall must be carefully reviewed for potential pest control,
be not less than type 316 stainless steel. sharps, and sanitation issues. Trough placement shall
be coordinated with racks.
K. Trough Drains: Trough drains shall be constructed
of monolithic concrete with appropriate chemically
resistant high-performance epoxy or similar coatings Rationale: The use of sufficiently durable plastic
contiguous with the floor and finished in a smooth grates (typically fiberglass) provides lightweight
manner so as to minimize dirt adhesion. Stainless steel grates that are easy for personnel to maneuver
shall be corrosion-resistant. Where chlorides or other for maintenance and cleaning, and reduce the
chemicals will be used in concentrations corrosive to potential for damage to surrounding wall and
type 316L stainless, alternative approved chip and cor- floor coatings and finishes during repeated
rosion resistant, sanitary materials are required. removal, replacement, and routine handling.
Rationale: Floor drains and trough/trench A. Trough Slope and Rinse Nozzles: Troughs shall be
drains can be subject to failure if not selected of provided with a minimum of 2% slope and an end wash
appropriate materials for adequate corrosion nozzle or rinse pipe. Troughs/trenches shall be located
resistance or if adequate care during fabrication, such that the overflow point is flush with the finished
handling and construction do not occur, especially floor. Sufficient flow, slope, trough design, and nozzle
at coating interfaces and joints. Custom troughs quantity to carry wastes shall be provided. Multiple
designed of suitable materials are available from a nozzles may be used where required; however, designs
number of manufacturers but must be reviewed shall achieve effective solids handling without wasting
to ensure long-term durability, resistance to water, overflow, or splashing.
corrosion, breakage, stress cracking, and leakage.
B. Trough Corners: Trough corners shall have a
Special care is necessary in the selection of plastic
smooth, rounded radius of at least 20 mm (0.75 in.),
due to the permanence of the installation and
shall be seamless, and incorporate approved water and
significant consequences of a failure.
chemically resistant coatings.
M. Trench/Trough Drain Grates: Trench/trough C. Trough Rinse: Trough rinse shall be provided for
drain grates shall be of appropriate traffic-rated plas- troughs in large animal holding rooms and may be
tic construction where possible. Grates are not typi- activated by a ball valve within the holding room or as
cally acceptable or desirable for troughs at perimeters selected by the user group. A single valve should prefer-
of large animal holding rooms, and shall not be used ably control all troughs in a room. The A/E shall pro-
where troughs will carry any animal waste or other vide a manually adjustable balancing valve (preferably
excessive solid loads, or where large animals are pres- concealed) to facilitate adjustment of flow and control
ent in open-caging. A recessed ledge may be consid- of splashing to individual troughs or nozzles. The end
ered to receive a future grating or cover and shall be of each trough nozzle shall be pointed downward in the
Rationale: Drains in large animal areas must c. A vacuum breaker shall be provided for each
be capable of completely flushing solids from flush connection (either as a flushometer
the drain body and through the piping system to with vacuum breaker tailpiece or as a dedi-
maintain sanitary conditions and prevent waste cated stand-alone vacuum breaker).
stoppages. Trap configurations are often custom-
manufactured and paired with flushing rim drain d. Flushometers or valve arrangements and
tops and/or rinsed troughs to serve this function. associated piping shall provide a minimum
The sweep pattern and radii of the trap must 25 lpf (6.5 gpf) operation, and shall be cou-
maintain self-cleaning properties and the blow-out pled with 100 mm (4 in.) or larger drainage
jet must be properly configured to maintain the mains for NHP and kennel areas. Where
trap seal and evacuate solids. Blow-out pattern other automated arrangements are used
p-traps (as typically available or custom made (such as solenoid valves), ensure an equiva-
from stainless steel penal ware and specialty drain lent flow volume at a rate of not less than 95
manufacturers) may be used for this purpose; 115 lpm (25 30 gpm) is provided for each
however, the connection of a flushing jet through a flush connection with a flowing duration of
conventional trap primer tap does not provide for at least 1015 seconds.
appropriate operation.
Rationale: Automatic flushing capability is
3. The jetted flush actuation shall be activated by required at regular intervals to prevent odors and
automatic means programmed for routine flush- maintain sanitary conditions. Manual override is
ing throughout the day and shall also facilitate required to facilitate cleaning operations. Drains
manual activation by the use group for individ- must be capable of programming to the individual
ual rooms. requirements and operational status of each room.
The vacuum breaker is required to isolate the
a. Control of flush volume may be achieved direct connection.
by use of hydraulic flushometers with a
pushbutton located in the holding room
(or other designated location), and with 4. Provision of trough rinse arrangements and pro-
a programmable timer and solenoid valve vision of basket strainer, grates/buckets is not a
or electronic arrangement to actuate the substitute for jetted traps.
hydraulic flushometers by creating a bypass
around the hydraulic button with a nor- Rationale: Such arrangements do not adequately
mally closed (fail closed) solenoid valve or consistently clean traps or achieve velocities
between the hydraulic lines. and pressures to flush lines. Grates, buckets, and
strainers are often removed, and result in solid
wastes entering drains.
Contents
D. Systems Disinfection and Elastomers: Components 2. Dielectric flange kits complete with bolt isola-
and elastomers of potable and lab distribution systems tion sleeves shall be provided for flange transi-
shall be suitable for hot water sanitization at temper- tions between dissimilar metals.
atures of up to 80C (180F), as well as for chemical
sanitization with chlorine (or for entirely stainless steel 3. The use of brass or bronze valves, fittings, or
systems with no copper or brass components, hydrogen piping shall not serve as approved dielectric pro-
peroxide/peracetic acid) solutions. Elastomers shall be tection between dissimilar metals.
of suitable inert materials, and shall not be constructed
4. The dielectric fitting shall be installed directly
of natural rubber. Elastomers shall comply with plumb-
to the anodic material without any intervening
ing code and be listed in accordance with NSF-61 or
brass fittings between the anodic material and
21 CFR 177.2600 provisions. NSF-61 commercial hot
the dielectric isolator.
classification is required for components for hot water
systems.
Approaches to facility water service shall be as follows: Rationale: This is to ensure systems are adequately
1. Where two completely separate water services sized so that fire flows are not impacted by ongoing
are provided to a building, it is preferred that plumbing and equipment water supply demands
they be of a combined type with each sized to which may be in operation at the time of a fire.
serve the total domestic water and fire load.
C. Water Service Connection to Campus or Municipal
2. Where separate domestic water and fire services Supply Mains: Where connections to separate points
must be used (not preferred), the domestic ser- on the underground water supply grid cannot be made,
vices shall be redundant and the arrangement of the water service to each facility shall be double-fed or
fire services shall be in accordance with Chapter have two parallel mains from the site utility supply grid.
9, Fire Protection and Suppression.
a normally closed and locked shut-off valve and check filters and activated carbon filters shall not be used for
valve located inside the building, and shall terminate this purpose. A normally closed bypass shall be pro-
with a capped threaded inlet(s) at an approved location to vided. Filter housings shall be type 316 stainless steel
receive connection from a portable water supply source. or approved fusion-bonded epoxy-coated ductile iron,
The emergency water connection shall connect to the NSF-61 compliant. Screens shall be multi-layered stain-
water distribution system on the suction side of booster less steel weave wire or stainless steel sintered mesh
pumps, downstream of the main building water service as appropriate. Such filters shall maintain continuous
entrance backflow preventers. An isolation valve shall be filtration and demand flow in the backwash mode, or
provided immediately at the connection to the system to shall be provided in an N + 1 configuration normally
avoid stagnant dead-legs, as well as a valved and capped open in parallel. Where a surge tank is used to throttle
flushing connection of at least 40 mm (1.5 in.) diameter flushing discharge, a manufactured air gap is required
to permit flushing of the feed line prior to use. Only a between the filter and the tank.
single emergency water connection point should be pro-
vided per building, unless otherwise approved.
Rationale: Elevated total suspended solids (TSS)
1. The inlet opening serving as the emergency may be present in the form of sediment, silt, rust,
water-service connection shall be labeled, pro- sand, and other particulate, etc., from piping,
vided with a threaded cap, and either valved and construction activities, hydrant testing, and scale
locked closed or valved and located in a locked in water mains. Point of entry automatic central
access box to preclude tampering. filtration of water supply is beneficial to reduce
maintenance and service demands of numerous
2. Emergency water connections shall not serve as components throughout the distribution system.
a substitute for the redundant water service. The use of cartridge filters, though highly effective
if properly selected, is not desirable due to the
Rationale: The emergency water connection is used maintenance frequency, potential of accumulated
by a potable water tank truck, fire hydrant, or organic matter where not adequately maintained,
when a temporary potable water supply is needed potential loss of supply under heavy load, and
to maintain critical operations in the event of ongoing operational costs.
significant malfunction, maintenance, or disaster
mitigation. L. Disinfectant Injection Systems: Water distribution
systems shall be arranged to maintain the efficacy of
J. Joint and Fitting Restraint: Underground fittings residual disinfectants provided in the municipal feed
shall be provided with concrete thrust block joint water supply to the point of use. Supplemental disinfec-
restraint. Restraints for systems subject to bidirectional tant injection systems for special needs shall be addressed
flow shall be designed to accommodate forces from on a project-specific basis with full water chemistry and
flow in either direction, regardless of normal use. Joint analysis to ensure control of disinfectant and byproducts.
restraint shall be provided for above ground water ser-
vices as required to prevent failure.
G. Booster Pump System and Commence of Lab Water are controlled and within working pressures of system
System: In most cases, a booster pump system will be components. A pressure-reducing station shall be pro-
required to meet water pressure requirements. In such vided if required to limit maximum water pressure to
cases, the lab water system shall begin with backflow 550 kPa (80 psi) at any service outlet. When serving
preventers installed as a subsystem on the downstream multiple rooms or program areas a minimum of two
side of the booster pumps. pressure-reducing valves shall be provided in parallel,
and may be of segmented load (e.g., 1/32/3) as appro-
In cases where water pressure requirements to the most priate for effective control. A normally closed bypass
remote outlet may be met without a booster pump, the or sufficient redundancy arrangement should be con-
A/E should review the potential of arranging the lab sidered for central stations serving significant areas of
water backflow preventers in parallel with the domestic a facility. Major pressure-reducing station valves shall
water service backflow preventers. The A/E must also be of the hydraulically-operated pilot-type automatic-
consider the affect such arrangement will have on emer- control valve, municipal grade with stainless steel trim.
gency water connections (which are required to be con- Where justified by application and approved by the
nected to systems downstream of the service backflow ORF, pressures may exceed these limits. Ductile iron
preventer), and would therefore result in requirements with epoxy, lead-free bronze, or 316 stainless steel shall
for multiple connections and associated protocols. be used for cold water; lead-free bronze or 316 stainless
and with high temperature elastomer for hot water.
8.3.4.1 Pressure and Flow D. Application of PRVs, Zoning, and Circulation
A. Analysis: Water supplies shall be carefully analyzed Systems: Pressure-reducing valve use shall be limited
and systems shall be zoned to ensure required pressures to point of use equipment applications, except that
will be available throughout the design life of the facil- where general pressure-reduction is required, it shall
ity. Refer to Section 8.3.13, Available Water Supply/ be arranged by pressure zones to eliminate excessive
Water Supply Analysis. maintenance associated with numerous local devices.
The pressure distribution concept (upfeed/downfeed)
B. Flow and Pressure Requirements: The water distri- arrangement shall be similar between hot and cold
bution system shall be designed to provide the required water systems. Forced circulation through pressure-
flow and pressure for the most hydraulically demanding reducing valves in a closed loop is not permitted.
fixture/equipment. Systems shall be designed to provide
at least 280 kPa (40 psi) residual (flowing) pressure at E. Pressure Balance: Hot and cold water distribution to
the most hydraulically remote outlet on the lab water each area shall be from the same pressure zone, with sys-
system and at least 240 kPa (35 psi) residual pressure for tems arranged to provide generally balanced (nominally
the hydraulically remote fixture on the domestic plumb- equal) pressures between hot and cold systems. Where
ing system. Water pressure to non-occupied mechanical pressure-reducing valves are permitted and applied, the
equipment floors shall be at least 170 kPa (25 psi) on the arrangement shall ensure that under all conditions hot
downstream side of isolating backflow preventers, and and cold systems shall be generally balanced.
may be boosted locally, provided supply arrangements
are adequate for the pump suction.
Rationale: Providing a relative balance of pressure
between water supplies minimizes potential of
Rationale: Adequate pressure and flow is required cross flow, scalding, and inadvertent temperature
for the proper operation of equipment and fluctuations.
plumbing fixtures, and to ensure programmatic
flexibility. Pump suctions shall not induce
backflow on other portions of the system. Code 8.3.4.2 Pressure Boosting
minimums are not adequate.
A. Booster-Pump Systems: Where building water
booster-pump systems are needed, they shall incorpo-
C. Excess Pressure Control: Systems shall be designed rate the following features:
to ensure pressures (including static and surge pressures)
1. Connected to building standby power (for any not permitted for clinical applications or cases
lab or ARF application) where microbial control (such as Legionella)
is of elevated concern. Such tanks (where pro-
2. Size and quantity with capacity split for efficient vided) shall be insulated to maintain cold condi-
operation under peak demands and minimum tions within the vessel. Alternative sequencing
design flow techniques, such as combination immersion flow
3. N + 1 redundancy of total demand, including sensing with backup pressure sensing is gener-
simultaneous design load of emergency fixtures ally preferred.
(typically an allowance of two to four shower
fixtures per building; verify with the DOHS)
with all pumps running. Sufficient capacity shall
remain for at least one emergency shower plus
peak load with any pump out of service.
8.3.5 Building Water System:
General Design Criteria
4. Pumps shall be centrifugal type and all pump
A. Design and Construction Criteria: Each distribu-
systems shall be arranged to ensure control of
tion system and all equipment and materials specified
maximum energy imparted to the distribution
by the A/E shall be to potable water standards. Refer
system.
to Section 8.1, Plumbing General Requirements for
5. Lead/lag/automatic alternate with failure logic required distribution piping arrangement.
to maintain operation; alternation to occur at
B. Materials Standards: Comply with recommenda-
intervals not to exceed 24 hours to avoid stagna-
tions of the Copper Development Association (copper),
tion, and minimum run timers.
Nickel Institute (stainless steel), Ductile Iron Pipe
6. Arranged to permit service of single pump or Research Association (ductile iron).
controller with all remaining pumps in service.
C. Control of Temperature: Piping systems shall be
7. A constant pressure bypass (with PRV control) properly insulated. Refer to Section 6.4, Thermal
shall be provided to ensure continuous service Insulation Systems. Cold water systems and appurte-
with the variable frequency drive (VFD) or con- nances shall be kept cold (below 20C [68F]) and away
trol panel out of service. The A/E shall ensure from heat sources, such as steam piping (regardless of
that the arrangement of the constant pressure insulation). Hot water systems shall be maintained at
bypass will not result in an unacceptable over- approved design distribution temperatures. Water tem-
pressure condition. Alternatively, a completely peratures shall be compatible with connected equip-
separate automatic, alternating pump system ment, materials, and required pressure ratings.
may be provided where the pressure-booster
pumps are each connected to a standby power
Rationale: In addition to energy conservation,
source, or a redundant PLC arrangement to
adequate insulation is necessary to preclude
affect the same is acceptable.
condensation.
8. Where VFDs are used, provide separate VFD for
each pump. D. Excessive Temperature of Cold Water: For areas
where incoming cold water temperatures exceed 20C
9. Local control, alarms, and a remote general
(68F), a risk assessment shall be performed to assess
fault alarm to building automation systems shall
the need for additional microbial controls. In all cases
be provided. A low-suction pressure switch with
water shall be reliably controlled within the parameters
automatic reset shall be provided.
of the SDWA. Where cooling is required, double wall
10. An accumulator tank with a diaphragm or blad- heat exchangers shall be used.
der may be considered for lab facilities, but is
equipment (especially autoclaves, cage and tunnel wash- sized on the basis of flush tank curves, provided the
ers) the actual equipment as procured shall be verified complete required hydraulic design criteria are met,
compatible with piping system designs prior to piping including velocity and pressure-loss limitations.
installation.
or replacement. WHAs for high flow process applica- through use of dedicated laboratory water systems that
tions (e.g., cagewashers, tunnel washers) shall be sized are isolated from potable supplies. See Table 8.3.6.
based on engineered analysis to determine the required
volumetric capacity and peak spike pressure to be atten- 1. Regardless of systems segregation, it is required
uated. The allowable post-attenuated system pressure that water quality be maintained at very high
spike shall not exceed 1034 kPa (150 psig) and arres- levels of safety and any risks to system water
tors shall have a spike pressure handling capability of quality (including risks to potability) be con-
at least 2413 kPa (350 psig). Vacuum arrestors/specialty trolled and minimized. Water quality is main-
vacuum breakers shall be provided where column sepa- tained within these subsystems by devices com-
ration (cavitation) induced water hammer conditions mensurate with the risk and intended application
cannot be avoided. of these systems.
O. Automatic Air Vents: Automatic air vents shall be 2. Typically, adequate protection of lab water
provided where the arrangement of the distribution systems at points-of-use shall be accomplished
system will not ensure the release of air from normal through use of an approved, non-testable back-
plumbing fixture use or could result in a trapped air flow preventer; however, even where supplied
pocket or unsafe condition. Where automatic air vents from laboratory water, high hazard type pro-
are required, they shall be placed at the high point in tection devices or testable devices may still be
the system in a mechanical room or similar space, and required locally commensurate with a particu-
routed to drain with an air gap. Vents shall be read- lar risk.
ily accessible, and shall not be located above ceilings or 3. Certain system applications require potable sup-
concealed. Vent arrangements shall not be extended in plies that shall be arranged and protected in
such a manner as to create dead-legs. Air pressure relief accordance with plumbing code and cannot be
is preferably accommodated automatically by arranging served by lab water.
the top portion of systems for automatic air withdrawal
during fixture use. 4. The A/E shall comply with specific restrictions
(beyond code requirements) as to type, quantity,
P. Mixing valves that present a constant or extended and placement of additional or varied backflow
open path for cross flow of hot and cold water shall be preventer arrangements such as for high con-
provided with check valves on both hot and cold supply tainment that are addressed in the correspond-
inlets (e.g., thermostatic and mechanical tempering ing section of the DRM.
valves, hose stations, and shower valves). Check valves
shall incorporate durable stainless steel or brass gates. B. Additional Requirements: Facility isolation and local
containment of high hazards is required. Additional
Q. Hot and Cold Water Pressure Gauges/Thermometers: design requirements include:
Multistory buildings shall include process grade pres-
sure gauges on hot and cold water and thermometers on Unprotected potable water shall not be extended
hot water and hot water circulation take-offs from main into labs.
risers on each floor. Gauge cocks and temperature wells Assessment of the potential hazard is required for
shall be provided. each use point.
Ensure the appropriate water supply is readily
available to all areas of the facility.
Proper identification and labeling of specific
8.3.6 Backflow Protection piping system contents and areas served to mini-
A. Design Approach: The design intent for water supply mize risk of future inadvertent cross-connection.
to the ARF and lab facilities is to minimize provision of BFPs shall conform to applicable ASSE, AWWA,
testable backflow preventers within laboratories, ARFs, or USC FCCCHR standards.
and other sensitive areas. This shall be accomplished
Water outlets served by lab supply shall have per-
manent signage in conformance with plumbing
Item Required Device when Fed from Lab (Isolated) Water System
Faucets in lab, animal research
ASSE 1001 AVB (vacuum breaker) faucet spout
facility, and cage wash
ASSE 1001 AVB mounted high on an exterior face of hood, exposed
with no downstream valves or back-pressure. ASSE 1056 may be used
Fume hoods
only where under continuous inlet pressure unless manufacturer certifies
diaphragm seal will not leak in low-flow application.
ASSE 1011 HBVB, ASSE 1001/ASSE 1056 AVB/SVB installed per listing,
Hose stations (water type) ASSE 1015 DCVA or ASSE 1024 dual check, or approved integral device
at hose station.
Hose station (water steam or water ASSE 1013, local or grouped. See Section 8.2, Plumbing Fixtures and
chemical) Equipment.
Laboratory ice machines None required. Water-cooled units provide with check valve.
Undercounter labware washer
designed with integral backflow None required
preventer or air gap
Undercounter labware washer, with
As a minimum ASSE 1024
no suitable integral backflow control
Cage/rack/tunnel washers ASSE 1013 RPZ
Wash Equipment Utilizing Chemicals
without a listed backflow prevention ASSE 1013 RPZ
design (such as integral air gap)
ASSE 1001/ASSE 1056 vacuum breakers or ASSE 1013 RPZ, installed per
Necropsy/downdraft sinks and tables listing. See Section 8.2, Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment. ASSE 1056
only where under continuous inlet pressure.
Point of use water purification None required
Laboratory autoclave ASSE 1012 DCIAV or ASSE 1015 DCVA
Liquid ring lab vacuum pump ASSE 1013 RPZ
Low hazard potential, non-toxic
None required or check valve
connections
Moderate hazard potential, non-
ASSE 1012 DCIAV, ASSE 1015 DCVA, ASSE 1024 dual check
toxic connections
High hazard potential of toxic,
Air Gap, ASSE 1013 RPZ, ASSE 1001/ASSE 1056 per listing. For high
pathogenic, or dangerous
containment (BSL-3 and above), refer to other sections of DRM.
connections
Abbreviations: RPZ = reduced pressure zone backflow preventer; AVB = Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker, Pipe-Applied;
DCIVA =Double Check with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent; DCVA = double check valve assembly; HBVB =Hose
Bibb Vacuum Breaker; SVB= spill resistant pressure vacuum breaker
G. Bypass Arrangements: Bypass arrangements shall supply. New facilities and renovations shall include pota-
not be permitted around backflow preventers. ble water distribution with ASSE 1013 backflow protec-
tion to serve emergency fixtures in accordance with this
section.
Rationale: Only the use of redundant (parallel)
backflow protection is acceptable where 1. Eyewash and shower fixtures that are located
continuous service is necessary so as not to outside of the laboratory or ARF zone may be
compromise cross-connection control. fed directly from potable water without addi-
tional backflow protection, providing the fixture
H. Backflow Preventer Log: The A/E shall specify that is appropriately designed to preclude backflow.
the contractor shall provide a BFP log to NIH at the A local point of use ASSE 1071 thermostatic
conclusion of a project indicating the exact location, mixing valve with integral cold water bypass
type of device, brand, model, serial number, and ser- shall be provided at each fixture.
vice function for each backflow preventer that requires Where a service line must be extended, the
annual testing (any device provided with test cocks, piping shall be sized and arranged as for a new
such as double-check valve assemblies, reduced pressure installation in accordance with this section of
principal devices, pressure vacuum breakers, etc.). This the DRM. Flushing point may return to a janitor
log shall be included in project close-out documents, closet mop sink where a suitable indirect waste
and shall be provided both electronically in Excel, PDF, receptor is not available in existing construction.
and also where printed documents are issued and shall
be included in O&M manuals in printed format. The
NIH reserves the right to furnish specific forms or data Rationale: Lab systems may be subject to a
files for this purpose, and to assign specific device num- variety of hazards that may compromise potability
bers or nomenclature which shall be utilized by the con- upstream of backflow preventers. ASSE 1013
tractor in preparing logs and test reports. BPF ensures isolation of lab water outlets from
upstream potable system, especially in the event of
I. Backflow Preventer Testing: The A/E shall specify unauthorized tappings or cross-connections.
that upon installation, each backflow preventer shall be
tested for proper operation in accordance with ASSE
series 5000, AWWA, or USC FCCCHR standards by B. Tempering: Water tempering is required in compli-
an ASSE or ABPA certified cross-connection control ance with ANSI Z358.1; however, such tempering shall
device tester. Any device that fails the performance be provided at the low-end of the ANSI-defined tepid
requirements shall be repaired and retested. A copy of range. A temperature of 15.5C18.3C (60F65F)
the test results shall be included in the project close-out shall be provided.
documents with the device location log. Testing shall Exception: For fixtures outside of laboratories and
be provided at project close-out, prior to project turn- not located within the laboratory or ARF zones and
over or no earlier than 60 days from project turnover as associated corridors that are fed directly from potable
approved by the PO. hot and cold water with point of use mixing valves and
minimal dead-legs, tepid water within the full ANSI-
defined tepid-water range is acceptable as appropriate
to the application. For off-campus projects at locales
8.3.7 Emergency Fixture where the incoming cold water temperature exceeds
15.5C (60F) during the coldest season as recorded
Water in municipal published water reports, no tempering is
A. Potable Water Systems: Emergency shower and eye- required. However, where water exceeds safe tempera-
wash fixtures shall be served from potable water systems ture ranges, microbial control or other regulation may
per ANSI Z358.1 and incorporate backflow protection be required based upon a risk assessment.
and proper identification to safeguard the potable water
H. Distribution Main Area Limitation: The horizontal 8.3.8 Hot Water Systems
distribution loop and end-of-line purge for emergency
fixture supply mains shall be independent to serve only A. Water Heaters: Water heaters shall be semi-instan-
a single floor within a single building wing. taneous, shell & tube steam type with pneumatically
actuated valves with electric control or electric (not pilot
self-actuated) control valves. Temperature control shall
Rationale: This is to ensure that each floor and be accurate over entire flow range within plus or minus
building wing can be independently isolated 2C (4F). The process hot water shall be located and
for maintenance and to ensure adequate flushing temperature sensed within the shell and provided with
and disinfectant residual. integral internal forced circulation. Shell shall be solid
copper-nickel construction or comparable corrosion
I. Emergency Fixture Size: Mixing valve and piping resistant material (such as duplex stainless steel alloy),
serving emergency fixtures shall be of adequate size to tubes and tube sheet of copper or copper nickel alloy,
supply the maximum quantity of emergency fixtures to and suitable for potable water. 1/32/3 control valves
be in simultaneous use, but not less than at least the flow shall be provided except they are not required for low-
rate of the single most demanding emergency fixture pressure steam control valves smaller than 50 mm (2 in.)
group (consisting of at least a single emergency shower size. Where steam is not available, equivalent heaters
plus a single emergency eyewash) plus the total simulta- but supplied with high temperature heating hot water is
neous flow of the flushing purge fixture. The minimum acceptable. Hot water production systems serving high
acceptable size for distribution mains is 40 to 50 mm flow on/off applications (such as cage wash) shall incor-
(1.5 to 2 in.) (dependent on facility size), and the mini- porate a copper nickel, cement-lined, or duplex grade
mum size branch line to a single emergency shower is stainless steel storage tank sized to accommodate at
32 mm (1.25 in.), and a 13 mm (0.5 in.) branch shall be least five minutes of the peak hot water demand.
provided to serve each emergency eyewash. Flow veloc-
ity under conditions of maximum design simultaneous Rationale: This type of equipment is preferred for
use may be up to 3 m/s (10 ft/s) in the main, but shall proven reliability, durability, microbial, and
not exceed 6 ft/s during normal fixture usage. Residual temperature control.
pressure at emergency fixture outlets shall be at least
240 kPa (35 psi). Selection of the mixing valve shall be
made additionally with consideration of the flow rates B. Tank-Type Heaters: Electric, oil, or gas-fired, stor-
from of a single eyewash/facewash fixture to provide age tank-type heaters may be employed only for special
adequate temperature control. applications as approved by the ORF, such as where
steam or adequate high temperature heating water
J. Isolation Valves: Isolation valves on emergency fix- is not available for the facility. Steam is the preferred
ture water supplies shall each be labeled and locked open, energy source for water heating at the NIH Bethesda
or located in a secure area and appropriately labeled. campus. Off-campus equipment shall be selected to
Mixing valves and backflow preventers serving such sys- ensure reliability, longevity, efficiency, and adequacy
tems shall be located in a controlled area and shall be of hot water supply. Where tank-type heaters are uti-
appropriately labeled or locked to prevent tampering. lized for central hot water production in labs and
ARFs, tanks shall be cement-lined, copper-lined, cop-
K. Required Alarms: A low pressure transmitter shall per-nickel, or duplex grade stainless steel selected for
be provided at the end of the emergency fixture supply appropriate long-term corrosion resistance. Polymeric
main at each floor and shall alarm to BAS if pressure in linings and coatings are not acceptable for heated ves-
the main drops below 207 kPa (30 psi). Systems shall be sels, except for administrative/office applications. Hot
hydraulically designed in consideration of residual pres- water tanks may be approved for limited applications
sure under demand condition to preclude false alarm where justified, including for limited local applications
tripping. A high temperature alarm sall be provided at where other approaches are impractical. This restriction
the end of the emergency fixture supply main at each does not apply to integral buffer tanks up to 378 liters
floor (after the mixing valve), and shall alarm to BAS if (100 gallons) each of semi-instantaneous style heaters
water temperature exceeds 35C (95F). or lab water heaters for cagewash. Water heater tanks
for potable hot water to commercial food service pro- S. Expansion Tank/Vacuum Relief Valve: An expan-
duction areas, but may be provided where appropriate. sion tank shall be provided on the cold water makeup
near to the water heater, downstream of a check valve.
N. Cage Wash Equipment: ARF cage wash equipment A vacuum relief valve shall be provided where the water
shall be provided with independent water heaters, served heater is located one story or more above fixture out-
from the lab cold water system, with 60C (140F) distri- lets. Precharge of expansion tanks shall be set prior
bution to cage wash equipment. The cage washer water to system fill. Expansion tanks for all systems shall be
heaters may also serve the clean/dirty cage wash areas. approved for the maximum operating temperature of
Water to cage wash equipment typically requires scale the system (but in no case less than 82C [180F]), and
control. Refer to Section 8.3.12, Corrosion Protection, shall be NSF-61 compliant.
Water Treatment, and Control of Scale.
O. Microbial Control: Potential for Legionella or other Rationale: Placement on the cold side of the
microbial control issues in water-distribution systems system is associated with microbial control and
shall be considered and appropriately addressed based diaphragm/bladder longevity. Vacuum relief is
on risk assessment. Disinfectant systems (such as chlo- only required where a tank could reasonably be
rine dioxide) are not typically required for lab facilities, susceptible to a vacuum condition.
but are typically required for protection of potable hot
water in large clinical applications serving non-ambula-
tory patients, the elderly, and those with compromised T. Heat Exchanger Type: Heat exchangers (including
immune systems. Where chlorine dioxide is utilized, it water heaters) utilized within potable and lab hot and
shall only be applied to the cold water system (prior to cold water systems shall be of the double-wall type,
heating) and an approved method of generation (e.g., with a leak detection path visibly vented to atmosphere
catalytic production or other method to control haz- except that single-wall heat exchangers may be used
ardous chemicals and disinfection byproducts) shall be for lab water systems provided the code provisions for
provided. Disinfectant systems, such as chlorine diox- potable water are met and a minimum 69 kPa (10 psi)
ide shall not serve food service, pharmaceutical, renal transfer fluid pressure differential with pressure gradi-
dialysis or aquatics areas. An approved monitoring pro- ent monitoring, on-toxic transfer fluids, and maximum
tocol shall be developed. The approach utilized shall be 69 kPa (10 psi) steam pressure criteria is maintained.
as approved by ORF and DOHS.
Fixture Type Min Hot Water-Outlet Temp Max Hot Water-Outlet Temp
General sinks 50C (122F) 51.5C (125F)
Cage wash work
57C (135F) 62C (143F)
sinks
Lab/animal
research facility 50C (122F) 60C (140F)
area sinks
Cage wash 62.5C (145F) (Boosted locally where
60C (140F)
equipment higher temp required)
51.5C (125F), except up to 57C
(135F) where served from a 60C (140F)
system and provided the fixture is located
Hand wash sinks 50C (122F) within the secure lab or animal research
facility program areas. 40C (104F)
Recommended standard set point for point
of use generated tempered water.
55C (131F), except where units are specifi-
cally selected with heaters and designed for
Labware washers 62C (143F)
lower inlet hot water temperatures (which in
no case shall be less than 50C (122F)
50C (122F), except 57C (135F) minimum
required for undercounter dishwashers
and 60C (140F) minimum required
for commercial dishwashers, unless such
60C (140F), except commercial food
Kitchen areas units include suitable built-in heaters and
service may be up to 62C (143F). Final
and sinks and are designed to maintain sanitization
rinse temp of commercial dishwashers to be
dishwashers with the lower temperature supply, which
boosted locally.
shall be min. 50C (122F). 57C (135F)
for commercial food service areas. Refer
to Section 8.2, Plumbing Fixtures and
Equipment, dishwasher requirements.
Hose stations 52C (125F) 60C (140F)
Janitor closet/ 52C (125F), except 60C (140F) for food 60C (140F), except 62C (143F) for food
service sinks service and cage wash areas service and cage wash areas
43C (110F) maximum outlet temp,
Public lavatory supplied from hot water of at least 50C
40C (104F) mixed outlet temperature
faucets (122F) delivered to the inlet of tempering
valve at fixture location
water-recirculation systems) such as between the high- temperature at the mixing-valve outlet shall be set at
pressure and low-pressure sides of the PRV, or through 52C54C (125F130F) so the temperature at use
any arrangement that can compromise pressure control. points complies with the requirements given in Table
8.3.8, Minimum and Maximum Hot Water-Outlet
Temperatures. The temperature at any point in any hot
Rationale: These requirements ensure appropriate water piping system shall not fall below 50C (122F);
pressure, temperature and microbial control and distribution temperature up to 60C (140F) is
and proper operation of water-circulating acceptable where point of use thermostatic protection
systems, while maintaining flexibility for system is provided to comply with the requirements of Table
extensions, modifications, and pressure balance. 8.3.8, Minimum and Maximum Hot Water-Outlet
Temperatures or as required by plumbing code.
Temperature Control and D. Food Service and Cage Wash Areas: Potable water at
60C (140F) shall be distributed to food service areas
Over-Temperature Protection and equipment, and lab water at 60C (140F) shall be
A. Temperature Control: distributed to cage wash areas.
1. ASSE-1017 listed devices shall be provided at E. Master Thermostatic Assembly: The use of only a
the hot water source of all domestic-water-heat- single highlow master thermostatic assembly is accept-
ing systems as well as all systems that are pro- able for lab, ARF, and administrative facilities, pro-
duced from a heat-transfer fluid which operates vided the following conditions are met:
at a temperature at or above 71C (160F). The
devices shall be arranged in parallel to provide 1. Supply temperature to the mixing valve is not
N + 1 redundancy for continuous service. Only over 60C (140F).
hot water to commercial food service, laundry, 2. The hot water source includes fail safe protec-
cage wash equipment, or other approved institu- tion to prevent distribution of over-temperature
tional applications are exempted subject to con- water.
formance with DRM and plumbing code. Where
mixing valves are electronic type, only units that 3. A normally closed and locked maintenance
ensure undisrupted thermostatically protected bypass is provided at the mixing valve and is of
hot water supply (including under conditions of minimal length to avoid dead-legs.
electrical power outage) may be utilized. The
reliance upon batteries is unacceptable. 4. Each shower on the system and any other critical
temperature control application is served with
2. All mixing valve assemblies shall be sized to local or point of use thermostatic (or combina-
maintain proper temperature control under all tion thermostatic and pressure balance) protec-
demand flow conditions. tion listed in accordance with ASSE 1016 for the
respective application and fixture flow rate.
3. The ASSE-1017 devices shall be arranged and set
to limit temperatures at the outlet of the valve to a 5. Influent water quality is fully compliant with
maximum of 60C (140F) where serving domes- manufacturer requirements with regard to max-
tic plumbing fixtures and laboratory equipment, imum hardness or other constraints.
such that the temperature at use points complies
with the requirements given in Table 8.3.8. Where these conditions are not met, redundant (in par-
allel) thermostatic mixing valves are required, sized in
B. Maximum/Minimum Temperatures: For general consideration of facility peak and minimum flows. The
potable water distribution throughout the facility, water use of redundant devices, in parallel, and capable of
ensuring thermostatic protection including under low- not induce scald hazards. It is preferable to introduce a
flow conditions is recommended. purge than to stop circulation for any prolonged period.
Examples include where a closed recirculating sub-loop
F. BAS Monitoring: A temperature transducer shall be is created by use of a backflow preventer for a lab water
provided to alert BAS of hot water outlet temperatures system where a common water heater arrangement pro-
(locate after the water heater and master mixing valve vides the supply for both lab and domestic (potable)
where provided), and at the main hot water return (or hot water and a booster heater is therefore required to
from each hot water return zone where multiple zones recover the heat loss in the sub-loop. Residential water
or multiple temperature returns are provided). The alert heaters and instant-hot type units are not acceptable.
set points shall be set within 2.7C (5F) of the design
operating set point for each function at the point of
measurement or as required to accommodate normal
variations in thermostatic controls.
may require softening for control of scale. Review man- 8.3.12 Corrosion Protection,
ufacturers equipment requirements and refer to Section
8.3.12, Corrosion Protection, Water Treatment, and Water Treatment, and
Control of Scale. Control of Scale
E. Cage Wash Area Water Heating and Metering: A. Water Treatment: The application of water treat-
Dedicated water heaters arranged to provide N + 1 redun- ment shall be based upon site-specific water analysis.
dancy are required for central cage wash areas. Metering Refer to Section 8.3.13, Available Water Supply/Water
of water may be required for large facilities and shall be Supply Analysis.
determined by ORF on a project specific basis.
B. Required Applications: Provisions to control scale
F. Hose Stations: Appropriate backflow protection shall be provided wherever the on-site water analysis
is required for hose stations utilizing detergent or demonstrates water supply conditions may be detrimen-
steam (up to ASSE 1013 type). Refer to Section 8.3.6, tal to long-term operation or impose excessive mainte-
Backflow Protection. Independent high pressure (typi- nance. The A/E shall review requirements for major lab
cally 689827 kPa [100120 psig]) supplies may be and ARF equipment, heat exchangers, and liquid ring
provided if requested by the program and may incor- vacuum pumps and ensure conformance.
porate hot water heating or central or local mixing
C. Whole Building Water Treatment: At the NIH
stations where justified. At the NIH, hose stations are
campus in Bethesda, MD, the use of central, whole
typically provided with lab/cage wash area hot and
building water softeners, corrosion inhibitors, or
cold water. The facility cleanup operations and simul-
chemical adjustment of incoming water supplies is not
taneous use requirements shall be verified.
typically required or desirable. Softeners are typically
G. Jetted Drains/Trough Flush Piping: Jetted drains required for cage washers and major (central process-
shall provide required flow, but at least 95115 lpm ing) equipment. Determination of need of water soften-
(2 30 gpm) each. A minimum of 10 water supply fix- ing, scale control, or corrosion mitigation shall be made
ture units is required per jetted drain on flushometer after analysis of feed water supply, and in concert with
curves. The minimum size water supply to a flushom- equipment selections. Refer to Section 12.1, High Purity
eter or control valve serving a jetted trap is 32 mm Water Systems for applicable water softener require-
(1.25 in.). The quantity of trough flush lines in simul- ments. Assessments shall be made in conformance with
taneous use shall be verified and flow rates calculated. EN12502 Protection of Metallic Materials Against
The minimum allowance shall be a single room with Corrosion, Guidelines on the Assessment of Corrosion
all troughs in the room flushing plus the jetted drain Likelihood in Water Distribution and Storage Systems;
and hose station in operation. Simultaneous use during NACE, and the recommendations of the piping material
cleaning of both jetted drains and trough rinse is typi- association.
cal. The minimum size cold water to a room with both
D. Softened Water Piping Protection: Water shall not
jetted drains and flushing roughs shall be 40 mm (1.5
be completely softened unless specifically required for
in.) diameter. Minimum size piping into a room serv-
the application (e.g., RO system feed, boiler makeup,
ing troughs only, with no jetted drains is 25 mm (1
etc.). Where softening is applied for general plumbing
in.). Water hammer arrestors are required for all flush-
applications, automatic blending (typically with a pilot
ometers, hose stations, and trough rinse arrangements.
type hydraulically operated diaphragm automatic con-
H. Avoid ARF Sensitive Areas: Refer to Section 8.1, trol valve) to achieve approximately 50 mg/L hardness
Plumbing General Requirements for issues related to as CaCO3 (3 grains per gallon) shall be provide utilizing
routing of piping systems and equipment. engineered automatic or calibrated flow control valves
at the water softener outlet and commissioning for
proper operation.
Contents:
Storm Sanitary
Lab Waste Grease
Type of Discharge Drain Drain
Discharge Waste
Discharge Discharge
Air conditioners: Water cooled, non-contaminated a a
Animal holding rooms b b
Aquatic systems: Small and local x x
Aquatic systems drain, backwash, and blow-down:
c
Central and large
Area well x
Autoclave/steam sterilizers x x
Boiler blow-down x
Cage washer/tunnel washer with or without
x
neutralization
Cage wash area floor drains, descaling and prewash
area, floor sinks and equipment except bedding x
disposal grinders or pulpers
Cooling waters and blow-down waters individual
a a
determination based on contamination
Condensate drains: Air handling unit, cooling coil,
refrigerated equipment atmospherically generated, a
non-contaminated condensate only
Condensate equipment area, adjacent floor drain, or
x
nearby point for coil cleaning
Condensate drains where coil cleaning wastes cannot
x
be reliably separated, including fan coil units
Cooling tower: If treated (typical) x
Cooling water: Non-contaminated, non-contact (verify) x x
Final
Dishwashers: Commercial type, food service areas, all
high temp x
food service sales areas
rinse only
Dishwasher: Light commercial or residential type,
x
break room type
Domestic plumbing fixtures, lavatories/water closets/
x
showers
Drinking fountain x
Elevator pit drain, hydraulic fitted with oil-precluding
(limiting) pump system. Note: only indirect waste x
arrangements permitted
Elevator pit drain: Except hydraulically operated eleva-
x
tors. Note: only indirect waste arrangements permitted
Exterior areas exposed to rainfall x
Fire system blow-down/test and drain d x
Storm Sanitary
Lab Waste Grease
Type of Discharge Drain Drain
Discharge Waste
Discharge Discharge
Floor sinks/drain receptors in lab and animal research
x
facility areas
Floor drains/floor sinks in food service areas (except
x
ice machines/Ice pans)
Food display case: Refrigerated x
Food waste disposers in break rooms and similar areas x
Food waste disposers in food service areas e
Waste disposers/grinders in lab/aquatic areas f
Generator in fuel tank area x, g
Hand sinkconnect to waste system serving area x x
High purity water system discharge: Reverse osmosis h x
High purity water system discharge: Deionized x
Humidifiers: Non-treated water, non-steam x x
Humidifiers: Treated steam or water x
Ice machine drain: Commercial, and industrial x x
General lab equipment x
Labware/lab glass washer x
Loading docks: Enclosed x
Mechanical room floor drains and floor sinks x
Overflow from ponds: Ornamental, utility; check for
chemical treatment (if any contamination must route to
x x
sanitary). Ozone treated with no other chemicals may
be permitted to the storm system with prior approval.
Overflow from tanks and reservoirs: Industrial process,
x
if treated
Parking garage with top deck exposed to rainfall x
Parking garage, intermediate decks i
Potable (chlorinated) water waste x
Pot/warewashing sinks and dishwashers, prewash and
x
wash compartments
Roof drainage x
Sanitize compartment of sinks and dishwashers x
Subsoil/underslab/foundation drainage j
Transformer vault g
Water softener backwash x
Note: Each design shall include air gaps or air breaks as necessary to prevent cross-connection between the drain-
age collection system and the water-air system or fixtures and equipment. All storm systems shall be arranged to
preclude any potential of backflow into the building. All waste discharges shall be in accordance with Sections 8.4.1
and 8.4.2.
a
Unless it is assured that water is uncontaminated e
Grease interceptor to be exterior type, and to be sized
atmospheric clear water waste, route to the sanitary for solids.
system only.
Approved only on a project-specific basisnot for high
f
b
Wastes from animal holding rooms typically discharge containment. Waste materials to be corrosion resistant
as lab waste due to associated routine cleaning chemi- at least to mains.
cals, through pH treatment systems designed for solids
per the DRM. Where cleaning chemicals and normal
g
If area must have drainage, a proper oil interceptor is
operations will not result in discharge violations, con- required. Indirect waste protection is required for trans-
nection of animal holding rooms waste systems to the former vaults to provide fail-safe protection from flood-
sanitary system is acceptable for small facilities only ing or backup of water. Fuel oil tank areas to be properly
where corrosion-resistant piping is utilized and such diked.
areas are routed independently to site sewer man- h
Drains from reverse osmosis preferably to the lab
hole to facilitate monitoring and also remediation, if waste system, but may be routed to the sanitary system
eventually required. Cage wash areas and associated where lab waste is not reasonably available. For such
equipment shall discharge through facility lab waste cases, use approved plastic materials (ASTM D2665
neutralization. Autoclaves/steam sterilizers typically to PVC, PVDF, or polypropylene) for trap and fixture
sanitary. Special waste handling may be required for horizontal branch.
animals larger than non-human primates.
i
Dry-pan drain arrangement through a garage oil/sand
c
Wastes from aquatic systems typically shall route to interceptor with submerged water trap seal.
the sanitary systems due to high solids. The use of cor-
rosion- resistant piping materials is recommended, and Dedicated line to catch basin or an appropriate back-
j
is required for saltwater applications. Special waste water protection arrangement required to protect from
treatment may be required for some program applica- backwater backflow of storm into subsoil drainage
tions, refer to the requirements for aquatic systems. system lines. No storm drain system connections per-
mitted into subsoil drain system.
d
Fire water tests spilled at grade may route to the storm
water system only where properly neutralized per EPA
requirements. Where fire system includes biocides or
other water treatment, waste must be to sanitary.
C. Pre-Discharge Waste Treatment and Prohibition of coil units, emergency dike relief from bermed or diked
Dilution as a Waste Treatment: Wastes that require any areas from chemicals or fuels or any discharge that is not
form of special treatment prior to discharge to public directly suitable for disposal to natural waterways with-
sewer systems shall be treated individually at each out inducing damage or hazards.
building, prior to release to the campus sewer collection
systems. Dilution is generally not acceptable and may 1. Where surface water from impervious areas dis-
be considered only for limited physical characteristics charges to storm systems, appropriate treatment
(e.g., elevated solids or BOD associated with ARF) that may be required (e.g., coalescing filter intercep-
will not result in violation of campus discharge permits, tors). Comply with requirements of Clean Water
hazards, risks or maintenance issues to campus infra- Act and NPDES Permit. Refer to Section 1.11.
structure and then only with justification and approval G. Aggressive Waste Streams: Drains receiving high
of ORF and DEP. purity water discharge (e.g., laboratory sinks adjacent to
D. Exterior Interceptors: The public and private on-site water polishers and pure water production equipment),
sanitary sewer systems shall be protected against the and condensate from high-efficiency fuel burning appli-
potential discharge of grease and oil originating from ances, high salinity wastes, and other potentially cor-
food handling, parking garages, transformer vaults, rosive wastes (e.g., lab and cage wash area wastes) shall
and other built construction through the application of discharge to the lab waste system utilizing corrosion-
properly designed and sized exterior interceptors. resistant materials detailed in Table 8.4.1. Where lab
waste is unavailable for areas where high purity water
E. Private Waste Treatment System Additional or high salinity waters require discharge, discharge to
Requirements: Any facility that discharges to a private the sanitary system may occur through approved cor-
waste treatment system (PWTS) shall be subject to addi- rosion-resistant materials with appropriate treatment,
tional requirements that will be addressed on a project- subject to NIH approval and conformance with dis-
specific basis, and shall meet requirements of any addi- charge regulations.
tional AHJs. PWTS shall not be used where a public
sanitary sewer can be utilized. ORF and DEP approval
is required. The design of PWTS shall require full mor-
phological soils profile examination by a qualified soils
scientist or geotechnical engineer based upon sufficient 8.4.3 All Systems:
quantity of on-site borings and test pits. Future load- General Requirements
ings, expansion capabilities and failure mitigation/
The A/E shall comply with the following requirements
replacement areas shall be addressed. Bypasses are not
to avoid structural or piping system damage, stresses,
permitted around treatment equipment. Fail-safety
or other failures.
arrangements and redundancy configurations shall be
provided to ensure reliability and continuity of ser- A. Excavation, Backfill, and Support:
vice. Compliance with the International Private Sewage
Disposal Code is required. Pressurized distribution is 1. Systems shall be installed as fully open trench
required and systems shall be designed for routine high- work.
strength waste streams (including high BOD5, TSS, and
2. Excavation, backfill, support, dewatering, cor-
fats/oils/grease).
rosion protection, and compaction requirements
F. Storm Water System Discharge Requirements: Only shall be specified in conformance with on-site
uncontaminated storm water, groundwater, and uncon- geotechnical reports and recommendations of
taminated atmospheric condensate may be discharged to the geotechnical engineer.
the storm water system. Prohibited discharge includes, but
3. Proper analysis of soils for each underground
is not limited to waste water from interior floor drains,
installation is essential. Coordinate between
elevator pit drainage (whether or not fitted with oil-pre-
disciplines to ensure conformance with require-
cluding pump controls), chemicals of any type, including
ments of Section 8.1, Plumbing General
chemicals associate with cleaning of air handlers and fan
Requirements.
4. Excavations shall not be within a 45 degree angle over highly sensitive spaces or equipment. Refer
of repose of the bottom of footings or founda- to Section 8.1, Plumbing General Requirements.
tions serving buildings, supports, or retain-
ing walls. The A/E shall consider the width of 3. Waste stacks of at least 100 mm (4 in.) should
trenches in arranging piping networks and may be provided, with corresponding vent stacks
need to advise the structural engineer to lower of at least 75 mm (3 in.) to serve lab and ARF
the bottom of certain footings. areas. Such stacks shall be located at permanent
columns, except where stacked utility corridor
5. The A/E shall specify quality control means distribution concepts are utilized. Frequency
to ensure appropriate excavation, compaction, of stacks shall be project-driven, but gener-
backfill, and protection of underground piping ally should be available to minimize horizontal
installations. Special requirements of manufac- piping runs in ceilings of program areas to less
turer and reference standards for materials shall than 2333.5 m (75100 ft.), except where inter-
be followed. stitial spaces are provided to facilitate horizontal
pipe routing for access to each area.
B. Plumbing Fixtures and Drainage System Openings
Locations: Plumbing fixtures, including indirect waste 4. Underground piping mains shall be routed
receptors, floor drains, and any other opening within under corridors rather than under finished pro-
the building into drainage systems shall be located only gram areas when possible. This requirement is
in readily accessible, normally occupied facility areas especially pertinent to non-storm drainage sys-
where any drainage backup would not induce significant tems. Waste piping systems shall be designed
damage, safety, or sanitation risks and would be read- and installed in a direct manner, with minimal
ily detected. Plumbing fixtures (including floor drains horizontal offsets to aid in the efficient transport
and indirect waste receptors) shall not be located under of waste. Piping shall be run in practical align-
casework, in storerooms for food, laboratory or ARF ment with the facility layout to facilitate flexibil-
equipment or supplies, or other spaces where there is a ity and access.
sensitive sanitation risk, or in any high security, data, or
other sensitive areas.
Rationale: Avoidance over animal areas and other
critical spaces is to minimize potential for leakage,
Rationale: This is to maintain sanitation and disruptions, stress, and noise during access,
ensure that a malfunction may be observed and maintenance, and renovations and to maintain
corrected before facility damage or significant sanitary conditions. By locating piping mains
contamination, pest control, or safety issues under corridors, such piping may be accessed with
occur. minimal damage or disruption to program areas
and sensitive finishes, and provides for central,
C. Distribution: accessible connections to serve future changes.
1. Comply with piping routing and configura- D. Materials: Piping, materials, and joint methods shall
tion requirements as per Section 8.1, Plumbing comply with Exhibit 6.3. Drains receiving waste from
General Requirements. high salinity discharges shall be constructed of suit-
2. Waste and vent stack and storm drain leader able chloride-resistant materials. For intermittent dis-
locations shall comply with Section 8.1, charges, such materials shall be carried at least to the
Plumbing General Requirements. point of sufficient blending with other waste streams.
The use of fixtures with waste discharge above E. Insulation: Drains receiving wastes sufficiently cold
the floor shall be provided where possible to to drop below the ambient dewpoint at the location
avoid pipe routing over restricted spaces. Double of the piping installation shall be insulated, including
containment is required where drainage or haz- drain bodies as required to prevent potential condensa-
ardous liquid piping must be located directly tion. Refer to Exhibit 6.4.
F. Identification of Components: The cover of all of required pipe sizes at required slopes, not by reducing
interceptors, manholes, and treatment devices shall be pipe sizes below DRM or code minimum requirements.
stamped or embossed to identify the interceptor type The use of two 45 ells is often preferred to 90 hori-
and system served. zontal directional changes for systems with high solids
or grease.
G. Protection of Storm Waste: All floor drains, interior
open sumps, or other arrangements that have drain B. Minimum Slope: A minimum slope of at least 2%
openings less than 25 mm (1 in.) above the floor and shall be provided for horizontal drainage piping with
within the building shall discharge only to the respec- an internal diameter of 150 mm (6 in.) and smaller.
tive sanitary, lab waste, or grease waste system. No A minimum slope of at least 1% shall be provided for
drain connection which could become plausibly con- horizontal waste piping sizes 200250 mm (810 in.).
taminated or misused may discharge to the storm drain- A minimum slope of at least 0.5% shall be provided
age system. for horizontal waste piping 300 mm (12 in.) and larger.
Trap arms shall be sloped at 2% regardless of pipe size
H. Gas-tight: All sumps, lift stations, treatment devices, except that slope of up to 4% is acceptable where the
and other components and equipment connected to the trap arm-length limitation (distance from the trap arm
drainage system shall be gas-tight and water-tight, to the vent) has been adjusted.
including cover assemblies, to at least a 3 m (10 ft.)
water head or 34 kPa (5 psi) air. All sumps and treat- C. Storm and Clear Water Drainage: A minimum veloc-
ment equipment shall be adequately vented to maintain ity of 2 ft./s (0.6 m/s) is required. Slope of less than 1%
atmospheric conditions and prevent air locking. is unacceptable for piping 150 mm (6 in.) and smaller,
except that infiltration portion of underslab/foundation
I. Trap Design: All traps shall be self-restoring water- drains may run at 0.5%.
based seal type only, self-scouring design with no
mechanical moving parts, interior partitions, or reli-
ance on elastomeric components for the gas-tight seal.
There shall be no offsets in the risers of single-entry- H. Storm Drainage Systems: Cleanouts for storm drain-
type two-way or cleanout fittings. Single entry two-way age systems, including secondary or emergency over-
cleanouts may be used for shallow lines where there flow systems, shall meet requirements of this section as
are no offsets in the cleanout riser and cable direction for other types of drainage systems. The roof or over-
can be reasonably controlled. Where manufactured flow drain itself shall be considered as a viable cleanout
double entry cleanouts are not available, they may be for accessible flat roofs provided cleanout or access
field fabricated from combination wye and 1/8 bend fit- point spacing does not exceed 30 m (100 ft.) or 135
tings, with the downstream fitting positioned to permit aggregate directional change, and the roof area can be
upstream rodding (against flow) and the upstream fit- safely accessed with drain-cleaning equipment, without
ting to permit downstream (with flow) rodding of the necessity of hoisting. Above ceiling cleanouts may be
drain line. used where required.
1. All wet-vent arrangements, including circuit whether as part of normal or irregular conditions,
vents and any form of combination waste and including intermittent discharges. Appropriate waste
vents shall serve only fixtures located within the water cooling arrangements shall be provided.
same story.
B. Closed Loop Cooling: Where practical, cooling pro-
2. Vents for laboratory sinks shall be compliant visions should utilize closed loop connections (from
with code requirements, including the require- approved building cooling water sources) with heat
ment for vent rise above the flood-level rim. exchangers or other approved means to conserve water.
Where vent rise above the flood level rim is not Where once-through water is necessary, the use of alter-
possible due to casework restrictions or lack of native cooling water streams to facilitate cooling should
presence of an umbilical within required trap- be considered.
arm-length limitation, the fixture shall be vented
as an island sink vent per plumbing code. C. Heat Reclamation: Dependent upon application and
determined benefit, the use of heat reclamation should
The horizontal foot vent may be installed in the be considered.
casework rather than below the floor, provided
the lowest portion is at an elevation fully above D. Special High Temperature Piping Materials:
the top of the horizontal waste (preferably at Regardless of the provision of after-cooling arrange-
least 300 mm [12 in.] higher). The foot vent shall ments, pipe materials for drainage systems receiving
be sloped back to drain at least 2%, constructed routine potentially high temperature waste above 60C
with drainage pattern fittings, and rise at the (140F) shall be of materials and joint methods approved
nearest wall or chase to a point at least 150 mm for high temperature waste systems. Such piping systems
(6 in.) above the highest fixture flood rim served shall be designed to address expansion/contraction issues
prior to additional horizontal offsets. A cleanout (even where equipment includes an on-board after-cooler
shall be provided to serve the foot vent. arrangement). Comply as follows:
C. Manholes as Emergency Relief: If unbolted or G. Main Line vs. Individual Backwater Valves: The use
vented sanitary sewer manholes are used, coordinate of individual backwater valves at fixtures is not per-
with site utility designers to ensure manholes are not mitted in lieu of mainline backwater valves; however,
located near to any adjacent waterway or area where where backwater potential only affects a limited and
such emergency relief condition might pose an environ- isolated fixture branch serving just a few minor fix-
mental hazard. Sewage backups must be properly col- tures, an accessible backwater valve may be provided
lected and cleaned. for that branch. Where multiple fixture branches occur
or multiple fixtures are located at elevations that would
require backwater valve protection per the requirements
Rationale: These provisions are to protect the
of this section, main line devices to serve the entire iso-
facility, and especially basement-level areas from
lated section shall be provided.
backup of sewage, and to minimize potential that
upon stoppage of a drain, upper-level waste will
continue to discharge and flood a basement. Rationale: Individual fixture backwater valves
severely restrict flow and can result in ongoing
maintenance issues, often leading to removal of
D. Backwater/Isolation Valves Location and Bypass:
devices and susceptibility for sewage flooding.
Backwater valves shall be accessible. A corrosion resis-
tant sewage system type full way isolation valve (plug
or shear gate) shall be provided where the repair or ser- H. No Pumping Prior to Treatment: With the excep-
vice of the backwater valve would cause disruption or tion of corrosion-resistant lift stations designed for lab
flooding. or ARF area waste, wastes requiring treatment prior
to discharge to the sewer system shall not be routed to
E. Backwater Valve Type: Where possible, the use of lift stations or ejectors prior to treatment. Fat, oil, and
backwater valves that are full-way, normally open type grease wastes shall not be routed to a pump or ejector
(or devices located at the manhole) are preferred over system prior to passing through the appropriate exterior
device configurations that can interfere with the free interceptor.
normal flow of waste or air. Backwater valves shall be
automatic.
other items that may be sanitized for animal contact or E. Lab/ARF Scientific Equipment Indirect Waste:
contact with animal food, water, or medical applications Indirect waste from in-lab equipment may discharge to
shall be provided with indirect waste with an air gap. an adjacent lab sink provided such waste is for minor
drainage flows only (e.g., polishers and some bench top
B. Direct Connections: Direct connections shall be pro- equipment), or shall discharge to another suitable fixture
vided for all conventional plumbing fixtures, waste treat- drain that is located within the same lab as the equip-
ment systems, interceptors, and for any equipment or ment served. Waste tubing shall be secured and arranged
condition where a sealed or closed connection is required to maintain the required air gap above the flood-level
in the DRM or by manufacturers requirements, except rim and shall be fixed at a point to prevent flooding or
where indirect waste connections are required by the displacement. Labware washers shall be connected to
DRM or code. Items discharging heavy solids (e.g., dis- the fixture (sink) drain tailpiece, unless provided with a
posers, grinders and waste water lift pumps and ejectors) proper floor sink or wall type waste outlet box.
shall be directly connected. Direct connections are not
permitted from steam or compressed gas piping systems, F. Indirect Waste Receptors Arrangement and Location:
relief valves, or other conditions that could pressurize the Indirect waste receptor placement shall be located to
waste system or induce safety hazards to users, system minimize the length of required indirect waste piping.
or loss of trap seals. This does not preclude direct con- Indirect waste shall discharge directly to an indirect
nection of pump discharges from sanitary and lab waste waste receptor that is directly connected to the drain-
pumps and ejectors, blow-out drains, or jetted traps. age system, and shall not discharge into another indirect
waste line or from one indirect receptor into another.
C. Sealed Indirect Connections: Where sealed connec- Indirect waste shall not be channeled into a remotely
tions are required but protection from backwater is also located receptor.
needed, a direct connection into the inlet of a properly
vented trap shall be utilized along with provision of a G. Individual Routing: Each item shall be individually
floor drain located on the immediate branch downstream routed to the respective indirect waste receptors, and
of the connection (within 1.5 m/5 ft.), within the same shall not be combined into common indirect waste pipe,
room as the equipment service, with no intervening fix- except for non-potable or other non-sensitive equipment
ture connections. The floor drain shall be fitted with an that is immediately adjacent to each other and within
electric trap seal primer and the flood level rim shall be the same room.
below the connection to be protected. This arrangement
shall be considered as an air break for non-critical appli- H. Types and Application of Indirect Waste Receptors:
cations where an air-break would be acceptable from a 1. Indirect waste receptors that are located or
cross-contamination risk. Drain traps shall be at least 75 exposed in finished spaces shall be sanitary
mm (3 in.) diameter and include a cleanout on the tail- floor sinks with adequate sump capacity, proper
piece to serve the drain trap. part-grate design to eliminate splashing, and a
D. Indirect Waste Termination: Indirect waste (including removable internal dome strainer or sediment
but not limited to fire sprinkler drains) shall not termi- bucket. Refer to Section 8.2, Plumbing Fixtures
nate into other plumbing fixtures including janitor mop and Equipment.
sinks, showers, or other fixtures not dedicated specifi- 2. Stainless steel wall outlet boxes connected to
cally for receipt of indirect waste. Discharge from animal standpipes of at least 50 mm diameter may be
drinking water flush systems into lab sinks or drains used for various in-lab equipment drainage and
within the same holding room is allowed. other areas where indirect waste for receiving
low flows or an elevated (raised) discharge is
Rationale: Discharge of indirect waste through required, provided the front outlet box opening
mop sinks can result in flooding due to excessive is not located inside casework or otherwise con-
debris in these lines or cleaning materials (e.g., cealed, and is not located in a high containment
mop/containers) placed in the fixture, blocking or ABSL-2 or higher space.
the drain.
3. In-bench sinks or receptors may be utilized (e.g., may be used for mechanical rooms and similar
small diameter round sinks). Automatic trap unfinished spaces and shall be adequately sized
seal protection may be required. for peak flow and to permit removal of sediment
buckets/grates for cleaning. Stainless steel recep-
4. Floor drains or floor drains with drain recep- tors or other approved corrosion-resistant mate-
tor funnels may be used to receive indirect waste rials shall be used for drains receiving waste
for limited flow applications, e.g., from ice from low conductivity high purity water systems
machines and condensate. Waste shall not flood or other low conductivity discharges.
past the top grate. Proper top and sump designs
are required for the application. 9. Drains receiving waste from high salinity dis-
charges (including but not limited to the reject
5. Connection into the tailpiece of lab sinks, floor from direct osmosis high salinity RO system
drains, floor sinks, and other fixtures unless cleaning and certain aquatics applications) shall
otherwise prohibited by code is acceptable with be constructed of suitable chloride-resistant
compatible sizing and provided both the receiv- materials.
ing fixture trap and discharge source are within
the same room when served with a maximum 10. Hub drains and standpipe receptors at least 50
1524 mm (5 ft.) developed length of indirect mm diameter are acceptable for use in mechani-
waste piping. A lab sink drain may be upsized to cal rooms and similar unfinished areas, though
50 mm (2 in.) to receive indirect waste provided are generally less desirable than floor sinks and
the waste from the adjacent equipment does not similar receptors, unless above-floor drainage
exceed 30 lpm (8 gpm) intermittent or 15 lpm (4 is required. Where an air gap is required, such
gpm) constant. drains must be dedicated funnel receptor-type
drains, with an internal dome strainer or basket.
6. Funnel receptors that are not part of floor drains
or floor sinks may be utilized in finished areas 11. The minimum size of any drain or trap serving
only where fitted with an internal dome strainer; a floor drain or floor sink, regardless of applica-
the entire body is constructed of 316 stainless tion is 75 mm (3 in.).
steel arranged to be readily cleanable, fully
accessible (not within casework), and where
use of floor sinks, funnel-floor drains, or wall Rationale: Adequate capacity in top dimension,
boxes, or indirect waste to the drain tailpiece of sump, and discharge pipe is necessary to preclude
another fixture cannot be utilized or would be flooding and stoppage, and to permit stoppages to
prohibited. At least one-half of the finished top be readily cleared.
of floor sinks shall be fully exposed. All other
indirect waste receptors shall be fully exposed. I. Receptor Connections/Location: Indirect waste
receptors shall be directly connected to the serving
7. The use of a stand-pipe arrangement may be used drainage system with properly trapped and vented con-
only where necessary to integrate with construc- nections, and the receptor shall be located as close as
tion conditions or other project limitations, sub- practical (generally within the same room) as the fix-
ject to justification and approval. Stainless steel ture or equipment served to minimize the length of
is required for sanitation. Enameled cast iron is indirect waste piping. Although location of the recep-
generally not acceptable for finished spaces due tor in a room other than where the fixture or equip-
to enamel chipping and because exterior services ment requiring the indirect waste is located is generally
are not typically enameled and readily cleanable. prohibited, it is acceptable to locate the indirect waste
Cast iron is not an approved corrosion resistant receptor within the manufacturers utility service area
lab waste material. Standpipes through the floor for the equipment (e.g., autoclaves, cage washers, and
shall be avoided in finished locations. tunnel washers), provided the drain is readily accessi-
8. Cast iron floor sinks and catch basins or large ble and unconcealed. Indirect waste receptors shall be
sump drains with removable sediment buckets installed only in readily accessible, normally occupied
spaces, and shall not be located in toilet rooms, crawl lab areas, such items shall discharge to an approved
spaces, casework, closets, storerooms, or any concealed indirect waste receptor. Air gap fittings are not required
location. Receptors serving equipment may be located unless used for a sanitary application (e.g., aquatics or
in the walk-in or readily accessible utility access area for animal food/water wares), provided the drain is looped
the equipment. The placement of drains serving cage- high and fastened under the sink rim. Where a waste
wash, sterilizers, and other pit mounted equipment shall receptor is provided solely to serve equipment that may
be coordinated to ensure access. Floor sinks shall not not remain in frequent use (e.g., undercounter type lab-
be located under casework, but may be within the toe ware washer) a trap primer is required.
kick. No drain opening may be located where a backup
or blockage would be undetected or cause damage, M. Waste Disposers, Bedding Grinders, Etc.: Waste and
tripping, or a sanitation hazard. Indirect waste recep- bedding disposers and similar equipment shall connect
tors shall not be located behind finished construction, directly to the drainage system and shall not discharge
whether or not provided with access. through indirect waste receptors.
Rationale: Placement of the receptor in the same Rationale: Solid wastes, including ground-up
area served is to minimize risk of flooding and matter and pulp, create unsanitary conditions
ensure the fixture may be effectively monitored in and can result in drain-line blockages and
the event of a stoppage, and to promote a sanitary overflows where indirectly connected, and can
installation. quickly flood indirect waste receptors.
J. Hub Drains and Standpipe Receptors: Hub drains N. Health Concern Areas, Coolers and Environmental
and standpipe receptors shall not be utilized in finished Control Rooms: Drains shall not be provided in walk-
areas. It is acceptable to provide wall waste outlet boxes in coolers, environmental (cold/hot) rooms, human
for laboratories and similar applications where the box or animal food-storage areas, or other areas where a
opening is exposed into the room and unconcealed. backup could cause a health concern or potential con-
tamination. Where required, the preferred approach
is to slope to a trench drain outside the space. Where
Rationale: Hub drain installations do not this is not satisfactory, indirect waste with an air gap
typically provide readily cleanable surfaces, and shall be utilized. For environmental rooms, cold rooms,
may pose safety hazards, leak paths and an open and similar equipment, condensate drainage from such
path for debris and trash to enter drain systems. rooms shall be routed as indirect waste to a receptor
properly located outside the equipment.
K. Floor Drain/Floor Sink Installation: Floor drains and O. Indirect Waste Pipe Size and Cleanouts: Cleanouts
floor sinks shall be installed with their top grate flush are required for all indirect waste piping, including but
with, or no more than 3 mm (0.12 in.) below, the finished not limited to condensate drains. Indirect waste piping
floor. The floor or adjacent area can be sloped to receive shall be a minimum 20 mm (0.75 in.) diameter, unless
the receptor as required. The top grate of floor drains and such piping is less than 4.5 m (15 ft.) long. Cleanouts
floor sinks shall not be elevated above the floor, except for shall be provided at the upstream end of each line,
special receptors intended to segregate clear water waste at each aggregate change of direction exceeding 135
for the storm drainage system. Floor sinks shall not be degrees starting from the downstream end, and at inter-
located under casework. At least one-half of the top of vals not to exceed 15.25 m (50 ft.).
floor sinks shall be visible, and grates shall be removable.
P. Laboratory Vacuum Equipment Drainage:
L. Labware Washers, Ice Machines, Etc.: Labware Laboratory vacuum systems may be subject to ingestion
washers, ice machines, and similar, within labs shall of various contaminants.
discharge to an adjacent sink drain tailpiece where pos-
sible, or to an accessible unconcealed wall outlet box 1. Components that are protected by upstream
fitted with a trap primer, or to a funnel top drain that main line vacuum filters per Section 12.4,
has been provided with a trap seal primer. Outside of Laboratory Vacuum Systems shall discharge
through an indirect waste using a conventional a. An automatic trap primer shall discharge
air break or air gap. into the fresh air trap inlet vent to maintain
the trap seal. The vacuum system equip-
2. Waste discharges located upstream (house ment connection(s) shall be made into the
side) of main line filters (e.g., the liquid separa- branch(es) of a vertically arranged single
tor, knock-out pots, receiver arrangement that (or double) sanitary tee or Y-branch fitting
serves as a liquid separator); as well as all dis- installed on the tailpiece (inlet side) of the
charge connections for biomedical lab vacuum trap, with the top of the fitting provided
systems that do not utilize mainline filters, with a full-size removable plug to serve as a
shall discharge to the drainage system through cleanout for the at least 75 mm (3 in.) diam-
a sealed type indirect waste in accordance with eter drainage trap. Where the tailpiece off-
this section. Provided service intervals will not sets horizontally to serve multiple equipment
be required more frequently than quarterly; items, a cleanout shall be provided to serve
wastes may be collected in a sealed, ASME code the horizontal piping. The trap shall be deep
constructed corrosion resistant gas-tight vessel seal type. The drain(s) from vacuum pump
or liquid separator that is fitted with valved seal water purge and other vacuum equip-
ports to to permit introduction of decontami- ment discharge sources that are normally in
nant solution, a sight glass or other non-contact open position shall be direct connected to
means of monitoring liquid level, and with nor- the drainage system tailpiece upstream of
mally closed valved and capped manual drain- the fresh air vent and shall include an iso-
age provision. Vessel requirements larger than lation valve at the equipment connection,
38 L (10 gallons) shall require pre- approval of before the fresh air vent. Multiple drains
DOHS. A total of two vessels shall be provided, from the same vacuum system may connect
each with valving for isolation, independent to the same trap inlet.
decon, and service continuity. Where filters are
provided downstream of liquid separators, they b. Valving shall be provided on the discharge
shall be arranged to drain back to the separator. connection from each vacuum pump,
receiver, separator and similar equipment to
3. Sealed type indirect waste connections shall con- allow for controlled discharge to the drain-
sist of hard connections from equipment to the age system, manual operation, and isolation
tailpiece of a p-trap that is at least 75 mm (3 in.) as required.
diameter, with vent protection on each side of the
trap seal, and a floor drain configuration arranged c. A floor drain with a deep seal trap and auto-
to protect from backwater/backflow. A corrosion matic trap seal primer shall be located in the
resistant, metal gate, swing-type check valve shall same room as the vacuum system with the
be provided horizontally at the connection with flood level rim elevation of the floor drain
equipment, including for connections that utilize on the same floor level or below the vacuum
a manual, normally closed valves (e.g., receivers pump. The floor drain shall be located
and separators). A fresh air vent minimum of 50 within 1.5 m (5 ft.) of the drain trap serv-
mm (2 in.) diameter shall be provided on the inlet ing the vacuum equipment and shall be con-
side of the trap (connected to the drain tailpiece), nected to the same waste line serving the
but downstream of any check valve and isolation vacuum equipment.
valve arrangements used to seal the discharge
(including overflow connections where provided).
The vent shall not offset horizontally until above Rationale: This arrangement maintains a closed
the system vacuum receiver (tank). The fresh air system, and limits exposure to the vacuum system
vent on the inlet side of the trap shall extend to or potentially contaminated waste stream prior
a safe exterior location. Vents shall increase to at to disposal through the sanitary system and
least 76 mm (3 in.) diameter prior to penetrating venting , while essentially maintaining an air-
to the exterior. break to protect equipment and protect traps
devices, drain tailpiece water diversion devices, deep seal H. Defective Trap Seal Identification Systems: Such sys-
traps, mineral oil, pressure-actuated trap seal primers, tems may be applied on a per-project basis, subject to
and elastomeric drain opening seals are not acceptable. use of compatible materials and arrangement to ensure
system flexibility and conformance with the DRM.
Proposed use in research areas shall require preapproval
Rationale: Reliable maintenance of trap seals of veterinary and research staff to ensure no impact to
is significant to pest control, avoiding impact research.
to research, and biosafety. Electric time-clock
actuated primers are reliable and limit the amount
of water discharged through drains.
C. Floor Drains and Mechanical Room Drains and 8.4.12 Deep Seal Traps
Receptors: Floor drains in toilet rooms and mechanical The required depth of deep seal traps is specific to the
rooms shall be provided with automatic trap seal main- application, but shall be a minimum 100 mm (4 in.)
tenance. Trap seal primers are also required in ARF and deep from crown weir to the top of the dip of the trap.
lab areas where drains are subject to insufficient use. Sewer drains shall not be located in pressurized air ple-
nums. Deep seal traps are not an acceptable substitute
D. Constant Usage: Floor sinks serving plumbing fix-
for proper venting or the provision of trap seal primers.
tures, equipment, or appliances utilized year-round at
least on a biweekly basis do not require external trap
seal maintenance; however, indirect waste receptors Rationale: Deep seal traps should be utilized only
serving mechanical equipment shall be carefully evalu- for areas where it is required to provide additional
ated to ensure adequate flow. protection against ambient pressure imbalances
between the fixture inlet and atmospheric pressure.
E. Trap Seal Primers at Indirect Waste Receptors:
Automatic electric trap seal primers are required to
serve the indirect waste receptors for local undercounter
labware washers and ice machines in general labs, and
other waste openings with reasonable potential of seal
loss. Trap primers are not required for major autoclaves, 8.4.13 Laboratory and
cage wash equipment, undercounter washers or lab Corrosion-Resistant
equipment discharging to sink drain tailpieces. Primers
are not required where undercounter labware washers Waste Systems: Additional
are connected to the inlet of a lab sink trap at the drain Requirements
tailpiece. Primers are not required for a floor sink or
A. Description: Corrosion-resistant laboratory waste
indirect waste receptor that is provided for a normally
systems are required to serve all drainage within labora-
used plumbing fixture.
tory areas unless noted in the DRM. Laboratory waste
F. Trap Seal Primers for Animal Areas: Where floor and other corrosion-resistant waste and vent systems
drains are provided in small animal (e.g., rodent) hold- shall be separate from the general sanitary waste and
ing rooms, building corridors (including within the vent system and shall be provided in accordance with
ARF or lab area), or other areas that may not see rou- the requirements for waste systems of this section.
tine sufficient normal liquid discharge, automatic elec-
B. Design Restriction: Corrosive waste streams of
tric trap seal primers are required. Trap seal primers
highly acidic or highly caustic concentration that could
are not required for large animal holding room jetted
result in unsafe exothermic reactions or otherwise be
drains, trough rinse drains, or floor drains serving
hazardous in the piping system shall be treated locally
spaces which will be routinely hose-washed.
prior to disposal or collected for disposal as per NIH
G. Trap Seal Primer Inlet Fitting: The trap seal primer policy.
shall be connected to the tailpiece above the trap seal.
C. Sizing and Throughput: The A/E shall evalu- F. pH Monitoring and Neutralization: Lab waste sys-
ate sizing of laboratory waste systems as many items tems shall serve all lab areas and shall discharge through
of equipment and usage profiles do not directly cor- a pH monitor and neutralization system in accordance
respond to flow rates and values of common Hunters with requirements of this section.
Curve or plumbing code fixture unit tables (as the
tables are based around flow-discharge characteristics G. Cleanouts: Cleanouts for concealed lab waste sys-
of domestic plumbing fixtures and water closets). Cage tems shall be access housing type, with appropriate
washers, tunnel washers, autoclaves, and similar wash anchor flange where cast in floor, e.g., to facilitate use
equipment can generate particularly high peak flows, of only corrosion resistant and gas-tight materials and
and wash equipment often produces suds-laden and cor- pipe closure methods. Type 316 stainless steel clea-
rosive waste. Throughput, actual discharge rates, and nout body units may also be used where appropriate.
simultaneous operation modes shall be considered for Wall cleanouts may be a stainless steel plug or piping
all equipment and shall not limit the use of the facility. system material, extended to within 80 mm (3 in.) of
wall service with independent access housing/cover. An
airtight/water-tight gasketed access door with appro-
Rationale: Failure to adequately consider priate rating for wall construction may be utilized as
simultaneous surge loads can result in flooding, appropriate to the area. Gasketed/sealed arrangements
suds, and significant costs and disruption. are required in ARF areas.
C. High Solids, pH Compliant Waste: Waste with high 100 mm (4 in.) diameter trap, and the receiving main
solids (e.g., from large animal holding rooms, jetted should receive waste from at least one steam sterilizer or
drains, and trough drains but not including major wash similar fixture with a high-flushing flow rate. Minimum
equipment) may discharge as sanitary waste (preferably velocities of 0.91 m/s (3 ft/s) velocity shall be provided
directly to the sanitary sewer manhole), independent of for piping carrying high solids waste and connections
other building areas and may bypass the pH treatment arranged to provide trail flows to ensure solids trans-
system where wastes can be assuredly determined to be port. Systems shall be arranged to minimize horizontal
in conformance with discharge regulations, and subject to horizontal offsets. The use of two 45 ells is often
to NIH approval. preferred to 90 horizontal directional changes.
Rationale: Treatment systems relying on limestone Rationale: Solid matter can interfere with
or marble chips are ineffective for alkaline waste the treatment process and pose significant
streams and not suitable for wastes containing maintenance and sanitation issues.
solids or slurry, including cage wash areas and
main building lab waste systems. The cleaning I. Excluded Wastes: pH treatment systems shall not be
and disposal of trapped solids and media of such utilized for receipt or treatment of hazardous, flamma-
systems are subject to waste disposal guidelines, ble, or grease-laden waste; waste from maximum con-
can be hazardous, and require extensive tainment or potential biowaste requiring effluent treat-
maintenance of the systems. ment. Highly concentrated wastes (e.g., tissue digesters)
shall be treated locally.
D. Full Range pH Control: With very limited exceptions,
all pH treatments systems shall include bidirectional pH J. System Compliance: System design, including chem-
control for the full range of pH excursions. Limited spe- ical reagent storage, equipment, and reagent system
cialized applications may be permitted with one-way piping shall comply with Section 8.1, Plumbing General
control, but is not acceptable for cage wash, central or Requirements.
ARF lab waste, and other common applications. K. Standby Power: The complete pH treatment system,
E. Dilution Systems: Systems relying only upon dilu- including the system monitor, discharge valve, pumps,
tion, retention (holding or blending tanks), or blending mixers, and controls shall be on standby power to
with other waste from the campus are not acceptable. ensure continuous drainage, maintain records, and pre-
vent flooding.
G. Monitoring: Automatic monitoring systems, includ- Rationale: Batch type systems (that drain with
ing critical faults from pH treatment, shall alert to BAS each batch though conical tanks or pumps with
and other locations as designated by the PO. The pH self-cleaning (non-solids accumulating) tank
monitor shall incorporate an electronic record for at designs and flush cycles) do not typically require
least 120 days of waste stream characteristics moni- pump out or cleaning, but still must be accessible
tored at intervals that do not exceed 5 minutes. for service and delivery of reagents.
H. Large Animal Holding Rooms: Sewage from large B. Influent Drain by Gravity: Upper level effluents shall
animal holding rooms should not discharge through flow by gravity into the system, with only the lowest level
pH treatment systems except where wastes requiring that cannot drain by gravity pumped into the system.
pH treatment will enter drains or discharge through pH Where possible, the system shall be located such that
treatment is requested by the NIH. treated effluent may discharge by gravity.
E. Batch Type Systems: Batch type systems may be used 3. An in-line grinder or grinder/chopper pump is rec-
for all applications and are required for waste streams ommended for low levels of solids applications,
with routine solids. but not required where serving only labs in small
facilities that do not have extensive floor drains,
1. Conical (or at a minimum dish) bottom troughs, or other significant solids sources.
tanks shall be used for high solids conditions.
Sufficiently sloping bottom tanks may be used 4. Wherever redundancy of units is not provided,
for low to moderate solids conditions. a gravity flow bypass with automatic pH moni-
toring is required to preclude facility disruptions
2. Solids grinding/chopping pumps may be waived and ensure continuous monitoring of pH.
in favor of solids handling pumps where in-line
grinders have already been provided directly 5. Systems shall not include or require in-line waste
upstream of the pH treatment system. Grinders strainers or other components requiring routine
are also not required where the application is maintenance or opening of the system.
for low levels of solids feeding directly to batch
tanks fitted with solids handing pumps. G. Equalization Tanks: Equalization tank use shall be
subject to justification and approval, and where pro-
3. Redundancy of treatment systems is required vided shall be designed to automatically clean, handle,
unless an equalization tank configured to be and prevent solids accumulation. A normally closed
self-cleaning and automatically evacuate solids bypass shall be provided to permit service.
is provided.
4. A gravity flow bypass with automatic pH moni- 8.4.15.3 pH Treatment System: Equipment
toring shall be provided to prevent facility dis- Sizing and Design Requirements
ruptions and ensure continuous monitoring
A. System Size and Treatment Time: Continuous-flow
of pH when a tank is offline for service. Batch
active-type systems shall provide at least 35 minute-
tanks that are may operate in a continuous flow
influent equalization (first stage) and a minimum 10
through pH treatment mode in event of a single
minute treatment, in addition to a 35 minute free-
tank being offline for service may also be used
board for hybrid-batch operation. Batch-type systems
where adequately designed.
shall provide at least 1020 minute treatment, unless
F. Continuous-Flow Systems: Continuous flow systems approved by NIH. Where over a 30 minute-retention
may be used for lab facilities where frequent or extreme time is required, provide calculations and justification
pH excursions are improbable, and provided no cage for NIH approval.
washers, large animal rooms, or other routine solids
containing waste streams are present.
Rationale: Systems shall be engineered for
1. Systems shall be continuous-flow type, with efficient operation without significant oversizing
hybrid batch control to provide a limited reten- as unnecessarily large systems result in significant
tion and treatment in the event of a spike in the capital costs and maintenance.
pH of the influent stream. The typical reserve
freeboard shall provide at least 35 minutes of B. Load/Throughput Calculations: System loads
retention. and resultant sizing shall consider facility equipment
and throughput calculations, including required 20%
2. A gravity-flow bypass with automatic pH moni-
overage.
toring shall be provided to prevent facility dis-
ruptions and ensure continuous monitoring of C. Continuous Facility Operations: A normally closed
the waste stream pH. Alternatively and where and locked bypass discharging by gravity flow through
approved by the NIH, N + 1 redundant online a pH monitor/recorder shall be provided to facilitate
treatment systems may be provided. continuous facility operations in the event of system
failure or routine maintenance.
solids or slurry loading. A service access pit shall compartments of food service warewashing sinks
be provided for full access. shall discharge through the grease interceptor.
Where disposers are provided at the warewash-
4. For extramural projects/grant projects, manual ing area, a dedicated, effectively designed, and
grab sampling from pH sampling manholes may adequately sized solids interceptor arrangement
be used in lieu of automatic monitoring, but only shall be provided ahead of the grease intercep-
where approved by the local AHJ. In such cases, tor to prevent pass through of solids. The solids
the corrosion-resistant lab waste piping system interceptor shall be designed for pump-out
shall extend to the sampling manhole before any cleaning operation. Solids-interceptor-retention
change to non-chemically resistant site-utility- capacity shall be at least 30% of the required
piping materials. interceptor volume, or greater as calculated.
Appropriately designed three-compartment
Rationale: These provisions set forth an interceptors may be oversized to serve this func-
alternative to pH treatment that may be tion. Disposers may be omitted at prescrap and
acceptable for limited applications where building similar sinks to avoid the need for a solids inter-
operations and the types of waste generated are ceptor. Waste from toilet rooms, mop sinks, cold
unlikely to produce pH excursions in violation condensate, and waste streams that may emul-
of discharge regulations, and to provide record sify grease through the interceptor shall not be
of conformance with discharge regulations. connected to the interceptor.
discharge from sewage pumps or ejectors or the grease waste line shall be provided with industrial-
other sources of elevated pressure. grade heat tracing and a suitable insulation system.
3. Exterior gravity grease interceptors, anti-flota- G. Grease Traps/Flow Based Grease Interceptors and
tion, and manway access arrangements shall be Hydromechanical Type A: Point of use grease traps
of appropriate structural design for the appli- are not permitted, except for limited applications (e.g.,
cation, and at a minimum shall be suitable for where a single wash sink or group of not more than four
AAHSTO H20 traffic loads regardless of loca- fixtures is provided as part of a limited remote area)
tion. Interior piping shall be at least Schedule where an exterior gravity type grease interceptor instal-
40, solid wall (no cellular core materials). lation would not be practical or justified. Use of grease
Interceptors shall be provided with internal cor- traps is limited to low risk applications, such as coffee
rosion resistant ladders with non-slip rungs. bars or similar areas with no cooking or washing of
items of significant FOG risk. In addition:
4. Where a gravity grease interceptor must be
located within the structure (e.g., within park- 1. Use of grease traps in lieu of exterior gravity-
ing garages), the interceptor shall be located in type grease interceptors shall be subject to justi-
an environmentally controlled space (not subject fication and NIH approval.
to freezing). Grease interceptors are not accept-
able inside the building. 2. The application of grease traps shall be in accor-
dance with current WSSC Plumbing Code for
5. Grease interceptors shall be sized so as not to Flow Based Grease Interceptors.
require cleaning more than once per 45 days,
and shall not exceed 25% full of FOG and solids 3. The program operator shall submit details of
within this time period. maintenance and best management practices.
Grease traps (where permitted) shall be cleaned
6. The final high temperature dishwasher rinse at intervals not to exceed weekly. Where this
shall be piped through a separate floor sink cannot be accomplished, use of an exterior
plumbed to the sanitary system, or ensure the grease interceptor is required.
dishwasher is provided with an after-cooler to
limit waste water temperature to 60C (140F) 4. Only one grease trap is permitted to serve any
for discharge to the grease waste system along single food service area. Where multiple traps
with pre-wash and wash compartments. would be required, utilize an exterior grease
interceptor and grease waste system.
7. The sanitary vent downstream of the interceptor
shall connect directly to the vertical cleanout riser 5. Grease traps shall not serve dishwashers, dispos-
with a wye-type fitting to minimize potential for ers, or hood wash applications.
stoppage of the vent. The tank vent and sanitary 6. Grease recover devices, including ASME
vent shall not be combined until a minimum 970 A112.14.4 type are not acceptable. Grease traps
mm (38 in.) above the finished floor and shall be shall comply with ASME A112.14.3.
fitted with cleanouts. The vent shall slope to drain
and shall be provided with a cleanout. Two-way 7. The minimum-size grease trap shall be rated at
directional cleanouts shall be provided at both 20 gpm.
the inlet and outlet of each tank. The discharge
from the interceptor shall be direct to the sanitary 8. The total liquid volume capacity of fixtures con-
sewer manhole or exterior sewer lateral. nected to the grease trap shall not exceed 2.5
times the grease trap manufacturers certified
E. Minimize Stoppages: The drainage design shall pro- flow rate.
duce a minimum velocity of 0.9 m/s (3 ft./s).
9. A vent shall be installed downstream of the
F. Grease Interceptor Remote Location: In cases where grease trap in accordance with trap arm
the grease interceptor is unavoidably remotely located limitations.
at extended distances from the kitchen or FOG source,
10. Grease traps shall be elevated above the floor (on 8.4.18 Non-Emulsified
non-corrosive legs) to facilitate cleaning.
Oil-Based Waste
11. Grease trap draw-offs, skim systems or similar
A. OilWater Separator/Interceptors: Oilwater sepa-
arrangements are not permitted.
rators/interceptors shall be provided to serve potential
12. The installation arrangement of the flow con- sources of non-food service based oil discharge and
trol vent for the grease trap shall not result in a engineered to provide effluent discharge levels of sol-
bypass condition of sewer gas into the building vent-extractable matter of mineral or synthetic origin
around the trap seal. to a maximum of 10 ppm and total suspended solids to
a maximum of 350 ppm. The use of coalescing filters or
13. Grease traps shall be located only where flow is advanced treatment configurations may be required and
stabilized and uniform, and shall be appropri- shall be determined on an application-specific basis.
ately sized for that peak flow rate.
B. Coalescers: Where coalescers are utilized or are
14. Grease traps shall be located in unconcealed, provided to meet discharge regulations, an upstream
readily accessible spaces. Locating grease traps in solids-separator arrangement shall be provided where
closets or spaces not in routine use is prohibited. waste streams contain solids.
15. To the greatest extent possible, the A/E shall C. Location: Interior installation is not permitted
avoid locating grease traps in food preparation, except as approved by the DFM.
warewashing, food storage, clean dish areas of
kitchens, or other areas of public health con- D. Double-Wall Construction: Where units will con-
cern. Location shall be subject to NIH approval. tain any significant oil volume or any hazardous fluid,
double-wall construction is required. Double-wall con-
16. Discharge of grease traps shall be direct con- struction with monitoring is required for any buried
nected to the drainage system. All fixtures unit, except incidental separators provided for routine
discharging to a grease trap shall be properly impervious surface drainage not associated with a spe-
trapped and vented or discharge indirectly cific oil or flammable liquid source.
through a properly trapped and vented receptor.
E. Metal Construction: All piping systems discharg-
ing into and venting oil interceptors or serving flam-
Rational: Health concerns dictate that grease mable liquids shall be of approved metal construction.
traps and their maintenance should not be Flammable waste systems shall be in accordance with
located/performed in food prep or other sanitary the requirements of NFPA standards.
areas.
F. Combustible Gas Detection Meter: Where flamma-
ble liquid or combustible gases would be present, waste
H. Private, On-site Waste Treatment System Grease
interceptors shall be monitored with a combustible gas
Interception: For applications discharging to private,
detection meter, alerting to the location as approved by
on-site waste treatment systems, the use of two inter-
the ORF and DFM for each application. Compliance
ceptors in series or a suitably designed three-compart-
with NFPA-30 is required.
ment interceptor may be required.
G. Sizing Calculations: The A/E shall submit sizing
I. Calculations: The A/E shall submit all grease inter-
calculations and their basis and justifications of reten-
ceptor, grease trap, and solids interceptor design and
tion time and the design arrangement. Sizing calcula-
sizing calculations for NIH review and approval.
tions shall consider presence or absence of a coalescer or
other subsequent treatment steps and presence of emul-
sified oil and surge influent conditions.
Table 8.4.19 Condensate Line actual sizing when utilizing the 100 year, 60 minute
(Indirect Waste) Sizing storm shall be at least 102 mm/hr. (4 in./hr.).
Maximum Cooling C. Clear Water Waste Loads: The clear water waste
Pipe Size mm (in.)
Load in W (ton)
loads from any permitted sources (as per Table 8.4.1)
25 (1) Up to 17,050 (5) shall be added to the peak load for all segments, mains,
32 (1-1/4) Up to 102,300 (30) branches, and leaders that will carry such load. The
40 (1-1/2) Up to 170,500 (50) resultant sizing shall include at least a 20% overage for
those loads, added to the flow rates associated with the
50 (2) Up to 511,500 (150)
base (102 mm/hr. [4 in./hr.]) system sizing.
Run multiple
Above 511,500 (150)
condensate lines D. Secondary Overflow Drainage/Scupper System
Sizing: The secondary overflow drainage/scupper
system shall be sized based on at least the 100 year,
15 minute storm, which for the Bethesda campus cor-
responds to a rainfall rate of approximately 183 mm/hr.
8.4.20 Storm, Clear Water (7.2 in./hr.). In no case shall sizing be less than permit-
Waste and Specialty ted under the applicable building code or recommended
by the structural engineer.
Systems: Additional
Requirements Rationale: Inadequate roof drainage and water
A. Primary and Secondary Systems: Combined primary infiltration is one of the most significant causes of
and secondary systems are unacceptable regardless of facility failure and litigation. Although some codes
configuration. Storm drainage systems shall be conven- have recently changed to permit reductions in the
tional atmospheric pressure gravity type that does not sizing and configurations of emergency overflow
rely on storage of water on the roof, special drain weirs, systems, the NIH utilizes the more rigorous
or siphonic arrangements. Any required storm water extensively applied and historically proven criteria
retention shall occur outside away from the structure. associated with critical facilities.
At least two drainage points shall be provided for each
roof area, and no drain shall have an outlet size smaller
E. Lower Roof Areas: Neither primary nor second-
than 75 mm (3 in.) diameter.
ary roof drainage may spill from one roof area onto a
lower roof. Each primary roof drain shall be connected
8.4.20.1 Primary Storm and Secondary directly to the storm drain system and each secondary
Overflow Storm Drain-System-Sizing overflow drain shall be connected directly to the over-
Criteria flow drain system. Oversizing of drainage for lower
roof areas and provision of monitoring devices is not
A. Storm Drainage System Sizing: The primary storm
considered equivalent.
drainage system shall be sized based on a criterion
of at least the 100 year, 60 minute storm, which for
the Bethesda campus corresponds to a rainfall rate of 8.4.20.2 Primary Storm and Secondary
approximately 94 mm/hr. (3.7 in./hr.), in addition to Overflow Storm Drain: Additional
required overage factor and any connected clear water Requirements
loads. In no case shall sizing be less than permitted
A. Expansion/Movement Joint: An expansion joint or
under code or recommended by the structural engineer.
acceptable horizontal offset (swing joint) shall be pro-
B. Sizing Overage Factor: A minimum of a 10% over- vided at connections to each roof and overflow drain
age factor shall be applied to the sizing of all storm drain unless determined unnecessary and not required by the
piping to accommodate future building clear water roof systems manufacturer.
wastes, over and above calculated loads. Therefore,
B. Rainwater Leaders Connection: Lower roof areas E. Stair Areas, Walkways and Landings: Provide ade-
and other outlet tappings shall not be connected to rain- quate drainage to prevent water accumulation and min-
water leaders within 600 mm (24 in.) of a horizontal imize potential for ice. Trench drains may be utilized as
offset, and then only with wye-type fittings. appropriate.
C. Drain Selection: Roof and overflow drains shall be F. Grates: The grate of all area drains (including trench
compliant with roofing system manufacturer require- drains in pedestrian walk areas) shall be sufficient for
ments. Roof drains shall include sump receivers and the anticipated traffic loading and conditions (pedes-
cast iron (not plastic) domes and underdeck clamps. trian, vehicular, etc.) and to minimize tripping or fall
hazards.
D. Fittings: Fittings specified for directional changes
and branches in storm drainage systems shall be of
the same long-radius type required for use in sanitary 8.4.20.4 Clear Water Waste Connections
systems. A. Clear Water Waste Discharge: The criteria provided
E. Insulation: The entire storm and overflow drain- in Table 8.4.1 shall be used to determine where various
age system (including vertical piping and drain bodies) services are piped.
shall be insulated. Insulation of only horizontal piping B. Connection Location Prohibitions: Standpipes and
is unacceptable. clear water waste receptors shall not connect to the storm
F. Overflow Drains: Roof and overflow drains shall drain system in locations subject to backflow from storm
include sump receivers, underdeck clamps, and alu- water surges. Backwater valves on standpipe drains shall
minum or cast iron domes. Overflow drains shall be not substitute for provision of dedicated leaders or for
provided with a fixed weir, set at appropriate height as provision of adequately sized piping systems with branch
coordinated with the structural engineer. For overflow lines connected to wye-branches into rainwater leaders
systems, the weir shall be at 50 mm (2 in.) unless deter- away from horizontal offsets and surge zones.
mined necessary and approved by NIH, and shall be C. Clear Water Drain Connections to Storm System:
located along with the roof drain at the low point for
each drainage area. Overflow drains shall discharge 1. Waste discharge to the storm system shall ideally
through downspout nozzles above but near finished connect indirectly by spilling to an exterior catch
grade. basin or similar arrangement or to an approved
exterior location spilling to the site storm system
in such a manner to not present hazards, puddles,
8.4.20.3 Area Drainage or ice. Water shall discharge as a connection into
A. Drain Provision and Size: Adequately sized area or directly over an appropriate waste receptor.
drainage with outlets of least 75 mm (3 in.) diameter It shall not flow across impervious surfaces or
shall be provided for exterior walkways, stairs, and as areas where saturation is likely.
necessary to prevent accumulation of water.
B. Water Accumulation and Drain Inlet Sizing: Area Rationale: This avoids any potential of backflow
drains should generally be sized to relieve peak rainfall or flood openings into the building.
with a maximum 7 mm (0.25 in.) head.
C. Dome Tops: Area drainage in area walkways, 2. The approach of connection only to dedicated
window wells, and near landscaping or where subject leaders that serve only clearwater waste and not
to blockage shall be provided with dome tops; however, serving storm drains should be followed to the
domes shall be located to prevent a tripping hazard. extent possible.
D. Pavers: Area drainage in areas provided with pavers 3. Where dedicated leaders are not possible (exist-
shall be arranged to discharge both surface drainage ing construction), connections directly to the
and accumulated flow below the paver through use of storm system may also be made, provided the
specially designed promenade-type perforated drains. leader is adequately sized and the connection
arrangement is not subject to flooding, back- 100 mm (4 in.) diameter perforated laterals and at least
flow, or infiltration of air or vermin. 100 mm (4 in.) or 150 mm (6 in.) mains as required,
with geotextile filter fabric and a positive slope of not
4. All connections shall be made as an air-break less than 0.5%. The arrangement and associated details
(indirect) connection into receptors that are at shall be coordinated with the structural and geotech-
least 25.4 mm (1 in.) above the floor. nical engineer. Strict conformance to geotech engineer
5. Connections shall be made to vertical risers with recommended granular backfill and anti-buyancy pro-
upright wye-pattern fittings, away from areas of vision is required. Sufficient cleanouts are required to
potential pressure surges (such as near offsets), permit cable cleaning or hydrojetting and shall include
or into flow-stabilized sections of horizontal system specific labeling (e.g., foundation drain) on
piping with wye-pattern fittings rising above the access covers.
top of the main. C. Sump Pump Placement: Where a sump pump is
6. Within the building, traps shall be provided to required for subsoil drainage, it should be located at the
serve each clear water waste receptor and shall building exterior if feasible and not subject to freezing,
be provided with a vent. Storm system/clear consisting of two pumps sized for N + 1 redundancy on
water vents shall route to the exterior and shall standby power.
not be combined with sanitary or other plumb-
ing system vents. Backwater valves may be Rationale: Exterior location, typically for
added where required but are not a substitute for submersible pumps, in some conditions
traps and vents. Standpipes and receiving drains can ensure that even under failure conditions water
within the building interior shall be insulated. backup occurs outside rather than potentially
The minimum size indirect waste receptor from flooding basement areas/slab on-grade.
the storm drain system is 75 mm (3 in.) diameter.
7. Connections within the building shall be located D. Subsoil Drainage Connections: Areaway drains, rain
only in suitable locations (e.g., mechanical rooms) leaders, downspouts, condensate, clear water drainage,
where a backup or overflow would not induce sig- or other above-ground drainage points shall not be con-
nificant damage and floor drains are nearby. nected to subsoil drains.
8.4.20.6 Gravity Drainage (Storm) not exceed 100 ppm oil. The interceptor shall incorporate
and Backflow of Waste a 150 mm (6 in.) deep submerged water trap seal at the
inlet and a 450 mm (18 in.) deep submerged seal at the
A. Elevated Building Areas: Building areas, which are
outlet, and a dedicated vapor vent direct to the exterior
sufficiently elevated above the storm drains so as not to
terminating at least 2.1 m (7.0 ft.) above the highest park-
require discharge through a pumping system, shall be
ing deck and away from any air intake or building open-
routed independently to discharge by gravity.
ing. An automatic electrically actuated trap seal primer
B. Backflow of Low-Level Storm Water Inlets: Systems shall be provided to ensure continued maintenance of the
shall be arranged so that a stoppage in the exterior interceptor trap seal. The discharge of this interceptor
storm sewer shall not result in storm water backflow shall be direct to the site sanitary sewer.
into low-level storm water inlets that are not fully exte-
D. Garage Drain Locations: Garage drains shall be
rior of the building. Systems shall be designed such that
located at low points adjacent to ramp turnabout and at
storm water shall be relieved outside the building.
sufficient intervals to reasonably facilitate garage floor
C. Backwater Valves: Where such drains are located washdown and to prevent puddling.
less than 230 mm (9 in.) above the elevation of the
E. Backwater Valves: Backwater valves shall be pro-
storm water relief point, automatic backwater valves
vided where necessary to protect from flooding due to
shall be provided. Roof drains and other drains with
the elevation of the drains.
flood-level rim elevations above the reference point shall
not discharge through the backwater valve. Drain open- F. Parking Garage Top Deck: The top deck of the park-
ings with flood-level rims that are not located above the ing garage exposed to rainfall shall be directed to the
crown level of the storm sewer shall be pumped. storm drainage system independent of the storm main
serving occupied buildings. The requirements for an
oil/sand interceptor to serve the top deck drainage shall
8.4.20.7 Parking Garage Drainage
be determined based on the most current requirements
A. Garage Drainage Systems: An independent garage of discharge regulations (Montgomery County, MD
drainage system shall be provided for parking garage requires an oil interceptor prior to release to the water-
drains below the top parking deck that is not directly way). An interceptor is typically required unless handled
exposed to rainfall. downstream prior to release to waterways or retention
basins, and subject to approval of ORF and DEP.
B. Garage Drain Type: Garage drains shall be of the
dry-pan type (connected without traps), have at least
100 mm (4 in.) diameter outlets, and include a sediment Rationale: The top deck is independent of
bucket and ANSI special load class ductile iron secured lower level drains to facilitate handling of the
grate and anchor flange. increased loads of storm water. Segregation
from the building system is to address present
or future likely requirements for interceptors to
Rationale: The provision of dry pan drains
serve waste water from impervious areas.
eliminates requirements for freeze protection
of traps and prevents accumulation of oil or
flammable liquids in trap seals. G. Trench Drains: Trench drains shall be provided at
parking garage ramp entrances and exits to prevent
water buildup.
C. Interceptor, Discharge Location for Intermediate and
Enclosed Decks: Except for the top deck exposed to rain- H. Heel-Proof Drains: Heel-proof drains shall be pro-
fall, the garage drains shall collect to a common minimum vided at any stair landing exposed directly to rainfall
150 mm (6 in.) diameter collector line that discharges to from sides or above, and shall have outlets at least 75
an oil/sand separator designed to ensure discharge does mm (3 in.) diameter.
8.4.21 Sump, Sewage, and less than pedestrian and light wheel traffic. Tanks shall
be designed for a normal operating temperature of at
Lab Waste Pumps least 82C (180F). Where coatings are applied, the A/E
A. Pump System Requirements: Sump, sewage, and lab shall specify application by an SSPC CAS (Society for
waste pumps shall be municipal duty (municipal lift Protective Coatings, Coating Application Specialist)
station) grade, submersible type, and provided with lift Level 2 or better installer.
rail, lead-lag-alternate controls, and designed to prevent
single point failure (N + 1 redundancy).
Rationale: Sanitary sumps must be sufficiently
1. Sewage and lab waste pumps shall pass at least resistant to hydrogen sulfide gas and routine
75 mm (3 in.) diameter solids, and shall be chemicals and cleaners.
vortex type, except that semi-open, self-cleaning
multi-vane-type non-clog impellers may be used C. Waste Basin Locations: Sewage and lab waste basins
where receiving only sanitary (not lab or animal) should be located away from occupied spaces, return air
wastes and the pump is specifically designed openings, and outside air intakes. Coordination with
for sanitary sewage in municipal applications. the mechanical/HVAC engineer is required to prevent
Provide with corrosion resistant floats, guided odor infiltration.
wave radar or other approved level and alarm
control.
Rationale: Even where basins are fitted with
2. Pumps receiving waste from lab, cage wash, appropriate gas-tight seals, maintenance activities
and animal areas shall be vortex type, designed can lead to migration of odors that should be
for use with corrosive liquid wastes with a high contained within appropriate mechanical spaces.
solids content, municipal duty grade, pass at
least 75 mm (3 in.) diameter solids, with AISI 329
D. Lab-Waste-Pump Basins: Basins for lab waste pumps
stainless steel (or not less than AISI 316 stainless
shall be of an industrial/municipal lift station-quality
steel) wetted parts (or approved equal or better
fiberglass encased polypropylene tank, arranged as a
as required), corrosion-resistant floats, guided
tank in a pit arrangement. Direct burial of single wall
wave radar, or other approved level and alarm
tanks is not acceptable. Sump, frame, and lid construc-
control, and corrosion-resistant accessories.
tion shall be gas-tight, and rated for traffic for the area
3. Pumps for storm systems (including sump installed, but in no case less than pedestrian and light
pumps) shall pass at least 32 mm (1.25 in.) solids wheel traffic. Tanks shall be suitable for a normal operat-
and be suitable for abrasive waste streams. Pump ing temperature of at least 82C (180F). Polypropylene
systems serving subsoil/underslab drainage, or PVDF lined water-tight concrete sumps may also be
critical applications, or any application serv- used subject to completely fused joints and leak-tight
ing more than one drain or multiple areas shall construction.
be provided with at least two pumps for N + 1
redundancy, municipal duty grade and shall be
Rationale: Lab waste systems are subject to
on building standby power. Provide with corro-
corrosive chemical wastes, routine cleaners, and
sion resistant float control.
disinfectants, hot water wastes, and potential
B. Sanitary Sewage Basins: Sanitary sewage basins exothermic reactions. Fiberglass or approved
shall be of acid-resistant, reinforced sulfate-resistant corrosion resistant metal reinforcement is
concrete with two coats of high-performance epoxy, or required for structural and impact strength.
an industrial/municipal lift station-quality plastic sump Polypropylene is required for temperature
of either fiberglass encased polypropylene or chemical resistance. The use of an accessible tank in a
resistant fiberglass construction with a sealed cover. pit (ideally indoors) facilitates routine inspection
Sump, frame, and lid construction shall be gas-tight, and maintenance.
and rated for traffic in the area installed, but in no case
Rationale: Solids from animal areas and cage B. Calibration/Commissioning: Pump systems, treat-
wash bedding and slurry can create excessive ment systems, controls, instruments, devices, and
maintenance issues, stoppages, and malfunctions alarms shall be calibrated and individually verified for
if not appropriately addressed through solids- proper operation and adjustment, including but not lim-
handling equipment and basins. ited to activation points and alarms. Systems shall be
fully commissioned including all critical parameters,
F. Pneumatic Ejector Systems: In lieu of pump-based proper response to power-loss scenarios, failure condi-
lift stations, pneumatic ejector systems may be utilized tions, monitoring, and alerts, including integrated sys-
for sanitary and lab waste. Ejectors shall be provided tems testing.
with cast iron receivers for sanitary applications and
C. Lift Stations and Waste Treatment Equipment: All
316 stainless steel receivers and wetted parts for lab
lift stations and waste treatment equipment shall be
waste. Alternative corrosion-resistant materials shall
inspected for compliance with this section, verifica-
be used for waste streams with significant chloride
tion of removal of any construction debris, all required
concentrations.
safety devices and features, and proper condition of
tank liners, materials, and venting.
Rationale: Pneumatic ejector stations provide
D. Systems Testing: All systems shall be inspected and
durability and solids handling capability when
tested prior to backfill, prior to concealment, and again
fitted with properly designed receivers.
at final completion in accordance with plumbing codes.
The following additional criteria is required:
G. Standby Power and Redundancy: Sewage and sump
pump lift station and ejector arrangements shall be 1. Lab and ARF waste downstream of fixture traps
served from standby power systems and designed to shall be tested for at least 4 hours prior to con-
provide N + 1 redundancy including pumps, air com- cealment. A 3.0 m (10 ft.) water head is required,
pressors/air supply, and control arrangements. High- except that a 1 hour air test at 34.5 kPa (5 psi)
water alarms and pump failure shall alert to the BAS as may be conducted for metallic systems with
a critical fault. suitable joints and other systems deemed appro-
priate by the manufacturers and A/E for such
H. Elevator Pit Sump Pumps: Elevator pit sump pumps testing.
shall be of an oil-preclusion type except that standard
sump pumps may be used for electric traction elevators 2. For large facilities under new construction
with no hydraulic oil lines. The pump shall include a or significant renovation, video inspection of
high-water/general fault alarm to the monitored BAS. underground drainage systems (including piping
under building slabs) should be considered.
I. Elevator Pits Discharge: The discharge from eleva- Reports of tests shall be reviewed by the A/E,
tor pit drains and elevator sump pumps shall spill indi- who shall notify the PO of any issues. Video
rectly to the sanitary drainage system through an air record and reports should be incorporated in
break into a hub drain or floor sink. project O&M manuals where such testing is
provided.
Contents
8.5.0 Introduction
CFH) at each laboratory outlet at a pressure of approxi- operating at or above 6.89 kPa (1 psi) shall not exceed
mately 1,750 Pa (7 in. w.g.). For fixed laboratory equip- 10% of the design distribution pressure at maximum
ment, the volume flow rate and pressure required shall design flow demand.
be determined from the manufacturers input ratings.
Diversity may be applied for laboratory turret outlets if
the diversity is safely established; however, equipment Rationale: These requirements are to ensure
shall be considered at 100% use factor. Where LPG required operating pressures are provided
systems are approved, the pressure shall be reduced consistently and safely during peak operating
prior to entering the building to 2,740 Pa (11 in. w.g.), conditions.
except that pressures up to 1,379 Pa (5.5 in. w.g.) may
be used to serve major mechanical equipment areas G. Shut-Off Valve Type: Shut-off valves shall be spe-
where approved by ORF, DFM, and in conformance cifically listed for the appropriate fuel gas application
with NFPA-58. and for use at the system operating pressure. All inte-
rior gas valves shall be actuated without requiring the
Welded medium pressure natural gas distribution sys- use of tools.
tems at pressures up to 35 kPa (5 psi) may be used to
serve the inlet pressure regulator in food service and H. Emergency Isolation Valves: Each laboratory floor
mechanical areas, where justified by the gas load and shall have an isolation valve that is quickly accessible
installed in conformance with NFPA-54 and serving for emergency shut-off, located through consultation
gas supplier requirements, including provision of proper with the DFM, to permit a rapid emergency isolation
over-pressure protection, except that natural gas service of an individual floor of each building wing. The valve
to food service areas shall not exceed 14 kPa (2 psi) shall be located behind a wall cabinet box (zone valve
unless specifically required for individual equipment, or box) with an accessible clear-glass door or emergency
approved. No diversity shall be applied to food service window to prevent nuisance activation. The valve shall
equipment. be labeled:
Primary building equipment loads (such as for building Emergency fuel gas shut-off
mechanical equipment) shall not be diversified unless
a control means is provided to preclude simultaneous A permanently attached tag shall be provided inside the
operation and prior approval of NIH is obtained. valve box stating:
F. System Sizing: The design pressure loss in the gas Provision of this emergency isolation valve is required in
piping system shall be such that the supply pressure addition to an accessible, dedicated valve to isolate all
at any piece of equipment is greater than the mini- lab gas service, an isolation valve for food service, and
mum pressure required for proper equipment opera- an isolation valve for general mechanical service; each
tion. A maximum pressure drop of 75 Pa (0.3 in. w.g.) located at the building service entrance and appropri-
during periods of maximum design flow shall be used ately labeled. Additionally, a whole building isolation
for sizing low-pressure gas installations. Pressure drop valve shall be provided at the service entrance.
in medium pressure systems (including any systems
Contents
barrier isolation. Where supply is direct from building C. Unprotected Potable Water: Unprotected potable
potable water, an ASSE 1013 (reduced pressure princi- water shall not be extended into containment. Outlets
pal) device is required. The drain from an ASSE 1013 requiring potable supply direct from the domestic pota-
device shall spill through an air gap to a floor drain ble water system (e.g., emergency eyewash, showers,
or other suitable indirect waste receptor located outside and toilet room/shower fixtures located in containment)
containment. shall be isolated from other functions with an ASSE
1013 backflow preventer. The ASSE 1013 backflow pre-
Backflow protection is required at points of use consis- venter shall be located outside the containment barrier.
tent with requirements of Section 8.3, Water Systems An ASSE 1015 backflow preventer is adequate for serv-
(including but not limited to vacuum breaker spouts ing only toilet room/shower-out room fixtures without
at faucets where required by risk assessment), showers hose-supplied outlets. Appropriate vacuum breakers (or
with hose sprays, as well as protection at equipment air gaps) are required at potable water outlets, including
connections). showers with hose sprays.
No special requirements are warranted regarding the
discharge from a backflow preventer (including ASSE Rationale: All water supplies shall be protected
1013 devices) serving general BSL-3/ABSL-3 areas. from potential backflow, which could include
misapplication and inadvertent future cross
Rationale: The use of ASSE 1015 devices in lab connections. The risk of backflow from a toilet
water systems recognizes the presence of an room is normally low.
upstream ASSE 1013 device to protect potable
water supplies, and can be advantageous due to D. High Hazard Connections: Backflow preventers are
low-pressure drop, adequate hazard protection required for connections to high hazard equipment and
for the application when applied in accordance shall be of the type for the application, hazard, and
with DRM requirements, and avoids the need to located outside the containment barrier. Connections to
accommodate device drainage. tissue digesters, vacuum pumps, and other high hazard
arrangements shall consist of at least an ASSE 1013
B. Distribution Arrangement/Separation/Hot Water device if supplied from the lab water system (preferred)
Temperature Maintenance: Downstream of the isola- or an ASSE 1013 device and downstream ASSE 1015
tion backflow preventers, distribution shall only serve device in series if connection must be made directly from
outlets within containment and water shall not be cir- potable water. An ASSE 1013 is the minimum required
culated back upstream of the containment barrier isola- protection at high containment autoclaves. Where the
tion backflow preventer. Hot water shall be immediately design of equipment utilizes an internal code-compliant
available at use points, with delays to the most remote air gap or does not impose a back-pressure backflow
outlets not exceeding ~1525 seconds. In some cases condition, redundant in-line devices are not required
the use of auxiliary heat source (e.g., a local booster and a single ASSE 1013 device is satisfactory. A below
heater with thermostatic control) may be required for flood level rim air break is not equivalent. Potable water
temperature maintenance. The use of local heat tracing shall not be hard connected to a primary containment
downstream of the backflow preventer may be permit- device. An ASSE 1015 devices shall be located imme-
ted provided the system design minimizes the quantity diately downstream of ASSE 1013 devices where nec-
of required heat tracing, tracing is accessible for replace- essary to protect from potentially contaminated relief
ment, and is of industrial grade. discharge.
F. Water Treatment Equipment: Where softeners or Centralized high purity systems including RO and other
other water conditioning devices are required, they purified systems (i.e., systems that serve multiple out-
shall be located upstream of backflow preventers, out- lets) shall be subject to justification and approval, and
side containment. where provided shall be in accordance with the follow-
ing requirements and Section 12.1, High Purity Water
Systems, including water quality.
tank maximum pressure rating; but should be as high H. Recirculation of Fluids: Recirculation of fluids
as possible to minimize maintenance or premature disk downstream of any backflow preventers back into the
rupture. The rupture disk shall be pressure or pressure supply side is prohibited. Except as provided in this sec-
and vacuum type (as appropriate to tank and distribu- tion, recirculation of fluids back outside the contain-
tion configuration). ment barrier is not acceptable.
water treatment and distribution systems shall be taken (on the high pressure side) of pressure-reducing/flush
directly from building potable water and the supply to stations. Approved microfilters in conformance with
the BSL-3 area system shall be isolated from all other Section 12.2, Animal Drinking Water Systems may be
systems with an ASSE 1013 backflow preventer located used where justified, and where applied shall be located
outside the containment barrier. ASSE 1015 double- within containment and arranged to facilitate routine
check valve assemblies may be provided downstream replacement, and both filters and backflow preventers
of ASSE 1013 devices to mitigate potential of contami- shall be used only with chlorinated ADW systems and
nated relief-valve discharge outside of containment (if preapproval of program management to ensure suffi-
required by the risk assessment). Once distribution cient SOPs for routine maintenance/replacement.
systems have entered high containment, downstream
segments of the system shall not be piped back out of
containment and shall not have any openings (includ- Rationale: Cross-contamination protection may
ing tanks or drainage points) that are located outside of be requested between spaces or suites working
the containment barrier. At a minimum, an ASSE 1015 with different agents or under different programs.
device shall be located on the main ADW pipeline (typi- BFPs typically require annual testing. Filters
cally upstream of any flushing or PRV stations), shall typically require replacement at least quarterly.
be constructed of stainless steel, and shall be located to Unnecessary filters require additional
isolate the pressurized ADW water system from open- maintenance and can compromise water quality.
ings outside containment.
E. Equipment Location: Production systems (RO, acid-
C. Distribution: Where piped systems are provided, ification, chlorination, etc.) shall be located outside the
only non-circulated systems (automatic flushing-type containment barrier in program-controlled or approved
animal drinking water systems) shall be used, and main- secure space. Refer to Section 12.2, Animal Drinking
tenance of an approved residual disinfectant through- Water Systems for production system requirements.
out the system (typically chlorination at up to 4 mg/L) Drains for the production system shall discharge at the
is required. Flushing lines from the animal drinking location of the equipment.
water distribution system shall terminate with a fixed
air gap to a normally used drain within the contain- Where any controls are located inside containment,
ment barrier, and flushing lines for individual rooms components shall be constructed or sealed to permit
shall discharge within the same room served. Drain ter- and withstand fumigation. System controls or valving
minations shall be arranged to minimize splashing or shall permit flushing control valves to be individually
displacement. manually activated or disabled.
Rationale: Disinfectant traps and approved in-line Rationale: Point of use vacuum can be cost
filters protect piping, equipment, and exhaust effective, simple, and safe where properly selected
streams from contamination. Use of filters is and configured. Such arrangements offer the
to provide microbial protection and minimize advantage of user control and responsibility, with
potential of drawing liquids into the vacuum no piped service leaving the space.
system. Appropriate sterilizing grade filter and
housing assemblies (unlike point of use disposable E. Central Systems: Central systems may be used for
style filters) are designed for repeated use and are large applications in accordance with the risk assess-
typically validated for higher efficacy for both ment, subject to approval and conformance with the
liquid and gas streams. following:
Rationale: These requirements are to protect the Rationale: The intent is to maintain a completely
system from contamination. The second filter (in sealed vacuum collection system, from the initial
series) provides protection for the piping system point of ingestion within containment to the
and equipment in the event of improper trapping point of discharge directly to the sanitary sewer
or a damaged or improper filter at the point of use, and above the roof. If contamination enters the
and to ensure effective retention that may include vacuum equipment, such contamination liquids
a potential liquid slug with a high bioload in the will be disposed through the sealed waste system,
event of a failed or misapplied primary filter. Where not requiring waste handling or exposure, and
located just outside the containment barrier, it equipment may be readily decontaminated.
provides assurance for the facility staff of presence
of protection. I. Isolation Valves/Decontamination Ports: Isolation
valves and decontamination ports shall be provided to
G. Effluent Discharge/Liquid Separator: The primary allow decontamination of the tank, pump, any filters,
liquid separator (located downstream of the disinfec- appurtenances, and vacuum lines of the system, and to
tant trap) shall be selected to facilitate autoclaving of allow independent isolation and decontamination of
entrapped liquid and pre-opening decontamination or the pump without decontaminating the entire building-
treatment and disposal as determined appropriate in collection system.
accordance with the risk assessment. All liquid separa-
tors/receivers shall be arranged to facilitate decontami- J. Central Vacuum Pump Type: Central vacuum pumps
nation; and if located outside containment they shall be shall be in conformance with Section 12.4, Laboratory
fully sealed, shall not include filters, mechanical devices, Vacuum Systems, and shall be of corrosion-resistant
or other items requiring routine maintenance or open- construction suitable for disinfectant liquids, vapors,
ing of the vessel or exposure to potential contamina- and fumigation chemicals and the method of decon-
tion. Discharge from lab vacuum systems for BSL-3 taminating equipment in the event of an operational or
spaces constructed per the DRM shall discharge to equipment failure. Additional requirements:
the sanitary system. Refer to Section 12.4, Laboratory The use of hermetically sealed canned motor or mag-
Vacuum Systems. netic drive design may be selected to eliminate mechani-
cal seals and associated leak paths. The need for such
Rationale: Liquid separators protect from shall be determined based on risk assessment.
ingestion of fluids, such as some condensable Seal liquid from liquid-ring vacuum pumps may be recir-
vapors or other liquid from the use point or culated within the system only. Where process cooling
disinfectant trap and the separator minimizes liquid is utilized, the process cooling liquid shall be at
potential of ingesting liquid. Due to use of a pressure of at least 10 psig above the pressure of any
upstream hydrophobic filters and required pump seal liquid within the vacuum system unless a double-
types, it is typically acceptable to pipe directly wall heat exchanger is utilized.
to the vacuum receiver. Connection of vacuum
systems to biowaste systems can pose cross Vacuum equipment that requires routine opening of the
contamination risks. process parts of the system (e.g., more than once per
year), including to change any fluids is not acceptable.
H. Decontamination and System Openings: Vacuum The use of vacuum equipment with disinfectant seal liq-
equipment shall be designed to accommodate decontam- uids shall require demonstration of temperature com-
ination. There should be no openings from the vacuum patibility, replenishment frequency and method, and
system within the building except those normally sealed, efficacy.
with restricted access, and arranged for qualified main-
tenance use through proper SOPs, and at approved loca-
tions per the risk assessment. Decontamination ports and
manual drains shall be valved and capped.
inhalation chambers) may such services be provided, 8.6.7 Veterinary Medical Gas
and subject to approval of the DOHS. In such cases,
the service line shall have a backflow preventer check Systems
valve arrangement (per this section) at the point of use. Veterinary Medical Gas Systems (VMGS) for BSL-3
Alternative backflow protection (e.g., an in-line steriliz- (ABSL-3) areas shall be completely independent of sys-
ing grade filter) may be provided in accordance with the tems from areas outside BSL-3 containment, and pro-
risk assessment and as approved by the DOHS; how- tected from backflow or contamination with point of use
ever the method of decontamination for replacement filters selected in accordance with the risk assessment.
and potential effect on gas quality shall be considered Temporary point of use (i.e., transportable as needed)
as relevant to the application. In all cases, 1/4 turn shut- service may be provided. Where piped systems are pro-
off valves shall be provided immediately at equipment vided, an upstream sterilizing grade, non-contaminating
connections. Point of use filters shall be provided for hydrophobic filter that is clean and approved for oxygen
aerosol chambers, incubators, and similar equipment service, USP Class VI, and non-fiber releasing, or a gas-
where required for gas cleanliness or isolation per the tight check valve that is clean and suitable for oxygen
risk assessment. service shall be provided prior to penetrating the con-
tainment barrier. VMGS services for BSL-3 areas shall
comply with Section 12.5, Veterinary Medical Gas
Rationale: In some applications (such as
Systems for Animal Research Facilities.
inhalation/aerosolization chambers) compressed
gases may be required as part of controlled The use of VMGSs may be accommodated by the use
processes In such cases, additional control over of portable gas cylinders dedicated for this purpose on
fluid quality may be necessary for research an as-needed basis. The filters utilized may be user-pro-
integrity or containment. The provisions of vided disposable/sterilizable gas service filters provided
this section are not intended to prevent the use for terminal units. If higher grade filter requirements are
of appropriate filters where such filters may be necessary they must be disposable/sterilizable between
decontaminated and serviced or safely replaced. uses for cross-infection control and also shall be suit-
able for medical gas service.
D. Fuel Gas Service: Provision of fuel gas service within
containment is rarely necessary and shall be avoided.
Rationale: The segregation of systems is necessary
Where use of fuel gas cannot be avoided, justification
to prevent potential cross-contamination and
and approval is required from the ORF, DOHS, and
maintain conformance with gas-quality assurances.
DFM. Accessible valving for emergency shut-off shall
be provided to isolate the space at an approved egress
location outside containment. Provision of fuel-burn- A. Alarm System Annunciation: The alarms for VMGSs
ing appliances that would require any type of venting alarm panels shall alert to locations approved by the
arrangements are unacceptable. responsible high containment personnel, and the loca-
tion and type of annunciation shall be as approved.
filters and liquid separators and required stand-off sup- to an approved lab exhaust within the same con-
ports and reinforcement provisions shall be addressed tainment suite, upstream of HVAC HEPA filters,
in designs for all configurations (including portable), as approved by the DOHS and the risk assess-
and shall comply with the following: ment. Indirect connections of the exhaust from
scavenging to the containment ventilation system
1. Vacuum terminal connection and point of use is not permitted outside containment or outside of
autoaclavable suction bottle/liquid separator the suite where the terminal unit is located. Lab
(and bracket if on the wall, or coordinated if vacuum systems shall not be used for anesthetic
part of portable equipment) scavenging. For all applications, the termination
2. Point of use disinfection trap (and bracket if on arrangement of the exhaust connection shall be
the wall), or placement and arrangement coordi- designed to prevent escape of exhaust into the
nated if part of portable equipment room. Application of an in-line HEPA filter may
be required at the air brake per the risk assess-
3. In-line sterilizing grade filter, with decon and ment, and may be sterilizing grade if applied on
validation ports (and bracket) the disposal side of the air brake and accounted
for in system pressure loss; (or)
4. For any case were a piped system is approved, a
second sterilizing grade filter installed in series 2. The use of self-contained point of use active sys-
is required at the containment barrier and as tems (e.g., self-contained fan powered air brakes
approved by DOHS and system arrangements or systems with the extractor fan just upstream of
shall conform with both piped vacuum require- the air brake within the same room at the point of
ments for BSL-3 as well as veterinary medical use) may be applied for single outlets. The exhaust
gas requirements. from such units shall be piped of approved hard
pipe materials with permanently sealed joints
to an approved non-recirculating capture device
Rationale: It is unacceptable to pipe infectious located within the same containment suite in
waste and blood out of containment. Filters accordance with the risk assessment; (or)
provided with portable equipment and medical
suction canisters are typically bacterial grade and 3. For applications with halogenated anesthetics
not routinely validated or integrity tested for high only, the use of activated carbon type passive
containment applications. systems may be used with approval of the pro-
gram veterinarian and DOHS, with autoclaving
C. Anesthetic Gas Scavenging: Where all required and disposal after each use.
procedures necessitating scavenging cannot be con-
ducted within an approved ducted capture device, Rationale: As the use of in-line sterilizing filters,
active scavenging shall be provided. Suitable dispos- separators, and liquid disinfectant traps would
able filters designed specifically for use with scaveng- interfere with permissible pressure limitations and
ing systems on the passive side of the air brake shall be other factors necessary for safe use of low vacuum
provided upstream of the air brake (transfer hose side) active systems, along with avoidance of such
as approved by the DOHS and the program veterinary vacuum leaving containment (including for high
anesthetist. Anesthetic gas scavenging shall be either: vacuum active systems), the venturi and self-
1. Air-driven autonomous (self-contained) venturi contained air brake approach provide flexible and
type as per Section 12.5, Veterinary Medical Gas effective active scavenging without introducing
Systems for Animal Research Facilities. The drive contaminants not otherwise present in the space;
gas shall be located in the anteroom or other while utilizing the ABSL-3 ventilation system
approved location as per the risk assessment, and serving the space for disposal. Even where central
shall include an in-line filter or gas-tight check or point of use lab vacuum is present, combining
valve at the (prior to entering) the containment systems to form high vacuum active scavenging can
barrier. The terminal unit exhaust shall be piped pose multiple risks to animals.
8.6.8 Critical Compressed gaskets, the load of sterilizer door gaskets is not required
to be addressed as critical compressed air, unless an air
Air/Control Air Serving BSL-3 gasket seal is utilized for normal (standby) mode of a pass
A. Critical Control Air Definition and Application: through autoclave.
Critical control air is the complete system that provides
the compressed air supply necessary for the operation Rationale: Air systems must maintain intended
or fail-safe condition of critical BSL-3/ABSL-3 HVAC, failure control sequences in the event of supply
controls, or containment equipment (e.g., pneumatic failures. The check valve upstream of the receiver
dampers, air-powered sterilizer door gaskets, etc.). is required to prevent loss of air supply in the
event the air-compressor supply source becomes
B. Reliability and Redundancy: Air systems that serve
disabled.
critical containment controls and containment barrier
components shall be arranged to prevent single point
failures and shall be provided with complete redun- C. BAS Monitoring: Critical control air systems shall
dancy from two fully independent remote sources. The include monitoring to BAS to indicate failure of the
primary air source shall be from a building laboratory equipment or loss of required air pressure. Pressure of
or dedicated control air system arranged to provide N backup or reserves (e.g., high pressure gas manifold
+ 1 redundancy with compressors on building standby banks), including storage receivers used as backup shall
power. The secondary source shall be from a dedicated be automatically monitored to assure required capac-
air compressor, receiver, emergency reserve nitrogen ity. Where supply valves are not locked open, auto-
manifold, or equipment that is remotely located from the matic pressure monitoring or valve tamper switches are
primary system and connected to prevent single point required; arranged to detect loss of the required supply.
failure issues and arranged to prevent loss of required
D. Biohazardous Contamination: Systems shall not be
capacity. Upon failure of normal and emergency power,
configured in any manner where the airstream can be
equipment malfunctions, or primary supply shut-off;
subject to biohazardous contamination. An approved
sufficient air at adequate pressure shall be automatically
pipeline filter arrangement shall be provided where such
available to operate and return critical controls to a safe
a condition could plausibly occur. Filters are not nor-
position (including to maintain all sterilizer gasket seals);
mally required.
and the arrangement shall ensure that the required air
supply will not be lost through open outlets or non-crit- E. Piping/Tubing System Materials and Location:
ical use points. Where check valves are used, they shall Control air piping shall be appropriately supported and
be redundant in series, resilient seated bubble tight, and adequately protected from damage. Piping/tubing and
sized based on actual flow rate coefficient and velocity, joint connections shall be of approved metallic materi-
not line size. A dedicated critical air storage tank with als (typically stainless steel or copper). Plastic tubing is
supply inlet check valve, automatic control valves, moni- not acceptable. Piping shall be clearly labeled as BSL-3
tored emergency reserve nitrogen manifold, or other Critical Compressed Air.
means as approved by the NIH shall be provided. A
suitable check valve shall be present in the discharge of
each compressor (upstream of the storage receiver). For
sterilizers, a dedicated air compressor at each autoclave
(with receiver) can also be used for backup or primary 8.6.9 Waste and Vent
air supply, provided a sufficient reserve is available and
arranged to preserve any compressed air gasket seals or
Systems Serving BSL-3
other critical component including under power failure.
Required capacity shall be sufficient for critical needs 8.6.9.1 General Requirements
and to maintain sterilizer gasket seals (where air gaskets A. Drainage and Vent System Design: Waste systems
are permitted) for at least the duration of simultaneous shall be atmospherically vented to the building exte-
longest loads (liquid cycle) of each sterilizer. Where ster- rior and shall include deep seal traps for all drain inlets
ilizers use steam gaskets during operation or crush-seal within containment. Traps shall be selected to exceed
the exhaust fan static pressure to maintain at least a D. System Arrangement and Connected Wastes: All
3750 mm (1.52 in.) seal depth under HVAC operating drain inlets within containment shall discharge to the
and fan failure modes, as well as extra depth as required dedicated waste system serving BSL-3 facilities, includ-
for control of pressure transients. Traps shall be of ing lab sinks, aerosol challenge room sinks and drains,
P-trap configuration, constructed of a radiused U-bend mop sinks, and other fixtures within the barrier unless
or an arrangement of a 45 ell, a 1/4 bend, and 45 ell otherwise required. Drain ports (or openings that could
back to horizontal in that order. Detailing is required as be used as drains) from gloveboxes and other primary
such traps must be field constructed. Traps shall be self- containment devices shall not be connected to building
scouring and chemically resistant to disinfectants and waste and vent systems.
shall not have flat or horizontal bottoms. Traps shall
be liquid seal-type only, and shall not have gaskets, E. Systems Grouping: Waste and venting systems for
access covers, or any other means that can defeat the BSL-3 areas shall be zoned separately from other waste
seal or allow potential air leakage. The tailpiece length or vent streams and shall be provided with independent
of drains shall be sufficient to maintain the trap seal vents extending above the roof. Separate collection may
during potential pressure oscillations. Avoid excessive be waived for existing facilities if separate systems would
trap seal depth and coordinate with casework; however be impractical or are unnecessary by the risk assessment,
minimum seal requirement is typically 127 mm (5 in.) where not carrying solids and risk of waste systems stop-
or greater. page or potential of cross-contamination is deemed mini-
mal, where floor drains are not provided within contain-
ment, and where required future flexibility would not
Rationale: Atmospheric venting arrangements necessitate such grouping. Where the waste from BSL-3
maintain sealed construction and ensure venting areas will be combined with other spaces, the waste lines
to the exterior and discharge to the sewer where serving BSL-3 areas shall be segregated to the extent pos-
survival of sufficient viable infectious organisms sible (e.g., to main stacks, risers, building drain, or build-
from properly designed and operated BSL-3 areas ing sewer). BSL-3 waste and vent systems shall not be
are unlikely to pose hazards. Trap seals protect combined with waste systems from higher containment
from cross-contamination but can be lost due to levels prior to effluent treatment of the higher risk waste.
pressure differentials and fan failure modes;
therefore, relating the trap seal depth to the
potential pressures in the space as well as imposed Rationale: Separate systems provide program
pressure transients is required. flexibility (e.g., in the event waste treatment
is required in future for certain agents), and
minimizes potential for backup of wastes and
B. Vent Termination: Vents shall terminate above the cross-contamination. The point of separation
roof at least 7.6 m (25 ft.) from air intakes, building should be carried ideally to the building sewer,
openings, or areas where persons may be normally but may be combined at the building drain
present and shall be placed at locations to prevent re- or dedicated waste mains where required and
entrainment into facilities. acceptable to the program requirements and the
C. Waste and Vent Opening Locations: Waste and risk assessment.
vent openings from other piping systems (serving other
building areas) are not permitted within the contain- F. Piping Materials: Corrosion-resistant pipe materials
ment barrier. Openings from containment piping sys- with thermal fusion joints shall be utilized for the waste
tems necessitating effluent treatment or decontamina- and vent systems serving BSL-3 areas, and shall be com-
tion shall not be located outside the respective level of patible with the range of chemicals/disinfectants that
containment. may be utilized. Acceptable piping and joint materials
for waste systems serving BSL-3 areas shall be selected
from the approved corrosion-resistant materials, as per
Rationale: Openings from other systems can Exhibit 6.3.
introduce cross-contamination hazards, especially
if trap seals are lost.
K. Drainage Inlet Grinders: Drainage inlet grinders Where the use of floor drains is approved, waste may
(food waste disposers/garbage disposals) shall not be discharge over a floor drain or floor sink but only in the
utilized in BSL-3 facilities. same room/suite served. The use of floor drains in labs,
including BSL-3 is avoided and any inclusion must be
evaluated in the risk assessment and approved by the BSL-3Ag/GLSP where floor drains are unavoidable),
NIH. Funnel-drain arrangements (without floor drain the issues of waste water control and capture shall be
capability) are acceptable. reviewed on a project specific basis.
8.6.10 Liquid Nitrogen and Rationale: ASSE 1001 vacuum breakers provide
Cryogenic Fluids Serving required point of use high hazard protection.
Laminar flow and minimum flow rates are for
BSL-3 Laboratories adequate water flow for washing and lab use,
A. Vacuum Jacketing: Systems shall be insulated with while maintaining water conservation and control
static (passive) vacuum jacketing only. Dynamic vacuum of splashing.
jacketing is not permitted.
B. Hands-Free: Sink faucets shall be hands-free type
Rationale: In the event of breach of any jacket that are either electric sensor operated and hard-wired
seal, there should be no induced vacuum through to AC power, or foot pedal actuated with slow-close
the system to the outside of containment. off-the-floor mounted valves with flip-up pedals to
permit cleaning. Battery-actuated faucets and fau-
cets that require use of hands, wrist, or elbow are not
B. Oxygen Monitors/Sensors: Oxygen monitors/sen- acceptable. Knee operated valves shall include suitable
sors shall be suitable for fumigation requirements. Air anchorage, or shall be knee-panel type with pneumatic
shall not be pulled out of containment for sampling. control valves (scrub-sink type). Hand wash faucets
are required to be fully hands-free type, no overrides
Rationale: Improperly selected gas monitors can to complete hands-free operation will be permitted.
be damaged by fumigation gases. The use of Additional sinks within the room (in addition to the
sensors with electronics in compatible enclosures, hand wash sink required at the exit) may be wrist-blade
or remote sensing monitors (non-air sampling actuated, though off-the floor foot pedal is recom-
type) can be selected. mended. Approval for any sink to not have hands-free
operation capability is subject to acceptance by DOHS.
8.6.11.2 Showers
A. Requirements: Hand-held showers shall not be uti-
8.6.11 Plumbing Fixtures lized, except where specifically required for barrier-free
Serving BSL-3 Laboratories compliance and shall include a vacuum breaker. Flow
rate reduction below 10 lpm (2.5 gpm) is not permit-
ted. Fixture count shall be evaluated for throughput
8.6.11.1 Faucets requirements.
A. Faucet Types: Faucets within containment shall
have gooseneck-type spouts and be fitted with integral
ASSE 1001 atmospheric vacuum breaker and laminar Rationale: Hand showers are undesirable due to
flow, non-aerating, non-splash outlet. Flow rates for additional maintenance issues and potential for
hand wash faucets shall be at least 8.0 lpm (2.0 gpm). immersion and backflow (e.g., where showers
The use of separate outlet taps for hot and cold water are used for transfer of materials), but are not
is not acceptable. Faucets serving dedicated hand wash prohibited where otherwise necessary.
lavatories outside of the laboratory or animal holding
rooms (e.g., lavatories at change rooms) do not require B. Materials: Showers walls and bases shall be of a
a vacuum breaker unless fitted with an outlet that may durable, impervious design. The use of waterproof
receive a hose. epoxy over masonry, stainless steel, or ANSI A137.1
impervious-class porcelain tile floors with epoxy grout
(not cement grout) is required. Refer to Section 8.2.9,
Showers for safing membrane requirements.
8.6.11.4 Sinks/Lavatories 1. Floor drains and floor sink tops shall be con-
structed of at least grade 316 stainless steel or
A. Stainless Steel Preferred, Smooth, Non-Sharp
other approved corrosion- and chip-resistant
Surfaces: Stainless steel is the preferred material for
construction with all openings and edges smooth
use within containment where free-hanging sinks are
and free of sharps hazards.
required (i.e., with the exception of phenolic/epoxy sinks
integral with casework). Where stainless steel sinks are 2. Drains shall include provisions for positive gas-
utilized, surface undercoating and sound-deadening tight closure, which shall be repeatable.
3. Drains shall be designed to allow interception consist of permanently sealed pipe inlet and outlet lines
of solids for autoclaving. Sediment buckets that (typically welded if in ABSL areas) to maintain rigid,
ensure grate replacement and are free of sharp gas-tight penetrations. The box design shall include an
edges shall be provided as appropriate. See appropriate surface flange to permit sealing the device
Section 8.2, Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment to the containment barrier wall construction, and be
for additional information. arranged to provide a gas-tight finished installation.
Device mounting to stand-off from walls is preferable,
Rationale: Inclusion of floor drains within easier to seal, clean and maintain, and more economical.
containment may, in some cases, necessitate
effluent decontamination systems and 8.6.12.1 HEPA Filters/In-Line Filters
associated biowaste/vent piping arrangements
(e.g., where potential introduction of agents A. In-line Filters: In-line filters for gaseous piping sys-
of veterinary or agricultural significance may tems shall be as determined appropriate through the
occur). Eventual loss of trap seals will occur risk assessment, and shall be sterilizing grade per ASTM
where not used; therefore, the gas-tight cover F838, membrane, or double-membrane cartridge type,
could become the primary seal of the drainage absolute rated for aerosolized virus particles in high
system. Many cover designs are not truly gas- humidity gas, and shall be bacteria rated in liquid
tight, insect-tight, or repeatable; therefore, the seal streams at 0.2 microns (or less), with moisture-resistant
configuration must be appropriately specified. inherently hydrophobic construction of PTFE,PVDF,
or sintered stainless, a leak tight frame or cartridge
design of thermal melt-sealed construction, and double
O-ring seals of compatible elastomers to avoid bypass
8.6.11.8 Emergency Fixtures leakage. Housings shall be at least 316 stainless steel
A. Compliance: Emergency fixtures and associated or equivalent corrosion-resistant metal compatible with
water supplies shall comply with Section 8.2, Plumbing system application, dead-leg-free sanitary type hous-
Fixtures and Equipment and Section 8.3, Water Systems ing and designed for the media (e.g., gas system appli-
and required locations shall be determined in accor- cations). Filters for critical flow volume applications
dance with the risk assessment. Service shall be con- shall be oversized with sufficient safety factor to ensure
figured as an isolated potable supply, with ASSE 1013 required performance. Filters shall be 100% integrity
backflow protection provided for services prior to enter- tested. Pressure drop/resistance to flow to be consid-
ing containment. Eyewash fixtures shall be selected to ered. Materials shall be confirmed compatible with the
maintain a fixed air-gap above the flood level rim. decontamination method. Hydrophobic fluoropolymer
membrane (typically PTFE) type filters, at least HEPA
efficiency for liquid and gas streams may be utilized as
approved by DOHS and consistent with the risk assess-
ment. N + 1 redundancy is required for filters serving
8.6.12 Special Materials multiple use points and central equipment.
and Equipment B. Filter Selection: The filter selection shall provide
A. Recessed Equipment (Hose Stations, Emergency the required efficiency at the minimum and maximum
Shower Actuation, Etc.): The use of recessed box system operating velocity and pressures and shall be
devices (as opposed to selection of equipment that is sized as required for airflow rate, velocity, and permis-
exposed and stood-off from the finished surface) should sible pressure drop under loaded conditions. Where
be avoided. However, where such arrangements are steam sterilization is utilized, filters shall be compatible
required or preferred as per the program requirements, without deterioration. Unless otherwise approved, filter
the assembly shall be arranged to prevent breaching selection for vacuum systems shall ensure total pressure
the containment barrier, and shall not have concealed drop through the filters and housings does not exceed
or inaccessible areas, which may harbor insects. The 12.7 Torr (0.5 in. Hg) at design flow. The flow rate
box shall be constructed of stainless steel with a solid through the vacuum filter and housing shall be deter-
back and sides, and all penetrations into the box shall mined acceptable and factored into design calculations.
Contents:
9.1.3 Occupancy
9.1.1 Codes and Standards Classification
A. General: Fire protection design shall follow the For building construction requirements (e.g., construc-
latest edition of the following unless amended herein. tion type, heights and areas, exterior walls, load-bear-
Applicable editions shall be those in effect at the time of ing members), research and testing laboratories are
the contract notice to proceed. defined as Use Group B and animal holding areas are
defined as Use Group S-1 per the IBC. For life safety
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) and fire protection requirements, laboratory units are
National Fire Codes (NFC). All portions of defined as industrial occupancies and animal holding
the NFPA NFC except NFPA 5000 shall be areas are defined as storage occupancies per the NFPA
followed including annexes, recommended 101, Life Safety Code.
practices, interim amendments, and formal
interpretations.
8. Source of grounding
Contents:
Sanitary Engineering (ASSE) type 1013, 1015, 1047 or 1. High temperature sprinklers rated at 141C
1048 devices (as appropriate) that are also UL listed and (286F) shall be used in autoclave areas,
FM approved for fire protection service. Where multiple mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, electri-
products/manufacturers are permitted in contract doc- cal switchgear and transformer rooms, electric
uments, the pressure loss used in hydraulic calculations closets, local area network (LAN) rooms, cage
shall not be less than the actual devices as installed. The wash rooms, and any other areas in which high
backflow preventer shall be located downstream of the temperatures are routinely experienced.
system isolation valve or post indicator valve (PIV).
D. Guards: Sprinklers located within 2.1 m (7 ft.) of
the finished floor and all sprinklers in the areas listed in
9.2.1.4 Drainage the preceding paragraph shall be provided with listed
A. General: All new sprinkler systems shall have a main sprinkler head guards in accordance with NFPA 13.
drain adjacent to the system riser, fully accessible to Guards should additionally be considered for animal
maintenance and safety personnel. With the exception holding areas.
of low-point and auxiliary drains, all new system drains E. Elevator Machine Rooms and Hoist Ways: For eleva-
shall be hard piped to an approved exterior location or tor machine room and elevator hoist way requirements,
to a safe location inside the building, which shall accept see Section 4.7.
the full water flow without causing property damage or
a safety hazard. The pipe shall be terminated such that F. Pipe Material: Sprinkler pipe shall be schedule 40
water does not pool on the floor. black steel or galvanized, except as permitted by the
DFM or for installations where non-ferrous materials
B. Hose Valve: If the system main drain is not capable are required. Schedule 5, schedule 10, and light wall
of performing a forward flow test in accordance with designated sprinkler pipe are not permitted.
NFPA 25, provide one 64 mm (2.5 in.) hose valve with
National Standard Threads (NST) for every 946 lpm G. Joining Method: Wherever galvanized pipe is used,
(250 gpm) of system demand. Fire pump test headers only threaded or cut grooved joining methods shall be
may be used as the means when present. used. Welding is not permitted on galvanized pipe.
the existing ceiling, and red enamel bands 102 mm (4 C. Manual Standpipe System Design: Calculations shall
in.) wide shall be painted at 3,000 mm (10 ft.) intervals. be performed to show that the minimum design flows
In aesthetically sensitive areas, exposed sprinkler piping required by NFPA 14 can be achieved at a minimum
may be painted to match the existing ceiling without red residual pressure of 689kPa (100 psi) at the most remote
enamel bands if approved DFM. hose valve with a flat supply pressure of 1,034 kPa (150
psi) at the fire department connection.
C. Control Valve Location: Control valves for wet pipe
systems shall be located below the ceiling and a maxi- D. Automatic Standpipe System Design: Where auto-
mum of 2,300 mm (92 in.) above the floor. For existing matic standpipe systems are required per NFPA 14 these
buildings where this requirement cannot be met, con- systems shall be hydraulically designed (including the
sult with the DFM and provide a 460 mm 460 mm (18 design characteristics of the fire pump) to provide a resid-
in. 18 in.) minimum access hatch. ual pressure on the outlet side of the fire hose connection
of the most remote DN 65 (NPS 2-1/2) inch hose connec-
D. Service Valve Type: When a dedicated fire protection tion of 448 kPa (65 psig) at system flow rates determined
service is provided, the required isolation valve in the in accordance with NFPA 14. Automatic standpipe sys-
exterior water supply main shall be a lockable PIV. tems shall also be designed to meet the manual standpipe
E. Sprinkler Clearance: Sprinkler clearances to obstruc- design criteria in the preceding paragraph.
tions, including shelving, shall be in accordance with
NFPA 13. New and relocated sprinklers shall also meet 9.2.2.1 Standpipe System Materials and
all of the following:
Equipment
1. Not be located directly above shelving or A. Pipe Material: Shall be schedule 40 black steel or
peninsulas. galvanized, except as permitted by the DFM or for
installations where non-ferrous materials are required.
2. Located no more than half the maxi-
Schedule 5, schedule 10, or light wall designated pipe
mum allowable distance from the center of
is not permitted.
peninsulas.
B. Joining Method: Wherever galvanized pipe is used,
3. Where possible, located at least 30 inches from
only threaded or cut grooved joining methods shall be
walls and peninsulas to minimize the chance
used. Welding is not permitted on galvanized pipe.
of future shelving and equipment obstructing
sprinklers. C. Fittings: Fittings that use steel gripping devices or set
screws to bite into the pipe when pressure is applied are
not permitted.
Contents:
9.3.1.3 Notification Devices 3. All initiating device circuits (IDCs) shall meet
Class A requirements.
Fire alarm notification appliances shall be provided in
accordance with NFPA 101 and NFPA 72 requirements, 4. All notification appliance circuits (NACs) shall
except as modified below: meet Class A requirements.
1. Strobe only in operating rooms and restrooms
ii. Mechanical rooms greater than 9.3 m 2 1. SLC: Blue twisted shielded #16 American
(100 ft2) wire gauge (AWG) or per manufacturers
requirements.
5. Environmentally controlled rooms with work-
stations shall be equipped with audible/visible 2. Speakers: Yellow twisted shielded #16 AWG or
notification appliances. per manufacturers requirements.
6. All work areas shall have at least one audible/ 3. Strobes: Red solid copper #14 AWG or per
visible notification appliance except private manufacturers requirements.
work areas and areas with an occupant load of
one person. 4. The fire alarm wire for 120 V AC circuits shall
be solid copper #12 AWG.
7. Audible or visual devices may be omitted if
necessary due to animal sensitivity. 5. Door holders shall be connected with solid
copper #14 AWG at minimum.
9.3.1.5 Circuit Performance C. Splicing: Splices are not permitted except that splices
utilizing terminal strips shall be permitted within 914
Fire protective signaling systems shall have the follow-
mm (3 ft.) of an existing notification appliance or ini-
ing circuit performance in accordance with NFPA 72:
tiating device. Where splices occur, label the fire alarm
1. All signaling line circuits (SLCs) shall meet backbox to indicate the nearby splice.
Class A requirements.
D. Multiconductor Cable: The multiconductor cable for
2. All panel-to-panel communication SLCs shall the NIH Bethesda fire alarm reporting and mass noti-
meet Class X requirements. fication systems is custom fabricated. There shall be no
splices and wire runs shall be continuous from terminal
panel to terminal panel.
6. Building 51 microphone
Contents:
9.4.0 Introduction
9.4.6 Dampers
Contents:
9.5.0 Introduction
B. Sprinkler Heads: Sprinkler heads shall be pendant 9.5.1.2 Fire Alarm Systems
type and shall not be recessed or concealed.
A. Notification Appliances: Install standard notifica-
C. Chemical Resistance: Sprinkler head and pipe mate- tion appliances, to include combination appliances and
rial and finish shall be resistant to chemicals used during speakers in all BSL-3 laboratories.
the daily operation of the laboratory and decontamina-
1. Animal Holding Areas: Installation of fire
tion procedures.
alarm notification appliances in animal hold-
D. Barrier Penetrations: ing areas should be evaluated on a case-by-
case basis with veterinary staff and shall be
1. Penetration details for sprinkler piping shall approved by the DFM.
meet requirements as described for plumbing
penetrations through containment. i. In animal study areas that are subject
to light restrictions, an interface to the
2. The piping drop shall extend through the pen- building lighting control systems is per-
etration sufficient to allow for application of a mitted in lieu of fire alarm notification
visible seal. Escutcheons shall not be provided, appliances such that the animal holding
however a flat solid stainless steel plate or room lighting dims or flashes during a
washer that is tight fitting against the pipe may fire alarm activation, where required
be utilized bedded in sealant and sealed to the after consultation with the DFM.
pipe circumference.
B. Conduits, Boxes and Sealants: Comply with the
requirements in Section 10.8. See Appendix L, Sealant
Table.
Contents:
10.1.0 Introduction
4. A lighting fixture schedule on drawings, iden- the equipment and to identify the attached loads.
tifying at least three manufacturers, catalog Information shown shall include:
numbers, lighting circuit voltage, lamp types,
1. Panel name
ballast/driver type, number of lamps, installa-
tion information, description of fixtures, and 2. Number and size of all breakers, including
remarks shall be provided for each fixture type spares
identified as approved equals.
3. Number of bussed spaces and the maximum
B. Site Utility Design Drawings: The drawings shall ampere frame ratings
include section views of all ducts, with identification
4. Total number of breaker positions in the panel
and labeling used; and section views of the manholes
with identification of each side and bottom. The draw- 5. Bussing ampacity
ings shall show routing of all duct distribution systems,
6. Main circuit breaker (MCB) and rating; or
duct sizes, manhole/handhole sizes, cable sizes, feeder
main lugs only (MLO)
numbers, and grounding details of all manholes. All
duct penetrations including spares shall be identified 7. Surface or recessed mounting
and labeled.
8. Top or bottom feed
C. Panel Schedules on Construction Drawings:
9. Proposed location of panel
Schedules shall include all data required to order
10. Trip rating, frame rating, and number of poles components and justification for selection of
of each breaker distribution equipment. Final short circuit
analysis shall be performed by the distribu-
11. Short circuit interrupting rating of the panel tion equipment manufacturer based on the
12. Identification of the load and room number actual distribution equipment proposed for
installation.
13. Estimated connected load in volt-amperes (VA;
or kilovolt-amperes [kVA]) per circuit (in watts 8. Coordination study determining the circuit
[W] or kilo watts [kW] for generator loads) breaker settings and system coordination. Final
coordination study shall be provided by the
14. Panel total connected kVA and amperes (A) (in distribution equipment manufacturer.
W or kW for generator loads)
9. Arc flash study for all new electrical distribu-
15. Panel total demand kVA and A (in W or kW for tion equipment
generator loads)
10. Cable-pulling calculations to ensure that the
D. Calculation and Analysis: The following design cal- maximum tension or sidewall pressures are not
culations and analyses shall be provided: exceeded
1. Economic analysis for justification of selec- 11. Underground duct bank heating calculation for
tion of either 120/208 V or 277/480 V on the ambient de-rating of cables
secondary side of the network distribution
transformers 12. Electrical system harmonic load flow analyses
for variable frequency drive (VFD) application
2. Analysis to determine if large central or smaller
120/208 V step-down transformers are to be 13. Lighting calculations giving illumination levels
used. An economic analysis shall be performed in lux as well as foot candle (fc). Point by point
if the choice is not obvious. calculations shall be provided for each typical
room type and for rooms with unique lighting
3. Electrical service sizing shall be based on the arrangements. Lighting calculation submittal
National Electric Code (NEC) and the DRM, shall include the lighting fixture manufacturers
as well as estimated connected and demand for name, the lighting fixture catalog number, the
major electrical distribution equipment load- average illumination level, the light loss factor
ing, including an additional capacity (minimum use, and the maximum to minimum illumina-
25%) for future building loads. Separate load tion ratio. Include ASHRAE 90.1 compliance
summaries shall be prepared for both normal for each area based on room function.
and standby/emergency power as shown in the
load analysis example given in Table 10.1.5. E. Power Systems Study: Perform a power system study
prior to ordering the equipment. General requirements
4. Panelboard load summation for justification of of the study are as follows:
distribution equipment sizing
1. General: The study shall include executive sum-
5. Transformers, uninterruptible power supply mary, assumptions, short circuit study results
(UPS), and generator sizing calculations with a summary of PASS or FAIL at each bus
based on the available short circuit currents and
6. Voltage drop calculations for branch circuits commercially available short circuit rating, load
longer than 20 m (65 ft.) at 120 V, and branch flow study results, motor-starting study results,
circuits and feeders longer than 38.1 m (125 ft.) feeder voltage drop calculations, and conclu-
at 208 V, longer than 45.7 m (150 ft.) at 277 V sions. The study shall include all portions of the
or higher electrical distribution system from all power
7. Initial short circuit analysis determining the source(s) including the smallest adjustable
interrupting or withstand rating of the system trip circuit breaker in the distribution system.
Equipment Test
Medium voltage cable Insulation resistance
Medium voltage oil switch Visual; contact resistance; insulating liquid
Visual; AC high-potential test on primary windings and switch; insulation resis-
tance (2500 V Megger) on primary and secondary windings; turns ratio on all tap
Network transformer
positions; insulating liquid Envirotemp FR3 oxygen percentage; FR3 (six indi-
vidual tests) including dielectric breakdown voltage
Visual and mechanical; insulation resistance
Network protector Current transformer ratio; contact resistance
Minimum pickup voltage
Visual and mechanical; insulation resistance
Secondary switchgear
High potential; instrument transformers
Visual and mechanical; insulation resistance
Power circuit breaker
Pickup and time delay values; operation
Visual and mechanical; insulation resistance
Motor control centers
Overload; bus and starters
Ground fault Visual and mechanical; neutral to ground resistance; pickup and time delay
Visual and mechanical; insulation resistance
Generator
Protective relay; phase rotation
Visual and mechanical; contact resistance; insulation resistance; relay settings;
Automatic transfer switches
timer settings; operation
Contents:
10.2.0 Introduction
c. Multiple transformers
E. Interrupting Capacity: Provide electrical equipment Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) standard
with bus bracing and device interrupting capacities that 1100 and IEEE standard 141. Mitigate harmonic dis-
exceed the available fault current at the terminals. tortions generated by an individual load with filtering
at the load terminal to limit harmonic distortions at
F. Selective Coordination: Provide fully selectively the electrical system. Limit harmonic distortion at the
coordinated overcurrent protection to the extent practi- load side of the building primary transformer not to
cal (use a molded case switch at the downstream pro- exceed the limits set for the point of common coupling
tective device when the upstream protective device is of per IEEE Standard 519. Refer to Section 10.6, Power
the same size to allow full coordination). Where ground Quality and Grounding.
fault protection is provided for the main circuit break-
ers, provide ground fault protection for feeder circuit H. Load Segregation: Wherever possible, loads shall
breakers to have selective tripping of the breaker closest be segregated into like groups based on function (i.e.,
to the fault. office, mechanical, research, etc.) or type of load (i.e.,
computers, motors, lighting, receptacles, etc.).
G. Power Quality: Design power systems in accordance
with recommended design practices in The Institute of
a. Fluorescent or HID lamps 277 V (120 V 3. Motors: The standard voltages for motors are
when 277 V source is not available) as follows:
b. Incandescent lamps (when allowed) 120 V a. 250 W (1/3 hp) or below: 120 V, 1-phase
c. Light Emitting Diode Lamps 120 or 277 V b. 370 W ( hp): 208 V or 480 V, 1-phase or
3-phase
2. Electric Heating (When Allowed): The stan-
dard voltages for an electric heating system are c. 560 W ( hp): 208 V or 480 V, 3-phase
as follows:
d. 2.2 KW (3 hp) or above: 480 V, 3-phase, or
a. Less than 1.5 kW: 120 V, 1-phase 208 V 3-phase only if 480 V is not available.
Note: Motors shall be rated 115/120 V for 120 Figure 10.2.1(D) Typical building service
V systems, 200/208 V for 208 V systems, and (single transformer) normal power
460/480 V for 480 V systems (other nominal
voltage and corresponding rating for motors
are possible based on availability of utilization
of voltage at the project location). Single phase
motors furnished as integral parts of variable
air volume terminal units are acceptable for all
horsepower (hp) ratings.
a
Heating, ventilating, and air conditioning (HVAC) load assumption is based on a separate central HVAC utility
plant supplied by a different service.
the relay. General requirements for the IEDs are Circuit breaker shall accommodate the inher-
as follows: ently high available short circuit interrupting
current in a spot network system arrangement.
a. Relay trip contact shall close when posi-
tive sequence power flows into the net- 3. Number of Mains: Provide a main circuit
work, when net 3-phase reverse power flows breaker on the secondary of each unit substa-
through the network protector and when tion transformer.
reverse magnetizing current flows to an
associated transformer. 4. Bus Stubs: All bus stubs shall have insulated
covers.
b. Relay shall include three on-board input
ports for external sensors. 5. Cubicles: All cubicles shall be complete with
bus work, rails, wiring, equipment shorting
c. Relay shall be insensitive to phase rotation. blocks, and circuit breakers.
d. Selectable relay operation: Traditional 6. Spare: Provide spare cubicles with circuit break-
straight-line master close curve or the modi- ers. Provide a minimum of one spare circuit
fied circular closed curve. breaker mounted in a spare cubicle per frame
size utilized in the switchgear lineup.
e. Microprocessor relay: Operate under the
sequence-base algorithm, which provides 7. Spaces: All spaces shall be fully bussed (includ-
a flat, unchanging trip response. The relay ing draw-out assemblies, bussed connections,
shall have the capability to communicate and hardware) based on frame sizes indicated
information to a data concentrator over a on design drawings.
shielded twisted pair communications cable.
8. Bus Extension: The switchgear shall be posi-
f. The relay shall be enclosed in a NEMA tioned to allow for the addition of a minimum
type 6 chemically treated, waterproof of one vertical section to the switchgear pro-
drawn brass shell, and any wiring to the vided that switchgear capacity is not exceeded.
relay (including communication cable) shall
not compromise the rating. 9. Transient Voltage Surge Suppression: If
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression (TVSS)
B. Secondary Switchgear: Secondary switchgear shall is required for a switchgear, TVSS shall be a
comprise main circuit breakers and tie breakers of the modular type and shall be installed within
same ampacity. A main breaker shall serve a section of the switchgear. TVSS may be protected by a
the main bus while the tie breaker will connect two sec- molded case circuit breaker with appropriate
tions of the main bus. Both main and tie breakers are short-circuit interrupting rating (which is nor-
normally closed forming a spot network. mally not allowed to be installed in switchgear).
are brought into the switchgear and grounded h. Harmonic load content (percent total har-
at a single point only. The transformer neutral monic distortion [THD])
points are not bonded to ground at the trans-
former. The use of multiple point grounding i. Power factor
or modifications to differential ground fault Each feeder breaker shall have self-contained
protection shall not be used. local digital metering with remote reporting
12. Overcurrent Device: Overcurrent devices shall capability and be wired to a common commu-
have: nication interface. The feeder breaker power
meter shall meter the following items:
a. Short-time, long-time, ground fault, and
instantaneous trip settings a. Volts (phase-to-phase and phase-to-neutral)
e. Kilowatt demand (3-phase) 18. Tools: Turnover all specialized tools necessary
for installation, maintenance, calibration, and
f. Kilowatt peak demand other testing tools supplied with the equip-
g. kVA (3-phase) ment to the NIH at the end of the construction
project.
C. Distribution Transformer: Distribution transform- 125/250 V DC. For purposes of this require-
ers shall have delta connected primary and solidly ment, it shall be assumed that a DC rating for
grounded wye connected secondary. The transformer one-pole and two-pole breakers extends to the
shall have self-cooled capacity for 100% of the con- three-pole device as well.
nected load, plus 25% spare capacity for future loads.
3. Main Circuit Breaker: Provide a main circuit
breaker in the same enclosure if a local discon-
Rationale: This is to meet future growth in necting means is not in the same closet or room.
electrical demand.
4. Type: All circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type;
plug-in breakers shall not be used.
General requirements for the distribution transformers
are as follows: 5. Spare Breaker: Spare breakers shall be left in
the Off position.
1. Coil Material: Copper for liquid filled trans-
formers; copper or aluminum for dry-type 6. Directory: Provide typed directory referenc-
transformers ing the actual loads and room numbers for the
circuits; mark spare breaker as Spare and
2. Insulating liquid for liquid filled transformers: bussed spaces as Space in the directory. The
NIH approved less flammable natural ester directory shall list the switchboard or panel-
3. Accessories: Include the following additional board name, the name of the source panel, and
accessories: the NIH facility number (FAC #). The contrac-
tor is liable for the accuracy of the directory
a. Liquid level, pressure/vacuum, and tem- regardless of the room numbers used on the
perature gauges with alarm contacts for contract documents.
liquid-filled transformers
7. Phase Balance: Arrange single-phase loads
b. Tap changer with five settings, one at between all phases of panelboards to obtain
primary voltage. The other four nominal phase balanced to within 15% of the average of
2.5% taps two above and two below the phase current.
rated primary voltage
Specific requirements for switchboard and panelboard
c. Alarm contacts for SCADA interface are as follows:
4. Dry-type Transformer: Use K-rated dry-type 1. Heat Shrink Insulation Sleeves: Switchboards
transformers in accordance with Section 10.6.1, 800 A and above shall be provided with manu-
Harmonics. When the average daily load of facturer installed heat shrink insulation sleeves.
the transformer is less than 50% of the name-
plate rating, use an ENERGY STAR labeled 2. Minimum Interrupting Capacity: The mini-
transformer that complies with NEMA TP. mum short circuit rating for 208 Y/120 V pan-
Otherwise, use low-temperature-rise trans- elboards must be 10,000 A symmetrical and
former with rated temperature rise of 80C for 480 Y/277 V panelboards must be 14,000 A
(176F) or less. symmetrical.
D. Switchboard and Panelboard: General requirements 3. Branch Circuit Panelboards: Branch circuit
for switchboard and panelboard are as follows: panelboards shall be 3-phase, 4-wire; have
minimum 42 poles for panelboards with
1. Bus Material: Copper ampacities greater than 100 A.
2. Interrupting Capacity: Circuit breakers shall 4. Ganged Single Pole Circuit Breakers: Single
be fully rated for available fault current; series pole breakers shall not be ganged to form mul-
rating is not acceptable. Circuit breakers shall tipole breakers.
have published ampere interrupting rating at
5. Neutral Bus: In general, provide a 100% neutral 12. Operating Rooms in ABSL Facilities: Provide
bus and a ground bus. Panelboards serving high isolated power panels with ungrounded second-
harmonic loads (more than 50% non-linear ary and line isolation monitors for operating
load) shall have 200% rated neutral bus. Refer rooms in ABSL facilities.
to Section 10.6, Power Quality and Grounding.
E. Distribution Panels: Distribution panels shall be
6. Bussing: All panelboard breaker bussing (exten- defined as those panels serving branch circuit panel-
sion fingers), including spaces, shall be rated boards and other 3-phase loads. Distribution panels
for minimum 100 A for panelboard rated 225 shall be labeled DP-1, 2, 3, etc. Refer to Table
A and higher; and a minimum 60 A for panel- 10.2.2(B) for criteria in sizing distribution panels for
boards rated 200 A or less. future space allocation.
7. Trim: Provide one full height piano hinged trim F. Busway: Install busways such that there is an ade-
for all single section panelboards 400 A and quate code required clearance for the current and future
higher; two, one for each side, for dual-section plug-in devices. Contractor shall be liable for field
panelboards. The trim shall hinge open with measurement of the busway layout prior to ordering.
the removal of a few screws. General busway requirements are as follows:
8. Lock: The panel door giving access to the circuit 1. Feeder Busway Maximum Current Rating:
breakers only shall have a flush tumbler lock. 2,000 A
9. Key: All panelboard doors within a building 2. Bus Material: Current-carrying copper bus,
shall be keyed alike. New panelboards installed fully insulated with Class130C (266F) insu-
within an existing building shall be keyed to lation except at joints. Provide plated surface at
match the existing panelboards. joints. Aluminum busway shall not be used.
10. Spare Pole Positions: For all 120/208V pan- 3. Type: Use non-ventilated busway in dry loca-
elboards and 277/480V lighting panelboards tions. For wet or moist locations, use the
(primarily used for lighting circuits), provide busway listed for use in the application envi-
single pole, 20A branch circuit breakers in all ronment. Busway shall be drip-proof for
unused spare pole positions. horizontal and vertical applications where
busway run beneath piping, or vessels contain-
11. Isolated Ground Bus: Panelboards serving iso- ing liquids, or ductwork.
lated ground (IG) receptacles shall have an IG
bus in addition to the equipment ground bus. 4. Concrete Curbs: Provide 102 mm (4 in.) con-
Clearly label the IG bus and size the IG conduc- crete curbs at all vertical busway penetrations
tors to match the phase conductors. Connect
the IG conductor to the panelboards IG bus.
Refer to Section 10.6, Power Quality and
Grounding, for grounding requirement.
10.2.3 Motor Control
Table 10.2.2(B) Distribution Panel Sizing A. Starter Type: Provide motor starter as scheduled
Maximum Minimum Total below:
Active Poles Spare Poles Poles
1. Thermal Manual Starter: Motors rated 370
14 4 18 W ( hp) or smaller. Thermal manual motor
23 7 30 starters shall be a non-automatic resetting type,
32 10 42 lockable in the Off position, and have overload
45 15 60 elements sized per full load current of motor
being protected.
66+ required
66 As required
spaces
2. Magnetic Starter: Motors smaller than 22.4 4. Control Wiring: All control wiring (in or out)
kW (30 hp) shall be extended to terminal strips in a cen-
tral location in the MCC in accordance with
3. Reduced voltage/soft start controller: Motors NEMA Standard ICS 2-322, Type C wiring.
rated 22.4 kW (30 hp) or higher
5. Metering: Provide advanced metering for
4. Variable Frequency Drive: Variable Frequency remote monitoring.
Drive (VFD) when required by the mechani-
cal systems shall adhere to the requirements 6. VFD: VFDs shall not be installed in MCCs.
listed under Section 6.2.8, Motor and Variable
Frequency Drives. VFD with bypass shall have 7. Heaters: Provide a strip heater inside the enclo-
reduced voltage or soft start motor controller sure when MCC is installed outdoors.
for motors rated 22.4 kW (30 hp) or higher. D. Other Requirements:
B. Starter Requirements: Provide NEMA rated start- 1. High Efficiency Motors: Provide overcurrent
ers. Starters shall have: protection sized per manufacturers recom-
1. Either a fused disconnect or a motor circuit mendations in compliance with NEC for high
protector efficiency motors.
2. Integral single-phase protection against loss of 2. Control Operation: Provide ladder diagrams
any phase voltage for 3-phase motors and sequences of operations for all control
functions. This applies to heating, ventilat-
3. Red light-emitting diode (LED) running pilot ing, and air conditioning (HVAC) systems,
light; green LED power-available pilot light automatic temperature controls (pneumatic or
electric), plumbing, fire protection, security,
4. Hand-off-automatic (HOA) switch programmable lighting control, etc.
5. Control power transformer (CPT) with two pri- 3. Enclosure: Comply with environmental condi-
mary fuses and one secondary fuse, with sec- tion at the installed location.
ondary voltage of 120 V. Provide disconnecting
means for both line and control circuits. a. Dry and indoor locations: NEMA type 1
6. Two normally open (NO) and two normally b. Indoor locations subject to excessive dust
closed (NC) auxiliary contacts with provision or dirt: NEMA type 12
for four additional auxiliary contacts
c. Outdoor locations: NEMA type 4
7. Mechanical override to open the starter enclo-
sure while energized d. Wash down or corrosive locations: NEMA
type 4X
C. Motor Control Center (MCC): Provide MCC when
four or more three phase motors rated larger than 370 Equivalent ingress protection (IP) rated enclo-
W ( hp) are located in the same area. MCC shall sures are also acceptable.
comply with the following:
2. Starter: Plug-in starters with no hard wiring 10.2.4 Electrical Work Space
directly to the starter. Minimum starter size in
Coordinate with architect and other disciplines to
motor control center shall be size 1.
comply with the following requirements.
3. Short Circuit Protection: Starters shall conform
A. Location: Transformers, secondary substations,
to IEC 947-4-1 type 2 component protection in
distribution switchgears, generators, transfer switches
the event of a short circuit.
and other electrical distribution equipment shall not
be located at the lowest points of the buildings below 2. Clearance: Provide clear working space around
grade level. In addition, comply with the following the equipment in accordance with electri-
requirements: cal code and this manual. Columns shall not
encroach on the clear working space required
1. Medium Voltage Transformer: The optimal around equipment.
location for the medium voltage primary ser-
vice transformers is indoors in a transformer 3. Other Equipment: Piping, ducts, or equipment
vault, located separately from the service not serving the dedicated electrical rooms shall
entrance switchgear room, and not in the same not be permitted to be installed in the electrical
room as the emergency power distribution gear. rooms or traverse the electrical rooms.
The secondary service bussing shall be kept
as short as possible and electrically the same 4. Ventilation (and/or cooling): Rooms with trans-
length ( 10%). formers shall have ventilation (and/or cooling)
sufficient for 2% of the total transformer kVA
2. Low Voltage Distribution Equipment: Locate expressed in watts of heat load. Coordinate
all branch circuit panelboards and distribution cooling requirement with HVAC system design.
panels at the center of the area being served, Refer to Chapter 6, Mechanical Design.
secured from the general public. Electrical loads
shall be served from the panelboards located on D. Electrical Closets: Electrical closets shall be pro-
the same floor and located closest to the load. vided for every 929 m 2 (10,000 ft2) of area served by
208/120 V branch circuit panelboards; for every 1,858
Exceptions: Lighting and power circuits within vertical m 2 (20,000 ft2) of area served by 480/277 V lighting
stairways, elevator shafts, roofs, and interstitial areas. panelboards. Locate panelboards so that the farthest
120 V device/equipment served is no more than 30 m
B. Clearances: Provide the minimum required clear- (100 ft.) away. General requirements for electrical clos-
ances per code for all equipment. Provide 76 mm (3 in.) ets are as follows:
minimum separation between panelboards. Lay out the
electrical equipment in electrical rooms and closets such 1. Stacking: Vertically stack electrical closets in
that there is an unobstructed exit path out of the room. multistory buildings.
The following minimum clearances are required for
new projects around secondary switchgear: 2. Sleeves: Provide sealed, water-tight sleeves,
extending at least 76 mm (3 in.) above the floor,
1. 1,524 mm (5 ft.) in front through the holes in floors of electrical closets.
2. 1,067 mm (3 ft. 6 in.) in rear 3. Location: Closets shall be located away from
the mechanical shafts; coordinate location with
3. 914 mm (3 ft.) on the ends all other building systems, particularly those
Consider additional clearance for the equipment being located in the ceiling plenum directly adjacent
racked out. to the closet.
C. Electrical Room and Transformer Vault: Install all Exception 1: Shallow closets with full doors on the
substations, switchgears, switchboards, transformers, long wall are acceptable in lieu of electrical closets for
and network protectors in dedicated electrical rooms or smaller renovations.
vaults. Equipment installation shall meet the following Exception 2: Secure service corridor may be used for
requirements: the installation of panelboards.
1. Room Size: Size electrical rooms to accommo- E. Equipment Removal Route: A permanent exit route
date current electrical equipment and required shall be provided for the large electrical equipment
clearances. Consideration should be given to including transformer, generator, switchgear, etc., to
additional room for future anticipated growth. remove the large equipment and bring in new replace-
ment units. A faulty transformer shall be capable of
Contents:
10.3.0 Introduction
Systems conditioning
(0.13.0)
B. Life Safety Loads: Life safety loads shall include the 2. Pumps, components and all devices associated
following (this list is not all-inclusive): with fuel stored in large storage tanks serving
the emergency generator except oil circulation
1. Emergency egress lighting
pumps, which shall be connected to normal
2. Egress signage power
9. One elevator per bank of elevators. All eleva- 8. Air conditioning units serving main telecom-
tors shall be on emergency power with only one munication room
elevator per each bank of elevators to run at a
given time. The lock-out of the elevators shall 9. Heating systems including boilers, heating
be provided by the elevator controller. water pumps, and associated fuel oil system
10. Air handling system serving the elevator 10. Steam condensate pumps
machine room when elevators are on emergency 11. Domestic and industrial/laboratory water pumps
power
12. Hands-free toilet flushers and lavatory faucets
11. Air handling systems associated with active
smoke purge/evacuation systems 13. Electrical heat tracing for hydronic piping
12. Strip heater for transfer switch 14. Minimum one receptacle at each electrical
room/closet and mechanical room
13. Security, intrusion detection, and access control
systems 15. Environmental rooms
14. Heat tapes for sprinkler pipes 16. Biological safety cabinets, incubators, bio-bub-
bles, containment devices, etc.
15. Fume hood exhaust fans
17. Supply and exhaust air fans for laboratory and
16. All supply and exhaust fans including labora- animal research facilities for BSL-2/ABSL-2
tory exhaust, animal research facility (ARF) areas
exhaust, and other critical exhaust air fans for
BSL-3/ABSL-3 areas 18. Laboratory equipment alarm-monitoring system
17. ARF medical gas systems 19. High-value specimen refrigerators, freezers, etc.
18. ARF operating room lighting and receptacles 20. Lighting and lighting control systems in animal
research facilities, if defined by program
19. Fire control room power, lighting requirements
D. Optional Standby Loads: Optional standby loads 21. Water chillers, cooling towers, pumps and asso-
shall include the following (this list is not all-inclusive): ciated systems, which serve critical areas
1. UPS systems 22. Critical scientific equipment identified by pro-
2. Automatic temperature control system gram requirements
components 23. Supply fans associated with exhaust fans con-
3. Auxiliary mechanical equipment that supports nected to emergency power
heating and cooling systems 24. Laboratory air compressors and dryers
4. Closed circuit television cameras and associated 25. Laboratory vacuum pumps
equipment
26. Laboratory gas cylinders/Dewar manifolds
5. Lighting control systems
27. Animal water system
6. Select lighting in electrical distribution equip-
ment, mechanical and main telecommunication 28. Animal caging with power ventilated rack sys-
rooms tems, if defined by program requirements
7. Computer room air handling units (AHUs) 29. Select outlets along corridors in ARFs
10.3.2 Emergency Power level at 6.1 m (20 ft.) from the enclosure at
rated output, regardless of the generator size.
Generation The generator noise levels at the property line
A. Equipment Location: Install generators, trans- shall follow the local county noise ordinances
fer equipment, paralleling equipment, and emergency and requirements. Assess noise performance
switchgear above grade and in a secured area. General requirements early in the design cycle and
installation requirements are as follows: design appropriate sound attenuation measures
based on the site conditions.
1. Standards: Emergency power generation equip-
ment installation and startup procedures shall 2. Silencer or Muffler: Provide generator exhaust
follow NFPA 110. silencer or muffler rated for minimum residen-
tial use or quieter to achieve the required sound
2. Location: Locate power generation equipment rating.
where engine, fan, exhaust, and permanent
load bank testing noise levels shall be accept- 3. Remote Tank: Provide power and monitoring
able. Locate emergency power supply equip- wiring for the remote tank level gauge.
ment close to the main power consuming equip-
4. Jacket Water Heater: Provide jacket water heater
ment and locate supply equipment away from
connected to normal power for reliable starting
high ambient temperatures.
in cold weather. Provide isolation valves to allow
3. Clearance: Provide at least 1.2 m (4 ft.) of for jacket water heater replacement.
clearance around the generator set. Ensure all
5. Physical Security: Coordinate with Division
generator enclosure access panels and doors can
of Physical Security Management (DPSM)
be fully opened.
representative for additional physical security
4. Accessible: Easily accessible for service and requirements.
future replacement. There shall be access for
C. Indoor Installations: If site constraints are such that
replacement of the generator without moving
the generator shall be located indoors, indoor installa-
other equipment or accessories, such as a day
tion shall comply with the following requirements:
tank.
1. Sound Attenuation: Sound attenuate the gen-
5. Vibration: Include provisions for avoiding
erator room to achieve noise level acceptable to
structure-borne vibration.
the surrounding occupants.
6. Protection: Protect electrical equipment from
2. Ventilation and Air Conditioning: Refer to
weather and vandalism.
Section 6.2, Supply Air Handling Systems.
7. Equipment Pad: A concrete equipment pad shall
3. Equipment Removal Path: Identify the exit
be provided for all floor mounted equipment.
route for the removal of the generator on the
Refer to Section 10.2.5.
drawings. Refer to Section 10.2.4.
8. Generator Exhaust: Refer to Section 6.2,
D. Fuel Oil Systems: Refer to Section 6.2, Supply Air
Supply Air Handling Systems.
Handling Systems.
B. Outdoor Installations: The optimal generator loca-
E. Load Bank: Provide permanently installed fully
tion is outdoors in a sound-attenuated enclosure with
rated resistive load banks for all generators 1,500 kW
an adequate working space around the generator.
and higher. Provide a portable load bank connection
Outdoor installations shall comply with the following
point for smaller generators. This connection point
requirements:
shall be suitable for a portable generator with interlock-
1. Noise Level: The sound-attenuated enclosure ing means provided to prevent concurrent operation of
shall provide 70 to 79 dB maximum noise normal and emergency power. Load bank installation
shall comply with the following requirements:
1. Connection Requirements: Provide all neces- 2. Poles: For all new construction and complete
sary wiring for load bank testing with proper renovation, utilize 4-pole transfer switches for
external building terminal connections and 3-phase, 4-wire systems.
shunt trip circuit breaker for connection to the
load bank. Provide a number of lugs based on
parallel #500 KCMIL cable connections to a Rationale: This is to provide complete isolation
portable load bank. among power sources.
2. Load Dump: Wire the load dump control For existing emergency power system renova-
circuit in the load bank to the shunt trip circuit tion or upgrade, the number of switched poles (3
breaker control. If the building calls for emer- or 4) in a transfer switch shall match the exist-
gency power while the generator is being exer- ing number of switched poles.
cised by the load bank, the load bank circuit
breaker shall immediately open, dropping the 3. Grounding and Bonding: Ground the genera-
load bank from the generator bus. tor neutral for 4-pole switches in accordance
with NEC requirements. For 3-pole switches,
the lifting of the generators neutral to ground
Rationale: This is to allow transfer to emergency bond shall comply with NEC requirements for
power in case of true emergency while load bank 3-pole, solid neutral power transfer.
testing is still in process.
4. ATS: ATS shall have the following function and
3. Grounding: Provide an accessible driven ground characteristics:
rod tied to the electrical grounding system at the a. UL listed in accordance with UL 1008
portable load bank connection location.
b. Fully automatic, open transition, break
before make operation
h. Microprocessor controlled meters installed possibility of normal power being connected in parallel
on the load side of the transfer switch to with the local generator when normal power is restored.
monitor the load whether the source is
normal or emergency. At a minimum, meter-
ing shall consist of a voltmeter that measures Rationale: This is to allow shunting of surplus
all three phases simultaneously, an amme- generating capacity of the on-site generators to
ter, a frequency meter, a kW meter, a power non-emergency loads in case of extended outage.
factor (PF) meter, and an analog bar graph
for easy reading of voltage and current. D. Portable Generator: Provide a portable generator
receptacle for all installations where a generator is not
i. ATS shall be located indoors. If a waiver is required or provided. Currently, the largest NIH por-
granted for an outdoor location, ATS shall table generator size is 1000 kW.
have door-in-door NEMA type 4X con-
struction. Provide a strip heater inside the When an on-site generator is deemed necessary, recepta-
enclosure when ATS is installed outdoors. cles for the connection of a small NIH-owned portable
generator may also be required on a project-by-project
5. Bypass: Use only bypass type transfer switch. basis. Portable generator connection requirements are
The bypass switch shall be capable of being as follows:
manually connected to either source under load
regardless of the condition of the source or 1. Receptacles: Portable generator connection shall
transfer switch position. include the following devices, which shall be
compatible with the existing NIH campus com-
ponents and systems:
Rationale: This is to allow removal of ATS for
servicing with only a momentary loss of electrical a. 200 A, 480/277 V, 4-pole, 5-wire junction
power. box, angle adapter, and pin and sleeve recep-
tacle, with either integral or separate series
Note: The size of a transfer switch increases rated over the current protective device
with the addition of the bypass feature. where receptacles are parallel. The quantity
of parallel 200 A receptacles shall match the
6. Manual Operator: The manual operator shall loads connected to the portable generator,
be readily and permanently accessible without not to exceed maximum portable generator
opening the enclosure door. output.
7. Clearance: Ensure additional working clear- b. One 15 A, 125 V, 2-pole, 3-wire NEMA
ance is provided for component in a racked-out type 5-15R with a flip-lid cover for 120 V
position. AC load bank control or battery charger
B. Emergency Distribution Panel: Where two or more c. One 15 A, 125 V, 2-pole, 2-wire-locking
ATSs are installed, provide an emergency distribution NEMA type L1-15R with a flip-lid cover for
panel (EDP) for future addition of ATSs. remote start circuit
3. Receptacle Location: Locate all generator 3. Provide a 20 A, 120 V emergency circuit per
receptacles 914 mm (3 ft.) above finished grade floor and a 30 A 120 V emergency circuit for
at or near an accessible roadway, parking lot, each standpipe riser to the above listed stairwell
or loading dock. twist-lock receptacles.
Contents:
10.4.0 Introduction
ductbank enters manholes and buildings (out to 1.8 m ft. 6 ft. 6 in.); minimum handhole dimensions
[6 ft.]), and when ductbank crosses under roadways. Do shall be 610 mm 610 mm 610 mm (2 ft. 2
not tie ductbank reinforcing steel with precast concrete ft. 2 ft.).
reinforcement steel.
3. Cover: Provide grounded steel covers for all
manholes and handholes. The standard man-
Rationale: This is to ensure that electrical duct hole frame and cover shall be 686 mm (2 ft. 3
distribution system is protected from accidental in.) in diameter (610 mm [2 ft.] inside diam-
earth work. eter). The cover shall have a small, flat area
for labeling, with the manhole number applied
C. Elevation Considerations: Locate the ducts at a min- by a welded bead. Provide an embossed brass
imum 762 mm (2 ft. 6 in.) clear below grade or below tag with the manhole number, legible from
the top of roadway and completely below the frost line. outside the manhole with the cover removed,
Slope the ducts from the higher manhole entrance to the inside the manhole collar. Label each man-
lower manhole entrance with no intermediate low spots hole cover as ELECTRIC for power and
that pool moisture. Slope the ducts entering a building COMMUNICATION for communication.
toward the manhole. Each manhole shall have two covers, 13 mm
(1/2 in.) above finish grade. One cover is for
If the manhole entrance points are almost at the same forced air and materials entry, and the other is
level, provide an arch in the duct run to allow drainage for worker access.
from a high point into both manholes. If a low point is
absolutely unavoidable, provide another manhole at or 4. Location: Preference for manhole location is as
near the low point. follows: grass areas first, sidewalks second and
street the last. Manholes shall not be located
in parking spaces. Handholes and manholes in
Rationale: This is to provide positive drainage streets, immediately adjacent to and within 4.9
away from the building. m (16 ft.) of a street shall meet Department of
Transportation standards associated with the
project/campus.
Rationale: Use of hand hole is not suitable for a 3. Sump: Provide a sump, in-line with a manhole
medium voltage system since such systems require cover, approximately 305 mm 305 mm 152
large working area. mm (12 in. 12 in. 6 in.) deep at all man-
holes so that a pump can be lowered into the
sump without entering the manhole.
2. Size: The minimum inside dimensions of man-
holes shall be 3.7 m x 2.7 m x 2 m (12 ft. 9
Contents:
10.5.0 Introduction
10.5.2 Raceway
10.5.1 Conductors and Cables 4. Existing Cable: The typical existing medium
A. Medium Voltage Cable: All medium voltage cable voltage cable at the NIH Bethesda campus is
installation shall meet the following requirements: paper-insulated lead-covered (PILC) cable,
compact-sector, 100% insulation, and shielded
1. Cable Specification:
with the lead sheath, which is grounded in
a. Cable Type: MV 105 each manhole. Splice PILC cable with only
PILC cable with similar physical and electrical
b. Conductor: Copper, single conductor characteristics.
c. Insulation: Ethylene-propylene rubber
(EPR) Rationale: This is to restrict splicing of existing
PILC cable with PILC cable only.
i. Voltage Rating: 15 kV
ii. Insulation Level: 133% insulation level 5. Cable Identification: Label cables in manholes
with embossed brass cable tags and brass
d. Strand screen: Extruded semiconducting
chains.
EPR meeting or exceeding the electrical
and physical requirements of ICEA S-68- 6. Cable Testing: Perform insulation test of cables
639, AEIC CS8, and UL 1072 with all splices and pothead terminations while
not connected to switchgear or any other equip-
e. Shielding: Copper tape, 5 mils thick, heli-
ment. Repair or replace cables if cable testing
cally applied with a 12.5% overlap
result does not meet specification requirements.
f. Cable Assembly: Three insulated, shielded
B. Conductors and Cable (600 V or less): General
conductors cabled together with a ground
requirements for building wires and cable rated 600 V
conductor
or less are as follows:
g. Cable Jacket: Sunlight-resistant PVC
1. Conductor Material: Copper conductor except
h. Cable Size: 350 KCmil or 500 KCmil. 500 for lightning protection systems. Lightning pro-
KCmil is preferred for new construction in tection systems (except for down conductors)
the NIH Bethesda campus. may utilize aluminum conductors.
exposed or concealed, conduits larger than 103 conduit routed inside or under the slab. Do not
mm (4 in.) and where exposed within 3 m (10 install conduit within a slab on-grade.
ft.) of the finished floor level. RGS conduit may
be substituted for schedule 40 PVC. 2. Support: Support all conduits with approved
devices independent of other systems and
3. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC): Connection equipment. Tie wire is not acceptable. Do not
to lighting fixture (whips). Conduit length is attach conduit to box covers except 16 mm (1/2
limited to 1.8 m (6 ft.) maximum and 457 mm in.) or smaller flexible conduit terminated on a
(1 ft. 6 in.) minimum. flush mounted box cover.
4. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC): 3. Transition: Conduit stubbed out of floors shall
Connection to vibrating equipment. Conduit transition to RGS raceway prior to the point
length is limited to 1.8 m (6 ft.) maximum and where the conduit is exposed. Provide RGS
457 mm (1 ft. 6 in.) minimum. elbow when elbows are terminated above slab.
5. Metal clad (MC) Cable: 4. Identification: Identify all service and feeder
conduits with machine made labels every 15.2
a. MC cables are acceptable for power (recep- m (50 ft.) indicating their use.
tacle, wiring devices, and lighting) branch
circuits in administrative and public spaces D. Conduit Installation (Underground): Conduit
only. installed underground shall comply with the following
requirements:
b. MC cabling is not allowed for use in labo-
ratories or ARFs. 1. Medium Voltage Applications: Conduits for
medium voltage applications shall be concrete
c. MC cabling is not allowed for use in encased.
mechanical, electrical, or telecommunica-
tions rooms. 2. Direct Buried Conduit: Direct buried conduit
is acceptable for electrical systems rated 600 V
d. Where allowed, MC cabling shall not be and below.
used for circuiting homeruns to panelboards.
Exception: Conduits shall be concrete encased
when buried beneath roadways.
Rationale: Limiting the use of MC cable is to allow
for future tracing of circuiting routes, alleviate Direct buried RGS conduit shall be coated with
inspection for required supporting of cables, and asphalt paint or PVC
allow for future addition of additional circuits to
same general area within existing conduits. 3. Cover: Install buried conduit at a minimum
762 mm (2 ft. 6 in.) below grade.
6. PVC Conduit: Installed underground. PVC 4. Marking: For underground systems wiring,
conduit shall be minimum type EB if con- install metallic foil-backed plastic cable
crete encased, or schedule 40 if direct buried. marking tape, 152 mm (6 in.) wide, at 305
Schedule 80 may be used per Section 10.4.1 for mm (1 ft.) below grade above the conduit run.
exterior low voltage (600 V or below) branch The plastic marking tape shall be red or yellow
circuit conduits. and read CAUTION: BURIED ELECTRIC
LINE.
C. Conduit Installation (within buildings): Conduit
installed within buildings shall comply with the follow-
ing requirements: Rationale: This is to protect conduit from
accidental digging.
1. Routing: Install all conduits parallel or perpen-
dicular to the building features except for the
Rationale: This is to facilitate future installation 3. SMR with Dividers: Normal power circuits and
and protect feeder from water damage. communication cabling are allowable in the
same SMR provided with dividers. SMR with
6. Existing Conduit: Prior to pulling cable into dividers is not acceptable for routing of emer-
any existing conduit, the conduit shall be gency circuits with normal circuits.
cleaned with a wire brush 13 mm (1/2 in.)
larger than the duct and rodded with a mandrel
8 mm (3/10 in.) smaller than the duct to test the Rationale: This is to provide greater reliability
integrity of the duct. of electrical service and preclude simultaneous
disruption of both normal and emergency
electrical service.
Rationale: This is to limit damage to cable
insulation from abrasion of dirt and debris. 4. Circuit Breaker: Either a 60 A, 3-phase, 4-wire
system with integral circuit breakers or indi-
E. Cable Pulling: Design raceway systems so that the vidual receptacle circuits fed from local branch
calculated cable pulling tensions and sidewall pressures circuit panelboards may be provided.
will not exceed the manufacturers recommendations.
Conduit runs within building shall not exceed more 5. Circuit Taps: When SMR with integral circuit
than 61 m (200 ft.) for straight pull. Reduce length by breakers is used, complete the taps in raceway
15.2 m (50 ft.) for each bend of 90. Total amount of using three-ganged, 20A single pole circuit
bends between pull points shall not exceed 270. breakers in a common circuit breaker housing.
F. Cable Tray: With NIH approval, dedicated cable tray 6. Receptacle: Install receptacles in SMR at a 610
may be used for communications wiring or for racking mm (2 ft.) on center unless otherwise indicated
medium voltage cabling. Neither power nor signal cables on contract drawings. Connect these recep-
are allowed in dedicated telecommunication cable trays. tacles to alternating circuits phase balanced
with no more than four receptacles per circuit.
G. Surface Metal Raceway (SMR): SMR installation
shall comply with the following requirements: 7. Specialty Equipment: Dedicated circuit for spe-
cialty equipment shall use separate device box
1. Metal Type and Dimension: SMR shall be and may utilize SMR circuiting.
metallic steel, stainless steel, or aluminum.
Non-metal surface raceway is not acceptable.
Table 10.5.2(B) Surface Metal Raceway Dimensions
The nominal dimensions for SMR are as given
in Table 10.5.2(B). Raceway Type Dimensions (Width x Depth)
70 mm 38 mm
Single channel
(2.75 in. 1.5 in.)
Rationale: This is to provide a redundant
equipment grounding path and restrict the use of 121 mm 44 mm
Two channel
non-metallic raceways as they are prone to (4.75 in. 1.75 in)
damage from physical abuse. 121 mm 89 mm
Two channel
(4.75 in. 3.5 in.)
A. Device Boxes: Boxes for interior electrical systems 9. Design Load: Design load for the general-pur-
shall be hot-dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron pose receptacles shall be 180 VA each; connect
and shall be compatible with the raceway system. maximum of six receptacles to a circuit.
B. Switches and Receptacles: General requirements for 10. Computer and Printer Outlets: Provide dedi-
switches and receptacles are as follows: cated circuits, not connected to any other types
of loads, for both computer and laser printer
1. Type: All wiring devices shall be minimum outlets. Limit four personal computers (PCs) to
specification grade. Wiring devices installed in any single 20 A circuit. Limit two laser printers
patient care areas shall be hospital grade. to any 20 A circuit. These circuits shall have
2. Toggle Switch: Toggle switches used to control dedicated neutral conductors. PC and laser
lighting shall be specification grade, rated for printer quantity restrictions shall also apply to
use in both 120 V and 277 V circuits, and rated wired modular furniture.
for a minimum of 20 A. 11. Outlets Required: Provide outlets in all spaces
in accordance with NEC, program require-
3. Duplex Receptacles: Duplex receptacles shall be
ments, and other requirements listed below.
rated for 20 A at 125 V, be polarized parallel-
blade type with ground, and have NEMA a. If no furniture plan is provided, provide a
5-20R configuration. minimum of one general purpose receptacle
per wall in offices, copy rooms, confer-
4. Tamperproof Receptacles: Tamperproof recep-
ence rooms, and similar spaces. Provide IG
tacles, where required, shall be NEMA 5-20R
receptacles in offices based on the program
safety type that operates with either a two or
direction. Provide additional outlets above
three-bladed plug.
counter for each 914 mm (3 ft.) (or fraction
5. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) thereof) of counter spaces.
Receptacles: Receptacles installed outdoors or
b. Computer Receptacle: Provide a computer
within 1.8 m (6 ft.) of sources of water shall
receptacle connected to a dedicated circuit
be GFCI type. Do not use GFCI receptacles
at the following locations:
to protect downstream receptacles except for
receptacles located in the same room. i. Enclosed Offices: Based on proposed
furniture layout, provide a double-
6. Bracket and Terminal: Receptacle mounting
duplex computer receptacle to serve
brackets shall be extra heavy and the terminals
suggested computer location.
shall be copper alloy, side wired.
ii. Open Office Workstations: Provide at
7. Receptacle Orientation: Install vertically
least one double-duplex receptacle at
mounted receptacles so that the ground prong
each location.
is in the up position for receptacles mounted
up to 1.5 m (5 ft.) above the finished floor. iii. Conference Rooms: Provide at least one
Horizontally orientated receptacles mounted wall receptacle and one floor recepta-
up to 1.5 m (5 ft.) above the finished floor shall cle. Locate a floor outlet centered under
the conference room table location.
c. Office Spaces: Provide at least four recep- These receptacles shall be on the same level
tacles per office. One of these receptacles and shall be on a circuit separate from the
is intended for housekeeping. Place house- circuit serving the equipment.
keeping receptacle on wall adjacent to the
entry door to the office space. 12. Plug Load Control: Occupancy or time-
schedule based control shall be considered
d. Open Office Workstations: Provide mini- for plug loads for office cubicles and private
mum two receptacles and additional recep- workstations.
tacles so that no point in any wall panel
space is more than 1.8 m (6 ft.) away from 13. Safety Showers: Light switches and receptacles
a receptacle. installed in close proximity to the safety
showers shall be provided with gasketed and
e. Conference/Training Rooms: Similar to the weatherproof covers. The receptacles shall be
office space. In addition, provide outlets for GFI type.
audio-visual equipment and power connec-
tion for motorized projections screens as 14. Plumbing Fixtures: For automatic flush valves,
well as motorized shades. faucet sensors, and paper towel dispenser in
restrooms, provide a 120 V, 20 A dedicated
f. Corridor: Provide 20 A receptacles on emergency circuit for each group of fixtures
dedicated circuits for custodial use along except for self-charging, battery-powered flush
the corridor wall so that any point on the valves and faucets required in the Building 10
corridor floor is no more than 7.6 m (25 complex on the NIH Bethesda campus.
ft.) from a custodial receptacle. Custodial
receptacles shall be on dedicated circuits 15. Design Documentation: Indicate NEMA con-
and not shared with any program space figuration for all receptacles on the drawings.
receptacles.
C. Wires (ARF Operating Room): Wires for animal 4. Provide dedicated emergency outlets along
research facility operating room circuits shall be mini- corridors in ARFs for connection of portable
mum #10 AWG with XHHW insulation. emergency equipment.
D. Alarm and Monitoring: Provide monitoring and G. Device Boxes: In animal research facilities, use cast
alarm notification in laboratories and ARFs via build- boxes with external hub and gasketed device cover
ing automation system (BAS) or standalone system. plates; provide 25 mm (1 in.) barrier of silicone caulking
Perform a cost analysis to justify the use of BAS or around the wire within the device box hub; and provide
stand alone system. The monitoring system shall have a continuous bead of silicone caulk around the device
the ability to generate reports without the use of propri- cover plate and the adjacent surface. If device boxes
etary software. are surface mounted on RGS conduit, all sides shall be
sealed to adjacent surfaces with a continuous bead of
E. Conduit Applications ARF: Conduit types in ARF silicone caulk. See Appendix L, Sealant Table.
shall comply with the following requirements:
H. Switches and Receptacles: Switches and receptacles
1. RGS: Exposed in ARFs and wash down areas installed in laboratories and ARFs shall comply with
2. EMT: Installed indoors in areas not subject to the following requirements:
physical damage when allowed by code 1. IG Receptacle: Provide IG receptacles in
3. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Wash laboratories and offices based on the program
down areas direction.
Contents:
10.6.0 Introduction
10.6.1 Harmonics
10.6.4 Grounding
alarm at the space served by the UPS and inter- 1. Service rated less than 2500 kVA: 5 ohms
face to building automation system (BAS) to
indicate alarmed condition. Alarm and moni- 2. Service rated 2500 kVA or larger: 1 ohm
toring shall include: Perform grounding electrode resistance testing
a. System On, system Bypassed, system in accordance with IEEE Standard 141.
Fault Note: Conduct soil resistivity testing early in the
b. Out of phase utility fault design because soil resistivity varies from site to
site.
c. Generator Run status
B. Domestic Water Service: Electrically connect elec-
trical service ground to the incoming domestic water
services provided the piping for water services is a con-
ducting material.
10.6.3 Transient Voltage C. Ground Ring: Ground ring installation shall comply
Surge Suppression with the following requirements:
A. Service Entrance: Provide ANSI/IEEE Standard
1. Transformer Pad, Main Electrical Room and
C62.41 compliant category C3 Transient Voltage Surge
Transformer Vault: Provide a ground ring of
Suppression (TVSS) protection at the service entrance
#4/0 AWG bare copper conductors, exother-
when a lightning protection system is required. Refer to
mically welded to copper-clad ground rods
Section 10.2.2.2.
(minimum 3 m [10 ft.] long and 19 mm [3/4
B. Branch Circuit Panel: If very sensitive electronic in.] diameter), around the transformer pad
equipment is present, the A/E shall consider providing (if installed) and the main electrical room or
a layered TVSS protection plan with category B3 TVSS indoor transformer vault.
protection at the downstream branch circuit panels.
2. Building: When lightning protection is required
C. Surge Protector: Provide properly sized surge protec- or provided, provide a ground grid of #4/0
tors for all medium voltage transformers, medium volt- AWG bare copper conductors, exothermically
age motors, medium voltage distribution cables, tele- welded to copper-clad ground rods (minimum
phone equipment, fire alarm control panel, and security 3 m [10 ft.] long and 19 mm [3/4 in.] diameter),
system monitoring panel. encircling the entire building.
D. Transformer Grounding: Ground each transformer electrical room ground bus. Ground conductors leading
enclosure with two #4/0 AWG conductors connected to to the ground ring shall be exothermically welded to the
the transformer ground ring at separate locations. Refer ground bus; all others shall be bolted.
to Section 10.2.2.2.
E. Ground Bus: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a Rationale: This is to create single ground system,
copper ground bus mounted 610 mm (2 ft.) above a fin- providing equipotential ground plane.
ished floor, on insulators 51 mm (2 in.) from the wall,
at the following locations to provide a common ground G. Metal Structure and Objects: Ground all struc-
point throughout the building: tural steel. All exposed metallic structures such as light
1. Main Electrical Room: One ground bus, 6 mm poles, aerial structures, electrical equipment protective
51 mm 2,438 mm (1/4 in. 2 in. 96 in.), steel bollards, and manhole/handhole covers shall be
at the long access wall connected to a grounding conductor and grounded to
separate grounding electrodes. Bond all metallic objects
2. Electrical Closets/Rooms: One ground bus, 6 crossing the ground grid to the ground grid.
mm 51 mm 610 mm (1/4 in. 2 in. 24
in.) at an accessible location. Connect this bus
to the main electrical room ground bus via a Rationale: This ensures that any accidental
continuous #4/0 bare copper express ground contact between a current carrying conductor and
riser. Provide a #4/0 bare copper ground the metal object would have the fault cleared by
conductor from each closet ground bus exo- the associated overcurrent protection device.
thermically welded to vertical express ground
riser, routed through stacked electrical rooms H. Substation Fence: Bond fence enclosures around or
to provide a continuous grounding connection adjacent to substations to ground ring with #4/0 AWG
between the closets. ground conductor at 15.2 m (50 ft.) intervals. Bond
gates and fence openings to grounding electrodes with
3. Electrical rooms dedicated for emergency flexible braid to provide grounding continuity.
power distribution equipment and generator
rooms: One ground bus, 6 mm 51 mm 610 I. Raised Floor: All raised floors must be grounded.
mm (1/4 in. 2 in. 24 in.) at an accessible Bond every fourth floor pedestal to the communication
location. Connect this bus to the main electri- room common ground bus.
cal room ground bus via #4/0 bare copper wire.
J. High Frequency Signal Reference Ground: A high
4. Main Communication Room: One ground bus, frequency signal reference ground for radiofrequency
6 mm 51 mm 610 mm (1/4 in. 2 in. 24 noise mitigation may be required. If this is required,
in.) at an accessible location. Connect this bus provide a 610 mm (2 ft.) on center copper signal refer-
to the main electric room ground bus with an ence grid. Bond the high frequency signal reference grid
insulated #2/0 copper ground wire. to the main electrical service ground.
3. Isolated Ground: Provide isolated ground (IG) Note: Low height buildings may be protected by a light-
sized the same as the phase conductors for ning protection system installed at an adjacent taller
equipment sensitive to external interferences building in accordance with the standards.
from other sources (coordinate equipment
requirements with an NIH technical repre- A. General Requirements: Lightning protection sys-
sentative). Connect the IG conductor from the tems installation requirements are as follows:
equipment to panelboard IG bus and do not 1. Standard: Lightning protection systems shall
bond panelboard IG bus to the panelboards meet the most restrictive requirements of NFPA
enclosure or the equipment ground bus. The 780, Lightning Protection Institute (LPI) publi-
IG conductor must be connected to the main cation LPI-175, and UL. New building light-
grounding system only at the separately derived ning protection systems shall receive a Master
power sources ground point. C Label from UL after the lightning protection
4. Protection: Do not locate ground conductors system is evaluated by UL and found acceptable
in traffic areas or in areas subject to damage. to UL.
Provide PVC conduit sleeves for ground con- 2. Ground Ring: When a lightning protection
ductor penetrations through the floor or walls. system is installed on a new building, provide
When ground leads through the floor become ground grid around the building. See Section
susceptible to damage due to layout changes, 10.6.4.
the PVC sleeve shall be cut off flush with the
floor. Place a steel C channel face down over
the penetration to form a protective bridge; bolt Rationale: A ground grid system is required
the C channel to the floor with the ground to provide a low ground potential for arcing
wire exiting one end. current flow from a lightning strike.
Contents:
10.7.0 Introduction
10.7.4 Lamps
B. Storage, Mechanical Equipment, or Rooms with 2. Emergency Lighting: Provide egress lighting
Exposed/Finished High Ceilings: Use LED, fluorescent, connected to an emergency generator and/or
or high-intensity discharge (HID) lamps to illuminate self-contained battery to meet the most strin-
the rooms, depending on the size of the area and height gent requirement among International Building
of the ceiling. When HID fixtures are utilized, use Code, NFPA, and local ordinances. The emer-
instant restrike ballasts for life-safety egress and emer- gency lighting level shall be a minimum of 10
gency illumination. lux (1 fc) measured at the floor level.
6. Other Rooms: Provide a minimum of one emer- Table 10.7.3 Lamp Types for Exterior Lighting
gency lighting fixture in the following rooms:
Area Light Source
a. Facility supervisors office Food service loading docks LED or HPS
Architectural lighting LED or MH
b. Mechanical equipment room
Landscape lighting LED, MH, or HPS
c. Receiving area
Loading docks LED or MH
d. Locker and public multi person toilet Parking garages LED or MH
rooms Site lighting, roadways,
LED
sidewalks
C. Street Lighting: Utilize LED lighting fixtures compat- 2. Lighting Fixture Spacing: 24.4 m (80 ft.) to
ible with the existing NIH campus lighting aesthetics. 30.5 m (100 ft.); reduce spacing in the elevated
security areas or areas that have had high
incidences of past accidents. Coordinate these
Rationale: This is to set uniform lighting locations with NIH police department.
standards throughout the site.
E. Architectural Lighting: Where exterior lighting is
used for vertical surface illumination, total architec-
Street lighting shall comply with following requirements:
tural lighting connected wattage shall be limited to 1.1
1. Lighting Level: Minimum average maintained W/m 2 (0.1 W/ft2) of exterior wall and maximum lamp
lighting level of 10 lux (1 fc) on the roadway sur- wattage to 175 W.
face. Uniformity ratio shall be 10:1 or lower.
F. Loading Dock: Exterior lighting in loading dock
2. Pole height: Limited to 7.6 m (25 ft.); mounting areas should utilize full cut-off fixtures with warm
arm limited to 1.8 m (6 ft.) color temperatures to reduce the attraction of flying
insects. Do not use wall-mounted lighting and do not
install lights directly above receiving or personnel 1. Circuit Breaker: The protective circuit break-
doors. Locate loading dock lighting fixtures (UL listed ers shall be single pole. The maximum circuit
for damp locations) away from doors and provide a 120 breaker size protecting site lighting circuits shall
V circuit for bug zapper fixtures. be 30 A.
H. Lighting Poles: Exterior lighting poles shall comply 2. Wiring: Site lighting circuits shall use minimum
with the following requirements: #6 AWG wire in minimum 41 mm (1-1/2 in.)
PVC conduit.
1. Pole Base: Street lighting poles shall have break-
away bases. Poles in parking lots or in areas
where automobile bumpers may come in contact Rationale: This is to allow future addition of
with the poles shall have 610 mm (2 ft.) con- lighting poles to an existing circuit.
crete bases, and have adjusting leveling nuts.
Mounting bolts and adjusting leveling nuts shall 3. In-line Fuses: Provide in-line fuses located within
have trim cover(s). the pole base or transformer housing.
A. LED Lamps: Lamps shall have color temperature average rated life of 16,000 to 24,000 depending on
3,500K, color rendering index (CRI) 80 (minimum), lamp wattage.
and average-rated life of minimum 50,000 hours.
F. Specialty Lamps: Lighting fixtures with specialty
B. Fluorescent Lamps: General specification require- lamps with less than 3,000 hours lamp life shall not
ments of the fluorescent lamps are as follows: be used.
1. T8 lamps rated between 25 W32 W for nomi- G. LED Driver: General requirements for LED drivers
nal length of 1.2 m (4 ft.); 80 CRI (minimum); are as follows:
3,500K color temperature, and minimum
rated life of 65,000 hours at 3 hours per start 1. Listing: Listed with UL; certified by lighting
used with program rapid start ballasts. 32 W Electronic Testing Laboratories (ETL)
lamps shall provide a minimum of 2,800 initial 2. Efficiency: Higher than 90%
lumens; 28 W lamps shall provide a minimum
of 2,450 initial lumens; 25 W lamps shall pro- 3. Power Factor: 0.90 or above
vide a minimum of 2,250 initial lumens.
4. Sound rating: Class A per UL 935-84
2. T8 lamps rated 15 W for nominal length of 610
mm (2 ft.); 80 CRI (minimum); 3,500K color 5. RFI/EMI: Comply with Federal
temperature, 1,090 minimum initial lumens, Communication Commission (FCC) Title 47
and minimum rated life of 65,000 hours at 3 CFR Part 18
hours per start used with program rapid start 6. Total Harmonic Distortion: Less than 10%
ballasts.
7. Transient Voltage Protection: Comply with
3. T5 lamps, 80 CRI (minimum), 3,500K color IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2
temperature; 26 W for nominal length of 1.17 m
(3 ft. 10 in.) with minimum 2,470 initial lumens 8. Dimming: Dimmable driver shall be capable
or 13 W for nominal length of 559 mm (1 ft. 10 of dimming light output to 10% of full light
in.) with minimum 1,140 initial lumens. output without producing visible flicker.
4. T5HO lamps, 80 CRI (minimum), 3,500K color 9. Warranty: Minimum five years
temperature; 54 W for nominal length of 1.17 m
(3 ft. 10 in.) with minimum 4,450 initial lumens H. Fluorescent Lamp Ballast: General requirements for
or 21 W for nominal length of 559 mm (1 ft. 10 fluorescent ballasts are as follows:
in.) with minimum 1,630 initial lumens. 1. Type: Solid state electronic, programmed rapid
5. Compact Fluorescent Lamps: Nominal tube start or step-dim ballast. Instant start bal-
diameter of 13 mm, CRI 82 (minimum), color lasts are acceptable for line voltage control
temperature 3,500K, and average rated life of with infrequent switching. Use programmed
10,000 hours. start ballasts in areas controlled by occupancy
sensor or with frequent switching.
6. U-type lamps are not allowed.
2. Listing: Listed with UL; certified by lighting
C. Halogen Infrared Lamps: Lamps shall have 1,150 ETL; labeled by Certified Ballast Manufacturer
initial lumens and average-rated life of 3,000 hours. Association (CBM)
D. Metal Halide Lamps: Lamps shall have color tem- 3. Thermal Rating: Class P; ballast temperature
perature 3,200K, CRI 65 (minimum) and average rated shall not exceed 25C (77F) over 40C (104F)
life of 9,000 to 15,000 depending on lamp wattage. ambient.
E. High-Pressure Sodium Lamps: Lamps shall have 4. Operating Frequency: 20 KHz or higher
color temperature 1,900K, CRI 22 (minimum), and
5. Minimum Ballast Factor: 0.85
7. Unswitched: Egress and supplemental emer- be given to uniform lighting in the vertical plane to
gency lighting for the following areas shall be accommodate vertically stacked cages or aquatics tanks
unswitched: in racks. Table 10.7.6 shows the minimum average light-
ing levels in various areas of an animal care facility.
a. Open offices and administrative areas
A. Animal Research Facility Lighting: General require-
b. Corridors ments of ARF lighting are as follows:
c. Locker and multi-person toilet rooms (one 1. Coordination: Coordinate animal research-
emergency fixture per room) related lighting issues such as photo-toxicity
d. Large electrical and mechanical rooms in housed animals to adjust lighting levels to
facilitate research needs.
Rationale: This is to allow emergency lighting to 2. Lighting Fixture Type: Provide UL listed, IP65
function as night lighting. rated, factory sealed and gasketed housings
that utilize door frames that seal to fixture
housing. Recessed or surface mounted fixtures
8. Tandem Wiring: Unless noted otherwise, a shall be coordinated with ceiling construction,
maximum of two fluorescent luminaires can independently supported from structure, with
be tandem wired. A single odd fixture shall be proper field caulking identified such that fixture
provided with required number of ballasts. remains serviceable.
B. Exterior Lighting Control: Utilize photocell control
in conjunction with programmable lighting control sys- Rationale: This is to prevent vermin harborage
tems (when provided) for all exterior lighting circuits. and transmission in/through lighting fixtures.
In addition, comply with the following requirements:
1. Photocell: Install the photoelectric cell facing 3. Control Coordination: Fluorescent ballast and
the north sky on the building where the exte- LED Driver types must be coordinated with
rior lighting circuit originates. Provide a photo- specified controls. Only electronic ballasts shall
cell bypass switch to energize the circuit during be utilized, and LED drivers compliant with
daylight for troubleshooting purposes. IEEE guidelines shall be specified to prevent
flicker.
2. Contactors: Contactors, if used, shall be
mechanically held. 4. Rooms with Hose-Down Capabilities: IP65
rated lighting fixtures must be installed in or
3. Hours of Operation: Exterior lighting shall illu- on gypsum board ceilings.
minate only during hours of darkness.
4. Motion Sensing: Provide motion sensing con- Rationale: This is to maintain integrity of lighting
trol to reduce lighting level by 80% when area fixtures in areas subject to pressurized hose direct
is unoccupied. water and chemical cleaning.
1. Power Source: All lighting fixtures (except Table 10.7.6 Minimum Average Lighting Levels
specific emergency lighting fixtures) are nor- (with Uniformity Ratio of 3:1 or Lower) of an
mally connected to normal power. Though not Animal Care Facility
required by the Association for Assessment Lighting Levels
Function/Space
and Accreditation of Laboratory Animal Care in Lux (fc)
(AAALAC) organizations accreditation, all 270810 (2575)
lighting fixtures may require emergency backup Animal facilities: multilevel @ 914 mm
at the discretion of animal program. Rodent holding (36 in.) AFF
2. Single Lamp Fixture: Provide an additional Non-human primate 540810 (5075)
single lamp lighting fixture controlled by a holding multilevel @ 914 mm
local switch for out-of-diurnal-cycle entry at the (36 in.) AFF
discretion of veterinary program. This fixture 540800 (5075) @ 1067
shall have a red (or possibly other color) sleeve Aquatic facilitiesa:
mm (42 in.) AFF
or filmed lens for the lamp at the discretion At tank
160270 (1525) @ 1067
of veterinary program. The actual user shall General illumination
mm (42 in.) AFF
provide information for sleeve or lens film color.
Non-human primate 270375 (2535) @ 1067
3. Large Animal and Non-human Primate ante rooms mm (42 in.) AFF
Holding Rooms: Animal facility surgery 3751075 (35100) @
rooms 1067 mm (42 in.) AFF
a. Light fixtures in non-human primate rooms
shall be provide with tool-less entry Animal facility surgery
2200 (200) @ 914 mm
table area (task area
(36 in.) AFF
only)
Rationale: Avoids the risk of maintenance tools
Procedure, necropsy, 1075 (100) @ 914 mm
being accessed by the non-human primates.
and treatment rooms (36 in.) AFF
430540 (4050) @ 1067
b. The diurnal on cycle shall provide an Cage wash areas
mm (42 in.) AFF
illumination level of 540 lux (50 fc), while
Feed and bedding areas,
operating one or two lamps per fixture. 160270 (1525) @ 914
autoclave, and cage
mm (36 in.) AFF
4. Small Animal and Rodent Holding Rooms: wash service areas
Receiving/decontamina- 110215 (1020) @ 1067
a. Coordinate light fixture placement with
tion area mm (42 in.) AFF
ventilated rack connections, rack locations,
and automatic watering systems in order to Animal facility 160270 (1525) @ 1067
assure service access and mitigate shadows. corridors mm (42 in.) AFF
Medical pathologic 55110 (510) @ 1067
b. The diurnal on cycle shall provide an waste holding mm (42 in.) AFF
illumination level of 270 lux (25 fc), while
Insectaries: With envi- 430540 (4050) @ 1067
operating one or two lamps per fixture.
ronmental chambers mm (42 in.) AFF
c. Wherever possible, locate light fixtures to Without environmental 270810 (2575) @ 914
be accessible from service aisles between chambersb mm (36 in.) AFF
cages.
a
Coordinate lighting level with research program for
5. Flexibility: Lighting fixtures and control for the different aquatic species
animal holding room that requires flexibility to b
Possible dimming to simulate dusk and dawn cycles.
handle either species shall follow the require-
ments of the large animal holding room and
utilize dimmable fixtures and dimming controls.
6. Fixture Ballast and Operation: Provide one 3. Battery Backup: The control system shall
lighting fixture with self-testing emergency bat- be provided with necessary integral battery
tery ballast (non-audible, visual indication only) backup.
for each large animal and non-human primate
holding room. If the animal area lighting is 4. Monitoring, Reporting and Alarming: Though
provided with an emergency power source, not required by AAALAC accreditation, all
this shall span the allowable time delay for the animal holding rooms may require monitoring,
transfer from normal to emergency power for reporting and alarming on lighting cycle func-
personnel safety. This ballast shall minimally tion within each room at the discretion of the
operate a single lamp (not to exceed two lamps) animal program. Reporting requirements may
per single fixture and shall operate under the include proofing of diurnal cycle and illumina-
same diurnal controls as normal power opera- tion levels.
tion, i.e., the ballasts shall illuminate lamp(s) 5. Programmable Diurnal Cycle: Provide a
on during the programmed on diurnal cycle programmable diurnal lighting cycle, which
only, and not illuminate any lamps if a power typically provides 12 hours on cycle and 12
outage occurs during the programmed off hours off cycle, allowing adjustment of either
cycle. When either emergency power is avail- cycle duration or providing for multiple cycles
able, or normal power is restored, the emer- in a single day at user discretion.
gency battery ballasts shall revert back to their
standby operation. The same shall apply for 6. Dimming Control: Provide dimming control to
small animal and rodents, when required for simulate dusk and dawn circadian cycles at the
species room flexibility, but shall be determined discretion of the animal program.
on a per project basis as it is not typically
required. 7. Diurnal Off Cycle: The diurnal off cycle
shall require all lamps be extinguished.
Rationale: This is to provide personnel safety in 8. Caretaker Cycle: Provide one local override
the handling of large animals. switch outside each holding room door to turn
on the lamp(s) associated with the on cycle,
plus remaining fixture lamps to achieve an 810
C. Animal Holding Area Lighting Control: Lighting lux (75 fc) level within each room during the
control system in animal holding areas shall comply caretaker cycle.
with the following requirements:
9. Lighting Operation: For both lighting opera-
1. Lighting Control Systems: Lighting control tion scenarios, an override switch shall circum-
systems shall be programmable, using either the vent the programmable lighting panel controls
BAS or a stand-alone system (which may also diurnal cycling for a user adjustable period
be used for flushing operation of the animal of between 060 minutes, and then have the
watering system), depending on functional programmable lighting control revert back to
needs and which control method is most cost- its normal diurnal cycle as previously pro-
effective. If dimming, monitoring, and report- grammed. A second manual switch operation is
ing of light levels are not required, consider not required to go back to the normal diurnal
using individual astronomical timers as a cost- cycle operation. A second manual operation
saving method for lighting control within small shall not change or increase the timed override
facilities. until after the override cycle has timed out, but
2. User Interface: Provide a terminal for user it is acceptable for the second manual override
control and adjustment of lighting cycles within switch operation to directly force the program-
the animal research supervisors office, or at mable lighting controller to go back to the
another location within the animal research normal diurnal cycle operation immediately, as
holding area as directed by the user. long as this is a standard operational feature.
D. Lighting and Control for Other Areas: Other room 6. Animal Surgery Rooms: All lighting fixtures
types located within an animal research facility shall shall be UL listed with an IP65 rating, with 50%
be provided with the following functional lighting of the fixtures on normal power and the remain-
requirements: ing fixtures on emergency power with single
pole toggle switches. At least one fixture on both
1. Autoclave and Cage Wash Service Areas: normal and emergency power shall be provided
Provide UL listed fixture rated for damp loca- with self-testing emergency battery ballast (non-
tion, controlled by occupancy sensor. Lighting audible, visual indication only). Task and exam
fixtures provided within capture hoods shall lights shall be on emergency power.
have a minimum IP63 rating
7. Storage Room: All lighting fixtures in sterile
a. Cage Wash Areas (Except for Service storage rooms shall be fully sealed and gasketed
Areas): All lighting fixtures located within with a UL listing for wet locations. All storage
dirty side of the cage wash areas shall be room lights shall be fed from normal power
UL listed for wet location, with a minimum and controlled by occupancy or vacancy sensor
of one fixture on emergency power per area switches.
operated as an unswitched night light, and
any others on normal power with single 8. Locker and Toilet Rooms: All lighting fixtures
pole switching or occupancy sensor control. shall be UL listed for damp locations, with at
least one fixture on emergency power operated
2. Quarantine Rooms: Same requirements listed as an unswitched night light, and any others on
under large animals, non-human primates, normal power with single pole or occupancy
small animals, and rodents sensor switching control. Any shower lighting
3. Cubicle Holding Rooms: These rooms are fixtures shall be UL wet, on single pole switch-
small closet-like rooms accessed by large slid- ing control.
ing doors. The rooms have the same diurnal 9. Offices and Administration Areas (Not
lighting requirements as other holding rooms; Including Facility Supervisors Office): All
caretaker illumination levels can be met by the lighting fixtures shall be UL listed for damp
lights within the cubicle when the large folding locations, on normal power controlled by
doors are opened. Glass doors will typically occupancy or vacancy sensor switching. Code
require red film to mitigate illumination con- required emergency egress lighting, in the
tribution from lights outside cubicle. Caretaker common egress path of travel, may remain
illumination requirements (and control require- unswitched and operate as a night light.
ments) apply to the common room that is used
to access the cubicles. 10. Facility Supervisors Office: All lighting fixtures
shall be UL listed for damp locations, with at
4. Non-human Primate Holding Ante-rooms: All least one fixture on emergency power provided
lighting fixtures shall be IP65 rated and con- with a UL 924 listed transfer device to control
trolled by occupancy sensor with at least one emergency fixture with normal room lighting
emergency fixture normally controlled by the that is controlled by a vacancy sensing switch.
occupancy sensor
11. Feed and Bedding: All lighting fixtures shall
5. ABSL-2 Procedure, Necropsy, and Treatment be UL listed with an IP65 rating, controlled by
Rooms: All lighting fixtures shall be IP65 rated vacancy sensing switches.
with at least one fixture either provided with
an integral switched self-testing/self-diagnostic 12. Receiving/Decontamination Area: All lighting
battery or on emergency power operated as an fixtures shall be UL listed with an IP65 rating.
un-switched night light. Control lights with a Confirm decontamination protocols with facil-
local switch or local dimming switch, do not ity operations and provide stainless steel hous-
use occupancy sensors. ings where necessary. Provide one fixture on
Contents:
10.8.0 Introduction
10.8.4 Lighting
Rationale: This is to increase the reliability of the 6. Reliability: Evaluate and minimize single points
electrical services. of failure for all systems including power sup-
plies, electrical distribution, grounding, equip-
Consider the following criteria when designing electri- ment, and controls for all projects. Where a
cal service. single point of failure is present, the A/E shall
document the condition and forward the find-
1. Customer Owned Service Equipment: The cus- ing for NIH review.
tomer rather than the utility company should
own the on-site electrical distribution includ-
ing medium voltage (MV)/low voltage (LV) Rationale: This is to preclude outage due to a
transformers. single point of failure.
1. Heating and cooling units provided for critical g. Security, CCTV, and access control systems
support function h. Mechanical equipment as required by the
2. Receptacles serving selected equipment identi- program
fied as critical by the program D. Emergency Generator: Provide a local generator
3. General lighting in laboratories as specified in dedicated to the facility to provide emergency/standby
Section 10.8.4. power; however, a remote generator farm (with redun-
dant feeders) may also be acceptable.
4. Critical control and containment equipment
compressed air systems Consider providing 100% generator backup for facili-
ties where the loads mandated to be connected to a gen-
As determined per program basis, recommend connect- erator comprise the majority of the load of the facility.
ing the following loads to the standby electrical system: Consider loss of redundancy in emergency operation of
the facilities with 100% generator backup and update
1. Freezers/refrigerators operational procedure during emergency operation.
2. Sterilizers E. Load Bank: Provide a load bank (including a con-
3. Cage wash equipment for remote locations, nection point suitable for use for a portable generator)
where there are no other options available to for periodic testing of the generator.
accommodate an extended outage
B. Submission and Mock-up: Penetrations into the sealing requirements as that of the power wiring.
containment barrier (including mounting of electrical Cable types shall be determined by NIH Information
boxes) shall be detailed in the construction documents Technology and manufacturers recommendations for
and shall require mock-ups to be constructed and tested voice/data wiring and by respective system manufactur-
prior to installation. Penetration details for equipment ers for other systems. The A/E shall coordinate exact
shall be coordinated with the equipment manufacturer. requirements for security wiring with the Division of
Physical Security Management (DPSM) for projects
C. Sealing Requirements: Provide silicon-based caulk within NIH, Bethesda campus.
in all areas. See Appendix L, Sealant Table.
D. Boxes for All Systems: General requirements of
device boxes are as follows:
2. Seal-off: Provide seal-off fittings when conduits 2. Cast Boxes: Provide cast boxes with external
exit defined BSL-3/ABSL-3 perimeter. mounting provisions, external hub, and gas-
keted device cover plates.
3. SMR: Use of surface metal raceway systems
(SMRs) is not allowed in BSL-3/ABSL-3 areas. 3. Sealing: Provide a 25 mm (1 in.) barrier of
silicone caulk around the wire within a device
box hub. Provide a continuous bead of caulk
Rationale: This is to provide a gas-tight electrical between the device box and the adjacent
distribution system to facilitate decontamination, surface. Provide a continuous bead of caulk
and prevent vermin harboring and passage around the device cover plate and the adjacent
through the electrical raceway system. Surface surface.
metal raceway is not available with manufactured
approved gasketing to eliminate vermin harborage
and transmission. Rationale: This is to provide for a gas-tight
electrical installation for decontamination, and to
prevent vermin harboring and passage through the
B. Power Wiring: Insulation shall be compatible with electrical raceway system.
sealing compound (sealing compound non-deleterious
to insulation), using THW, THWN, THHN/THWN,
or XHHW.
1. Listing: Fixtures shall be UL listed with a mini- 5. Layout: Install fixtures in continuous rows and
mum IP65 rating. aligned with edge of laboratory bench in labo-
ratories and laboratory support areas. Install
lighting fixtures in a symmetrical pattern.
Rationale: This is required for strict moisture and Fixtures mounted in continuous rows shall have
vermin control required within the space. flush ends that can be field caulked; fixtures
not mounted in continuous rows should have a
2. Decontamination: Lighting fixtures shall allow minimum of 152 mm (6 in.) between fixtures to
full decontamination with ease of effort, and allow for disinfection.
permit easy re-lamping and access to ballasts.
6. Imaging Laboratory: In specific imaging
3. Type: Lighting fixtures shall be provided with modalities, such as MRI, incandescent or LED
stainless steel housings, glass or heavy duty fixtures and conduit shall be made of non-
acrylic prismatic lens, and stainless steel door ferrous materials. Utilize EMI filters and DC
with tool-less fasteners or captive, flush, stain- dimming methods that are compatible with
less steel screws. imaging equipment. All special requirements
shall be coordinated with the manufacturer of
equipment in each modality.
Rationale: This is to allow the cleaning of the
lighting fixture and decontamination by gaseous C. Emergency Lighting: Emergency lighting installa-
means. tion shall comply with the following requirements:
Contents:
11.1.0 Introduction
11.1.2.1 Recommendations
11.1.2 Renovation
and Rehabilitation
The renovation and rehabilitation of existing NIH facil-
ities does not always allow for the adoption of the latest
industry standards. Sometimes, the existing telecom-
munication systems are antiquated or inadequate for
the current need; the newly planned function may be
incompatible with the original building design criteria.
Contents:
11.2.0 Introduction
1. The transition point between the informa- 1. 610 mm (2 ft.) separation between unshielded
tion technology backbone and the horizontal power lines or electrical equipment in proxim-
pathways ity to open or non-metal pathways
2. The horizontal distribution center for the TEL/ 2. 305 mm (1 ft.) separation between unshielded
LAN cabling (it is where the cable tray and power lines or electrical equipment in proxim-
feeder conduits terminate) ity to a grounded metal conduit pathway
3. The LAN patch panels, TEL cross-connect 3. 152 mm (6 in.) separation between power
fields, and TEL and LAN electronic equipment lines enclosed in a grounded metal conduit (or
equivalent shielding) in proximity to a ground
4. The telecommunications and optical fiber cable
metal pathway
riser and terminations
4. 1.2 m (4 ft.) separation between electrical
5. Associated local uninterruptible power supply
motors and transformers
(UPS) systems
4. All TEL/LAN equipment shall be grounded to 1. Power feeding the rack shall originate from the
the bus bar in the same closet. TEL/LAN closet panel.
B. Sprinkler Head: If sprinkler heads are required, Table 11.2.1.10 Information Required
sprinklers shall have guards and must not be installed for Fire Prevention Labels
directly over any racks or equipment, wherever possible. Date of installation Fire rating
C. Fire Alarm Notification: An audio/visual building NIH/CIT project
Product manufacturer
fire alarm shall be installed in the TEL/LAN closet. The contract number
audio/visual combination device shall match the exist- UL listed
Size of opening
ing fire detection system. Comply with requirements of product material
Chapter 9. CIT help desk number On-site installer
D. Fire Extinguisher: Fire extinguishers shall meet NIH = National Institutes of Health; CIT = Center for
NFPA 10 in accordance with Chapter 9. Information Technology
E. Barrier Penetrations:
Contents:
11.3.0 Introduction
2. Work area locations of a CAT5E voice and B. Fire Stopping: All fire stopping systems shall meet
CAT7 data solution shall be sized as a 32 mm the UL requirements for the specific type of wall con-
(1-1/4 in.) EMT conduit to each location. struction and penetration.
Contents:
11.4.0 Introduction
11.4.2.1 Manholes
11.4.2.2 Accessories
D. Cover: Duct banks shall be placed at a minimum 3. Pulling Eyes in Walls: Eyebolt with reinforcing-
depth of 914 mm (3 ft.) to the top duct. bar fastening insert, 51 mm (2 in.) diameter
eye, and 25 mm 102 mm (1 in. 4 in.) bolt;
E. Spacer: Provide with rigid PVC spacers selected
working load embedded in 152 mm (6 in.), 27.6
to maintain minimum duct spacing and concrete
MPa (4,000 psi) concrete, and 58 kN (13,000
cover depths indicated, while supporting ducts during
pound force [lbf]) minimum tension
concreting.
4. Pulling and Lifting Irons in Floor: 25 mm (1
F. Bends: Factory produced communications sweeps
in.) diameter, hot-dip galvanized, bent steel
shall be used in lieu of 90 bends. There shall be no
rod, stress relieved after forming, and fastened
more than two 90 bends in any duct bank run.
to reinforced rod; exposed triangular open-
ing. Ultimate yield strength shall be 180 kN
(40,000 lbf) shear and 270 kN (60,000 lbf)
tension.
11.4.2 Underground 5. Bolting Inserts for Cable Stanchions: Flared,
Concrete Utility Structures threaded inserts of non-corrosive, chemical-
resistant, non-conductive thermoplastic mate-
rial; 13 mm inner diameter x 70 mm deep (1/2
11.4.2.1 Manholes
in. inner diameter x 2-3/4 in. deep), flared to 32
A. General: Manholes shall be precast units com- mm (1-1/4 in.) minimum at base. Tested ulti-
prised of interlocking, mating sections, complete with mate pullout strength shall be 53 kN (12,000
accessory items, hardware, and features as indicated. lbf) minimum.
Contents:
11.5.0 Introduction
11.5.1 Audiovisual
11.5.1.1 Closets
11.5.1.2 Cabling
11.5.1.3 Conduit
Contents:
11.6.0 Introduction
11.6.1 Antenna
11.6.1.6 Wide Area Services Equipment (Cellular/PCS, Two-Way, First Responder, and Paging)
A. Coverage: The distributed antenna system coverage C. Modifications: In the event that the specific model
designs shall be based on the assumption that each WAS of 802.11 access point selected by NIH cannot pro-
provider shall provide: vide either external antenna port access or the mini-
mum signal strengths mentioned above, the distributed
1. RF connectivity at each connection port on
antenna system design shall be modified to accomplish
every wireless portal, at a signal level of +28
the NIH requirements.
dBm per RF channel.
1. Provide an electrical metallic tubing (EMT) B. Cable TV Outlets: Cable outlets shall adhere to the
conduit pathway(s) back to a closet or closest requirement of Section 11.3.3, Horizontal Pathways, for
cable management system. cabling to be provided by the local cable TV company.
Contents:
11.7.0 Introduction
c. J Hooks which are hung from independent c. Medeco Security Lock (when applicable)
ceiling mounted tie wires
d. Three keys to hard locks will be made and
d. J Hooks on the side of a Cable given to DPSM, Division of Police and the
Management Tray with Yellow and Blue NIH Lock Smith.
designation strips
2. The DPSM requires certain key aspects of pre 7. All security conduit installed will be labeled
installation work to be performed such as: yellow and blue with the option of:
a. Right-of-way designation and Route Design a. Permitted color spray paint around the
conduit
b. Cabling and Splicing Hardware
b. Color Tape around the conduit
c. Grounding (earthing), bonding and electri-
cal protection systems c. Color Band Glued around the conduit
d. Cable and Connector Types 8. All security conduits will be labeled every 7.6
m (25 ft.) starting from the beginning Junction
e. Cabling Topologies, Pathways and Spaces boxes (JB) to the end location.
f. Bonding, Grounding (earthing) and 9. Security yellow and blue definition will be 13
Electrical Protection mm (1/2 in.) in width and space side by side
g. Maintenance and Restoration covering around the conduit.
h. Media Selection and Special Design 10. All Security Junction Boxes (JB) where only
Considerations security conduit is joined shall be labeled with
12 x 12, 14 x 14, 18 x 18 (JB):
D. Labeling:
a. Yellow and Blue definition strips on the
1. All Security Free Wiring shall be labeled with center of the (JB)
the following:
b. Label with point of contact (POC) phone
a. J Hooks, cable/wire bundling will be number
labeled with Yellow and Blue definition
strips c. If the cable tray in which the J Hook is to
be fastened has been installed by a gov-
2. Security wiring in cable tray shall be labeled ernment entity other than the DPSM (i.e.,
with Yellow and Blue definition strips, includ- CIT, etc.) the contractor must first receive
ing J Hooks which are hung from independent approval from that government entities
ceiling mounted tie wires and J Hooks on the representative before installation of hard-
side of a Cable Management Tray with Security ware. If installation of hardware is denied,
Designation Strips (Yellow and Blue) contractor must install independent ceiling
mounted tie wire hardware.
3. All cables shall be marked in common at
both ends using a permanent method such as 11. When these standards conflict with other
self-laminating write-on cable marking tape. specified requirements, the most restrictive
Labeling shall agree with record drawings. requirement shall govern. Any exceptions to
Labels shall be visible and legible. requirements must be approved by the Director
of DPSM.
4. All terminals shall be permanently marked and
shall agree with record drawings.
1. In general, the area shall be designed in accor- f. Main telephone service, telephone branch
dance with the Level of Protection (LOP) distribution panels
requirements of the Facility Security Level
(FSL), as determined by the Interagency g. LAN servers and distribution panels
Security Committee (ISC) Standards by the h. Security systems panels
Director of DPSM.
i. Main control valves, fire pumps
2. Access to all sensitive areas shall be controlled
with an approved electronic physical access j. Filters and air purification equipment,
control system. In addition, CCTV coverage HVAC systems
and associated systems may be required. For
specific physical security requirements contact k. Lactation rooms
the PO to coordinate with DPSM, see Section l. Lobbies
1.13. Building systems include spaces housing
the following: F. DPSM CCTV Cameras Systems: CCTV camera sys-
tems shall only be installed with the approval of DPSM,
a. Main electrical switchgear and panels see Section 1.13.
b. Electrical branch distribution panels G. Renovation: Coordinate with DPSM prior to remov-
c. Transformers and UPS ing any physical security systems or hardware, see
Section 1.13.
d. Transient suppression equipment
Exception: The requirements of this section shall not Prior to issuance of an occupancy certificate, a regis-
apply to areas within an individual dwelling unit. tered design professional must certify that the building
achieves the required level of radio coverage as estab-
Section 3110.2 Where Required. Every floor area in a lished by DTS. This certificate must be presented to the
building or structures which cannot achieve the required building official upon request and must be presented in
level of radio coverage as established by Montgomery the form established herein.
County Department of Technology Services (DTS) shall
be provided with in-building signal amplification system. Please note it is building owners responsibility to hire a
professional consultant to evaluate and test the required
Section 3110.3 Inspection and Testing. Radio coverage level of coverage in the building and to design and install
and in-building signal amplification systems must be (if required) the in-building signal amplification system.
tested, and inspected by approved individuals. The results
of the testing and inspection shall be certified to the code
official prior to issuance of an occupancy permit. Questions:
For questions regarding in-building signal amplification
system standard or signal coverage you may contact
Required Level of Signal Coverage
Department of Technology Services via phone at 240-
as Established by DTS
777-5203 or by e-mail at BDAStandardQuestions@
Signal measurement is required to be -95 dBm or montgomerycountymd.gov.
above at a given point;
Project Address:______________________________________________________________________________________
I have tested the building for radio coverage level(s) in accordance with the Montgomery County Department of
Technology Services (DTS) standard. To the best of my information, knowledge and belief, the radio coverage levels
for this project is in accordance with the specifications and is in compliance with DTS standards and regulations.
Respectfully submitted,
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Signature of Design Professional Engineer of Record Date
____________________________________________________________________________________________________
Seal
Contents
12.1.2 Centrally Distributed High Purity Water 12.1.7.1 Distilled Water Systems
12.1.3 Point of Use Polisher and Complete 12.1.8 Special Provisions for Microbial
Point of Use Production Systems Control and Sanitization
12.1.4 Purified Water for Special Applications 12.1.9 Quality Control and Quality Assurance
controller (PLC) with integrated controls or by a local fluoropolymer diaphragm isolators (e.g., for pressure
central PLC with interconnection to local component and level transmitters), sanitary wells, and gauge guards
PLCs. Set point changes shall be keyed by individual are required after the RO membrane. Fill fluids shall be
user or supervisory passcode, and programs shall allow FDA approved. Gauges shall be inert liquid filled.
for at least ten distinct passcodes changeable only by an
on-site administrator. H. TOC Monitors: TOC monitors shall be online type
for applications requiring less than 50 ppb and may be
F. Sampling Valves: Sampling valves are required to online or offline for other applications. The A/E shall
monitor component and system performance and to specify monitors with capability for the types of preva-
validate major process instrumentation. Sampling valves lent organic contamination in the site water supply and
shall be selected and configured to preclude dead-legs, for use compatible with the water quality at the point
be accessible, and located in a clean space away from of installation; of sufficient quality, accuracy, and low
interferences. Sampling valves shall have a discharge port maintenance balance to capital cost. Offline TOC
small enough to achieve a laminar flow stream with a monitoring is subject to conformance with the system
velocity of at least .305 m/s (1 ft./s) at a flow rate of 1 lpm design configuration to reliably assure low TOC, and
(0.25 gpm). Downstream of the purified water produc- for applications where TOC and microbial control are
tion, sampling valves shall be sanitary type stainless steel not critical parameters for the application (e.g., some
with mid-stream collection probe and sanitary tri-clamp scale control applications), subject to prior approval of
connection, engineered for high purity sampling. High ORF. A TOC monitor shall be provided on the main
purity needle type sampling valves may be used. Ball return. A sanitary sample port shall be provided at the
valves and diaphragm type are unacceptable. A sanitary- TOC sensor location.
type sample valve shall also be provided at the following
locations:
Rationale: TOC is a significant factor to water
1. Supply Main: Common supply main (immedi- quality, representing broad classes of contaminants
ately downstream of all treatment components that can introduce research variables, influence
including filters and ultraviolet (UV) light genera- microbial and particle control, system reliability
tors) within the same room where the production and operating costs.
system is located and prior to any use outlets.
2. Return Main: Common main returning from the I. Resistivity Meter: Each system shall include an
system, after the last use point, located within online resistivity meter provided at least on the supply
the room housing the production system, but main leaving the system and the main return.
prior to passing through any filters, UV, storage J. Additional Required Instrumentation: Other
tank, or other treatment component. required automatic instrumentation includes return
loop flow, pressure, and temperature (upstream of the
Rationale: These provisions facilitate accuracy of back pressure regulator for each return loop), individual
data for offline validation and troubleshooting pump status monitoring, as well as individual compo-
without inducing system contamination. nent instrumentation described in this section.
W. Drain Air Gap: All drains shall be provided with a provisions as appropriate to the worst case incoming
plumbing code defined fixed air gap. Common drain supply conditions, ion exchange type water softening
manifolds serving multiple tanks or other components for scale control, activated carbon media beds in series,
shall be arranged to prevent backflow (including from two-pass RO, purified water storage tank, UV for dis-
one tank or system component into another), and any infection and/or organics oxidation, final 0.1 m or 20
check valves used for that purpose shall be located on nm hydrophilic microfiltration. Continuous recircula-
the discharge side of individual equipment drain valves tion with avoidance of dead-legs to each use point and
to prevent fouling or microbial contamination. arranged for continuity of supply at required flow and
velocity to each laboratory with minimum flow rate
X. Bypasses: Where a bypass is provided around any maintained regardless of user consumption. Membrane
component or where stagnancy could occur, such degasification shall be provided as required between the
bypass shall be configured to avoid dead-legs and be RO passes or after RO as appropriate, especially where
fully drainable when not in use. high alkalinity waters are present and for large systems.
Electrodeionization (EDI) is not normally required,
but shall additionally be provided where the minimum
required water resistivity cannot be obtained after
12.1.2 Centrally Distributed double pass RO and membrane degasification. Blending
or adjustment shall be provided to control conductiv-
High Purity Water ity with EDI within required limits. The system shall
A. Description: For most laboratory applications, a be provided with monitoring to ensure the minimum
centrally distributed purified feedwater arrangement water quality requirements will be maintained, and a
with point of use polishers shall be utilized. This shall suitable routine microbial control approach is required.
consist of a centrally produced and distributed purified EDI shall not substitute for two-pass RO.
water supply dispensed to sink taps, select equipment,
and to point of use polishers as required to achieve final
Rationale: This approach helps ensure consistent,
ultra-high purity (UHP) water for analytical purposes.
reliable, low maintenance systems that provide
B. Small System Exemption: The provision of point of high-quality feedwater suitable for most
use production and treatment systems (in lieu of cen- applications and compatibility with typical
tral purified feedwater systems), may be provided for scientific equipment. This allows individual
small systems encompassing a total of not to exceed well-selected polishers to produce required
approximately 2030 outlets with program approval. UHP analytical water qualities cost-effectively
Such point of use treatment systems shall be capable as appropriate to individual applications with
of delivering both purified RO and ultrapure waters as control of all contaminant classes.
required, except that well-designed point of use stills
may be utilized where acceptable to the program. Such D. Water Quality: Laboratory feedwater systems serv-
systems shall be limited to application at the point of ing polishers and purified water taps at sinks and other
use or point of dispense and not piped to other areas. lab uses shall comply with the requirements of Table
Arrangements relying upon dispense and storage of 12.1.1. Alert levels and action limits indicated are infor-
purified water in containers and transport to individual mational for the designer and recommended for mainte-
labs are unacceptable. Lab planning and utilities for nance of the purified water systems. TOC and resistivity
such spaces shall ensure sufficient utility and spatial alarms shall activate at alert levels as indicated.
provisions for these types of treatment systems at the
point of use.
Rationale: Water quality requirements are driven
C. System Configuration Overview: Central high by scientific need at the point of use, limitations
purity water systems supplying purified water/feedwa- of polishing equipment, and parameters to
ter to laboratories shall be configured to include a direct reliably maintain water quality without excessive
source potable water supply with point of produc- maintenance/disruptions. Users expect delivered
tion backflow protection, particle and fouling control
water quality to be pure, inert, chemically and technically inadequate or where resistivity must be
microbially safe. The required parameters identify restored. Deionizers can leak TOCs, shed
the limits for significant contaminant concerns. particles, induce microbial issues and are not
Resistivity limits reflect a cost-effective baseline cost-effective to operate. Organic scavenging
and program suitability and compatibility with beds may not address broad contaminant classes,
limits for typical lab equipment. TOC values and can induce contamination and additional
are limited to control the entire class of organic operating costs.
contaminants and to limit available nutrients for
microbes. Failure to control bacteria can result G. Loop Return Polishing Restriction: System water
in system contamination (including particles, shall be circulated back through the tank, UV, and
decomposition byproducts, algae, and ionic effects final particulate filter without additional polish-
from CO2), ultimately affecting end use water ing. Oxidizing UV may be used to address any trace
quality. There can be interrelationships between TOC accumulated from the distribution loop. Where
failure to control one contaminant class and additional loop polishing is justified, the acceptable
presence of other contaminants. Production and approach is to reclaim and reprocess through the
maintenance of central UHP water is not typically second pass RO (with recovery of reject back to the
cost-effective to maintain. Use of high resistivity first pass).
water may void some lab equipment warranties.
B. Planning and Arrangement: Equipment locations to the polisher to permit proper fit-out without cutting
shall be coordinated with the program management. A into the central system.
sink or other approved drainage provision is required
near the equipment to receive drainage. Central puri-
fied feedwater shall be piped to a dedicated purified Rationale: The stagnant condition of water
water dispense tap at the designated lab sink(s), and to supplies to polishers can lead to contamination
polisher(s). Where point of use production systems are in upstream supplies. PFA tubing is required to
utilized, water may be dispensed directly from the unit minimize organics leaching out of long-term
without a sink tap where such units include provisions stagnant sections, which can compromise
for both lower grade (typically ASTM D1193 type 2 or upstream systems. Positioning a zero-static valve
type 3) and higher grade UHP water or directly from a at the connection minimizes this issue with
point of use still. Placement of equipment and dispense current available equipment and allows for system
units shall not interfere with other lab requirements sanitization to occur in some cases without
(e.g., eyewashes, faucet handles, drying racks, etc.). disconnecting individual polishers.
C. Equipment Drains/Air Gap: Drains shall spill above E. Water Supply Connections, POU Production
the sink or appropriate indirect waste receptor with a Systems: The water supply for point of use production
configuration to maintain a fixed air gap (e.g., fastened systems in typical lab applications shall be from the
stainless steel tube spilling over the sink) or utilization buildings lab cold water supply. Point of use backflow
of a manufactured air gap fitting. protection is not required unless supplied from potable
D. Water Supply Connections, POU Polishers: The water or a backflow hazard specifically exists. Avoid
supply and return (or in the case of an in-lab serpentine push connect and compression fittings.
loop, the supply in and out) serving the polisher shall F. Circulated Connections: Purified water shall not
be stubbed out at the polisher location and fitted with be hard piped from polisher outlets to remote dispense
a zero-static (sanitary T-valve) or approved equivalent points or in any manner that creates dead-legs in a
arrangement located as close as possible to the polisher system connected to the central purified water supply.
connection. The outlet port of the T-valve shall be fitted Where remote points are needed, units with integrated
with a properly sized, non-contaminating pressure reg- recirculation remote dispense or provision of multiple
ulator where required based on feed water supply pres- units are required.
sure and equipment requirements. The regulator shall
connect to the T-valve with a sanitary (tri-clamp) con-
nection. Immediately downstream of the regulator or Rationale: Flooding, system contamination,
zero static T-valve, a sanitary x PFA (perfluoroalkoxy) and poor local water quality can occur due
sanitary flare adapter shall be provided and a minimal to poor quality installations and use of non-
length of PFA tubing shall be used to connect to the pol- DRM compliant materials and tubing joints.
isher using only high purity flare or sanitary tri-clamp Requirements should be coordinated with the
(not push-connect) joints. The location of the zero static equipment purchaser. Stagnancy at polishers,
valve shall ensure that the uncirculated tubing length combined with inadequate polisher maintenance
to the polisher operating valve is absolutely minimal, can contaminate upstream systems, even if
and in no case more than 305 mm (12 in.) long. The equipment includes a point of use microfilter.
PFA tubing shall be covered with a loose fitting pig-
mented polypropylene, polyethylene, PVC or similar G. Ozone-Resistant Materials: For central feedwa-
non-porous opaque jacket. PFA tubing and fittings shall ter systems utilizing an ozonated water sanitization
be clearly marked to permit on-site verification. Where method, it is preferred that polishers incorporate ozone-
sufficient polisher information is not available to ensure resistant construction materials up to the first solenoid
proper rough-in location of the zero-static valve during valve (typically PVDF, stainless steel, PFA, or other low-
construction, an additional normally open diaphragm leaching, low-TOC, ozone compatible components with
valve shall be provided at the supply and return stub out fluorocarbon (FKM) elastomer, (or where not available
compatible silicone may be used) but not polypropylene/
polyethylene. PFA and PTFE encapsulated seals may methodologies shall consider seasonal and source varia-
also be used. Where available and cost-effective perfluo- tions in water supply quality. Where the source is inclu-
roelastomer is preferred for applications where regular sive of a surface water supply, at least one test shall be
seal, maintenance, or replacement would be impractical conducted on-site from a time when the surface waters
or not cost-effective. source is active. At least two samples shall be taken
and analyzed anytime sampling is conducted. Sampling
analysis used for design shall be taken on-site and data
more than 12 months old shall not be used for design.
12.1.4 Purified Water for 1. Testing shall be carried out by a water quality
lab accredited in accordance with ISO 17025
Special Applications by a signatory to the International Laboratory
A. Water for Humidification: Water quality that is at Accreditation Cooperation (ILAC) mutual rec-
least Type III or Type IV water as specified in ASTM ognition agreement, within the scope of their
Standard D1193 shall be provided for heat exchangers accreditation. Sample collection shall be carried
where clean steam humidification is required. Purified out either by the lab or under their direction by
feedwater that meets/exceeds these requirements and is experienced personnel, following appropriate
prepared in accordance with Section 12.1.2, Centrally protocols for sample collection, handling, ship-
Distributed High Purity Water may be utilized if suit- ping and testing to ensure accuracy.
ably configured.
2. Testing shall include (at a minimum) pH, chlo-
rine/chloramine, TOC, TDS, total suspended
Rationale: Water supply for these applications is solids (TSS), turbidity, total alkalinity (includ-
generally to prevent scaling issues. ing report of both p- and m- values), conduc-
tivity, total silica, total hardness, hydrogen
B. Purified Water for Labware Washers, Autoclaves, sulfide, major metals including but not limited
and Glassware: Provide purified water only where spe- to: boron, iron, barium, manganese, strontium,
cifically required by the program or equipment manu- copper and aluminum; major anions, including
facturer. These parameters shall be verified with the but not limited to: fluoride, chloride, phosphate,
equipment manufacturer and program. Where puri- sulfate, carbonate, bicarbonate, sulfide, nitrate
fied water is required, it shall not be of lower quality and bromide; and major cations including but
than 0.33Mcm resistivity, 50 ppb TOC, and 100 not limited to: sodium, potassium, calcium, and
CFU/100mL microbial, and produced from a treat- magnesium. Silt Density Index (SDI) may be
ment process inclusive of RO or distillation, or water used for consideration of multimedia filtration.
prepared in conformance with Section 12.1.2, Centrally Excessive levels of biofouling contributors (e.g.,
Distributed High Purity Water. Some autoclave and spe- sulfate reducing and iron related bacteria) shall
cial equipment applications may have significantly more be checked. The A/E shall determine appropri-
stringent water quality requirements (e.g., clean steam ate safety factors for hardness and membrane
and pure steam applications). fouling contaminants as part of the analysis of
test data.
purveyor with subsequent analysis of TOC test D. Storage Volume: Usable storage volume serving
results to treatment method. The use of organic purified water distribution systems shall be designed
speciation via liquid chromatography/organic to provide 24 hour operating capacity. The use of mul-
carbon detection coupled with VOC testing (LC/ tiple tanks (e.g., two tanks in parallel, each at 12 hours
OCD) is strongly recommended to provide inex- capacity) is acceptable where designed for equal usage,
pensive and comprehensive TOC analysis prior but is not required. Production equipment shall pro-
to system design; however other scientifically vide the total required capacity to replenish the system
recognized methods, including GC/MS and within 4 hours of operation. Where higher volumes of
carbon column tests may be utilized. water storage are required or sufficient water turnover
cannot be achieved, the use of ozonated water stor-
4. Upon receipt of testing, the A/E shall perform age (with central UV destruct), hot storage, or similar
the comprehensive water quality analysis and means of maintaining water quality shall be provided.
process calculations to establish treatment
requirements, sizing etc. to achieve design in E. Tank Water Quality Preservation and Central
conformance with the DRM. Tanks: Where replacement of tank water will not be
achieved within a 24 hour period, a method of micro-
bial control for the tank is required and turnover shall
Rationale: In many cases feedwater be incorporated to maintain water quality. The use of
characteristics can be subject to significant tank applied electrolytic ozonation with pre-distribu-
variation, including seasonal changes, source tion destruct may be considered, but is not required
changes, and variations in upstream source where other suitable methods are provided. Purified
water treatment. Testing for VOCs and THMs water tanks shall be placed as close as practical to the
and low molecular weight organics is beneficial RO system and shall not be remotely located, except
as such products typically pass through RO that remote located tanks may be considered on a
membranes (and some may require degasification). project-specific basis where justified and provided with
LC/OCD testing coupled with VOC testing, approved microbial control.
characterization of molecular weights can provide
understanding of contaminants present and
facilitate proper design. Rationale: Large storage tanks pose risk of water
quality deterioration. However, a balance must be
B. Water Supply System Source: Purified water shall be achieved to allow for service continuity such as an
generated from a potable water source with a reduced unplanned system malfunction. Remote located
pressure zone (RPZ) backflow preventer (dedicated tanks may be desired for zoning but will typically
ASSE 1013 [RPZ] local backflow protection). Local require electrolytic ozonation with UV destruct.
pressure boosting may be provided and shall be N + 1 Local pumps and microfiltration to ensure water
redundant configuration. quality are rarely cost-effective.
C. System Sizing: The A/E shall define sizing param- F. Diversity Factors: Unless otherwise directed, at least
eters of the systems including total daily consumption, two use points shall be provided per wet lab (e.g., a pol-
peak system flow, distribution flow to each floor or isher plus a sink tap), or one use point per module, as
zone, maximum flow per outlet, supply to demand ratio determined acceptable by the program management.
(SDR), minimum and maximum pressures, minimum
design Reynolds number (Re) under peak loop demand Diversity factors shall be appropriately applied by the
conditions and peak velocities. Each floor or zone shall design professional and documented. Total daily usage
be balanced in the field to provide a predetermined shall be considered in establishing loads in addition to
quantity of water flow so that all research functions are peak demands.
satisfied. The system production equipment and distri-
bution mains shall be designed to incorporate a 20% G. Flow-Rate: Water supply to polishers and dispersal
overage for future demands or load compression. taps shall provide a demand flow rate of 1.52.0 L/min
(0.4-0.5 gpm). Lab ware washers and other equipment
H. Supply to Demand Ratio (SDR): Distribution system K. Media Bed Backwash and Startup Provisions: Each
pumps and circulation systems shall be sized to pro- individual deep media/resin bed, softener, and carbon
vide a system SDR of at least 1.5:1. This requirement is unit shall be arranged with individual bypass valv-
prior to the 20% overage required for mains and risers ing, flush ports, and piping arrangements to facilitate
and therefore it is acceptable to utilize a 1.7:1 SDR to flushing of particle fines, required regenerations, soak
accommodate sizing inclusive of overage for new mains. procedures, and other startup requirements as appro-
priate for media replacement or service exchange
without damaging or disrupting system operation or
Rationale: Maintaining sufficient SDR and
passing particles to downstream components. Designs
associated velocity requirements are key factors in
shall include sufficient freeboard and adequately sized
maintaining system water quality and proper
supply arrangements for effective backwashing and
system hydraulics, including protection from
shall not allow chlorinated water to reach the RO mem-
backflow contamination.
brane. Backwash provisions may be omitted for service
exchange systems, but individual soak provisions (for
I. System Location: Source equipment shall be located carbon beds), startup, and fines flushing arrangements
in environmentally controlled, restricted access space are still required. Carbon bed backwash capacity shall
subject to routine occupancy and shall not be located be at least 490 lpm/m 2 (12 gpm/ft2) bed cross sectional
in boiler rooms, near oil storage tanks, pH treatment area and drains shall be adequately sized for backwash
rooms, bedding disposal areas, sewage lift station (or surge tank discharge). Automation shall be provided
or waste treatment or waste holding rooms or other for backwashing of large systems.
potentially unclean spaces or areas subject to chemical
vapors, damage, or tampering. Production equipment L. Multimedia Beds/Sand or Similar Granular Media
shall be located at the top of the system where possible. Deep Bed/Cartridge and Tangential Flow Prefiltration:
Provide multimedia beds or similar granular bed or
J. Temperature Control: Seasonal temperatures, peak sand filters only as required based on-site water supply
and minimum shall be investigated including municipal conditions (typically surface water sources or other sup-
supply reports and installation site location and accom- plies with elevated TSS) or required by flow demand.
modated in design. For most systems at the NIH, feed- Deep media beds shall be arranged to permit back
water thermostatic temperature mixing 25C (77F) washing and provided with adequate water supply flow/
shall be provided, except that cooler temperatures may size to facilitate backwashing, except where a service
be used for ozonated systems and small systems where exchange type is approved, properly sized, and rou-
the reduction in RO system efficiency is cost-effective. tinely replaced not to exceed 90 day intervals. On the
Cooling is required for all systems where the loop tem- Bethesda campus, multimedia beds are normally not
perature may exceed 29C (85F) and to meet the rat- required for potable water that has been filtered (cen-
ings and manufacturers recommendations for proper trally or locally) with 1020 m manual cartridge filters
operation of the RO membrane. Automatic purge is or automatic self-cleaning filtration (pretreatment filters
acceptable only for small systems where calculations shall be beta ratio 10 or better efficiency at the required
show waste will be minimal. Permeate storage tank shall particle and flux).
be located in conditioned space. Post-permeate heat
exchangers shall be double-wall sanitary type, ASME Multimedia beds are required where silt density index
code and ASME Bioprocessing Equipment Standard (SDI) is above 2.5 or turbidity is above 0.75 NTU
(BPE) compliant, designed for use with pure/ultra pure (nephelometric turbidity unit) to minimize potential
water of stainless, PFA, or PVDF. Supply feedwater heat of RO membrane fouling and unacceptable filter load.
exchangers shall be double wall NSF-61. Where SDI is below 5.0 and multimedia or similar deep
beds are utilized, a normally offline and dry cartridge time-based) regenerating type, arranged to maintain
filter may be utilized as a service bypass in lieu of pro- service continuity as required for the process applica-
viding two beds for N + 1. Multimedia beds shall be tion. Anti-scalants shall not be used in lieu of water
arranged upstream of the sorption (carbon/granular softeners. Brine tanks shall hold 34 weeks of salt
activated carbon [GAC]) such that chlorine residual will demand, inclusive of a plastic salt storage shelf to main-
be maintained through the beds and prefilters, unless tain fresh brine. Brine tanks maintaining wet salt stor-
justified and conditional upon the provision of a suit- age are unacceptable. A float safety valve and cover is
able cleaning mechanism (e.g., high temperature pota- required for brine tanks and a total hardness meter is
ble hot water backwashing). All deep media beds shall required to confirm softening. The use of in-bed con-
be virgin material selected for application in high purity ductivity sensors are unacceptable. Membrane soften-
water pretreatment (typically anthracite/sand/garnet). ers and weak acid cation may be used where strong
Arrangements shall provide an operating face velocity acid cation softeners are prohibited or not otherwise
of approximately 200280 lpm/m 2 (57 gpm/ft2) of bed satisfied by use of potassium chloride and off-site
cross section, and at least two times the normal face regeneration may be used for small systems (e.g., con-
velocity for backwashing and consistent with media suming a single bed per month), or where required by
manufacturer and AWWA B100. Feedwater flow rate local jurisdiction. Softeners using sodium shall not dis-
metering is required. charge to NIH facilities with on-site waste treatment
or to dry wells. Partial salt recovery (recycling systems)
Media shall be selected compliant with AWWA B100- shall be provided for large systems using sodium. Off-
09 or approved equal. Each unit shall be sized/selected floor space for salt storage shall be included.
for appropriate face velocity and volumetric flow rate
(including consideration of resin channeling), capac- Where softeners are placed before the carbon bed, resin
ity, pressure drop and (with the exception of service shall be rated for the chlorine/chloramines concentra-
exchange type units) shall include sufficient freeboard tion of the water and suitably cross-linked. Resins shall
(typically 50%) for bed expansion during backwash. be virgin, approved for use in potable water systems,
Vessels shall be ASME fiberglass or ASME steel or shall be in conformance with NSF-61, and strong acid
stainless steel tanks provided with NSF-61 and FDA cation type, unless otherwise required. Maximum hard-
(food contact) compliant interior lining. ness leakage rates and maximum pressure drop shall be
established to the application but in no case shall hard-
Galvanized steel interior coating and interior paint ness leakage rates exceed 1% of the maximum influent
coatings are not acceptable. Vessels shall include pro- total hardness.
visions for media replacement. Dielectric waterways
shall be provided between any copper piping and fer- Calculations shall be provided to demonstrate proper
rous water softener connections. The use of hollow fiber selection including sizing optimization for water and
(tangential flow) and ultrafiltration systems with 0.1 salt usage, bed volume flow rate, resin surface flow rate,
m membranes may be used in lieu of deep beds where capacity and pressure drop, control of resin channel-
determined beneficial through life cycle cost analysis ing, and hardness leakage rate. The use of counter-flow
after thorough consideration of water quality, incoming and co-current operation shall be determined for the
TOC, and potential of biofouling. application to achieve optimum water and salt effi-
ciency without exceeding required maximum hardness
Where multimedia beds are not provided, cartridge fil- leakage.
ters are required. Cartridge filters shall be arranged in
parallel for N + 1 redundancy. Vessels shall be ASME polyethylene or polypropylene
lined fiberglass or ASME steel tanks provided with
M. Scale Protection/Water Softeners: Water softeners NSF-61 compliant interior lining. Where placement is
shall be provided wherever water contains a hardness not otherwise avoidable in hot water systems, the equip-
level that may cause scaling with RO systems operated ment and resin selection shall be rated for operation at
at a minimum of 75% recovery ratio of the first pass. the maximum water temperature. Piping of softener
Water softeners are typically required for applications skids shall be Schedule 80 PVC polypropylene with
at NIH Bethesda campus and shall be ion exchange, fused joints, or cement lined ductile iron.
automatic alternating, demand volume-based (not
Tanks shall be fully sealed except for the filtered atmo- E. Rupture Disks: Each tank shall be provided with a
spheric vent(s). Conventional screw-on tops larger than low pressure sensitive, stainless steel, sanitary-type rup-
150 mm (6 in.) diameter are not acceptable, however ture disk of not less than 3 in. diameter and with a burst
large flanged ports with a blank-off plate are accept- indicator in lieu of tank overflows. The rupture disk
able. Elastomers for sealing any tank openings shall be shall be piped to drain with an air gap. The maximum
in conformance with this section and openings shall be pressure rating utilized for the selection of the rupture
designed to preclude fouling. disk shall not exceed 70% of the tank rated working
pressure and shall be at least 14 w.g. The effect of any
B. Storage Tank Fittings: At a minimum, the tank level back-pressure that may be present in system vents/filters
controls, rupture disk, fill line, discharge outlet, and vent shall be considered. Rupture disks shall be selected to
ports shall be addressed in the location and quantity of activate both for liquid and vapor conditions. Each tank
nozzles. Nozzles/tank inlets shall enter the tank without shall be specified with a suitably sized overflow port to
protrusion beyond the inner tank wall and shall be crev- receive the rupture disk (typically a 100 mm [4 in.] over-
ice free. All piped connections shall be provided as sani- flow port, but not less than 75 mm [3 in.]) adapted to
tary (tri-clamp) style connections; although fusion joints receive a tri-clamp connection serving the rupture disk
may also be used where movement has been appropri- and associated burst indicator. Provision of a torque
ately controlled. Flange joints shall be used only where nut is required and the burst indicator shall provide an
tri-clamp or other sanitary options are not available. alarm condition to the system PLC. Where the tank is
Where flange joints or rigid connections are utilized, a subject to vacuum conditions, an appropriate sanitary
flexible connector consisting of a PTFE lined, smooth relief arrangement, vacuum rupture disk, or dual acting
bore, non-corrugated stainless steel braided hose shall be disk shall be provided. Chemical traps and p-traps with
provided to prevent shearing, leakage, or damage. Piping or without checks are unacceptable.
connections shall be braced to prevent stresses to tanks.
Tanks with internal dip tubes shall include sufficient san-
itary support to prevent tube breakage. Rationale: Overflow designs are often not as tight
as vent filters and are susceptible to microbial
C. Tank Support: A corrosion-resistant durable tank fouling or chemical contamination. Overflowing
support leg arrangement shall be provided with anchor- traps waste purified water. Proper disk sizing and
age and shall be of a design approved by the tank selection is critical to avoid false activations.
manufacturer.
D. Tank Level Sensors: Tank level sensors shall be F. Spray Balls and Dip Tubes: Spray balls above the
testable and adjustable without requiring drainage of water line are required for multiple pressure zones.
the storage tank and shall be sanitary/hygienic type. For single pressure zone systems, the use of properly
Sensors shall be non-contact, liquid level pulse type sized spray balls shall be used for non-ozonated sys-
radar, or high quality pressure type sensors; designed tems. Ozonated single pressure zone systems shall uti-
for high purity, low conductivity hygienic water condi- lize below water line dip tubes or dip tubes with a sides
tions, non-contaminating, and with approved materials. stream loop. Spray ball pattern shall ensure complete
Ultrasonic type sensors are unacceptable. Redundant coverage without spraying into/blocking hydrophobic
high level sensors are required. Where tanks include vent filters.
spray balls, the level control shall be verified compatible.
G. Vent Filter: System openings shall be filtered to pro-
tect from contamination, and provision of a filtered vent
Rationale: The provision of redundant controls is required to maintain tank atmospheric pressure. Vent
is to prevent rupture disk failure which can occur filters shall be hydrophobic type, 0.2 micron rated per
as level controls and fill valves lose adjustment ASTM 838-05 with a 0.2 m sterilizing grade perfor-
or malfunction, and to provide alert to such mance in liquids, 0.003 m in dry gas, 100% integrity
conditions. Ultrasonic sensors are avoided due tested and mounted in a dead-leg-free sanitary housing
to sanitary, reliability, and tank shape/agitation with double O-ring seals. Vent filters shall provide at least
issues. a 6 month service life. Coordinate the vent filter selec-
tion with rupture disk selection to prevent disk bursting
due to sudden changes in tank level as associated with 2. Filter ends shall be O-ring type seals. A single
system operation. Sizing shall be sufficient to ensure that O-ring is acceptable for pretreatment, double-
the maximum pressure or vacuum in the tank does not O-ring is required for the permeate side of the
come within 80% of the working rating of the rupture RO system and critical applications. Flat gasket,
disk; the flow rate shall include a safety factor three times crush-seal, and knife-edge seal arrangements
over the maximum combined pump out and fill rate. The are unacceptable. Seal designs shall be Type 222
filter shall meet flow rate requirements not to exceed 1.49 or 226 style, with or without fin as required, and
kPa (6 in. w.g.) pressure differential, including vent back- shall be Code 2, 3, 7, or 8 style as appropriate.
pressure. The maximum pump-out rate shall include the
increase in pump speed/pumps in operation as applicable 3. Filters selections shall not require pre-wetting.
to system flushing and sanitization. Vents/filter housing 4. System pre-filters utilized for the pre-treatment
shall be heat traced where required to prevent blockage; train shall be rated 10 to 20 m at Beta 10 unless
at a minimum, mount the vent filter near to the tank with deep media beds are utilized. Divert to drain
self-draining piping. flush ports and dead-leg free sanitary drain
H. Cartridge Filters: Filter housings and components valves shall be provided.
shall be rated at a minimum of 1,034 kPa (150 psi) 5. RO membrane pre-filters shall be rated either
working pressure and shall be selected for flux rates, 5m at Beta ratio 5,000 or 1m at Beta 10 unless
element replacement frequency, maximum loaded pres- justified by feedwater analysis. Resin traps or
sure drop, and shall be constructed of type 316 L stain- additional pre-filters may be provided ahead,
less steel. Polypropylene filter elements may be used but shall be included only where necessary.
in the pretreatment train (not where subject to ozona-
tion). Housings in product water shall be sanitary type, 6. Final particle filters (microfiltration) shall be
electropolished, interior, and with no dead-legs. Filter provided after the storage tank(s) but prior to
elements shall at a minimum be approved for use with distribution, downstream of system UV equip-
potable water. Filters on the downstream side of the ment, as part of the circulation loop. The filters
activated carbon shall be free of binders, adhesives, of shall be ultrapure water (UPW) hydrophilic
compatible materials and elastomers, and 21 CFR com- PTFE or PVDF single or double layer membrane
pliant for food contact. String-wound filters are not type with no wetting requirements, non-shed-
acceptable for the RO prefilter or other critical filters. ding, with single digit ppb TOC extractables,
Suitable filter media is generally polypropylene and PES rated for an efficiency of greater than or equal
for non-ozonated applications and PVDF or PTFE for to 90% at 0.1m when tested per SEMI 5067A
all applications including ozone. The required filter per- polystyrene ball test or per SEMI C079 valida-
formance and beta ratio, efficiency, or rating method tion standard or at 0.02 m (20 nm) per SEMI
shall be specified. Flush ports are required except for C079 validation standard or an equivalent test
final filters and vent filters. All filter housings for liquid method with filters of at least this efficiency.
systems shall include a drain to prevent contamination Filters shall be 100% integrity tested. Housings
during filter element changes and a high point air vent shall be sanitary type and utilize multi-element
(both on the dirty side). Housings shall be non-proprie- housings as required.
tary to a single manufacturers elements. Additionally:
7. Filters shall be selected with sufficient sur-
1. Filters shall be arranged in parallel to provide face area for a 3 month replacement cycle
N + 1 capacity. Filters shall include means for with a pressure drop not to exceed 69 kPa (10
independent isolation and pressure monitoring psi); final filters shall not require replacement
(manual type/pressure gauges) are acceptable. more frequently than annually and vent filters
Pressure gauges are not provided on vent filters. semi-annually.
Isolation valves on vent filters shall be provided
with a locking device and position indicator, I. Service Exchange Resins/Media: Typically, service
and locked open. exchange is only acceptable for applications serving
small systems where permanent vessels would not be
justified. Service exchange frequency for pretreatment cm 2) at end of lamp life (greater than or equal to 60 mJ/
bed materials (including GAC and media beds) shall cm 2 new lamp).
require a frequency of not more than a quarterly basis.
Resin change out shall be based upon breakthrough/ L. Oxidizing UV: 185 nm UV shall be provided for pol-
performance data provided microbial control may be ishing oxidation of organics where required to maintain
maintained. Where service exchange is intended to be specified product water TOC limits. Oxidizing UV shall
applied for large systems and critical applications, a be used for TOC polishing only, not for primary reduc-
comprehensive cost analysis should be performed and tion. Provide N + 1 redundancy (in parallel) and locate
sufficient control of the media/vessel performance char- downstream of the permeate tank(s) prior to the final
acteristics shall be demonstrated. filters. Fluence for specific water conditions shall be
demonstrated and at least 300 mJ/cm 2 is required (usu-
ally greater). Coordinate the arrangement with other
Rationale: A key issue with service exchange is provision of membrane degasification, or (where deion-
control of contaminants, media performance, and ization is unavoidable) with provision of EDI to address
potential of variations associated with different conductivity issues. The A/E shall evaluate potential of
vendors. unacceptable byproducts of oxidation as may be associ-
ated with UV or upstream ozone (e.g., hydroxyl radi-
J. UV Systems, General Requirements: UV systems cal/hydrogen peroxide formation, various acids etc.)
shall be 316 stainless steel chamber, less than or equal depending on feedwater organics. Catalytic conversion
to 20 Ra, low pressure type. Systems shall include digi- may be used as required and a sample port shall be pro-
tal intensity meters and a lamp out indicator, sanitary vided where hazardous carryover is plausible with sub-
connections, and stainless steel light traps shall be pro- sequent confirmation of no hazardous byproducts.
vided. UV control shall alarm to the system monitor and M. UV Ozone Destruct: At least three UV ozone
include an automatic safety cut-off to protect from no- destruct systems (254 nm) are required, two of which
flow and high temperature conditions. Capacity shall be must be online, in series, and operational to serve the
within manufacturers approved flow ratings. Certified entire flow at any time. Automatic alternating rotation
bulbs (validated lamps) are required for TOC oxida- of the offline unit (power status) shall be provided and
tion and ozone destruct applications and the intensity a critical alarm shall occur if two of the three required
sensor for these applications shall be traceable to NIST. units are malfunctioning. A bypass shall be provided
Adequate turbulence within the UV chamber shall be around individual units for maintenance while main-
verified with the manufacturer for all oxidizing applica- taining at least two units online, in series. Arrangements
tions, including O3 destruct. Calculations/manufacturer shall preclude dead-legs and be fully drainable when
substantiation shall be provided to demonstrate proper bypasses are not in use. Piping configurations shall not
UV sizing, fluence, UV transmission (end of lamp life rely on repeated wetting/draining/drying due to leakage
calculation), conformance with manufacturer flow and potential of seals. The minimum UV fluence for ozone
turbulence, bulb-distance requirements, and heat gain. destruct (per destruct unit) shall be at least 125 mJ/cm 2
Minimize or avoid baffles where possible. N + 1 online at end of lamp life for typical ozone levels below 1.0
equipment is required; bypasses shall not be provided. ppm. Frequency of sanitizations (on/off switching) shall
K. UV Disinfection Systems: UV systems for disinfec- be evaluated in equipment selection for EOL calcula-
tion shall be provided prior to distribution in the circu- tion. Any failure condition that does not maintain two
lating loop, upstream of the final particulate filter and ozone destruct units in series and in operation (includ-
shall be rated at 254 nm. 254 nm UV for disinfection ing lamp outage) shall automatically shutdown ozona-
purposes is not required where oxidizing UV has been tion. UV systems for ozone destruct shall be specifically
provided at the same location, however this does not designed for that purpose and elastomers shall be FKM.
waive requirements for 254 nm UV for ozone destruct
where ozonation is utilized. UV for disinfection is also Rationale: In-series UV ozone destruct is required
not required where 254 nm UV for ozone destruct is to ensure complete destruction of O3 that may
provided at the same point. Minimum fluence shall not leak past a UV unit. In the case of the ozone
be less than 30 millijoule per square centimeter (mJ/
destruct, redundancy of the UV is considered modeling can often be used to minimize check
a safety component. Oxidizing TOC is not valve requirements.
acceptable as a primary method due to
efficacy and potential of toxic byproducts. P. Lab Water System Service Continuity: Systems shall
be arranged to maintain service continuity and to ensure
N. Pressurization/Distribution Pumps: Pumps shall be that upon plausible failure conditions, including loss of
arranged as N + 1 and configured to provide operational power and routine maintenance that entire circulation
redundancy normally online and without stagnancy. systems remains in safe operation. A redundant con-
Individual VFDs shall be provided for each pump. In troller, backup controller, or at least readily available
the event of a pump failure, the remaining pumps shall program backup for a non-proprietary controller, with
ramp up automatically to maintain the normal system non-volatile memory shall be specified. N + 1 redun-
flow. For small systems or limited program areas where dancy is required for equipment downstream of the per-
the use of individual VFDs are impractical, it is accept- meate tank to facilitate continued system operation and
able to provide constant speed operation with each prevent contamination during routine maintenance.
pump sized at 50 to 60% load, provided the flow rate
at 50% load is sufficient to maintain the required mini- Q. RO Systems, General Requirements: Two-pass sys-
mum velocity throughout the entire system under con- tems are required for RO feedwater systems serving
ditions of failure of any pump, and provided such pump labs. Single pass RO may be used only for scale con-
failure is automatically monitored. Pumps downstream trol, point of use supply or supply to stills, and low
of the RO membrane shall be hygienic (sanitary) 3A purity applications. The second-pass concentrate shall
or EHEDG centrifugal type, designed for WFI, UPW, be recycled back to the first-pass feedwater (with soft-
or high purity applications, free of dead zones and of ening only where required). Optimal recovery for each
clean in place (CIP) design, AISI 316 L or 329 L stain- pass shall be as determined through system analysis
less steel 20 Ra and electropolished, or sanitary fluo- (typically approximately 75% first and second pass at
ropolymer lined (not coated) construction. Pumps shall Bethesda). In performing system design, the A/E shall
be provided with silicon carbide seals designed for use consider the impact of reduced performance up to the
with low conductivity UPW, and shall include a seal anticipated replacement/service point of the membrane
flush configured per manufacturer recommendations (typically approximately 10% reduction). The use of
to maintain sanitation, service life and control noise, RO process design software is required for membrane
or alternatively shall be magnetic drive (seal-less) sani- selection, configuration, and array optimization to
tary type. Motors shall be wash down duty or TEFC. individual project water conditions and arrangement of
Connections to pumps shall be sanitary TC. Controls/ treatment components. Additionally, a fouling-factor
power supplies shall be arranged to permit elevated modified performance calculation shall be submitted to
velocities (above 1.52 m/s [5 fps]) to be achieved in the demonstrate performance at 3 years of membrane age.
piping system for periodic chemical sanitization and Recovery per element should not exceed 10%. Waste/
rinsing. Special application purified water systems (e.g., reject lines from RO components shall not be combined.
applications purified for scale control only) may utilize
conventional 316 L centrifugal pumps provided micro- Rationale: Required resistivity, TOC and
bial control is not required. microbial requirements will generally not be met
O. Check Valves: Check valves shall be avoided if possi- or maintained with a single-pass system; and
ble. Where required, they shall be of sanitary type only, two-pass provides consistent, low maintenance,
typically a ball check. reliable water quality.
for ionic contaminants and organics above 200 daltons. Housings shall not be proprietary to one manufactur-
The use of anti-microbial chemical impregnated RO sys- ers membranes. Fiberglass or fiberglass lined stainless
tems (e.g., silver impregnated spacers) is unacceptable. is required where direct osmosis high salinity (DO-
Extra high rejection membranes and performance with HS) is employed. The selected membrane and hous-
low molecular weight organics shall be reviewed as appli- ing (including fiberglass resins, surface finish, seal
cable to on-site water contaminants. designs, ports, and elastomers) shall be designed for
use with ultrapure or pharmaceutical water applica-
tions and shall be selected for low particle, micro-
Rationale: Thin film composite (TFC) polyamide bial, and TOC elution. Multiporting is not permitted
(PA) membranes are preferred for their pH unless the design arrangement and performance has
stability and TOC reduction performance, along been confirmed by the membrane manufacturer. Split
with their resistance to microbial degeneration ring pressure vessel closures are unacceptable. Pumps
susceptibility from low chlorine. shall be 316 L stainless steel, with stainless steel impel-
lers and non-leaching compatible elastomers suitable
S. RO System Instrumentation and Controls: RO sys- for the clean in place (CIP) method. The use of brass
tems shall include instrumentation and controls for valves, solvent cement, PVC components and hoses,
monitoring feed pressure, permeate pressure, inter- and other materials which are susceptible to leach-
stage pressure, concentrate pressure, online resistiv- ing contaminants or high maintenance are unaccept-
ity (or conductivity) for both feedwater and permeate, able. 316 L stainless steel is required for all RO system
feed temperature, flow metering for feedwater, per- piping and tubing including high pressure waste. All
meate and concentrate, totalizing for feed water and instrumentation shall be process/industrial grade.
permeate, temperature and pressure monitoring and Electrical arrangements shall be listed in conformance
control and protection, and an adjustable reject flow- with requirements of a nationally recognized testing
rate-control valve (including control for second pass laboratory, and all wiring shall be in conduit. Motors
reuse). Automated monitoring of membrane rejection shall be totally enclosed or wash down duty.
and permeate flow percentage is recommended, and set
point shall be specified (typically 90%). Components U. RO System Clean in Place Configuration and Special
shall be of a non-contaminating type. Automation shall Access: Systems shall be configured to facilitate an
be provided for parameters necessary to protect from approved CIP configuration, utilizing chemical saniti-
system damage (e.g., low feed pressure, high tempera- zation unless other approved methods are utilized. The
ture etc.), with fault alarm to the system PLC and gen- use of DO-HS membrane cleaning systems is gener-
eral or critical fault to BAS. Automatic restart shall be ally recommended and shall be provided for all large,
provided for RO system features (e.g., low pressure) to central systems, especially where influent water qual-
minimize intervention, however fault conditions shall ity exhibits potential membrane fouling characteristics.
be recorded. For any application where chemicals are Placement of the RO system shall allow for replacement
permitted, automatic monitoring (e.g., metering, ORP, of RO membranes.
pH, etc.) shall be provided. V. General Material and Connection Requirements:
T. RO System Materials of Construction: Pressure 1. Piping materials in the pretreatment train shall
vessels (membrane housings) shall be ASME code com- be either pigmented polypropylene of IR, butt,
pliant and NSF-61 (or equal). Minimum vessel pres- or socket fusion, materials as approved for use in
sure rating shall be 2,070 kPa (300 psi) except that the purified water distribution system, or on the
vessels 102 mm (4 in.) and larger shall be at least 3,105 upstream side of the GAC, may also be Schedule
kPa (450 psi). Vessels shall be epoxy coated fiberglass 80 PVC with two step solvent cement and not
or 316 L stainless steel and shall be ASME Section less than a 24 hour cure time. Downstream of
X code stamped for greater than or equal to 4,140 the RO membrane, materials shall be as approved
kPa (600 psi) vessels. PVC vessels may be used only for purified water distribution, refer to Chapter 6.
for point of use/small local applications not directly
exposed to UV light, and provided such applications 2. Hoses in the pretreatment may be used for final
operate below 1,030 kPa (150 psi) (within the vessel). connections up to 1.2 m (4 ft.) long where 21
CFR 177.2600 compliant, suitable for maxi- conditions, including peak design demand. Normal oper-
mum pressure, and of fluorocarbon lined smooth ating velocities in excess of 1.52 m/s (5 fps) are generally
bore construction with stainless steel braid as not acceptable for plastic systems. Stainless steel distribu-
required. Fittings shall be 316 L stainless radial tion systems shall provide a velocity of at least 0.61 m/s
crimped type, with either rigid, flared, flanged, (2 fps) under normal conditions regardless of application.
or sanitary connections. Push-on style joints and
PVC or rubber hoses are unacceptable. D. Periodic Flushing Velocity: Systems shall be capable
of achieving elevated velocities for systems flushing of
3. All connections downstream of the RO system 0.911.83 m/s (36 fps) for PVDF, polypropylene and
shall be sanitary type. Unions, flanges, and com- other plastic materials, and between 0.912.44 m/s (38
pression joints are unacceptable. Tri-clamps shall fps) for stainless steel piping.
be 316 L stainless steel with approved elastomers
and in conformance with the current ASME
BPE standard. Provide a manufacturer-approved Rationale: These velocities are adequate for DRM
torque nut for the application and gasket material compliant systems. Elevated velocity is provided
or other assurance of application of only proper for stainless steel to maintain corrosion resistance.
torque. The use of tri-clamp connections is only Capability to increased velocities for sanitization
permitted for instrumentation, orifice plates/flow and flushing can be beneficial for removing and
restrictor tubes, and equipment connections pro- exposing biofilm to chemical sanitants, and to
vided the connection is readily accessible. assist in rapid rinsing.
A. Constantly Circulating System: All systems shall F. Pressure Requirements: A residual pressure of not less
be designed as constantly circulating back through the than 207 kPa (30 psi) shall be provided at the hydrauli-
tank, UV and final filter, with appropriate consider- cally remote use point; however where this would result
ations to control microbial contamination, regardless of in unavoidable additional pressure zones it is acceptable
required water quality. to provide a minimum residual pressure of 140 kPa (20
psi). Maximum pressure shall not exceed 550 kPa (80
B. Distribution Piping System Sizing: Distribution
psi), except that static pressure up to 690 kPa (100 psi)
piping systems, including mains and risers shall be sized
will be permitted within the distribution system where
to accommodate the current load plus 20%, in addi-
maximum pressures are compatible with all compo-
tion to required minimum SDR specified in this section.
nents. Unless justified, 140 kPa (20 psi) shall also be the
Systems must be designed to perform within required
minimum pressure of any point in the pressurized distri-
velocity limitations under these 20% overage condi-
bution system including during peak demand. Pressure
tions. The distribution piping shall allow for at least two
requirements at the polisher, lab equipment, and tank
usage points per lab (one polisher and one sink outlet
spray ball shall be verified, with the system capable of
or other common allowance e.g., 1.52 usage points
delivering the more demanding criteria. Unless pressure
per lab module as required by the PO). The minimum
higher than 140207 kPa (2030 psig) is required, the
SDR shall be achieved under these allowances without
207 kPa (30 psi) values shall represent the baseline for
exceeding allowable velocities or pressure. Diversity
the hydraulically remote points of the system.
shall be applied to sizing mains and equipment.
use of shock arrestors, bladder tanks, or other arrange- control within the limits of the balancing device (dia-
ments that may result in microbial contamination is phragm valve) or flow restrictor orifice. Where return
unacceptable. lines from recirculating outlets are connected to a ser-
pentine supply arrangement, the return shall have a pos-
L. Pressure Sustaining/Pressure Control Devices: itive maintained pressure differential below the supply.
Pressure sustaining/back-pressure regulator valves shall PRVs shall not be used for this purpose.
be provided at the end of return (or at the end of supply/
supply to return bypass) of all systems to maintain ade-
quate pressure control under varying demand conditions Rationale: Inadequate pressure differential can
and shall be applied individually for each pressure zone. result in backflow and unstable operation of the
Pressure control devices shall be non-contaminating, distribution loop.
sanitary high purity diaphragm type, designed for UHP
system applications, free of dead zones and with approved N. Dead-Legs and Circulation: Dead-legs in distribu-
elastomers and wetted materials, and matched to load tion and return piping shall in no case exceed 4 pipe
conditions to ensure adequate opening. External sens- diameters in length. Where possible, dead-legs shall
ing, automatically modulating type pneumatic actuated be eliminated and comply with ASME BPE standards.
radial (weirless) diaphragm valves shall be used as the The use of zero-static valve arrangements are typically
pressure sustaining/control device for large systems, and required. All pipe line branches and run-outs shall be
shall be air-to-open, fail closed (spring type) configura- circulated.
tion, operated by an upstream pressure element through
a current to pneumatic (I/P) converter. A pressure relief O. Hygienic Design and Surface Finish of Components:
valve is required on the air supply between the I/P con- Systems components shall be selected with surface
verter and the back pressure regulator. Conventional finish per the selected water quality. Crevices and pock-
self-contained UHP water diaphragm backpressure regu- ets shall be avoided and systems shall be constructed
lators shall be used only where adequate capacity match as sanitary (hygienic) type following best practices.
can be achieved to the low flow return condition (e.g., Stainless steel component surface finish (after the RO)
peak demand/low back pressure) to preclude cavitation, shall be at least 20 Ra and electropolished.
and subject to provision of sufficient downstream back-
presure (e.g., a tank sprayball) for proper operation. The
required set points for all pressure control devices shall Rationale: These provisions help maintain water
be properly documented and verified at project startup quality and facilitate effective sanitizaton, rinsing,
including under peak design demand condition with con- and corrosion resistance.
firmation of required minimum pressure in the system.
Where end or return pressure sustaining is used, inclu- P. Extensions/Modifications to Existing Systems:
sion of a sufficiently sized zero static valve on the main Where existing systems are extended to serve additional
return upstream of each back pressure control valve is points, ensure the SDR allowed for that floor, wing and
recommended to facilitate startup. area do not drop below 1.5:1. Where demand may cause
such a drop, upgrades to supply may be required and
M. Supply and Return Pressure Control and Differential: shall be indicated to the PO.
Provide sufficient pressure control and any required dif-
ferential between the supply and return mains to mini- Q. Future Tap Provisions/Flexibility: Circulated taps
mize potential for backflow and ensure proper flow with valving in the normally open position to maintain
through the distribution system and branches under all circulation shall be provided at points for anticipated
demand conditions. This shall be accomplished through future expansion (including where unused extension
proper use of flow control tubes or orifices, (or in some of risers or mains are provided). Such taps shall be
cases may be accomplished with reduced size diaphragm arranged to preclude need to cut into or relocate piping
type valves to affect control) at the end of each supply for future connections. A valved supply and return
(beginning of each return). Care shall be exercised in connection (with flow control) and continuous circula-
the sizing of returns and balancing valves and flow tion shall be provided for each research wet lab, even if
restrictors to prevent oversizing and maintain required current lab usage does not require purified water. The
The preferred method is through use of a zero-static 2. The use of single floor serpentine arrangements
diaphragm (T-valve) on the supply and return mains may be accepted on a project specific basis for
with sanitary tri-clamp outlets between an engineered small facilities or where extensions must be
orifice inserted on the lab (or future outlet) side of the made to existing systems originally constructed
return system valve with the branches interconnecting in this manner. Such systems shall be arranged
and open for flow. such that the serpentine arrangement serves
only (at most) a single floor within a single lab-
The use of normally closed zero-static diaphragm valves oratory wing prior to connecting to dedicated
(T-valves) on both the supply and return mains, each main supply and return risers, and not serpen-
with branch lines capped for future may also be used to tining from one floor to the next. The use of
serve each individual lab, provided required future flow bypass valves in serpentine loops (e.g., attempts
restrictor size has been identified. Where this approach to facilitate individual lab or outlet isolation) is
is used, supplies and returns must still be sized for the unacceptable. Circulation shall be maintained
future demand, the end of the supply main must have an at all times through the entire system, without
accessible and resizable (replaceable) flow restrictor and dead-legs.
associated valving, and a hydraulic model must demon-
strate proper performance for each (initial and future) 3. Special system applications not serving labs, and
condition. therefore not susceptible to potential changes in
outlet quantities or locations (e.g., RO for des-
caling functions) and other limited applications
Rationale: These requirements are to ensure as approved may utilize serpentine systems.
accommodation for future connection points
without dead-legs or need to cut into the system,
and to ensure required system flow is properly Rationale: Although serpentine loops provide
maintained. The sanitary tri-clamps permit the positive circulation and are simple design,
change out of the orifice plate and the extension of such arrangements are not flexible for changes,
the piping downstream of the isolation valves into repairs, or renovations without disruption and
the lab or future program area. potential significant maintenance costs. Bypass
arrangements provide dead-legs, which in room
temperature systems should not be present.
R. Distribution Arrangements, Supply and Returns: Properly engineered direct and reverse-return
Reverse return and direct return horizontal distribu- approaches with horizontal mains allow for
tion arrangements consisting of a supply and return individual lab shutdown without disrupting other
branch takeoff from the horizontal supply and return areas, facilitate reduced branch pipe sizing, avoid
main to serve each laboratory shall be provided as the dead-legs and maximize future flexibility. The use
required systems distribution approach. The distribu- of reverse return branches to laboratories may
tion design shall allow for each individual lab to be be coupled with direct-return mains/risers
isolated by operation of a single supply and return for additional system economies.
valve. The supply and return mains shall be connected
to a dedicated common supply and return riser back to
the source equipment.
S. Piping System Distribution Independence: The required to demonstrate required flow, pressure,
piping system distribution on each floor and building and velocity under all demand conditions and
wing shall be independent of other floors to the connec- conditions of varying branch lines open/closed
tion with the main supply and return riser. status, e.g., up to all labs on an entire floor being
shut-off. Each wet lab (or future wet lab) shall be
provided with the tee/valve/orifice arrangement,
Rationale: Independent designs of floor loops and a loop shall be provided to maintain proper
minimize disruption as systems are maintained, flow without a dead-leg. Within an individual
cleaned, or modified and ensure effective lab served by zero static valves, flow restrictor/
circulation. tee arrangements may be used without requir-
ing zero static valves, however conventional dia-
T. Single Pipe Distribution, In-Line Flow Restrictor phragm valves are still required at use points.
Systems: The use of single horizontal supply pipe distri-
bution systems with in-line flow restrictors (and with- 3. The use of flexible sanitary tubing and fittings
out a dedicated horizontal return main for each floor) constructed only of PFA will be permitted in lieu
may be used for small facilities, lease facilities, and con- of piping provided the tubing and joints are fully
versions of existing serpentine systems (e.g., to facili- accessible, only used on the downstream side of
tate independent lab isolation capability), subject to the isolation valves for individual labs, joints are min-
following: imized and the tubing shall be opaque jacketed.
PFA tubing joints shall be sanitary heat-fused or
1. Each horizontal main shall serve only outlets on sanitary heat flare. Use of multiple supply mains
a single floor, fed from a supply riser and cir- or return risers per building wing to exceed the
culating back to an end-of-line dedicated return system size limitations is not acceptable.
riser. A total of two floors, with not more than
40 outlets per floor, may be served by such sys- U. Dispensing Outlets: All outlets, including sampling
tems, provided the result is not more than 10 ports shall be oriented for discharge to drain dry when
flow restrictors in series throughout the system, not dispensing water.
and provided required velocities, flows, and V. Connector Hoses: Sanitary heat-flare type polyeth-
pressure requirements are maintained through- ylene (for polypropylene systems) or PFA (for PVDF
out the system. or polypropylene systems) tubing of type and pressure
2. A separate zero-static diaphragm T-valve and rating compatible with system water quality shall be used
in-line flow restrictor (or similar manufactured for final faucet and point of use equipment connections
assembly using zero-static valves) shall be pro- that are not hard piped, provided the hose and connec-
vided to serve each lab, and engineered for the tions are constantly circulating. Alternatively, braided,
number of outlets served. Capacity shall be as non-corrugated PTFE connectors with flare or sanitary
programmed, but at minimum such systems ends may be utilized. Hoses shall be of size to ensure
shall be engineered to provide for at least three at least 0.30 m/s (1 fps) velocity under flow conditions
use point outlets and a total demand flow of at and length shall be minimized. Sanitary tri-clamp con-
least 6.62 lpm (1.75 gpm), plus required recir- nections shall be used where possible. Compression type
culation rate to maintain a flow velocity of at or push-connect hose and tubing configurations are not
least 0.30 m/s (1 fps) under peak demand, per acceptable. Where the hoses are not constantly circulat-
lab. The in-line flow restrictor shall be either an ing and are located within the distribution system (e.g.,
engineered orifice plate of PVDF or 316 stain- polisher connections), use of PFA tubing with sanitary
less steel, or shall be an engineered PFA restric- flare joints or tri-clamp connections is required.
tor tube. Adjustable valves are not permitted.
Each in-line flow restrictor shall be accessible Rationale: This is to avoid contamination
and provide sanitary tri-clamp connections. and joint failure issues. During extended static
Where multiple mains utilize such an arrange- conditions, PFA minimizes leaching of organics.
ment (e.g., two floors), hydraulic modeling is
provided and designed for use with high purity water, with control components shall be recorded on drawings
shall not be conductivity-based, and shall be constructed and in O&M documentation. Orifice plate schedules or
of stainless steel, PTFE, PVDF, or the same material other clear drawing identification shall be provided.
utilized in the piping system. Permanent meters shall be
vortex type (transit time is also acceptable). Ultrasonic
is not acceptable. Each flow meter shall provide local 12.1.7.1 Distilled Water Systems
visual display of flow rate (at the device). Where elec- A. Stills: The use of central distilled water (other than
tronic meters are used for individual lines or labs, only for WFI/pharmaceutical applications) is not acceptable
local display is required (no alert to the BAS). Alert at the NIH.
points shall be to ensure required minimum velocity.
Provide a permanently installed non-contact electronic
flow meter for the following locations: Rationale: Although water quality from a well-
designed and properly operated still fed from
1. Return line from each individual pressure zone, single pass RO can maintain very high water
prior to connecting to storage tank and upstream quality, the operating cost and maintenance needs
of any back-pressure regulator. of such central systems limit their use at the NIH.
4. Loop sanitization shall be accomplished periodi- 9. Vents for ozonated tanks shall include an ozone-
cally by shutting off the central UV and moni- destruct arrangement (stainless steel housed,
toring satisfactory ozone levels in the return heated type only. Catalyst type is not accept-
(typically for less than an hour). Once complete, able). Filters ahead of any such ozone destruct
the post ozone UV shall be activated to destruct shall be PTFE, hydrophobic. Vents shall be prop-
ozone and use of outlets not permitted until erly sized to provide for off-gassing relief with
ozone has adequately disintegrated in the asso- an appropriate safety factor. N + 1 redundancy
ciated dead-legs (overnight typically provides is required for ozone destruct. The arrangement
substantial safety factor at the levels utilized of ozone destruct vents shall be configured to
for routine microbial control) or other positive be effective and safe without compromise of the
means of destruction provided. system water quality or sanitary conditions.
5. Storage tanks shall include submerged dip tubes 10. Ozone injections lines shall be electropolished
and sparging in lieu of spray balls to main- 316 L stainless steel or compatible welded fluo-
tain ozone levels and reduce off-gasing losses. ropolymer and shall be leak tested.
Separate returns and separate tanks/pumps
should be used where multiple pressure zones 11. Where systems are ozonated, the storage tank
are required. Where the recirculation system shall be maintained not to exceed 21C (70F)
must be returned to atmospheric (e.g., for sys- unless sufficient ozone production and efficiency
tems with multiple return pressure zones back has been demonstrated. In all cases distribution
to a single system), the use of spray balls or systems shall be maintained at not to exceed
other air break arrangements are acceptable 21C (70F) prior to ozonation. The use of lower
provided the ozone injection is through a side- temperature operation of RO systems may be
stream loop with static mixer into the storage considered and coordinated with RO membrane
tank through submerged dip tubes and sparg- selection. Required operating temperature of
ing and ozonation sizing is appropriately consid- ozonated systems shall be noted on adjustable
ered to maintain ozone residual into the water. temperature controls with warning labels. A tem-
Tank overpressure protection (e.g., low pressure perature sensor is required at the main return of
stainless rupture disk) shall be provided and the each recirculation loop and shall be arranged to
rupture disk burst indicator shall shut off ozone prevent deactivation of the ozone destruct system
production. unless the loop is sufficiently cool to maintain
ozone in solution, and to alarm upon any over-
6. A warning sign shall be provided adjacent to ride. Where tanks are constantly ozonated, tem-
ozonated water tanks or near the tank open- perature of water must be considered in ozone
ing to direct disablement and flushing or ozone sizing calculations.
destruct for any ozonated tank which has an
operable port or for service of vents. 12. Provisions to control ozone off-gassing within
the water storage tank and throughout the dis-
7. The water supply to the ozone generator shall tribution system shall be included. Placement
include a supply on the upstream side of the back of storage tanks and relief vent (with ozone
pressure regulator (side of the valve that will destruct) located at the top of the distribution
reliably have water flow under all conditions of system is required unless determined unneces-
operation). A check valve shall be provided for sary. Where vent reliefs are required to con-
any connections made back from ozone genera- trol ozone off-gassing (and for tank vents), the
tor to the loop to ensure proper flow direction vent shall route through ozone destruct. Avoid
and protect from ozone migration into the loop. air pockets in the distribution and production
system; however, maintain a closed distribution
8. Leak detection shall be provided for the area loop unless any vents/openings are hydrophobic
housing ozonated water tanks. Tanks shall be filtered and fitted with ozone destruct prior to
labeled indicating presence of ozone. discharge to an approved exterior location.
13. Wetted/ozone contact materials shall be com- loop from the building (for each pressure zone
patible and in conformance with recommenda- in the case of systems serving multiple zones),
tions of the International Ozone Association for the discharge from the storage tank, and for
and requirements of the DRM; including piping post-UV destruct. Manufacturer recommended
materials, components, elastomers, faucet taps, flow cells shall be provided for each instrument
and connector tubing that may be subject to and the arrangement shall ensure accurate mea-
ozone exposure. FKM is the minimum accept- surement in consideration of system flow and
able elastomer (EPDM is not approved). High pressure conditions. The A/E shall provide jus-
purity FFKM (perfluoroelastomer) may also be tification for the dissolved ozone monitor selec-
used where compatible with the application. Vent tion in consideration of accuracy, reliability, and
material shall be 316 L electropolished stain- maintenance requirements. Additional monitors
less steel until downstream of ozone destruct shall be provided as required to ensure efficacy
(or may be IR fusion PVDF if not subject to of monitoring.
damage), then may be stainless steel, PVDF, or
schedule 80 PVC as appropriate. The A/E shall 18. After ozonation and sufficient destruct time,
review the need for heat tracing to control vent an automated loop flush may be applied where
line condensation. Vent penetrations through beneficial.
the roof shall be stainless steel, properly labeled, 19. Failure of the UV destruct, vent destruct, dis-
turned down, stainless steel screened, enlarged solved ozone monitor, water supply failure, detec-
for required free area, and raised above poten- tion of high level ozone to the loop during normal
tial snow line or blockage. All vent lines shall be operation and other conditions as warranted
self-draining to prevent blockage. shall individually incorporate an automatic safety
14. Ozone shall not be maintained constantly in interlock to provide ozonator shutdown, alarm;
distribution systems without prior justifica- and in addition, at levels above 0.1 ppm, distri-
tion and approval. Where such configurations bution shutdown. The ozone destruct UV system
are approved, piping material shall be PVDF shall be monitored independently from the dis-
or 316 L electropolished stainless steel. Ozone solved ozone monitor. Vent destruct shall be
residual shall be maintained constantly in the monitored. Critical safety faults, including ozone
water storage tank. destruction, shall be hard wire interlocked to stop
ozone operation. Operating set point changes
15. Where a common system serves multiple build- and temporary overrides shall require a high level
ing wings or multiple systems with individual pass code, and temporary lower level overrides
returns, each such system return shall be pro- (e.g., may be utilized by knowledgeable personnel
vided with its own dissolved ozone monitor. for a heavy disinfection shall automatically revert
Where common ozone serves multiple building back to 0.1 ppm after 4 hours).
wings, system zoning for sanitization shall be
planned and approved by ORF and may require 20. The location and arrangement of ozone sys-
individual destruct systems. tems shall include ambient ozone monitoring
alarms with an automatic high limit ozonator
16. Regardless of the presence of ozone destruct, shutdown. Any detection in ambient air above
all vents shall terminate to the exterior at a safe the OSHA action level shall provide ozona-
location at least 76 m (25 ft.) from air intakes, tor shutdown and local and remote monitored
building openings, or other occupied areas, and alarm. Ozone monitoring shall be in accordance
at least 76 m (25 ft.) above surrounding grade, with manufacturer recommendations, but in
plants, animals, etc. no case less than one monitor per 50 m 2 (538
ft2) of room area. Coordinate with the HVAC
17. Calibrated, high quality, and high accuracy discipline to ensure safe ventilation conditions.
automatic dissolved ozone monitors requiring no Ambient ozone monitors shall be UV absorp-
chemical additions shall be provided at least at tion type with a validated (certified) lamp and
the following three locations: on the main return
a monitor alarm. Ambient ozone alarms shall be provided by the ozone system manufacturer
provide both local and remote alert to locations or other qualified individual, identifying sig-
as directed by the PO. nificant likely component failures and operator
errors and methods to safely detect and mitigate
21. The required residual ozone levels for each these issues. This document shall be included in
application shall be determined on-site through O&M manuals and training.
consultation with the ozone system engineer or
manufacturer for required efficacy, frequency, 25. All ozone systems shall be commissioned. Post
and off-gas conditions. Ozone levels within the ozone destruct times for fixture branch run-outs
tank are typically maintained at approximately (e.g., typical polisher connections) shall be con-
0.1 ppm and destructed prior to distribution. firmed with the appropriate safety factor, veri-
Typical ozone levels for loop sanitization are fied and recorded in the procedures manual.
in the range 0.10.3 ppm; though application
as high as, but not to exceed, 1.0 ppm may be
permitted where justified if compatible with Rationale: Ozone systems can provide means for
system and safety (including off-gas consider- routine sanitization, minimizing lab disruption.
ation), where the ozone destruct arrangement They should be considered for large systems.
has been sufficiently upsized, and provided the Electrolytic ozone generation provides for direct
method of generation is only electrolytic. Actual production and injection into the water; thus
concentrations are determined by project by the simplifying systems, dissolution, maintenance,
ozone engineer, however normal operating levels safety concerns, avoids toxic gas piping, provides
above 0.3 ppm shall be justified and are subject additional safe control of ozone levels and the
to approval. Frequent sanitization at very low injection process, minimizes potential for gas
levels (e.g., 0.05 0.1 ppm) are recommended to bubbles which can bypass ozone destruction, and
minimize off-gas hazards and prevent the estab- avoids potential impurities and water quality
lishment of significant biofilm but may not be fluctuations.
required where other microbial control practices
have been appropriately addressed in the design
and construction. Where an increase above these
levels is required, it shall be made only via tem-
porary override, with passcode protected access 12.1.9 Quality Control and
and automatic reversion back to base set point.
Designs shall be capable of distribution system
Quality Assurance
sanitization to between 0.3 and 0.5 ppm. Detailed Quality Control/Quality Assurance plans are
required for tailoring to individual materials of con-
22. Where ion exchange is utilized, a bypass shall be struction (e.g., fusion, weld, fabrication, passivation,
provided and located to minimize the portion of testing, and sanitization). The requirements listed below
the piping that will not be sanitized. shall be appropriately addressed:
23. Ozone system sizing, including system specific 1. Welding for piping regardless of type (includ-
variables, off-gas loss, distribution design, and ing plastic systems) shall comply with ANSI/
safety protections shall be additionally reviewed American Welding Society (AWS) specifica-
and acceptable by the ozone system manufacturer. tions for welding procedures, performance
qualifications.
24. Ozonator system startup and training shall be
performed with the manufacturer or qualified 2. Specifications shall mandate installations be
manufacturers authorized representative. A performed by qualified personnel with high
comprehensive guide for routine use, tank, and purity systems of similar cleanliness and mate-
loop sanitization shall be provided; including rial type. Recent training and certification
all relevant safety protocols and recommended (within 12 months) is required for each installer
maintenance frequency. A safety analysis shall
for the specific fusion equipment for fabrication B. Pressure Testing: Systems shall be tested at 150%
of joints and welding qualifications. Refer to design operating pressure for 8 hours, or at the maxi-
Exhibit 6.3. mum working pressure ratings of the system (whichever
is less). Minimum hydrostatic test pressure shall be at
3. Systems shall be protected from contamination least 690 kPa (100 psig) unless approved by the PO.
throughout materials handling, construction, The A/E shall consider the pressure ratings of any joint
testing, and until final acceptance and use. components which may be limiting factors and indepen-
4. A QA plan inclusive of random nondestructive dently test, isolate, or reduce test pressures as appropri-
testing shall be provided. Weld coupon verifi- ate. Test assemblies shall be clean and constructed of
cation for each welder/machine, calibrations, materials suitable for use with high purity systems to
proper installation and cleanliness procedures not introduce contaminants.
shall be addressed through QC and an indepen- C. System Startup: Systems shall be flushed, sanitized
dent comprehensive QA process. and commissioned prior to acceptance. Startup proce-
dures for each component shall strictly follow manufac-
Rationale: Improperly installed systems may not turers instructions. All media beds (carbon, softeners,
maintain system water quality requirements or be etc.) shall be properly conditioned, particle sizes spread/
subject to other costly integrity issues. backwashed, fines flushed, soaked, etc. All instrumen-
tation and controls shall be properly adjusted and
calibrated. All set points and alarms shall be verified.
Presence of proper filter media, elements, carbon, chem-
icals, UV, etc. shall be verified without contaminating
systems. All components shall be verified for proper
12.1.10 System Completion, operation. The system flow rates (each circuit) and pres-
Startup and Verification sure sustaining valves shall be adjusted and verified,
including pressure sustaining valve response/adjustment
A. Contamination Protection: Precautions shall be
at simulated peak demand. Presence of proper size/
taken throughout the startup, testing, commission-
location and orientation of flow restrictors shall be con-
ing, and preoccupancy phases to prevent proliferation
firmed. Omission of cross-connections shall be verified.
of biofilms or other loss of system capability to reli-
Commissioning, including integrated systems testing is
ably deliver required water quality. Where systems are
required.
wetted, microbial control must be maintained. Where
systems are drained, they must be dried with a purge of D. Sanitization, Water Sampling and Laboratory
clean, dry, filtered argon from a cryogenic source; how- Analysis: System sanitization, water sampling and asso-
ever, compressed gas pressurization shall not be applied ciated laboratory analysis is required as part of the
to plastic systems. system verification, prior to acceptance.
Contents:
12.2.0 Introduction
12.2.5 Distribution
12.2.7 Materials
The requirements of this section are intended for the 2. Water has been prepared and packaged in com-
typical animal research models used at the NIH, includ- pliance with 21 CFR 165.110 and 21 CFR 129.
ing small vertebrate mammals up to and including non-
human primates (NHPs). Where large animals are uti- 3. Water is refrigerated and used or dispensed
lized, variations of requirements may apply and shall within shelf life prior to deterioration.
be evaluated on a project-specific basis to ensure not 4. Water is sterile produced and packaged in accor-
less than plumbing-code compliant fresh, potable water. dance with an appropriate aseptic technique
The requirements of this section of the DRM are not with suitable packaging and dispensed within
intended to apply to non-mammal species, including shelf life prior to deterioration.
aquatics and semiaquatic amphibians.
consistent with quality requirements for the application variations are determined acceptable for a specific pro-
to ensure quality and purity. The use of additives shall gram, steps to control and maintain stability of water
be reliably controlled and automatically monitored. conditions and continuity of supply and to protect
Maximum levels shall be in conformance with SDWA and maintain that quality within those parameters is
and ANSI/NSF-60, but in no case greater than permit- required.
ted by the program veterinarian.
E. Central Fill vs. Piped Distribution Criteria: The G. On-site Water Testing: On-site water testing shall
water source, production requirements, and system be performed during the design phase to analyze the
design providing water for central-filled animal drink- influent water quality and confirm appropriate treat-
ing water systems (e.g., bottle and packet fill stations), ment and any necessary pretreatment steps to ensure
including point of use treatment systems are subject reliable and trouble free performance. The investigation
to the same requirements as for piped distribution of of available water supply quality shall include the deter-
animal drinking water. mination of seasonal and source variations in the water
supply and the extent of contaminants.
Rationale: The method of delivery does not 1. The testing shall be carried out by a water
change the requirement for water quality and quality lab that is at a minimum accredited in
continuity. accordance with International Organization
for Standardization (ISO) 17025 by a signatory
F. Determination of Risks: In determining the arrange- to the International Laboratory Accreditation
ment of ADW systems, the A/E shall ensure that risks Cooperation (ILAC) mutual recognition agree-
which may compromise reliable water quality and con- ment and performing testing that is within the
tinuity up to the point of delivery to the animals have scope of their accreditation. Sample collection
been considered and discussed, and that required design shall be carried out either by the lab or under
actions have been integrated to ensure a continuous, their direction by experienced personnel. At
reliable, controlled, and high quality water supply. This least two on-site (or in the case of new construc-
includes but is not limited to identifying and address- tion, near-site) representative samples shall be
ing: potential disruptions or loss of source water supply; taken, and shall consider the worst case source
site-specific hazards; unplanned loss of assumed source water condition (e.g., generally the surface water
water quality; production/treatment system failures; supply).
plausible system malfunction; line breakage; electrical 2. Where a facility incorporates upstream water
and standby power failure alert; response-, system-, or treatment (including centralized softening of
equipment-monitoring failures; cross-contamination potable water distribution or other centralized
and backflow; tampering; microbial contamination treatment, disinfection, or adjustment), any
prevention and detection; and system security. The spe- byproducts of the upstream treatment process
cial needs and risks associated with each portion of the and actual water qualities at the location of the
system shall be addressed, including unique characteris- proposed ADW system shall be evaluated to
tics and risks inherent with each design approach (e.g., determine the actual available water supply at
potential for byproducts, microbial contamination, the ADW production equipment.
and additive levels control). Even where anticipated
5. Upon receipt of testing, the A/E shall perform Rationale: Laboratory water supplies (including
the comprehensive water quality analysis to high purity water) may not be consistently suitable
ensure appropriate equipment selection and and under the necessary control for ADW and
identify and address any concerns unique to the do not meet potable water system requirements.
project site and research program. Requirements for operation and maintenance
of an ADW system versus for other laboratory
and purified systems may not be compatible and
Rationale: A proper understanding of source
could be at risk associated with chemical usage
water conditions is essential for appropriate
and variables beyond control of the ARF staff.
treatment, assurance of reliability, and
minimization of maintenance. On-site sampling
is required for accurate and reliable representative J. System Backup: A non-stagnant pressurized potable
data on water quality. Required test parameters water backup connection shall be provided for emer-
can vary with source and supply type and a gency bypass service or redundant online dedicated
number of site variables, including anticipated ADW production equipment. Backups from other sys-
treatment methods. The primary goal of testing tems are unacceptable. A flush out valve shall be pro-
water supplies that are served from reliable vided just upstream of the point of connection to the
municipal SDWA compliant supplies ensures ADW distribution and the normally closed valve at the
interconnection shall be located immediately at the dis-
tribution connection to preclude dead-leg.
K. Protection: No item, equipment, design or installa- shall address future planned usage but does not waive
tion arrangement shall be introduced into the system that DRM requirements.
can plausibly cause contamination or risk to safe water
quality, regardless of system pressure or flow status. B. Treatment Methodology/System Configuration:
With limited exceptions, dedicated RO with either pre-
L. Documentation: ADW systems shall be fully engi- liminary granular activated carbon (GAC) or activated
neered and documented to the same extent required as carbon block filtration is the required treatment method
for other plumbing and process systems. The A/E shall for makeup water supplies. The addition of chemicals is
either completely design and document ADW systems not acceptable and chemicals shall not be used as a sub-
or (where acceptable to the PO) provide sufficient docu- stitute for softening, to address anti-scaling functions,
mentation of the intended system arrangement for final or as a substitute for activated carbon (to address chlo-
vendor design and subsequent A/E and NIH approval. rine and chloramines). This is not intended to prohibit
Vendor designed systems are not exempt from DTR use of residual disinfectants or pH adjustment of water
review and DRM requirements. that has been treated on-site by the RO process. The use
of oxidizing UV for chlorine reduction in lieu of carbon
M. ADW System Monitoring: The ADW system shall is not acceptable due to potential byproducts of oxida-
include appropriate instrumentation, equipment, and tion of organics.
alarms to facilitate monitoring of critical system perfor-
mance parameters. Instrumentation shall be appropri-
ately calibrated and instrumentation connections shall Rationale: The use of RO water (preceded by
be designed to minimize dead-legs. Instrumentation shall activated carbon) provides a stable baseline to
be applied, installed, and set up consistent with manu- allow facilities control over water quality,
facturers requirements. Sampling ports shall be located protects from unforeseen variations, endocrine
and configured for effective sampling and selected and disruptors, trihalomethanes, and various
arranged to prevent dead-legs. Monitoring shall be to the unregulated contaminants and pesticides,
program approved location/ARF monitoring system. and allows controlled addition of chlorine or
acidification with minimal risk of byproducts.
N. Verification Prior to Use or Occupancy: Systems Water that is potable for human consumption may
shall be completely flushed, sanitized, and validated require additional treatment to ensure the water is
for water quality at both the source equipment location reliable and suitable for various animal models in
and terminal outlets after completion but prior to use biomedical research programs, and minimizes
or occupancy. the potential of unintended research variables.
O. ADW Discharges: A proper air gap above flood level ADW systems are at enhanced risk of microbial
rim is required for all discharge points. contamination and are well served by RO when
followed by additional microbial control measures
P. Standby Power: The entire ADW system, including (e.g., provision of residual disinfectant and
monitoring and alarms shall be on building standby flushing).
power.
C. Exceptions to RO Systems: The best acceptable tech-
nology to maximize local control, while ensuring con-
formance with the requirements of the animal model
12.2.2 ADW Production shall be utilized. This may at times consist of alterna-
tives e.g., nanofiltration with activated carbon pretreat-
Systems ment, or ultrafiltration; each with specific pretreatment
A. Design for the Research Model: In establishing arrangements, and if necessary reintroduction of miner-
ADW supplies, the water quality needs of the research als to controlled levels in the water or diet, along with
model shall be addressed. Consultation with the pro- microbial control. Additional requirements include:
gram should occur during planning phase phase and
1. Omission of RO with activated carbon is not
acceptable for animals of non-conventional
4. The use of carbon shall require downstream 9. Appropriate controls to minimize risk of cross-
RO, nanofiltration, or ultrafiltration, in addi- contamination and SOPs in the event of a known
tion to maintenance of disinfectant residual to water supply emergency must be addressed.
provide microbial control.
5. The application of pretreatment filters and/or Rationale: Significant risk to science, animals, and
carbon filters alone to remove particulate and costs can be associated with contaminated ADW
residual disinfectants (e.g., taste and odor fil- systems, especially where severe biofilms with
ters) may leave the system prone to excessive viable pathogens develop. Water quality can change
microbial and biofilm contamination or other significantly in a very short period; therefore,
contaminants and is not acceptable. testing at least quarterly should occur. Sudden
unplanned events can lead to boil-water orders or
other precautions, which can be difficult to quickly
Rationale: It is important for water systems implement or may not be immediately detected.
serving animals to include at least microbial
controls and stabilization/protection of water
D. Water Softening: Where water softening is needed, G. Chemical Compatibility Analysis: Chemicals added
duplex automatic alternating equipment is required to water supplies shall only be made with a stable source
with potable water resin. Refer to Section 12.1 for addi- (e.g., RO or nanofiltration waters), or where justified by
tional information. RO systems shall be provided after a comprehensive feed water analysis and suitable moni-
softening, unless justified and approved by NIH. toring program. The use of acidification of water sup-
plies is not acceptable, unless residual chlorine has first
E. Remineralization/Additives: Where RO or water been removed, and shall only be conducted where an RO
softening is employed in the feed water supply the A/E process inclusive of activated carbon has been employed.
shall verify with the program veterinarian if there is Chlorine additions must consider the potential variations
special concern or need for diet additives (e.g., vita- of incoming supplies.
mins, USP mineral supplementation, magnesium, cal-
cium etc.).
Rationale: The addition of chemicals to water
must be undertaken only with a thorough
Rationale: Once water has been softened, understanding, control, and monitoring of the
calcium and magnesium are largely removed and chemistry of the incoming water supply. Incoming
systems may be at increased risk of microbial water supplies can be subject to variation and
contamination associated with brine, resin, and toxic byproducts can result. Systems are not
ADW is generally not desirable unless required c. Where circulating systems are utilized,
for condensation prevention. The RO membrane main distribution water shall circulate back
must be compatible and sized in consideration of through the tank and then through low
temperatures. pressure 254 nm UV, followed by a 0.1 m
microfilter or ultrafiltration.
8. Fail-safe overtemperature control is required.
Provide N + 1 (in parallel) ASSE certified ther-
mostatic control arrangement at makeup as Rationale: Microfiltration or ultrafiltration is
required. Cold water makeup may be used beneficial in maintaining microbial control in
where condensation and membrane capacity are systems when preceded by RO, especially in
addressed. Exposed insulation of ADW distribu- addressing microbes that pass imperfections
tion lines within the ARF is not permitted. or grow-through the RO membrane. Where
circulation systems are used, circulation back
9. Gas-tight, sealed and filter-vented storage tank through the tank maximizes turnover and
(duplex recommended). Refer to Section 12.2.7, agitation. Low pressure UV is required to protect
Materials for additional requirements. from formation of potential toxic byproducts.
10. Redundant (two in parallel), normally operat- Further details of filter requirements are in Section
ing sanitary distribution pumps. Pumps shall be 12.2.7, Materials.
arranged to preclude dead zones. Pumps shall
operate continuously. Utilize VFDs if required. 12. System controls and alarms (including tank level
monitoring) are required.
11. Comply with the following post-RO micro-
filtration arrangements in N + 1 (parallel) 13. Proportioning arrangement for chlorina-
configuration: tion, chlorine dioxide, (or acidification where
approved) except for systems that operate with-
a. Where non-circulating (flushing type) sys- out disinfectant residual. See Section 12.2.4,
tems are utilized, provide microfiltration Microbial Control.
downstream of distribution pumps (just
after the storage tank and pumps), but prior 14. Proportioning/injector arrangement for mineral
to distribution to outlets. Refer to Section supplementation if required.
12.2.7, Materials for additional require-
ments. Microfiltration may be omitted for B. Monitoring Components: Monitoring components
large animal applications and animals of shall include at a minimum:
conventional health status; provided chlori- 1. A programmable logic controller (PLC) with
nation residual between 0.1 to 0.4 ppm is non-volatile memory for control function.
maintained throughout the system or chlo- Arrangement shall be provided to maintain con-
rine dioxide residual is maintained, as well tinuous operation in event of failure of the system
as for applications serving all animals where PLC. Control and equipment arrangement shall
the ADW TOC levels will be less than 500 minimize potential for plausible single point fail-
ppb and chlorine or chlorine dioxide (only) ure. Alarm functions shall not fail due to loss
residual is maintained. of primary power supply. General Fault and
b. Where systems do not maintain constant Critical Fault conditions must be remotely
post-treatment chlorination or chlorine diox- annunciated, unless the program requires
ide residual, low pressure 254 nm UV shall detailed remote annunciations. Such sequences
be provided upstream of microfiltration, in shall be approved by the program during design.
a N + 1 (parallel) configuration. Membrane Software and control system shall be validated for
prefilters ahead of the microfilters shall be proper operation. PLC shall retain a minimum of
determined by the A/E on an application spe- the most recent 180 days of system status/faults.
cific basis.
2. Instrumentation and controls for monitoring 7. Oxidation reduction potential (ORP), pH, digi-
feed pressure, permeate pressure, interstage tal UV intensity and lamp-out indicator(s) for
pressure, concentrate pressure, online resistivity UV (as applicable); each selected and config-
for feed water and permeate, feed temperature, ured for accuracy based on water quality at the
flow metering for feed water permeate and con- instruments location.
centrate, totalizing meter for permeate, temper-
ature and pressure monitoring, control protec-
tion, and an adjustable reject flow rate control Rationale: pH and ORP in RO permeate
valve. Automation shall be provided for con- applications will typically require side-stream
trols necessary to protect from system damage stabilized flow across the reference junction
(e.g., low feed pressure, high temperature, etc.). in a grounded housing. In post-ultrafiltration
Automatic restart shall be provided for RO applications, low ionic strength solutions would
system features (e.g., low pressure); however, not be present.
fault conditions shall be recorded. All meters
and controls are to be of non-contaminating, 8. Additive/reagent level or status
sanitary-type configurations.
9. Level monitoring and failure alarms for all
3. Temperature monitoring for production and proportioners/metering
distribution systems. A separate monitor for
system distribution temperature is required, 10. Chemical injection-proportioner/feed water
independent of any monitoring for the RO and/ totaling a minimum of 180 days of electronic
or makeup water system. data retention. Verify required duration
according to the program requirements. Other
4. Vortex-type or other highly accurate non-con- monitored water quality parameters shall also
taminating meter (not reliant on conductivity) be stored in the electronic record if necessary
for feed to water storage tank for integration by program.
with proportioner/injectors.
11. Pressure and flow monitoring of individual
5. ADW storage level sensors shall be non-contact pressure-reducing valve (PRV)/flush stations.
type, hygienic radar or pressure based level
sensor, and located so that tank shall not need C. Storage Tank: Usable total storage tank volume shall
to be emptied to adjust. Ultrasonic level detec- provide for at least 2448 hours peak system demand.
tion is not acceptable. Redundant (in series) tank Sizing shall be based upon daily requirements for the
fill control valve coordinated with tank level total planned population load (all racks connected) con-
controls, except where tanks utilize overflow sidering daily consumption demand for each species, plus
instead of a sanitary rupture disk. PLC to moni- the required 20% overage. The use of duplex tanks in
tor and alarm high tank level and rupture disk parallel (12 to 24 hours capacity each) is recommended.
burst indicator. Tanks shall include individual valves and drain lines.
Central storage of unchlorinated water is not acceptable.
monitor the pressure setting. Upstream of pressure- to ensure complete flushing without standing water
reducing valves at the source makeup supply, pressure remaining on the downstream (non-pressurized) side of
shall not be below 241 kPa (35 psig), and pressure the solenoid flush valve to the greatest extent possible.
upstream of zoning pressure regulators shall not be After the flush valve, lines shall be sloped to drain at
below 138 kPA (20 psig) or above 552 kPa (80 psig). 2% or greater.
Pressure control for the distribution system to rooms/
use points shall be maintained specific to the animal G. Crossing Biosafety Levels, Cross-Contamination
species and nozzle type. Individual regulators at each Control: Systems shall not serve across higher biosafety
rack/use point in lieu of zoning is not acceptable. levels. Dependent upon application or risk, appropri-
ate means of cross-contamination control shall be
considered.
Rationale: Excess pressure can prevent operation
of drinking water nozzles. H. Fresh Water Turnover and Routine Flushing
Velocity: Systems shall be arranged to ensure fresh
water system turnover. System flush volume/duration
B. Room Level Zoning: Dedicated pressure control sta- shall automatically turnover the entire piping contents
tions shall be provided for each room to permit program of each section of the system at least twice daily at a
flexibility, except that a single pressure control station velocity of at least 0.610.91 m/s (23 fps).
(PCS) may serve multiple rooms housing the same spe-
cies within the same suite where approved by program I. Pipe and Pump Sizing: In sizing piping and pumps for
management. circulating systems a minimum velocity of 0.30 m/s (1
fps) is required; however, not less than 0.61 m/s (2 fps)
C. Building Level Zoning: Where a production system for stainless steel, including under conditions of circula-
serves more than one floor, building, or building wing, tion and simultaneous flushing. Maximum velocity for
each floor or other major area shall be separately zoned all systems shall not exceed 1.52 m/s (5 fps) for plastic or
with independent horizontal supply and return main(s) 2.44 m/s (8 fps) for stainless. Flushing type systems shall
provided for each floor and building area. The piping be sized based on requirements for routine flushing veloc-
system distribution on each floor and building wing ity. Avoid oversizing systems.
shall be independent of other floors or building wings
at least to the connection with the main supply and J. Redundant/Alternating Equipment: Distribution
return riser. Refer to Section 8.1, Plumbing General equipment (e.g., pumps) required to maintain system
Requirements. Preapproval by all affected programs is flow shall be redundant and alternating at least every
required for any shared system arrangements. 12 hours or maintained in constant operation. Flushing
pressures shall not pose hazards to animals.
D. Distribution Concepts: Distribution systems shall
be arranged to ensure either: (1) continuous circulat- K. Supply to Demand Ratio: Pumps and piping shall be
ing flow of the supply and return piping mains with sized and calculations shall demonstrate that sufficient
supplemental flushing of individual rack manifolds or flow rate is provided to achieve a supply to demand ratio
room branch lines, or (2) to provide complete auto- (SDR) of at least 1.7:1 under all demand conditions
mated flushing of the entire system including individ- and variations of total connected rack load, including
ual rack manifolds. Circulation is not a substitute for during flushing.
maintaining disinfectant residual.
E. Contamination Protection, Rack Manifolds: After Rationale: Provision of adequate flow and
the supply drop to individual rack manifolds, the mani- maintenance of positive pressure throughout the
fold shall flush to a room or individual manifold flush system under all conditions are key elements
connection so that there is no distribution of water past to avoiding backflow or inducing system
drinking water nozzles from one rack manifold to the contamination. 1.7:1 is based upon a minimum
supply of the next manifold or room. criteria of 1.5:1, plus the mandatory 20% overage
required for distribution mains and primary
F. Free Draining, Stagnancy Protection: Flushing equipment sizing per DRM requirements.
arrangements and associated piping shall be organized
L. Distribution Pump Operation: Systems shall be approved by the user group provided this has
arranged such that both the primary and redundant been arranged to ensure positive flushing.
pump may be brought online simultaneously and
selected to achieve an elevated flushing velocity of at 2. Circulating Distribution Systems: Piping
least 0.91 m/s (3 fps), but preferably 1.521.83 m/s (56 arrangements shall distribute through a hori-
fps) to the extent possible for periodic, supervised flush- zontal serpentine arrangement from one room
ing. Under such conditions, maximum velocities any- to the next or through a flow verified and prop-
where in the system shall not exceed 2.44 m/s (8 fps). erly balanced horizontal supply and parallel
return piping mains system (e.g., a horizontal
M. Automatic Flushing or Circulating Distribution direct return or reverse return mains arrange-
Type: Systems shall be automatic flushing or circulated ment, where a single common supply feed is pro-
type with supplemental flushing as follows: vided and extended to each room with return
back to single or multiple return mains). Each
1. Automatic Flushing Distribution Systems: return branch shall be fitted with a flow meter
Central production systems shall distribute and balancing device to verify proper flow, and
ADW through a horizontal serpentine distri- with the exception of serpentine systems or sys-
bution arrangement to each holding room, or tems with individual room flush, a single supply
through a horizontal central supply main with and return connection shall be provided for
an individual branch to each holding room, each room. Circulated distribution systems shall
provided the arrangement maintains required comply with the following:
minimum flow velocity at all times. Systems
that rely upon flushings are only acceptable for a. Circulating systems shall be arranged to
applications that maintain residual disinfectant. achieve complete and constant (24/7) cir-
Refer to Section 12.2.4, Microbial Control. culation of supply mains and through all
Automatic flushing systems shall comply with returns. Circulation systems shall ensure
the following: that storage tank contents are turned over at
least once every two hours.
a. Multiple zones shall be provided as per the
program requirements or as appropriate for b. The recirculation shall return back through
varying species. the inlet side of the 254 nm UV and micro-
filter or ultrafilter after passing through the
b. The distribution main within each room storage tank.
shall individually connect to each rack man-
ifold. The ends of each manifold shall auto- c. Drops to individual rack manifolds shall
matically flush through a plumbing code connect to an S type rack manifold or
compliant fixed air gap to a sink, drain/ similar arrangement that flushes completely
trough, or individually connect to a collec- and is not recirculated. The end of each rack
tor manifold discharging through a fixed air manifold shall be automatically flushed.
gap to an approved location.
d. Where pressure zoning is to be provided,
c. Reverse S- type manifolds (with supply dedicated PRV stations are required for each
from the bottom) are preferable to allow room to permit program flexibility, except
complete flushing and removal of air; how- that a single PRV station may serve up to
ever, alternative equivalent arrangements six rooms of the same type within the same
may be utilized as approved by the program. program where approved by the user group.
d. Dedicated PRV stations are required for e. Forced circulation shall not occur through
each room to permit program flexibility, PRV stations in any closed loop configura-
except that, a single PRV station (single tion (e.g., between the high pressure and
zone) may serve up to six rooms of the same low pressure sides of the PRV). Once pres-
type within the same program and where sure is reduced, it shall not be blended back
into a higher pressure system, and the use of be individually activated or disabled by at least room
attempts to compensate (e.g., orifice plates, level to facilitate system repair without necessitating
flow control valves, remote control sensors) total system shutdown. Each zone shall be provided
are unacceptable. Where multiple zones with valving to facilitate independent isolation without
must return to the tank, each return shall affecting the rest of the system.
be direct to a tank port located above the
highest tank water line in an atmospheric P. Temperature Control: Water temperature at any
vented storage tank or to a common line point in the distribution system shall be program
at the main tank return (sized to preclude driven. The maximum temperature of all systems shall
backpressure). Vent and return port place- be controlled (typically with automatic flushing) and
ment shall be coordinated to protect the monitored. Distribution should be maintained at 15.5
hydrophobic vent filter from water blockage. 18.3C (6065F) where acceptable to the program
management, especially for services to large animals,
f. A means of controlling flow for each return as this temperature range may retard microbial growth.
shall be provided. Engineered flow restric- Minimum temperature shall consider condensation
tor tubes or calibrated orifices may be pro- issues. The A/E shall consider all heat sources, including
vided where the full load of each room has from any pumped circulation and UV in determining
been considered in the system design. Where temperature control requirements. The A/E shall review
manual valves are utilized, they shall include municipal seasonal temperature records to ensure at all
a memory-set locking feature/position indi- times water temperature will be suitable for the appli-
cator. Manually adjustable valves shall not be cation. Where required a double-wall sanitary heat
located where subject to tampering. Required exchanger shall be provided to cool the system.
set points shall be recorded on the valve and
also marked in O&M documentation. Q. Horizontal Piping: Horizontal piping shall be
mounted at least 300 mm (12 in.) above rack height or
g. The return from each building wing, from be protected to minimize potential for damage from ani-
each floor, and also (or in the case of single mals or mechanical impact. The use of plastic mounting
area systems) the main return at the end of clips for piping shall be avoided; however, plastic-lined
distribution but prior to the back-pressure clamps may be required for certain plastic piping.
regulator (where provided) shall include a
manually adjustable flow control valve and
an electronic flow meter with visual indica- Rationale: Plastic mounting clips have been
tion and remote flow monitoring through subject to premature breakage from rack
the use of a non-contact type flow meter. movements, impact, cleaning, and wear.
N. Untreated Potable Distribution Systems: Where such R. Rack Flood Prevention: The A/E shall review rack
systems are permitted (typically for large/outdoor ani- flood prevention requirements with each small animal
mals) systems shall be designed as an automatic flush- program. Special ADW nozzles, anti-flood, or flow alert
ing type, maintained with sufficient residual disinfec- sensors and controls may be required where automated
tant of same type as in the incoming feed water supply, systems are provided.
and shall terminate with an air gap to any troughs or
other arrangement to protect from cross-contamina-
tion. ASSE 1013 backflow protection and a break tank
arrangement with repressurization pump is required.
Valves and nozzles must be suitable for scaling proper- 12.2.6 Disaster Mitigation
ties of the water. All segments of the system shall be
A. System Failures: Ensure that, even with failure of
configured to achieve automatic turnover of entire pipe
primary equipment and incoming building potable
contents at least twice per day.
water, drinking water supply to animals will not be
O. Valving Independence: System controls or valv- compromised.
ing arrangements shall permit flushing processes to
B. Redundancy: Redundant water conditioning com- selected to ensure compatibility with system
ponents or other provisions shall be provided. Address sanitization and operating methods.
in the projects BOD.
C. Backup/Emergency Supply: Continuity of undis- Rationale: Natural rubber shall not be used in
rupted water supply is mandatory and consultation with ADW systems as it serves as a nutrient for
the user group in consideration of site-specific risks is bacteria. FDA food-contact-compliant materials
required. Provisions to ensure an emergency backup are required due to the wide range of variation
supply, preserve its quality, and to minimize risk of loss in elastomer formulations and processing,
of service are required and shall be evaluated on a proj- some of which include lead and leachable
ect specific basis. An emergency potable water bypass chemicals, and can induce a variety of
backed by a potable water emergency remote supply contaminants.
connection point on the main building potable water
supply should be considered. Reliance on building water B. Contamination Prevention: All materials shall
supplies alone is not sufficient for backup. be stored, handled, installed, and flushed or sani-
D. Major Fault Alert/Loss of Water Supply: Automatic tized as required to prevent unacceptable levels of
monitoring is required to provide the most immediate contamination.
alert for system malfunction. C. Stainless Steel: At the NIH, the required ADW dis-
tribution system material for most systems is electropo-
lished type 316/316 L stainless steel tubing with either
clean/sanitary joints or 316 L electropolished with
12.2.7 Materials orbital weld joints and post weld passivation by a quali-
fied firm specializing in high purity, food industry, or
A. Minimum Materials Quality: All wetted materials, biopharmaceutical systems. Stainless steel is acceptable
sealants, and installation methods shall be selected to for use with sulfuric acid.
ensure compliance as 21 CFR approved for food con-
tact. Proper certifications of compliance and/or list- 1. Stainless steel is not recommended for systems
ings to ANSI/NSF-61, NSF-14, 21 CFR food contact that will be acidified with hydrochloric acid.
materials provisions, or USP Class V or Class VI are Hydrochloric acid is often preferred where acid-
acceptable evidence of satisfactory materials to meet ification is being provided and shall be verified
this requirement. with the program management.
1. The A/E shall specify that methods utilized in 2. Alternative plastics (where acidification is pro-
constructing and testing systems (including vided) shall be used as follows:
tools) be sufficiently clean to prevent inducing
a. For systems maintaining residual disinfec-
unacceptable contaminants.
tant, stress crack resistant grades of high
2. Elastomers shall be reviewed for compatibility density polyethylene or polyvinylidene flu-
with selected sanitization methods. Generally, oride (PVDF) pipe or tubing may be used.
only 21 CFR 177.2600 FDA-, NSF-61, or alter- Polypropylene should not be used where
natively USP Class V- or Class VI- (or equiva- bleach will be utilized as a sanitant or where
lent ISO 10933-) compliant grades of ethylene elevated chlorine or chlorine dioxide resid-
propylene diene monomer (EPDM), Viton/ ual will be maintained. Non-translucent
FKM, polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), silicone, grades that are NSF-61, 21 CFR 177.1520,
or other approved fluoroelastomers may be uti- or CFR 177.2510 compliant shall be used.
lized. Natural rubber shall not be utilized at Where systems maintain residual disinfec-
any point in the system. The A/E shall specify tant, socket fusion is permissible, though
certification of elastomers ensure an appropriate IR fusion is recommended. Where systems
matching of elastomers to the piping material do not maintain residual disinfectant, joints
shall be IR fusion type; except that, not more
than 15% of joints may be conventional butt F. Valves: Valves shall be constructed of 316 L stainless
fusion where required due to site conditions steel, 21 CFR 177.1520 or 21 CFR 177.2510 compliant
and the use of clean and bagged pipe and plastic, and shall be provided with approved FDA com-
fittings is recommended. Approved sani- pliant elastomers.
tary joint mechanical fittings (e.g., PVDF or
polypropylene sanitary ferrule or sanitary Within the distribution system of systems that operate
flare systems) may also be permitted where without continuous disinfectant residual, the use of dia-
such fittings are exposed. phragm valves are required. For systems that operate
with sufficient disinfectant residual, stainless steel or
b. Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) materials (includ- compatible plastic ball valves (to match system mate-
ing CPVC) are unacceptable. rial) may be utilized.
at 0.1 m. Hydrophilic membrane filters provid- I. RO System: RO systems shall be of beverage pro-
ing 3 log reduction in conformance with these duction/commercial grade systems with TFC (polyam-
requirements, as well as hydrophilic membrane ide) high rejection membranes. No PVC downstream of
filters providing 6 log 0.2 m per ASTM F838 carbon pretreatment. Chemical or metal impregnated
may be utilized. Filters shall be 100% integrity spaces shall not be used. Motors shall be wash down
tested and shall be compliant per 21 CFR for duty if unit is located in cage wash, otherwise no less
food contact. Seal designs shall be Type 222 or than TEFC. High pressure pump(s) shall be stainless,
226 style, with or without fin, and shall be Code including the impeller. Distance between the RO per-
2, 3, 7, or 8 style as appropriate. Housings shall meate source and storage tank shall be minimized.
be sanitary type to hold filter elements a mini- Instrumentation/monitoring to be per requirements of
mum 254 mm (10 in.) in length. Multi-element this section. The use of RO process design software is
housings may be used as required; however, required unless comprehensive RO membrane process
N + 1 redundancy requires at least two hous- analysis has been provided. Membranes shall be selected
ings. Sizing shall be sufficient that changing fre- to achieve minimization of organics (TOC).
quency is three months or greater. This same cri-
teria applies where point of use filters are used. J. Pumps: Pumps downstream of RO systems shall be
Filter assemblies may be disposable or element- in conformance with Section 12.1, High Purity Water
in-housing type. Systems. Where systems maintain residual disinfec-
tant that may be corrosive to stainless steel, sanitary
A manufacturer recommended graded pre- fluoropolymer lined centrifugal pumps should be uti-
filtration membrane shall be provided where lized. Where no RO is utilized, pumps shall be at least
upstream RO, nanofiltration, or ultrafiltraton is as approved for potable water and compatible with
not present. system disinfectants, typically 316/316 L stainless steel.
Sanitary pumps may be waived for systems with dis-
infectant residual where pumps are maintained online.
Rationale: Stringent specification for the primary
filter is significant to maintaining microbial K. Tanks: Tanks shall be in accordance with Section
control and low particle count. These filters 12.1, High Purity Water Systems. Tanks shall be gas-
should not be used without upstream RO due to tight and have a sanitary rupture disk; except that, gas-
potential for plugging. tight tanks and a rupture disk are not required where
tanks are maintained with residual disinfectant. NSF-61
H. System Materials: All wetted system materials and 21 CFR 177.1520 compliant tanks may also be
(piping, tanks, etc.) shall be opaque and inert to pre- used where tanks are maintained with residual disin-
vent unacceptable leaching of contaminants. Where fectant and tanks are of polypropylene or linear high
non-opaque or non-UV resistant materials are utilized, density polyethylene construction. Tank material shall
such materials must be encased or shielded in compat- be confirmed compatible with system sanitants and dis-
ible, durable, seamless jacketing (typically 20 to 30 mil infectant residual concentrations. Tank bottoms shall
plasticizer free PVC or PP pipe wrap). Material selec- be conical or dished with a bottom outlet to the system.
tion within ARFs shall maintain sanitary requirements, Tanks shall be opaque or opaque jacketed with compat-
cleanability, and pest-control features. Metal compo- ible material. Tank stands shall be non-corroding.
nents used within the purified ADW wetted system shall 1. Tank level sensors shall be pressure or radar
be type 316 L stainless steel only. type.
3. The tank shall be filtered and vented to maintain M. Hoses: Flexible PVC hoses shall be avoided as they
atmospheric pressure. contain significant plasticizers. Where hoses are required
they shall be smooth interior bore non-contaminating
4. Where water is stored in tanks that do not con-
type, fluoropolymer/fluoropolymer lined or of DRM
tinuously maintain required disinfectant resid-
approved system tubing materials, and rated for at least
ual, tanks shall be provided with a low pressure
1034 kPa (150 psi) working pressure. Cage rack/recoil
sensitive sanitary type rupture disk burst indica-
hoses shall be chlorine and 60C (180F) temperature
tor in lieu of tank overflows. The rupture disk
resistant, pressure rated, and shall not include natural
shall be piped to drain. The rupture disk shall
rubber (typically PVDF/stainless).
be selected for maximum tank pressure rating
and to prevent false tripping (including under N. UV Disinfection Systems: UV systems for disinfec-
conditions of sudden tank level changes). Tank tion shall be 254 nm low pressure type and provide a
construction and rupture disk shall comply fluence of at least 60,000100,000 Ws/cm 2 UV new
with Section 12.1.5.1, Materials Selection and lamp and 30,00050,000 Ws/cm 2 at end of lamp
Miscellaneous Component Criteria. life. Light traps are required for non-stainless piping.
Comply with UV Systems General Requirements,
5. Burst indicators shall be provided for tanks with
12.1.5.1.J. Redundancy is not required.
rupture disks and shall signal an alarm condi-
tion to the system PLC. Ensure vent and filter O. Flushing Valves: Automated flush valves shall be
sizing is adequate to maintain atmospheric pres- slow-close (anti-shock) type.
sure with an arrangement to preclude vent block-
age (heat trace type filter housing as required to
prevent moisture from blocking the hydrophobic
vent filter).
12.2.8 Startup and
Rationale: These requirements help maintain Verification
microbial control and prevent contamination. A. Prior to Use: Prior to use, the entire system shall
Overflows are a source of contamination and be thoroughly flushed, commissioned, and disinfected
(with the exception of appropriately filtered air with approved methods compatible with piping system
vents) tanks must be sealed for contaminant materials. Delivered water quality shall be comprehen-
control. sively tested by qualified labs.
Contents:
12.3.4.1 Compressed Air Quality 12.3.6 CO2 Lab Gas, Additional Requirements
12.3.4.2 Compressed Air System 12.3.7 Liquid and Gaseous Lab Nitrogen,
Source Arrangement Additional Requirements
automatic manifold systems, provided each cyl- or Level D, but at least ASTM B819 for copper tube
inder bank pressure is automatically monitored and fittings and CGA G4.1. In no case shall gas systems
(upstream of the primary pressure regulators) deliver less than Grade 3.0 purity class services and par-
and with no buried piping. Where a cryogenic ticles shall in no case exceed ISO 8573-1 2010 Class 3;
bulk supply with no buried piping is used and a or requirements for the application, whichever is more
fully automatic NFPA-99 gas manifold second- stringent.
ary reserve is provided in a temperature compat-
ible location, no additional emergency reserve is E. Standby Power and Critical Systems: Standby power
required. shall be provided for electrically operated compressed
gas equipment, critical gas manifold systems, CO2 , and
4. Point of Use Gas Cylinder System Capacity: monitoring and alarm systems. The extent of critical-
Point of use gas cylinder systems shall be located ity of each service shall be reviewed on a per program
to facilitate direct control by the program for basis.
the space being served. Gas volume and storage
criteria shall be in accordance NFPA-45, NFPA-
55, and the requirements of the Division of the Rationale: Gas supplies often serve critical
Fire Marshall (DFM). equipment and special process needs that
must be maintained to prevent loss of research.
Rationale: These reserves are necessary to ensure F. Remote Backup: Systems shall be arranged such
supply continuity. Cryogenic sources, even that electrical failures do not interrupt critical sup-
vacuum insulated, are subject to product loss. plies, including but not limited to CO2 and oxygen.
The requirements ensure that there are at least two Supplementary automatic backup arrangements shall
sources of supply for all systems, and at least three be provided for critical applications where significant
sources (cryo bulk plus automatic dual bank damage, injury, or loss of research could result from a
manifold or automatic dual bank manifold central supply failure or error (e.g., compressed nitrogen
plus independent emergency reserve) for whole for NMRs).
building critical systems. The requirements are
to ensure reliability and to minimize risks from G. Alarm Monitoring: Automatic monitoring is required
operational errors or failure conditions. for CO2 , liquid nitrogen, compressed air systems,
and any other critical systems identified by the pro-
B. Independent Systems: Laboratory and Animal gram use group. At minimum, alarms shall be catego-
Research Facility (ARF) gas supply and distribution rized as General Fault, Critical Fault, and Supply
systems shall be completely independent of gas systems Emergency in annunciating to the building automation
serving human patients and independent for each use system (BAS) and also where available to central lab
type. monitoring systems, or for central systems to another
approved location that is not specific to an individual
C. Supply Manifold Flow Capacity: The sizing, selec- program. Additionally, annunciation shall be made on a
tion, and placement of manifolds shall be made in fault specific basis to a local alarm panel which shall be
consideration of the worst case ambient conditions in placed in an area normally occupied such that an alert
establishing required cylinder volume as associated condition will be immediately detected by responsible
with vaporization rates and equipment locations. The personnel. Any fault that is life safety or could result in
capacity of in-line gas heaters alone is not adequate, imminent damage or loss of service or research within 24
unless vaporization rates of the source and heater size hours shall be considered a Supply Emergency. Alarm
have been addressed. panels shall be closed circuit, self-monitoring to ensure
alert in the event of loss of power or other alarm failure.
D. System Cleanliness: All gas system components for
medical, ARF, or laboratory use shall at a minimum be The status of reserve or secondary supply shall be mon-
factory cleaned and packaged for oxygen service, and itored independently from the status of the primary
shall be clean in accordance with ASTM G93 Level C
Table 12.3.1(A) Minimum Alarm Requirements, Typical Bulk Cryogenic Supply With Gas Secondary Reserve
outlet or supply system breach. Arrangements shall main- 1. Liquid Nitrogen (LN2) freezer and dewar vents
tain appropriate overpressure protection. where the serving bulk system incorporates
appropriate overfill and pressure protection
I. Pressure Relief: Relief gas from all pressure relief along with appropriate O2 level monitoring at
valves and emergency devices shall be piped to the out- equipment vent locations, including fail-safe
side. Where approved by code and applicable NFPA stan- overpressure and overfill control.
dards, inert and non-oxidizing gases may be handled by
redundant and compatible exhaust systems to the out- 2. Clean compressed air as well as single or double
side. Wherever reliefs are manifolded or extended such cylinder non-hazardous equipment that does not
systems shall be arranged and sized to prevent unaccept- require connection to a piped relief system to
able back pressure conditions. Unless required by the exterior for compliance with referenced codes,
manufacturer or referenced standards, piping of reliefs to CGA, or manufacturer recommendations. The
the exterior is not required for the below. use of small manifolds may be exempted from
exterior venting where the arrangement would
Table 12.3.1(B) Minimum Alarm Requirements, Typical Supply Manifold with Reserve
Text or Signal To
Intended
Alarm Source Labeling at BAS/LAB Activation Setpoint
Purpose
Alarm Panel Monitor
(System)
Supply manifold General info
supply status N/A No detected abnormal conditions
controller (optional feature)
normal
Supply manifold (System) Local: per 15 to 20% remaining in active
Replace primary
controller, active primary program primary bank alert & switchover
bank
bank pressure sensor supply low central: general at not below 1,380 kPa (200 psig)
Supply manifold
Local: per Equipment controller or press.
controller reserve (System) Alert when reserve
program Sensor initiated. Activation point
bank or secondary reserve in use is supplying system
central: general depends on system arrangement
manifold
20% remaining. 1,380 kPa (200
Secondary reserve (System) Supply status of psig) to be considered as empty.
System critical
bank or manifold reserve supply high pressure gas (Typ. setpoint 2,070-4,140 kPa
fault
pressure sensors low reserve [300-600 psig]) varies w/gas &
location
Emergency reserve (System) Alert when Equipment controller or press.
System supply
manifold (where emergency emergency reserve Sensor initiated. Activation point
emergency
provided) reserve in use is supplying system depends on system arrangement
~80% normal cylinder pressure at
(System) Alert the intended
Emergency reserve System supply ambient temp detected at cylinder
emergency reserve capacity
low (where provided) critical fault bank (e.g., ~4,140 kPa [600 psig]
reserve low not available
for CO2)
(System)
Builiding supply ~20% above normal distribtuon
supply pressure
distribution pressure Distribution System supply pressure
(to led pressure
sensor, leaving mech. pressure to labs emergency ~20% below normal distribution
display
room pressure
module)
be fully permitted by code and NFPA and CGA recommendations of the CGA is required for all com-
standards, additionally, provided the manifold pressed gas and cryogenic systems.
vent is located in a sufficiently ventilated area
that under worse case discharge conditions N. Maximum Distribution Pressure: Gas distribution
would not result in unsafe occupancy hazards. pressure shall be below 1034 kPa (150 psig). Hazardous
fluids distribution pressure shall be minimized.
3. Where piping of reliefs to the exterior is not
required, calculations shall be provided to dem- O. Pressure Regulators and Overpressure Protection:
onstrate safe discharge conditions. The discharge There shall be at least two regulators in series (or a suit-
of relief valves serving gas manifolds shall con- able two-stage regulator) between high pressure bulk
sider the total connected load that could be tank or high pressure cylinder sources and the building
vented. distribution system wherever failure of a regulator could
result in unsafe pressure or damage to infrastructure
J. Oxygen and Ambient Gas Level Monitoring: The or scientific equipment. Two-stage or two regulators in
alert points, type, and location of all monitoring shall series shall also be used for critical pressure control and
be specific to the application and gas to be detected and hazardous applications; except that, pilot/dome loaded
shall consist of at least an audible and visual local alert or combination dome and spring loaded units may be
and a remote critical alert as approved by the Division used as suitable. Relieving type regulators shall be used
of Occupational Health and Safety (DOHS). Provision where required as final regulators to protect sensitive
of at least two sensors is required. Coordinate provi- equipment; however, regulators that relieve gas into the
sion of emergency power. Systems shall be calibrated facility shall not be used for non-inert, hazardous fluids,
and verified. or oxidizers or without adequate ventilation. Pressure
regulators used for central supply systems shall be pres-
K. Source Shut-Off Valves: Source shut-off valves shall sure loaded diaphragm with pilot, dome loaded, or pilot
be provided to permit emergency isolation of the gas operated, and shall be process/industrial flow-to-open
supply main for any oxidizing, flammable, or corro- type. Pilot supplies shall be the process fluid unless
sive gas. Where such gases are supplied from central justified, using the manufacturers recommended pilot
gas manifolds or bulk gas supplies, and wherever such trim, and where used for inert gases a normally closed
manifolds are located behind normally locked doors/ bleed valve feature shall be provided. All regulators
gas storage room, the source valve shall be located in shall be of non-contaminating metal construction with
an accessible, visible, and properly labeled valve cabi- elastomers suitable for the required purity and expo-
net on the main line from the supply source. Where the sure conditions. Metal diaphragms, internally spring-
gas supply is critical, an alarm pressure transducer or less, and electropolished are required for gas grades
tamper switch shall be provided to monitor the system. 4.5 and higher. Droop characteristics, stability, worse
The location of the isolation valve shall also be coordi- case process fluid temperature, pressure differential,
nated with the fire marshal having jurisdiction (DFM). Joule-Thompson effects, and consequences of failure
Actuation of an emergency shut-off shall not require modes (including pilot supply) shall be evaluated for
operators to pass through a hazardous or emergency all regulator and pilot trim selections. Regulators shall
condition. be suitable for at least Grade 3.0 gas purity or system
L. Distribution of Hazardous Fluids: Central distri- application, whichever is greater. Single stage spring
bution of toxic, lethal, corrosive, or hazardous fluids, load regulators may be used for gas manifold line regu-
including flammable and explosive gases (excepting nat- lators where a second or dome loaded unit is upstream
ural/fuel gas) is prohibited. Distribution of hazardous or downstream, or for local applications near the point
fluids shall require a predesign requirements meeting be of use suitable to the droop, turn-down ratio, and read-
held with ORF, DOHS, and DFM. Natural gas (or pro- justment requirements.
pane where natural gas is not available and is required P. Flow Meters and Gauges: Flow meters and gauges
and approved by DFM) does not require special review. shall be calibrated and direct reading type for the spe-
M. Codes and Standards: Conformance with cific gas. Pressure gauges shall be liquid filled, non-con-
ASME B31.3, B31.9, NFPA-55, and applicable taminating, and industrial/process grade.
for specialty system applications where required for the required gas purity, except for ultra-high
for safety or system purity. purity (UHP) applications.
4. For compressed air, nitrogen, oxygen, and other 8. For ultra-high purity and hazardous gases,
inert gas, verification of pressure dewpoint, sensitive leak test reports, on-site particle test,
total hydrocarbon (including aerosol, vapor moisture, hydrocarbons, and oxygen analysis of
and gaseous contaminants), and particulates is system and delivered gas purity are required by a
required. For CO2 , particulate and dewpoint third party, experienced UHP quality assurance
shall be verified. All new systems and wherever firm, following an approved QA plan. SEMI/
possible prior to charging system with CO2 , total Sematech methods, e.g., SEMI-F70, SEMI-
hydrocarbons (including vapor and also gas- F112, and ASTM F1398 may be utilized.
eous contaminants) shall be verified to confirm
system cleanliness (utilizing nitrogen or argon
as the test gas prior to introducing CO2). Ultra- Rationale: These requirements are to verify
high purity systems shall additionally include the cleanliness of the piping distribution
oxygen, moisture, purity, testing, and any other systems and provide indications of the
tests appropriate to the application, including suitability of the completed system to reliably
purity testing of purge gas, at each source and deliver uncontaminated gas. The use of filtered,
use point. Hazardous fluid systems shall be veri- clean, dry nitrogen or argon as a test gas for CO2
fied free of reactants. Concentration of methane and other inert systems prior to introduction
equivalent to ambient air may be disregarded of the process fluid allows for a cost-effective
(up to 2 ppm), unless inapplicable. confirmation of system cleanliness.
5. Testing methods for lab air/compressed air shall 9. When testing piping distribution systems for
be in conformance with the ISO 8573 standards. system construction cleanliness, testing shall be
Sampling and lab analysis (by compressed air conducted prior to application of any polishing
testing labs) or on-site calibrated instrumenta- adsorption filters or similar treatment devices
tion using ISO 8573 values is acceptable. For that may interfere or conceal the presence of
hydrocarbons and gaseous contaminants, alter- contaminants.
native methods that demonstrate adequate sen-
sitivity may also be utilized as appropriate (e.g.,
flame ionization, gas chromatography, etc.).
L. Controls: The application of pressure relief devices, S. Auxiliary Equipment: The type of vaporizers,
cryovents, phase separators, gas traps, heaters, fill valves, and components shall be selected to be suit-
sequencers, and other specialized controls shall be able for year-round climate conditions. Vaporizers
included and accessibly located within each system and shall include a high temperature and low tempera-
documented on drawings. Caps shall be provided on ture cut-off with alarm to BAS. A low-pressure cut-
valves to prevent unintentional operation or discharge off is additionally required unless the vaporizer is a
due to leak or accidental displacement. Lock-outs shall pressure-building type. The arrangement shall protect
be provided as required to preserve product and safety from cryogen entering the piping in event of power
functions. failure or heater failure. Vaporizers shall include auto-
restart upon power restoration and a general fault
M. Pressure Relief: Pressure relief shall be provided for alarm to BAS. Normal distribution temperature from
any potential trapped sections in cryogenic systems, CO2 vaporizers and trim heaters should typically be
e.g., where sequential valves occur. Vent lines shall between 24C38C (75100F).
be protected from ice blockage. Cryovents shall be
vacuum insulated. Vents from pressure relief shall not T. Gas Handling, Near Bulk Tank Equipment: Gas
be arranged in any manner which could result in unac- lines in climates where the worst case exposure could
ceptable backpressure or blockage. reach the saturation temperature of the gas shall be pro-
tected (including CO2 systems in Bethesda). After the
N. Future Expansion Provisions: Bayonet cap connec- vaporizer, exposed exterior pipe lines for such gases
tions shall be provided at points where future expansion (including CO2) shall be minimized and where pres-
is anticipated. ent shall be insulated. Exterior pressure regulators
O. Flexible Equipment Connections: Flex lines shall be shall be provided with a removable insulation jacket.
vacuum insulated and flexible type where necessary to Exterior gas pressure regulators (where provided) for
maintain efficiency, protect from condensation, and be CO2 located outside the building shall not turn down
provided with an appropriate restraint or chain to pre- pressure to below 450 kPa (65 psig). Gas and cryogen
vent breakage. pressure shall be maintained below approved ratings.
P. Dewar Fill Stations: Dewar fill station locations are U. Emergency Connection: An emergency auxiliary
typically located outside the building (often near the connection shall be provided for supply mains from
loading dock) at a location that allows safe transport of bulk systems wherever the bulk system is remote from
dewars to/from use points. Nitrogen dewar fill stations the facility location, wherever supply piping is buried
shall be of the fully automatic and secured type. Where underground (other than in accessible tunnels) or to
any dewar fill station is indoors, locations shall be coor- provide a means of supply from a tanker truck in an
dinated with HVAC systems for proper ventilation. emergency. Such connection shall be configured simi-
lar to an emergency oxygen connection as required for
Q. Gas Monitors/Alarms: Oxygen level monitors (and/ medical gas systems. An emergency connection is not
or other gas specific leak detectors) and visible/audible a substitute for the required emergency reserve for gas
alarms shall be provided as appropriate to the cryogenic systems.
service. Alarms shall be connected to building emer-
gency power.
Rationale: The basic standards for bulk tank and
R. Automatic Supply Shut-off: Confirmed low oxygen cryogenic systems ensure the design provides for
condition (not initial alert) in primary cryogenic fluid reliable, safe and efficient operation and
usage areas (e.g., freezer farms) shall provide automatic protection from disruptions and equipment
shut-off of the cryogenic supply and critical remote damage.
alarm notification (BAS and the lab monitoring system).
The automatic shut-off shall not disrupt gaseous supply
to other areas of the facility.
12.3.3 Compressed Gas application. A purge gas flow meter and O2 ana-
lyzer is required for all brazing.
System Sizing, Components,
2. Orbital welding is required where welded sys-
and General Distribution tems are utilized for any clean or high purity
Requirements fluid or critical process fluid application.
A. Distribution Routing: Refer to Section 8.1, Plumbing 3. Where gas distribution systems are stainless
General Requirements. steel, conform to at least ASTM G93 Level C
B. Underground Piping: Piping shall be routed above or Level D requirements except where higher
ground in accessible locations. Underground lines may purity standards are required.
occasionally be required and acceptable on a project- 4. Valves and all other fluid contact components
specific basis when sleeved and provided with metallic shall be clean for oxygen service, at least to the
warning tape and concrete barrier. Direct-buried under- required standards of the system.
ground piping is not acceptable for toxic, corrosive, or
hazardous services. 5. Pipe and fittings serving high pressure gas
(greater than 3,450 kPa [500 psig]) or cryo-
C. Velocity and Pressure Drop: In general and unless gen shall be forged (not cast). Wrought
noted otherwise, maximum velocity in distribution sys- Copper Female Adapters shall not be brazed.
tems shall not exceed 20 m/s (4,000 fpm), 6 m/s (1,200 Connections to turrets shall be made with swa-
fpm) for central plant equipment; and pressure drop gelock adapters, lok-ring adapters for stainless
shall not exceed 10% for systems operating above 380 steel tubing only, or brazed male adapter and a
kPa (55 psi), and shall not exceed 20 kPa (3 psi) for sys- threaded brass coupling.
tems operating at or below 380 kPa (55 psi).
D. Biological Safety Cabinets: Pressurized, flammable, Rationale: Materials and joining operations
and hazardous gases shall not be piped into a biological can introduce substantial contaminants into
safety cabinet (BSC) unless approved by the DOHS. compressed gas distribution systems. A variety
of scientific equipment and research applications
Rationale: The use of compressed gases (e.g., are dependent upon service from clean, dry,
lab air and fuel gas) has been shown to disturb uncontaminated gas streams. Intent is to
airflow patterns within BSCs and create maintain specified gas quality and minimize
hazardous conditions. point of use filters.
applications beyond the standard central-system-deliv- Minimum Baseline requirements are as follows:
ered gas quality as required by the program. Filters and
traps shall be rated for the specific delivered gas-quality 1. Particles: Comply with ISO 8573.1 and ISO
application. Where point of use dryers are required, 8573.4, 2010 Class 2 for particles. There is no
heatless regenerative or membrane type units shall be criteria for particles 0.5 micron and smaller, and
applied, and membrane dryers are required for dew- count values of up to 500 are acceptable for 1 to
points below -73C (-100F). Systems shall not be piped 5 micron size class.
building wide at purity levels higher than those man- 2. Pressure Dewpoint and Liquid Contaminants:
dated in the DRM for central systems unless required Maximum pressure dewpoint shall not exceed
by the program. -12C (10F) through dryers capable of pro-
ducing air at system design capacity down to
Rationale: Point of use filter/dryer/treatment -40C (-40F). In no case shall the provided
systems are often required for specialty equipment dewpoint be higher than 10C (18F) below the
e.g., NMRs, LC/MS, pure gas generators. lowest temperature at which any portion of the
Avoidance of widespread use must be considered system distribution will be exposed at any time
in the central air quality selection. Over-design of of year. In many cases sufficient predominant
central system quality can be uneconomical and needs may support that air be dried to -20C
subject to contamination. (-4F) (ISO 8573.1 2010 Class 3 for dewpoint)
and distributed at that level. -40C (-40F) and
lower building-wide distribution is not typically
required or desirable on a building-wide basis
for lab air; however, capability to distribute at
this dewpoint shall be provided. Systems shall
12.3.4 Compressed Air be designed and equipment selected to be free
Systems, Additional of liquid contaminants, including air intake and
compressor fluids.
Requirements
A. Compressed Air Critical Service: Central com- 3. Hydrocarbons: There shall be no detectable
pressed air is considered a critical service and shall be liquid hydrocarbon, and total including vapor
arranged to ensure continuous availability of required not to exceed 0.08 ppm maximum (ISO 8573.1
quality. 2010 Class 2 for hydrocarbon).
loss through the entire distribution system at peak C. Pressure Regulator Stations and Subsystems: Central
demand shall not exceed approximately 20 kPa (3 psi), pressure regulator stations shall be provided for each
except total loss of up to 10% is acceptable for systems air distribution system. Except for low pressure lab air,
operating above 380 kPa (55 psig). the reduction and segregation to separate systems shall
occur at the primary equipment location. Regulators
N. Drains: Automatic drains with air-loss control (e.g., for central lab compressor-generated air systems may be
zero-loss drains) shall be provided for central system single stage. Main system regulators shall be pressure
tanks, filters, and other applications where drainage is loaded central system type per Section 12.3.1, except
required. that electronic flow control stations with a normally
closed bypass and with either redundant configura-
12.3.4.4 Central Lab Air System, tion or with a central system pressure loaded regula-
tor for a bypass may be used for the supply main from
Additional Requirements
the compressors at the mechanical room. The following
A. Standby: Standby power and auto restart is required systems and distribution pressure arrangements shall be
where systems provide air as a primary supply, backup provided:
for control or instrument air functions, for research
needs that could be lost, damaged, or compromised due 1. 760 kPa (110 psi) general high-pressure lab air
to air supply loss (e.g., NMR equipment and various distribution. Distribute from the mechanical
analytical applications). room/air source throughout the building.
B. Air Intakes and Ventilation: Air intakes for central 2. Pressure-reduction for low-pressure lab air
compressed air systems (other than dedicated control to 207 to 241 kPa (30 to 35 psig) shall occur
air) shall be taken from the exterior of the facility, above at each individual floor level (within intersti-
the roof, or at least 6.0 m (20 ft.) above grade, away tial space where provided or other accessible
from loading docks, generator exhaust or other poten- common area) from main high-pressure risers.
tial sources of air contamination and hydrocarbons, at
least 7.6 m (25 ft.) from any powered exhaust or likely
source of contamination, above any potential snow line 12.3.4.5 Control Air/Instrument Air
or source of liquid infiltration, piped directly to air com- Systems, Additional Requirements
pressors, and equipped with N + 1 air intake filtration. A. Segregation: Control air systems shall be centrally
segregated from central lab air systems, with dedicated
Air intakes shall be non-corrosive, metallic construc- distribution networks that are not serving with other
tion, equivalent to the piping distribution material, and functions.
joined without flux or volatile contaminants. Sizing of
compressed air intake shall allow for at least the full B. Continuity and Redundancy: At a minimum, N +
load with 20% overage, without exceeding maximum 1 redundancy of supply is required. To achieve redun-
recommended velocities. Refer to Section 6.1, Heating, dancy, the control air system may be connected to the
Ventilation, and Air Conditioning Design for maximum central building lab air system at the lab air compres-
duct velocities, which shall also be complied with for air sor mechanical room to serve as the primary or backup
intakes. Ducted air intake is not required for dedicated arrangement or control air systems may be provided as
control air or local non-critical air compressor systems dedicated and fully redundant independent systems.
where such compressors are located in clean areas; Either rotary screw or reciprocating equipment may
where air intake quality will not be subject to compro- be used and shall be arranged to prevent flow reversal.
mise and system delivery is reliably within specified air
quality requirements for the application. 1. Separate locations of source equipment between
the primary and redundant configuration is rec-
ommended to prevent simultaneous failure.
Rationale: Contaminants in intake air can become
highly concentrated and condense as free air is 2. Control air systems shall be arranged to prevent
compressed. plausible loss of air supply, from single point
failure of air production equipment. The use of a
receiver is not a substitute for redundant supply revalidation procedures shall be addressed in system
equipment and associated air treatment. designs as applicable.
H. Gas Supply Preservation: Arrangements shall pro- 12.3.6 CO2 Lab Gas,
tect against a failure condition resulting in venting of
the non-failed component, backup, alternate supply Additional Requirements
source, or alternate manifold header, and to prevent A. Provision of CO2: Provision of central distribution of
the loss of reserve supply during normal operation. CO2 is typically required. CO2 is a critical service and
Check valves are required at appropriate points along as such must be arranged to ensure delivered gas quality
with sequenced pressure control, as well as checks at and reliability.
every cylinder connection. In cases where the reserve
supply is serving as a remote backup to a bulk gas B. Capacity: The A/E shall consult with the program to
supply, an appropriate control valve (check valve) shall determine demand loading, quantity, chamber volume,
be provided on the supply main to prevent loss of the and door opening allowance for incubators. Provide for
reserve gas supply in the event of a bulk system supply program requirements, but in no case less than an allow-
pipe break or failure, along with the control valve ance of three to four door openings per incubator per
arrangement to sequence the reserve supply. day and to ensure flexibility for midsize to large cham-
ber volumes. The required gas concentration for sizing
I. Manifold Location: Manifold locations shall be coor- CO2 supplies serving incubators shall be as acceptable
dinated in consideration of the effect of ambient condition to the program, but not less than required to provide a
on gas flow rate, pressure, NEMA rating, and reliability. 10% concentration of the chamber volume per incuba-
Worse case temperature conditions shall be considered tor per door opening.
in establishing required cylinder quantity or provision
of heated enclosures. Cylinders shall not be located in C. Supply Systems: CO2 supply systems shall have
direct sunlight or without protection from environmental redundant components to permit continuous operation
extremes. High pressure gas cylinders for CO2 shall not and high-pressure gas reserve backup to ensure uninter-
be located where temperatures may exceed 48C (120F) rupted supply to incubators and equipment. Common
or fall below -6.6C (20F) at any time. A limit of 48C maintenance items, e.g., vaporizers, refrigeration etc.
(120F) and -29C (-20F) are the limits for other gases shall be redundant; however, redundancy of large bulk
unless more stringent are required for the specific appli- tanks is not required. Provide gas heaters to ensure
cation or by a referenced standard. Gas supplies shall be proper gas flow. Gas heaters are required if flow will
located in an area under control of persons responsible or exceed 35 SCFH. Worst case environmental conditions
directly affected by the gas service. Local manifolds shall shall be considered for CO2 manifolds to ensure an
be located outside of individual laboratories unless serv- adequate gas supply with consideration of both cylinder
ing only a single laboratory occupied by the same user. quantity and regulator flow rates to achieve the required
Manifolds located within a laboratory shall not serve gas flow without disruption.
other areas. Gas cylinders shall not be located in sensi-
tive spaces, areas of biosecurity concern, or areas where
Rationale: Gas heaters are typically required to
subject to potential tampering. Where possible, gas sup-
prevent freezing/blockage of regulators, but do
plies shall be located outside of program areas. Locations
not take the place of heated enclosures or indoor
shall be accessible for materials handling without induc-
placement.
ing abnormal hazards.
J. Gas Appurtenances: Flash arrestors are required for D. Oxygen Sensor: Manifold cylinder systems rooms
oxygen and flammable gases. Additional requirements, located within the building shall include oxygen level
e.g., flow limiting valves may be required for hazardous monitoring alarms or gas leak detection systems as
gases. Provide additional components per gas purveyor approved by DOHS. Alarms shall alert locally and pro-
and CGA recommendations for the application. vide a critical remote alert as approved by DOHS.
K. Auto-Ignition Resistance and Component E. Main Line Treatment and Filtration: A carbon diox-
Compatibility: Gas manifolds and components shall be ide adsorption filter/treatment system (in parallel) shall be
designed and listed for auto-ignition resistance when provided for the incoming main carbon dioxide line. The
used in oxygen or flammable gas systems. filter shall be located downstream of any supply source
and associated vaporizers but upstream of the required station. Higher pressure interior distribution, at up to
main line pressure sensor and any use points. Each bank 379 kPa (55 psi) may be used for special applications.
of the filter arrangement shall consist of an encapsulated Two-stage heated regulators are permitted. For facilities
packed activated carbon (adsorption) filter designed to with limited CO2 requirements, the system may be fed
remove hydrocarbon vapors and gaseous contaminants from manifolded cylinders located in a secure area. The
with encapsulation to prevent carbon fines, followed by maximum pressure drop at peak demand in the distri-
a 0.010.5 micron PTFE or sintered stainless particulate bution system shall not exceed 21 kPa (3 psi).
filter; stainless steel housing, pressure gauges and valv-
ing to permit isolation of each filter bank for service.
The filters shall be non-contaminating for breathing air, Rationale: These provisions are for reliable and
food/beverage, or pharmaceutical grade supply applica- stable pressure control and to minimize potential
tions. The use of manufactured multi-stage CO2 polish- for regulator or orifice blockage/freeze-up.
ing systems designed for beverage grade CO2 applications
is preferred for central (large) applications. The use of a G. Fluid Quality and Materials of Construction: CO2
coalescing filter with any drain arrangement is unaccept- shall be at least Grade 3.0 (99.9%)/Beverage grade,
able. N + 1 or a suitable filtered bypass shall be provided. except where higher purity is required by the program.
CO2 systems shall be of materials and construction
clean to ASTM G93 Level D or better.
Rationale: CO2 systems, especially bulk tanks,
are frequently a source of contamination,
including but not limited to condensed oil and Rationale: High levels of contaminants are
gaseous vapors (e.g., volatile and aromatic common in uncertified and industrial grade
hydrocarbons). The requirements for central supplies. Control of contaminants is required
gas filtration provide protection for distribution to preclude inducing variables, meet special
systems from particles and hydrocarbon aerosols application needs and varying equipment
often present in bulk and gas cylinder source requirements.
supplies.
H. Incubator Provisions: Pressure regulators at incuba-
F. Distribution Pressure and Pressure Control: Central tors shall be selected for sensitive pressure control per
Central CO2 system distribution pressure shall be at equipment manufacturer requirements. A point of use
approximately 207 kPa (30 psi) through use of an ini- 0.2 micron (minimum) filter shall be provided at incu-
tial regulator station at the bulk supply and in-building bator connections for particulate protection (typically
central regulator station, or through a manifold system furnished with incubators), and shall be coordinated
per Section 12.3.5. The use of regulator staging (e.g., with the manufacturer.
maintaining exterior pressure above 414 kPa [60 psig]),
typically at 448689 kPa (65100 psig) and reducing I. Gas Guard Auxiliary Supplies: Where a lab requests
to 207 kPa (30 psig) on the main line inside the facility supplemental installation of a backup supply arrange-
after gas treatment but prior to distribution is required. ment (e.g., some types of gas guards), a check valve shall
Main line regulators shall be pressure-loaded dia- be installed at the connection point to prevent back-
phragm type central regulators as indicated in Section feeding the central system.
12.3.1 and shall be provided as two in parallel. Where a J. Gas Purity Testing of CO2 Systems: The system
regulator station is provided upstream of the main line piping cleanliness testing/verification required of this
regulators (typically outside the building as part of a section shall be provided prior to the adsorption filter
cryogenic bulk supply system) a normally closed bypass installation.
shall be provided at the exterior primary regulator
Contents:
12.4.0 Introduction
application. Pumps shall automatically revert to once- safety systems) and vapor condenser arrangements.
through operation (and alarm) upon failure of adequate Vertical screw completely dry running pumps may also
cooling flow. The vacuum system shall be impervious to be accepted for some applications, with approved seal
saturated gas mixtures, occasional ingestion of liquid designs and traps.
slugs, and minor particulate without requiring inter-
vention. Operating efficiency and seal liquid tempera- E. Alternative Vacuum Technologies: With the excep-
ture shall be evaluated when determining pumps and tion of vertical screw units, alternatives to partial
quantity of pump stages. Liquid or air-cooled configu- recovery liquid ring systems shall be justified by a risk
rations may be used provided partial recovery operation assessment including a facility chemical usage compat-
is maintained. ibility, waste disposal, and life cycle cost analysis. Full-
recovery liquid ring systems are not acceptable. For lab
applications, unless partial recovery liquid ring pumps
Rationale: Liquid ring vacuum pumps provide are used; pumps shall be completely dry type, vertical
proven durability and minimal maintenance screw, variable pitch type, with synchronous motor
in laboratory vacuum applications with low drive and no mechanical seals or lip seals. Vacuum
operating temperatures and broad flexibility for pumps shall be fully compatible with liquid slugs and
use with a wide range of chemical/flammable corrosive vapors without reliance on a knock out pot
fluids, solvents, vapors, and potentially or separator, and shall include an inert (N2) gas purge
contaminated or corrosive liquids. NIH defaults to arrangement. The N2 supply shall include automatic
partial recovery liquid ring for inherent equipment switchover with supply status alarm monitoring and be
benefits in reliability, safety, and low maintenance. sized for at least thirty days operation with a secondary
reserve of at least seven days. The speed of each pump
B. Seal Water Conservation: Limiting seal water shall be automatically controlled and rotor clearances
makeup and avoiding once-through operation are desir- monitored. Equipment shall be suitable for varied and
able for water conservation. Makeup water flow reduc- non-constant loading and shall be auto-ignition resis-
tion of greater than 50% below once-through operation tant with an exhaust temperature that does not exceed
mode shall be applied only after evaluation to ensure 150C (300F) and shall include a liquid cooling system
unacceptable concentrated seal liquid is not discharged to provide temperature stability throughout the entire
under actual use conditions, and to avoid conditions unit. The equipment shall allow for operation under
likely to result in premature failure. Where deter- total flooded conditions (as may be necessary for decon-
mined acceptable to address corrosion, biofouling, suit- tamination). Equipment shall not require routine main-
able waste streams, and adequate cooling is provided; tenance at a frequency more often than 20,000 hours.
makeup not less than 20% the required once-through Systems shall be arranged to operate continuously (low
flow rate may be used. speed) to protect from condensed vapors. Materials of
construction shall be not less than forged stainless steel
C. Reclaimed Water Sources: Where sufficient water rotors and ductile iron or stainless steel housing. Full
quality is available from reclaimed water sources, such ballast receivers are not typically required with verti-
water shall be utilized for liquid ring vacuum pump seal cal screw pumps, however a small receiver shall be pro-
makeup. vided to allow for capture of minor liquids.
D. Solvent Recovery and Hazardous Fluid: Solvent F. Auxiliary Equipment Materials and Selection: The
recovery and other potentially hazardous applications liquid separator or knock-out pot (where provided)
shall be addressed locally. Such systems shall utilize shall be constructed of corrosion-resistant materials, of
dedicated full-recovery liquid ring systems (typically at least 300 series stainless steel. Where receivers are
utilizing the solvent as the seal liquid), particulate fil- arranged at a point on the system to function only as
tration, and at least double mechanical seals appropri- ballast tanks, corrosion-resistant material of at least
ate to the application and hazard (hermetic motor or galvanized steel or holiday-tested suitable epoxy-coated
magnetic drive typically required). Acceptable alter- tanks may be used (stainless steel recommended).
natives for these specialized chemical applications Receivers shall only be sized as required to perform
include double-diaphragm pumps (with diaphragm the required liquid separation and system vacuum
stabilization (ballast) function, and in consideration hardness) as required. Provide water softening and/or
of the system, pump, and controls technology. For any scale control as required based upon local water quality.
case other than once through or partial recovery liquid
ring systems, the minimum receiver material shall be
316 stainless. Materials/components shall be ASME Rationale: Excessive water hardness or other
code constructed. incompatible water conditions can result in
significant maintenance issues or potential pump
failure.
Rationale: Receiver/separators (including knock
out pots and similar) are subject to direct exposure L. Automatic Drains: Automatic drains (if used) shall
to the seal liquid and process stream, which in be designed to prevent disruption of the system vacuum,
some cases can become concentrated, corrosive, prevent subjecting the drainage system to negative pres-
or even acidic. Conventional steel receivers sure, and seal tightly after each operation.
are subject to premature failure due to corrosion.
M. Controls, Alarm and Automation: Local control sys-
G. Hermetic Seal Monitoring Systems: Canned motor tems with system operating status and alarm condition
pumps and other hermetically sealed designs (where readout shall be provided at the equipment, and lead-
provided) shall include monitoring systems including lag, automatic alternate and minimum-run functions
liquid level, motor and pump temperature, rotor posi- shall be included. A remote fault signal to the BAS shall
tion, rotation/phase sequence, and hermetic seal stator be provided, though it is acceptable to limit this to a
chamber pressure. single general fault alarm for each system source unless
more stringent central monitoring is required.
H. Reliability, Redundancy, and Operating Economy:
Systems shall be arranged to ensure reliability and N. Vacuum System Filters: In-line filters for microbial
continuous service so as not to disrupt facility opera- protection shall be as determined by the program. The
tions. Components shall be compatible and arranged following requirements apply:
for unobstructed flow paths. The system design criteria 1. Pipeline filters shall be of at least HEPA effi-
shall be for 100% of the system peak load to remain ciency or sterilizing grade-absolute rated for
upon failure of any one pump. A normally closed bypass aerosolized virus particles in high humidity gas,
shall be provided around receivers. ASTM F838 or suitable equal, and shall be bac-
I. Variable Speed Drive Systems/Capacity Split: teria rated in liquid streams at 0.2 microns (or
Variable speed drive systems should be considered, or less), a leak-tight frame or cartridge design, and
a load-responsive capacity split (e.g., triplex or quad- corrosion-resistant seals to avoid bypass leak-
raplex) to maximize efficiency. Independent VFDs are age. PTFE, PVDF, or stainless steel moisture and
required for each motor except that VFD load sharing corrosion resistant construction, and hydropho-
may be used so long as equipment defaults to across- bic as required for application. Housings shall
the-line starting automatically and maintains safe oper- be at least 316 stainless steel or equivalent cor-
ation with a VFD fault. rosion-resistant metal compatible with system
application, and of gas-handling design. N + 1 is
J. Standby Power: Where it is determined that loss required (in parallel) for main line filters.
of the vacuum system could reasonably pose risk to
research or per program requirements, standby power 2. Each filter selection shall have a total pressure
shall be provided. drop through the filters and housing that does
not exceed 12.5 Torr (0.5 in. Hg) at design flow
K. Makeup Water Quality: The A/E shall ensure suit- under operating conditions, and less where prac-
able makeup water quality and provide any required tical for energy savings. Filters shall be readily
water treatment appropriate to the specific project accessible and arranged to permit decontamina-
location. Refer to manufacturers written requirements tion, validation, drainage, and servicing.
and perform/obtain water quality analysis (typically
Contents:
lines shall be provided in a manner that can be purged D. Fail-safe Design and System Alarms: VMGS systems
to prevent cutting into systems. and equipment shall be arranged to prevent single point
failure and to provide alert of failures and abnormal
conditions that may occur from the supply source thor-
12.5.2.2 Alarms and Valving ough to the use point. The VMGS alarm panel shall
A. Alarms and Valving: Separate master and area alarm at a minimum monitor line pressures, status of supply
panels and wall-mounted/user accessible zone valves are equipment, primary supply/reserve equipment-in-use
not required (except for provision of a master accessible status, and shall also indicate the presence of a general
oxygen source shut-off per NFPA). A single combina- fault and major equipment fault or source (plant) emer-
tion type alarm panel may function to serve both as a gency. Except for very small and localized systems, at
master alarm and area alarm, or redundant alarms shall least two monitoring points shall be provided through-
be provided. The VMGS alarm configuration shall pro- out the system to alert to a system emergency. Pressure
vide visual and audible alert at the panel location and shall be monitored at central supply mains or risers,
remote alert to personnel responsible for the program area downstream of the gas manifold and any associated
through the lab/ARF monitoring system and through the treatment or filtration, but not within an individual iso-
BAS to responsible personnel per the program require- lated program. Alarm sensors shall be provided to pro-
ments. Alarms shall be both audible and visible to the tect each major areas of the facility and shall annunciate
extent required per NFPA-99 or ISO 7396. at VGMS alarm panel.
required to be provided with individual alarm pressure metal filter upstream of the regulator (two in parallel
sensors where such valves are located in a secure loca- or one for each bank) to protect regulators and distri-
tion and provided with warning tags, where valves are bution systems from particles. Stainless sintered metal
located in readily accessible wall-mounted zone valve shall not be used for oxygen.
boxes provided they are located only within appropri-
ately restricted access corridor, or where valves are oth-
erwise locked open and labeled or fitted with tamper Rationale: Monitoring of individual bank pressure
switches. Valves shall be protected from tampering and ensures required capacity is constantly available.
unauthorized operation. A source valve is required for
all systems, and this requirement includes vacuum and B. Auto-Ignition Resistance: Gas manifolds and other
waste anesthetic scavenging systems. Alarm sensors applicable system components shall be designed and
serving system mains shall not be located on the down- listed for auto-ignition resistance when applied for
stream side of isolation valves to remote areas such oxygen or flammable gas systems.
that activation of the isolation valve would defeat the
monitoring of supply to active use points. Additional
alarm sensors are required to monitor system pressure Rationale: This is to protect from auto-ignition
in various program areas where isolation valves may be hazards, plausible failure condition effects,
present. including adiabatic compression (e.g., at pressure
regulators).
Rationale: While full conformance with NFPA- C. Emergency Relief Venting: Gas supply sources shall
99 Category 1 is not required, these systems incorporate protection arrangements to prevent a fail-
serve life support functions for the animals ure condition resulting in venting of the non-failed com-
and critical research. Large facilities with ponent, backup or alternate supply source, or alternate
multiple mains or risers must include additional manifold header.
alarm monitoring points to ensure systems are
constantly monitored and that pressure sensors D. Pressure Sensors: Pressure transducers or transmit-
can be located far enough from the supply system ters shall be used where possible instead of pressure
source to provide effective building monitoring yet switches. Sensors shall be accurate to the measurement
without being subject to loss of protection for the unit intervals of the monitored gas.
facility system if a respective pipe line is isolated
for repair or renovation. E. Valves: System valves shall be lock-open type and
provided with locks keyed to facility standards. This
provision is not required for valves located in secure
and restricted access areas, valves located within acces-
sible medical-zone valve boxes (with window) that are
located in controlled corridors, and valves provided
12.5.3 VMGS Equipment with tamper switches or within valve boxes provided
A. Manifolds: Manifolds for VMGS gases shall be fully with tamper switches. Neither does it apply to emer-
automatic switchover type, NFPA-99 or ISO 7396-1 gency source shut-off valves or to valves at equipment or
compliant, clean for oxygen service, and provided with supply manifolds in secure equipment rooms. All valves
alarm monitoring as per NFPA-99, including status of shall be clearly labeled with a permanently attached
reserve in use, reserve supply low, and abnormal pres- warning tag identifying the service and area served.
sure conditions. Manifolds shall be of appropriate Valves shall be full-way type.
NEMA rating for the installed location and verified for
adequate flow. Gas heaters are not a substitute for ambi-
Rationale: Location within the actual ARF
ent controlled cylinder location. Automatic monitoring
program space where animals are handled shall be
of each individual manifold bank pressure (e.g., left
considered secure, restricted access space. Spaces
side vs right side), upstream of the primary regulator is
accessible to unauthorized personnel, public, or
required. Manifolds shall include a compatible sintered
be verified for contamination (prior to charging with oxygen reserve shall be provided with at least a 5 day
CO2 by using clean N2 or argon). ISO 8573 2010 meth- demand at the bulk tank. In addition, an in-building
ods of cleanliness testing may be utilized (Class 2 or emergency reserve with at least a 1 day demand capac-
Class 3) or calibrated on-site analytical methods, and ity and appropriate emergency valving/backflow protec-
are required where particulate or hydrocarbon con- tion shall be provided to ensure that a break or disrup-
tamination of pressurized VMGS is suspected. Purging tion in the underground main oxygen supply piping or
of dirty systems to achieve a passing state shall not be bulk tank supply malfunction does not result in disrup-
approved without subsequent comprehensive contami- tion of oxygen to the facility. Refer to Section 12.3,
nation analysis (e.g., particle size and count) that is not Compressed Gas and Cryogenic Systems for criteria
reliant on preliminary cycle purging. related to bulk cryogenic systems and additional supply-
source requirements.
Rationale: The verification process is required E. Emergency Shut-Off: A source gas emergency shut-
to ensure the installed system meets requirements off valve with alarm pressure switch, transducer, or
to protect animals and research. The process tamper switch shall be provided. Refer to Section 12.3,
differs somewhat from verification for hospitals Compressed Gas and Cryogenic Systems.
(due to system differences) and is not intended to
mandate placement of additional alarms, valving F. Maximum Velocity: Velocities within the oxygen
or components. Systems installed dirty may purge system shall in no case exceed 4,000 fpm, or for cases
clean to pass initial tests only to have recurrent where stainless steel piping is allowed, shall not exceed
contamination issues. 1,800 fpm.
12.5.5.2 Veterinary Medical Air G. Gas Supply Manifolds: Fully automatic switchover
A. Application: A separate NFPA-99 Category 1 or ISO medical gas manifolds may be utilized in lieu of com-
7396-1 compliant compressed veterinary air system pressors where demand is low and the use of central pro-
shall be provided to serve VMGS needs for animals. duction equipment is impractical or not cost-effective.
Medical air shall not be sourced from the central plant.
H. Use Prohibition: Veterinary medical air shall not be
B. Particles and Contaminants: Particle count and used for venturi-driven anesthetic scavenging or other
test method shall be as described for oxygen above. non-respiratory applications.
Limitations for other contaminants shall be per NFPA-
I. Pressure, Capacity, and Sizing: The veterinary
99 for Category 1 medical gas. Other contaminant
compressed air system shall provide a pressure of 345
classes shall be per NFPA-99.
kPa379 kPa (5055 psig) at all outlets at peak design
C. Compressors: Where compressors are utilized as flow. Distribution system design pressure drop shall not
the supply source, they shall be certified 100% oil-free. exceed 21 kPa (3 psig).
NFPA-99 compliant scroll, rotary screw/rotary tooth,
J. Air Quality to Equipment Service Areas: Veterinary
or oil free reciprocating compressors.
compressed air shall be provided for areas where vet-
erinary medical equipment is serviced (e.g., veterinary
Rationale: Liquid ring and oil-lubricated biomedical equipment rooms). Local cylinders should
compressors are not acceptable due to potential be used.
risks to air quality.
cleanliness from oil aerosol, hydrocarbon and other gas- c. A manufactured assembly engineered for
eous contaminants, line pressure, automatic gas supply humane euthanasia with precise flow con-
status and line pressure monitoring. Two-stage regula- trol to each chamber/cage and flow monitor-
tion is required for control of pressure (or an arrange- ing may be provided.
ment consisting of at least two regulators between the
high pressure source and the flow restrictor). An accu- 3. Uncontrolled flow rate shall not be permitted to
rate direct reading flow meter, manufacturer calibrated pass to chamber or cage in excess of permitted
for the specific gas is required at every point of use, and flow rates. Where multiple chambers/housings
must be visible by the operator. Comply as follows: are commonly controlled, the arrangement shall
ensure flow control to each unit is within the
1. A local high accuracy pressure lockable regula- permissible flow rates.
tor, with gauge shall be provided and properly
adjusted to serve each dispense point and shall
locked to prevent tampering. Rationale: Precise control of CO2 within the
accepted range for the chamber or housing unit
2. Flow shall be accurately controlled such that size is necessary for regulatory compliance
flow rate to individual housing or euthanasia and humane use. Automatic flow control which
chamber does not vary from permissible flow minimizes the need for precise adjustment by
rates, as per current AVMA requirements. users is helpful and minimizes potential of
maladjustment.
a. Recommended Approach: A pre-calibrated,
non-adjustable flow orifice/flow control
valve shall be provided in-line, after the reg- C. Source Location and Gas Conditioning: Gases shall
ulator. Either a manufactured variable area be located in accordance with required environmental
flow meter with built-in engineered flow conditions to ensure proper operation. Manifold heat-
control (no adjustment), a suitable mass flow ers are typically required for CO2 and N2O at higher
meter, or an engineered non-adjustable flow flows (e.g., flow above 35 SCFH) and shall be provided
restrictor (e.g., stainless steel porous metal as necessary. Adsorbent and particulate filtration is
flow control) or microprocessor arrange- required for CO2 .
ment may be used for this purpose. The flow
control shall be selected to ensure the flow 12.5.5.4 Veterinary Surgical Vacuum
rate is stable and does not exceed the maxi-
Systems
mum permitted values, with appropriate
allowances for the accuracy of the specified A. Codes and Standards: Veterinary surgical vacuum
flow meter, orifice, and pressure regulator. systems shall be provided in conformance with NFPA-
A -turn turret, with threaded outlet may 99 Category 1 or ISO 7396, subject to the clarifications
be used to receive user attachments e.g., and modifications of this section of the DRM.
diameter index safety system (DISS) adapt-
B. Application: The vacuum system shall be provided
ers and hoses.
only for veterinary medical applications and shall not
b. Manual Approach: CO2 (or other veterinar- serve laboratory applications whether or not located
ian specified gas in conformance with PHS within the ARF program areas.
policy) may be piped in-line to the point of
C. Source Equipment Type: The VMGS vacuum pumps
use, with a flow meter directly visible at the
shall be liquid ring type (partial recirculating), water-
point of use, downstream of the flow con-
sealed, suitable for influent liquid slugs, potential chem-
trol valve. For this purpose, turrets shall
ical vapors, varied halogenated anesthetics, nitrous
be needle-type (not turn), with threaded
oxide, and handling of a heavily oxygen-enriched fluid
outlet to receive the flow meter and required
stream. Configurations shall be NFPA-99 compliant,
adapters.
including control/electrical system redundancies, and
in accordance with the requirements of Section 12.4,
non-recirculated ducted capture device or utilize a pas- 12.5.5.5.1 Veterinary Anesthetic Gas Scavenging
sive neutralizing arrangement that has been determined System-Common Requirements
acceptable by DOHS; and is generally recommended A. System Type, Codes and Standards: Veterinary
in lieu of carbon/charcoal adsorption arrangements. AGSSs shall be active type and piped systems shall be
Scavenging provisions for waste anesthetic during designed in accordance with this section and NFPA-99
recovery phases must be considered for applications waste anesthetic gas disposal (WAGD) or ISO 7396-2,
with large animals. including provisions for at least N + 1 redundant equip-
ment and associated electrical arrangements.
Exception: Dedicated anesthetic scavenging provisions
are not required where all inhaled anesthesia/analge- B. Source Equipment: System source shall be side-chan-
sia procedures are performed inside ducted and fully nel (regenerative) blower type (for low vacuum active sys-
exhausted containment devices. Reliance on ducted tems) or partial recovery water sealed liquid ring vacuum
room air change rates and other passive arrangements pumps (for high vacuum active systems). Venturi-driven
are not acceptable. Omission of active piped AGSS in autonomous terminal units may be used for small facili-
any facility performing routine inhaled anesthesia/anal- ties or limited applications. System source equipment
gesia shall occur only after a risk assessment has been and all components and elastomers throughout the
performed based on discussion with users and the veteri- system shall be suitable for handling various halogenated
nary anesthesiologist and approval of ORF and DOHS. anesthetic gases, nitrous oxide, and a heavily oxygen-
Passive adsorption systems (e.g., charcoal/carbon canis- enriched (up to 50%) fluid stream. Low vacuum active
ters) are not acceptable for new construction or large type systems are preferred for new facilities.
program areas.
Rationale: Due to the criticality of these systems, Rationale: Alarms are required to confirm the
required alert arrangements, risk to subject safety operation of the scavenging system. Provision
associated with high vacuum levels and ingestion of general and plant emergency faults is
of vapors and enriched oxygen streams that may acceptable as long as local equipment alerts can
not be compatible with other fluids, AGSS are provide more specific fault data.
not combined with other vacuum systems. Where
shared systems are permitted, the requirement F. Alarm Sensors: Alarms and sensors shall be coor-
for connection at the source main is to ensure dinated for proper operation, sensitivity, and accuracy
continuous availability of the scavenging system. and to preclude false tripping. Sensors shall include
Venturi-driven terminal units, local blower systems appropriate delay features and units of measurement
and alternative scavenging configurations can be as required consistent with system operating range and
used in small renovations where provision of a required set points.
new, dedicated central system is not feasible.
G. Terminal Unit/Inlets Flow: The system shall pro-
D. Air Break/Anesthetic Scavenging Interface: Space vide 1.753.0 scfm (5080 lpm) per inlet. Diversity
and arrangements for mounting at least one open type shall be applied only for non-surgical areas where justi-
scavenging interface (commonly referred to as a vet- fied through consultation with the program staff, but
erinary WAG air break or veterinary scavenging shall in no case be less than one inlet of 1.753.0 scfm
air brake) shall be provided within 3 m (10 ft.) of (5080 lpm) (without diversity) for every room where
the breathing circuit and shall be within 3 m (10 ft.) inlets are provided and for every use point that could be
of each scavenging terminal unit (typically next to the in simultaneous use. Alternate designs require justifica-
terminal unit). Air breaks shall be mounted only in tion and approval.
an upright position. The quantity and location of air
breaks shall additionally be approved by the veterinary Rationale: Multiple terminal units (inlets) are
anesthesiologist. often provided for convenience even for the
same procedure area and may be in simultaneous
Rationale: Use of systems without a suitable air use. The ISO 7396-2 Type 1H flow rate values
break can injure the subject. Systems are designed stated here for each terminal unit are the
for use with open air breaks for maximum safety extraction flow rates to be applied for the disposal
and efficacy. Too much separation from the system (not the induction scavenging flow
terminal unit or use point can compromise which shall be independently established by the
efficacy or risk hose occlusion. veterinarian). These are required to ensure
compatibility with common air break designs and
effective scavenging under various applications.
E. Central Alarms: Alarms shall be provided in accor-
dance with the WAGD provisions of NFPA-99 and shall
incorporate additional features as required in the DRM. H. AGSS Emergency Power: ARF AGSS and associated
The alarm function for central vacuum producers shall alarm system shall be served with building emergency
report a separate general alarm (e.g., stand-by blower power as per NFPA-99 Category 1 system requirements.
in use or other operational alert condition) and plant
emergency alarm (for critical conditions) with audible Rationale: Anesthetic scavenging is an occupant
and visual alert to the VMGS alarm panel, which shall safety system.
provide a second alert to the ARF monitoring or critical
laboratory systems monitoring (along with alert to the
BAS). A plant emergency fault shall address major faults I. Equipment Drains: AGSS equipment drains shall be
(e.g., system offline, power loss, loss of vacuum, etc.). configured as indirect waste. The receiver shall have a
The arrangement shall ensure that users are immedi- manual (normally closed) drain.
ately alerted when the system is not properly operating.
J. Distribution Material: AGSSs shall be constructed mmHg) below atmospheric pressure as required to
of brazed copper tubing. Nitrogen purge is generally comply with ISO 7396-2 type 1-H flow at fixed pres-
recommended. The use of tubing clean for oxygen ser- sure drop criteria at terminal units. Maximum blower
vice is recommended. vacuum (per fan curve) shall not exceed 200 mbar (80
in. w.g.) below atmospheric pressure.
Rationale: Brazed copper is the preferred material D. Blowers: Blowers shall be oil-free continuous-run
to ensure compatibility with the oxygen- type (the online blower shall run continuously in normal
enriched fluid stream, including its auto operation). Individual variable frequency drive for each
ignition resistance, corrosion resistance to blower shall be considered for units 5 HP and larger.
anesthetics, and impermeability, and minimizes Units shall automatically lead/lag/alternate.
potential of misapplication.
subject to tampering and accessible for service. Once automatic system configuration, provided the system
adjusted, the set point shall be recorded and labeled. meets all redundancy requirements and the alarm con-
Factory calibrated pre-set regulators may be used where ditions are replicated to the VMGS alarm panel, the
coordinated with system balance requirements. system location is at an approved, secure location and
in consideration of noise and exhaust requirements. The
H. Power and Controls: Controls/electrical configura- system shall comply with requirements of this section.
tion shall be of a redundant NFPA-99 configuration,
and system arranged such that individual blowers may Rationale: This is to allow for use of local
be serviced or replaced without disrupting system oper- systems with remote start-stop panels that can
ation. There shall be PLC control with continuous run be monitored at the point of use, for limited
of one blower and automatic lead/lag/alternation to applications where this may be acceptable and cost
maintain system vacuum. All control panels shall be effective. Central systems are generally required in
appropriately listed. lieu of multiple small systems to conserve space,
I. Exhaust Backpressure: Exhaust shall be designed to noise, and maintenance.
prevent unacceptable backpressures and shall incorpo-
rate either a valved drain flask or sufficient drip pocket M. Terminal Unit Probes: Each terminal unit shall be
with drain valve. provided with a standard angle or straight probe (e.g.,
outlet adapter) compatible with the terminal unit to
J. Fault Alarms: Emergency plant fault, reserve blower facilitate the hose connection. At least one probe per
in use (or whenever all blowers are in operation), and terminal unit is required and shall be turned over to the
general plant fault signals shall report (independently) facility through the PO after system verification.
to the facility VMGS alarm panel of the area served in
addition to individual alerts at the local (source equip-
ment) control panel. Shut-off or failure of any one pump Rationale: The probes are required for initial
or positioning of either or both pumps in manual mode verification and validation of the system and its
shall initiate a plant alarm fault. A vacuum-level drop subsequent use.
below 120 mbar as sensed at the plant or shut-off of
system shall initiate an emergency plant fault. A vacuum N. Distribution System Sizing: Systems shall be sized
level above 180 to 200 mbar as sensed at the plant shall to achieve operation once terminal units have been
activate an emergency plant fault. Faults shall activate adjusted as per ISO 7396-2. Velocities in mains shall
regardless of position of HOA switches. not exceed 9.14 m/s (1,800 fpm) and individual connec-
K. Remote Vacuum Pressure Monitor: In addition to tions shall not exceed 5.59 m/s (1,100 fpm).
these equipment (plant) faults, the normal operating O. System Testing, Balancing, and Verification: The
pressure of the scavenging system shall be monitored by testing, and verification process of systems with termi-
pressure sensors capable of accurate operation at system nal units operating in the low vacuum active range shall
vacuum levels, located at the remote end of the pipe line include all steps and methods as indicated in ISO 7396-2
in each major animal corridor served. The sensors shall with the verification/certification component performed
indicate and alarm to the VMGS alarm panel at 20% by the qualified verifier. Completed systems shall be
above and below normal system operating pressure. properly balanced in accordance with ISO 7396-2 prior
Monitoring of individual mains shall alert to the appro- to use. At minimum, balancing and verification shall be
priate area alarm function of the VMGS alarm panel, performed under flow conditions of only the single unit
or to an area alarm configured with master alarm style nearest the source, only the single unit most remote,
indicators for high and low faults, provided an opera- and random units throughout the facility up to the
tional pressure display is also provided. design demand of the system flowing, after verification
L. Local System Alternate: For small facilities with only and adjustment of each terminal unit. The system must
a few locations requiring periodic AGSS, the provision be confirmed to provide proper operation within ISO
of an ISO 7396-2 type 1H system with remote control 7396-2 type 1H criteria for the design quantity/loca-
panels at the use point may be utilized in lieu of a central tions of outlets in simultaneous operation and the A/E
shall indicate this quantity in the Basis of Design. After system, requiring only air supply and a piped exhaust
setting, all orifice lock screws/grub screws etc. shall be connection. Compliance with the following is required:
verified to be locked to prevent loss of adjustment. The
proper operation of each required alarm signal shall be S. Supply Air Source: Facility high-pressure lab/instru-
verified, and shall include confirmation of alarm sensi- ment air or dedicated compressed air manifolds shall
tivity and avoidance of false tripping. The verification be utilized to drive venturi terminal units, provided
process shall ensure proper operation of each terminal the arrangement meets required capacity and pressure
unit through any potential sequence of outlets in simul- and that redundancy and supply source monitoring
taneous use, up to the design demand. are provided to not less than would be required for an
NFPA-99 Category 1 pressurized medical gas system.
P. High Vacuum Scavenging Alternative: Independent If cylinders are used, the high rate of flow associated
high vacuum active systems, at not to exceed 1215 with operation of the venturi outlets and provision of
inHg, may be utilized subject to compatibility with adequate reserve in case of primary bank failure must
the intended applications, anesthesia interface style, be demonstrated, and use of cylinders for such purpose
and flow rates. Wherever such high vacuum scaveng- shall require approval of the program veterinarian.
ing is utilized, it must be confirmed that the approach
is acceptable to the program veterinary anesthesiolo-
gist. Such systems shall utilize conventional NFPA-99 Rationale: The quantity limitation on use of active
WAGD high vacuum DISS outlets and may utilize air venturi-type inlets is due to the high energy costs/
breaks (open interfaces, highly recommended) or closed efficiency of producing a vacuum through this
interfaces designed for such use. Planning to accommo- method due to the consumption of compressed air,
date open interfaces is required. as well as additional maintenance needs for this
type of device. However, such application may be
acceptable for facilities with very limited demands
Rationale: High vacuum WAGD is not preferred as it may eliminate entire piping systems, especially
due to lower flow rates at outlets, the reliance where use is infrequent, demands are low, or where
on mechanical point of use safeties associated a remote need (e.g., in a lab) is required.
with closed interfaces to achieve significant (e.g.,
greater than 500x) turn-down ratios and maintain T. Drive Gas Alarm: The drive air supply primary and
stability, and sensitivities of small animals. The backup status, cylinder bank pressure upstream of the
use of a suitable high vacuum compatible open line regulator, and reserve low and line-pressure alarms
interface (air break) is recommended if high shall be used to provide a dedicated anesthetic scav-
vacuum is being used, but must be selected for such enging drive gas alert to the VMGS alarm panel. They
vacuum levels to ensure safe and effective use. shall provide alert to the ARF or laboratory monitoring
system (where utilized) or other approved second pro-
Q. Alarm and Verification Requirements: Alarm gram-designated alert point, along with the alert to the
features and set points shall be provided as per low BAS or ARF area monitoring system, as approved by
vacuum active systems. Where high vacuum systems are NIH to provide at least two areas of responsibly moni-
utilized and operated at those levels, the alarm points tored alarm supervision.
of the high vacuum distribution shall be per NFPA-99
for WAGD systems. Verification of high vacuum active U. Drive Gas Supply and Terminal Unit Exhaust:
WAGD shall be per NFPA-99. Venturi-driven systems shall be provided with instru-
ment grade (or better) compressed air at required pres-
R. Venturi-Driven Terminal Units: In lieu of dedicated sure to drive each terminal unit per manufacturers
piped anesthetic scavenging systems, small systems (typi- requirements and shall exhaust indirectly to a continu-
cally less than 10 outlets) may use compressed-air-driven ous, non-recirculating building fume hood exhaust
active venturi-type anesthetic gas scavenging terminal system in accordance with NFPA-99 or ISO 7396-2 or
units per NFPA-99 or ISO 7396-2. Such units shall be as approved to the outside. The arrangement shall be
autonomous self-contained type and maintain a sealed coordinated with the HVAC systems design. Only indi-
vidual piping from each terminal unit to the exhaust
point is permitted (venturi-driven outlets may not share replaceable gas pendant hoses (e.g., from DISS outlets)
a combined exhaust pipe upstream of the connection to or medical gas pendants shall be provided.
the exhaust location in any manner that back-pressure
or flow reversal could occur). Proper capture of waste C. Outlet Type: Outlet types shall be bold color-coded
anesthetic at the exhaust shall be confirmed. faceplate DISS type or other bold color-coded type that
is individually keyed to the gas application and approved
V. System Type and Capacity: System terminal units by the program user group and compliant with this
shall be ISO 7396-2 active venturi type, designed to section. Where human patients are served in the same
provide adequate flow rate in accordance with system facility, the type of ARF gas outlets and systems identi-
drive gas supply air pressure. Terminal units shall pro- fication shall be distinctly different from the type used
vide at least 50 LPM flow in accordance with the refer- for human medical applications (e.g., DISS versus quick
enced standard. System design shall be in accordance connect indexed medical gas). Conventional lab turrets
with ISO 7396-2 and NFPA-99. are not acceptable. For outlet requirements for waste
anesthetic scavenging systems, refer to Section 12.5.5.5.
W. Visual Indicator: Terminal units shall include a
visual indicator to clearly alert users that the unit is
properly operating (suction is present) and to indicate Rationale: The use of DISS outlets provides a
loss of suction. standardized rigid outlet type than can be adapted
to a variety of services, withstand mounting of
regulators and controls and provide both bold
visual and physical protection from accidental
cross-connection to the wrong gas. Lab turrets are
12.5.6 VMGS Outlets and not fail-safe indexed or automatic valved, and do
Terminal Unit Location, not comply with required standards.
next to electrical receptacles or other spark sources, 12.5.7 Barrier and Quarantine
including at manufactured ceiling columns or other pre-
manufactured assemblies. Facilities
A. Services Areas: Although risks of cross infection
H. Provision of AGS Terminal Units: Anesthetic gas
through VMGS systems are considered low with proper
scavenging terminal units should generally be placed at
design, filter use, and operating procedures; connection
gaseous anesthetizing locations, and shall be provided
to central ARF veterinary gas and vacuum systems or
alongside nitrous oxide wherever provided.
systems serving other areas shall be made only upon
I. Slide Brackets and Air Break Brackets: A slide review and approval of the program veterinarian.
bracket shall be provided to serve each veterinary medi-
B. Filters: The use of replaceable, validated medical gas
cal (surgical) vacuum inlet and shall be placed adjacent
filters are typically required, and shall be fitted at the
to the vacuum inlet, but spaced a few inches (a blank
point of use as per the Risk Assessment and coordinated
outlet space) from the adjacent terminals to allow space
with users during planning. Filters shall be appropriate
for the medical vacuum suction canister.
for USP-NF oxygen service.
J. Anesthetic Scavenging System Protection:
Decontamination ports (for gaseous decontamination)
Rationale: Maintaining the intended status of
may be provided at central equipment where requested.
specific-pathogen free and quarantine areas from
The use of filters shall be provided by the program as
cross-contamination is critical to the research
point of use items. Where filters are required to be pro-
program. Often clean and dirty transgenic spaces
vided elsewhere in the system, the arrangement must be
are in close proximity; precautions are necessary
approved by ORF, DOHS, and the program veterinary
to minimize risk of cross-contamination, especially
anesthetist.
considering that systems might not always be
pressurized. The application of point of use
Rationale: Filters may be required for some disposable medical gas ultrafiltration or sterile
applications and best practice includes filtration are typically required to ensure gas purity
incorporation of disposable filters at the point of at individual outlets serving such areas, and should
use. Placement must be approved by the program be confirmed with the program requirements.
veterinary anesthetist (typically between the
breathing circuit and the air break/interface),
though in some cases may be determined
acceptable to be in the transfer hose at the wall
outlet/terminal unit). There are significant
limitations to pressure drop and flow through
such filters and inappropriate application or
maintenance can result in safety hazards.
Table 12.5.6 Animal Research Facility Gas Terminals for Animal Procedures
Contents
12.6.0 Introduction
and lowest acceptable pressure condition. rating safety factors (as used for non-hazardous sys-
Maximum quantities shall comply with limita- tems) are unacceptable. The rating shall be determined
tions of NFPA and IFC standards, and as other- by the process engineer and in accordance with govern-
wise directed by the DOHS and DFM. ing codes and standards.
E. Hazardous Fluid Systems Quality Process: A qual- K. Safety Failures and System Control: Designs shall not
ity-control process shall be provided to ensure the be subject to run-away reactions or safety failures due
appropriate design of all hazardous fluid systems prior to single common operating errors (example opening or
to submission for NIH review. An independent quality- closing of wrong valve). Preventive design features shall
control and quality assurance process shall be required be provided consistent with the consequences of a fail-
for verification of the installation, design, startup, and ure condition. System fluids, reactions, byproducts, and
development of standard operating procedures (SOPs) venting shall be safely controlled at all times. Pressures
of any hazardous or toxic system. and temperatures shall be controlled, and venting shall
be to a safe location, arranged to preclude obstruction,
F. Critical Process Condition Measurement: All criti- and with protection from contamination or hazards
cal process conditions (temperature, pressure, concen- associated with vent and relief operations.
tration, etc.) where deemed critical to safety or integ-
rity shall be measured directly at the point of concern L. Safe Separation: Systems shall maintain safe sepa-
(rather than inferred or at an indirect location where a rations from any incompatible or reactive fluid han-
process variation such as pump status or valve position) dling system or component, including under emergency
could impact value. conditions.
AB. Fluid/Vessel Containment: Where containment D. Pipe Cleaning Provisions: Overhead piping systems
is necessary for a fluid or vessel, the containment shall shall be arranged to facilitate disassembly for clearing
be appropriately arranged to protect from overflow or of stoppages, or provided with cleanouts. Such clea-
release, and shall consider the entire contents of the nouts must be arranged to seal tight, and shall be spe-
connected piping and vessels. cifically detailed so as not to impede flow or contribute
to stoppages.
AC. Fluid/Gas Ambient Detectors: Appropriate pro-
cess fluid/gas ambient detectors of required sensitivity E. Routing of Piping and Noise Control: Routing of
shall be provided, calibrated, and verified. Set points system distribution lines and equipment placement shall
shall be verified by risk analysis or codes and standards be made with consideration of noise associated with
with acceptance confirmation as directed by the DOHS. operation.
AD. Documentation: Comprehensive BOD documen- F. Restricted Areas: System routings shall avoid animal
tation shall be provided, including an outline of the holding rooms and other spaces where associated noise
sequence of operations, recommended O&M data, and and maintenance access may be an issue. Avoid sensi-
documentation for any items or practices critical to tive sanitary spaces or other critical areas such as surgi-
system integrity or safety. cal spaces, barrier areas, high containment, and similar
restricted spaces.
AE. Emergency Power: Emergency power (life safety
where applicable and for all hazardous or toxic gas G. Traps: Traps serving bedding disposal units shall be
monitors) shall be provided, along with required fail- at least 100 mm (4 in.) diameter. The use of 150 mm
safe provisions. Valves and components shall fail in (6 in.) trap and use of piping at slopes of 34% may
safe positions. be adequate, especially where sufficient water flow for
drain line transport is provided. Jetted traps shall be
AF. Safe Maintenance: Systems shall be designed, used where necessary to control waste stoppages. Sealed
located, and arranged to minimize hazards and risk of equipment connections are required.
injury to personnel or property as may be associated
with routine maintenance and service activities.
Rationale: Malfunction of bedding systems can
be highly disruptive to cage wash operations.
Failure to provide suitable gas-tight cleanout
designs that are free-flowing can result in need
12.6.3 Remote Bedding for frequent disassembly of piping systems to
Disposal Systems clear stoppages, and is undesirable even where
systems are designed for handling of only dry
A. Equipment Selection: The A/E shall discuss with the
bedding. Moisture often enters bedding systems
user group and determine if bedding will always be dry
and contributes to clogs. Cleanouts that are out
or may be wet or slurry; prior to selecting systems.
of the flow path and pose no flow restriction (e.g.,
B. Failure Assessment and Redundancy: Systems shall cleanouts that extend as floor cleanout access
be designed to minimize risk of plausible single point housings to suitable service areas on the floor
failure. Redundant drive sources (vacuum pumps, above) should be provided. The use of pressure-
motors, etc.) shall be provided to ensure continuous system-compatible threaded caps or gasketed
operation and facilitate routine maintenance without flanges within access housings are examples of
disrupting vivaria operations. effective approaches; standard drainage system
cleanout plugs may be susceptible to leakage.
C. Waste Piping Radii: Piping radii for directional Removable spool pieces and flanged elbows can
changes must be arranged to minimize potential for also be used to facilitate cleanout access in some
stoppages. Direct routing with minimal horizontal to cases; however, maintenance for such arrangements
horizontal offsets shall be provided and documented in can be highly disruptive if within program areas.
design drawings.
BSC Workspace:
40
12 12
Maintain a distance of 12 to adjacent walls & columns. Note: columns can aid in defining traffic routes.
80
60
Place BSCs at least 60 to opposing bench tops or areas with occasional traffic.
40
Maintain a distance of 40 between BSC and bench tops along a perpendicular wall.
120
40
48 48
60 40
Placing BSCs near doorways is not recommended. If this arrangement is absolutely necessary maintain a
distance of 40 to adjacent doorways and 60 to doorways behind the BSC.
Do not crowd bench tops and BSCs. Too much traffic produces dangerous disturbances to BSC airflow.
To calculate capture efficiency of a downdraft table, the presented method used a particle
tracking model with some assumptions on the flow field.
Assumptions:
1). Flow around the table: uniform, but not necessarily vertical, horizontal velocity
components of the airflow can be considered. No pressure gradient in the flow field.
Page 1 of 5 Sept-08
y z
B D
G Table
G: Gravity force
B: Buoyancy force
D: Drag Force
P: Pressure Force (caused by the pressure gradient in the flow field).
Neglected forces are: Additional inertia force, Basset Force, Magnus Force, Saffman
Forces, Lift force.
F = ma = G + B + D + P
1 du p
ma = d 3 p
6 dt
G = p gV
B = g gV
1
D = C D d 2 g u g u p (u g u p )
8
P=0
Page 2 of 5 Sept-08
Putnums formula
24
CD = f
Re r
1
f = 1 + Re 2r / 3
6
Where Rer is the Reynolds number based on relative velocity
g ug u p d
Re r =
du px 3CD g
X: = (u gx u px ) 2 + (u gy u py ) 2 + (u gz u pz ) 2 (u gx u px )
dt 4d p
du py g 3C
Y: = p g + D g (u gx u px ) 2 + (u gy u py ) 2 + (u gz u pz ) 2 (u gy u py )
dt p 4d p
du pz 3CD g
Z: = (u gx u px ) 2 + (u gy u py ) 2 + (u gz u pz ) 2 (u gz u pz )
dt 4d p
Page 3 of 5 Sept-08
Numerical Solution
n 3CD
g
px = t u px +
u n+1 (u gx u npx ) 2 + (u gy u npy ) 2 + (u gz u npz ) 2 (u gx u npx )
4d p
n p g 3C
py = t u py
u n+1 g + D g (u gx u npx ) 2 + (u gy u npy ) 2 + (u gz u npz ) 2 (u gy u npy )
p 4d p
n 3CD g
pz = t u pz +
u n+1 (u gx u npx ) 2 + (u gy u npy ) 2 + (u gz u npz ) 2 (u gz u npz )
4d p
This method requires relatively small time steps to keep the solution stable, currently
0.0001s is found sufficient.
In the spreadsheet, the ranges of particle releasing and landing are represented by two
rectangles.
Page 4 of 5 Sept-08
Nomenclature
G: Gravity force vector
B: Buoyancy force vector
D: Drag Force vector
P: Pressure Force (caused by the pressure gradient in the flow field) vector
a: Accelaration of particle vector
m: Mass of particle
V: Volume of particle
d: Particle diameter
p: Density of particle
g: Density of Gas (air)
CD: Drag coefficient of particle
f: Resistance factor
Rer: Reynolds number based on relative speed
ug: Gas velocity vector (ugx,ugy,ugz are velocity components in x,y,z directons)
up: Particle velocity vector
u np+1 : Particle velocity vector in the new time step
t: Time step
L: Length of the downdraft table (center area where the flow is drawing downwards)
W: Width of the downdraft table (center area where the flow is drawing downwards)
C: Capture efficiency
Page 5 of 5 Sept-08
User Input
Table Dimension
Length X 24 in
Width Z 24 in
Particle Information
Size 5 micron
30
Density 1000 kg/m^3
Release Height 5 in
Particle Initial Velocity 25
Vertical Speed Vy 0 ft/min
Horizontal Speed Vx 0 ft/min
20
Horizontal Speed Vz 0 ft/min
Z (in)
Output 15
Drift Length X 1.50 in
Drift Length Z 1.50 in 10
Drift Length 2.12 in
Capture Percentage 87.92 %
5
Particle Trajectory
30
Release Range
25
Landing Range
20
Z (in)
15
10
nge
Z 0
1.50 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
1.50
X (in)
25.50
25.50
1.50
User Input
Table Dimension
Length X 24 in
Width Z 24 in
Particle Information
Size 5 micron
30
Density 1000 kg/m^3
Release Height 5 in
Particle Initial Velocity 25
Vertical Speed Vy 0 ft/min
Horizontal Speed Vx 0 ft/min
20
Horizontal Speed Vz 0 ft/min
Z (in)
Output 15
Drift Length X 0.75 in
Drift Length Z 0.75 in 10
Drift Length 1.06 in
Capture Percentage 93.85 %
5
Particle Trajectory
30
Release Range
25
Landing Range
20
Z (in)
15
10
ge
Z 0
0.75 0 5 10 15 20 25 30
0.75
X (in)
24.75
24.75
0.75
BAS Application BAS installed at satellite sites shall use the same network
with remote connection as configured by CIT.
A. Introduction: Appendix C presents clarification of
specific applications of Chapter 7, Building Automation
Systems as applied to the Bethesda Campus of NIH as Continous Monitoring Requirements
well as Poolesville and Rocky Mountain Laboratories MANAGING AND TRACKING THE SECURITY
campuses/sites which are managed from the Bethesda STATE OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS
Campus.
A critical aspect of managing risk to information from
B. General Requirements: Consult with the desig- the operation and use of information systems involves
nated representative from Division of Design and the continuous monitoring of the security controls
Construction Management for requirements for using employed within or inherited by the system. Conducting
the campus network, alarming integration with the IT a thorough point-in-time assessment of the deployed
Help Desk, and when applicable, integration to exist- security controls is a necessary but not sufficient con-
ing systems. Coordinate with the Division of Facilities, dition to demonstrate security due diligence. An effec-
Operations, and Maintenance (DFOM), Accreditation tive organizational information security program also
Services Branch (ASB) relative to Animal Research includes a rigorous continuous monitoring program
Facilities (ARFs) Environmental Monitoring and Data integrated into the system development life cycle. The
storage. objective of the continuous monitoring program is to
determine if the set of deployed security controls con-
C. Scope: Utilities at the Bethesda Campus are pro- tinue to be effective over time in light of the inevitable
vided from a central utility plant. Coordinate with changes that occur. Continuous monitoring is a proven
the Division of Technical Resources (DTR), Utilities technique to address the security impacts on an infor-
Distribution Branch (UDB) and DFOM, Maryland mation system resulting from changes to the hardware,
Facilities Management Branch (MFMB) for building software, firmware, or operational environment. A
utilities monitoring. Electrical power, chilled water, well designed and well managed continuous monitor-
and steam, shall be connected to independent monitor- ing program can effectively transform an otherwise
ing systems (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition static security control assessment and risk determina-
(SCADA) for electrical and Utility Monitoring System). tion process into a dynamic process that provides essen-
Some devices (e.g., flow meters) may be tied into both tial, near real-time security status-related information
systems. to organizational officials in order to take appropriate
D. Standardization: The following site-specific stan- risk mitigation actions and make cost-effective, risk-
dards apply to the Bethesda Campus. These are avail- based decisions regarding the operation of the informa-
able at: tion system. Continuous monitoring programs provide
organizations with an effective mechanism to update
Alarm handling procedures specification security plans, security assessment reports, and plans of
NIH Point Naming action and milestones.
Supervised Objects Specification
NIH Specific Requirements Solicitation provisions:
Central Archiving Software A. Solicitation: The IT Security provisions found
Remote Alarming Notification in NIH IT SECURITY FACnet SOLICITATION
PROVISION, should be added to any new IT solicitation.
E. General Infrastructure Requirements: BAS installed
on the Bethesda Campus shall use the existing FACNet 1. Integration With Existing Systems: Existing
Ethernet LAN installed by Center for Information systems at Bethesda are predominantly the
Technology (CIT). This network shall support other sys- Siemens Building Technologies Apogee System
tems such as security, ARFs Environmental Monitoring, and Johnson Controls Inc. Metasys Extended
Data, etc. IP addresses of primary panels shall be assigned Architecture.
by CIT.
a. Primary Controller LAN: Illustrative exam- that the sensor is representative of the macroen-
ples of a Primary Controller LAN include vironment of the animal holding room.
Siemens BLN or JCI N1.
4. Supply Air Systems: Supply air systems that do
b. Secondary Controller LAN: Illustrative not serve Joint Commission accredited spaces
examples of a Secondary Controller LAN shall not include smoke or heat detection and
include Siemens FLN or JCI N2. corresponding shutdown that would be required
by the National Fire Protection Association
2. Servers: (NFPA).
a. Description: Server infrastructures that exist 5. Scheduling: Laboratory spaces shall not include
at the Bethesda Campus include Siemens scheduled variations to temperature or airflow.
Apogee and JCI Metasys. New systems that
extend the coverage of these existing sys- 6. Building Steam Connections to Campus System:
tems shall include applicable upgrades to the The steam to buildings on the Bethesda Campus
server environment required to support the shall come from the campus steam system and
new extension. immediately be reduced in pressure. Coordinate
with UEB for the meters and monitoring of the
3. Vivarium Monitoring Workstations: Coordinate steam service.
with DFOM ASB for required computers (typi-
cally not required), BAS and Data LAN connec- 7. Campus Chilled Water Connections: The chilled
tions, and trend/point requirements for all ARFs water to buildings at the Bethesda Campus shall
installed at the Bethesda Campus or satellite come from the campus chilled water system. The
facilities. design shall include building pumps, a decou-
pling bridge, and a building valve. Coordinate
4. Intranet Remote Connections: Coordinate with with UEB for projections as to the extremes
CIT for LAN configurations and access rights of potential pressure differentials probable at
for remote access. the building and provide a valve selected for
effective control across that range of pressure
B. Building Level Requirements: Coordinate with UEB differentials.
for building utilities monitoring. Much of the monitor-
ing required here shall be tied into the NIH Campus 8. Control Air Systems: The campus air system shall
Energy Management System. In some cases, devices like be used as the primary source for control air.
flow meters can be tied into both the campus wide energy Redundant local compressors shall provide the
management system as well as the BAS. required airflow if the campus air system fails.
1. Laboratories with VAV Hoods: All new installa- 9. Fume Hoods: Two systems that have been quali-
tions of VAV fume hoods shall incorporate high fied for use at NIH include Siemens Building
speed electronic actuators on the fume hood Technologies FHC and associated LRC, and
exhaust control box as well as all associated air- Phoenix Celaris.
flow/pressure tracking controls.
2. Critical Laboratories: There shall not be firemans C. Control System Architecture: One master architec-
override controls on non-Joint Commission sys- ture diagram shall be maintained for each installed
tems at Bethesda or satellite sites. manufacturer that is inclusive of all installations of that
system on campus. Design documents shall include the
3. All Animal Holding Rooms: Space and humid- requirement to update this.
ity sensors in Bethesda and satellite sites shall be 1. Points List: One master points list shall be main-
located in the general exhaust stream as close as tained for each installed manufacturer that is
practical to a representative room inlet. Ensure inclusive of all installations of that system on
sensor penetrations into duct are well sealed and campus. If this can be queried from the BAS
server database, this will suffice.
2. Primary Controller: The following are examples torque actuators on main supply air handling
of Primary Controllers at Bethesda and satellites: units and exhaust fans that serve containment
applications.
SBT Modular Building Controller or
Modular Equipment Controller with 6. Compressed Air Systems: Campus compressed
expander modules allowed. The key require- air shall be distributed to the building from the
ment is for the MBC or MEC processor to campus system on the Bethesda campus. Tie in
fully control all sequences of points attached to the building standby skid shall be downstream
to it. of the compressors and receiver and upstream of
JCI packaged NAE with a dedicated DX driers and filters. Ensure, standby compressors
9100 and no other devices on the N2 are adequately exercised.
B. New Employees: Provide the name, position title, E. Offerors Official Responsible for Information
e-mail address, and phone number of the new employee. Security
Provide the name, position title and suitability level held The offeror must include in the Information Security
by the former incumbent. If the employee is filling a new part of its Technical Proposal the name and title of its
position, provide a description of the position and the official who will be responsible for all information secu-
government will determine the appropriate security rity requirements should the offeror be selected for an
level. award.
C. Departing Employees:
F. NIST SP 800-53 Self-Assessment
Provide the name, position title, and secu-
rity clearance level held by or pending for the If the offeror proposes to (1) develop a federal informa-
individual. tion system at the contractors/subcontractors facility or
(2) host or maintain a federal information system at the
Perform and document the actions identi- contractors/subcontractors facility, they must include
fied in the Contractor Employee Separation in the Information Security part of its Technical
Checklist, of this acquisition, when a con- Proposal, a completed Self-Assessment required by
tractor/subcontractor employee terminates NIST SP 800-53, Recommended Security Controls for
work under this acquisition. All documenta- Federal Information Systems. NIST 800-53 assesses
tion shall be made available to the PO and/or information security assurance of the offerors inter-
CO upon request. nal systems security. This assessment is based on the
D. Commitment to Protect Non-Public Departmental Federal IT Security Assessment Framework and NIST
Information Systems and Data SP 800-53 at:
the System Categorization determined above in sub- I. Personally Identifiable Information (PII) Security
paragraph (b) Security Categories and Levels. Plan
Subcontracts: The offeror must include similar informa- The offeror must include a draft PII Security Plan that
tion for any proposed subcontractor that will perform addresses each of the following items relative to protect-
under the SOW with the offeror whenever the submis- ing the PII that the SOW allows the contractor/subcon-
sion of an ISSP is required. tractor to remotely access or physically remove from the
agencys premises or control:
Note to Offeror: The resultant acquisition will require
the draft ISSP to be finalized in coordination with the 1. Verify the information categorization to ensure
Project Officer no later than 90 calendar days after the identification of the PII requiring protection.
award. Also, a contractor is required to update and 2. Verify the existing risk assessment.
resubmit its ISSP to NIH every three years following
award or when a major modification has been made to Identify the offerors existing internal corporate
its internal system. policy that addresses the information protec-
tion requirements of the SOW.
H. Prospective Offeror Non-Disclosure Agreement
3. Verify the adequacy of the offerors existing
The Government has determined that prospective offer- internal corporate policy that addresses the
ors will require access to sensitive federal information information protection requirements of the
described below in order to prepare an offer. SOW.
Any individual having access to this information must 4. Identify any revisions, or development, of an
possess a valid and current suitability determination at internal corporate policy to adequately address
the following level: the information protection requirements of the
Level 6: Public Trust High Risk SOW.
S Level 5: Public Trust Moderate Risk 5. For PII to be physically transported to a remote
site, verify that the security controls of NIST
To be considered for access to sensitive federal infor- Special Publication 800-53 involving the
mation, a prospective offeror must: encryption of transported information will be
implemented.
1. Submit a written request to the CO identified in
the solicitation; 6. For PII to be stored at a remote site, verify
that the security controls of NIST Special
2. Complete and submit the Prospective Offeror Publication 800-53 involving the encryp-
Non-Disclosure Agreement provided as an tion of remotely stored information will be
attachment in Section J of this solicitation; and implemented.
3. Receive written approval from the CO. 7. When applicable, verify how the NIST Special
Prospective offerors are required to process their Publication 800-53 security controls requiring
requests for access, receive Government approval, and authenticated, virtual private network (VPN)
then access the sensitive Federal information within the connections will be implemented.
period of time provided in the solicitation for the prepa- 8. When applicable, verify how the NIST Special
ration of offers. Publication 800-53 security controls enforc-
Nothing in this provision shall be construed, in any ing allowed downloading of PII will be
manner, by a prospective offeror as an extension to the implemented.
stated date, time, and location in the solicitation for the The details contained in the offerors draft PII Security
submission of offers. Plan must be commensurate with the size and complexity
of the requirements of the SOW based on the System Key recovery is required by OMB Guidance
Categorization determined above in Security Categories to Federal Agencies on Data Availability and
and Levels. Encryption, November 26, 2001.
Subcontracts: The offeror must include similar informa- Encryption keys shall comply with all HHS and
tion for any proposed subcontractor that will perform NIH policies and shall provide adequate protec-
under the SOW with the offeror whenever the submis- tion to prevent unauthorized decryption of the
sion of a PII Security Plan is required. information.
J. Loss and/or Disclosure of Personally Identifiable System owners shall obtain written authoriza-
Information (PII) Notification of Data Breach tion from the NIH CISO if compliance with
this policy is not feasible or not technically pos-
The successful offeror shall be responsible for report- sible, or if deviation from this policy is necessary
ing all incidents involving the loss and/or disclosure of to support a mission or business function. All
PII in electronic or physical form. Notification shall be policy waivers must be recorded and immedi-
made to the NIH Chief Information Security Officer ately provided to the HHS CISO.
(CISO) within one hour of discovering the incident by
using one of the following two forms: All media used to store information shall comply
with this policy until it is sanitized or destroyed
NIH PII Spillage Report in accordance with HHS policy and NIH
NIH Lost or Stolen Assets Report procedures.
The notification requirements do not distinguish
between suspected and confirmed breaches. L. Vulnerability Scanning Requirements
If the contractor proposes hosting an NIH webpage or
K. Encryption of Data database, the contractor/subcontractor shall conduct
The following requirements apply to all contractor/sub- periodic and special vulnerability scans, and install
contractor laptop computers containing HHS data at software/hardware patches and upgrades to protect
rest and/or HHS data in transit. automated federal information assets. The minimum
requirement shall be to protect against vulnerabilities
1. All laptop computers shall be secured using a identified on the SANS Top-20 Internet Security Attack
Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS) Targets list. The contractor will provide the results of
140-2 compliant whole-disk encryption solu- these scans to the government on a monthly basis.
tion. The cryptographic module used by an
encryption or other cryptographic product shall M. Implementation of Commonly Accepted Security
be tested and validated under the Cryptographic Configurations for Windows Operating Systems
Module Validation Program to confirm compli-
ance with the requirements of FIPS PUB 140-2 1. For all Information Technology provided under
(as amended). the acquisition, the Contractor shall certify that
the applications are fully functional and oper-
2. All data at rest and in transit, unless the data is ate correctly as intended on systems using the
determined to be non-sensitive in writing by the Federal Desktop Core Configuration (FDCC).
NIH CIO or his/her designee, shall be encrypted
using a FIPS 140-2 compliant product. Data at 2. The standard installation, operation, main-
rest includes all HHS data regardless of where tenance, update, and/or patching of software
it is stored. shall not alter the configuration settings from
the approved USGBC configuration. The infor-
3. A FIPS 140-2 compliant key recovery mechanism mation technology shall also use the Windows
shall be used so that encrypted information can Installer Service for installation to the default
be decrypted and accessed by authorized person- program files directory and shall be able to
nel. Use of encryption keys which are not recov- silently install and uninstall.
erable by authorized personnel is prohibited.
3. Applications designed for normal end users 6.1 Notification and Documentation from Vendor
shall run in the standard user context without 6.2 Problem Reporting
elevated system administration privileges.
P. References: Information Security including
N. Special Information Security Requirements for Personally Identifiable Information
Foreign Contractors/Subcontractors 1. Federal Information Security Management Act
When foreign contractors/subcontractors perform work of 2002 (FISMA), Title III, E-Government Act
under this acquisition at non-US Federal government of 2002, Pub. L. No. 107-347 (Dec. 17, 2002)
facilities, provisions of HSPD-12 do NOT apply.
2. NIH Computer Security Awareness Training
O. Control Systems Requirements Course
When a purchase or acquisition includes control systems 3. NIST Special Publication 800-16, Information
the procurement security requirement language shall Technology Security Training Requirements
include the appropriate language from the DHS Cyber
Security Procurement Language for Control Systems 4. NIST SP 800-18, Guide for Developing
(CSPLCS). Control systems include but are not limited Security Plans for Information Technology
to Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA), Systems
Process Control Systems (PCS), Distributed Control 5. NIST SP 800-53, Revision 3, Recommended
Systems (DCS), Industrial Control Systems (ICS) and Security Controls for Federal Information
related equipment types. Appropriate language includes Systems
the Procurement Language for the DHS CSPLCS sec-
tions identified in the baseline requirements listed below 6. FIPS PUB 199, Standards for Security
plus any section which corresponds to functionality Categorization of Federal Information and
present in the target control system or control system Information Systems
component.
7. FIPS PUB 200, Minimum Security
Baseline requirement sections: Requirements for Federal Information and
Information Systems
2.1 Removal of Unnecessary Services and
Programs 8. OMB Memorandum M-06-15, Safeguarding
2.3 Changes to File System and Operating System Personally Identifiable Information (05-22-06)
Permissions 9. OMB Memorandum M-06-16, Protection of
2.4 Hardware Configuration Sensitive Agency Information (06-23-06)
2.6 Installing Operating Systems, Applications, 10. OMB Memorandum M-06-19, Reporting
and Third-Party Software Updates Incidents Involving Personally Identifiable
4.1 Disabling, Removing, or Modifying Well- Information and Incorporating the Cost for
Known or Guest Accounts Security in Agency Information Technology
4.2 Session Management Investments (07-12-06)
4.5 Role-Based Access Control for Control System 12. Guide for Identifying Sensitive Information,
Applications including Information in Identifiable Form, at
4.6 Single Sign-On the NIH (Draft: 10-04-06) (Available from the
ISSO)
5.1 Coding for Security
13. HHS OCIO Policies
References
A. Calculating the Ventilation Rate for the Removal of Specifically, seeking an exponent of Ae in the follow-
Contaminants from Biomedical Laboratories by Farhad ing general format:
Memarzadeh, Ph.D., P.E., of the National Institutes of
Health n V room
-
Consultants that address the indoor air quality using V room
the dilution method must fully understand the short-
comings. Containment is preferred over dilution where Clearly, the AV room terms will cancel out, and we are
practical. When dilution is used, concentration levels left with the simple exponent value of n; and we can,
can vary greatly depending on air flow patterns within therefore, see that formula evolves to the following:
a room and the nature of the source or the contaminant. V room
Contaminant is never evenly distributed within a room. C = C 0 e- n V room = C 0 e- n
The following equation is based evenly distribution. So, The task for the consultant is simply to determine the
if used consideration shall be given to the fact that the value of n, as a number of Room Volumes, that corre-
results are only the average when supply air is mixing sponds to: (1) a decrease in the ambient concentration
evenly with the contaminant. In practice, most areas to a level that is only 10% of the starting value (i.e., the
within a room will have higher or lower concentrations. ending concentration, C9O%, has the value 0.1Co]; and
Where: (2) a decrease in the ambient concentration to a level
that is only 1% of the starting value [i.e, the ending con-
C = C 0 e- [
V removed / V room ]
= the Ending centration, C99%, has a value, 0.01Co].
Concentration of the Vapor in the Closed Space or
Room, which Ending Concentration, measured in For a 90% reduction in the concentration:
ppm, resulted from the purging activities:
ln 0.1 = - n90% = - 2.303
C0 = the Initial Concentration of the Vapor in the
Closed Space or Room that is to be reduced by purg-
n90% = 2.303
ing, also measured in ppm;
- n90%
Vremoved = the Air Volume that has been withdrawn C 90% = 0.1 C 0 = C 0 e
from the Closed Space or Room, measured in any suit-
able volumetric units, usually in cubic feet (ft); and
To alleviate the concerns from the numerical simulation Alternate wind speeds and directions from appro-
aspect, a series of grid refinement tests shall be carried priate wind rose data.
out to minimize the effect of numerical diffusion in this C. Fume Hood Testing and Alarms System by Farhad
calculation. The numerical diffusion in three dimen- Memarzadeh, Ph.D., P.E., of the National Institutes of
sions can be approximated, using Patankar (1980), as: Health
renovation phase. When the fume exhaust falls below a impact tube and side wall or other static tap, pitot tube,
preset safety level, the alarm will sound and the alarm etc., or measure volume or mass flow rate using devices
light will come on. such as orifice and differential pressure measurement
system, nozzle and differential pressure measurement
All parts that are to be in contact with vapors/fumes system, turbine flow meter, swirl flow meter, and vortex
in the hood, i.e., the sensing device, wiring, etc., shall shedding meter. A hood of design similar to the type
be chemically resistant. All alarm systems shall be UL specified in the ASHRAE Standard 110 will have the
approved. There shall be a means to shut off the audi- parameters described in the next paragraph.
ble alarm to reset. The alarm shall have an internal
timer so that the audible alarm is reactivated after a Fume Hood Testing: Note: This item must be included
specified time (adjustable between 5 minutes and 15 in the balancing specifications, the fume hood control
minutes). The alarm shall have the capability to set the specifications, and the hood specifications.
controllers setpoint to the safety level desired. There
shall be a means for setting the controllers setpoint 1. Fume Hood Containment Testing (On-Site):
to the exhaust level desired. This adjustment shall be Laboratory areas and variable volume fume
internal so that it is not readily adjustable by operat- hoods shall be tested as installed to assess the
ing personnel. Upon return to normal flow, the alarm level of containment. The test identified below
shall sound again until reset. was created by Farhad Memarzadeh, Ph.D., P.E.,
of NIH in 1997 and revised by Memarzadeh
The ACGIH Guidelines are referenced in the DRM for and Brightbill in 1999 and shall be performed
fume hood testing. The ACGIH requirements do not during static and dynamic conditions. Testing
specifically address all testing issues required by the shall be conducted as outlined below for 50% of
NIH. The following criteria shall be used for testing the hoods provided in the project. Tests shall be
fume hoods in NIH buildings: characterized and referred to in two basic cat-
egories, Static and Dynamic. While ele-
The fume hood manufacturer, no later than 30 days after ments of both static and dynamic testing exist in
receipt of the order, shall provide to the owner the use both test categories, these names are generally
of a state-of-the-art fume hood test facility meeting the used for reference.
requirements of the latest SMACNA Standard LF 10.
a. Static Testing: Testing shall be conducted in
The hood manufacturer shall conduct modified accordance with ASHRAE 110 Method
ASHRAE Standard 110, 1995, protocol of 1,800 mm of Testing Performance of Laboratory
hood of similar design to the type specified. The bypass Fume Hoods with the following modifica-
shall be designed so that face velocity does not exceed tions. This is primarily a test of the hood
the maximum as the sash is lowered in a variable and laboratory configuration.
volume hood. Variable volume fume hood protocol of
1,800 or 1,200 mm shall be tested in accordance with Hoods will be tested with simulated appara-
the Modified ASHRAE 110 Test for minimum baseline tus. This apparatus will consist of two each
requirements. The manufacturer shall provide a fume 3.8 L round paint cans, one 300 mm x 300
hood control system at its state-of-the-art test facility mm x 300 mm cardboard box, and three
meeting the requirements of the latest SMACNA stan- each 150 mm x 150 mm x 300 mm card-
dard LF 10 on its cost for acceptance by the NIH prior board boxes. These items will be positioned
to the delivery of hoods for installation. The minimum from 150 mm to 250 mm behind the sash,
of 50% installed hoods at site will be again offered randomly distributed, and supported off the
for testing on-site by the contractor after installation work surface by 50 by 50 mm blocks.
and building balance prior to occupancy. The contrac-
tor shall arrange for tests to be conducted by an NIH- The test gas will have a 6 L/min flow rate.
approved independent testing contractor. The specifi- Each test duration will be 5 minutes.
cations shall clearly identify the type of measurement Acceptable test results shall not exceed
devices that test a constant face velocity, such as hot 0.05 ppm.
wire anemometer, heated thermocouple anemometer,
At the conclusion of each 5 minute test, No fewer than three point sensors shall be
there will be three rapid walk-bys at 300 used. Averages shall be calculated for any
mm behind the manikin. Each two walk- point in time to assess overall measured face
bys will be spaced 30 seconds apart. If velocity; however, individual sensor samples
there is a rise in test gas concentration, it shall be used in calculating turbulence inten-
cannot exceed 0.10 ppm and must return sity (TI).
to 0.05 ppm within 15 seconds.
Total Exhaust Airflow (TEF expressed in
There will be a minimum of three and a L/s): Total exhaust flow measured in the main
maximum of five persons in the test room exhaust duct leaving the hood. This parameter
during the test procedure. shall be recorded at no less that 10 Hz. The
Representatives of the NIH will witness sensing methodology used for the recorded
the tests. data shall represent the total airflow through
2. Dynamic Testing: Dynamic testing primar- the full range of flows and be validated by
ily tests the dynamic performance of the fume independent multipoint measurement. If the
hood control system. This group of tests mea- fume hood control system uses a flow-sensing
sures hood performance parameters through element, that element may be used assuming it
various dynamic events. Events shall include can be calibrated across the full range of flow.
four sash movements up and down across differ- Sensing elements must have an internal time
ing ranges: 25100 percent and 50100 percent, coefficient of no more than 20 ms.
sash movements of other hoods on the exhaust Variable Face Area (FAv expressed in meters):
duct, walk-bys in front of the hood, and opening Face area of the hood that varies as the sash is
and closing the laboratory door commensurate moved within specified limits.
with a person entering and exiting the room. Fixed Face Area (FAf expressed in meters):
Hood parameters to be determined for each Face area of the hood with sash at minimum
event are defined as follows: position (minimum position shall correlate
Measured Face Velocity (FVm expressed in with the minimum bypass flow through the
m/s): Face velocity measured in the plane of hood).
the sash. Samples shall be recorded at no less Hood Airflow Leakage (HAL expressed in
than 10 Hz. Sensing methodology shall have L/s): The difference in airflow between the
an internal time coefficient of no more than measured airflow through the face (at mini-
100 ms. mum position) and the total airflow measured
Definitions: in the exhaust duct.
a. The internal time constant (ITC) is the Calculated Face Velocity (FVc): Face veloc-
amount of time it takes the sensor to ity determined from the following equation:
respond 63 percent of the way to a step (TEF-HAL x 1 000)/(FAv + FAf).
change. Steady State Face Velocity (SSFV): The average
b. The response time is the length of time to of all sampled face velocities for a 5 second
get to within the stated accuracy of the period. Two SSFVs will be determined for
sensor. both measured face velocity and calculated
face velocity; one before the event (SSFVb) and
c. Response time = ITC x 3 or 5 depending one after (SSFVa). The SSFVa will start 2 sec-
on the accuracy. Example: If the response onds after the end of TSS. The second suffix of
time is 200 ms, the ITC = 4070 ms. m for measured and c for calculated shall be
There shall be a point sensor located in the used to indicate the type of assessment.
middle of the face opening when the sash is Face Velocity Baseline (FVBL): The average of
at the lowest position during the tested event. SSFVa and SSFVb.
Control Linearity (CL expressed in %): Abs steady state conditions preceding and follow-
(SSFVa-SSFVb)/(FVBL) x 100. ing each event. This shall be correlated with
Time to Steady State (TSS10 and TSS5 a box leakage factor of the installation
expressed in seconds): The elapsed time from using the Methodology for Optimization of
the initial sash movement until the FVc reaches Laboratory Hood Containment (MOLHC)
and stays within 10 percent or 5 percent of by NIH Office of Research Services, Farhad
FVBL (as indicated by the subscript). Memarzadeh, Ph.D., P.E., principal investi-
gator. While this value does not have a pass/
Face Velocity Overshoot/Maximum Deviation fail requirement, it is the fundamental indi-
(FVO expressed in percent): Calculated using cator of containment and therefore shall be
the Calculated Face Velocity sample farthest clearly reported.
from the FVBL (FVf) throughout the test per
the following equation: (Abs (FVf-FVBL)/
Figure E.3.A Dynamic Testing Parameters
FVBL) x 100. Samples include initial face
velocity deviation immediately following
the sash movement as the controls initially
respond to the movement of the sash.
Response Time Constant (RTC expressed in
seconds): Elapsed time between initial move-
ment of the sash and the initial subsequent
movement of the exhaust valve.
Steady State Deviation (SSD expressed in %):
Face velocity variation from SSFVa or SSFVb
as applicable. Calculated using the farthest
sample from the applicable SSFV (FVf) using
3. Parameter Performance: Parameter performance
the following equation: (Abs (FVf-SSFVx)/
requirements:
SSFVx) x 100.
Controllability (expressed in mV/mm): Face Velocity Baseline (FVBL): 0.51 m/s .05
Describes controller response to changing m/s
sash position, i.e., controllers response signal Control Linearity (Cl expressed in %): < 2%
change per unit distance of sash movement.
Time to Steady State10 (TSS10 expressed in
Sash Position (SP expressed in mm): For verti- seconds): < 2 seconds
cal sashes, vertical distance from the sill of the
Time to Steady State5 (TSS5 expressed in sec-
hood to the bottom of the sash. The minimum
onds): < 3 seconds
sash position shall correlate with the position
of the sash when the minimum flow through Face Velocity Overshoot/Maximum
the hood is all through the face. Maximum Deviation: < 15%, which means at no point
sash position shall be defined as a distance throughout the test shall a sample be recorded
of 550 to 650 mm. This parameter shall be < 0.43 m/s or > 0.59 m/s
recorded at no less than 10 Hz. Response Time Constant (RTC expressed in
Controller Output (CO expressed in volts): seconds): < 0.5 seconds
Control output to the controlling exhaust air Steady State Deviation (SSD expressed in %):
valve. This parameter shall be measured and < 5% assessed using calculated face velocities
recorded at no less than 10 Hz.
Controllability (expressed in mV/mm): > 12
Turbulence Intensity (TI expressed in m/s): mV/25.4 mm
Calculated root mean square of the fluctu-
a. Alternate Parameter Performance
ating face velocity determined using FVm.
Requirements: The following performance
This value shall be calculated for each of the
parameters are alternate requirements that of its system to validate that they can meet the
can be used in assessing acceptable dynamic requirements specified herein. The off-site test
responses: shall include all parameters under the control of
the control system (FVBL, TSS, CL, RTC, SSD,
Face Velocity Baseline (FVBL): 0.51 m/s and Controllability). It is not necessary to mock
.05 m/s. up the installation and assess TI. Events to be
Calculated Face Velocity (FVc): All sam- tested off-site include all specified sash move-
ples > 0.255 m/s and < 0.89 m/s, mean- ments on the hood being tested. Walk-by and
ing that at no time during the event shall door-opening affects are not required for the
the calculated face velocity be outside that off-site test.
range. Any sample recorded beyond that
range will result in assessing the response The testing shall be accomplished by an inde-
as unacceptable. pendent testing agency approved by the A/E and
NIH. Reports shall be provided with the labo-
Control Linearity (Cl expressed in %): ratory control submittals, and no approval will
< 2%. be given for the fume hood control system until
Time to Steady State10 (TSS10 expressed in documentation of successful demonstration of
seconds): < 1.6 seconds. the performance requirements is submitted.
Time to Steady State5 (TSS5 expressed in
seconds): < 2 seconds. D. Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems by
Farhad Memarzadeh, Ph.D., P.E., of the National
Response Time Constant (RTC expressed Institutes of Health
in seconds): < 0.5 seconds.
1. Voltage Sag Concerns: Despite the main advan-
Steady State Deviation (SSD expressed in tages provided by VSDs, the concern for nui-
%): < 5% assessed using calculated face sance tripping during voltage sag conditions
velocities. remains. This power quality concern involves
Controllability (expressed in mV/mm): the control sensitivity to short-duration voltage
> 12 mV/25.4 mm. sags and momentary interruptions. Actually,
Test Execution: Testing agency shall be many different kinds of controls, and even
equipped to execute the testing and assess motor contractors, are sensitive to these voltage
all performance parameters on-site the day sags. Voltage sags caused by faults on the power
of the test. Data acquisition of required system represent one of the most important
parameters shall be simultaneous. problems that can be experienced by the NIH
with sensitive loads. Whenever there is a fault
Test Documentation: All testing, cal- on the transmission or distribution system serv-
culated, and recorded parameters shall ing the NIH facility (faults cannot be completely
be presented in a report that shows the avoided regardless of the system design), there
recorded parameters graphically and will be either a voltage sag or an interruption. If
tabulates and summarizes all the results. the fault occurs on a parallel-distribution feeder
Performance of the hood, the hood con- circuit or on the transmission system, there will
trols, and the laboratory in general shall be a voltage sag that lasts until the fault is cleared
be described and summarized. by some protective device (typically 330 cycles
Note: Fume Hood Control Testing (Off- depending on the fault location). A method of
Site-Mockup) must be included only in the predicting the likelihood of faults in a certain
control manufacturers specifications. region along with knowledge of equipment sen-
sitivity can be used to determine an area of vul-
4. Fume Hood Control Testing (Off-Site-Mockup): nerability. A combination of computer short-
The manufacturer of the proposed fume hood circuit simulations and lightning performance
control system shall mock up a fume hood analysis shall be used to determine the affected
installation and demonstrate the performance
area. The VSD controls shall be designed to protection devices) then see this magnified volt-
handle these voltage sag conditions without trip- age (compared to distribution feeder voltage).
ping. The specifications contain no-ride-through When the resonant-frequency current completes
capability. This is an important consideration its path to ground through the capacitor, the
when VSDs are applied in critical processes voltage experiences a boost to the ground-
such as that of the NIH, where nuisance tripping reference voltage. The magnification of capaci-
can cause significant problems. The A/E shall tor-switching transients is most severe when the
evaluate the level of sensitivity of the controls following condition exists: The capacitor switch
to voltage sags. If such concern exists, applying on the higher voltage system is much larger
power conditioning to the controls themselves (kVAR) than the capacitor at the low-voltage
will be considered. Feroresonant transformers bus. Generally, this situation occurs most fre-
can handle voltage sags down to approximately quently for substation switching. The frequency
60 percent of the nominal voltage. This is suf- of oscillation that occurs when the high-voltage
ficient to handle virtually all voltage sags caused capacitor is energized is close to the resonant
by single line-to-ground faults on the power frequency formed by the stepdown transformer
system. If additional protection is needed, the in series with the low-voltage capacitor. There is
controls can be protected with an UPS system, little resistive load on the low-voltage system to
which can handle complete interruptions in the provide dampening of the transient, as is usu-
input signal. ally the case for industrial plants (motors do not
provide significant damping of these transients).
2. Transient Overvoltage Concerns: Transient It is not uncommon for magnified transients at
overvoltage occurs in connection with capacitor low-voltage capacitors to range from 3.0 to 4.0
switching. Each time a capacitor is energized, V per unit. These transients have significant
a transient voltage oscillation occurs between energy associated with them and are likely to
the capacitor and power system inductance. cause failure of protective devices, metal oxide
The result is a transient overvoltage that can be varistors (MOVs), electronic components (sili-
as high as 2.0 V per unit (of the normal volt- con-controlled rectifiers, etc.), and capacitors.
age) at the capacitor location. The magnitude is VSDs are particularly susceptible to these tran-
usually less than 2.0 V per unit as a result of sients because of the relatively low peak-inverse
dampening provided by system loads and losses. voltage ratings of the semiconductor switches
The transient overvoltage caused by capacitor and the low-energy ratings of the MOVs used to
energizing is generally not a concern to PEPCO protect the VSD power electronics. The follow-
because its magnitude is usually below the level ing shall be evaluated and identified in the speci-
at which surge-protective devices operate (1.5 to fications to control these magnified transient
2.0 V per unit). However, these transients can overvoltages: using vacuum switches with syn-
be magnified at the NIH facility if the NIH has chronous closing controls to energize the capaci-
low-voltage capacitor banks for (displacement) tor bank and control the capacitor-switching
power factor correction. The A/E shall check transient; providing high-energy MOV protec-
for this matter. When the frequency of a tran- tion on the 480 V buses (the energy capability
sient overvoltage matches the series-resonant of these arresters shall be at least 1 kJ); or using
frequency of the NIH transformer coupled with tuned filters for power factor correction instead
PEPCO capacitor(s) at the East Substation, a of just shunt capacitor banks (the tuned filters
low-impedance, high-current (at the resonant change the frequency response of the circuit and
frequency) condition results. As this large cur- usually prevent magnification problems; this
rent passes through the NIH transformer, it solution combines power factor correction, har-
induces a large voltage drop that passes monic control, and transient control).
through zero voltage to create a large volt-
age of opposite sign (because of a phase-angle 3. Electromagnetic Interference and Radio
change) at the resonant frequency. The VSD and Frequency Interference Concerns: IEEE Standard
the NIH paralleled capacitor (and their surge 519, Recommended Practices and Requirements
for Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems, frequencies may experience noisy interference or
recommends limits for voltage distortion and har- malfunctions when subject to EM/RF energy. The
monic current resulting from non-linear loads. specification shall clearly outline the corrective
However, the IEEE standard is not intended to measures required. The first and foremost correc-
cover the effects of radio frequency interference tive measure to avoid problems associated with
(RFI). As a result, specifications will occasionally EMI is proper routing of the drive conductors in
refer to Federal Communications Commission separate metallic conduits (even separate race-
(FCC) Rules and Regulations, Volume 2, Part 15, ways if practical) as remote as possible from any
Subpart J, Class A (referred to as FCC rule) to other conductors or suspect equipment. Usually,
establish limits on electromagnetic emission for this will be sufficient to avoid EMI problems.
VSDs. The FCC rule was printed in October 1982 EM/RF filters can be engineered for a system
primarily for computing devices. Computers gen- to trap or inhibit high-frequency emissions into
erate RF energy and possibly cause interference power system conductors. However, because of
with nearby equipment if misapplied. Generally, the nature of EMI, the effectiveness of any filter is
the rule sets conducted and radiation RF limits highly sensitive to where it is installed. Further, it
for electronic devices using timing signals or is not certain that the filter will correct the prob-
digital techniques with pulse rates in excess of lem even though it may meet FCC limits. Most
10,000 pulses per second. Technically speak- manufacturers will include this footnote with
ing, VSDs with high-frequency timing circuits their literature: Filters are expensive and usu-
conform to this description, although they are ally require additional space. It is recommended
not intended as a computing device described in that they be furnished only when they are specifi-
the FCC rule. The primary and more significant cally required to avoid or solve a problem after
source of electromagnetic interference (EMI) exhausting all proper installation methods. In
from a VSD stems from the power circuits, and, addition, filters are an additional component and
in this respect, drives become an incidental radia- must be considered in the overall reliability of a
tion device. The only requirement for incidental power system. To contain RF radiation through
radiation devices in the FCC rule is that they shall the media from the VSD, complete shielding
be operated so that the RF energy emitted does using a metallic enclosure generally is required.
not cause harmful interference. If so, the opera- This will usually contain most of the radiated RF
tor must eliminate the interference. All VSDs, to a reasonable distance.
regardless of the manufacturer, will produce elec-
tromagnetic emission to some degree. Primarily, E. Calculation Protocols for Canopy Hoods over
these emissions are due to the steep wave fronts Autoclaves: NIH Local Exhaust Ventilation (LEV) Test
and very rapid switching of power semiconduc- Protocol by Farhad Memarzadeh, Ph.D., P.E., of the
tors in the VSD. Typically this occurs when tran- National Institutes of Health
sistors, GTOs, or other fast devices are gated Volumetric airflow (Q) in CFM of an LEV is deter-
on and off in DC chopper circuits and inverter mined by: Q = V x A
power circuits for PWM, current source, and six-
step drives. Typically, conductors to the VSDs Where: V = Average air velocity at hoods face, point of
and motor act as an antenna and radiate the RF measurement (ft/min)
energy into the media. Therefore, it is possible for
RF to be induced into nearby antennas and other A = Area of Hoods face monitored (ft2)
conductors and be carried to the loads in that cir- It is required by NIH testing protocols that the calculated
cuit. Holding a portable AM radio near a power velocity at the point of work is 50 ft/min (minimum).
outlet in close proximity to an EMI source can
be evidence of this situation. Distributive digital Capture velocity is the calculated air velocity required
control (DDC) systems, medical alarms system at the point of steam release and necessary for receiving
and equipment, telecommunication services, and potentially contaminated air into the hood. This is not a
other electronic equipment utilizing very high measured value. Capture velocity can be calculated by:
V = Q/1.4 PD
Where:
and ability to control multiple motor systems VFDs should be properly specified and installed to
with a single drive. avoid generation of excessive electrical noise and har-
monics as well as damage to their electronics. This
2. Current source inverter (CSI) designs are quite includes proper grounding, mounting, connection, volt-
reliable due to their inherent current-limiting age, and cooling. The specification of the VFDs should
characteristics and simple circuitry. CSIs have as the minimum include the following:
regenerative power capabilities, meaning that
CSI drives can reverse the power flow back from 1. What level of reliability is required of the VFD
the motor through the drive. However, CSIs system?
reflect large amounts of power harmonics
back to the source, have poor input power fac- 2. What operational overloads and starting condi-
tors, and produce jerky motor operations (cog- tions are required by the application?
ging) at very low speeds. CSIs are typically used Typical requirements may be: Variable torque =
for large (over 300 HP) induction and synchro- 115% for 1 minute, Constant torque = 150% for
nous motors. 1 minute
3. Voltage source inverter (VSI) designs are similar 3. How will control commands for the VFD be
to CSI designs, but VSIs generate variable-fre- generated by the process?
quency outputs to motors by regulating voltage
rather than current. Harmonics, power factor, Manual/potentiometer
and cogging at low frequencies can be problems. Analog current loop 4-20 mA
The best applications for VFDs are large motors that Serial communication (RS232, RS485, etc.)
can operate for many hours each year at reduced speeds. Isolated or non-isolated
Some opportunities common in facilities include the Process feedback (pressure, temperature, flow,
following: etc.)
1. Variable-air-volume HVAC fans. Air flow in 4. What characteristic surges, sags or momentary
older VAV systems is usually controlled by open- discontinuities are present in the supply? Are
ing and closing dampers or inlet vanes. Because there any other non-linear loads on the feeder?
the systems often operate at low air flow, large KVA, Short circuit level
energy savings are possible by conversion to
VFDs. VFDs vary motor speed in order to Power factor capacitors
match fan output to varying HVAC loads. Breaker reclosing
8. What waveform does the VFD produce? Are characteristic and create harmonic voltage dis-
there any constraints on motor connection tortion. The harmonic voltages and currents can
length? cause spurious operation of PEPCO and NIH
relays and controls, capacitor failures, motor
9. Is the motor sized to provide necessary load and transformer overheating, and increased
torque while operating at reduced speed? The power system losses. These problems are usually
power capability of the motor may be restricted compounded by the application of power factor
at low speeds. Compare the motor output capa- correction capacitors (especially on the NIHs
bility with the load requirement. An additional low-voltage system), which can create resonance
cooling fan may be required for constant torque conditions that magnify the harmonic distor-
loads. (This pertains to constant torque systems, tion levels. Several concerns associated with
such as compressors, etc.) harmonic distortion levels need to be addressed
10. What heat rejection occurs in the VFD control- in the specification. This will avoid significant
ler? How are the losses removed from the equip- harmonic-related problems with both the VFD
ment? The heat generated within the VFD is equipment and the NIH operations controlled.
normally removed by air or water cooling. These concerns include the following:
Harmonic distortion on both the supply side
11. What is the range of voltage and frequency of and motor side of the drive
the electric supply which will permit full rated
output of the VFD? What happens outside the Equipment derating due to harmonic
range? What line transients can be tolerated? distortion produced by VFDs
What is the VFD input power factor? Audible noise caused by high-frequency
(several kilohertz) components in the current
12. How does the VFD operate under fault condi- and voltage
tions? For example, mechanical overload, elec-
trical short circuit in the motor circuit or a Harmonic filter design and specification
ground fault in the load system. 17. Nuisance Tripping Concerns
13. What motor protection is provided by the A three-phase VFD system consists of three
VFD equipment? What additional protection basic components (rectifier, dc link, and
is advised for comprehensive system protection, inverter) and a control system. The rectifier
e.g., overload, overspeed, reverse rotation. converts the three-phase 60 Hz ac input to a dc
signal. Depending on the system, an inductor, a
14. What information is available from the manu- capacitor, or a combination of these components
facturer for system operations and mainte- smoothes the dc signal (reduces voltage ripple)
nance? What self diagnostic tools are included in the dc link. The inverter circuit converts the
or available? Warranty offered? Training avail- dc signal into a variable-frequency ac voltage to
able? Operation and maintenance manuals? control the speed of the induction motor. Since
15. Total Power Factor (i.e., Real P.F. and Apparent for this application a Voltage-Source Inverter
P.F.). The difference between the two is caused (VSI) Drive is considered, the concerns for this
by inductance (reactive element) in transform- particular device are outlined below. These
ers, motors, etc. drives (the most common types up to 300 hp)
use a large capacitor in the dc link to provide
16. Harmonic Voltages and Currents a relatively consistent dc voltage to the inverter.
The inverter then chops this dc voltage to pro-
Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs) inject har- vide a variable-frequency ac voltage for the
monic currents into the power system due to motor. VSI drives can be purchased off the shelf
the non-linear nature of switching in electronic and employ pulse-width-modulation (PWM)
power devices. The harmonic currents combined techniques to improve the quality of the output
with the system impedance frequency response voltage waveform. However, here is a concern
regarding nuisance tripping due to capacitor drive terminals. Chokes for this application are
switching transients. Small VFDs have a VSI commercially available in sizes from 1.5% to 5%
rectifier (ac to dc) and use as PWM inverter (dc of the VFD impedance at various hp ratings. A
to ac) to supply the motor. This design requires size of 3% is sufficient to avoid nuisance tripping
a dc capacitor to smooth the dc link voltage. due to capacitor switching operations. Standard
The controls for this type of drive have protec- isolation transformers serve the same purpose.
tion for dc overvoltages and under voltages with
narrow thresholds. It is not uncommon for the 18. Voltage Sag Concerns
dc over voltage control to cause tripping of the Despite the many advantages provided by VFDs,
drive whenever the dc voltage exceeds 1.17 per the concern for nuisance tripping during volt-
unit (for this particular application 760 volts for age sag conditions remains. This power qual-
a 480 volt application). Since the dc capacitor ity concern involves the control sensitivity to
is connected alternately across each of the three short-duration voltage sags and momentary
phases, drives of this type can be extremely sen- interruptions. Actually, many different kinds of
sitive to overvoltages on the ac power side. One controls, and even motor contractors, are sensi-
event of particular concern is capacitor switching tive to these voltage sags. Therefore, voltage sags
on the PEPCO system. PEPCO voltage switch- caused by faults on the power system represent
ing transients result in a surge of current into the one of the most important problems that can be
dc link capacitor at a relatively low frequency experienced by the NIH with sensitive loads.
(300800 Hz). This current surge charges the dc Whenever there is a fault on the transmission
link capacitor, causing an over voltage to occur or distribution system serving the NIH facility
(through Ohms law). The over voltage (not nec- (faults cannot be completely avoided regardless
essarily magnified) exceeds the voltage toler- of the system design), there will be either a volt-
ance thresholds associated with the over voltage age sag or an interruption. If the fault occurs on
protection, which most likely will trip the VFD a parallel distribution feeder circuit or on the
out of service. This is called nuisance tripping transmission system, there will be a voltage sag
because the situation can occur day after day, that lasts until the fault is cleared by some pro-
often at the same time. Several methods are tective device (typically 330 cycles depending
available to ameliorate such tripping; some are on the fault location). A method of predicting
simple and some costly. Use of a harmonic filter the likelihood of faults in a certain region along
to reduce over voltages, an expensive alternative, with knowledge of equipment sensitivity can be
is effective in protecting drives from component used to determine an area of vulnerability. A
failure, but may not completely eliminate nui- combination of computer short-circuit simula-
sance tripping of small drives. The most effec- tions and lightning performance analysis should
tive (and inexpensive) way to eliminate nuisance be used to determine the affected area. The VFD
tripping of small drives is to isolate them from controls should be designed to handle these volt-
the power system with series inductor (chokes). age sag conditions without tripping. Ride thru
With a concomitant voltage drop across the capability is an important consideration when
inductor, the series inductance of the choke(s) VFDs are applied in critical processes such as
reduce(s) the current surge into the VFD, thereby NIH, where nuisance tripping can cause sig-
limiting the dc over voltage. The most important nificant problems. The designer should evaluate
issue regarding this method is that the designer the level of sensitivity of the controls to voltage
should determine the precise inductor size for sags. If such concern exists consideration should
each particular VFD; this requires a detailed be given to applying power conditioning to the
transient simulation that takes into account controls themselves. Ferroresonant transformers
capacitor size, transformer size, etc. The choke can handle voltage sags down to approximately
size must be selected carefully. If the choke has 60% of the nominal voltage. This is sufficient to
too much impedance, it can increase harmonic handle virtually all voltage sags caused by single
distortion levels and notching transients at the line-to-ground faults on the power system. If
additional protection is needed, the controls close to the resonant frequency formed by the
can be protected with an uninterruptible power step-down transformer in series with the low-
supply (UPS) system, which can handle complete voltage capacitor. There is little resistive load on
interruptions in the input signal. the low-voltage system to provide dampening of
the transient, as is usually the case for industrial
19. Transient Over voltage Concerns plants (motors do not provide significant damp-
Transient overvoltages occur in connection with ing of these transients). It is not uncommon for
capacitor switching. Each time a capacitor is magnified transients at low-voltage capacitors to
energized, a transient voltage oscillation occurs range from 3.04.0 per unit. These transients
between the capacitor and power system induc- have significant energy associated with them and
tance. The result is a transient over voltage that are likely to cause failure of protective devices,
can be as high as 2.0 per unit (of the normal metal oxide varistors (MOVs), electronic com-
voltage) at the capacitor location. The mag- ponents (silicon-controlled rectifiers, etc.), and
nitude is usually less than 2.0 per unit due to capacitors. VFDs are particularly susceptible
dampening provided by system loads and losses. to these transients because of the relatively
The transient overvoltages caused by capacitor low peak-inverse voltage ratings of the semi-
energizing are generally not a concern to PEPCO conductor switches and the low-energy ratings
because their magnitude is usually below the of the MOVs used to protect the VFD power
level at which surge protective devices operate electronics. The following should be evaluated
(1.52.0 per unit). However, these transients can and identified in the specifications to control
be magnified at the NIH facility if the NIH has these magnified transient overvoltages: By using
low-voltage capacitor banks for (displacement) vacuum switches with synchronous closing con-
power factor correction. (The designer should trol to energize the capacitor bank and control
check for this matter.) When the frequency of the capacitor switching transient. By providing
a transient over voltage matches the series- high-energy MOV protection on the 480 volt
resonant frequency of the NIHs transformer buses. (The energy capability of these arresters
coupled with the PEPCOS capacitor(s) at the should be at least 1 kJ.) By using tuned filters
East Substation, a low-impedance, high-current for power factor correction instead of just shunt
(at the resonant frequency) condition results. capacitor banks. (The tuned filters change the
As this large current passes through the NIH frequency response of the circuit and usually
transformer it induces a large voltage drop prevent magnification problems. This solution
that passes through zero voltage to create a large combines power factor correction, harmonic
voltage of opposite sign (because of a phase- control, and transient control.)
angle change) at the resonant frequency. The 20. EMI and RFI Concerns
VFD and the NIH paralleled capacitor (and
their surge protection devices) then see this mag- IEEE Std. 519, Recommended Practices And
nified voltage (compared to distribution feeder Requirements for Harmonic Control In Electric
voltage). When the resonant-frequency cur- Power Systems, recommends limits for voltage
rent completes its path to ground through the distortion and harmonic current resulting from
capacitor, the voltage experiences a boost to non-linear loads. However, the IEEE standard
the ground-reference voltage. The magnifica- is not intended to cover the effects of radio
tion of capacitor switching transients is most frequency interference. As a result, specifica-
severe when the following conditions exist: The tions will occasionally refer to FCC Rules &
capacitor switched on the higher voltage system Regulations volume 2 Part 15 Subpart J Class A
is much larger (kVAR) than the capacitor at (referred to as FCC rule) to establish limits on
the low-voltage bus. Generally, this situation electromagnetic emission for VFDs. The FCC
occurs most frequently for substation switch- rule was printed in October 1982 primarily
ing. The frequency of oscillation that occurs for computing devices. Computers will gener-
when the high-voltage capacitor is energized is ate RF energy and possibly cause interference
with nearby equipment if misapplied. Generally, system conductors. However, due to the nature
the rule sets conducted and radiation RF limits of EMI the effectiveness of any filter is highly
for electronic devices using timing signals or sensitive to where it is installed. Further, it is
digital techniques with pulse rates in excess of not assured that the filter will correct the prob-
10,000 pulses per second. Technically speak- lem even though it may meet FCC limits. Most
ing, VFDs with high frequency timing circuits manufacturers will include this footnote with
conform to this description, although they are their literature. Filters are expensive and usu-
not intended as a computing device described ally require additional space. It is recommended
in the FCC rule. The primary and more sig- that they be furnished only when they are spe-
nificant source of EMI from a VFD stems from cifically required to avoid or solve a problem
the power circuits, and in this respect, drives after exhausting all proper installation methods.
become an incidental radiation device. The only In addition, filters are an additional component
requirement for incidental radiation devices in and must be considered in the overall reliabil-
the FCC rule is that they shall be operated ity of a power system. To contain RF radiation
so that the RF energy emitted does not cause through the media from VFD, complete shield-
harmful interference - if so, the operator must ing using a metallic enclosure is required. This
eliminate the interference. All VFDs, regardless will usually contain most of the radiated RF to a
of the manufacturer, will produce electromag- reasonable distance.
netic emissions to some degree. Primarily, these
emissions are due to the steep wave fronts and 21. Ensure that the power voltage supplied to VFDs
very rapid switching of power semi-conductors is stable within plus or minus 10% to prevent
in the VFD. Typically this occurs when transis- tripping faults.
tors, GTOs or other fast devices are gated 22. Motors operating at low speeds can suffer from
on and off in dc chopper circuits, and inverter reduced cooling. For maximum motor protec-
power circuits for PWM, current source, and tion on motors to be run at low speeds, install
six-step drives. Typically conductors to the thermal sensors that interlock with the VFD con-
VFDs and motor act as an antenna, and radi- trol circuit. Standard motor protection responds
ate the RF energy into the media. Therefore only to over-current conditions.
it is possible for RF to be induced into nearby
antennas and other conductors, and be carried 23. Speed control wiring, which is often 4 mA to
to the loads in that circuit. Holding a portable 20mA or 0 VDC to 5 VDC, should be separated
AM radio near a power outlet in close proximity from other wiring to avoid erratic behavior.
to an EMI source can be evidence of this situ- Parallel runs of 115V and 24V control wiring
ation. DDC control system, telecommunication may cause problems.
services and other electronic equipment utiliz-
ing very high frequencies may experience noisy Precautions for specifying, installing and operating
interference or malfunctions when subject to VFDs are numerous. Improper installation and startup
EM/RF energy. The specification should clearly accounts for 50% of VFD failures.
outline the corrective measures required. The 1. Use the VFD startup sheet to guide the initial-
first and foremost corrective measure to avoid ization check prior to energizing the VFD for the
problems associated with EMI is proper rout- first time.
ing of the drive conductors in separate metallic
conduits, and even separate raceways, if practi- 2. Corrosive environments, humidity above 95%,
cal, and as remote as possible from any other ambient air temperatures exceeding 40C
conductors or suspect equipment. Usually, this (104F), and conditions where condensation
will be sufficient to avoid EMI problems. EM/ occurs may damage VFDs.
RF filters can be engineered for a system to trap
or inhibit high frequency emissions into power 3. If a VFD is started when the load is already spin-
ning, the VFD will try to pull the motor down
All submissions in each phase of work are required to Primary MEP equipment rooms and similar multi disci-
be given to the NIH in drawing or written form and on pline common spaces involving unique arrangement and
digital format as determined by the Project Officer (PO). access requirements associated with major equipment
At the completion of the project final drawings shall be shall be coordinated between disciplines. Work shall be
provided in CAD or BIM as specified in the SOW. prominently identified on the respective drawings. Major
equipment of other disciplines, as well as significant ser-
All documents provided by NIH to the A/E, includ- vice access paths that must be preserved or maintained
ing building backgrounds and previous project docu- clear, shall be shown in the background through use
ments, shall be used for reference and general informa- of thin lines or patterns (such as lightly hatched, cross
tion only. It is incumbent on the A/E to survey and field hatched, dashed/dotted) or otherwise clearly indicated.
verify dimensions, locations, sizes, elevations and other
pertinent information for all existing items within the Provisions for Future: Infrastructure spaces, equipment
limits of a project. areas, utilities and other applications with an intended
clear and specific need associated with planned future
At the conclusion of each design phase, or as required construction or future phasing shall be clearly noted or
in the SOW, the required number and size of hard and otherwise reserved to communicate intent and applica-
electronic copies of the plans, specifications and Basis tion of reserved space.
of Design shall be delivered to NIH, as directed by the
PO. The final submission shall be signed and sealed by Room Identification: Provide room names and num-
architects and engineers licensed by a state or territory bers on all plans (including demolition plans, life safety
of the United States. plans, reflected ceiling plans, all discipline plans). Room
numbers shall be comply with NIH room numbering
conventions and shall be approved by the PO.
Drawings
Application: Dedicated drawing sheets (plans, details, Conventions and Symbols. Drawings shall use common
schedules, etc.) shall be provided for each primary dis- industry standard conventions and symbols. Legends
cipline (Civil, Structural, Architectural, Mechanical, shall be provided to identify symbols and abbreviations.
Plumbing, Fire Protection, Electrical etc.) applicable to Line Weight: Drawings shall employ multiple line weights
the project. to improve readability. Similar line weights shall be used
Size: All drawings of the same project must be a uni- by all disciplines. Line weights shall be sufficiently dark
form standard size. to permit photocopying without loss of detail.
Backgrounds: Consistent backgrounds shall be provided Lettering: Letters and numbers on drawings shall be a
clearly showing salient features at the specific area of minimum of 3/32 tall when on full sized sheets. This
applies to concept and design development drawings as All dimensions should end in 0 or 5, unless
well as construction documents. greater tolerance is specifically required.
Reference: Column grid lines with identification shall Imperial: All dimensions shall be in feet () and
be provided on all floor plans. Other documents (such inches (). Plan tolerance should not be less than
as elevations, details, and riser diagrams) shall be pro- 1, and detail tolerance should not be less than ,
vided with similar reference information as appropriate unless greater tolerance is specifically required.
to facilitate clear and efficient document interpretation.
Specifications
Scale, North Arrow, Key Plan: All plans shall have a
Format: All construction contract specifications shall
north arrow. All drawings will be produced with metric
be created and edited using the latest version of the AIA
or imperial drawing scales, as required by the DRM
MASTERSPEC.
and as specified in the SOW. Scale of drawings shall
be as required for legibility on half-size reduced copies. AIA MASTERSPEC shall be used as the base docu-
Graphic scales shall be provided on all scaled drawings. ment for all items and systems that are adequately
All plans showing similar work (including demolition addressed in MASTERSPEC sections. The A/E shall
plans, life safety plans, reflected ceiling plans, all disci- edit all MASTERSPEC sections to ensure appropriate
pline plans) shall be at the same scale and in the same standards of quality for materials and systems, for con-
orientation. Key plans shall be provided as required to formance to the DRM, and to address specific project
show the areas of work within the context of the larger requirements. The A/E shall write new specification sec-
building or complex. tions or use another standardized specification system for
a section or item that MASTERSPEC does not cover.
CAD Standards: The National CAD/CIFM Standards
shall be followed for all CAD drawing formatting. All Each page should be numbered. Specifications should
drawings shall be created with or compatible with the be bound and include a Table of Contents to navigate to
latest version of the Autodesk building design suite soft- the individual specification sections.
ware package. Building Information Modeling (BIM)
shall be utilized for all large or complex projects, proj- Editing of Specifications: Specifications shall be edited
ects requiring coordination between disciplines, or as to reflect the specifics of the project. Each specifica-
required by the SOW. tion section must be carefully cross-referenced with the
drawings and with other sections to ensure complete-
Dimensioning: All drawings will be produced with ness and coordination. All items and references not per-
metric or imperial dimensions, as required by the DRM tinent to the project shall be omitted.
and as specified in the SOW.
Dimensions must be legible and in continuous Basis of Design (BOD) and Calculations
strings where possible. BOD: Typed, bound BOD shall be produced for the ini-
Dimensions must be tied to column lines and other tial design submission and shall be updated and resub-
fixed points where necessary to positively locate mitted at each subsequent submission. Sections shall be
items. provided for each design discipline.
Avoid duplicate dimensions. The BOD shall fully document the parameters of the
For renovation projects, use Minimum or Verify project. In conjunction with the drawings and specifi-
in Field notation for critical dimensions. Use +/- cations, the BOD is a permanent record of the build-
notation for non-critical dimensions. ing/project design. The BOD shall include discipline
Metric: All dimensions shall be in millimeters, narratives, which explain and document all important
unless there is a specific reason to use another requirements and decisions made during the design pro-
unit. On the drawings the unit symbol shall be cess. Narratives shall comply with the SOW, and shall
eliminated and an explanatory note such as All be tailored to each project. Narratives shall be suffi-
dimensions are shown in millimeters provided. ciently detailed to convey the design intent (e.g., general
description, areas served, significant features, provisions
Calculations: Manual and/or computer based calcula- Titleblock: All drawings larger than 11 x 17 shall be
tions should accompany narratives where required to on a standard NIH titleblock. All fields, including proj-
support technical analysis. Calculations are required for ect identification, date, project officer, and submission,
all primary equipment, infrastructure, and distribution shall be completed.
systems unless otherwise approved by NIH. Each set of
calculations should start with a summary sheet, which Project Cover Sheet: The NIH standard cover sheet
shows all assumptions, references applicable codes shall be used, and shall include the following:
and standards, and lists the conclusions. Calculations NIH building number
should include engineering sketches as an aid to under-
Room number(s), if applicable
standing by reviewers. The calculations for each sub-
mittal should be cumulative, so that the final submittal Submission
contains all calculations for the project. Calculations Date
submitted at early stages of the project must be revised
Work request number
later to reflect the final design. Calculations must refer
to code, paragraph of code used, standards, and text Vicinity map
books used for specific portion of calculation. Refer to Area map
drawing number where the results of the calculations
Other information: The cover sheet or following sheet(s)
have been used where applicable (e.g. number and sizes
shall contain the following:
of re-bars used in reinforced concrete members). Print-
out of summary sheets and print-outs which indicate Complete and accurate drawing index
values but do not clearly identify data utilized, inputs
Drawing Index on the Cover Sheet of each
and calculation methodology or otherwise do not pro-
discipline (for that discipline)
vide a clear record of how results were obtained are
unacceptable. Calculations shall be in the same unit Abbreviations and symbols edited and tailored to
format (metric or imperial) as other project documenta- the project
tion as specified in the SOW.
All submissions shall fully address NIH review comments made on previous submissions. Prior to submission all
appropriate updates shall be made, and all required clarification and additional information shall be provided to
resolve all open issues. I: Initial Submission, U: Updated, F: Final
Construction
Schematic Design Construction Construction
Document
Submission Requirements Design Development Document Document
Phase
15% 35% 65% 95%
100%
Civil/Site/Landscape
Basis of Design Report I U U U F
Alternate Schemes F
Vicinity Plan I F
Existing Site Plan I F
Proposed Site Plans I U U U F
Grading and drainage I U U U F
Erosion and sediment control I U U U F
Plantings, paving I U U U F
Site utilities I U U U F
Utility profiles I U U F
xcavation, waste management,
E
I U U F
etc. as required
Demolition Plan I U U U F
Details I U U F
Specifications I U U F
Architectural
Basis of Design Report I U U U F
Scope of work F
Design narrative I U U U F
Architectural program I U U U F
Tabulation of net and gross areas I U U U F
Programming questionnaires I F
Alternate schemes F
Building envelope analysis I U F
ertical transportation
V
I F
recommendations
S ustainability strategies, score
I U U U F
sheets
ajor scientific equipment and
M
I U U U F
specialty equipment description
Construction
Schematic Design Construction Construction
Document
Submission Requirements Design Development Document Document
Phase
15% 35% 65% 95%
100%
Architectural (continued)
Code Analysis I U U U F
Floor Plans I U U U F
Building Elevations I U U U F
Building Sections I U U U F
Demolition Plans I U U U F
Reflected Ceiling Plans I U U U F
Enlarged Plans I U U U F
Interior Elevations I U U U F
Wall Sections I U U U F
Details I U U F
Schedules I U U F
Specifications I U U F
Structural
Basis of Design Report I U U U F
Geotechnical data F
Calculations I U U U F
S ummary of structural systems
I F
requirements
Alternative schemes F
ibration requirements and
V
I U U U F
analysis
S ustainability strategies, score
I U U U F
sheets
Code Analysis I U U U F
Floor Plans I U U U F
Demolition Plans I U U U F
Section I U U U F
Fire-resistive Construction
I U U U F
Requirements
Details I U U F
Schedules I U U F
Specifications I U U F
Construction
Schematic Design Construction Construction
Document
Submission Requirements Design Development Document Document
Phase
15% 35% 65% 95%
100%
Mechanical
Basis of Design Report I U U U F
Design criteria I U U U F
Design conditions I U U U F
pplicable codes, standards,
A
I U U U F
regulations
ajor scientific and specialty
M
I U U U F
equipment utility requirements
Analysis on available utilities I U U U F
S ystems analysis and
I U U U F
recommendations
re-design readings to determine
P
I U U U F
current baseline
S ystem description, existing and
I U U U F
proposed
Conceptual plans/diagrams I U U U F
Redundancy requirements I U U U F
Energy recovery requirements I U U U F
alculations including room by
C
I U U U F
room calculations for HVAC
Life cycle cost analysis I U U U F
umerical analysis on
N
laboratory/animal exhaust plume I U U U F
discharges (where applicable)
Mechanical equipment cut sheets I U U U F
onstructibility, phasing and
C
I U U U F
maintainability requirements
ngineering monitoring and
E
I U U U F
controls
S ustainability strategies and score
I U U U F
sheets
Code Analysis I U U U F
Floor Plans I U U U F
Sections I U U U F
Details I U U F
Schedules I U U F
Demolition Plans I U U F
System Diagrams I U U F
Control Diagrams I U U F
Construction
Schematic Design Construction Construction
Document
Submission Requirements Design Development Document Document
Phase
15% 35% 65% 95%
100%
Mechanical (continued)
Ductwork sizing in plenums
I U U F
and shafts
Specifications I U U F
Commissioning Specifications I F
Plumbing
Basis of Design Report I U U U F
esign criteria including general
D
I U U U F
sizing
Design conditions I U U U F
pplicable codes, standards,
A
I U U U F
regulations
ajor scientific and specialty
M
I U U U F
equipment utility requirements
nalysis on incoming utilities
A
I U U U F
and environmental conditions
ydraulic analysis, flow,
H
I U U U F
pressure, water quality
S ystems analysis, material
I U U U F
selection
S ystem description, existing and
I U U U F
proposed
Conceptual plans/diagrams I U U U F
Redundancy requirements I U U U F
Energy saving requirements I U U U F
Calculations I U U U F
Life cycle cost analysis I U U U F
Plumbing cut sheets I U U U F
onstructibility, phasing and
C
I U U U F
maintainability requirements
ngineering monitoring and
E
I U U U F
controls
S ustainability strategies and score
I U U U F
sheets
Code Analysis I U U U F
Floor Plans I U U U F
Plot Plan for Outside of Building
I U U U F
Underground Distribution
Plumbing Riser Diagrams I U U U F
Construction
Schematic Design Construction Construction
Document
Submission Requirements Design Development Document Document
Phase
15% 35% 65% 95%
100%
Plumbing (continued)
Details I U U U F
Demolition Plans I U U U F
One Line Flow and Control Diagram I U U U F
Schedules I U U F
Specifications I U U F
Fire Protection
Basis of Design Report I U U U F
ydrostatic flow test and water
H
I F
supply analysis
alculation of required water
C
I U U U F
supply
Requirements for fire protection I U U U F
Requirement for fire pump I U U U F
Overall system concepts I U U U F
nalysis of conceptual design
A
I F
solutions
lternative materials/systems/
A
F
equipment
rotection analysis report for
P
F
each alternative
S izes and capacities of major
I U U U F
components
Code Analysis I U U U F
Present Conditions I F
Floor Plans I U U U F
Special Fire Suppression Systems I U U U F
Integrated Fire Alarm I U U F
Specifications I U U F
Electrical/Communications
Basis of Design Report I U U U F
Energy budget I U U U F
verall building connected load
O
I U U U F
requirements
lectrical service sizing
E
I U U U F
calculations
S izing of transformers, generator,
I U U U F
UPS etc.
Construction
Schematic Design Construction Construction
Document
Submission Requirements Design Development Document Document
Phase
15% 35% 65% 95%
100%
Electrical/Communications (continued)
Basis of Design Report (continued)
Equipment cut sheets I U U U F
S ustainability strategies, score
I U U U F
sheets
Code Analysis I U U U F
Present Conditions I U U U F
Floor Plans I U U U F
Layouts of Components Where Space
I U U F
is Critical
Lighting Plans I U U F
Riser Diagram for Normal &
I U U U F
Emergency Power Distribution
Details I U U F
Demolition plans I U U U F
Schedules I U U F
Specifications I U U F
Telecommunications
Basis of Design Report I U U U F
Site Plans I U U U F
Floor Plans I U U F
Layouts of Components Where Space
I U U F
is Critical
Riser Diagram for
I U U U F
Telecommunication Distribution
Specifications I U U F
5. HVAC Requirements
Summer 23 +/- 1C (73 +/-2F), Temperature and range vary with type of microscope; lower
a. Temperature setpoint/range
Winter 21 +/-1C (70 +/-2F) temperature and tighter range for high end microscopes
Summer 50% +/-5 RH, Winter
b. Humidity setpoint/range
30% +/-5 RH
c. Temperature control Independent
d. Air filtration 30% pre-filter and 95% supply
e. Relative pressure Negative to corridor
Laminar air flow above microscope; air velocities per program
f. Air changes per hour 6 minimum of 100% outside air
requirements
g. Exhaust air Yes
6. Piping CHW CW PW HW OTHER CO2 AIR VAC GAS WASTE STEAM FD
a. Utility No No No No No No Yes No No No No No
b. Other Chilled water for local chiller if required; specialized gases as required per program
7. Electrical
a. Power receptacles Yes General purpose NEMA 5-20R receptacles
Variable light levels (dimmable), non-fluorescent lighting may be
b. Lighting Lab standard lighting required, additional lighting controls may be required; confirm
dimmable range and requirements with facility users
c. Telephone/Communication Yes
d. Data/Computer Yes
e. Emergency power No
f. Task lighting No
g. Other Clean power for microscope and other equipment
*CF/CI: Contractor Furnish/Contractor Install; GF/GI: Government Furnish/Government Install; GF/GI: Government Furnish/Contractor Install
**Provide unusual or unique requirements and design considerations including weight, shielding, sensitivities, vibration production, services, utilities, exhaust, hazards, etc.
Attach additional information including equipment specifications and cut sheets as required.
936
***Provide dimensions appropriate for the project. See Appendix E, A-E Submission Requirements.
Appendix H
DRM Links
BI Binary Input
A/D Analog to Digital
Bit Binary Digit
A/E Architect and Engineer
BO Binary Output
ABSL Animal Biosafety Level
BOD Basis of Design
AC Alternating Current
BSC Biological Safety Cabinet
ACH Air Changes per Hour
BSL Biosafety Level
AFF Above Finish Floor
D
D&T Diagnostic and Treatment F
DC Direct Current FACS Fluorescence-Activated Cell Sorter
DDC Distributive Digital Control FCP Forest Conservation Plan
DDS Distribution Duct System FD Fire Department
DGR Dedicated Ground Riser FF Floor Flatness
DIL Dynamic Insertion Loss FFE Fixtures, Furniture and Equipment
DISS Diameter Index Safety System FL Floor Levelness
DNA Deoxyribonucleic Acid FBM Facility Branch Manager
DRM Design Requirements Manual FRP Fiberglass Reinforced Polyester
DVD Digital Versatile Disc FTE Full-time Equivalent
DWV Drain Waste Vent
G K
GFCI Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter KCMIL Thousand Circular Mils
GW Grease Waste
I
M
I/O Input/Output
MA Medical Air
IAQ Indoor Air Quality
MBC Modular Building Controller
IC Institute or Center
MCB Main Circuit Breaker
ICU Intensive Care Unit
MCC Motor Control Centers
IDC Initiating Device Circuits
MDF Main Distribution Frame
IDF Intermediate Distribution Frame
MEP Mechanical/Electrical/Plumbing
IEC International Electro-technical Commission
MG Medical Gas
IED Intelligent Electronic Device
MH Metal Halide
IFC Industry Foundation Classes
MLO Main Lugs Only
IMC Intermediate Metal Conduit
MOU Memorandum of Understanding
MS Mass Spectrophotometry
MW Molecular Weight P
PAQ Perceived Air Quality
PF Power Factor
N PFA Perfluoroalkloxy
NSF National Standards Format; Nuclear Storage PIV Post Indicator Valve
Facility
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
NTP Notice to Proceed
PLF Plastic Laminate-Faced
PO Project Officer
SD Storm Drainage
QSM Quality Systems Manual SER Security and Emergency Response Services
RH Relative Humidity
RO Reverse Osmosis
THW Thermoplastic Heat and Water Resistant VFD Variable Frequency Drive
Insulated Wire (UL)
VGA Video Graphics Array
THWN Thermoplastic Heat and Water Resistant
Nylon Coated VHF Very High Frequency
U
UCP Unit Control Panel W
UDF Unit Directional Flow W/ With
UFCP Urban Forest Conservation Plan WAN Wireless Area Network
UFCP Up Front Control Panel WAS Wide Area Services
UL Underwriters Laboratories WLAN Wireless Local Area Network
UPC Universal Programmable Controller WXGA Wide Extended Graphic Array
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
U/S Ultrasonic X
UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair
XGA eXtended Graphics Array
UV Ultraviolet
XHHW Cross Linked High Heat Water Resistant
Insulated Wire (UL)
V
V Volt
VA Volt-ampere
VE Value Engineering
The following list of units of measure is provided for gpm gallons per minute
the benefit of the reader.
h hour
% Percent
hp horsepower
Degrees
Hz hertz
C Degrees Celsius
J Joule
F Degrees Fahrenheit
kg kilogram
K Degrees Kelvin
kHz kilohertz
Inch
kJ kilojoule
Foot
kPa kilopascal
+ Plus or Minus
kV kilovolt
< Less than or equal to
kVA kilovolt-ampere
< Less than
kW kilowatt
> Greater than or equal to
kWh kilowatt hour
> Greater than
L liter
micro
L/s liters per second
m/s micrometers per second
LPM liters per minute
A ampere
LPW lumens per watt
C Coulomb (electric charge)
lux lux (Illuminance)
cd candela
m meter
cfs cubic feet per second
m/s meters per second
cfm cubic feet per minute
m2 square meter
cm centimeter
mA milliampere
cph changes per hour
Mbs megabits per second
dB decibel
MCM thousand circular mils
dBa decibels acoustic
min minute
dBm decibel (referenced to milliwatts)
MJ megajoule
fps feet per second
MHz megahertz
fpm feet per minute
mL milliliter
ft2 square foot
mm millimeter
mHz millihertz
mol mole
mRem millirem
n nano
N Newton (force)
nm nanometer
Pa Pascal
rad radian
s second
V volt
VA volt-ampere
W Watt
NIH DRM Leased Facility Waiver Checklist Plumbing (Chapters 8 & 12)
Instructions for use: This checklist includes only those items that are waived. Every part of the NIH DRM not listed
on the table applies to all NIH projects. Where the table shows an x in the all column, the referenced paragraph
is waived for any lease project regardless of the lease duration as described in the description column. For example,
in the architectural sheet, for DRM reference D.2.3.1, lease facilities in existing buildings are not required to conform
to the thermal performance of windows, exterior doors, glazed panels and skylights. Because the description states
existing facilities, new facilities would need to conform unless a variance is approved. Existing facilities would not
need a variance when in non-conformance. In some cases the description summarizes or copies the part that is waived.
For lines in the checklist where the x is in the <=5 column, then the application is similar to that described above
except that instead of waiving the requirement for all lease projects, these are only waived as described for leases that
are 5 years or less. Likewise the <=10 column are for waivers that only apply to leases with a 10 or less year duration.
NIH DRM Leased Facility Waiver Checklist Electrical (Chapters 10 & 11)
Instructions for use: This checklist includes only those items that are waived. Every part of the NIH DRM not listed
on the table applies to all NIH projects. Where the table shows an x in the all column, the referenced paragraph
is waived for any lease project regardless of the lease duration as described in the description column. For example,
in the architectural sheet, for DRM reference, lease facilities in existing buildings are not required to conform to the
thermal performance of windows, exterior doors, glazed panels and skylights. Because the description states existing
facilities, new facilities would need to conform unless a variance is approved. Existing facilities would not need a
variance when in non-conformance. In some cases the description summarizes or copies the part that is waived. For
lines in the checklist where the x is in the <=5 column, then the application is similar to that described above except
that instead of waiving the requirement for all lease projects, these are only waived as described for leases that are 5
years or less. Likewise the <=10 column are for waivers that only apply to leases with a 10 or less year duration.
0
VR#_____
DIVISION OF TECHNICAL RESOURCES (DTR)
NIH DESIGN REQUIREMENTS PROJECT SPECIFIC
From:
Detail Number: Project Officer Email
Describe Variance. State specifically how it deviates from the guidelines, how it improves the existing condition and the
advantage to implementing. Provide hard copy supporting documents as necessary to variance coordinator:
Provide recommendation of discipline or disciplines to review variance; i.e. mechanical, electrical, architect, civil,
structural, fire protection or other:
DTR Routing:
DTR Response:
DOC ID: DTR-FRM-IMS-100 REV. 01 EFF. DATE: 05/01/13 APPROVAL: MGMT. REP. ON FILE
BSL-3, ABSL-3
Non-Lab BSL-2 and ABSL-2
Group Description Sealants Sealants Sealants Comments
Seal around all door bumpers N/S N/S JS-3 Brackets/fasteners shall be installed tight to wall.
Seal top of trim strip and sheet flooring
N/S N/S JS-3
at wall
Walls/
Floors/ Seal top of cove base N/S JS-1 JS-1
Ceilings
Integral base required in BSL-3, ABSL-3 and
Seal bottom of cove base N/S JS-1 N/A
ABSL-2
Seal all ceiling access panels (whether or
N/S N/S JS-3
not 100% gasketed)
Seal the perimeter of all suspended
acoustical or FRP ceiling frames at the N/S JS-3 JS-3
wall juncture
Sealant shall be sloped to promote cleaning. Seal
Seal all interior window frames (including
N/S JS-2 JS-2 all joints, including stops, juncture to glass and
gasketed areas)
screw heads
BSL-3, ABSL-3
Non-Lab BSL-2 and ABSL-2
Group Description Sealants Sealants Sealants Comments
This applies to exposed mounted brackets. The
use of sealant at these brackets is as follows: 1)
If the bracket or wall mounted fixture is easily
Seal around wall and ceiling, surface-
removable, then sealant is not required, 2) If
mounted cover plates and surface-mounted N/S JS-1 or 3** JS-1 or 3**
the brackets are permanently affixed to wall,
mounting plates
then joints shall be sealed. Each bracket shall be
examined for requirement of sealant on a case by
case basis.
This applies to exposed mounted brackets. The
use of seal at these brackets is as follows: 1) If the
bracket or floor mounted fixture is easily remov-
Seal all around floor surface-mounted
N/S JS-1 JS-1 able, then sealant is not required, 2) If the brack-
mounting plates
ets are permanently affixed to floor, then joints
shall be sealed. Each bracket shall be examined
Walls/ for requirement of seal on a case by case basis.
Floors/
Seal all around floor surface-mounted
Ceilings N/S JS-1 JS-1
cover plates
(continued) Animal Research Facilities CMU walls shall be
Seal and cap the tops of all CMU walls N/A N/A N/S capped with cap block. Seal penetrations of cap
block with JS-3
Seal control joints in walls N/S JS-1 JS-1
BSL-3, ABSL-3
Non-Lab BSL-2 and ABSL-2
Group Description Sealants Sealants Sealants Comments
Panelboards in BSL-2 spaces do not require
sealing if done, recommend with gasket only.
Locating panelboards within ABSL areas shall be
Seal the perimeter of all electrical panels N/S *N/S JS-3 avoided and shall never be placed in actual BSL-3
space. If required within ABSL space, gasketing
and sealing is required. Sealing of cover plates in
BSL-2 is not required.
Surface and recessed mounted lighting fixtures
shall have sealant applied between fixture
Seal joints between ceiling and light enclosure and ceiling surface. Recessed mounted
N/S * N/S JS-4
fixtures in hard ceilings fixtures shall have manufacturers gasketing
applied between fixture lens trim cover and
adjacent ceiling surfaces.
Applicable for ALL power, communications,
signal and control applications within ABSL-2
facilities: All device boxes shall be cast type with
external hub. Where device boxes and conduits
are recessed mounted, the box to the adjacent
wall, ceiling or floor surface shall be sealed.
Electrical All wiring shall be provided in either threaded
rigid galvanized steel (RGS), intermediate metal
(continued) conduit (IMC), or electrical metallic tubing
(EMT only when recessed and with compres-
sion fittings). Gasketed device cover plates shall
be shall be used, with an additional continuous
bead of silicone sealant between the device box
Seal perimeter of device boxes to adjacent
cover plate and the adjacent wall, ceiling or floor
drywall/CMU. Wire within conduit shall N/S * N/S JS-2
surface. Where device boxes and conduits are
be sealed also.
surface mounted, and where the device box meets
the wall, ceiling, or floor surface, a continu-
ous bead of silicone sealant shall be provided.
Non-recessed conduits are then required to
be threaded RGS on minimum 19 mm (3/4 in)
standoffs, or if also surface mounted, both sides
of the conduit shall be sealed to adjacent surfaces
with silicone caulk. Once wiring is installed, the
wiring shall be surrounded by a one inch barrier
of silicone caulking around the conductors within
the device box hub. This prevents vermin harbor-
age in and transmission through the electrical
distribution systems.
BSL-3, ABSL-3
Non-Lab BSL-2 and ABSL-2
Group Description Sealants Sealants Sealants Comments
Applicable for ALL power, communications,
signal and control applications within ABSL-3
and BSL-3 laboratory facilities: All device boxes
shall be cast type with external hub. Where device
boxes and conduits are recessed mounted, the box
to the adjacent wall, ceiling or floor surface shall
be sealed. All wiring shall be provided in either
threaded rigid galvanized steel (RGS) or interme-
diate metal conduit (IMC only when recessed).
Gasketed device cover plates shall be shall be used,
with an additional continuous bead of silicone
caulk between the device box cover plate and
the adjacent wall, ceiling or floor surface. Where
Electrical Seal perimeter of device boxes to adjacent device boxes and conduits are surface mounted,
drywall/CMU. Wire within conduit shall N/S *N/S JS-2 and where the device box meets the wall, ceiling,
(continued) be sealed also. or floor surface, a continuous bead of silicone seal-
ant shall be provided. Non-recessed conduits are
then required to be threaded RGS on minimum
(19 mm) standoffs, or if also surface mounted,
both sides of the conduit shall be sealed to adja-
cent surfaces with silicone sealant. Once wiring
is installed, the wiring shall be surrounded by a
one inch barrier of silicone caulking around the
conductors within the device box hub. This pro-
vides for a gas-tight electrical installation allowing
decontamination of the BL3 space, and prevents
vermin harborage in the BL3 space, and prevents
vermin harborage in and transmission through the
electrical distribution systems.
Seal all fixed equipment that is within
N/S JS-1 JS-1
38 mm or less from a ceiling
All sinks shall be sealed if they contact
other surfaces, including mounting and N/S JS-1 JS-1
support brackets
Large gaps, behind the back splash shall
be filled in with foam cord and sealed in N/S JS-3 JS-3
place.
Seal all gaps and openings in secured/fixed May hinder function of equipment Review on a
N/S N/S JS-3
equipment case-by-case basis.
Seal gaps that exist between stainless steel
N/S JS-2 JS-2
sheet metal in all cage washers
Seal gaps that exist between stainless steel
Equipment N/S JS-2 JS-2
sheet metal in all tunnel washers
Seal gaps that exist between stainless steel
N/S JS-2 JS-2
sheet metal in all rack wash equipment
Some doors have hollow channel in access doors.
Seal around frames and holes inside of fire
N/S JS-2 JS-2 Seal access door frame channels and glass cover
extinguisher boxes
where no clips are present.
Seal around the metal rod hangers used
to hold the exhaust hoods where they N/S JS-1 or 2** JS-1 or 2**
penetrate the drop ceiling
Seal wall mounted heating/air conditioner
N/S JS-3 JS-3
unit casework and utility penetrations
Seal floor mounted equipment supports,
N/S JS-1 JS-1
legs and standoff supports
Seal stainless steel equipment at all joints
N/S JS-2 JS-2
and gaps
Seal toilet mounted to surface JS-2 JS-2 JS-2
Fixtures
Seal sink faucet mounted to surface JS-2 JS-2 JS-2
Seal wall hung equipment at surface
N/S JS-2 JS-2
attachment
Effective wayfinding is important to the opera- In addition to signage, visual elements can be an
tion of any facility, and enables the safe and effective way of differentiating areas of building
and providing a sense of organization and iden- Signage specifications shall be developed and
tification in a complex facility. Wall and trim approved during early design phases, and shall
color, floor material, furniture and other ele- be further developed and detailed as the design
ments can be effective methods of identifying progresses.
floor, departments or suites.
The signage systems should be capable of easily
Signage logo selection is another very effective accommodating future spatial and personnel
method of identifying building areas. An exam- changes. The selected signage style shall compli-
ple of this application is the selection of a par- ment the interior space and enhance the depart-
ticular design logo for the main office identifica- ments interior design scheme.
tion sign. The same office logo that is used on
the office identification sign is repeated on every Unframed paper signs shall only be considered
interior space at a smaller scale. All NIH logos for temporary and emergency use situations.
shall comply with NIH Policy Manual 1186 3. Signage Material
Use of NIH Names and Logos.
Materials shall be selected based on aesthet-
E. Signage System ics, durability and readability, and may include
1. Signage Plan wood, vinyl, acrylic, stainless steel and a variety
of other metals. Signage material may be compli-
A signage plan shall be developed for every new mented by illumination features as well as mate-
facility and large addition or renovation project. rial and color combinations.
The signage plan shall include:
4. LED and LCD signs
A narrative and graphic description of the
overall wayfinding strategy for the facility Light emitting diode (LED) and liquid crystal
display (LCD) signage provide a unique category
Key travel paths of signage material options. These signs are typi-
The location of every sign and directory in cally used for displaying messages, and are used
the facility in lobbies and other prominent locations.
The type of sign at each location LED and LCD signage can incorporate graph-
Mounting height and details ics, text, maps and interactive technology. They
Graphics, text and other pertinent are flexible and programmable. Text and graph-
information ics information displays may be changed with a
computer interface. LED and LCD signs can be
The signage system should be consistent and used to provide weather information, announce-
flexible, and shall be designed to be expandable ments notifications and other useful and helpful
and to accommodate changes and updating. information.
2. Construction Documents 5. Text style and size
The project Scope of Work (SOW) and the Text style and size are important considerations
Project Officer (PO) shall determine whether sig- which can impact the legibility and character of
nage is a task within base construction project signage. Consider clarity and consistency when
or a separate contract. Regardless of contracting selecting text style and size. The text must be in
method, the signage contract documents shall accordance with the ADAAG/ABA.
provide detailed drawings of every sign type,
a plan showing every sign location, drawings 6. Braille
of typical mounting heights and details, and a
scheduled listing the text, font, size, type and all All interior navigation and room identification
other pertinent information for each sign. signs shall have both visual and tactile text char-
acters. Provide either one sign with visual and
The face of the exit sign shall have an intensity The major components used in the wayfinding
of not less than 5 foot-candles. program consist of maps and written directions,
verbal communication from hospitality staff,
I. Room Numbering Guidelines visual cues such as prominent art displays and
Reference the NIH Room Numbering Guidelines landmarks and standard, consistent signs and
for the room number selection guideline. Office messaging.
of Research Facilities Division of Facilities 3. Maps
Planning (ORF DFP) determines the room num-
bering system for the identification of all spaces. For the cognitively focused wayfinders, maps
This room numbering system shall be incor- and signs work well. Maps are prominently dis-
porated into the design, under DFP guidance, played in elevator lobbies throughout the build-
beginning in the design development phases, and ing and are also used by hospitality staff when
reviewed by DFP at the 70% submission, so that giving verbal and written directions.
all components are coordinated with the build-
ings final room numbers. 4. Landmarks and Artwork
This section outlines a method to assure that water flow meters, and other critical controls is required and
quality can be verified to meet the requirements of the shall be validated through on-site tests, including moni-
program. Other methods may be appropriate as deter- toring of both near (immediately after proportioner/
mined by a risk assessment, performed by responsible injector) and remote (end of system) points to ensure
program staff working with professionals experienced minimum and maximum disinfectant levels are within
with design, installation, and operation and testing of required criteria to be effective, not pose injury, or dis-
such systems and facility personnel responsible to oper- courage drinking water consumption. Where ORP moni-
ate and maintain them. tors, chemical sensors, dosage meters, and chlorine diox-
ide analyzers are used, set points shall be verified through
Prior to use, each high purity water and animal drink- on-site, post-installation confirmation. An EPA or ASTM
ing water system shall be thoroughly flushed, commis- method shall be utilized to validate initial residual disin-
sioned, and sanitized/disinfected with approved materi- fectant additive injection calibrations. A portable-type
als compatible with the system construction. Delivered DPD photometer shall be used for chlorine. pH moni-
water quality shall be comprehensively tested by quali- tors shall be maintained calibrated in accordance with
fied labs. The A/E shall specify the initial water quality a NIST-traceable thermometer. The use of calibrated
tests to occur as part of the facility commissioning or photometers (vs. handheld comparators) shall be used for
system acceptance phases. Water quality results shall initial set-up to ensure accuracy, except where other EPA/
be reviewed, forwarded to the PO, and be determined ASTM validated methods are utilized.
acceptable prior to use.
D. Systems Flushing: Individual equipment, piping
A. System Responsibility: The point of acceptance of lines, and all outlets shall be thoroughly flushed prior
systems (program responsibility) shall be discussed to final occupancy, use, sanitization, or connection of
with the PO, detailed in specifications, and coordinated lab equipment to remove and prevent reintroduction
to ensure that effective control of the system is main- of particles and stabilize water quality. Proper startup
tained at all times by a responsible party; but shall not of individual components, including flushing of par-
occur prior to complete verification, testing, sanitiza- ticle fines, conditioning and backwashing of media
tion, commissioning, submittal and subsequent accep- beds, soak period for carbon beds etc. shall be per-
tance of compliant test data by ORF and the program formed. All treatment beds (including carbon and soft-
management. eners) shall be properly wetted, rinsed clear through the
dump valve to clear particle fines, shedding, and other
B. Visual Inspection and Adjustment: The inspection contamination prior to connection to the distribution
and commissioning process shall confirm required back- system. Media beds shall be properly conditioned by
flow control provisions have been met and that there are thoroughly flushing to drain off multiple bed volumes
no cross-connections between systems. Correct system per manufacturers startup recommendations at suffi-
arrangement shall be verified, including confirmation cient flow rate to provide appropriate media distribu-
of conformance with requirements as outlined in the tion. Wetting and flushing procedures shall occur prior
DRM. All treatment components, system controls and to distribution system sanitization. Upon the comple-
devices shall be adjusted and instrumentation verified, tion of flushing and testing, required post-treatment
including monitor settings, readouts, alarm functions, filter elements shall be installed and each system shall
and integrated systems tests (including response to be sanitized and then maintained in operational status.
power failures). Items requiring field calibration shall
be calibrated to NIST traceable standards. Offline test- E. Microbial Protection Required: Once systems are
ing shall not be relied upon exclusively for instrument wetted, sufficient microbial control shall be maintained
calibration. Comply with individual instrument manu- without lapse. If disinfectant residual is not constantly
facturer requirements to maintain traceability of cali- maintained (e.g., high purity water); systems shall be
brations to reference standards. drained, blown dry with filtered, clean nitrogen or
argon, and maintained in dry state until properly sani-
C. Animal Drinking Water Chemical Injection: tized and systems are fully operational; or appropriately
Adjustment, verification, and monitoring for correct set timed to avoid such conditions.
points and operation of proportioners/injection systems,
Conventional animal drinking water systems (e.g., sys- the same day upon achieving required contact duration.
tems that will operate with residual disinfectant) may The sanitization and rinse process shall be sufficient to
be maintained with potable, chlorinated water, pro- ensure complete coverage of wetted system contact mate-
vided the water is completely flushed and turned over rials, including the entire inside of product water storage
on a regular basis, not exceeding one complete flushing tanks, pockets where air may be trapped, any dead-legs,
and fresh water exchange of all piping and components and cycling of distribution system valves through both
every 24 hours. New high purity water and animal sanitization and rinse process. Where sufficient spray
drinking water systems shall not be accepted with pres- balls are present, the spray ball may be used.
ence of established or deep-rooted biofilms, regardless
of achievement of a subsequent successful water test. Confirmation of as-constructed materials compatibil-
ity shall occur prior to introducing chemicals. For high
purity water systems, initial disinfection shall be with
Rationale: Sloughing of biofilms can result in hydrogen peroxide/peracetic acid high purity water sys-
on-going microbial problems, particle issues, tems sanitant. Hydrogen peroxide/peracetic acid shall
and general poor water quality once allowed to not be used on any portion of copper systems. NSF-60
establish. chlorine dioxide or hydrogen peroxide/peracetic acid
may be used with stainless steel ADW. NSF-60 chlo-
rine disinfection may be used for ADW systems only,
F. Sanitization and Disinfection: Significant risks of and provided they are not constructed of stainless steel.
pathogenic outbreaks and reduction of water quality Regardless of materials of construction, disinfection/
can occur with partial removal of established biofilms. sanitization processes shall be specified to be carried
Prior to any sanitization of existing systems, consulta- out in conformance with piping and chemical manufac-
tion with the program to determine and mitigate risks turer requirements to prevent damage.
(especially for ADW systems) is required.
The chemical sanitization process (or disinfection pro-
cess in the case of ADW systems) can pose significant Rationale: Though chlorine at concentrations
hazards if not safely planned. Fumes associated with of ~50 ppm can technically be used with 316
chemical spills (or even normal process odors) can result stainless steel under appropriate conditions,
in sudden risk to ARF and lab operations. Chemical duration, and frequency limitations (following
usage shall be undertaken only by experienced, respon- recommendations of the Nickel Institute), the
sible personnel, working in teams of not less than two potential of misapplication and damage to
qualified persons, with an appropriate safety plan; and systems resulting in subsequent corrosion and
after discussions with responsible facility program per- loss of material surface conditions resulting from
sonnel, including discussion of most significant hazards improper workmanship does not justify the risk
and the steps required to safely mitigate risks. In occu- with other suitable, and potentially more effective
pied facilities, chemical sanitization procedures shall be materials available.
specified to occur only after notification and approval
of timing by the PO, such that appropriate facility rep- G. Disconnection of Equipment: Racks/Cages and
resentatives are made aware of safety issues and risks. associated disconnect hoses shall not be connected
At no time during the sanitization process, from the during the system sanitization process. In the case
time chemical is placed in the system until the time it of high purity water systems, polishers and other lab
is fully flushed form all outlets, may the system be left equipment typically must be disconnected (except
unattended by chemical handling personnel. with ozone, refer to DRM Section 12.1, High Purity
Water Systems). Individual components (e.g., cage
In the case of occupied facilities, outlets shall be labeled rack manifolds and water polishers) must typically be
or otherwise protected to prevent use until safe use individually sanitized and rinsed to prevent damage
conditions are restored. Chemicals shall be utilized at to equipment or accidental use, however this should
required concentrations throughout the system, but for be evaluated for each application with the program.
a minimal time required to achieve effective results, and Racks and equipment shall not be reconnected prior to
shall then be immediately flushed from the system within complete verification of safe water quality.
H. Rinsing and Validation of Removal of Sanitant: analysis, and shall be specifically experienced with
Sufficient personnel shall be present to ensure the rinse ultrapure water testing and so recognized within the
process can occur in a continuous manner to protect scope of their accreditation. For ADW systems, NELAP
distribution systems from damage associated with (National Environmental Lab Accreditation Program)
extended contact with chemicals. All use points of ADW accreditation is additionally acceptable and with the
systems shall be checked to confirm complete rinsing of exception of special systems operating at ultra-pure
sanitant, as well as representative points as applicable water quality levels, need only be certified for environ-
to the configuration and sanitization approach for each mental/drinking water testing.
high purity water system. Flushing is required from each
outlet of both HPW and ADW systems. Water analysis Rationale: Only qualified and experienced
testing shall not be conducted until sanitant has been ultrapure water test labs should conduct the
effectively flushed and system is in normal, stabilized, high purity system side analysis as there can
DRM compliant operating status. be significant issues that impact the validity of
I. Water Sampling: Samples shall be drawn and col- the results as compared to techniques that may
lected by representatives of the water testing laboratory, be more traditionally utilized in lower grade
properly trained, independent personnel, or other NIH- waters. Not all labs may perform all tests. The
authorized personnel independent of the construction A/E should therefore be diligent in specification
contractor and system vendor. Industry standards (e.g., of testing requirements to ensure required scope
EPA Standard Methods and test lab protocols for high and competency of labs and sampling personnel
purity water or specific system water quality) shall be is addressed.
strictly followed for proper handling of samples, use of
proper, uncontaminated test containers, sample tech- K. Validation Procedures: Procedures for validating
nique, preservations, refrigeration, protection from freez- each water system shall be specifically suited to the
ing, proper shipment etc. and these requirements shall be intended water quality requirements, utilizing appro-
strictly followed and conducted under controlled condi- priate scientifically validated analytical methods and
tions to prevent sample contamination. Accurate chain instrumentation sensitivity. Where available for the
of custody logs shall be maintained. Samples to demon- required test parameter, tests shall follow appropriate
strate TOC and microbial status shall be taken the same industry standards (ASTM, ISO, etc.) Analysis of ADW
day and analyzed by the laboratory no later than the day may follow EPA Standard Methods (SM).
after sampling. Sampling for resistivity, ions, and metals
shall be taken the same day as other sample types for the L. Sampling Points: Sampling and analysis shall be con-
same system, and analyzed within 7 days of sampling. ducted from sufficient points to reliably represent the
Draws from normal use points (lab faucets) and samples quality of water supply delivered from any point in the
valves should follow test laboratory requirements for system.
sampling applicable to the type of device. If alcohol is uti-
lized, a sufficient rinse is required prior to microbial sam- M. Renovations: For renovations where there are no
pling. TOC samples must be taken prior to any alcohol changes in the production system and no modification
wipe. At least 2 samples shall be taken per point for any of treatment components, testing may be conducted at
analysis. A temperature indicator blank shall be provided the first and last point of use that may be affected by the
by the test lab, properly maintained with the samples and renovation as determined appropriate and acceptable to
included with each package for samples sensitive to tem- the NIH and as necessary to provide reasonable assur-
perature (e.g., TOC and microbial). ance of water quality. For high purity water in such
cases, offline TOC, offline conductivity, and microbial
J. Test Labs: Lab analysis shall be conducted by a pre- plate count is adequate unless serving special systems
approved accredited laboratory. For high purity water (e.g., USP/WFI). For ADW systems, microbial testing
systems, the lab shall be accredited in accordance with will typically be required along with additional test-
ISO 17025 by a signatory to the ILAC mutual recogni- ing as appropriate to the specific project condition. A
tion agreement, for analysis of low level trace elements, comparative sample set taken from at least two adjacent
ions, TOC, microbial contaminants, and other required dispense points immediately adjacent to the renovation
area may be required if failing results are repeatedly Sample analysis shall be provided between major equip-
received and the cause is expected to be due to defi- ment in the production/treatment train (examples TOC,
ciency of an existing system. Observed deficiencies shall TDS, TSS, turbidity, anions/cations, trace metals, hard-
be reported. ness, free chlorine, microbial plate count, etc.) as appro-
priate to the application or determined necessary to val-
N. High Purity Water System, Specific Requirements: idate performance. An offline check of the sample point
At minimum, the following water sampling and analy- at the TOC monitor shall be made for TOC.
sis shall be conducted at the main supply sample port
(post treatment, leaving the production system but prior O. Existing Deficiencies: Where existing systems are
to the first outlet), and at the main return sampling port deficient, additional testing may be required to detect
(after the last outlet, but prior to the storage tank and unacceptable levels of gram-positive bacteria or fungi
prior to any treatment equipment): as part of remedial action, and shall be determined on
1. Offline TOC, (Required) a project-specific basis. Observed deficient conditions
should be reported to the PO.
2. Microbial, (Required)
3. Anions, Cations, Ammonia, and Trace Metals P. Analytical Water Quality Validation: Fitness for
(Required) use testing (e.g., validation of water quality specific to
research analysis) is not a requirement under system
4. Offline Conductivity, (Highly Recommended, design and construction. Fitness for use testing for ana-
but optional) lytical purposes, similar to other reagents is program
5. Carbon Dioxide/Alkalinity (Optional, or as responsibility.
required)
Q. High Purity Water Required Analytical Tests,
6. Particle Measurement (Optional to validate Additional Requirements: Comply with the following.
final filter performance, unless mandated by Where appropriately justified or recommended by the
NIH). Offline, SEM. accredited UPW test lab and approved by NIH, addi-
At minimum, the following water sampling and analysis tional or alternative validated methods of sufficient
shall be conducted at the first and last outlet of each floor sensitivity for the application may be appropriate and
of each wing of the facility, throughout each pressure shall be submitted for approval.
zone. Additional test points should be considered (and 1. TOC: Low-level TOC testing should follow
may be required) based on size and configuration of indi- ASTM D6317. Only labs experienced in con-
vidual systems. The required minimum samples shall be ducting low-level offline TOC for ultrapure
taken from a lab sink purified water dispersal tap: water with accurate test methods and instru-
ment sensitivity down to 5 ppb or better should
1. Offline TOC be utilized.
2. Microbial
2. Resistivity/Anions/Cations/Trace Metals:
3. Offline Conductivity Resistivity that cannot be taken online with
4. In lieu of Offline Conductivity, it is acceptable quality, accurate instrumentation, shall follow
to test and analyze anions/cations/metals and ASTM D1125 and ASTM D5391, with CO2
ammonia to demonstrate adequacy. removal by membrane contactor or filtered
argon sparging and compared to a reference
Additional follow-on testing (e.g., but not limited to UPW blank; or similar validated method to
anions/cations, trace metals, organics speciation liquid effectively achieve CO2 removal for an offline
chromatography/organic carbon detection (LC-OCD), sample without compromising water quality.
epifluorescence microscopy, etc.) shall be provided as Online monitoring with NIST-traceable, cali-
determined necessary for troubleshooting and analysis. brated instrumentation should be used wherever
The use of follow-on testing on a weekly basis for at possible. Where offline resistivity is utilized,
least a three week period is recommended for large sys- the results of the comparative UPW blank must
tems and is required for critical system applications. also be reported. Methods for offline resistivity
chemical treatment, added or removed disinfec- S. Trend Period: Testing shall be conducted and passed
tant, or other changes that could plausibly effect prior to system use. Unless waived by the program man-
water potability. agement, a period of verification is required. It shall con-
sist of multiple microbial tests (e.g., weekly) conducted
3. Major Production Equipment: Sampling and over at least a three week period to confirm stability
analysis at startup of major equipment in the for at least three outlet points (each at a different loca-
production train is recommended (e.g., TDS, tion) within the distribution system. Subsequent testing
TSS, TOC, turbidity, anions/cations (or offline at intervals (e.g., quarterly) should be undertaken by the
resistivity), hardness, free chlorine, etc.) as use group upon take-over of the system.
applicable and between components as required
to validate performance (e.g., softeners, RO, or T. Animal Drinking Water, Test Method Additional
any special treatment). Requirements: Comply with the following:
4. End of System Outlet or Main Return (where 1. Microbial Testing: Testing shall include analy-
present): Offline TOC is recommended for con- sis for acceptable qualitative microbial levels
ventional systems, required for systems operat- to provide a program-management acceptable
ing chemical-free. microbial profile to assure safe and reliable
water quality. Microbial testing for compliance
5. pH shall be tested and adjusted prior to with SDWA, includeing coliform and E. coli is
chlorination. required. Additional testing shall be provided
for specific microbial concerns, including spe-
6. Disinfectant residuals shall be tested and moni- cific pathogenic indicators, viruses, protozoans,
tored at multiple points in the system, including etc., unless determined unnecessary by the pro-
at least the storage tank, first outlet, midpoint gram management. Additional indicators, e.g.,
room, and endpoint. the presence of coliphages (bacteriophages) and
7. Additional tests as warranted by the treatment cyanobacteria (or associated toxins e.g., but not
process or unique site conditions shall be con- limited to microcystins) and fungi should be
ducted as appropriate to ensure water quality. considered.
National Secondary Drinking Water Regulation Cultivation methods inclusive of heterotrophic
contaminants/specific contaminant candidate plate count with low-nutrient media including
list item testing, endocrine disrupters etc. shall R2A and standard plate count agar shall be used;
be addressed to the extent required by the pro- as well as other applicable agars as recommended
gram in consideration of site supply source con- by the test lab or program microbiologist for
ditions, treatment methods, and research needs. target pathogens or completeness of the profile.
Methods shall be selected in conformance with
Rationale: A number of contaminants that may EPA Standard Methods or ASTM for the water
impact research are not regulated under primary quality and system configuration (e.g., typically
drinking water regulations (e.g., copper, silver, inclusive of potato dextrose agar, MacConkey
sodium, zinc, biochemical, microbials, toxins, agar (24 hour), Tryptic Soy agar, Eosin Methylene
etc.), but many are covered under secondary Blue agar, and Pseudomonas Isolation agar, in
regulations or on candidate contaminant lists that addition to PCA and R2A; or other justified and
are not presently regulated. Though many such program approved media). A heterotrophic plate
contaminants can be addressed by well-designed count (HPC) spread plate (SM 9215 C) 5 day
carbon and RO arrangements, review on a technique is generally required for the cultivation
program basis should occur. A variety of DBPs can unless otherwise determined sufficient by the
also be of concern and therefore should be checked test lab and approved by program management.
especially where TOC values are found to be Testing for coliphages is recommended as this can
excessively elevated and chlorination is utilized. serve as an indicator of potential viral contami-
nation. Subject to approval of program manage-
ment, systems designed to provide sufficiently
high microbial quality may utilize direct count U. Microbial Test Results: Microbial acceptance values
methods (e.g., epifluorescence microscopy) for shall be considered in conjunction with the specific test
sensitive applications or where immediate results method and through consultation with the test lab or
and quantification of viable and non-viable bac- program management. Minimum acceptable test results
teria are required in lieu of plate counts (however shall be program defined, but not less than as required
this would not typically be suitable for conven- for potable water per SDWA; with no detected coliform
tional ADW other than new RO systems soon or E. coli. Neither coliphages nor cyanobacteria should
after sanitization), as results will likely be too be detected in the samples. Detection methods utilized
numerous to count (TNTC); and may require for water testing can vary widely in accuracy and sensi-
supplementation of testing if unacceptable levels tivity, therefore results shall be analyzed based on spe-
are detected or for trending to verify microbial cific conditions and test method and discussed with the
stability and to verify absence of specific patho- accredited test laboratory and program management.
gens of concern. The presence of any detected coliform or E. coli, HPC
greater than 100 CFU/mL, or significant increases in
2. Primary/Secondary Contaminants/Drinking HPC levels during trending is typically indicative of
Water Profile: Follow EPA Standard Methods, poor microbial control and system deficiencies, and
or ASTM as applicable. should instigate further evaluations for pathogenic bac-
3. TOC Testing: Follow EPA Standard Methods, teria, viruses, identification of predominant organisms
or ASTM as appropriate to the target level/ and the immediate implementation of any necessary
water quality and test sensitivity. mitigating actions.
Total heterotrophic plate count values should not be uti-
4. Disinfection Byproducts: Test per EPA Standard lized exclusively as a pass/fail criteria, rather values must
Methods for any case where non-compliant be tracked over time with multiple samples for trends to
Disinfection Byproducts (DBPs) levels may be monitored for microbial control efficacy. Microbial
occur (e.g., chemical treatment without RO), or quality of water as detected through plate counts may
any case where residual disinfectant levels are not indicate the presence of debris from gram-negative
elevated to plausibly result in non-conformance microorganisms as many microorganisms may be pres-
of DBPs. ent in the biofilms (and not free-floating) or not replicate
5. Acceptance Values: For each parameter, not less during routine plate count methods; may not have been
than required for potable water, as stated in this collected in the sample, or may not be responsive to the
section and relevant portions of the DRM; but selected agar. Therefore even with low count values, plate
additionally compliant with any more restrictive count methods are only qualitative and require monitor-
program requirements. ing over time. They do not in themselves ensure absence
of a variety of microbes that may be of concern.
Rationale: Requirements for some research V. HPW AND ADW Systems Test Failure and
models (especially those of non-conventional Mitigation: Failure conditions shall be corrected and
health status) may be more restrictive than potable tests repeated. The condition as related to all water qual-
water requirements as established for healthy ity parameters and equipment performance (e.g., ions,
humans. Therefore, with SDWA potable water as organic, particles, and microbial) should be reviewed
the minimum standard, more rigorous acceptance when assessing test data. A deficiency in one param-
criteria may still be applicable either for program eter can often be indicative of the presence (or soon to
needs or to maintain system performance (e.g., follow presences) of other system faults. Therefore cause
in the case of TOC, microbial, or even ionic and interrelationship with other contaminants shall be
contaminants), and can be system-specific. considered in determining corrective action. If valid
Specific pathogens, e.g., Pseudomonas aeruginosa water sampling/analysis indicate failure to pass at least
and various water-borne microorganisms may potable water requirements, tests shall be repeated at
be of special concern in biomedical research multiple sample locations, in duplicate, with successful
applications. results prior to use (inclusive of any required corrective